Solicitation No. W912HV-20-B-0004
US Army Corps of Engineers Japan District ______
P1005 FY20 VERTICAL TAKE OFF AND LANDING (VTOL) PAD-SOUTH MARINE CORPS AIR STATION, IWAKUNI, JAPAN
SPECIFICATIONS
RTA Submittal
April 2020 P1005 FY20 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008 Iwakuni, Japan
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00.00 10-A ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE JAPANESE STANDARDS (AAJS) 01 11 00.00 10-B GOVERNMENT FURNISHED PROPERTY 01 22 00.00 10 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-A ENG FORM 4025-R 01 33 00-B SUBMITTAL REGISTER 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 35 26-A USACE ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN CHECKLIST 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS 01 42 15 METRIC MEASUREMENTS 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00.15 10 RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE (RMS CM) 01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-A PROJECT SIGN 01 50 00-B TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITY 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00-A FORM DD 1354 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 DEMOLITION 02 56 13 WASTE CONTAINMENT GEOMEMBRANE 02 82 13.00 10 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 50 15 CIVIL WORKS FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 56 20 AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 00 00 EARTHWORK 31 05 19 GEOTEXTILE 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 36 00 WIRE MESH GABION MATTRESSES
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 01 11.51 PAINT REMOVAL FROM AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 32 12 13 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS 32 12 15.13 ASPHALT PAVING FOR AIRFIELDS 32 13 13.43 HIGH TEMPERATURE CONCRETE PAVING FOR AIRFIELDS USING LIGHTWEIGHT AND TRAPROCK AGGREGATE 32 13 14.13 CONCRETE PAVING FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER HEAVY DUTY PAVEMENTS 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 92 23 SODDING
W912HV-20-B-0004 PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
P1005 FY20 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008 Iwakuni, Japan
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 51 39 MONITORING WELLS 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
W912HV-20-B-0004 PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 11 00.00 10
GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
The word "Government" shall be read as "United States Government" whenever the word "Government" appears in this Contract, unless otherwise stated.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Initial Site Conditions Photos Key Personnel Qualifications; G
SD-07 Certificates
Monthly Progress Photos;
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Construction Completion Photos;
1.4 ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVES JAPANESE STANDARDS
Attachment 01 11 00.00 10-A provides a listing of "Acceptable Alternative Japanese Standards" which are considered acceptable alternatives to the US standards within the Contract specifications. Other portions of the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
specifications also authorize the use of specified acceptable alternative Japanese standards. Incorporation of acceptable (authorized by the Contract) Japanese construction methods, materials, and equipment is desired to ensure that the project is constructible and the facility can be maintained with local materials and supplies. The use of products not meeting the applicable US standards of the Contract or acceptable alternative Japanese standards specifically authorized by the Contract is prohibited unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Japanese standards not included in the "Acceptable Alternative Japanese Standards" list, or not referenced elsewhere in these specifications as being acceptable alternatives to US standards, may be submitted to the Contracting Officer for consideration as acceptable alternatives after award using the variation request process set forth in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. Prior to the use of such proposed additional alternative Japanese standards, written approval by the Contracting Officer is required.
1.5 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS
Attachment 01 11 00.00 10-B "Government Furnished Property" provides the items that shall be Government Furnished, Contractor Installed (GFCI).
1.6 MANDATORY U.S. TESTED PRODUCTS
The following items shall meet U.S. testing methods (e.g. UL listed, FM approved, ASTM, etc.) and shall be labeled as required. These items shall not be substituted with Japanese testing methods (e.g. JIS, JASS, etc.) for certification:
a. Fire suppression systems, including valves, alarm valves, sprinklers (pipes and fittings of Japanese manufacturer may meet the function requirements). Fire suppression systems includes wet chemical, dry chemical, mist, deluge, pre-acion, foam, and clean agent, in addition to standard sprinkler systems.
b. Fire pumps, including motors, controllers, drives, and valves.
c. Fire alarm and mass notification systems, including panels, initiating devices, notification appliances, smoke alarms (conductors and conduits of Japanese manufacturer may meet the functional requirements).
d. Engineering technician requirements for development of fire suppression systems and alarm system shop drawings, calculations, and material submittals.
e. Fire doors, smoke doors, and frames.
f. Fire dampers and smoke dampers.
g. Interior finishes with flame spread and smoke development ratings required for installation of rated assemblies.
h. Insulation with flame spread and smoke development ratings.
i. Fire proofing and fire stopping materials.
j. Plenum rated cables.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
k. Domestic water supply piping in the building and plumbing fixtures that directly dispense potable drinking water (NSF stamped and/or labeled). Japanese plumbing fixtures that do not directly dispense potable drinking water are allowed, such as urinals and water closets.
1.7 KEY PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor's Project Key personnel shall not be assigned duties to any other Contracts (excluding the project manager) without approval from the Contracting Officer. The Project Manager, Project Superintendent, CQC System Manager, and Site Safety Health Officer shall all be separate persons. The Project Superintendent may be assigned other duties as the Project Manager, CQC System Manager,. The Site Safety Health Officer shall not be assigned other duties. Within five (5) working days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Contracting Officer an organizational chart, the qualifications and background history of the proposed Key Personnel for approval. The Contracting Officer shall have the explicit right to determine acceptability (or rejection) of the proposed individuals. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible to replace said individuals upon notification by the Government should performance become inadequate during the Contract period. Key Personnel shall attend the Preconstruction conference.
1.7.1 Project Manager
The Project Manager shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience as a Project Manager on construction projects similar in size and scope to this Contract. The Project Manager shall maintain oversight of Contract proposals prepared by the Contractor staff and be authorized to negotiate Contract terms and sign Contract documents on behalf of the Contractor. The project manager does not need to be present on the site daily, but shall attend weekly progress meetings and be available on site within 24 hours upon request.
1.7.2 Project Superintendent (Supervisor)
The Project Superintendent shall be on the work site when on-site work is being performed and shall be available to the Contracting Officer or his representatives upon request. The Project Superintendent shall have overall responsibility for all operations at the job site and be authorized to make decisions, negotiate Contract terms and sign Contract documents on behalf of the Contractor. Field of expertixe are Civil, Structural, Geotechnical and Architectural. The Project Superintendent shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience as a superintendent on construction projects similar in size and scope to this Contract, and have at least one the following qualifications:
a. U.S. Registered Structural Engineer or U.S. Registered Architect or 1 Kyu Kenchikushi (1st Class Qualified Architect).
b. U.S. Registered Civil Engineer or 1 Kyu Doboku Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Civil Engineering Works Management Engineer).
c. U.S. Registered Mechanical or Electrical Engineer or 1 Kyu Kankouji Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Building Mechanical and Electrical Engineer).
d. U.S. Registered Electrical Engineer or 1 Kyu Denkikouji Sekou
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Kanrigishi (1st Class Electric Construction Management Engineer).
e. U.S. Bachelors Degree in Construction Management or 1 Kyu Kenchiku Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Building Construction Management Engineer)
g. U.S. Registered Fire Protection Engineer or Shoubou Setsubishi Koushu, Type 1-5 (Class A - Type 1-5, Fire Protection Equipment Engineer).
1.7.3 English Speaking Representative (Interpreter)
At all times during the Contract period the Contractor shall have an employee capable of fluent bilingual speech in the Japanese and English languages at the job site. The bilingual interpreter shall have the capability to receive and issue concise and technical explanation and instructions between the Government representative(s) and Contractor supervisory personnel concerning all aspects of Contract administration and construction. Within fifteen (15) days after notice of Contract award, the Contractor shall submit in writing to the Contracting Officer's Representative the qualifications and background history of the proposed interpreter for approval. The Contracting Officer's Representative shall have the explicit right to determine acceptability or rejection of the proposed individual. In addition, the Contractor shall be responsible to replace said individual upon notification by the Government should performance become inadequate during the Contract period. The interpreter shall attend the preconstruction conference.
1.7.4 Airfield Vehicles Operator Course (AVOC) Trained Representatives
Contractor shall provide three (3) english speaking AVOC trained representatives at all times while work in controlled areas is in progress. One representative will be located at the Contractor's field office, one will be located at the controlled areas, and one will be required to escort vehicles on and off controlled areas. These representatives may be assigned to other tasks. Each representative shall be required to provide their own installation approved radio for airfield communication purposes.
1.7.5 Escort
Provide one installation approved escort per eight (8) personnel working on the project site. This includes the Contractor's field office and the locations on the airfield.
1.7.6 Contractor Quality Control System Manager (CQCSM)
See Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL.
1.7.7 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
See Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
1.8 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER
a. This paragraph specifies the procedure for determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather in accordance with the Contract clause entitled "DEFAULT (FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION)". In order for the Contracting Officer to award a time extension under this clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
(1) The weather experienced at the project site during the Contract period must be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.
(2) The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor.
b. The listing below defines the monthly anticipated adverse weather days for the Contract period.
MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAYS WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK
Iwakuni
JAN 2 FEB 4 MAR 7 APR 6 MAY 6 JUN 8 JUL 6 AUG 5 SEP 6 OCT 4 NOV 4 DEC 3
The above schedule of anticipated adverse weather days shall constitute the base line for monthly (or portion thereof) weather time evaluations.
c. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice-to-Proceed (NTP) and continuing throughout the Contract, the Contractor shall record on the daily CQC report, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor's scheduled work day.
d. The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of days anticipated in paragraph (b), above, the Contracting Officer shall convert any qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a modification in accordance with the Contract clause entitled "DEFAULT (FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION)".
e. For all work under this Contract, adverse weather is defined as:
(1) Rainfall - Number of occurrences of precipitation greater than or equal to 0.10 inches (2.54mm).
(2) Snowfall - Number of occurrences of precipitation greater than or equal to 1.00 inches (25.4mm). (Not applicable to Okinawa Area)
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
(3) Cold Temperature - Number of occurrences when daily maximum temperature does not exceed the monthly mean low temperature or 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius), whichever is lower. (Not applicable to Okinawa Area)
(4) Concurrence between snowfall and cold temperature is 80 percent, i.e. 80 percent of the time snow falls, the temperature is "cold".
(5) Wind - Number of occurrences when the wind is gusting 30 knots (56 kilometers/hour) or greater.
f. The Contractor's schedule must reflect the above anticipated adverse weather delays on all weather-dependent activities.
1.9 PERMITS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Government, be responsible for obtaining any necessary licenses and permits, and for complying with any laws, codes, and regulations (including the requirements of material, prefectural, and local Government of Japan, and associated military installation) applicable to the performance of work. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of the Contractor's fault or negligence. These damages shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Government. The Contractor shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect all work and workers.
Submit a schedule of planned road closures to the Contracting Officer with the initial project schedule. Notification of specific road closures shall be in writing to the Contracting Officer not less than thirty (30) calendar days in advance of the intended closure. The road closure request shall include the planned traffic control measures as well as the general information about the closure. All road closures shall be coordinated with base officials and are subject to base requirements. No road closure shall be permitted until the Contractor receives written approval from the Contracting Officer. Full road closures is generally not permitted (at least one way traffic shall always be provided).
1.10 SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
1.10.1 Meetings
a. Post Award Orientation. A post award orientation (often referred to as a Preconstruction Conference) per FAR 42.503 shall be held. The chairperson shall be the Contracting Officer or his/her designee. The chairperson shall be responsible for providing minutes of the meeting.
b. Weekly Progress Meetings. A weekly progress meeting shall be conducted, with the day, time, and location to be determined at the Preconstruction Conference. The Contractor's Project Manager, Superintendent, Interpreter, and Quality Control Manager shall attend. Representatives from the Government may include, but are not limited to, Director of Public Works/Facilities Engineering personnel, Project's Resident Office personnel, and Project Manager. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss work completed during the previous week, work currently in progress, and work forecasted for the following week, as well as the status of any construction issues and open action items. Provide the meeting agenda for review 24 hours prior to the meeting, take notes during the meeting, and provide
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
electronic copies of the meeting minutes in English within 24 hours of the progress meeting for review.
c. Red Zone Meeting. A Red Zone meeting shall be conducted for Contracts with a value in excess of 55,000,000 JPY or those deemed sufficiently complex by the Contracting Officer to warrant one. The purpose of the Red Zone meeting is to discuss closeout requirements for the contract and to establish a timeline to get those items completed (see Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS for typical closeout requirements). The meeting is a good time for the Contractor to gain approval on format for items such as Operations and Maintenance manuals, the equipment-in-place list, the warranty plan, and any other items. The Initital Red Zone is typically scheduled when project reached 75 percent completion milestone. Provide the meeting agenda for review 24 hours prior to the meeting, take notes during the meeting, and provide electronic copies of the meeting minutes in English within 24 hours of the Red Zone meeting.
d. Safety and Quality Control Meetings. Safety and quality control meetings shall be held as needed and determined by the Contractor. See Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS and Section 01 45 00.00 10 USACE QUALITY CONTROL for specific requirements.
e. Construction Waste Management Meetings. See Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT for requirements.
1.11 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION PHOTOGRAPHS
Photographically document site conditions prior to start of construction operations. Provide monthly, and within one month of the completion of work, digital photographs, 1600 by 1200 by 24 bit true color 300 DPI minimum resolution in JPEG file format showing the sequence and progress of work. Take a minimum of 20 digital photographs each week throughout the entire project and 20 digital photographs at completion of project. Submit the Initial Site Conditions Photos, Monthly Progress Photos, and Construction Completion Photos. Indicate photographs demonstrating environmental procedures. Provide photographs for each month in a separate monthly directory and name each file to indicate its location on the view location sketch. Include a date designator in file names. Cross reference submittals in the appropriate daily report. Photographs provided are for unrestricted use by the Government.
1.11.1 Photography Aboard Marine Corps Air Station Iwakuni
Contractor shall request authorization for photography events prior to taking any photographs. For unrestricted areas, the approval process will take five (5) business days. For restricted areas the approval process will take a minimum of two (2) weeks.
1.12 BASE REGULATIONS
The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) shall become familiar with and obey all base regulations, including fire, traffic, safety, and security regulations. All Contractors shall keep within the limits of the work (and avenues of ingress and egress), and shall not enter any restricted areas unless required to do so and are cleared for such entry. The Contractor's equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.12.1 Request for Contractor's Employee Passes and Vehicle Passes
No employee or representative of the Contractor shall be admitted to the work site without a Contracting Officer's furnished authorized admittance. Prior to the start of on-site work, submit applications for base passes to the Contracting Officer for key employees (project manager, site supervisor, interpreter, etc.) for long term DBIDS passes. The Contractor, with assistance from the Resident Office, is responsible for securing sufficient passes for other workers, including subcontractor's employees and vehicles, required to access the base for the project duration. Additional personnel data shall also be furnished.
Provide all information required for background checks to meet base access requirements to be accomplished by Base Provost Marshal Office, Director of Emergency Services or Security Office. Contractor workforce must comply with all personal identity verification requirements as directed by DOD, HQDA and/or local policy. The Government reserves the right to make changes to the Contractor security requirements or processes due to a change in the Force Protection Condition (FPCON).
Upon completion of this Contract, return all employee and vehicle passes to the base, and obtain a certification of receipt. Final payment shall be withheld until all passes have been returned.
1.12.2 No Smoking Policy
Smoking is prohibited on installations except in designated smoking areas. This applies to existing buildings, buildings under construction, and buildings under renovation. Discarding tobacco materials other than into designated tobacco receptacles is considered littering and is subject to fines. The Contracting Officer shall identify designated smoking areas.
1.12.3 Munitions and Explosives of Concern (MEC)
Munitions and Explosives of Concern (MEC): Unexploded Ordnance (UXO), Material Presenting a Potential Explosive Hazard (MPPEH), Chemical Agents (CA), or Discarded Military Munitions (DMM) on jobsites shall be treated as extremely dangerous and must be reported immediately. Follow the 3Rs: RECOGNIZE, RETREAT, and REPORT. In the event MEC are discovered or uncovered, immediately stop work in that area and immediately inform the Contracting Officer's Representative. Contractor shall provide dispatch and Contracting Officer's Representative with specific location of the item. Contractor personnel shall stop work in the immediate vicinity of the discovery and maintain a minimum distance of 300 meters from the item. Contractor shall maintain flexibility in redirecting personnel and work effort in the event that items possessing an explosive hazard are discovered and construction personnel are excluded from areas during the destruction/removal process.
1.13 ORDER OF WORK
1.13.1 Schedule
Schedule all work to cause the least amount of interference with activity operations. Permission to interrupt any activity, roads, or utility services shall be requested in writing a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption. Interruptions of activities, roads, and utility services shall be allowed only when they will not cause interference with the operations of the activity. The Contractor shall
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
remove and dispose off Government property all Contractor generated debris at the end of each shift, or more frequently if required, to keep the space usable. Upon award of this Contract, the Contractor shall begin and complete all required work; ready for use and including cleanup, within the time period specified on this Contract. All work scheduled in occupied areas shall be accomplished in such a manner as to cause the least possible inconvenience to the occupants.
1.13.2 Working Hours
Normal Working Hours and Days are Monday through Saturday, 0800 hours through 1700 hours.
1.13.3 Noise and Vibration
Noise greater than 70 decibels and vibration producing work in occupied buildings shall be conducted outside core school/business hours (0700 - 1430) unless written permission is given by the Contracting Officer.
1.13.4 Work Outside of Regular Hours
If the Contractor desires to carry on work outside the regular hours, on Sundays, or holidays, a written application shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer or his representative for approval. The Contractor shall allow three working days notice to enable satisfactory arrangements to be made by the Government for inspecting the work in progress. If work is to be accomplished after daylight hours, the Contractor shall illuminate the area in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer or their representative and in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Unless directed by a Contracting Officer, work accomplished outside regular working hours shall be at no additional cost to the Government.
1.14 FIRE PREVENTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
1.14.1 General
Comply with all pertinent fire prevention provisions of the US Army Corps of Engineers Manual EM 385-1-1, NFPA 241 and shall follow the Installation fire regulations. Prior to commencement of welding or other hot work operations, obtain approval from the Installation Fire Chief.
1.14.2 Supply
No more than one day's supply of paint, paint materials, or compounds shall be allowed within the area of the building, and shall be removed from the job site after each working day. No gasoline or similar low flash point flammable liquid shall be allowed within the building area. After proper coordination with the Facility's Emergency Services (to confirm the maximum allowable quantities and location of storage), storage of additional product may be authorized.
1.14.3 Fire Extinguishers
Provide, as a minimum, the number, size, and type of fire extinguishers in accordance with the latest NFPA 10. The Contractor shall comply with the Installation Fire Chief's policies if they are more stringent than NFPA 10. Fire extinguishers shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed upon completion of the project.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.14.4 Housekeeping
Accumulations of combustible material shall be removed from the building area on a daily basis.
1.14.5 Handling of Gasoline
Gasoline shall be stored in industry standard approved safety containers. Adequate ventilation shall be provided to safely dispose of flammable vapors where flammable liquids are utilized. Gasoline powered equipment shall be refueled a minimum 20 feet away from the building area.
1.14.6 Notification of Fire
Be familiar with methods for notifying the Installation Fire Department. The Installation's fire poster shall be posted in conspicuous locations and at telephones in construction shacks.
1.15 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
The Contractor shall furnish all materials necessary for performance of the work of this contract unless otherwise specified. Materials procured shall be new and shall meet any specifications and standards listed in these specifications. If no specification for a material needed to perform this contract are stated, the material shall be new, of acceptable industrial grade and quality, equal to or better than the manufacturer's original equipment for equipment being repaired or replaced, and will be compatible with existing materials and systems. All materials provided under this contract shall be free of asbestos, lead in paint, and PCB. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to request submittal of any material being provided under this contract. The Contracting Officer shall make the final determination of the acceptability of any material used on this contract.
1.16 CORRESPONDENCE
All correspondence addressed to the Government shall be made through serialized letters furnished with one original and two copies. Serialized letters shall begin with the number S-0001 and shall be continuous without a break in numbering. Serialized letters shall include the contract title and number, date, subject, and shall be signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 11 00.00 10 Page 10 01 11 00.00 10-A ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE JAPNAESE STANDARDS (AAJS)
Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
03 20 00.00 10 Concrete Reinforcement Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A1064/A1064M JIS G 3551 1960, (R)2005 Welded steel wire and bar fabrics Reinforcing Steel ASTM A615 JIS G 3112 SD295A (D16 & 1964, (R)2010 Steel bars for concrete reinforcement, SD295A (D16 & Less) Less) Reinforcing Steel ASTM A615 JIS G 3112 SD345 (D19 & 1964, (R)2010 Steel bars for concrete reinforcement, SD345 (D19 & Larger) Larger)
03 30 00.00 10 Cast‐In‐Place Concrete Chemical Admixtures for Use in ASTM C1017/C1017M JIS A 6204 1982, (R)2011 Chemical admixtures for concrete Producing Flowing Concrete Test Method for Potential Alkali ASTM C1260 JIS A 1146 2001, (R)2007 Method of test for alkali‐silica reactivity of aggregates by mortar‐bar Reactivity of Aggregates method Test Method for Sieve Analysis of ASTM C136 JIS A 1102 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for sieve analysis of aggregates Fine and Coarse Aggregates Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic‐ ASTM C143/C143M JIS A 1101 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for slump of concrete Cement Concrete Portland Cement ASTM C150 JIS R 5210 1950, (R)2009 Portland cement Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed ASTM C172/C172M JIS A 1115 1951, (R)2014 Method of sampling fresh concrete Concrete Practice for Making and ASTM C192/C192M JIS A 1132 1963, (R)2014 Method of making and curing concrete specimens Curing Concrete Test Specimens Test Method for Air Content of ASTM C231/C231M JIS A 1128 1960, (R)2014 Method of test for air content of fresh concrete by pressure method Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method Practice for Making and Curing ASTM C31/C31M JIS A 1132 1963, (R)2014 Method of making and curing concrete specimens Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
Test Method for Compressive ASTM C39/C39M JIS A 1108 1950, (R)2006 Method of test for compressive strength of concrete Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C494/C494M JIS A 6204 1982, (R)2011 Chemical admixtures for concrete
Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation ASTM C552 JIS A 9521 1979, (R)2014 Thermal insulation materials for buildings Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal ASTM C578 JIS A 9521 1979, (R)2014 Thermal insulation materials for buildings Insulation Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular ASTM C591 JIS A 9521 1979, (R)2014 Thermal insulation materials for buildings Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation
Fly ash for use in concrete ASTM C618 JIS A 6201 1958, (R)2015 Fly ash for use in concrete Portland pozzolan cement ASTM C618 JIS R 5212 1950, (R)2009 Portland pozzolan cement Test Method for Flexural Strength of ASTM C78/C78M JIS A 1106 1950, (R)2006 Method of test for flexural strength of concrete Concrete Ready Mix Concrete ASTM C94 JIS A 5308 1953, (R)2014 Ready‐mixed concrete Slag Aggregate for Concrete ASTM C989 JIS A 5011 Part 1 Blast furnace Slag aggregate for concrete slag aggregate: 1997, (R)2013 Part 2 Ferronickel slag aggregate: 1997, (R)2016 Part 3 Copper slag aggregate): 1997, (R)2016 Part 4 Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag aggregate: 2003, (R)2013
Concrete Aggregates ASTM C33 JIS A 5005 1961, (R)2009 Crushed stone and manufactured sand for concrete Air‐Entrained Admixture for ASTM C260 JIS A 6204 1982, (R)2011 Chemical admixtures for concrete Concretre Test Methods for Water Vapor ASTM E96/E96M JIS A 9511 1958, (R)2009 Preformed cellular plastics thermal insulation materials Transmission of Materials
03 30 53 Miscellaneous Cast‐In‐Place Concrete Slag Aggregate for Concrete ASTM C989 JIS A 5011 Part 1 Blast furnace Slag aggregate for concrete slag aggregate: 1997, (R)2013 Part 2:Ferronickel slag aggregate: 1997, (R)2016 Part 3 Copper slag aggregate: 1997, (R)2016 Part 4 Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag aggregate: 2003, (R)2013
Portland Cement ASTM C150 JIS R 5210 1950, (R)2009 Portland cement Ready Mix Concrete ASTM C94 JIS A 5308 1953, (R)2014 Ready‐mixed concrete
Steel Bars for Concrete ASTM A615/A615M JIS G 3112 1964, (R)2010 Steel bars for concrete reinforcement
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 1 Last updated 3/28/2017 Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
Welded Wire Fabric ASTM A185 JIS G 3551 1960, (R)2005 Welded steel wire and bar fabrics Concrete Aggregates ASTM C33 JIS A 5005 1961, (R)2009 Crushed stone and manufactured sand for concrete Air‐Entrained Admixture for ASTM C260 JIS A 6204 1982, (R)2011 Chemical admixtures for concrete Concrete Polyethylene Sheet ASTM C171 JIS K 6781 1956, r 1994 Polyethylene films for agriculture Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic‐ ASTM C143/C143M JIS A 1101 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for slump of concrete Cement Practice for Sampling Fresh ASTM C172 JIS A 1115 1951, (R)2014 Method of sampling fresh concrete Concrete Test Method for Air Content by ASTM C173/ C173M JIS A 1118 1952, (R)2017 Method of test for air content of fresh concrete by volumetric method Volume
Test Method for Air Content by ASTM C231 JIS A 1128 1960, (R)2014 Method of test for air content of fresh concrete by pressure method Pressure Method
Practice for Making and Curing ASTM C31/C31M JIS A 1132 1963, (R)2014 Method of making and curing concrete specimens Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
Standard Test Method for ASTM C39/C39M JIS A 1108 1950, (R)2006 Method of test for compressive strength of concrete Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
04 20 00 Unit Masonry Concrete Blocks ASTM C90 JIS A 5406 1952, (R)2010 Concrete blocks for buildings Bricks ASTM C62 JIS R 1250 1951, (R)2011 Common bricks and facing bricks
05 12 00 Structural Steel Rolled Steel for General Structure ASTM A36/A36M JIS G 3101 1952, (R)2015 Rolled steels for general structure
Rolled Steel for Welded Structure ASTM A36/A36M JIS G 3106 1952, (R)2015 Rolled steels for welded structure
Hot Rolled Atmospheric Corrosion ASTM A36/A36M JIS G 3114 1968, (R)2016 Hot‐rolled atmospheric corrosion resisting steels for welded structure Resisting Steel for Welded Structure
Rolled Steel for Building Structure ASTM A36/A36M JIS G 3136 1994, (R)2012 Rolled steels for building structure
Rolled Bars for Building Structure ASTM A6/A6M JIS G 3138 1996, (R)2005 Rolled steel bars for building structure
Light Gage Steel for General ASTM C955 JIS G 3350 1957, (R)2009 Light gauge steel sections for general structure Structure Carbon Steel Tubes for General ASTM A500 JIS G 3444 1961, (R)2016 Carbon steel tubes for general structure Structural Carbon Steel Square Pipes for ASTM A53 JIS G 3466 1966, (R)2016 Carbon steel square and rectangular tubes for general structure General Bolts ASTM A307 JIS B 1180 1961, (R)2014 Hexagon head bolts and hexagon head screws
High‐Strength Bolts ASTM A325 JIS B 1186 1964, (R)2013 Sets of high strength hexagon bolt, hexagon nut and plain washers for friction grip joints Washer ASTM F436 JIS B 1256 1959, (R)2008 Plain washers
05 52 00 Metal Railings Bolts ASTM A307 JIS B 1180 1961, (R)2014 Hexagon head bolts and hexagon head screws Carbon Steel Tubes for General ASTM A500/A500M JIS G 3444 1961, (R)2016 Carbon steel tubes for general structure Structure Carbon Steel Square Pipes for ASTM A53/A53M JIS G 3466 1966, (R)2016 Carbon steel square and rectangular tubes for general structure General Structure
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Structural Plywood APA PS2 JAS No. 1637 (R)2016 Notification No. 1637 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, Japanese Agricultural Standard Plywood
Plywood for Concrete Form APA PS1 JAS No. 1637 (R)2016 Notification No. 1637 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, Japanese Agricultural Standard Plywood
Laminated Wood ANSI/AITC A190.1 JAS No. 1638 (R)2016 Notification No. 1638 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, Japanese Agricultural Standard Laminated Wood
Structural Laminated Wood ANSI/AITC A190.1 JAS No. 1638 (R)2016 Notification No. 1638 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, Japanese Agricultural Standard Laminated Wood
Softwood Finish Lumber ALSC PS 20 JAS No. 1920 (R)2013 Notification No. 1920 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, Japanese Agricultural Standard Lumber
Softwood Seathing JAS No. 1085 Notification No. 1085 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries Hardwood Lumber AHA A135.4 JAS No. 1920 (R)2013 Notification No. 1920 of the Ministry of Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, Japanese Agricultural Standard Lumber
07 21 16 Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation Mineral Fiber Block and Board ASTM C612 JIS A 9504 1952, (R)2011 Man‐made mineral fibre thermal insulation materials Thermal Insulation
07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 2 Last updated 3/28/2017 Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
Non‐Structural Metal Roofing ASTM A755/A755M JIS A6514 1977, (R)1995 Components for metal roof‐decks
07 61 14.00 20 Steel Standing Seam Roofing Formed Japanese Metal Roofing ASTM A755/A755M JIS A6514 1977, (R)1995 Components for metal roof‐decks
08 11 16 Aluminum Doors and Frames Carbon Structural Steel, Aluminum ASTM A36/A36M, JIS A4702, A4704, A4705 JIS A4702: Doorsets, Components of light‐weight rolling door for buildings, and Aluminum‐Alloy Sheet and Plate B209M 1957, (R)2015 Components of rolling door for buildings (Metric) JIS A4704: 1961, (R)2015 JIS A4705: 1963, (R)2015 Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy ASTM B221M, E283, JIS A4706, A4709, A4713 JIS A4706: Windows, Screens for windows, Residential sliding storm window Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, E331 1966, (R)2015 panel and Tubes (Metric), Standard Test JIS A4709: Method for Determining Rate of Air 1979, (R)2004 Leakage Through Exterior Windows, JIS A4713: Curtain Walls, and Doors Under 1981, (R)2004 Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
09 22 00 Supports for Plaster and Gympsum Board Nonstructural Steel Framing ASTM C645 JIS A 6517 1979, (R)2010 Steel furrings for wall and ceiling in buildings Members
09 29 00 Gypsum Board Gypsum Board ASTM C1396/C1396M JIS A 6901 1951, (R)2014 Gypsum boards
09 30 10 Ceramic, Quarry, and Glass Tiling Ceramic Tile ANSI A137.1 JIS A 5209 1957, (R)2014 Ceramic tiles
09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings Acoustical Ceiling ASTM E1264 JIS A 6301 1966, (R)2015 Sound absorbing materials Metal Ceiling Suspension System ASTM C645 JIS A 6517 1979, (R)2010 Steel furrings for wall and ceiling in buildings
09 65 00 Resilient Flooring Resilient (Vinyl Composition Floor ASTM F1066 JIS A 5705 1966, (R)2016 Polyvinyl chloride floorcoverings Tile)
09 90 00 Paints and Coatings Anti Rust Paint MPI 101, MPI 107, MPI JIS K5621, JASS 18 M‐109 JIS K5621: Anticorrosive paints for general use, Japan Architectural Standard 79 1952, (R)2008 Specification 18 M‐109 JASS 18: 1959, (R)2013 EP ‐ Exterior Latex, Semi‐Gloss, MPI MPI 11 JIS K 5663 1956, (R)2008 Synthetic resin emulsion paint & sealer Gloss Level 5 SOP ‐ Interior Latex, Semi‐Gloss, MPI MPI 54 JIS K 5516 1965, (R)2014 Ready mixed paints (Synthetic resin type) Gloss Level 5 OS ‐ Interior Oil Modified Urethane MPI 57 JASS 18 Paragraph 5.9, JIS JASS 18: Japan Architectural Standard Specification 18 Paragraph 5.9, Boiled oil Clear Satin K5421 1952, (R)2013 and boiled linseed oil JIS K5421: 1951, (R)2000 NAD ‐ Interior Alkyd, Semi‐Gloss, MPI 47 JIS K5516 1965, (R)2014 Ready mixed paints (Synthetic resin type) MPI Gloss Level 5 VP ‐ Interior Latex, Semi‐Gloss, MPI MPI 54 JIS K 5670 2003, (R)2008 Non aqueous dispersion acrylic paint Gloss Level 5
10 28 13 Toilet Accessories Mirrors ASTM C1036 JIS R 3220 1986, (R)2011 Glass in building ‐‐ Silvered, flat‐glass mirror
21 13 13.00 10 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System, Fire Protection Steel Pipe Black ASTM A53/A53M JIS G 3452/JIS G 3454 JIS G3452: Carbon steel pipes for ordinary piping/Carbon steel tubes for pressure 1962, (R)2016 service JIS G3454: 1962, (R)2012 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ASME B16.3 JIS B 2301 1950, (R)2013 Screwed type malleable cast iron pipe fittings
Steel Buttwelding Fittings ASME B16.9 JIS B 2311 1982, (R)2015 Steel butt‐welding pipe fittings for ordinary use
22 00 00 Plumbing, General Purpose
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 3 Last updated 3/28/2017 Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot‐Dipped, ASTM A53/A53M, Sch 40 JIS G 3452/JIS G 3454/JIS B JIS G3452: Carbon steel pipes for ordinary piping/Carbon steel tubes for pressure Zinc‐Coated, 2301 1962, (R)2016 service/Screwed type malleable cast iron pipe fittings Welded and Seamless JIS G3454: 1962, (R)2012 JIS B2301: 1950, (R)2013 Valves, Cast Iron MSS SP‐70 JIS B 2031 1958, (R)2015 Gray cast iron valves Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings, Hub and ASTM A74 JIS G 5525 1959, (R)2000 Cast‐iron drainage pipes and fittings Spigot Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings, Hubless CISPI 301/ASTM A888 JIS G 5525 1959, (R)2000 Cast‐iron drainage pipes and fittings
Steel Pipe, Galvanized ASTM A53/A53M JIS G 3452/JIS G 3454/JIS B JIS G3452: Carbon steel pipes for ordinary piping/Carbon steel tubes for pressure 2301 1962, (R)2016 service/Screwed type malleable cast iron pipe fittings JIS G3454: 1962, (R)2012 JIS B2301: 1950, (R)2013 Copper Pipe, Seamless ASTM B42 JIS H 3300/JIS H 3401 JIS H3300: Copper and copper alloy seamless pipes and tubes/Pipe fittings of 1977, (R)2012 copper and copper alloys JIS H3401: 1979, (R)2001 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic ASTM D2665 JIS K 6739/JIS K 6741 JIS K6739: Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipe fittings for Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and 1972, (R)2016 drain/Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes Fittings JIS K6741: 1954, (R)2016 Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) ASTM F891 JIS K 6739/JIS K 6741 JIS K6739 Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipe fittings for (PVC) Plastic Pipe with a Cellular 1972, (R)2016 drain/Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes Core JIS K6741: 1954, (R)2016 Coextruded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) ASTM F1760 JIS K 6739/JIS K 6741 JIS K6739: Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipe fittings for (PVC) Non‐Pressure Plastic Pipe 1972, (R)2016 drain/Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes Having Reprocessed‐Recycled JIS K6741: Content 1954, (R)2016
23 00 00 Air Supply, Distribution, Ventilation, and Exhaust Systems Duct, Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A653/A653M JIS G 3302 1951, (R)2012 Hot‐dip zinc‐coated steel sheet and strip
23 07 00 Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems Aluminum and Aluminum‐Alloy ASTM B209M JIS H 4000 1970, (R)2014 Aluminium and aluminium alloy sheets, strips and plates Sheet and Plate Pipe Insulation, Mineral Fiber ASTM C547 JIS A 9504 1952, (R)2011 Man made mineral fibre thermal insulation materials Duct Insulation, Mineral Fiber ASTM C553 JIS A 9504 1952, (R)2011 Man made mineral fibre thermal insulation materials
23 64 26 Chilled, Chilled‐Hot, and Condenser Water Piping Systems Steel Pipe, Black ASTM A53/A53M, Sch 40 JIS G 3452/JIS G 3454/JIS B JIS G3452: Carbon steel pipes for ordinary piping/Carbon steel tubes for pressure 2301 1962, (R)2016 service/Screwed type malleable cast iron pipe fittings JIS G3454: 1962, (R)2012 JIS B2301: 1950, (R)2013 Copper Tubing ASTM B88M, Type M JIS H 3300 1977, (R)2012 Copper and copper alloy seamless pipes and tubes Copper and Bronze Fittings ASME B16.22 JIS H 3300/JIS H 3401 JIS H3300: Copper and copper alloy seamless pipes and tubes/Pipe fittings of 1977, (R)2012 copper and copper alloys JIS H3401: 1979, (R)2001 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and MSS SP‐80 JIS B 2011 1951, (R)2013 Bronze, gate, globe, angle, and check valves Check Valves
26 12.19 10 Three‐Phase Pad‐Mounted Transformers Pad mounted transformer station ANSI C57.12.90 JIS C 4620 1968, (R)2004 Cubicle type high voltage power receiving units 3PH4W
26 20 00 Interior Distribution System Electrical Nonmetallic tubing UL 1653 JIS C 8411 class PF 1987, (R)1999 Pliable plastics conduits, class PF Panelboard UL 67 JIS C 8480 1967, (R)2016 Box‐type switchgear assemblies for low‐voltage distribution purpose
Fusible Disconnect Switch UL 98 JIS C 4606 1971, (R)2011 Indoor use disconnectors for 3.3 kV or 6.6 kV Outlet boxes Non‐metallic UL 514C JIS C 8435 1960, (R)1999 Boxes and box covers of plastic conduits
Cast metal hub type boxes UL 514A JIS C 8340 1952, (R)1999 Boxes and box covers for rigid metal conduits
Bonding conductors, bare copper, ATSM B1 JIS C 3101 1950, (R)1994 Hard‐drawn copper wires for electrical purposes solid, Bonding conductors, bare copper ATSM B8 JIS C 3105, class 1, general 1953, (R)1994 Hard‐drawn copper stranded conductors, class 1, general use use 600V Insulated wire, 60 degrees CUL 83 JIS C 3307 1951, (R)2000 600 V Polyvinyl cloride insulated wires
600V Insulated wire, 75 degrees CUL 44 JIS C 3317 1973, (R)2000 600V Grade heat‐resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 4 Last updated 3/28/2017 Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
600V Insulated wire, 90 degrees C UL 44 JIS C 3317 1973, (R)2000 600V Grade heat‐resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires
EMT conduit UL 797 JIS C 8305, type E 1952, (R)1999 Rigid steel conduits, type E Couplings UL 514B JIS C 8330 1953, (R)1999 Fittings for rigid metal conduits Elbows UL 6 JIS C 8330 1953, (R)1999 Fittings for rigid metal conduits Type EB & A rigid PVC & HDPE UL 651A, NEMA TC 6 JIS C 8430 ‐ increase burial 1954, (R)1999 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC‐U) conduits conduit depth to same as direct buried Couplings UL 651 JIS C 8432 1960, (R)1999 Fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC‐U) conduits Electrical Nonmetallic tubing UL 1653 JIS C 8411 class PF 1987, (R)1999 Pliable plastics conduits, class PF
26 32 13.00 20 Single Operation Generator Sets Generator with MCCB and control UL 2200 JIS/JEM/JEC/SBA/NEGA Japan Industrial Standards/Standards of the Japan Electrical system Manufacturers' Association/Japanese Electrotechnica Committee/ Standards of Battery Association /Nippon Engine Generator Association
26 51 00 Interior Lighting Switch/3‐way Switch UL 20 JIS C 8304 1950, (R)2009 Small switches for indoor use
27 10 00 Building Telecommunications Cabling System Telephone outlet RJ45 (8 position & FCC CFR Part 68/TIA‐569 JISX5150 1996, (R)2016 Information technology‐Generic cabling for customer premises 8 conductors for voice and data)
Television outlet IEC 60169.24/TIA‐569 JIS C 5410/JISX5150 JIS C5410: General rules of connectors for radio frequency coaxial cables / 1970, (R)1991 Information technology‐Generic cabling for customer premises JIS X5150: 1996, (R)2016
28 31 64.00 10 Fire Detection and Alarm System Metal Conduit UL 6 JIS C 8305 1952, (R)1999 Rigid steel conduits
31 00 00 Earthwork Fine Aggregates ASTM C33 JIS A 5308 1953, (R)2014 Ready‐mixed concrete Concrete Aggregates ASTM C33 JIS A 5005 1961, (R)2009 Crushed stone and manufactured sand for concrete
32 10 00 (Pervious) Bituminous Concrete Pavement Asphaltic Concrete Cement Binder ASTM D946 JIS K 2207 1956, (R)2006 Petroleum asphalts
32 11 23 Aggregate and/or Graded‐Crushed Aggregate Base Course Test Method for Sieve Analysis of ASTM C136/C136M JIS A 1102 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for sieve analysis of aggregates Fine and Coarse Aggregates Test Method for Materials Finer ASTM C117 JIS A 1103 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for amount of material passing test sieve 75 μm in than 75‐μm (No. 200) Sieve in aggregates Mineral Aggregates by Washing Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and ASTM D4318 JIS A 1205 1950, (R)2009 Test method for liquid limit and plastic limit of soils Plasticity Index of Soils Test Method for Density and Unit ASTM D1556/D1556M JIS A 1214 1953, (R)2013 Test method for soil density by the sand replacement method Weight of Soil in Place by Sand‐Cone Method Test Methods for Laboratory ASTM D1557 JIS A 1210 1950, (R)2009 Test method for soil compaction using a rammer Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft‐ lbf/ft3) (2700 kN‐m/m3)
32 11 24 Graded Crushed Aggregate Base Course for (Pervious)(Flexible) Crushed Stone for Road ASTM D692 JIS A 5001 1952, (R)2008 Crushed stone for road construction
32 12 10 Bituminous Tack and Prime Coats Prime/Tack Coat ASTM D977 JIS K 2208 1957, (R)2009 Asphalt emulsion
32 12 17 Hot Mix Bituminous Pavement Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous ASTM D692/D692M JIS A 5001 1952, (R)2008 Crushed stone for road construction Paving Mixtures Fine Aggregate for Bituminous ASTM D1073 JIS A 5005 1961, (R)2009 Crushed stone and manufactured sand for concrete Paving Mixtures Test Method for Sieve Analysis of ASTM C136/C136M JIS A 1102 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for sieve analysis of aggregates Fine and Coarse Aggregates Test Method for Materials Finer ASTM C117 JIS A 1103 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for amount of material passing test sieve 75 μm in than 75‐μm (No. 200) Sieve in aggregates Mineral Aggregates by Washing Specific Gravity and Density of Semi‐ ASTM D70 JIS K 2249/K 2207 JIS K2249: 2011 Crude petroleum and petroleum products ‐ Determination of density Solid Bituminous Materials JIS K2207: /Petroleum asphalts (Pycnometer Method) 1956, (R)2006 Test Method for Density, Relative ASTM C127 JIS A 1110 1951, (R)2006 Methods of test for density and water absorption of coarse aggregates Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 5 Last updated 3/28/2017 Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
Test Method for Resistance to ASTM C131 JIS A 1121 1954, (R)2007 Method of test for resistance to abrasion of coarse aggregate by use of Degradation of Small‐Size Coarse the Los Angeles machine Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
Test Method for Soundness of ASTM C88 JIS A 1112 1951, (R)2012 Method of test for washing analysis of fresh concrete Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit ASTM C29/C29M JIS A 1104 1950, (R)2006 Methods of test for bulk density of aggregates and solid content in Weight") and Voids in Aggregate aggregates
Method for Density, Relative Density ASTM C128 JIS A 1109 1951, (R)2006 Methods of test for density and water absorption of fine aggregates (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate Test Method for Density of ASTM C188/D854 JIS A 1202 1950, (R)2009 Test method for density of soil particles Hydraulic Cement/Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by Water Pycnometer
32 17 24.00 10 Pavement Markings Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro‐ FS TT‐B‐1325, Type I, JIS R 3301, Class 1 1975, (R)2014 Glass beads for traffic paint, Class 1 Reflective (Metric) Gradation A Glass Beads Used in Pavement AASHTO M 247, Type I JIS R 3301, Class 1 1975, (R)2014 Glass beads for traffic paint, Class 1 Markings
33 11 00 Water Distribution Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot‐Dipped, ASTM A53/A53M JIS G 3442 1957, (R)2016 Galvanized steel pipes for ordinary piping Zinc‐Coated, Welded and Seamless Carbon Structure Steel ASTM A36/A36M JIS G 3251 1964, (R)2010 Carbon Steel Blooms and Billets for Forgings Ductile‐Iron and Gray‐Iron Fittings AWWA C110 JIS G 5526 1974, (R)2014 Ductile iron pipes for Water Flanged Ductile‐Iron Pipe With AWWA C115/C 151 JIS G 5527 1974, (R)2014 Ductile iron fittings Ductile‐Iron or Gray‐Iron Threaded Flanges/Ductile‐Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) ASTM D1784 JIS K 6741/6742 JIS K6741: Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes/Unplasticized poly Compounds and Chlorinated 1954, (R)2016 (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes for water supply Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) JIS K6742: Compounds 1956, (R)2016 Heat Fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe ASTM D2657 JIS K 6742/6739 JIS K6742: Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes for water and Fittings 1956, (R)2016 supply/Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipe fittings for drain JIS K6739: 1972, (R)2016 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic ASTM D1785 JIS K 6743 1956, (R)2016 Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipe fittings for water Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 supply Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and AWWA C901 JIS K 6762 1959, (R)2014 Double wall polyethylene pipes for water supply Tubing, 1/2 In. (13mm) Through 3 In. (76 mm), or Water Service
33 30 00 Sanitary Sewers Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74 JIS G 5525 1959, (R)2000 Cast‐iron drainage pipes and fittings Zinc (Hot‐Dip Galvanized) Coatings ASTM A123/123M JIS G 3452/B 2301 JIS G3452: Carbon steel pipes for ordinary piping/Screwed type malleable cast on Iron and 1962, (R)2016 iron pipe fittings Steel Products JIS B2301: 1950, (R)2013 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic ASTM D3212 JSWAS K‐1 1974, (R)2010 Japan Sewage Works Association Standard K‐1 Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals Concrete Aggregates ASTM C33/C33M JIS A 5005 1961, (R)2009 Crushed stone and manufactured sand for concrete Ready‐Mixed Concrete ASTM C94/C94M JIS A 5308 1953, (R)2014 Ready‐mixed concrete Portland Cement ASTM C150/C150M JIS R 5210/5211 JIS R5210): Portland cement/Portland blast‐furnace slag cement 1950, (R)2009 JIS R5211: 1950, (R)2009 Air‐Entertaining Admixture for ASTM C260/C260M JIS A 6204 1982, (R)2011 Chemical admixtures for concrete Concrete
33 34 00 Force Mains And Inverted Siphons; Sewer Steel Water Pipe ‐ 6 In. (150 mm) AWWA C200 JIS G 3454 1962, (R)2012 Carbon steel tubes for pressure service and Larger Rigid PVC pipe ASTM D1784 JIS K 6741/6776 JIS K6741: Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐U) pipes/Chlorinated poly 1954, (R)2016 (vinyl chloride) (PVC‐C) pipes for hot and cold water supply JIS K6776: 1984, (R)2016 Coal‐Tar Protective Coatings and JWWA K 115 (R)1989 Japan Water Works Assocation K115 linings for AWWA C 203 for Steel pipelines
33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 6 Last updated 3/28/2017 Section Section Title/Material Description US Standard Acceptable Alternative Year JIS published Japanese Standard Title in English Japanese Standard (revised)
Moist‐Density Relation Test AASHTO T‐180 JIS A 1210 1950, (R)2009 Test Method For Soil Compaction Using A Rammer (American Assoc of State Highway Official) Test Methods for Laboratory ASTM D1557 JIS A 1210 1950, (R)2009 Test Method For Soil Compaction Using A Rammer Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft‐ lbf/ft3) (2700 kN‐m/m3)
33 71 02 Underground Electrical Distribution Electric Conduit, Rigid Rigid Metal Conduit UL 6 JIS C 8305 type G 1952, (R)1999 Rigid steel conduits type G Elbows & couplings UL 6 JIS C 8330 1953, (R)1999 Fittings for rigid metal conduits Conduit, Tubing and Cable UL 514B JIS C 8330 1953, (R)1999 Fittings for rigid metal conduits Fittings Conduit bodies, entrance caps UL 514B JIS C 8340 1952, (R)1999 Boxes and box covers for rigid metal conduits
PVC coated rigid steel conduit NEMA RN 1 JIS C 8380 1993, (R)2009 Plastic coated steel pipes for cable‐ways PVC Conduit PVC conduit, schedule 40 & 80 NEMA TC 2 & UL 651 JIS C 8430 ‐ increase burial 1954, (R)1999 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC‐U) conduits rigid depth to same as direct buried Couplings UL 651 JIS C 8432 1960, (R)1999 Fittings of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC‐U) conduits Electric Cable NM 60 degrees C UL 719 JIS C 3342 1964, (R)2012 600 V Polyvinyl chloride insulated and sheathed cables
NM 75 degrees C UL 719 JIS C 3605 type EVorEE 1975, (R)2002 600V Polyethylene insulated cables type EVorEE
NM‐B 90 degrees C UL 719 JIS C 3605 type EVorEE 1975, (R)2002 600V Polyethylene insulated cables type EVorEE
Service Entrance Cables SE UL 854 JIS C 3341 type DV 1963, (R)2000 Polyvinyl chloride insulated drop service wires type DV Service Entrance Cables USE UL 854 JIS C 3605 type CV 1975, (R)2002 600V Polyethylene insulated cables type CV
Medium Voltage power cables UL 1072 JIS C 3606 type CVorCE 1968, (R)2003 High‐voltage cross‐linked polyethylene insulated cables type CVorCE 3300V Medium Voltage power cables UL 1072 JIS C 3606 type CVorCE 1968, (R)2003 High‐voltage cross‐linked polyethylene insulated cables type CVorCE 15000V
Miscellaneous Paving, AC, PC Structure etc. Slump of Hydraulic cement concrete ASTM C143 JIS A 1101 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for slump of concrete
Reinforcing Steel ASTM A615 JIS G 3112 1964, (R)2010 Steel bars for concrete reinforcement Welded wire Fabrics ASTM A185 JIS G 3551 1960, (R)2005 Welded steel wire and bar fabrics Polyethylene sheet ASTM C171 JIS K 6781 1956, (R)1994 Polyethylene films for agriculture Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C172 JIS A 1115 1951, (R)2014 Method of sampling fresh concrete
Air Content Test ASTM C173 JIS A 1118 1952, (R)2017 Method of test for air content of fresh concrete by volumetric method
Low Alloy Steel ASTM A514 JIS G 3106 1952, (R)2015 Rolled steels for welded structure Tubing ASTM A500 JIS G 3444/3446/3475 JIS G3444: Carbon steel tubes for general structure/Stainless steel pipes for 1961, (R)2016 machine and structural purposes/Carbon steel tubes for building JIS G3446: structure 1974, (R)2012 JIS G3475: 1996, (R)2016 Washers ASTM F436 JIS B 1256 1959, (R)2008 Plain washers High‐Strength Bolt ASTM A325 JIS B 1186 1964, (R)2013 Sets of high strength hexagon bolt, hexagon nut and plain washers for friction grip joints Bolts ASTM A307 JIS B 1180 1961, (R)2014 Hexagon head bolts and hexagon head screws Crushed Stone for Road ASTM D692 JIS A 5001 1952, (R)2008 Crushed stone for road construction Sieve Analysis of Aggregate ASTM C136 JIS A 1102 1950, (R)2014 Method of test for sieve analysis of aggregates Specific Gravity of Semi‐Solid ASTM D70 JIS K 2249 2011 Crude petroleum and petroleum products ‐‐ Determination of density Bituminous and petroleum measurement tables based on a reference temperature (15 centigrade degrees) Standard Test Method for Relative ASTM C127 JIS A 1110 1951, (R)2006 Methods of test for density and water absorption of coarse aggregates Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
Compaction of Backfill Materials ASTM D1556 JIS A 1210 1950, (R)2009 Test method for soil compaction using a rammer Channels, Angles, General Structural ASTM A36 JIS G 3106/3101/3136/3138 JIS G3106: Rolled steels for welded structure/Rolled steels for general steel 1952, (R)2015 structure/Rolled steels for building structure/Rolled steel bars for JIS G3101: building structure 1952, (R)2015 JIS G3136: 1994, (R)2012 JIS G3138: 1996, (R)2005 Hot‐rolled Atmospheric Corrosion ASTM A242 JIS G 3114 1968, (R)2016 Hot‐rolled atmospheric corrosion resisting steels for welded structure Resist steel
Section 01 11 00.00 10-A Page 7 Last updated 3/28/2017 Reset Form Government Furnished Property Validate
Attachment Number Attachment Date Attachment File of
Government Contracting Officer
Name Email Phone
Contract Award Contract Modification OR Solicitation Amendment
Modification Number Amendment Number
Reference Procurement Instrument Number
Custodial Procurement Instrument Identification
Solicitation, Contract or Uniform PIID Number Order Number (PIID Format FY16+) Old Order Issuing Office Issue Year Contract Sequence Issuing Office Issue Year Contract Sequence Format DoDAAC (YY) Type Number DoDAAC (YY) Type Number OR
Consolidated GFP Attachment V.M.1.1 Attachment 01 11 00.00 10-B Government Furnished Property
ADD SERIALLY MANAGED ITEMS LIST
Line Part Model Serial Unit of Item Name Item Description NSN CAGE UII QTY Unit Cost Use As Is Number Number Number Number Measure
Wind Direction Streamer, lighting, and 1 1 Indicator support structure Each
Delivery Date Duration Time Unit Delivery Event Notes Remove (On or Before)
Line Part Model Serial Unit of Item Name Item Description NSN CAGE UII QTY Unit Cost Use As Is Number Number Number Number Measure
Drainage Structure 2 Drainage Structure Covers 10 Covers Each
Delivery Date Duration Time Unit Delivery Event Notes Remove (On or Before)
ADD NON-SERIALLY MANAGED ITEMS LIST
Line Part Model Unit of Item Name Item Description NSN CAGE QTY Unit Cost Use As Is Number Number Number Measure
Delivery Date Duration Time Unit Delivery Event Notes Remove (On or Before)
Items Authorized to be Requisitioned by the Contractor and Paid for by DoD
Line Part Unit of Item Name Item Description NSN CAGE QTY Unit Cost Use As Is ADD Number Number Measure
Remove
Consolidated GFP Attachment V.M.1.1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 22 00.00 10
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
Payment items for the work of this Contract for which payments shall be made are listed in the CONTRACT LINE ITEM NUMBER (CLIN) SCHEDULE and described below. All costs for items of work, which are not specifically mentioned to be included in a particular job or unit price payment item, are included in the listed job item most closely associated with the work involved. The price and payment made for each item listed constitutes full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment, and performing any associated Contractor quality control, environmental protection, meeting safety requirements, tests and reports, topographic surveys, cost of bond premiums, and for performing all work required by drawings and specifications for which separate payment is not otherwise provided. Work paid for under one item shall not be paid for under any other item. No separate payment shall be made for the work, services, or operations required by the Contractor, as specified in DIVISION 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, to complete the project in accordance with these specifications; all costs thereof shall be considered as incidental to the work.
1.2 LINE ITEMS
1.2.1 CLIN 0001, Construction of Vertical Takeoff and Landing (VTOL) Pad South
1.2.1.1 Payment
Payment shall be made at the Contract job price for CLIN 0001 "Construction Vertical Takeoff and Landing (VTOL) South" for work completed including, but not limited to the construction of VTOL pad south, site preparation including demolition of existing VTOL pad, clearing, excavation, grading, taxiway connections,demolition and reloction of existing utilities, new airfield lighting, and storm water management. Payment for work completed shall constitute full compensation of CLIN 0001, complete.
1.2.1.2 Unit of Measure
Unit of measure: job.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROGRESS PAYMENT INVOICE
Requests for payment shall be submitted in accordance with Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) Subpart 32.9, entitled "PROMPT PAYMENT", and Paragraphs 52.232-5 and 52.232-27, entitled "Payments Under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts", and "Prompt Payment for Construction Contracts", respectively. In addition each request shall be submitted in the number of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 22 00.00 10 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
copies and to the designated billing office as shown in the Contract.
When submitting payment requests, the Contractor shall complete Blocks 1 through 12 of the "PROGRESS PAYMENT INVOICE" Form as directed by the Contracting Officer (provided in QCS). The completed form shall then become the cover document to which all other support data shall be attached.
One additional copy of the entire request for payment, to include the "PROGRESS PAYMENT INVOICE" cover document, shall be forwarded to a separate address as designated by the Contracting Officer.
The Contractor shall submit with each pay request, a list of subcontractors that have worked during that pay period. The listing shall be broken down into weeks, identifying each subcontractor that has worked during a particular week, and indicate the total number of employees that have worked on site for each subcontractor for each week. The prime Contractor shall also indicate the total number of employees for its on site staff for each week.
3.2 CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN
The Contractor must furnish within 30 days after the date of Notice to Proceed, and prior to the submission of its first partial payment estimate, a breakdown of its single job pay item or items which will be reviewed by the Contracting Officer as to propriety of distribution of the total cost to the various accounts. Any unbalanced items as between early and late payment items or other discrepancies will be revised by the Contracting Officer to agree with a reasonable cost of the work included in the various items. This contract cost breakdown will then be utilized as the basis for progress payments to the Contractor.
3.3 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
3.3.1 Contracting Officer (KO)
This Contract shall be administered by a Contracting Officer (KO) assigned to the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Japan Engineer District, APO AP 96338-5010.
3.3.2 Administrative Contracting Officer (ACO)
In accordance with the USACE Acquisition Instruction (UAI) Section 1.602-1-100, Administrative Contracting Officer(s) (ACO's) may be delegated a part of the Contracting Officer's authority to modify this Contract and perform Contract administration functions under Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) Section 42.302, subject to the authority and limitations set forth in the appointment and delegation letter.
3.3.3 Contracting Officer's Representative (COR)
The Contracting Officer may designate one or more individuals as his/her authorized representatives in administering this Contract. Refer to the clause in Section 00 70 00 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT entitled CONTRACTING OFFICER'S REPRESENTATIVE (DFARS 252.201-7000) for the definition and limited authority of CORs.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 22 00.00 10 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.4 DESIGNATED BILLING OFFICE
The designated billing office for this Contract is: Iwakuni Resident Office U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Japan Engineer District PSC 561, Box 1860 FPO AP 96310-0019
USAED-J Bldg. 53 MCAS Iwakuni Misumi-Cho Iwakuni-City, Yamaguchi 740-0025 JAPAN
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 22 00.00 10 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AACE INTERNATIONAL (AACE)
AACE 29R-03 (2011) Forensic Schedule Analysis
AACE 52R-06 (2006) Time Impact Analysis - As Applied in Construction
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
ER 1-1-11 (1995) Administration -- Progress, Schedules, and Network Analysis Systems
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only.Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Project Scheduler Qualifications; G
Preliminary Project Schedule; G
Initial Project Schedule; G
Periodic Schedule Update; G
1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULER QUALIFICATIONS
Designate an authorized representative to be responsible for the preparation of the schedule and all required updating and production of reports. The authorized representative must have a minimum of 2-years experience scheduling construction projects similar in size and nature to this project with scheduling software that meets the requirements of this specification. Representative must have a comprehensive knowledge of CPM scheduling principles and application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOFTWARE
The scheduling software utilized to produce and update the schedules required herein must be capable of meeting all requirements of this
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
specification.
2.1.1 Government Default Software
The Government intends to use Primavera P6.
2.1.2 Contractor Software
Scheduling software used by the contractor must be commercially available from the software vendor for purchase with vendor software support agreements available. The software routine used to create the required sdef file must be created and supported by the software manufacturer.
2.1.2.1 Primavera
If Primavera P6 is selected for use, provide the "xer" export file in a version of P6 importable by the Government system.
2.1.2.2 Other Than Primavera
If the contractor chooses software other than Primavera P6, that is compliant with this specification, provide for the Government's use two licenses, two computers, and training for two Government employees in the use of the software. These computers will be stand-alone and not connected to Government network. Computers and licenses will be returned at project completion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Prepare for approval a Project Schedule, as specified herein, pursuant to FAR Clause 52.236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts. Show in the schedule the proposed sequence to perform the work and dates contemplated for starting and completing all schedule activities. The scheduling of the entire project is required. The scheduling of construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor management personnel must actively participate in its development. subcontractors and suppliers working on the project must also contribute in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. Provide a schedule that is a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool. Use the Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation to generate all Project Schedules. Prepare each Project Schedule using the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM).
3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING
The schedule is the basis for determining contract earnings during each update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. The aggregate value of all activities coded to a contract CLIN must equal the value of the CLIN.
3.2.1 Activity Cost Loading
Activity cost loading must be reasonable and without front-end loading. Provide additional documentation to demonstrate reasonableness if requested by the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.2.2 Withholdings / Payment Rejection
Failure to meet the requirements of this specification may result in the disapproval of the preliminary, initial or periodic schedule updates and subsequent rejection of payment requests until compliance is met.
In the event that the Contracting Officer directs schedule revisions and those revisions have not been included in subsequent Project Schedule revisions or updates, the Contracting Officer may withhold 10 percent of pay request amount from each payment period until such revisions to the project schedule have been made.
3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
3.3.1 Level of Detail Required
Develop the Project Schedule to the appropriate level of detail to address major milestones and to allow for satisfactory project planning and execution. Failure to develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail will result in its disapproval. The Contracting Officer will consider, but is not limited to, the following characteristics and requirements to determine appropriate level of detail:
3.3.2 Activity Durations
Reasonable activity durations are those that allow the progress of ongoing activities to be accurately determined between update periods. Less than 2 percent of all non-procurement activities may have Original Durations (OD) greater than 20 work days or 30 calendar days.
3.3.3 Procurement Activities
Include activities associated with the critical submittals and their approvals, procurement, fabrication, and delivery of long lead materials, equipment, fabricated assemblies, and supplies. Long lead procurement activities are those with an anticipated procurement sequence of over 90 calendar days.
3.3.4 Mandatory Tasks
Include the following activities/tasks in the initial project schedule and all updates.
a. Submission, review and acceptance of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals (individual activity for each).
b. (When required by the contract) Submission, review and acceptance of features require design completion
c. Submission of mechanical/electrical/information systems layout drawings.
d. Long procurement activities
e. Submission and approval of O & M manuals.
f. Submission and approval of as-built drawings.
g. Submission and approval of DD1354 data and installed equipment lists.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
h. Submission and approval of testing and air balance (TAB).
i. Submission of TAB specialist design review report.
j. Submission and approval of fire protection specialist.
k. Submission and approval of Building Commissioning Plan, test data, and reports: Develop the schedule logic associated with testing and commissioning of mechanical systems to a level of detail consistent with the contract commissioning requirements. All tasks associated with all building testing and commissioning will be completed prior to submission of building commissioning report and subsequent contract completion.
l. Air and water balancing.
m. Building commissioning - Functional Performance Testing.
n. Controls testing plan submission.
o. Controls testing.
p. Performance Verification testing.
q. Other systems testing, if required.
r. Contractor's pre-final inspection.
s. Correction of punch list from Contractor's pre-final inspection.
t. Government's pre-final inspection.
u. Correction of punch list from Government's pre-final inspection.
v. Final inspection.
w. Planned Utility Outages (electrical, water, gas, etc.).
3.3.5 Government Activities
Show Government and other agency activities that could impact progress. These activities include, but are not limited to: approvals, environmental permit approvals by State regulators, inspections, utility tie-in, Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements.
3.3.6 Standard Activity Coding Dictionary
Use the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11. This exact structure is mandatory. Develop and assign all Activity Codes to activities as detailed herein. A template SDEF compatible schedule backup file is available on the QCS web site: http://rms.usace.army.mil.
The SDEF format is as follows:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Field Activity Code Length Description
1 WRKP 3 Workers per day
2 RESP 4 Responsible party
3 AREA 4 Area of work
4 MODF 6 Modification Number
5 BIDI 6 Bid Item (CLIN)
6 PHAS 2 Phase of work
7 CATW 1 Category of work
8 FOW 20 Feature of work*
*Some systems require that FEATURE OF WORK values be placed in several activity code fields. The notation shown is for Primavera P6. Refer to the specific software guidelines with respect to the FEATURE OF WORK field requirements.
3.3.6.1 Workers Per Day (WRKP)
Assign Workers per Day for all field construction or direct work activities, if directed by the Contracting Officer. Workers per day is based on the average number of workers expected each day to perform a task for the duration of that activity.
3.3.6.2 Responsible Party Coding (RESP)
Assign responsibility code for all activities to the Prime Contractor, Subcontractor(s) or Government agency(ies) responsible for performing the activity.
a. Activities coded with a Government Responsibility code include, but are not limited to: Government approvals, Government design reviews, environmental permit approvals by State regulators, Government Furnished Property/Equipment (GFP) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements.
b. Activities cannot have more than one Responsibility Code. Examples of acceptable activity code values are: DOR (for the designer of record); ELEC (for the electrical subcontractor); MECH (for the mechanical subcontractor); and GOVT (for USACE).
3.3.6.3 Area of Work Coding (AREA)
Assign Work Area code to activities based upon the work area in which the activity occurs. Define work areas based on resource constraints or space constraints that would preclude a resource, such as a particular trade or craft work crew from working in more than one work area at a time due to restraints on resources or space. Examples of Work Area Coding include different areas within a floor of a building, different floors within a
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
building, and different buildings within a complex of buildings. Activities cannot have more than one Work Area Code.
Not all activities are required to be Work Area coded. A lack of Work Area coding indicates the activity is not resource or space constrained.
3.3.6.4 Modification Number (MODF)
Assign a Modification Number Code to any activity or sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of a Contract Modification, when approved by Contracting Officer. Key all Code values to the Government's modification numbering system. An activity can have only one Modification Number Code.
3.3.6.5 Bid Item Coding (BIDI)
Assign a Bid Item Code to all activities using the Contract Line Item Schedule (CLIN) to which the activity belongs, even when an activity is not cost loaded. An activity can have only one BIDI Code.
3.3.6.6 Phase of Work Coding (PHAS)
Assign Phase of Work Code to all activities. Examples of phase of work are procurement phase and construction phase. Each activity can have only one Phase of Work code.
a. Code proposed fast track design and construction phases proposed to allow filtering and organizing the schedule by fast track design and construction packages.
b. If the contract specifies phasing with separately defined performance periods, identify a Phase Code to allow filtering and organizing the schedule accordingly.
3.3.6.7 Category of Work Coding (CATW)
Assign a Category of Work Code to all activities. Category of Work Codes include, but are not limited to construction submittal, procurement, fabrication, weather sensitive installation, non-weather sensitive installation, start-up, and testing activities. Each activity can have no more than one Category of Work Code.
3.3.6.8 Feature of Work Coding (FOW)
Assign a Feature of Work Code to appropriate activities based on the Definable Feature of Work to which the activity belongs based on the approved QC plan.
Definable Feature of Work is defined in Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. An activity can have only one Feature of Work Code.
3.3.7 Contract Milestones and Constraints
Milestone activities are to be used for significant project events including, but not limited to, project phasing, project start and end activities, or interim completion dates. The use of artificial float constraints such as "zero free float" or "zero total float" are prohibited.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Mandatory constraints that ignore or effect network logic are prohibited. No constrained dates are allowed in the schedule other than those specified herein. Submit additional constraints to the Contracting Officer for approval on a case by case basis.
3.3.7.1 Project Start Date Milestone and Constraint
The first activity in the project schedule must be a start milestone titled "NTP Acknowledged," which must have a "Start On" constraint date equal to the date that the NTP is acknowledged.
3.3.7.2 End Project Finish Milestone and Constraint
The last activity in the schedule must be a finish milestone titled "End Project."
Constrain the project schedule to the Contract Completion Date in such a way that if the schedule calculates an early finish, then the float calculation for "End Project" milestone reflects positive float on the longest path. If the project schedule calculates a late finish, then the "End Project" milestone float calculation reflects negative float on the longest path. The Government is under no obligation to accelerate Government activities to support a Contractor's early completion.
3.3.7.3 Interim Completion Dates and Constraints
Constrain contractually specified interim completion dates to show negative float when the calculated late finish date of the last activity in that phase is later than the specified interim completion date.
3.3.7.3.1 Start Phase
Use a start milestone as the first activity for a project phase. Call the start milestone "Start Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work.
3.3.7.3.2 End Phase
Use a finish milestone as the last activity for a project phase. Call the finish milestone "End Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work.
3.3.8 Calendars
Schedule activities on a Calendar to which the activity logically belongs. Develop calendars to accommodate any contract defined work period such as a 7-day calendar for Government Acceptance activities, concrete cure times, etc. Develop the default Calendar to match the physical work plan with non-work periods identified including weekends and holidays. Develop Seasonal Calendar(s) and assign to seasonally affected activities as applicable.
If an activity is weather sensitive it should be assigned to a calendar showing non-work days on a monthly basis, with the non-work days selected at random across the weeks of the calendar, using the anticipated adverse weather delay work days provided in the paragraph titled TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. Assign non-work days over a seven-day week as weather records are compiled on seven-day weeks, which may cause some of the weather related non-work days to fall on weekends.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3.9 Open Ended Logic
Only two open ended activities are allowed: the first activity "NTP Acknowledged" may have no predecessor logic, and the last activity -"End Project" may have no successor logic.
Predecessor open ended logic may be allowed in a time impact analyses upon the Contracting Officer's approval.
3.3.10 Default Progress Data Disallowed
Actual Start and Finish dates must not automatically update with default mechanisms included in the scheduling software. Updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity must be independent functions. Disable program features that calculate one of these parameters from the other. Activity Actual Start (AS) and Actual Finish (AF) dates assigned during the updating process must match those dates provided in the Contractor Quality Control Reports. Failure to document the AS and AF dates in the Daily Quality Control report will result in disapproval of the Contractor's schedule.
3.3.11 Out-of-Sequence Progress
Activities that have progressed before all preceding logic has been satisfied (Out-of-Sequence Progress) will be allowed only on a case-by-case basis subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Propose logic corrections to eliminate out of sequence progress or justify not changing the sequencing for approval prior to submitting an updated project schedule. Address out of sequence progress or logic changes in the Narrative Report and in the periodic schedule update meetings.
3.3.12 Added and Deleted Activities
Do not delete activities from the project schedule or add new activities to the schedule without approval from the Contracting Officer. Activity ID and description changes are considered new activities and cannot be changed without Contracting Officer approval.
3.3.13 Original Durations
Activity Original Durations (OD) must be reasonable to perform the work item. OD changes are prohibited unless justification is provided and approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.14 Leads, Lags, and Start to Finish Relationships
Lags must be reasonable as determined by the Government and not used in place of realistic original durations, must not be in place to artificially absorb float, or to replace proper schedule logic.
a. Leads (negative lags) are prohibited.
b. Start to Finish (SF) relationships are prohibited.
3.3.15 Retained Logic
Schedule calculations must retain the logic between predecessors and successors ("retained logic" mode) even when the successor activity(s) starts and the predecessor activity(s) has not finished (out-of-sequence
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
progress). Software features that in effect sever the tie between predecessor and successor activities when the successor has started and the predecessor logic is not satisfied ("progress override") are not be allowed.
3.3.16 Percent Complete
Update the percent complete for each activity started, based on the realistic assessment of earned value. Activities which are complete but for remaining minor punch list work and which do not restrain the initiation of successor activities may be declared 100 percent complete to allow for proper schedule management.
3.3.17 Remaining Duration
Update the remaining duration for each activity based on the number of estimated work days it will take to complete the activity. Remaining duration may not mathematically correlate with percentage found under paragraph entitled Percent Complete.
3.3.18 Cost Loading of Closeout Activities
Cost load the "Correction of punch list from Government pre-final inspection" activity(ies) not less than 1 percent of the present contract value. Activity(ies) may be declared 100 percent complete upon the Government's verification of completion and correction of all punch list work identified during Government pre-final inspection(s).
3.3.18.1 As-Built Drawings
If there is no separate contract line item (CLIN) for as-built drawings, cost load the "Submission and approval of as-built drawings" activity not less than $35,000 or 1 percent of the present contract value, which ever is greater, up to $200,000. Activity will be declared 100 percent complete upon the Government's approval.
3.3.18.2 O & M Manuals
Cost load the "Submission and approval of O & M manuals" activity not less than $20,000. Activity will be declared 100 percent complete upon the Government's approval of all O & M manuals.
3.3.19 Early Completion Schedule and the Right to Finish Early
An Early Completion Schedule is an Initial Project Schedule (IPS) that indicates all scope of the required contract work will be completed before the contractually required completion date.
a. No IPS indicating an Early Completion will be accepted without being fully resource-loaded (including crew sizes and manhours) and the Government agreeing that the schedule is reasonable and achievable.
b. The Government is under no obligation to accelerate work items it is responsible for to ensure that the early completion is met nor is it responsible to modify incremental funding (if applicable) for the project to meet the contractor's accelerated work.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS
Provide the submissions as described below. Include the submittal register with project schedule submissions. The data CD/DVD, reports, and network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS. If the Contractor fails or refuses to furnish the information and schedule updates as set forth herein, then the Contractor will be deemed not to have provided an estimate upon which a progress payment can be made.
Review comments made by the Government on the schedule(s) do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.4.1 Preliminary Project Schedule Submission
Within 15 calendar days after the NTP is acknowledged submit the Preliminary Project Schedule defining the planned operations detailed for the first 90 calendar days for approval. The approved Preliminary Project Schedule will be used for payment purposes not to exceed 90 calendar days after NTP. Completely cost load the Preliminary Project Schedule to balance the contract award CLINS shown on the Price Schedule. The Preliminary Project Schedule may be summary in nature for the remaining performance period. It must be early start and late finish constrained and logically tied as specified. The Preliminary Project Schedule forms the basis for the Initial Project Schedule specified herein and must include all of the required plan and program preparations, submissions and approvals identified in the contract (for example, Quality Control Plan, Safety Plan, and Environmental Protection Plan) and other non-construction activities intended to occur within the first 90 calendar days. Government acceptance of the associated design package(s) and all other specified Program and Plan approvals must occur prior to any planned construction activities. Activity code any activities that are summary in nature after the first 90 calendar days with Bid Item (CLIN) code (BIDI), Responsibility Code (RESP) and Feature of Work code (FOW).
3.4.2 Initial Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Initial Project Schedule for approval within 42 calendar days after notice to proceed is issued. The schedule must demonstrate a reasonable and realistic sequence of activities which represent all work through the entire contract performance period. No payment will be made for work items not fully detailed in the Project Schedule.
3.4.3 Periodic Schedule Updates
Update the Project Schedule on a regular basis, monthly at a minimum. Provide a draft Periodic Schedule Update for review at the schedule update meetings as prescribed in the paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS. These updates will enable the Government to assess Contractor's progress.
a. Update information including Actual Start Dates (AS), Actual Finish Dates (AF), Remaining Durations (RD), and Percent Complete is subject to the approval of the Government at the meeting.
b. AS and AF dates must match the date(s) reported on the Contractor's Quality Control Report for an activity start or finish.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Submit the following items for the Preliminary Schedule, Initial Schedule, and every Periodic Schedule Update throughout the life of the project:
3.5.1 Data in Electronic Format
Provide two sets of data in electronic format containing the current project schedule and all previously submitted schedules in the format of the scheduling software (e.g. .xer). Also include the Narrative Report and all required Schedule Reports. Label each electronic submission indicating the type of schedule (Preliminary, Initial, Update), full contract number, Data Date and file name. Each schedule must have a unique file name and use project specific settings.
3.5.2 Narrative Report
Provide a Narrative Report with each schedule submission. The Narrative Report is expected to communicate to the Government the thorough analysis of the schedule output and the plans to compensate for any problems, either current or potential, which are revealed through that analysis. Include the following information as minimum in the Narrative Report:
a. Identify and discuss the work scheduled to start in the next update period.
b. A description of activities along the two most critical paths where the total float is less than or equal to 20 work days.
c. A description of current and anticipated problem areas or delaying factors and their impact and an explanation of corrective actions taken or required to be taken.
d. Identify and explain why activities based on their calculated late dates should have either started or finished during the update period but did not.
e. Identify and discuss all schedule changes by activity ID and activity name including what specifically was changed and why the change was needed. Include at a minimum new and deleted activities, logic changes, duration changes, calendar changes, lag changes, resource changes, and actual start and finish date changes.
f. Identify and discuss out-of-sequence work.
3.5.3 Schedule Reports
The format, filtering, organizing and sorting for each schedule report will be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Typically, reports contain Activity Numbers, Activity Description, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date, Late Finish Date, Total Float, Actual Start Date, Actual Finish Date, and Percent Complete. Provide the reports electronically in .pdf format. The following lists typical reports that will be requested:
3.5.3.1 Activity Report
List of all activities sorted according to activity number.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.3.2 Logic Report
List of detailed predecessor and successor activities for every activity in ascending order by activity number.
3.5.3.3 Total Float Report
A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total float. List activities which have the same amount of total float in ascending order of Early Start Dates. Do not show completed activities on this report.
3.5.3.4 Earnings Report by CLIN
A compilation of the Total Earnings on the project from the NTP to the data date, which reflects the earnings of activities based on the agreements made in the schedule update meeting defined herein. Provided a complete schedule update has been furnished, this report serves as the basis of determining progress payments. Group activities by CLIN number and sort by activity number. Provide a total CLIN percent earned value, CLIN percent complete, and project percent complete. The printed report must contain the following for each activity: the Activity Number, Activity Description, Original Budgeted Amount, Earnings to Date, Earnings this period, Total Quantity, Quantity to Date, and Percent Complete (based on cost).
3.5.3.5 Schedule Log
Provide a Scheduling/Leveling Report generated from the current project schedule being submitted.
3.5.4 Network Diagram
The Network Diagram is required for the Preliminary, Initial and Periodic Updates. Depict and display the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:
3.5.4.1 Continuous Flow
Show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left. Show the activity number, description, duration, and estimated earned value on the diagram.
3.5.4.2 Project Milestone Dates
Show dates on the diagram for start of project, any contract required interim completion dates, and contract completion dates.
3.5.4.3 Critical Path
Show all activities on the critical path. The critical path is defined as the longest path.
3.5.4.4 Banding
Organize activities using the WBS or as otherwise directed to assist in the understanding of the activity sequence. Typically, this flow will
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
group activities by major elements of work, category of work, work area and/or responsibility.
3.5.4.5 Cash Flow / Schedule Variance Control (SVC) Diagram
With each schedule submission, provide a SVC diagram showing 1) Cash Flow S-Curves indicating planned project cost based on projected early and late activity finish dates, and 2) Earned Value to-date.
3.6 PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE
3.6.1 Periodic Schedule Update Meetings
Conduct periodic schedule update meetings for the purpose of reviewing the proposed Periodic Schedule Update, Narrative Report, Schedule Reports, and progress payment. Conduct meetings at least monthly within five days of the proposed schedule data date. Provide a computer with the scheduling software loaded and a projector which allows all meeting participants to view the proposed schedule during the meeting. The Contractor's authorized scheduler must organize, group, sort, filter, perform schedule revisions as needed and review functions as requested by the Contractor and/or Government. The meeting is a working interactive exchange which allows the Government and Contractor the opportunity to review the updated schedule on a real time and interactive basis. The meeting will last no longer than 8 hours. Provide a draft of the proposed narrative report and schedule data file to the Government a minimum of two workdays in advance of the meeting. The Contractor's Project Manager and scheduler must attend the meeting with the authorized representative of the Contracting Officer. Superintendents, foremen and major subcontractors must attend the meeting as required to discuss the project schedule and work. Following the periodic schedule update meeting, make corrections to the draft submission. Include only those changes approved by the Government in the submission and invoice for payment.
3.6.2 Update Submission Following Progress Meeting
Submit the complete Periodic Schedule Update of the Project Schedule containing all approved progress, revisions, and adjustments, pursuant to paragraph SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS not later than 4 work days after the periodic schedule update meeting.
3.7 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS
Conduct a weekly meeting with the Government (or as otherwise mutually agreed to) between the meetings described in paragraph entitled PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual progress of the project as compared to the as planned progress and to review planned activities for the upcoming two weeks. Use the current approved schedule update for the purposes of this meeting and for the production and review of reports. At the weekly progress meeting, address the status of RFIs, RFPs and Submittals.
3.8 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS
Provide a justification of delay to the Contracting Officer in accordance with the contract provisions and clauses for approval within 10 days of a delay occurring. Also prepare a time impact analysis for each Government request for proposal (RFP) to justify time extensions.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.8.1 Justification of Delay
Provide a description of the event(s) that caused the delay and/or impact to the work. As part of the description, identify all schedule activities impacted. Show that the event that caused the delay/impact was the responsibility of the Government. Provide a time impact analysis that demonstrates the effects of the delay or impact on the project completion date or interim completion date(s). Evaluate multiple impacts chronologically; each with its own justification of delay. With multiple impacts consider any concurrency of delay. A time extension and the schedule fragnet becomes part of the project schedule and all future schedule updates upon approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.8.2 Time Impact Analysis (Prospective Analysis)
Prepare a time impact analysis for approval by the Contracting Officer based on industry standard AACE 52R-06. Utilize a copy of the last approved schedule prior to the first day of the impact or delay for the time impact analysis. If Contracting Officer determines the time frame between the last approved schedule and the first day of impact is too great, prepare an interim updated schedule to perform the time impact analysis. Unless approved by the Contracting Officer, no other changes may be incorporated into the schedule being used to justify the time impact.
3.8.3 Forensic Schedule Analysis (Retrospective Analysis)
Prepare an analysis for approval by the Contracting Officer based on industry standard AACE 29R-03.
3.8.4 Fragmentary Network (Fragnet)
Prepare a proposed fragnet for time impact analysis consisting of a sequence of new activities that are proposed to be added to the project schedule to demonstrate the influence of the delay or impact to the project's contractual dates. Clearly show how the proposed fragnet is to be tied into the project schedule including all predecessors and successors to the fragnet activities. The proposed fragnet must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to incorporation into the project schedule.
3.8.5 Time Extension
The Contracting Officer must approve the Justification of Delay including the time impact analysis before a time extension will be granted. No time extension will be granted unless the delay consumes all available Project Float and extends the projected finish date ("End Project" milestone) beyond the Contract Completion Date. The time extension will be in calendar days.
Actual delays that are found to be caused by the Contractor's own actions, which result in a calculated schedule delay will not be a cause for an extension to the performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone date.
3.8.6 Impact to Early Completion Schedule
No extended overhead will be paid for delay prior to the original Contract Completion Date for an Early Completion IPS unless the Contractor actually
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
performed work in accordance with that Early Completion Schedule. The Contractor must show that an early completion was achievable had it not been for the impact.
3.9 FAILURE TO ACHIEVE PROGRESS
Should the progress fall behind the approved project schedule for reasons other than those that are excusable within the terms of the contract, the Contracting Officer may require provision of a written recovery plan for approval. The plan must detail how progress will be made-up to include which activities will be accelerated by adding additional crews, longer work hours, extra work days, etc.
3.9.1 Artificially Improving Progress
Artificially improving progress by means such as, but not limited to, revising the schedule logic, modifying or adding constraints, shortening activity durations, or changing calendars in the project schedule is prohibited. Indicate assumptions made and the basis for any logic, constraint, duration and calendar changes used in the creation of the recovery plan. Any additional resources, manpower, or daily and weekly work hour changes proposed in the recovery plan must be evident at the work site and documented in the daily report along with the Schedule Narrative Report.
3.9.2 Failure to Perform
Failure to perform work and maintain progress in accordance with the supplemental recovery plan may result in an interim and final unsatisfactory performance rating and may result in corrective action directed by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts, FAR 52.249-10 Default (Fixed-Price Construction), and other contract provisions.
3.9.3 Recovery Schedule
Should the Contracting Officer find it necessary, submit a recovery schedule pursuant to FAR 52.236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts.
3.10 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT
Except for the provision given in the paragraph IMPACT TO EARLY COMPLETION SCHEDULE, float available in the schedule, at any time, may not be considered for the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor including activity and/or project float. Activity float is the number of work days that an activity can be delayed without causing a delay to the "End Project" finish milestone. Project float (if applicable) is the number of work days between the projected early finish and the contract completion date milestone.
3.11 TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA INTO RMS CM
Import the schedule data into the Resident Management System Contractor Mode (RMS CM). This data is considered to be additional supporting data in a form and detail required by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.232-5 Payments under Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The receipt of a proper payment request pursuant to FAR 52.232-27 Prompt Payment for Construction Contracts is contingent upon the Government receiving both acceptable and approvable hard copies and matching application for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
progress payment in RMS CM.
3.12 PRIMAVERA P6 MANDATORY REQUIREMENTS
If Primavera P6 is being used, request a backup file template (.xer) from the Government, if one is available, prior to building the schedule. The following settings are mandatory and required in all schedule submissions to the Government:
a. Activity Codes must be Project Level, not Global or EPS level.
b. Calendars must be Project Level, not Global or Resource level.
c. Activity Duration Types must be set to "Fixed Duration & Units".
d. Percent Complete Types must be set to "Physical".
e. Time Period Admin Preferences must remain the default "8.0 hr/day, 40 hr/week, 172 hr/month, 2000 hr/year". Set Calendar Work Hours/Day to 8.0 Hour days.
f. Set Schedule Option for defining Critical Activities to "Longest Path".
g. Set Schedule Option for defining progressed activities to "Retained Logic".
h. Set up cost loading using a single lump sum labor resource. The Price/Unit must be $1/hr, Default Units/Time must be "8h/d", and settings "Auto Compute Actuals" and "Calculate costs from units" selected.
i. Activity ID's must not exceed 10 characters.
j. Activity Names must have the most defining and detailed description within the first 30 characters.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.1.1 Submittal Information
The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections. Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements.
Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as those used in the contract drawings.
Each submittal is to be in English, complete, and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with Contract requirements. All product information and documents provided in Japanese shall be translated to sufficient detail so native English readers shall be able to understand the major points of the documents provided.
1.1.2 Project Type
The Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) System Manager are to check and approve all items before submittal and stamp, sign, and date indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements are to be clearly identified. Include within submittals items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other such required submittals.
1.1.3 Submision of Submittals
Schedule and provide submittals requiring Government approval before acquiring the material or equipment covered thereby. Pick up and dispose of samples not incorporated into the work in accordance with manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections. Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles as follows:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittals which are required prior to start of construction (work) or the start of the next major phase of the construction on a multi-phase
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Contract, includes schedules, tabular list of data, or tabular list including location, features, or other pertinent information regarding products, materials, equipment, or components to be used in the work.
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
List of proposed Subcontractors
List of proposed products
Construction progress schedule
Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)
Submittal register
Schedule of prices or Earned Value Report
Accident Prevention Plan
Work plan
Quality Control(QC) plan
Environmental protection plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams, and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems, or equipment for some portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the Contract requires extended product warranties.
SD-04 Samples
Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses, or other data pertaining to a part of work.
Design submittals, design substantiation submittals, and extensions of design submittals.
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or system identical to the material, product, or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. Unless specified in another section, testing must have been within three years of date of Contract award for the project.
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily logs and checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system, or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after award of project Contract and clearly name the project.
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier, installer, or Subcontractor through Contractor. The document purpose is to further promote the orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
Text of posted operating instructions.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including special notices and (MSDS) concerning impedances,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
hazards, and safety precautions.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance, and repair of the item.
This data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and maintenance manual or control system.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements, or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Submittals required for Guiding Principle Validation (GPV) or Third Party Certification (TPC).
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction Contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also, submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of construction on a multi-phase Contract.
1.2.2 Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.
1.2.3 Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by Contract documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction, materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that shall review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with this section.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittal Register; G
Submittal Register Monthly Update; G
One copy of the submittal register monthly update for the task order shall be submitted together with the monthly progress payment requests.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
1.4.1 Government Approved (G)
Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings."
1.4.2 For Information Only
Submittals not requiring Government approval shall be for information only. They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the Contract Clause referred to above.
1.5 PREPARATION
1.5.1 Transmittal Form
Use the attached sample transmittal form in Attachment 01 33 00-A ENG FORM 4025-R for submitting both Government approved and information only submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms are included in the QCS software that the Contractor is required to use for this Contract. Properly complete this form by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted. Exercise special care to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and sheet number of the Contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
1.5.2 Identifying Submittals
When submittals are provided by a Subcontractor, the Prime Contractor is to prepare, review and stamp with Contractor's approval all specified submittals prior to submitting for Government approval.
Identify submittals, except sample installations and sample panels, with the following information permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically, with the following:
a. Project title and location.
b. Construction Contract number.
c. Date of the drawings and revisions.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of Subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer and any other Subcontractor associated with the submittal.
e. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required.
f. Submittal description (SD) number of each component of submittal.
g. When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description, for example, submittal 18 would become 18A, to indicate resubmission.
h. Product identification and location in project.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5.3 Format of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
When the submittal includes a document that is to be used in the project, or is to become part of the project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply the Contractor's approval stamp to the document itself, but to a separate sheet accompanying the document.
Provide data in the unit of measure used in the contract documents.
1.5.4 Format for SD-02 Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings not less than 210 by 297 mm A4 nor more than 1189 by 841 mm, except for full size patterns or templates. Prepare drawings to accurate size, with scale indicated, unless another form is required. Ensure drawings are suitable for reproduction and of a quality to produce clear, distinct lines and letters, with dark lines on a white background.
a. Include the nameplate data, size, and capacity on drawings. Also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references.
b. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings. Prepare drawings demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Use the same unit of measure for shop drawings as indicated on the contract drawings. Identify materials and products for work shown.
Present 210 by 297 mm shop drawings sized as part of the bound volume for submittals. Present larger drawings in sets.
1.5.4.1 Drawing Identification
Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and dates, in addition to information required in paragraph IDENTIFYING SUBMITTALS.
Number drawings in a logical sequence. Each drawing is to bear the number of the submittal in a uniform location next to the title block. Place the Government contract number in the margin, immediately below the title block, for each drawing.
Reserve a blank space, no smaller than 50 mm on the right-hand side of each sheet for the Government disposition stamp.
1.5.5 Format of SD-03 Product Data
Present product data submittals for each section and as a complete, bound volume. Include a table of contents, listing the page and catalog item numbers for product data.
Indicate, by prominent notation, each product that is being submitted; indicate the specification section number and paragraph number to which it pertains.
1.5.5.1 Product Information
Supplement product data with material prepared for the project to satisfy the submittal requirements where product data does not exist. Identify this material as developed specifically for the project, with information
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and format as required for submission of SD-07 Certificates.
Provide product data in metric dimensions. Where product data are included in preprinted catalogs with English units only, submit metric dimensions on separate sheet.
1.5.5.2 Standards
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry or technical-society reference standards of such organizations as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), ASTM International (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. State on the certificate that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.
1.5.5.3 Data Submission
Collect required data submittals for each specific material, product, unit of work, or system into a single submittal that is marked for choices, options, and portions applicable to the submittal. Mark each copy of the product data identically. Partial submittals will not be accepted for expedition of the construction effort.
Submit the manufacturer's instructions before installation.
1.5.6 Format of SD-04 Samples
1.5.6.1 Sample Characteristics
Furnish samples in the following sizes, unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has prepackaged samples of approximately the same size as specified:
a. Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.
b. Sample of Materials Less Than 50 by 75 mm: Built up to 210 by 297 mm A4 mm.
c. Sample of Materials Exceeding 210 by 297 mm A4: Cut down to 210 by 297 mm A4 and adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.
d. Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 250 mm length or length to be supplied, if less than 250 mm. Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails.
e. Sample Volume of Nonsolid Materials: 750 mL. Examples of nonsolid materials are sand and paint.
f. Color Selection Samples:50 by 100 mm. Where samples are specified for selection of color, finish, pattern, or texture, submit the full set of available choices for the material or product specified. Sizes and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
quantities of samples are to represent their respective standard unit.
g. Sample Panel: 1200 by 1200 mm.
h. Sample Installation: 10 sq m.
1.5.6.2 Sample Incorporation
Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or indicated. Incorporated samples are to be in undamaged condition at the time of use.
Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of any area constituting a sample installation, but remove the notation at the final clean-up of the project.
1.5.6.3 Comparison Sample
Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations in color, finish, pattern, or texture are unavoidable due to nature of the materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle of range. Mark each unit to describe its relation to the range of the variation.
When color, texture, or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and style, include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.
1.5.7 Format of SD-05 Design Data
Provide design data and certificates on 210 by 297 mm A4 paper in a bound volume for submittals containing numerous pages.
1.5.8 Format of SD-06 Test Reports
Provide reports on 210 by 297 mm A4 paper in a complete bound volume.
By prominent notation, indicate each report in the submittal. Indicate the specification number and paragraph number to which each report pertains.
1.5.9 Format of SD-07 Certificates
Provide design data and certificates on 210 by 297 mm A4 paper in a bound volume for submittals containing numerous pages.
1.5.10 Format of SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Present manufacturer's instructions submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume. Include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number on product data. Also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical-society publication references. If supplemental information is needed to clarify the manufacturer's data, submit it as specified for SD-07 Certificates.
Submit the manufacturer's instructions before installation.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5.10.1 Standards
Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry or technical-society reference standards of such organizations as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), ASTM International (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), or Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC), submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. State on the certificate that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.
1.5.11 Format of SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Provide reports in electronic PDF format. Provide reports on 210 by 297 mm A4 paper in a complete bound volume.
By prominent notation, indicate each report in the submittal. Indicate the specification number and paragraph number to which each report pertains.
1.5.12 Format of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data (O&M)
Comply with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for O&M Data format.
1.5.13 Format of SD-11 Closeout Submittals
When the submittal includes a document that is to be used in the project or is to become part of the project record, other than as a submittal, do not apply the Contractor's approval stamp to the document itself, but to a separate sheet accompanying the document.
Provide data in the unit of measure used in the contract documents.
Provide all dimensions in administrative submittals in metric. Where data are included in preprinted material with English units only, submit metric dimensions on separate sheet.
1.5.14 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings
1.5.14.1 Source Drawings
The entire set of source drawing files (DWG) will not be provided to the Contractor. Request the specific Drawing Number for the preparation of shop drawings. Only those drawings requested to prepare shop drawings will be provided. These drawings are provided only after award.
1.5.14.2 Terms and Conditions
Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse is at the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government. The Contractor must make no claim, and waives to the fullest extent permitted
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
by law any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Government, its agents, or its subconsultants that may arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities, or costs, including reasonable attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use of these electronic files.
These electronic source drawing files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between the source drawing files and the corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic source drawing files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the furnished source drawing files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. Use of these source drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of the duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic source drawing files for use in producing construction data related to this contract, remove all previous indication of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).
1.5.15 Electronic File Format
Provide all submittals in electronic format, with the exception of material samples required for SD-04 Samples items. In addition to the electronic submittal, see paragraph titled QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS for number of hard copies required. Compile the submittal file as a single, complete document, to include the Transmittal Form described within. Name the electronic submittal file specifically according to its contents, and coordinate the file naming convention with the Contracting Officer. Electronic files must be of sufficient quality that all information is legible. Use PDF as the electronic format, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Contracting Officer. Generate PDF files from original documents with bookmarks so that the text included in the PDF file is searchable and can be copied. If documents are scanned, optical character resolution (OCR) routines are required. Index and bookmark files exceeding 30 pages to allow efficient navigation of the file. When required, the electronic file must include a valid electronic signature or a scan of a signature.
Electronic submittal documents shall all be attached in RMS CM.
1.6 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Number of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittal Copies
Unless otherwise specified, submit two sets of administrative submittals.
1.6.2 Number of SD-02 Shop Drawing Copies
Submit two copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and approval by a QC organization. Submit two copies of shop drawings requiring review and approval by the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6.3 Number of SD-03 Product Data Copies
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.4 Number of SD-04 Samples
a. Submit two samples, or two sets of samples showing the range of variation, of each required item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by the approving authority and one will be returned to the Contractor.
b. Submit one sample panel or provide one sample installation where directed. Include components listed in the technical section or as directed.
c. Submit one sample installation, where directed.
d. Submit one sample of nonsolid materials.
1.6.5 Number of SD-05 Design Data Copies
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.6 Number of SD-06 Test Report Copies
Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for shop drawings, other than field test results that will be submitted with QC reports.
1.6.7 Number of SD-07 Certificate Copies
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.8 Number of SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Copies
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.6.9 Number of SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Report Copies
Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for shop drawings other than field test results that will be submitted with QC reports.
1.6.10 Number of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Copies
Submit five copies of O&M data to the Contracting Officer for review and approval.
1.6.11 Number of SD-11 Closeout Submittals Copies
Unless otherwise specified, submit two sets of administrative submittals.
1.7 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS
Submittals without a "G" designation must be certified by the QC manager
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and submitted to the Contracting Officer for information-only. Approval of the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals. The Contracting Officer will mark "receipt acknowledged" on submittals for information and will return only the transmittal cover sheet to the Contractor. Normally, submittals for information only will not be returned. However, the Government reserves the right to return unsatisfactory submittals and require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical specifications so prescribe.
1.8 PROJECT SUBMITTAL REGISTER
1.8.1 Submittal Management
Prepare and maintain a submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not change data that is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered by Government; retain data that is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved. As an attachment, provide a submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the specifications. This list may not be all-inclusive and additional submittals may be required. Maintain a submittal register for the project in accordance with Section 01 45 00.15 10 RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE(RMS CM). The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format with the following fields completed, to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage.
Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is required.
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD Number. and type, e.g., SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in each specification section where a material or product is specified. This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting the project requirements.
Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a complete list, including completion of all data columns and all dates on which submittals are received by and returned by the Government.
1.8.2 Preconstruction Use of Submittal Register
Submit the submittal register. Include the QC plan and the project schedule. Verify that all submittals required for the project are listed and add missing submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:
Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project schedule.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for the approving authority to receive submittals.
Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date that Contractor needs approval of submittal.
Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs material delivered to Contractor control.
1.8.3 Contractor Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields with each submittal throughout the contract.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: List of consecutive, Contractor-assigned numbers.
Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.
Column (l) Date submittal transmitted.
Column (q) Date approval was received.
1.8.4 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields:
Column (b) Transmittal Number: List of consecutive, Contractor-assigned numbers.
Column (l) Date submittal was received.
Column (m) through (p) Dates of review actions.
Column (q) Date of return to Contractor.
1.8.5 Action Codes
1.8.5.1 Government Review Action Codes
"A" - "Approved as submitted"; "Completed"
"B" - "Approved, except as noted on drawings"; "Completed"
"C" - "Approved, except as noted on drawings; resubmission required"; "Resubmit"
"D" - "Returned by separate correspondence"; "Completed"
"E" - "Disapproved (See attached)"; "Resubmit"
"F" - "Receipt acknowledged"; "Completed"
"G" - "Other (Specify)"; "Resubmit"
"X" - "Receipt acknowledged, does not comply with contract
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
requirements"; "Resubmit"
1.8.5.2 Contractor Action Codes
DESIGN BID BUILD SUBMITTALS
Submittal Submittal Corresponding RMS – The following Classifications shown Classification SpecsIntact Submittal in UFGS Sections Submittal Register Classifications are Code which is populated in RMS populated in the SI when the Submittal SpecsIntact Register. Submittal Data Software Limitations: File is pulled into (The RMS) software shows one character delineation in the SpecsIntact Submittal Register)
G Submittal requires G GA Government Approval
BLANK Submittal is For BLANK FIO Information Only (FIO) S Submittal is for S S/FIO documentation of Sustainable requirements
1.8.6 Delivery of Copies
Submit an updated electronic copy of the submittal register to the Contracting Officer with each invoice request. Provide an updated Submittal Register monthly regardless of whether an invoice is submitted.
1.9 VARIATIONS
Variations from contract requirements require Contracting Officer approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 Specifications and Drawings for Construction, and will be considered where advantageous to the Government.
1.9.1 Considering Variations
Discussion of variations with the Contracting Officer before submission will help ensure that functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and resubmittals. When contemplating a variation that results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal letters. Failure to point out variations may cause the Government to require rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the Government.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.9.2 Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver a written request to the Contracting Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government. Include the DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
Check the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 for submittals that include variations proposed by the Contractor. Set forth in writing the reason for any variations and note such variations on the submittal. The Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing unnoted variations.
1.9.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, the Contractor warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.
1.9.4 Review Schedule Extension
In addition to the normal submittal review period, a period of 14 additional calendar days will be allowed for the Government to consider submittals with variations.
1.10 SCHEDULING
Schedule and submit concurrently product data and shop drawings covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated. Submit pertinent certifications at the same time. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing, and processing of submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. The Contractor is responsible for additional time required for Government reviews resulting from required resubmittals. The review period for each resubmittal is the same as for the initial submittal.
b. Submittals required by the contract documents are listed on the submittal register. If a submittal is listed in the submittal register but does not pertain to the contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying submittals required by the contract documents but that have been omitted from the register or marked "N/A."
c. Resubmit the submittal register and annotate it monthly with actual submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have been fully approved, no further resubmittal is required.
1.11 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
When approving authority is the Contracting Officer, the Government shall:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
a. Note date on which submittal was received.
b. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with Contract documents.
c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in paragraph REVIEW NOTATIONS and with markings appropriate for action indicated.
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval, stamp and date submittals. Two copies of the submittal shall be retained by the Contracting Officer and one copy of the submittal shall be returned to the Contractor.
1.11.1 Review Notations
Contracting Officer review shall be completed within 30 calendar days after date of submission. Submittals shall be returned to the Contractor with the following notations:
a. Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work covered.
b. Submittals marked "approved as noted" "or approved, except as noted, resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with the work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.
c. Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the Contract requirements or design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until resubmittal is approved.
d. Submittals marked "not reviewed" shall indicate submittal has been previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" shall be returned with an explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with appropriate action, coordination, or change.
1.12 DISAPPROVED OR REJECTED SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the Contract drawings or specifications; notice as required under the Contract clause CHANGES, is to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.13 APPROVED/ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.
Approval or acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this Contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of all work.
After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment shall be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.
1.14 APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and is not be construed to change or modify any Contract requirements. Before submitting samples, assure that the materials or equipment shall be available in quantities required in the project. No change or substitution shall be permitted after a sample has been approved.
Match the approved samples for materials and equipment incorporated in the work. If requested, approved samples, including those which may be damaged in testing, shall be returned to the Contractor, at his expense, upon completion of the Contract. Samples not approved shall also be returned to the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.
Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests shall be sufficient cause for refusal to consider, under this Contract, any further samples of the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to meet Contract requirements shall automatically void previous approvals. Replace such materials or equipment to meet Contract requirements.
Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
1.15 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work shall not be made if required approvals have not been obtained.
1.16 STATUS REPORT ON MATERIALS ORDERS
Within 15 calendar days after notice to proceed, submit, for approval by the Contracting Officer, an initial material status report on all materials orders. This report shall be updated and re-submitted every 30 calendar days as the status on material orders changes.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Report to include list, in chronological order by need date, materials orders necessary for completion of the Contract. The following information shall be required for each material order listed:
a. Material name, supplier, and invoice number.
b. Bar chart line item or CPM activity number affected by the order.
c. Delivery date needed to allow directly and indirectly related work to be completed within the Contract performance period.
d. Current delivery date agreed on by supplier.
e. When item d exceeds item c, the effect that delayed delivery date will have on Contract completion date.
f. When item d exceeds item c, a summary of efforts made by the Contractor to expedite the delayed delivery date to bring it in line with the needed delivery date, including efforts made to place the order (or Subcontract) with other suppliers.
1.17 STAMPS
Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the submittal meets Contract requirements shall be similar to the following:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
______| CONTRACTOR | | | | (Firm Name) | | | | | | | | _____ Approved | | | | | | _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or | | attached sheets(s) | | | | | | | | SIGNATURE: ______| | | | TITLE: ______| | | | DATE: ______| | | |______|
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 33 00 Page 19 U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) DATE TRANSMITTAL NO. TRANSMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS, EQUIPMENT DATA, MATERIAL SAMPLES, OR MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE For use of this form, see ER 415-1-10; the proponent agency is CECW-CE. SECTION I - REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS (This section will be initiated by the contractor) TO: FROM: CONTRACT NO. CHECK ONE: THIS IS A NEW TRANSMITTAL THIS IS A RESUBMITTAL OF TRANSMITTAL
SPECIFICATION SEC. NO. (Cover only one section with each transmittal) PROJECT TITLE AND LOCATION THIS TRANSMITTAL IS FOR: (Check one) FIO GA DA CR DA/CR DA/GA
CONTRACT DOCUMENT VARIATION USACE ITEM SUBMITTAL NO. REFERENCE CONTRACTOR Enter "Y" if ACTION NO. DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL ITEM TYPE CODE OF REVIEW requesting CODE (See (Type size, model number/etc.) SPEC. DRAWING (See Note 8) COPIES CODE a variation (Note 9) Note 3) PARA. NO. SHEET NO. (See Note 6) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
REMARKS I certify that the above submitted items had been reviewed in detail and are correct and in strict conformance with the contract drawings and specifications except as otherwise stated.
NAME OF CONTRACTOR SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR
SECTION II - APPROVAL ACTION ENCLOSURES RETURNED (List by item No.) NAME AND TITLE OF APPROVING AUTHORITY SIGNATURE OF APPROVING AUTHORITY DATE
ENG FORM 4025, MAY 2017 PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE. Page 1 of 2 Attachment 01 33 00-A INSTRUCTIONS
1. Section I will be initiated by the Contractor in the required number of copies.
2. Each Transmittal shall be numbered consecutively. The Transmittal Number typically includes two parts separated by a dash (-). The first part is the specification section number. The second part is a sequential number for the submittals under that spec section. If the Transmittal is a resubmittal, then add a decimal point to the end of the original Transmittal Number and begin numbering the resubmittal packages sequentially after the decimal.
3. The "Item No." for each entry on this form will be the same "Item No." as indicated on ENG FORM 4288-R.
4. Submittals requiring expeditious handling will be submitted on a separate ENG Form 4025-R.
5. Items transmitted on each transmittal form will be from the same specification section. Do not combine submittal information from different specification sections in a single transmittal.
6. If the data submitted are intentionally in variance with the contract requirements, indicate a variation in column h, and enter a statement in the Remarks block describing he detailed reason for the variation.
7. ENG Form 4025-R is self-transmitting - a letter of transmittal is not required.
8. When submittal items are transmitted, indicate the "Submittal Type" (SD-01 through SD-11) in column c of Section I. Submittal types are the following: SD-01 - Preconstruction SD-02 - Shop Drawings SD-03 - Product Data SD-04 - Samples SD-05 - Design Data SD-06 - Test Reports SD-07 - Certificates SD-08 - Manufacturer's Instructions SD-09 - Manufacturer's Field Reports SD-10 - O&M Data SD-11 - Closeout
9. For each submittal item, the Contractor will assign Submittal Action Codes in column g of Section I. The U.S. Army Corps of Engineers approving authority will assign Submittal Action Codes in column i of Section I. The Submittal Action Codes are:
A -- Approved as submitted. F -- Receipt acknowledged. B -- Approved, except as noted on drawings. Resubmission not required. X -- Receipt acknowledged, does not comply with contract requirements, as noted. C -- Approved, except as noted on drawings. Refer to attached comments. G -- Other action required (Specify) Resubmission required. K -- Government concurs with intermediate design. (For D-B contracts) D -- Will be returned by separate correspondence. R -- Design submittal is acceptable for release for construction. (For D-B contracts) E -- Disapproved. Refer to attached comments.
10. Approval of items does not relieve the contractor from complying with all the requirements of the contract.
ENG FORM 4025, MAY 2017 Page 2 of 2 SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 11 00.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Initial Site Conditions Photos 1.11 Key Personnel Qualifications 1.7 G SD-07 Certificates Monthly Progress Photos 1.11 SD-11 Closeout Submittals Construction Completion Photos 1.11 01 32 01.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Project Scheduler Qualifications 1.3 G Preliminary Project Schedule 3.4.1 G Initial Project Schedule 3.4.2 G Periodic Schedule Update 3.6.2 G 01 33 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Submittal Register 1.8 G Submittal Register Monthly G Update 01 35 13 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions Survey 3.1.3 Construction Operations Plan 3.1.3 Schedule of Work 3.1.3 01 35 26 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Accident Prevention Plan (APP) 1.7 G Critical Lift Plan 1.7.2.3 G SD-06 Test Reports Monthly Exposure Reports 1.4 Accident Reports 1.12.2 G
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 1 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 35 26 LHE Inspection Reports 1.12.3 SD-07 Certificates Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) 1.8 G Confined Space Entry Permit 1.9.1 Hot Work Permit 1.9.1 01 45 00.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Contractor Quality Control (CQC) 3.2 G Plan SD-06 Test Reports Verification Statement 3.9.2 01 50 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Construction Site Plan 1.3 G Traffic Control Plan 3.4.1 G Temporary Utility Connections 3.3.2 G Plan 01 57 19 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Preconstruction Survey 1.8.1 Solid Waste Management Permit 1.12 Regulatory Notifications 1.8.2 G Environmental Protection Plan 1.9 G Employee Training Records 1.8.5 Environmental Manager 1.8.4 G Qualifications Waste Determination 3.8.1 G Documentation
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 2 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 57 19 Stormwater Pollution Prevention 3.2.1 G Plan SD-06 Test Reports Laboratory Analysis 3.8.1.1.2 Inspection Reports 3.2.1.1 Solid Waste Management Report 3.8.2.1 Nonhazardous Solid Waste 3.7.2 Diversion Report SD-07 Certificates Employee Training Records 1.8.5 ECATTS Certificate Of 1.6.1.2 G Completion Asbestos Certification 1.7.1 G Lead Certification 1.7.2 G SD-11 Closeout Submittals Disposal Documentation for 3.8.3.4 G Hazardous and Regulated Waste Assembled Employee Training 1.8.5 G Records Solid Waste Management Permit 1.12 G Solid Waste Management Report 3.8.2.1 G Contractor Hazardous Material 3.9.1 G Inventory Log Hazardous Waste/Debris 3.8.3.1 G Management Regulatory Notifications 1.8.2 G
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 3 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 57 19 Sales Documentation 3.8.2.1 G Contractor Certification 3.8.2.1 Environmental Records Binder 1.11 General Use Permitted 1.10 Equipment 01 74 19 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Waste Management Plan 1.6 G SD-11 Closeout Submittals Records 1.7 01 78 00 SD-03 Product Data Warranty Management Plan 1.7.1 G Warranty Tags 1.7.5 Final Cleaning 3.8 Spare Parts Data 1.5 SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions Instructions 1.7.1 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance 3.7 G Manuals SD-11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings 3.1 G Record Drawings 3.3 G As-Built Record of Equipment 1.7.1 G and Materials
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 4 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 78 00 As-Built Record of Equipment 3.6 G and Materials Final Approved Shop Drawings 3.4 G Construction Contract 3.5 G Specifications Interim DD FORM 1354 3.9 G Checklist for DD FORM 1354 3.9 G 01 78 23 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data O&M Database 1.4 G Training Plan 3.1.1 G Training Outline 3.1.3 G Training Content 3.1.2 G SD-11 Closeout Submittals Training Video Recording 3.1.4 G Validation of Training Completion 3.1.6 G 02 41 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Demolition Plan 1.2.2 G Existing Conditions 1.10 SD-07 Certificates Notification 1.6 G 02 56 13 SD-02 Shop Drawings Geomembrane Panel Layout 1.2 Penetrations 3.8 As-Built Drawings 3.10 G SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 5 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
02 56 13 Materials 2.1 G Field Seaming 3.3 G Qualifications 1.4.1 SD-04 Samples Samples 3.4 SD-06 Test Reports Surface Preparation 3.1.1 Non-Destructive Field Seam 3.5.1 Continuity Testing Destructive Field Seam Testing 3.5.2 Destructive Seam Test Repairs 3.6.1 Tests 3.5 SD-07 Certificates Samples 3.4 Materials 2.1 Surface Preparation 3.1.1 Destructive Field Seam Testing 3.5.2 Destructive Seam Test Repairs 3.6.1 Tests 3.5 02 82 13.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan 1.4 G Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan 3.1 G SD-02 Shop Drawings Detailed Drawings 1.4 G SD-03 Product Data
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 6 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
02 82 13.00 10 Asbestos Waste Shipment 3.11.3.1 G Records Weight Bills and Delivery Tickets 1.1 Encapsulants 2.1 G Respiratory Protection Program 1.9.1 G Cleanup and Disposal 3.11 G Qualifications 1.6.1 G Training Program 1.11 Licenses, Permits and 1.8.1 Notifications Asbestos Management Plan 3.11.3.2 G SD-06 Test Reports Exposure Assessment and Air 3.9 Monitoring Local Exhaust System 1.7.3 SD-07 Certificates Local Exhaust System 1.7.3 Encapsulants 2.1 G Medical Surveillance 1.9 Requirements 02 83 13.00 20 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Lead Work Plan 1.5.2.2 G Industrial Hygienist/Private 1.5.1.1 G Qualified Person (IH/PQP) Training Certification 1.5.1.2 G lead waste management plan 1.5.2.8 G
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 7 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
02 83 13.00 20 Medical Examinations 1.5.2.4 G SD-06 Test Reports sampling results 1.5.2.3 G Occupational and Environmental 1.5.2.3 G Assessment Data Report SD-07 Certificates Testing laboratory 1.5.1.3 G Occupant Notification 3.1.1.1 G Third party consultant 1.5.1.4 G qualifications Hazardous waste treatment, 3.5.2.1 storage, or disposal facility (TSD) SD-11 Closeout Submittals hazardous waste manifest 3.5.2.1 G turn-in documents or weight 3.5.2.1 G tickets 03 30 53 SD-02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings 1.4 G SD-03 Product Data Air-Entraining Admixture 2.2.3.1 Accelerating Admixture 2.2.3.2 Water-Reducing or Retarding 2.2.3.3 Admixture Curing Materials 2.2.10 Expansion Joint Filler Strips, 2.2.6 Premolded
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 8 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
03 30 53 Joint Sealants - Field Molded 2.2.7 Sealants Waterstops 2.4.1 Batching and Mixing Equipment 3.1.3.3 Conveying and Placing Concrete 3.2 Formwork 2.2.8 Mix Design Data 2.3 G Ready-Mix Concrete 2.3 Curing Compound 2.4.2 Mechanical Reinforcing Bar 2.2.5 Connectors SD-07 Certificates Cementitious Materials 2.2.1 Pozzolan 2.2.1.2 Aggregates 2.2.2 Delivery Tickets 2.3 05 50 15 SD-02 Shop Drawings Shop Fabricated Metal Items 2.2 G SD-03 Product Data Expansion Anchors 2.1.4 Adhesive Anchors 2.1.4 Gratings 2.1.8 Shop Fabricated Metal Items 2.2 G 26 56 20 SD-02 Shop Drawings Lighting and visual navigation 2.1 G aids
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 9 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
26 56 20 SD-03 Product Data Taxiway edge lights 2.2.1 G Guidance signs 2.3.3 G Obstruction lighting 2.5 G Light bases 2.6 G Isolation transformers 2.8 G Encapsulated isolation 2.8.1 G transformers Frangible couplings 2.9.2.3 G Materials and equipment 1.4.2 G SD-06 Test Reports Visual inspection 3.9.1 Progress testing for series 3.9.5 lighting circuits Counterpoise system test and 3.9.4 inspection Operating test 3.9.2 Distribution conductors, 600-volt 3.9.3 class Electrical acceptance tests 3.9.6 Low-voltage continuity tests 3.9.7 High-voltage insulation resistance 3.9.8 tests SD-07 Certificates Special tools 2.10.1 SD-11 Closeout Submittals
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 10 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
26 56 20 As-built drawings 3.10.2 31 00 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Dewatering Work Plan 1.4.3 G Shoring And Sheeting Plan 1.4.4 G SD-06 Test Reports Testing 3.16 Borrow Site Testing 2.1 31 05 19 SD-03 Product Data Thread 2.1.2 Manufacturing Quality Control 2.2 Sampling and Testing SD-04 Samples Quality Assurance Samples and 3.1 Tests SD-07 Certificates Geotextile 2.1.1 31 11 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Herbicide Application Plan 3.1.1 31 36 00 SD-04 Samples Gabions or Mattresses 1.5.1 Alternative Wire Fasteners 2.1.2 SD-06 Test Reports Gabions or Mattresses 1.5.1 Alternative Wire Fasteners 2.1.2 SD-07 Certificates Stone Fill 2.1.4
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 11 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
32 01 11.51 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Schedule of work 1.3 G Paint Removal Process Plan 3.1 G Waste Collection, Identification 3.4 G and Disposal Plan SD-03 Product Data Mechanical paint removal 1.5 equipment 32 01 19 SD-03 Product Data Equipment 3.1 SD-04 Samples Materials 1.3.1 SD-06 Test Reports Certified Copies of the Test 1.3.1 Reports 32 11 23 SD-03 Product Data Plant, Equipment, and Tools 1.4 SD-06 Test Reports Initial Tests 2.3.1 G In-Place Tests 3.12.1 G 32 12 13 SD-06 Test Reports Sampling and Testing 3.7 32 12 15.13 SD-02 Shop Drawings Placement Plan 2.1 SD-03 Product Data Diamond Grinding Plan 2.1.6
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 12 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
32 12 15.13 Mix Design 2.4 G Contractor Quality Control 3.1 G SD-04 Samples Aggregates 2.2 Asphalt Cement Binder 2.3 SD-06 Test Reports Aggregates 2.2 G QC Monitoring 3.1.3.10 SD-07 Certificates Asphalt Cement Binder 2.3 G Testing Laboratory 3.7 32 13 13.43 SD-03 Product Data Diamond Grinding Plan 2.1.7 G Dowels 2.9.1 G Dowel Bar Assemblies 2.9.2 G Equipment 2.11 G Proposed Techniques 3.1.2 G Forms 3.5.5 G Reinforcement 3.5.6.1 Supports 2.8.1 G Curing Materials 2.6 Surface Sealer Solution 2.14 G SD-05 Design Data Preliminary Proposed 2.13.2 G Proportioning Proportioning Studies 2.13.2 G
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 13 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
32 13 13.43 SD-06 Test Reports Batch Plant Manufacturer's 1.4.1 G Inspection Report Slipform Paver Manufacturer's 1.4.1 G Inspection Report Sampling and Testing 2.1.4.1 G Diamond Grinding of HTC 2.1.7 G Surfaces Mixer Performance (Uniformity) 2.11.2.3 G Testing Repair Recommendations Plan 3.12.1 G SD-07 Certificates Contractor Quality Control Staff 1.4.1 G Laboratory Accreditation and 1.4.3 G Validation Commercial Laboratory 1.4.3.3 G NRMCA Certificate of 2.11 G Conformance 32 13 14.13 SD-03 Product Data Diamond Grinding Plan 2.1.7 G Dowels 2.9.1 G Dowel Bar Assemblies 2.9.2 G Equipment 2.11 Proposed Techniques 3.1.2 G SD-05 Design Data
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 14 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
32 13 14.13 Preliminary Proposed 2.13.2 G Proportioning Proportioning Studies 2.13.2 G SD-06 Test Reports Batch Plant Manufacturer's 1.4.1 G Inspection Report Slipform Paver Manufacturer's 1.4.1 G Inspection Report Sampling and Testing 2.1.4.1 G Diamond Grinding of PCC 2.1.7 G Surfaces Mixer Performance (Uniformity) 2.11.2.3 G Testing Repair Recommendations Plan 3.9.1 G SD-07 Certificates Contractor Quality Control Staff 1.4.1 G Laboratory Accreditation and 1.4.3 Validation Commercial Laboratory 1.4.3.3 G NRMCA Certificate of 2.11 Conformance 32 17 23 SD-03 Product Data Surface Preparation Equipment 2.1.1.2 G List Application Equipment List 2.1.2 G Exterior Surface Preparation 3.2 G
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 15 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
32 17 23 Safety Data Sheets 1.3.1 G Reflective media for airfields 2.2.3.1 Reflective media for roads 2.2.3.2 Waterborne Paint 2.2.1 G Raised Pavement Markers 2.2.2 G Primers and Adhesives SD-06 Test Reports Reflective Media for Airfields 2.2.3.1 G Waterborne Paint 2.2.1 G SD-07 Certificates Qualifications 1.3.2 G Reflective Media for Airfields 2.2.3.1 Waterborne Paint 2.2.1 Volatile Organic Compound 1.3.1 G SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions Waterborne Paint 2.2.1 G 33 40 00 SD-07 Certificates Hydrostatic Test on Watertight 3.5.1.1 Joints Determination of Density 3.5.1.2 Post-Installation Inspection 3.5.2.1.2 Report 33 51 39 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Installation Plan 1.4.2 G SD-02 Shop Drawings Well Construction Drawings 1.4.1 G
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 16 OF 17 PAGES SUBMITTAL REGISTER CONTRACT NO. W912HV-20-B-0004 TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY G SCHEDULE DATES ACTION O V T C T R L A A O A N S R A A C S S C C T M S P I A T T I I P A F / I I V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED I T C A C N TO APPR N TO T A G # A R AUTH/ CONTR/ Y L S R T E C C E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
33 51 39 SD-03 Product Data Well Casing 2.2.1 G Well Screen 2.2.2 G Neat Cement Grout 2.2.3.2 G Bentonite 2.2.3.1 G SD-11 Closeout Submittals Installation Diagram 3.3.2.1 G 33 71 02 SD-02 Shop Drawings Precast underground structures 1.4.1 G SD-03 Product Data Medium voltage cable 2.5 G Medium voltage cable joints 2.7 G Medium voltage cable 2.6 G terminations Precast concrete structures 2.12.2.1 G Sealing Material 2.12.2.4 Pulling-In Irons 3.3.3 Manhole frames and covers 2.12.3 G Handhole frames and covers 2.12.4 G Cable supports 2.13 G SD-06 Test Reports Field Acceptance Checks and 3.16.1 Tests
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 17 OF 17 PAGES FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 35 13
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Landing Areas
"Landing Areas" means:
a. The primary surfaces, comprising the surface of the runway, runway shoulders, and lateral safety zones. The length of each primary surface is the same as the runway length. The width of each primary surface is 457.3 meters (228.6 meters on each side of the runway centerline).
b. The "clear zone" beyond the ends of each runway is the extension of the primary surface for a distance of 228.6 meters beyond each end of each runway.
c. All taxiways, plus the lateral clearance zones along each side for the length of the taxiways (the outer edge of each lateral clearance zone is laterally 76.2 meters from the far or opposite edge of the taxiway (example: a 22.86 meter taxiway must have a combined width and lateral clearance zone of 129.54 meters.)
d. All aircraft parking aprons, plus the area 38.1 meters in width extending beyond each edge all around the aprons.
1.1.2 Safety Precaution Areas
"Safety Precaution Areas" means those portions of approach-departure clearance zones and transitional zones where placement of objects incident to contract performance might result in vertical projections at or above the approach-departure clearance, or the transitional surface.
a. The "approach-departure clearance surface" is an extension of the primary surface and the clear zone at each end of each runway, for a distance of 15240 meters, first along an inclined (glide angle) and then along a horizontal plane, both flaring symmetrically about the runway centerline extended.
(1) The inclined plane (glide angle) begins in the clear zone 61 meters past the end of the runway (and primary surface) at the same elevation as the end of the runway. It continues upward at a slope of 50:1 (0.305 meters vertically for each 15.24 meters horizontally) to an elevation of 152.4 meters above the established airfield elevation. At that point the plane becomes horizontal, continuing at that same uniform elevation to a point 15240 meters longitudinally from the beginning of the inclined plane (glide angle) and ending there.
(2) The width of the surface at the beginning of the inclined plane (glide angle) is the same as the width of the clear zone. It then flares uniformly, reaching the maximum width of 4876.8 meters at
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 13 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the end.
b. The "approach-departure clearance zone" is the ground area under the approach-departure clearance surface.
c. The "transitional surface" is a sideways extension of all primary surfaces, clear zones, and approach-departure clearance surfaces along inclined planes.
(1) The inclined plane in each case begins at the edge of the surface.
(2) The slope of the incline plane is 7:1 (.305 meters vertically for each 2.13 meters horizontally). It continues to the point of intersection with the:
(a) Inner horizontal surface (which is the horizontal plane 45.72 meters above the established airfield elevation); or
(b) Outer horizontal surface (which is the horizontal plane 152.4 meters above the established airfield elevation), whichever is applicable.
d. The "transitional zone" is the ground area under the transitional surface. (It adjoins the primary surface, clear zone, and approach-departure clearance zone.)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submittals with an "S" are for inclusion in the Sustainability eNotebook, in conformance with Section 01 33 29 SUSTAINABILITY REPORTING. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Existing Conditions Survey
Construction Operations Plan
Proposed Construction Obstacle Evaluation Worksheet
Schedule of Work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIRFIELD OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
Airfield obstruction lights must conform to FAA AC 70/7460-1 and have red or white lenses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 HAZARDS TO AIRFIELD OPERATION
In addition to DFARS 252.236-7005 Airfield Safety Precautions, the following paragraphs apply.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 13 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.1 Work in Proximity to Landing Areas
Place nothing upon the landing area or applicable portions of safety precaution areas without authority of the Contracting Officer.
Use of landing areas for purposes other than aircraft operation,is prohibited without permission of the Contracting Officer, and the landing area is closed by order of the Contracting Officer and marked as indicated herein.
Accomplish all construction work on the runways, taxiways, and parking aprons and in the end zones of the runways and 23 m to each side of the runways and taxiways with extreme care regarding the operation of aircraft. Cooperate closely, and coordinate with the Operations Officer and the Contracting Officer. Park equipment in an area designated by the Contracting Officer. Parking of equipment, vehicles, or any type of storage overnight or for any extended period of time in the proximity of the landing areas or taxiways is strictly prohibited. Leave no material in areas where extreme care is to be taken regarding the operation of aircraft.
During periods of active performance of work on the airfield by the Contractor, govern all operations of mobile equipment per the safety provisions.
3.1.2 Contractor Personnel Access
Any Contractor personnel not from Japan or the Unites States requires additional background checks to access the airfield work areas. Flight light work area clearances for non-US and non-Japanese personnel take between 6 months and 1 year for approval.
3.1.3 Schedule of Work/Aircraft Operating Schedules
Schedule work to conform to aircraft operating schedules. The Government will exert every effort to schedule aircraft operations so as to permit the maximum amount of time for the Contractor's activities; however, in the event of emergency, intense operational demands, adverse wind conditions, and other such unforeseen difficulties, the Contractor must cease operations at the specified locations in the aircraft operational area for the safety of the Contractor and military personnel and Government property. Submit a schedule of the work to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to the Operations Officer describing the work to be accomplished; the location of the work, noting distances from the ends of landing areas, taxiways and buildings and other structures as necessary; and dates and hours during which the work is to be accomplished. Keep the approved schedule of work current, and notify the Contracting Officer of any changes prior to beginning each day's work.
Prior to commencement of work, submit the following to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to the Operations Officer:
Existing Conditions Survey Construction Operations Plan Safety Plan
For Existing Conditions Survey, perform a field survey utilizing original as-builds if available showing possible utilities, type of pavement,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 13 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
thickness, airfield lighting, equipment, vehicles, structures, and aircraft in the vicinity of work. RFI should be submitted if questions arise as to the location of appurtenances and who is responsible to move them out of the contractors way. If the site is opened up (in/under construction), the existing survey condition would be updated to include the actual condition of the underlying conditions such as sub base, base, and pavement thickness.
Where flying is controlled, additional permission must be obtained from the control tower operator to enter a landing area unless such area is marked as hazardous to aircraft.
3.1.4 Daytime Markings
During daylight, mark stationary and mobile equipment with international orange and white checkered flags, mark the material, and work with yellow flags.
Vehicles operating in the landing area, must be identified by means of a flag on a staff attached to and flying above the vehicle. Flag size must be not less than one meter square and consist of a checkered pattern of international orange and white squares not less than 300 millimeter on each side. Flags varying in any dimension by not more than 10 percent of the specified dimensions are considered to comply with the stated requirements.
3.1.5 Nighttime Markings
During nighttime, which begins 2-hours before sundown and ends 2-hours after sunrise, mark stationary and mobile equipment and material, and work with battery-operated, low-intensity, red flasher lights. Where the Operations Officer determines that the red flasher lights may confuse pilots approaching for landings, the Operations Officer may direct that the red flasher lights be left off or that the color of the lights be changed.
Light construction and installation must comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights must be operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
No separate payments will be made for lighting and protection necessitated by the safety provisions.
3.1.6 FORCPRO Excercises
FORCPRO exercises. FORCEPRO exercises occur during evening/night hours and require complete flight line blackout (no work). Current working hours are during daytime. Any work required to be completed outside of normal working hours shall be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and around the Installation FORCEPRO schedule.
3.1.7 Excavation
Open only those trenches for which material is on hand and ready for placing therein. As soon as possible after the material has been placed and work approved, backfill and compact the trenches as specified.
Maintain landing areas at all times free from hazards, holes, material piles, or projecting shoulders that might damage tires or landing gear.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 13 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Paved surfaces must be kept clean at all times and free from small stones or other objects which could cause damage to propellers, craft, and personnel.
3.1.8 Contractor Safety Precautions
The Contractor is advised that aircraft operations will produce extremely high noise levels and will induce vibrations in pavements, structures, and equipment in the vicinity, and may result in high velocity flying debris in the area. The Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary protective eye and ear gear and other safety devices for his personnel, for insuring protection of his equipment, and for scheduling the work to eliminate hazards to his personnel and equipment and to prevent damage to work performed by him.
Boundary areas for hazardous work locations and restrictions are defined in FAA AC 150/5300-13. Construction activity within the limits of the boundary areas without approval of the Contracting Officer is prohibited.
Provide a minimum of two aviation red or high intensity white obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 30 meter above ground level.
3.1.9 Radio Contact
Provide necessary battery powered portable radios, including one radio for the tower. During work within the landing area, have an operator (who speaks fluent English) available for radio contact with the tower at all times. Radio frequency must be approved by the tower.
3.1.10 Proposed Construction Obstacle Evaluation Worksheet(OEW)
Prior to beginning any work in a controlled area, provide a completed Proposed Construction Obstacle Evaluation Worksheet for Government review and approval. The contractor is responsible for any edits necessary to the worksheet until it is approved by the installation. Attachment 01 35 13-A provides an example. Note that the content and format of this worksheet may be modified at the discretion of the Installation. The Contractor shall obtain a current version of the installation's OEW from the Contracting Officer.
3.1.11 Construction Operations Plan
Provide a narrative description of all of the proposed activities to occur in controlled areas through the duration of the construction. Example of topics to be included are names and qualifications of AVOC-trained personnel, plan for allowing construction personnel and equipment into and out of controlled areas, permanent and temporary laydown area locations and management, foreign-object-debris (FOD) mitigation measures, control of non-construction vehicles around the construction project site through the detours, waste management, equipment lists, and heavy vehicle equipment lists. Include plan for taxi-way A detour, such as flaggers, barricade type, size, locations, and spacing. This plan should be focused on all construction activities that could have an impact or be impacted by flight line operations. Include figures, such as maps, and detail about equipment, such as size and height. For concrete operations, provide the estimate for the frequency and number of concrete trucks that will enter and exit the controlled area. The contractor shall be responsible to address and incorporate comments on this plan until Government approval.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 13 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.12 Stockpile/Laydown in Controlled Areas
The contractor may use the project area for day-to-day storage of materials to be used for construction. All material storage shall be removed for the controlled area and into the designated contractor laydown areas outside of the controlled areas at the end of each work day. The contractor shall be responsible for preventing damage to adjacent airfield infrastructure, to include trash and other foreign object debris (FOD). Any areas used by the contractor shall be restored to the original or as-designed condition by the end of the contract performance period at no additional cost to the Government.
3.1.13 Dewatering/rerouting of Storm Drainage
Any temporary construction equipment or infrastructure that must remain on the project site after normal working hours shall be approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall ensure that any of this infrastructure does not exceed the height of the adjacent taxiway (such as in the drainage ditch or in a temporary excavation). All storm water shall be directed offsite (either using the existing storm drainage infrastructure or other method deemed appropriate and approved by the Contracting Officer) and no standing storm water is permitted on the airfield. Include plan for dewatering and rerouting existing storm drainage in the Construction Operations plan.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 13 Page 6 Proposed Construction Obstacle Evaluation Worksheet
SUBMIT TO STATION AIRFIELD OPERATIONS. COMPLETE ALL BLOCKS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING CONSTRUCTION PROPOSALS. ALLOW A MINIMUM OF 10 WORKING DAYS FOR A RESPONSE.
1. WHAT TYPE OF OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT IS PROPOSED? (CRANE, EXCAVATOR, DIRT PILE, ANTENNA, TOWER, ETC…)
2. WHAT PROJECT WILL THE OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT SUPPORT?
3. IS THERE A TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT AIRFIELD WAIVER ASSIGNED TO THIS PROJECT?
3A. IF SO, WHAT IS THE AIRFIELD WAIVER NUMBER?
4. WHAT ARE THE DATES AND TIMES THE OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT WILL BE IN PLACE?
5. WILL IT HAVE OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS? IF SO, HOW WILL THEY BE OPERATED? 5A. WILL IT BE LOWERED AT NIGHT? (not applicable for permanent obstacles) 5B. CAN IT BE LOWERED WITHIN 20 MINUTES, SHOULD THIS BE NECESSARY? (not applicable for permanent obstacles) 6. PROVIDE A SHORT JUSTIFICATION ON WHY THIS SPECIFIC OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT IS NEEDED. Attach detailed justification package, project information, etc.
7. ATTACH A DIAGRAM THAT CLEARLY SHOWS THE RELATIONSHIP TO RUNWAY(S) OR TAXIWAY(S)? Attached Not Available LATITUDE: 8. EXACT WGS 84 COORDINATES OF THE PROPOSED OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT REQUESTED? (D-M-S) LONGITUDE:
LATITUDE +/- 8A. ACCURACY OF COORDINATES? (In 100THS of seconds - I.E. .01, .02, ETC) LONGITUDE +/-
8B. SITE GROUND MSL ELEVATION IN FEET FEET (Mean Sea Level (MSL) - in whole foot increments) 8C. ACCURACY OF MEASUREMENT IN 8B VERTICAL TOLERANCE +/- (in whole foot increments) FEET 8D. MAXIMUM DISTANCE FROM THE PROPOSED LOCATION WHERE THE HORIZONTAL TOLERANCE +/- PROPOSED OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT BE PLACED? FEET 8E. HEIGHT AGL OF PROPOSED OBSTACLE IN FEET (Above Ground Level (AGL) - in whole foot increments FEET 8F. ACCURACY OF MEASUREMENT IN 8E AGL TOLERANCE +/- (whole foot increments) FEET 8G. DISTANCE OF OBSTACLE OR EQUIPMENT FROM RUNWAY FEET CENTERLINE IN FEET 8H. DISTANCE FROM RUNWAY THRESHOLD TO THE CENTERLINE ABEAM FEET THE OBSTACLE, IN FEET (Specify which RWY THRESHOLD) TOTAL AMSL HEIGHT 8I. (Add value from 8B + 8E) FEET
8J. TOTAL EFFECTIVE HEIGHT (Add value 8I + 8C + 8F) FEET GRADE/NAME OF REQUESTER:
DUTY PHONE:
DATE:
SURVEYOR NAME:
SURVEY OFFICE & LOCATION:
SURVEYOR TELEPHONE & E-MAIL:
TERPS USE ONLY TRACKING NUMBER:______
Effective 26 Oct 2017 (All previous are versions obsolete) Attachment 01 35 13-A Include supporting documents, diagrams, safety information, and program contacts. FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ASSE/SAFE A10.44 (2014) Control of Energy Sources (Lockout/Tagout) for Construction and Demolition Operations
ASSE/SAFE Z244.1 (2003; R 2014) Control of Hazardous Energy Lockout/Tagout and Alternative Methods
ASSE/SAFE Z359.0 (2012) Definitions and Nomenclature Used for Fall Protection and Fall Arrest
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and Components
ASSE/SAFE Z359.11 (2014) Safety Requirements for Full Body Harnesses
ASSE/SAFE Z359.12 (2009) Connecting Components for Personal Fall Arrest Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.13 (2013) Personal Energy Absorbers and Energy Absorbing Lanyards
ASSE/SAFE Z359.14 (2014) Safety Requirements for Self-Retracting Devices for Personal Fall Arrest and Rescue Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.15 (2014) Safety Requirements for Single Anchor Lifelines and Fall Arresters for Personal Fall Arrest Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 (2007) Minimum Requirements for a Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection Program
ASSE/SAFE Z359.3 (2007) Safety Requirements for Positioning and Travel Restraint Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.4 (2013) Safety Requirements for Assisted-Rescue and Self-Rescue Systems,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Subsystems and Components
ASSE/SAFE Z359.6 (2009) Specifications and Design Requirements for Active Fall Protection Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.7 (2011) Qualification and Verification Testing of Fall Protection Products
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B30.20 (2013; INT Oct 2010 - May 2012) Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices
ASME B30.22 (2010) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.26 (2015; INT Jun 2010 - Jun 2014) Rigging Hardware
ASME B30.3 (2012) Tower Cranes
ASME B30.5 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ASME B30.8 (2010) Floating Cranes and Floating Derricks
ASME B30.9 (2014; INT Feb 2011 - Nov 2013) Slings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM F855 (2015) Standard Specifications for Temporary Protective Grounds to be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 1048 (2003) IEEE Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines
IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 1 2012; INT 1-4 2012; Errata 2 2013; INT 5-7 2013; INT 8-10 2014; INT 11 2015) National Electrical Safety Code
MINISTRY OF HEALTH, LABOUR AND WELFARE, GOVERNMENT OF JAPAN (MHLW)
MHLW Laws (1972; Amendment No. 57 - 2006) Industrial Safety and Health Law
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 10 (2013) Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations
NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National Electrical Code
NFPA 70E (2015; ERTA 1 2015) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces
29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
CPL 2.100 (1995) Application of the Permit-Required Confined Spaces (PRCS) Standards, 29 CFR 1910.146
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Competent Person (CP)
The CP is a person designated in writing, who, through training, knowledge and experience, is capable of identifying, evaluating, and addressing existing and predictable hazards in the working environment or working conditions that are dangerous to personnel, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures with regards to such hazards. Persons designated as CP shall meet requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q for each of the required focus areas relevant to this project.
1.2.2 Competent Person, Confined Space
For CP, Confined Space, reference the competent person requirements as defined EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q.
1.2.3 Competent Person, Cranes and Rigging
For CP, Cranes and Rigging, reference requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q.
1.2.4 Competent Person, Excavation/Trenching
For CP, Excavation/Trenching, reference competent person requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q.
1.2.5 Competent Person, Fall Protection
For CP, Fall Protection, reference the competent person requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2.6 Competent Person, Scaffolding
For CP, Scaffolding, reference the competent person requirements in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q.
1.2.7 Competent Person (CP) Trainer
A competent person trainer as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, who is qualified in the material presented, and who possesses a working knowledge of applicable technical regulations, standards, equipment and systems related to the subject matter on which they are training Competent Persons. A competent person trainer must be familiar with the typical hazards and the equipment used in the industry they are instructing. The training provided by the competent person trainer must be appropriate to that specific industry. The competent person trainer must evaluate the knowledge and skills of the competent persons as part of the training process.
1.2.8 High Risk Activities
High Risk Activities are activities that involve work at heights, crane and rigging, excavations and trenching, scaffolding, electrical work, and confined space entry.
1.2.9 High Visibility Accident
A High Visibility Accident is any mishap which may generate publicity or high visibility.
1.2.10 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)
LHE is a term used to describe cranes, hoists and all other hoisting equipment (hoisting equipment means equipment, including crane, derricks, hoists and power operated equipment used with rigging to raise, lower or horizontally move a load).
1.2.11 Medical Treatment
Medical Treatment is treatment administered by a physician or by registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a physician or registered personnel.
1.2.12 Near Miss
A Near Miss is a mishap resulting in no personal injury and zero property damage, but given a shift in time or position, damage or injury may have occurred (e.g., a worker falls off a scaffold and is not injured; a crane swings around to move the load and narrowly misses a parked vehicle).
1.2.13 Operating Envelope
The Operating Envelope is the area surrounding any crane or load handling equipment. Inside this "envelope" is the crane, the operator, riggers and crane walkers, other personnel involved in the operation, rigging gear between the hook, the load, the crane's supporting structure (i.e. ground or rail), the load's rigging path, the lift and rigging procedure.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2.14 Qualified Person (QP)
The QP is a person designated in writing, who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated their ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or the project.
1.2.15 Qualified Person, Fall Protection (QP for FP)
A QP for FP is a person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, with a recognized degree or professional certificate and with extensive knowledge, training and experience in the fall protection and rescue field who is capable of designing, analyzing, and evaluating and specifying fall protection and rescue systems.
1.2.16 Recordable Injuries or Illnesses
Recordable Injuries or Illnesses are any work-related injury or illness that results in:
a. Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the length of the illness.
b. Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness onset).
c. Restricted work.
d. Transfer to another job.
e. Medical treatment beyond first aid.
f. Loss of consciousness.
g. A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (a) through (f) above.
1.2.17 USACE Property and Equipment
Interpret "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 as Government property and equipment.
1.2.18 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling Equipment Mishap
A LHE accident occurs when any one or more of the eight elements in the operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload; or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane, or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents, even though no material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, or roll over). Document any mishap that meets the criteria described using the Crane High Hazard working group mishap reporting form.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that shall review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Government acceptance, as defined in EM 385-1-1, is required for submittals with a "G designation.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G
Critical Lift Plan; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Monthly Exposure Reports
Accident Reports; G
LHE Inspection Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot Work Permit
1.4 MONTHLY EXPOSURE REPORTS
Provide a Monthly Exposure Report and attach to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both Prime and subcontractor. Failure to submit the report may result in retention of up to 10 percent of the voucher.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this Contract, comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, MHLW Laws, and Host Nation laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.
1.6 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS
1.6.1 Personnel Qualifications
1.6.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
Provide an SSHO that meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 1. Provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one (1) person
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
at each project site to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO or an equally-qualified Alternate SSHO must be at the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The SSHO and Alternate SSHO must have the required training, experience, and qualifications in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 01.A.17, and all associated sub-paragraphs.
If the SSHO is off-site for a period longer than 24 hours, an equally-qualified alternate SSHO must be provided and must fulfill the same roles and responsibilities as the primary SSHO. When the SSHO is temporarily (up to 24 hours) off-site, a Government-approved alternate SSHO shall be on-site with identical responsibilities and requirements as the SSHO. At no time shall work be accomplished without an approved SSHO or Alternate SSHO on-site. A Designated Representative (DR), as identified in the AHA may be used in lieu of an Alternate SSHO, and must be on the project site at all times when work is being performed. Note that the DR is a collateral duty safety position, with safety duties in addition to their full time occupation.
The SSHO shall meet the following additional requirements:
a. A minimum of 5 years safety work on similar projects.
b. 30-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last 5 years. Completion of OSHA construction safety class or equivalent shall be submitted as part of the APP submittal.
Host Nation safety training is considered to meet the equivalent of the 30-hour OSHA construction safety course. The Japan Construction Occupational Safety and Health Association (JCOSHA) provides the construction safety course "Kouji Shunin" Course, or "Shocho" Course for Construction Site Managers" as an equivalent to the 30-hour OSHA construction safety course. The training can be viewed at the JCOSHA website: http://www.kensaibou.or.jp.
c. SSHOs shall maintain competency through having taken 8 hours of documented formal, on-line, or self-study safety and health related coursework every year for the past 5 years. Examples of continuing education activities that meet this requirement are: writing an article, teaching a class, reading/writing professional articles, attendance/participation in professional societies/meetings, etc.
Competency training can be obtained from Japan Construction Occupational Safety and Health Association (JCOSHA) or equivalent. Copies of the competent person training shall be part of the APP submittal.
The completion of the NAVFAC 24-hour EM 385-1-1 Awareness Course for Contractors cannot be used as credit for formal safety training required by EM 385-1-1, para 01.A.17.
1.6.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Manager:
The Contractor Quality Control Manager cannot be the SSHO on this project, even though the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part of the QC duties.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6.1.3 Competent Person Qualifications
Provide Competent Persons in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q and herein. Competent Persons for high risk activities include confined space, cranes and rigging, excavation/trenching, fall protection, and electrical work. The CP for these activities must be designated in writing, and meet the requirements for the specific activity (i.e. competent person, fall protection).
The Competent Person identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program and accepted Accident Prevention Plan, must be on-site at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional expertise is being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent Persons(s) to the Contracting Officer for information in consultation with the Safety Office.
1.6.1.3.1 Competent Person for Confined Space Entry
Provide a Confined Space (CP) Competent Person who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q, and herein. The CP for Confined Space Entry must supervise the entry into each confined space.
1.6.1.3.2 Competent Person for Scaffolding
Provide a Competent Person for Scaffolding who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 22.B.02 and herein.
1.6.1.3.3 Competent Person for Fall Protection
Provide a Competent Person for Fall Protection who meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and herein.
1.6.1.4 Crane Operators/Riggers
Provide Operators meeting the requirements in EM 385-1-1, Section 15.B for Riggers and Section 16.B for Crane Operators. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacities of 22,680 kg or greater, designate crane operators qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a Government agency, or an organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.
1.6.2 Personnel Duties
1.6.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO shall:
a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily production report.
b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports. Report mishaps and near misses.
c. Use OSHA's Form 300 to log work-related injuries and illnesses occurring on the project site for Contractors and Subcontractors.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Post and maintain the Form 300 on the site Safety Bulletin Board.
d. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
e. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including preparatory meetings, and periodic in-progress meetings.
f. Review the APP and AHAs for compliance with EM 385-1-1, and approve, sign, implement and enforce them.
g. Establish a Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System that lists and monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution.
h. Ensure Subcontractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
i. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their material Safety Data Sheets (SDS).
j. Maintain a weekly list of high hazard activities involving energy, equipment, excavation, entry into confined space, and elevation, and be prepared to discuss details during QC Meetings.
k. Provide and keep a record of site safety orientation and indoctrination for Contractor employees, Subcontractor employees, and site visitors.
Failure to perform the above duties shall result in dismissal of the superintendent, QC Manager, and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage. Project work stoppage shall remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement.
1.6.3 Meetings
1.6.3.1 Preconstruction Conference
a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent, site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that shall be developed and implemented during the performance of the Contract. This list of proposed AHAs shall be reviewed at the conference and an agreement shall be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting Officer's Representative as to which phases shall require an analysis. In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal, review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude project delays.
c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP, identified during the Contracting Officer's review, must be corrected, and the APP re-submitted for review prior to the start of construction. Work is not permitted to begin work until an APP is established that is acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6.3.2 Safety Meetings
Conduct safety meetings to review past activities, plan for new or changed operations, review pertinent aspects of appropriate AHA (by trade), establish safe working procedures for anticipated hazards, and provide pertinent Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) training and motivation. Conduct meetings at least once a month for all supervisors on the project location. The SSHO, supervisors, foremen, or CDSOs must conduct meetings at least once a week for the trade workers. Document meeting minutes to include the date, persons in attendance, subjects discussed, and names of individual(s) who conducted the meeting. Maintain documentation on-site and furnish copies to the Contracting Officer on request. Notify the Contracting Officer of all scheduled meetings 7 calendar days in advance.
1.7 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
A qualified person must prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements in EM 385-1-1, Appendix A. The APP must be job-specific and address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP must interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element, and made site-specific. Describe the methods to evaluate past safety performance of potential Subcontractors in the selection process. Also, describe innovative methods used to ensure and monitor safe work practices of Subcontractors. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the Subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their Subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the Contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting Subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP must be signed by an officer of the firm (Prime Contractor senior person), the individual preparing the APP, the on-site superintendent, the designated SSHO, the Contractor Quality Control Manager, and any designated Certified Safety Professional (CSP) or Certified Health Physicist (CIH). The SSHO must provide and maintain the APP and a log of signatures by each Subcontractor foreman, attesting that they have read and understand the APP, and make the APP and log available on-site to the Contracting Officer. If English is not the foreman's primary language, the Prime Contractor must provide an interpreter.
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer including attachment 01 35 26-A "Form A-02 Accident Prevention Plan Checklist" 15 calendar days prior to the date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed without an accepted APP. Once reviewed and accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments shall be enforced as part of the Contract. Disregarding the provisions of this Contract or the accepted APP is cause for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified. Continuously review and amend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the Contract. Changes to the accepted APP must be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and Quality Control Manager. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as they are discovered. Should any severe hazard exposure (i.e. imminent danger) become evident, stop work in
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate and remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34), and the environment.
Copies of the accepted APP shall be maintained at the resident engineer's office and at the job site. Continuously review and amend the APP, as necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the original APP as discovered.
1.7.1 Names and Qualifications
Provide plans in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:
a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training, experience and certifications) of site safety and health personnel designated to perform work on this project to include the designated Site Safety and Health Officer and other competent and qualified personnel to be used. Specify the duties of each position.
b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum, designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection; hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; and personal protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and maintenance.
1.7.2 Plans
Provide plans in the APP in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:
1.7.2.1 Confined Space Entry Plan
Develop a confined or enclosed space entry plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1, and any other federal, Host Nation, and local regulatory requirements identified in this Contract. Identify the qualified person's name and qualifications, training, and experience. Delineate the qualified person's authority to direct work stoppage in the event of hazardous conditions. Include procedure for rescue by Contractor personnel and the coordination with emergency responders. (If there is no confined space work, include a statement that no confined space work exists and none shall be created.)
1.7.2.2 Standard Lift Plan (SLP)
Plan lifts to avoid situations where the operator cannot maintain safe control of the lift. Prepare a written SLP in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.03, using Form 16-2 for every lift or series of lifts (if duty cycle or routine lifts are being performed). The SLP must be developed, reviewed and accepted by all personnel involved in the lift in conjunction with the associated AHA. Signature on the AHA constitutes acceptance of the plan. Maintain the SLP on the LHE for the current lift(s) being made. Maintain historical SLPs for a minimum of three months.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.7.2.3 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment
Provide a Critical Lift Plan as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.01, using Form 16-3. Critical lifts require detailed planning and additional or unusual safety precautions. Develop and submit a critical lift plan to the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days prior to critical lift. Comply with load testing requirements in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F.03.
In addition to the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.02, the critical lift plan must include the following:
a. For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 16.T.
b. Multi-purpose machines, material handling equipment, and construction equipment used to lift loads that are suspended by rigging gear, require proof of authorization from the machine OEM that the machine is capable of making lifts of loads suspended by rigging equipment. Demonstrate that the operator is properly trained and that the equipment is properly configured to make such lifts and is equipped with a load chart.
1.7.2.4 Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan
The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.D and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, be site specific, and address all fall hazards in the work place and during different phases of construction. Address how to protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are exposed to fall hazards above 1.8 m. A competent person or qualified person for fall protection must prepare and sign the plan documentation. Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods employed for every phase of work, roles and responsibilities, assisted rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and monitoring methods. Review and revise, as necessary, the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation as conditions change, but at a minimum every six months, for lengthy projects, reflecting any changes during the course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation at the job site for the duration of the project. Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation in the Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
1.7.2.5 Rescue and Evacuation Plan
Provide a Rescue and Evacuation Plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 21.N and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and include in the FP&P Plan and as part of the APP. Include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility.
1.7.2.6 Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP)
Develop a HECP in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, ASSE/SAFE Z244.1, and ASSE/SAFE A10.44. Submit this HECP as part of the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). Conduct a preparatory meeting and inspection with all effected personnel to coordinate all HECP activities. Document this
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
meeting and inspection in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 12.A.02. Ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies with these procedures.
1.7.2.7 Excavation Plan
Identify the safety and health aspects of excavation, and provide and prepare the plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 25.A and Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
1.8 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
Before beginning each activity, task or Definable Feature of Work (DFOW) involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous project operations, or where a new work crew or Subcontractor is to perform the work, the Contractor(s) performing that work activity must prepare an AHA. AHAs must be developed by the Prime Contractor, Subcontractor, or supplier performing the work, and provided for Prime Contractor review and approval before submitting to the Contracting Officer. AHAs must be signed by the SSHO, Superintendent, QC Manager and the Subcontractor Foreman performing the work. Format the AHA in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 1 or as directed by the Contracting Officer. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 working days prior to the start of each activity task, or DFOW. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to revise and resubmit the AHA if it fails to effectively identify the work sequences, specific anticipated hazards, site conditions, equipment, materials, personnel and the control measures to be implemented.
AHAs must identify competent persons required for phases involving high risk activities, including confined entry, crane and rigging, excavations, trenching, electrical work, fall protection, and scaffolding.
1.8.1 AHA Management
Review the AHA list periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor supervisory safety meeting, and update as necessary when procedures, scheduling, or hazards change. Use the AHA during daily inspections by the SSHO to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the required safety and health controls for that work activity.
1.8.2 AHA Signature Log
Each employee performing work as part of an activity, task or DFOW must review the AHA for that work and sign a signature log specifically maintained for that AHA prior to starting work on that activity. The SSHO must maintain a signature log on site for every AHA. Provide employees whose primary language is other than English, with an interpreter to ensure a clear understanding of the AHA and its contents.
1.9 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
1.9.1 Safety Bulletin Board
Within one calendar day after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method, acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all mandatory information for employee and visitor review, shall be deemed as
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1. Additional items required to be posted include:
a. Confined space entry permit.
b. Hot work permit.
1.9.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System
Establish a SOH deficiency tracking system that lists and monitors the status of SOH deficiencies in chronological order. Use the tracking system to evaluate the effectiveness of the APP. A monthly evaluation of the data must be discussed in the QC or SOH meeting with everyone on the project. The list must be posted on the project bulletin board and updated daily, and provide the following information:
a. Date deficiency identified;
b. Description of deficiency;
c. Name of person responsible for correcting deficiency;
d. Projected resolution date;
e. Date actually resolved.
1.10 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including those listed in the paragraph REFERENCES. Maintain applicable equipment manufacturer's manuals.
1.11 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors shall arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment. Verify and coordinate for on post/installation emergency medical treatment response.
1.12 NOTIFICATIONS AND REPORTS
1.12.1 Mishap Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than twenty-four hours, after any mishaps, including recordable accidents, incidents, and near misses, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, any report of injury, illness, load handling equipment (LHE) or rigging mishaps, or any property damage. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and for notifying fire, law enforcement, and regulatory agencies. Immediate reporting is required for electrical mishaps, to include Arc Flash; shock; uncontrolled release of hazardous energy (includes electrical and non-electrical); load handling equipment or rigging; fall from height (any level other than same surface); and underwater diving in accordance with EM 385-1-1, para 01.D.05 for High Hazard mishaps. These mishaps must be investigated in depth to identify all causes and to recommend hazard control measures.
Within notification include Contractor's name; Contract title; type of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation is conducted. Assist and cooperate fully with the Government's investigation(s) of any mishap.
1.12.2 Accident Reports
a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and illnesses, property damage, and near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the applicable Pacific Ocean Division 265-Series form for Immediate Notification of Accident within 24 hours for all mishaps beyond first aid, property damage, and near miss. The USACE Accident Report ENG 3394 and Preliminary Accident Notification (PAN) forms shall be submitted within 24 hours for Class A or B mishaps or for High Hazard type mishaps in accordance with EM 385-1-1, para 01.D.05 or within 72 hours and provide the required reports to the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer shall provide copies of any required or special forms.
b. Near Misses: Report all "Near Misses" to the GDA, using local mishap reporting procedures, within 24 hrs. The Contracting Officer shall provide the Contractor the required forms. Near miss reports are considered positive and proactive Contractor safety management actions.
c. Conduct an accident investigation for any load handling equipment accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, complete the LHE Accident Report (Crane and Rigging Gear) form, and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer shall provide a blank copy of the accident report form.
1.12.3 LHE Inspection Reports
Submit LHE inspection reports required in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.
1.12.4 Certificate of Compliance and Pre-lift Plan/Checklist for LHE and Rigging
Provide a FORM 16-1 Certificate of Compliance for LHE entering an activity under this contract and in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Post certifications on the crane.
Develop a Standard Lift Plan (SLP) in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.03 using Form 16-2 Standard Pre-Lift Crane Plan/Checklist for each lift planned. Submit SLP to the Contracting Officer for approval within 15 calendar days in advance of planned lift.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.13 HOT WORK
1.13.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (i.e. welding or cutting) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, from the Installation Fire Department. Contractors are required to meet all criteria before a permit is issued. Provide at least two (2) 9kg 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". Extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, and have approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch shall be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of one hour after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in memory the emergency Base Fire Department phone number. Report any fire, no matter how small, to the responsible Base Fire Department immediately.
1.13.2 Work Around Flammable Materials
Obtain services from a qualified Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) or private qualified person (PQP) who has extensive knowledge and experience for "HOT WORK" within or around flammable materials (such as fuel systems or welding/cutting on fuel pipes) or confined spaces (such as sewer wet wells, manholes, or vaults) that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres.
Whenever these materials, except beryllium and chromium (VI), are encountered in indoor operations, local mechanical exhaust ventilation systems that are sufficient to reduce and maintain personal exposures to within acceptable limits must be used and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and supplemented by exceptions noted in EM 385-1-1, Section 06.H.
1.14 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS
Confined space entry must comply with Section 34 of EM 385-1-1, OSHA 29 CFR 1926, OSHA 29 CFR 1910, OSHA 29 CFR 1910.146, and OSHA Directive CPL 2.100. Any potential for a hazard in the confined space requires a permit system to be used. Obtain written permission from the Contracting Officer prior to confined space entry by personnel.
1.14.1 Entry Procedures
Prohibit entry into a confined space by personnel for any purpose, including hot work, until the qualified person has conducted appropriate tests to ensure the confined or enclosed space is safe for the work intended and that all potential hazards are controlled or eliminated and documented. Comply with EM 385-1-1, Section 34 for entry procedures. Hazards pertaining to the space must be reviewed with each employee during review of the AHA.
1.14.2 Forced Air Ventilation
Forced air ventilation is required for all confined space entry operations and the minimum air exchange requirements must be maintained to ensure
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
exposure to any hazardous atmosphere is kept below its action level.
1.14.3 Sewer Wet Wells
Sewer wet wells require continuous atmosphere monitoring with audible alarm for toxic gas detection.
1.14.4 Rescue Procedures and Coordination with Local Emergency Responders
Develop and implement an on-site rescue and recovery plan and procedures. The rescue plan must not rely on local emergency responders for rescue from a confined space.
1.15 SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could be damaged in protected areas.
b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing facilities.
c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK
Comply with EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA, OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.
PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety glasses must be carried/available on each person. Mandatory PPE includes:
a. Hard Hat.
b. Long Pants.
c. Appropriate Safety Shoes.
d. Appropriate Class Reflective Vests.
3.1.1 Worksite Communication
Employees working alone in a remote location or away from other workers must be provided an effective means of emergency communications (i.e., cellular phone, two-way radios, land-line telephones or other acceptable means). The selected communication must be readily available (easily within the immediate reach) of the employee and must be tested prior to the start of work to verify that it effectively operates in the area/environment. An employee check-in/check-out communication procedure must be developed to ensure employee safety.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.2 Radiation Safety Requirements
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this Contract, radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material and devices used in accordance with EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocyanates, lead-based paint, and hexavalent chromium, are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting fixtures are allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer approval. The Contractor shall request approval in writing to the Contracting Officer not less than thirty (30) calendar days in advance of any request for exception. Following Contracting Officer approval of any radiation related exception, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting Officer's Representative at least fifteen (15) calendar days in advance to notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.
3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
Contract documents identify materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If material(s), not already indicated in the contract documents, that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance are encountered during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government shall determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government shall direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government may, upon sufficient justification, issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52.243-4, "Changes" or FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site Conditions.”
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply for utility outages at least thirty (30) calendar days in advance. As a minimum, the request shall include the location of the outage, utilities being affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special requirements for electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification section. All utility outages shall be coordinated with Installation officials and are subject to Installation requirements. No utility outages shall be permitted (unless under emergency conditions) until the Contractor receives written approval from the Contracting Officer. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer and the Installation representative to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work shall be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist.
3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Provide and operate a Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP) in
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 12 and paragraph HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL PROGRAM (HECP).
3.4 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection program, for the protection of all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company policy, identify roles and responsibilities, education and training requirements, fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection, storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 and EM 385-1-1, Sections 21.A and 21.D.
3.4.1 Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Protection Program, provide training for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person for fall protection in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C. Document training and practical application of the competent person in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 in the AHA.
3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
Enforce use of personal fall protection equipment and systems designated (to include fall arrest, restraint, and positioning) for each specific work activity in the Site Specific Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard. Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 21.
Provide personal fall protection equipment, systems, subsystems, and components that comply with EM 385-1-1 Section 21.I,ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, ASSE/SAFE Z359.1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, ASSE/SAFE Z359.3, ASSE/SAFE Z359.4, ASSE/SAFE Z359.6, ASSE/SAFE Z359.7, ASSE/SAFE Z359.11, ASSE/SAFE Z359.12, ASSE/SAFE Z359.13, ASSE/SAFE Z359.14, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.15.
3.4.2.1 Additional Personal Fall Protection
In addition to the required fall protection systems, other protection such as safety skiffs, personal floatation devices, and life rings, are required when working above or next to water in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Sections 21.O through 21.O.06. Personal fall protection systems and equipment are required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall protection systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts. The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, travel, or while performing work.
3.4.2.2 Personal Fall Protection Harness
Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. The use of body belts is not acceptable. Harnesses must have a fall arrest attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Snap hooks and carabiners must be self-closing and self-locking, capable of being opened only by at least two consecutive deliberate actions and have a minimum gate strength of 1,633 kg in all directions. Use webbing,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
straps, and ropes made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall arrest equipment must not exceed 1.8 m, unless the proper energy absorbing lanyard is used. Always take into consideration the total fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion), that can occur during a fall, when attaching a person to a fall arrest system. All full body harnesses must be equipped with Suspension Trauma Preventers such as stirrups, relief steps, or similar in order to provide short-term relief from the effects of orthostatic intolerance in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.06.
3.4.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be accessed for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the projected loading.
a. Low Sloped Roofs:
(1) For work within 1.8 m of an edge, on a roof having a slope less than or equal to 4:12 (vertical to horizontal), protect personnel from falling by use of personal fall arrest/restraint systems, guardrails, or safety nets. A safety monitoring system is not adequate fall protection and is not authorized.
(2) For work greater than 1.8 m from an edge, erect and install warning lines in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.
b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on a roof having a slope greater than 4:1 (vertical to horizontal) requires a personal fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This requirement also applies to residential or housing type construction.
3.4.4 Horizontal Lifelines (HLL)
Provide HLL in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.08.d.2. Commercially manufactured horizontal lifelines (HLL) must be designed, installed, certified and used, under the supervision of a qualified person, for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2. The competent person for fall protection may (if deemed appropriate by the qualified person) supervise the assembly, disassembly, use and inspection of the HLL system under the direction of the qualified person. Locally manufactured HLLs are not acceptable unless they are custom designed for limited or site specific applications by a Registered Professional Engineer who is qualified in designing HLL systems.
3.4.5 Guardrails and Safety Nets
Design, install, and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.F.01.
3.4.6 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue or assisted-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and Evacuation Plan within the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.4.
3.5 WORK PLATFORMS
3.5.1 Scaffolding
Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically designed for access is prohibited. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Scaffold platforms greater than 6 m in height must be accessed by use of a scaffold stair system.
b. Ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers are prohibited for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 6 m maximum in height.
c. An adequate gate is required.
d. Employees performing scaffold erection and dismantling must be qualified.
e. Scaffold must be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in the accepted fall protection and prevention plan.
f. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components to safeguard against tipping forward or backward.
g. Special care must be given to ensure scaffold systems are not overloaded.
h. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported scaffold systems for the storage of material are prohibited. The first tie-in must be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest dimension of the scaffold base.
i. Scaffolding other than suspended types must bear on base plates upon wood mudsills (51 mm by 254 mm by 203 mm minimum) or other adequate firm foundation.
j. Scaffold or work platform erectors must have fall protection during the erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more than 1.83 m.
k. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above 1.83 m or above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work.
3.5.2 Elevated Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs)
Workers must be anchored to the basket or bucket in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions (anchoring to the boom may only be used when allowed by the manufacturer and permitted by the CP).
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Lanyards used must be sufficiently short to prohibit worker from climbing out of basket. The climbing of rails is prohibited. Lanyards with built-in shock absorbers are acceptable. Self-retracting devices are not acceptable. Tying off to an adjacent pole or structure is not permitted unless a safe device for 100 percent tie-off is used for the transfer.
Use of AWPs must be operated, inspected, and maintained as specified in the operating manual for the equipment and delineated in the AHA. Operators of AWPs must be designated as qualified operators by the Prime Contractor. Maintain proof of qualifications on site for review and include in the AHA.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE)
a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions. Material handling equipment fitted with personnel work platform attachments are prohibited from traveling or positioning while personnel are working on the platform.
b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be licensed in accordance with OSHA or Host Nation requirements.
3.6.2 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)
a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.
b. Notify the Contracting Officer 15 working days in advance of any LHE entering the activity, in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.02, so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated. Contractor shall provide the GDA 24-hour notice in advance of any LHE entering the site (prior to inspection/tests) so that observation of the Contractor's inspection process and spot checks may be conducted. A copy of the permitting process shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. Contractor's operator must remain with the crane during the spot check. Rigging gear must comply with OSHA, ASME B30.9 Standards and Host Nation safety standards.
c. Comply with the LHE manufacturer's specifications and limitations for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person (as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures.
d. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22 for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes, ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks, ASME B30.9 for slings, ASME B30.20 for below the hook lifting devices and ASME B30.26 for rigging hardware.
e. Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above 90 percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines, operators and riggers must be alert to this special hazard and follow the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 11, and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22 as applicable.
g. Do not use crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane. Additionally, submit a specific AHA for this work to the Contracting Officer. Ensure the activity and AHA are thoroughly reviewed by all involved personnel.
h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of suspended loads.
j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side loading of the crane is prohibited.
l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel access where accessible areas of the LHE's rotating superstructure poses a risk of striking, pinching or crushing personnel.
m. Maintain inspection records in accordance by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.D, including shift, monthly, and annual inspections, the signature of the person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other identifier of the LHE that was inspected. Records must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.
n. Maintain written reports of operational and load testing in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F, listing the load test procedures used along with any repairs or alterations performed on the LHE. Reports must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.
o. Certify that all LHE operators have been trained in proper use of all safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
p. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of control of the load during lifting operations. At wind speeds greater than 9 m/s, the operator, rigger and lift supervisor must cease all crane operations, evaluate conditions and determine if the lift may proceed. Base the determination to proceed or not on wind calculations per the manufacturer and a reduction in LHE rated capacity if applicable. Include this maximum wind speed determination as part of the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.
3.6.3 Equipment and Mechanized Equipment
a. Proof of qualifications for operator shall be kept on the project site for review.
b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment shall be on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 23 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
EM 385-1-1. Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the AHAs.
3.6.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Explosives shall not be used or brought to the project site without prior written approval from the Contracting Officer. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury to persons or for damage to property due to blasting operations.
Storage of explosives, when permitted on Government property, shall be only where directed and in approved storage facilities. These facilities shall be kept locked at all times except for inspection, delivery, and withdrawal of explosives.
3.7 EXCAVATIONS
Soil classification shall be performed by a competent person in accordance with EM 385-1-1.
3.7.1 Utility Locations
The Contractor shall positively identify underground utilities in the work area and coordinate with the installation utility department. The Contractor shall obtain digging permits prior to start of excavation by contacting the Contracting Officer at least fifteen (15) calendar days in advance.
3.7.2 Utility Location Verification
The Contractor shall scan the construction site with electromagnetic or sonic equipment, and mark the surface of the ground where existing underground utilities are discovered. Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground or encased obstruction not indicated to be specified or removed, but indicated or discovered during scanning in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to be conducted or installed. Verify elevations before installing new work closer than nearest manhole or other structure at which an adjustment in grade can be made. Physically verify underground utility locations, including utility depth, by hand digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent construction work is expected to come within one meter of the underground system.
3.7.3 Utilities Within and Under Concrete, Bituminous Asphalt, and Other Impervious Surfaces
Utilities located within and under concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, parking areas, and the like, are extremely difficult to identify. Whenever Contract work involves chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling through concrete, bituminous asphalt or other impervious surfaces, the existing utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in addition to location and depth verification by the Contractor. The Contractor shall locate utility depth by use of Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR), X-ray, bore scope, or ultrasound prior to the start of demolition and construction. Outages to isolate utility systems must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the Contractor from meeting this requirement.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 24 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.8 ELECTRICAL
Perform electrical work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, Sections 11 and 12.
3.8.1 Conduct of Electrical Work
As delineated in EM 385-1-1, electrical work is to be conducted in a de-energized state unless there is no alternative method for accomplishing the work. In those cases obtain an energized work permit from the Contracting Officer. The energized work permit application must be accompanied by the AHA and a summary of why the equipment/circuit needs to be worked energized. Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Attach temporary grounds in accordance with ASTM F855 and IEEE 1048. Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator is allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method.
When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers are permitted to enter. When work requires work near energized circuits as defined by NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes, insulating gloves, and electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the Contractor's AHA.
3.8.2 Qualifications
Electrical work must be performed by QP personnel with verifiable credentials who are familiar with applicable code requirements. Verifiable credentials consist of State, National and Local Certifications or Licenses that a Master or Journeyman Electrician may hold, depending on work being performed, and must be identified in the appropriate AHA. Journeyman/Apprentice ratio must be in accordance with Host Nation requirements applicable to where work is being performed.
3.8.3 Arc Flash
Conduct a hazard analysis/arc flash hazard analysis whenever work on or near energized parts greater than 50 volts is necessary, in accordance with NFPA 70E.
All personnel entering the identified arc flash protection boundary must be QPs and properly trained in NFPA 70E requirements and procedures. Unless permitted by NFPA 70E, no Unqualified Person is permitted to approach nearer than the Limited Approach Boundary of energized conductors and circuit parts. Training must be administered by an electrically qualified source and documented.
3.8.4 Grounding
Ground electrical circuits, equipment, and enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 to provide a permanent, continuous, and effective path
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 25 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
to ground unless otherwise noted by EM 385-1-1.
Check grounding circuits to ensure that the circuit between the ground and a grounded power conductor has a resistance low enough to permit sufficient current flow to allow the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.
3.8.4.1 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters
Provide ground-fault circuit interrupters for all 120-volt single phase 15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets which are not part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 11.D.05.
3.8.5 Testing
Temporary electrical distribution systems and devices must be inspected, tested and found acceptable for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) protection, polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance before initial use, before use after modification and at least monthly. Monthly inspections and tests must be maintained for each temporary electrical distribution system, and signed by the electrical CP or QP.
3.8.6 Portable Extension Cords
Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings for the tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately removed from service all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords shall meet the requirements of EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70E, and OSHA electrical standards.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 35 26 Page 26 Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist Location (Plant or Facility) Contract Number
Contractor Name Project Name
Inspector Name (Print) Inspector Signature
This checklist serves as a guide only, it does not replace or eliminate the need to comply with the requirements set forth in Engineering Manual 385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements Manual, dated 30 Nov 2014. The references included in this checklist correspond to the applicable sections of EM 385-1-1. Item Description Yes No N/A Remarks (Any NO or N/A item) a. Signature sheet 1. Includes the name, title, signature, telephone number, and qualifications of the Plan Preparer (Qualified person, i.e. corporate safety staff person, QC) 2. Includes the name, title, signature, telephone number, and qualifications of the Plan Approver (e.g. owner, company president, regional vice president) (HTRW activities require approval of a Certified Industrial Hygienist, a Certified Safety Professional may approve the plan for operations involving UST removal where contaminants are known to be petroleum, oils, or lubricants).
3. Includes the name(s), title(s), signature(s), telephone number(s), and qualifications for Plan Concurrence (provide concurrence of other applicable corporate and project personnel (contractor)) (e.g. Chief of Operations, Corporate Chief of Safety, Corporate Industrial Hygienist, project manager or superintendent, project safety professional, project QC.) b. Background information 1. Includes the Contractor Name. 2. Includes the Contract Number. 3. Includes the Project Name. 4a. Includes the Brief Project Description. 4b. Includes a Discription of the Work to be Performed. 4c. Includes the Location of the Project (map). 4d. Includes the Equipment to be Used. 4e. Includes the Anticipated High Risk Activities. 5. Includes the Major Phases of Work Anticipated. (Within these major phases of work identified, activities [includes Definable features of Work (DFOWs) and tasks] to be performed that will require an AHA shall be specifically highlighted. This information can then be used by QC, QA and Safety personnel to track AHA submittals. The AHAs for these activities, tasks of DFOWs are NOT submitted at this time (AHAs created/submitted at this time would not be activity-specific as they are intended to be). > See Sections 01.A.14 and 01.A.15.)
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 1 Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist (cont’d) Item Description Yes No N/A Remarks (Any NO or N/A item) c. Statement of Safety and Health Policy. 1. Provide a copy of current corporate/company Safety and Health Policy Statement, detailing commitment to providing a safe and healthful workplace for all employees. (In addition to the corporate policy statement, a copy of the corporate safety program may provide a portion of the information required by the accident prevention plan.) 2. Includes Contractor’s written safety program goals. 3. Includes Contractor’s written safety program objectives. 4. Includes the Contractor Accident Experience (Copy of OSHA 300 Forms, or equivalent documentation). d. Responsibilities and Lines of Authority. 1. Includes statement of the employer’s ultimate responsibility for the implementation of his SOH program for his own employees, all sub-contractors and all others on the worksite (includes the strict enforcement of the program). 2. Includes the identification and accountability of personnel responsible for safety and health at both the corporate and project level – including their resumes. Qualifications shall be in accordance with Section 01.A.17. (Only official OSHA 30-Hour cards will be accepted or, if equivalent training is provided, appropriate instructor qualifications.) 3. Includes equivalent training to the OSHA 30-Hour classes is being presented as qualification, the training shall cover, as a minimum, the areas discussed in Appendix A, Section 3.d.3.(a-d). 4. Includes the names of Competent (CP) and/or Qualified Person(s) (QP) and proof of competency/qualification to meet specific OSHA CP/QP requirements. (Must include copies of proof of CP/QP). 5. Includes requirements and details of the employer’s Risk Management Process. (USACE uses the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) as part of a total risk management process. Contractors and other individual employer’s may use the AHAs or their own version [Job Safety Analyses (JSAs), Job Hazard Analyses (JHAs), or similar Risk Management assessment tools]. These documents are considered equivalent to, and acceptable substitutes for, the USACE’s AHA provided the data collected is the same as that required by the AHA.) 6. Includes requirements for initial activity-specific AHAs to be submitted and accepted at preparatory meetings, prior to work being performed; 7. Includes requirements that no work by the Contractor shall be performed unless a designated Competent Person/SSHO is present on the job site. 8. Includes policies and procedures regarding non-compliance with safety requirements (to include disciplinary actions for violation of safety requirements). 9. Lines of authority. 10. Includes written company procedures for holding managers and supervisors accountable for safety.
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 2
Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist (cont’d) Item Description Yes No N/A Remarks (Any NO or N/A item) e. Subcontractors and Suppliers. 1. Includes the list of subcontractors and suppliers. (If not known at the time of initial APP submittal, the contractor shall include the following statement in their initial APP: “The subcontractors for the following DFOWs/activities are not known at this time, but additional information will be submitted to the APP for acceptance prior to the start of any activities listed”) 2. Includes safety responsibilities of subcontractors and suppliers. f. Training 1. Includes requirements for new hire SOH orientation training at the time of initial hire of each new employee. 2. Includes requirements for mandatory training and certifications that are applicable to this project (e.g., explosive actuated tools, confined space entry, crane operator, diver, vehicle operator, HAZWOPER training and certification, PPE) and any requirements for periodic retraining / recertification. 3. Includes procedures for periodic safety and health training for supervisors and employees. 4. Includes the requirements for emergency response training. g. Safety and Health Inspections 1. Includes specific assignment of responsibilities for a minimum daily jobsite SOH inspection during periods of work activity. 1a. Includes the name(s) of individual(s) responsible for conducting safety inspections. (e.g., PM, safety professional, QC, supervisors, employees) 1b. Includes proof of inspector's training / qualifications. 1c. Indicates when inspections will be conducted. 1d. Indicates procedures for documentation. (Furnished sample forms upon which inspections will be recorded.) 1e. Indicates deficiency tracking system and follow-up procedures. 2. Includes any external inspections / certifications which may be required. (e.g., US Coast Guard) h. Mishap Reporting and Investigation 1. The plan identifies how, when, and who shall complete the Exposure data (man-hours worked). 2a. The plan identifies how, when, and who shall complete mishap investigations, reports, and logs. (The contractor shall report, thoroughly investigate, and analyze all mishaps occurring incidentally to an operation, project or facility for which this manual is applicable.) 2b. The plan identifies how, when, and who shall make immediate notification of major mishaps. (Mishaps shall be reported as soon as possible but not more than 24 hours afterwards to the KO/COR.) 2c. Includes how, when, and who will provide notice to the KO/COR when corrective actions are completed. (Implement corrective actions as soon as reasonably possible.)
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 3
Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist (cont’d) Based on a risk assessment of contracted activities and on mandatory OSHA compliance programs, the Contractor shall address all applicable safety and occupational health risks and associated compliance plans. Using the EM 385-1-1 as a guide, plans, programs, procedures (assessments and evaluations), may include but not be limited to: (1)Include a project-specific compliance plan, as applicable to the work being performed, and as identified below. The plans shall incorporate project-wide procedures to control hazards to which the employees of all project employers may be exposed. (2) These procedures shall be coordinated with all project employers and shall include project-specific, project-wide emergency response and evacuation procedures, PPE requirements, recordkeeping and reporting requirements, and training requirements. (3) The plans shall be prepared prior to the start of any work activities on the job site (as much as the information can be known at that point in time). The plans shall be updated throughout the life of the project to include changes in personnel, equipment, conditions, etc. Additional revisions shall be incorporated as necessary to reflect changing site conditions, construction methods, personnel roles and responsibilities and construction schedules. (4) No activity (DFOW) shall be started on site until the APP is revised and submitted to the GDA for acceptance, with the site-specific plans, programs and procedures required to complete the project. Item Description Yes No N/A Remarks (Any NO or N/A item) i. Plans (Programs, Procedures, Assessments, and Evaluations) required by the Safety Manual 1. Fatigue Management Plan (01.A.20) 2. Emergency Plans (01.E): (a) Procedures & Test (01.E.01) (b) Spill Plans (01.E.01, 06.A.02) (c) Fire Fighting Plan (01.E.01; 19.A) (d) Posting of Emergency Telephone Numbers (01.E.05) (e) Man overboard/abandon ship (19.A.04) (f) Plan for prevention of alcohol and drug abuse (01.C.02 & Specs) 3. Site Sanitation/Housekeeping Plan (02.B) 4. Medical Support Agreement. Outline on-site medical support and off-site medical arrangements including rescue and medical duties for those employees who are to perform them, and the name(s) of on-site Contractor personnel trained in first aid and CPR. A minimum of two employees shall be certified in CPR and first-aid per shift/site (03.A.01, 03.A.03) 5. Blood-borne Pathogen Program (03.A.05) 6. Exposure Control Plan (03.A.05) 7. Automatic External Defibrillator (AED) Program (03.B.04) 8. Site Layout Plan (04.A) 9. Access/Haul Road Plan (04.B) 10. Hearing Conservation Program (05.C) 11. Respiratory Protection Plan (05.G) 12. Health Hazard Control Program (06.A) 13. Hazard Communication Program (06.B.01) 14. Process Safety Management Plan (06.B.04) 15. Lead Compliance Plan (06.C.02 & Specifications) 16. Asbestos Abatement Plan (06.C.03 & Specifications)
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 4
Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist (cont’d)
Based on a risk assessment of contracted activities and on mandatory OSHA compliance programs, the Contractor shall address all applicable occupational risks and compliance plans. Using the EM 385-1-1 as a guide, plans, programs, procedures (assessments and evaluations), may include but not be limited to: Item Description Yes No N/A Remarks (Any NO or N/A item) i. Plans (Programs, Procedures) continued. 17. Radiation Safety Program (06.F) 18. Abrasive Blasting Plan (06.I) 19. Heat Stress Monitoring Plan (HSMP) (06.J.02) 20. Cold Stress Monitoring Plan (CSMP) (06.J.04) 21. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan (06.L) 22. Mold Remediation Plan (06.L.04) 23. Chromium (VI) Exposure Evaluation (06.M) 24. Crystalline Silica Assessment (06.N.02) 25. Lighting Plan for Night Operations (07.A.06) 26. Traffic Control Plan (08.C.05) 27. Fire Prevention Plan (09.A.01) 28. Wild Land Fire Management Plan (09.L) 29. Arc Flash Hazard Analysis (11.B) 30. Assured Equipment Grounding Control Program (AEGCP), (11.D.05, Appendix E) 31. Hazardous Energy Control Program and Procedures (12.A.01) 32. Standard Pre-Lift Plan – LHE (16.A.03) 33. Critical Lift Plan – LHE (16.H) 34. Naval Architectural Analysis – LHE (Floating) (16.L) 35. Floating Plant Inspection and Certification (19.A.01) 36. Severe Weather Plan for Marine Activities (19.A.03) 37. Emergency Plan for Marine Activities (19.A.04) 38. Man Overboard/Abandon Ship Procedures (19.A.04) 39. Float Plan for Launches, Motorboats, Skiffs (19.F.04) 40. Fall Protection and Prevention Plan (21.D) 41. Demolition/Renovation Plan (to include engineering survey) (23.A) 42. Rope Access Work Plan (24.H) 43. Excavation/Trenching Plan (25.A.01) 44. Fire Prevention and Protection Plan for Underground Construction (26.D.01) 45. Compressed Air Work Plan for Underground Construction (26.I.01) 46. Erection and Removal Plan for Formwork and Shoring (27.C) 47. Precast Concrete Plan (27.D)
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 5
Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist (cont’d)
Based on a risk assessment of contracted activities and on mandatory OSHA compliance programs, the Contractor shall address all applicable occupational risks and compliance plans. Using the EM 385-1-1 as a guide, plans, programs, procedures (assessments and evaluations), may include but not be limited to: Item Description Yes No N/A Remarks (Any NO or N/A item) i. Plans (Programs, Procedures) continued. 48. Lift-slab Plans (27.E) 49. Masonry Bracing Plan (27.F.01) 50. Steel Erection Plan (28.B) 51. Explosives Safety Site Plan (ESSP) (29.A) 52. Blasting Plan (29.A; 26.J) 53. Dive Operations Plan (30.A.14, 30.A.16) 54. Safe Practices Manual for Diving Activities (30.A.15) 55. Emergency Management Plan for Diving (30.A.18) 56. Tree Felling/Maintenance Program (31.A.01) 57. Aircraft/Airfield Construction Safety & Phasing Plan (CSPP) (32.A.02) 58. Aircraft/Airfield Safety Plan Compliance Document (SPCD) (32.A.02) 59. Site Safety and Health Plan (HTRW) (33.B) 60. Confined Space Entry Procedures (34.A.05) 61. Confined Space Program (34.A.06) j. Risk Management Processes (AHAs). Detailed project-specific hazards and controls shall be provided by Activity Hazard Analysis for each activity (DFOW). No work will begin on an activity (DFOW) until the initial AHA has been accepted by the GDA addressing the project-specific hazards. (01.A.14 & 01.A.15) Note: USACE uses the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) as part of a total risk management process. Contractors and other individual employer’s may use the AHAs or their own version [Job Safety Analyses (JSAs), Job Hazard Analyses (JHAs), or similar Risk Management assessment tools]. These documents are considered equivalent to, and acceptable substitutes for, the USACE’s AHA provided the data collected is the same as that required by the AHA. Remarks:
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 6
Form A-02 Date of Inspection U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Accident Prevention Plan Checklist (cont’d) Other Remarks:
ATTACHMENT 01 35 26-A Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number.
AACE INTERNATIONAL (AACE) 1265 Suncrest Towne Centre Drive Morgantown, WV 26505-1876 USA Ph: 304-296-8444 Fax: 304-291-5728 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.aacei.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) 444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 Ph: 202-624-5800 Fax: 202-624-5806 E-Mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA) 3141 Fairview Park Dr, Suite 777 Falls Church, VA 22042 Tel: 703-849-8888 Fax: 703-207-3561 E-mail: [email protected] Internet http://www.aiha.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE) 1800 East Oakton Street Des Plaines, IL 60018 Ph: 847-699-2929 Internet: http://www.asse.org
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235-3098 Ph: 303-794-7711 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.awwa.org
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) 13301 NW 47 Ave Miami, FL 33054 Ph: 888-WELDING, 305-824-1177, 305-826-6192 Fax: 305-826-6195 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.aws.org
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) Two Park Avenue, M/S 10E New York, NY 10016-5990 Ph: 800-843-2763 Fax: 973-882-1717 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI) 2696 Research Park Drive Lexington, KY 40511-8480 Ph: 859-288-4960 Fax: 859-288-4999 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.asphaltinstitute.org
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700 West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 Ph: 877-909-2786 Internet: http://www.astm.org
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA) 14501 George Carter Way, Suite 103 Chantilly, VA 20151-1788 Ph: 703-788-2700 Fax: 703-961-1831 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.cganet.com
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR) University of South California Research Annex 219 3716 South Hope Street Los Angeles, CA 90089-7700 Ph: 213-740-2032 or 866-545-6340 Fax: 213-740-8399 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr
GEOSYNTHETIC INSTITUTE (GSI) 475 Kedron Avenue
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Folsom, PA 19033-1208 Ph: 610-522-8440 Fax: 610-522-8441 Internet: http://www.geosynthetic-institute.org
GREEN SEAL (GS) 1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 827 Washington, DC 20036-5525 Ph: 202-872-6400 Fax: 202-872-4324 Internet: http://www.greenseal.org
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) 445 and 501 Hoes Lane Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141 Ph: 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333 Fax: 732-562-9667 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA) 3050 Old Centre Ave. Suite 102 Portage, MI 49024 Ph: 269-488-6382 Internet: http://www.netaworld.org
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA) 1901 North Moore Street Arlington, VA 22209-1762 Ph: 703-525-1695 Fax: 703-528-2148 Internet: http://www.safetyequipment.org/
MINISTRY OF HEALTH, LABOUR AND WELFARE, GOVERNMENT OF JAPAN (MHLW) 1-2-2 Kasumigaseki, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-8916 JAPAN Ph: 81-3-5253-1111 Internet: http://www.mhlw.go.jp/english/index.html
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM) 800 Roosevelt Road, Bldg C, Suite 312 Glen Ellyn, IL 60137 Ph: 630-942-6591 Fax: 630-790-3095 E-mail: [email protected](Wes Lewis,technical consultant) Internet: http://www.naamm.org
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 900 Arlington, VA 22209 Ph: 703-841-3200 Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02169-7471 Ph: 617-770-3000 Fax: 617-770-0700
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH) 395 E Street, S.W. Suite 9200 Patriots Plaza Building Washington, DC 20201 Ph: 800-232-4636 Fax: 513-533-8347 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA) Manager, Customer Service 900 Spring Street Silver Spring, MD 20910 Ph: 240-485-1165 E-mail: [email protected] (Jacques Jenkins) Internet: http://www.nrmca.org
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE) 400 Commonwealth Drive Warrendale, PA 15096 Ph: 724-776-4970 Fax: 877-606-7323 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.sae.org
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) 1320 N. Courthouse Rd., Suite 200 Arlington, VA 22201 Ph: 703-907-7700 Fax: 703-907-7727 Internet: http://www.tiaonline.org
TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI) 2 East Main Street East Dundee, IL 60118 Ph: 847-649-5555 Fax: 847-649-5678 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.turfgrasssod.org
U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF) Air Force Publishing Distribution Center Ph: 202-404-2438Internet: http://www.e-publishing.af.mil/
U.S. ARMY (DA) U.S. Army Publishing Directorate Ph: 703-614-3634 Internet: http://www.apd.army.mil
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) CRD-C DOCUMENTS available on Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=68 Order Other Documents from: USACE Publications Depot Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD 2803 52nd Avenue
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102 Ph: 301-394-0081 Fax: 301-394-0084 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/ or http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) Order AMS Publications from: AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS) Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch 801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C Gastonia, NC 28054-2193 Ph: 704-810-8871 Fax: 704-852-4189 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm Order Other Publications from: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Program USDA Rural Development, Room 4051-S Mail Stop 1510 1400 Independence Avenue SW Washington, DC 20250-1510 Phone: (202) 720-9540 TTY: (800) 877-8339 (Federal Relay Service) Fax: (202) 720-1725 Internet: http://www.rurdev.usda.gov/utilities_lp.html
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) Order DOD Documents from: Room 3A750-The Pentagon 1400 Defense Pentagon Washington, DC 20301-1400 Ph: 703-571-3343 FAX: 215-697-1462 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.ntis.gov Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications from: Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST) Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP) Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS) Building 4/D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account registration required Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from: Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG) National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS) 1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700 Washington, CD 20005 Ph: 202-289-7800 Fax: 202-289-1092 Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) Ariel Rios Building 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20004 Ph: 202-272-0167 Internet: http://www2.epa.gov/libraries --- Some EPA documents are available only from: National Technical Information Service (NTIS) 5301 Shawnee Road Alexandria, VA 22312 Ph: 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332 Fax: 703-605-6900 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA) Order for sale documents from: Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO) 710 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov Order free documents from: Federal Aviation Administration Department of Transportation 800 Independence Avenue, SW Washington, DC 20591 Ph: 1-866-835-5322 Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA) FHWA, Office of Safety 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE Washington, DC 20590 Ph: 202-366-4000 Internet: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov Order from: Superintendent of Documents U. S. Government Printing Office (GPO) 710 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) General Services Administration 1275 First St. NE Washington, DC 20417 Ph: 202-501-1231 Internet: http://www.gsaelibrary.gsa.gov/ElibMain/home.do Obtain documents from: Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST) Internet: https://assist.dla.mil/online/start/; account
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
registration required
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 8601 Adelphi Road College Park, MD 20740-6001 Ph: 866-272-6272 Fax: 301-837-0483 Internet: http://www.archives.gov Order documents from: Superintendent of Documents U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO) 710 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) 2600 N.W. Lake Road Camas, WA 98607-8542 Ph: 877-854-3577 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.ul.com/ UL Directories available through IHS at http://www.ihs.com
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 42 15
METRIC MEASUREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM SI10 (2010) American National Standard for Use of the International System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System
1.2 GENERAL
This project includes metric units of measurements. The metric units used are the International System of Units (SI) developed and maintained by the General Conference on Weights and Measures (CGPM); the name International System of Units and the international abbreviation SI were adopted by the 11th CGPM in 1960. The following criteria allow both metric and English inch-pound (I-P) measurements to be shown for a product:
a. To subsitute products that are manufactured to an industry recognized rounded metric (hard metric) dimension with I-P products.
b. To indicate industry and/or Government standards, test values or other controlling factors (such as the code requirements where I-P values are needed for clarity).
c. To trace back to the referenced standard(s), test value(s) or code(s).
1.3 USE OF MEASUREMENTS IN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Measurements in drawings and specifications shall be in SI units, with I-P units in parenthesis in cases as indicated in Paragraph GENERAL and as otherwise authorized by the Contracting Officer. Procure the product in SI units unless otherwise authorized by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor is responsible for all associated labor and materials when authorized to substitute one system of units for another and for the final assembly and performance of the specified work and/or products.
1.3.1 Hard Metric
Hard metric measurements are often used for field data such as distance from one point to another or distance above the floor. Products are considered to be hard metric when they are manufactured to metric dimensions or have an industry recognized metric designation.
1.3.2 Soft Metric
a. A soft metric measurement is a non-mathematical, industry related conversion. Soft metric measurements are used for measurements
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 15 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
pertaining to products, test values, and other situations where the I-P units are the standard for manufacture, verification, or other controlling factor.
b. A soft metric measurement is also indicated for products that are manufactured in industry designated metric dimensions but are required by law to allow substitute I-P products.
1.3.3 Neutral
A neutral measurement is indicated by an identifier which has no expressed relation to either an SI or an I-P value (e.g., American Wire Gage (AWG) which indicates thickness but in itself is neither SI nor I-P).
1.4 COORDINATION
Bring discrepancies, such as mismatches or product unavailability, arising from use of both metric and non-metric measurements and discrepancies between the measurements in the specifications and the measurements in the drawings to the attention of the Contracting Officer for resolution.
1.5 RELATIONSHIP TO SUBMITTALS
Submittals for Government approval or for information only covers the SI products actually being furnished for the project. Submit the required drawings and calculations in the same units used in the Contract documents describing the product or requirement unless otherwise instructed or approved. Use ASTM SI10 as the basis for establishing metric measurements required to be used in submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 42 15 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 45 00.00 10
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PAYMENT
Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective Quality Control program, all associated costs shall be included in the applicable CLIN Schedule unit or job prices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; Submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor QC or Design of Record approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Verification Statement
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Establish and maintain an effective quality control (QC) system that complies with FAR 52.246-12 Inspection of Construction. QC consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the Contract requirements. The QC system covers all construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and be keyed to the proposed construction sequence. The project superintendent will be held responsible for the quality of work and is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with the quality requirements specified in the Contract. In this context the highest level manager responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including quality and production is the project superintendent. The project superintendent maintains a physical presence at the site at all times and is responsible for all construction and related activities at the site, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.2 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL (CQC) PLAN
Submit no later than 15 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the requirements FAR 52.246-12 Inspection of Construction. Include the submittal register with CQC Plan submissions. The Government will consider
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
an interim plan for the first 14 days of operation. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the accepted interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan or another interim plan containing the additional work.
3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan
Include, as a minimum, the following to cover all construction-operations, both onsite and offsite, including work by subcontractors fabricators, suppliers and purchasing agents:
a. A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC staff will implement the three phase control system for all aspects of the work specified. Include a CQC System Manager that reports to the project superintendent if the CQC System Manager and project superintendent are separate persons.
b. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a CQC function.
c. A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an authorized official of the firm which describes the responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager, including authority to stop work which is not in compliance with the Contract. Letters of direction to all other various quality control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and responsibilities will be issued by the CQC System Manager. Furnish copies of these letters to the Contracting Officer.
d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents. These procedures must be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name, specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test frequency, and person responsible for each test. (Laboratory facilities approved by the Contracting Officer are required to be used.)
f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests including documentation.
g. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective action. Establish verification procedures that identified deficiencies have been corrected.
h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.
i. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, and is identified by different trades or disciplines, or it is work by the same trade in a different environment. Although each section of the specifications can generally be considered as a definable feature of work, there are
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
frequently more than one definable features under a particular section. This list will be agreed upon during the coordination meeting.
3.2.2 Acceptance of Plan
Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes in the Contractor Quality Control(CQC) Plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified.
3.2.3 Notification of Changes
After acceptance of the CQC Plan, notify the Contracting Officer in writing a minimum of seven (7) days prior of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 COORDINATION MEETING
After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction, and prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer and discuss the Contractor's quality control system. Submit the CQC Plan a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a mutual understanding of the system details must be developed, including the forms for recording the CQC operations,, control activities, testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by the Government, signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer and will become a part of the contract file. There can be occasions when subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual understandings or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures which can require corrective action by the Contractor.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
3.4.1 Personnel Requirements
The requirements for the CQC organization are a Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO), CQC System Manager, and sufficient number of additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and Contract compliance. The SSHO reports directly to a senior project (or corporate) official independent from the CQC System Manager. The SSHO will also serve as a member of the CQC Staff. Personnel identified in the technical provisions as requiring specialized skills to assure the required work is being performed properly will also be included as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's CQC staff maintains a presence at the site at all times during progress of the work and have complete authority and responsibility to take any action necessary to ensure Contract compliance. The CQC staff will be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. Provide adequate office space, filing systems and other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully functional CQC organization. Promptly complete and furnish all letters, material submittals, shop drawing submittals, schedules and all other project documentation to the CQC organization. The CQC organization is responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.4.2 CQC System Manager
Identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work organization that is responsible for overall management of CQC and has the authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. This CQC System Manager is on the site at all times during construction and is employed by the prime Contractor. Identify in the plan an alternate to serve in the event of the CQC System Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate are the same as the CQC System Manager. The CQC System Manager shall report to the assigned Project Manager. Refer to Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, Paragraph "Contractor Quality Control System Manager" for experience requirements.
3.4.3 CQC Personnel
In addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, provide as part of the CQC organization specialized personnel to assist the CQC System Manager for the areas in the table below as applicable. Refer to Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, Paragraph "Contractor Quality Control Personnel" for required personnel. These individuals or specialized technical companies must be responsible to the CQC System Manager; must be physically present at the construction site during work on the specialized personnel's areas of responsibility; must have the necessary education or experience in accordance with the experience matrix listed herein.
Experience Matrix
Area Qualifications
Civil Graduate of an accredited university with an Civil Engineering or Construction Manager degree with 3 years experience in the type of work being performed on this project or technician with 5 yrs related experience, or Non-US degree plus 1 Kyu Doboku Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Civil Engineering Works Management Engineer).
Electrical Graduate of an accredited university with an Electrical Engineering degree with 3 years related experience or person 5 years of experience supervising electrical features of work in the field with a construction company. For Non-US degree plus 1 Kyu Kankouji Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Building Mechanical and Electrical Engineer) or 1 Kyu Denkikouji Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Electric Construction Management Engineer).
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Experience Matrix
Area Qualifications
Structural Graduate of an accredited university with an Civil Engineering degree (with Structural Track or Focus) or Construction Management degree with 3 years experience or technician 5 years of experience supervising structural features of work in the field with a construction company. For Non-US degree plus 1 Kyu Kenchikushi (1st Class Qualified Architect) or 1 Kyu Kenchiku Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Building Construstion Managemnet Engineer).
Architectural Graduate of an accredited university with an Architecture degree with 3 years experience or person with 5 years related experience. Non-US degree plus 1 Kyu Kenchikushi (1st Class Qualified Architect) or 1 Kyu Kenchiku Sekou Kanrigishi (1st Class Building Construction Management Engineer).
Environmental Graduate of accredited university with an Environmental Engineering degree with 3 years experience and refer to Section 01 57 19 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGER.
Submittals Submittal Clerk with 1 year experience
Concrete, Pavements and Soils Materials Technician with 2 years experience for the appropriate area
3.4.4 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
See Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMNTS.
3.4.5 Additional Requirement
In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the Contractor Quality Control(CQC) System Manager and Alternate CQC System Manager are required to have completed the Construction Quality Management (CQM) for Contractors course. If the CQC System Manager does not have a current certification, obtain the CQM for Contractors course certification within 90 days of award. This course is periodically offered by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command and the Army Corps of Engineers. Contact the Contracting Officer for information on the next scheduled class.
The Construction Quality Management Training certificate expires after 5 years. If the CQC System Manager's certificate has expired, retake the course to remain current.
3.4.6 Organizational Changes
Maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary to make changes to the CQC staff, revise the CQC Plan to reflect the changes and submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
Submittals, if needed, have to comply with the requirements in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization is responsible for certifying that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract requirements. When Section 01 91 00.15 10 TOTAL BUILDING COMMISSIONING is included the submittals required by those sections must be coordinated with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES to ensure adequate time is allowed for each type of submittal required.
3.6 CONTROL
CQC is the means by which the Contractor ensures that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers, complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of control are required to be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable feature of the construction work as follows:
3.6.1 Preparatory Phase
This phase is performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work, after all required plans/documents/materials are approved/accepted, and after copies are at the work site. This phase includes:
a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference codes, and standards. Make available during the preparatory inspection a copy of those sections of referenced codes and standards applicable to that portion of the work to be accomplished in the field. Maintain and make available in the field for use by Government personnel until final acceptance of the work.
b. Review of the Contract drawings.
c. Check to assure that all materials and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved.
d. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required control inspection and testing.
f. Examination of the work area to assure that all required preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the Contract.
g. Examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or submitted data, and are properly stored.
h. Review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure safety requirements are met.
i. Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work including repetitive deficiencies. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for that feature of work.
j. Check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.
k. Discussion of the initial control phase.
l. The Government needs to be notified at least 72 hours in advance of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
beginning the preparatory control phase. Include a meeting conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate minutes prepared by the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet contract specifications.
3.6.2 Initial Phase
This phase is accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of work. Accomplish the following:
a. Check work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
b. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance. Verify required control inspection and testing are in compliance with the contract.
c. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample panels as appropriate.
d. Resolve all differences.
e. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity analysis with each worker.
f. The Government needs to be notified at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the initial phase for definable feature of work. Prepare separate minutes of this phase by the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC report. Indicate the exact location of initial phase for definable feature of work for future reference and comparison with follow-up phases.
g. The initial phase for each definable feature of work is repeated for each new crew to work onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met.
3.6.3 Follow-up Phase
Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements, until completion of the particular feature of work. Record the checks in the CQC documentation. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of work which may be affected by the deficient work. Do not build upon nor conceal non-conforming work.
3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same definable features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.7 TESTS
3.7.1 Testing Procedure
Perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements. Upon request, furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and acceptance tests when specified. Procure the services of a Corps of Engineers approved testing laboratory or establish an approved testing laboratory at the project site. Perform the following activities and record and provide the following data:
a. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
b. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and comply with testing standards.
c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.
d. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have been prepared.
e. Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing on the CQC report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference, location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number identifying the test. If approved by the Contracting Officer, actual test reports are submitted later with a reference to the test number and date taken. Provide an information copy of tests performed by an offsite or commercial test facility directly to the Contracting Officer. Failure to submit timely test reports as stated results in nonpayment for related work performed and disapproval of the test facility for this Contract.
3.7.2 Onsite Laboratory
The Government reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control testing laboratory and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the Contractor's testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional cost to the Government.
3.8 COMPLETION INSPECTION
3.8.1 Punch-Out Inspection
Conduct an inspection of the work by the CQC System Manager near the end of the work, or any increment of the work established by a time stated in FAR 52.211-10 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work. Prepare and include in the CQC documentation a punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications, as required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION. Include within the list of deficiencies the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. Make a second inspection the CQC System Manager or staff to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government Pre-Final inspection.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. Ensure that all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government, so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Correct any items noted on the Pre-Final inspection in a timely manner. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph need to be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.
3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting Officer's Representative is required to be in attendance at the final acceptance inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to, those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major commands can also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the Pre-Final inspection. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the final acceptance inspection and include the Contractor's assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the Contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional inspection cost in accordance FAR 52.246-12 Inspection of Construction.
3.9 DOCUMENTATION
3.9.1 Quality Control Activities
Maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality control activities and tests have been performed. Include in these records the work of subcontractors and suppliers on an acceptable form that includes, as a minimum, the following information:
a. The name and area of responsibility of the Contractor/Subcontractor.
b. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for repair.
c. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by whom. When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of work performed each day by NAS activity number.
d. Test and control activities performed with results and references to specifications/drawings requirements. Identify the control phase (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of deficiencies noted, along with corrective action.
e. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings requirements.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
f. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with Contract reference, by whom, and action taken.
g. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.
h. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and instructions or corrective actions.
i. Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and specifications.
3.9.2 Verification Statement
Indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays encountered. Cover both conforming and deficient features and include a statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and workmanship comply with the Contract. Furnish the original and one copy of these records in report form to the Government daily within 24 hours after the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, prepare and submit one report for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work period. All calendar days need to be accounted for throughout the life of the contract. The first report following a day of no work will be for that day only. Reports need to be signed and dated by the Contractor Quality Control(CQC) System Manager. Include copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate quality control personnel within the CQC System Manager Report.
3.10 SAMPLE FORMS
Sample forms can be obtained from the Resident Office or found through Contractor link of the RMS website http://rms.usace.army.mil.
3.11 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. Take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer can issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.00 10 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 45 00.15 10
RESIDENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CONTRACTOR MODE (RMS CM)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
1.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The work of this section is not measured for payment. The Contractor is responsible for the work of this section, without any direct compensation other than the payment received for contract items.
1.3 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
The Government will use the Resident Management System (RMS) to assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The Government accesses the system using the Government Mode of RMS (RMS GM) and the Contractor accesses the system using the Contractor Mode (RMS CM). The term RMS will be used in the remainder of this section for both RMS GM and RMS CM. The joint Government-Contractor use of RMS facilitates electronic exchange of information and overall management of the contract. The Contractor accesses RMS to record, maintain, input, track, and electronically share information with the Government throughout the contract period in the following areas:
Administration Finances Quality Control Submittal Monitoring Scheduling Closeout Import/Export of Data
1.3.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications
For ease and speed of communications, exchange correspondence and other documents in electronic format to the maximum extent feasible. Some correspondence, including pay requests and payrolls, are also to be provided in paper format with original signatures. Paper documents will govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
1.3.2 Other Factors
Other portions of this document have a direct relationship to the reporting accomplished through RMS. Particular attention is directed to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.15 10 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
FAR 52.236-15 Schedules for Construction Contracts; FAR 52.232-27 Prompt Payment for Construction Contracts; FAR 52.232-5 Payments Under Fixed-Priced Construction Contracts; Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE; Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES; Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS; and Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL.
1.4 RMS SOFTWARE
RMS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a Windows-based PC meeting the requirements as specified in paragraph SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. Download, install and be able to utilize the latest version of the RMS software within 7 calendar days of receipt of the Notice to Proceed. RMS software, user manuals, access and installation instructions, program updates and training information are available from the RMS website ( https://rms.usace.army.mil). The Government and the Contractor will have different access authorities to the same contract database through RMS. The common database will be updated automatically each time a user finalizes an entry or change.
1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The following is the recommended system configuration to run the Contractor Mode RMS for full utilization of all features for all types and sizes of contracts. Smaller, less complicated, projects may not require the configuration levels described below. Required configuration also noted below.
Recommended RMS System Requirements
Hardware
Windows-based PC 1.7 GHz i3; AMD A6 3650 GHz or higher processor (REQUIRED) RAM 8 GB
Hard drive disk 100 GB space for sole use by RMS system
Monitor Screen resolution 1366 x 768
Mouse or other pointing device
Windows compatible printer Laser printer must have 4 MB+ of RAM
Connection to the Internet minimum 4 Mbs per user
Software
MS Windows Windows 7 x 64 bit (RMS requires 64 bit O/S) or newer (REQUIRED) Word Processing software Viewer for MS Word 2013, MS Excel 2013 or newer (REQUIRED) E-mail MAPI compatible (REQUIRED)
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.15 10 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Recommended RMS System Requirements
Virus protection software Regularly upgraded with all issued Manufacturer's updates and is able to detect most zero day viruses (REQUIRED)
1.6 CONTRACT DATABASE - GOVERNMENT
The Government will enter the basic contract award data in RMS prior to granting the Contractor access. The Government entries into RMS will generally be related to submittal reviews, correspondence status, and Quality Assurance(QA)comments, as well as other miscellaneous administrative information.
1.7 CONTRACT DATABASE - CONTRACTOR
Contractor entries into RMS establish, maintain, and update data throughout the duration of the contract. Contractor entries generally include prime and subcontractor information, daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule updates and payment requests. RMS includes the ability to import attachments and export reports in many of the modules, including submittals. The Contractor responsibilities for entries in RMS typically include the following items:
1.7.1 Administration
1.7.1.1 Contractor Information
Enter all current Contractor administrative data and information into RMS within 7 calendar days of receiving access to the contract in RMS. This includes, but is not limited to, Contractor's name, address, telephone numbers, management staff, and other required items.
1.7.1.2 Subcontractor Information
Enter all missing subcontractor administrative data and information into RMS CM within 7 calendar days of receiving access to the contract in RMS or within 7 calendar days of the signing of the subcontractor agreement for agreements signed at a later date. This includes name, trade, address, phone numbers, and other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor is listed separately for each trade to be performed.
1.7.1.3 Correspondence
Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office with "H". Letters are numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with "C" or "RFP".
1.7.1.4 Equipment
Enter and maintain a current list of equipment planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and planned equipment inspection dates.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.15 10 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.7.1.5 Reports
Track the status of the project utilizing the reports available in RMS. The value of these reports is reflective of the quality of the data input. These reports include the Progress Payment Request worksheet, Quality Control (QC) comments, Submittal Register Status, and Three-Phase Control worksheets.
1.7.1.6 Request For Information (RFI)
Create and track all Requests For Information (RFI) in the RMS Administration Module for Government review and response.
1.7.2 Finances
1.7.2.1 Pay Activity Data
Develop and enter a list of pay activities in conjunction with the project schedule. The sum of pay activities equals the total contract amount, including modifications. Each pay activity must be assigned to a Contract Line Item Number (CLIN). The sum of the activities assigned to a CLIN equals the amount of each CLIN.
1.7.2.2 Payment Requests
Prepare all progress payment requests using RMS. Update the work completed under the contract at least monthly, measured as percent or as specific quantities. After the update, generate a payment request and prompt payment certification using RMS. Submit the signed prompt payment certification and payment request as well as supporting data either electronically or by hard copy. Unless waived by the Contracting Officer, a signed paper copy of the approved payment certification and request is also required and will govern in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
1.7.3 Quality Control (QC)
Enter and track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control System, QC testing, transferred and installed property and warranties in RMS. Prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements in RMS. Maintain all data on a daily basis. Insure that RMS reflects all quality control methods, tests and actions contained within the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan and Government review comments of same within 7 calendar days of Government acceptance of the CQC Plan.
1.7.3.1 Quality Control (QC) Reports
The Contractor's Quality Control (QC) Daily Report in RMS is the official report. The Contractor can use other supplemental formats to record QC data, but information from any supplemental formats are to be consolidated and entered into the RMS QC Daily Report. Any supplemental information may be entered into RMS as an attachment to the report. QC Daily Reports must be finalized and signed in RMS within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Provide the Government a printed signed copy of the QC Daily Report, unless waived by the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.15 10 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.7.3.2 Deficiency Tracking.
Use the QC Daily Report Module to enter and track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified and entered into RMS by the Contractor or the Government will be sequentially numbered with a QC or QA prefix for tracking purposes. Enter each deficiency into RMS the same day that the deficiency is identified. Monitor, track and resolve all QC and QA entered deficiencies. A deficiency is not considered to be corrected until the Government indicates concurrence in RMS.
1.7.3.3 Three-Phase Control Meetings
Maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial control meetings in RMS. Worksheets for the three-phase control meetings are generated within RMS.
1.7.3.4 Labor and Equipment Hours
Enter labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis. Roll up the labor and equipment exposure data into a monthly exposure report.
1.7.3.5 Accident/Safety Reporting
Both the Contractor and the Government enter safety related comments in RMS as a deficiency. The Contractor must monitor, track and show resolution for safety issues in the QC Daily Report area of the RMS QC Module. In addition, follow all reporting requirements for accidents and incidents as required in EM 385-1-1, Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS and as required by any other applicable Federal, State or local agencies.
1.7.3.6 Definable Features of Work
Enter each feature of work, as defined in the approved CQC Plan, into the RMS QC Module. A feature of work may be associated with a single or multiple pay activities, however a pay activity is only to be linked to a single feature of work.
1.7.3.7 Activity Hazard Analysis
Import activity hazard analysis electronic document files into the RMS QC Module utilizing the document package manager.
1.7.4 Submittal Management
Enter all current submittal register data and information into RMS within 7 calendar days of receiving access to the contract in RMS. The information shown on the submittal register following the specification Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES will already be entered into the RMS database when access is granted. Group electronic submittal documents into transmittal packages to send to the Government, except very large electronic files, samples, spare parts, mock ups, color boards, or where hard copies are specifically required. Track transmittals and update the submittal register in RMS on a daily basis throughout the duration of the contract. Submit hard copies of all submittals unless waived by the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.15 10 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.7.5 Schedule
Enter and update the contract project schedule in RMS by either manually entering all schedule data or by importing the Standard Data Exchange Format (SDEF) file, based on the requirements in Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE.
1.7.6 Closeout
Closeout documents, processes and forms are managed and tracked in RMS by both the Contractor and the Government. Ensure that all closeout documents are entered, completed and documented within RMS.
1.8 IMPLEMENTATION
Use of RMS as described in the preceding paragraphs is mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain contract data within the RMS system. RMS is an integral part of the Contractor's required management of quality control.
1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING
Update the RMS CM database each workday. At least monthly, generate and submit one schedule update. At least one week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.
Make required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by incomplete or incorrect data submittals will not be accepted. The Government will not process progress payments until all required corrections are processed.
1.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
Take corrective action within 7 calendar days after receipt of notice of RMS non-compliance by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 45 00.15 10 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies
FCCCHR Manual (10th Edition) Manual of Cross-Connection Control
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National Electrical Code
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2007; Rev K) Obstruction Marking and Lighting
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Construction Site Plan; G Traffic Control Plan; G Temporary Utility Connections Plan; G
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3 CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details, equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), and access and haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of the fence installation. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or other staging area is desired. Show locations of safety and construction fences, site trailers, construction entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas.
1.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS CERTIFICATE
Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List, attesting that the design, size and make of each backflow preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.
1.4.1 Backflow Tester Certificate
Certification issued by the local regulatory agency attesting that the backflow tester has successfully completed a certification course sponsored by the regulatory agency. Tester must not be affiliated with any company participating in any other phase of this Contract.
1.4.2 Backflow Prevention Training Certificate
Certification recognized by the local authority that states the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours of training in backflow preventer installations. The certificate must be current.
1.5 TYPHOON AND STORM PREPARATIONS
In order to minimize damage to public properties and prevent personal injury, the following actions shall be taken upon declaration of the typhoon conditions described below. Ensure that the construction sites are well-prepared for protection from the damages of heavy rain and strong winds. Develop and establish the necessary procedures to be taken for storm preparation. In Part 1 of the Accident Prevention Plan, provide emergency phone numbers and addresses where at least three Contractor officials may be reached and notified in the event that an immediate typhoon alert is declared.
1.5.1 Tropical Cyclone Conditions of Readiness (TCCOR)
a. TCCOR STORM WATCH: The winds are not forecast to exceed 50 knots (58 mph/26 m/s) sustained (the criteria for "destructive winds") but there still exists a probability of high winds due to the proximity of the storm. High winds may include gusts exceeding 50 knots and/or sustained winds meeting TCCOR 1 Caution criteria. The storm is also close enough to the area that a heightened alert status is necessary in order to rapidly establish elevated TCCOR conditions should the storm deviate from the forecast track. Personnel should follow Standard Operating Procedures for TCCOR Storm Watch and stay alert for any changes to TCCOR status.
When wind gusts of 30 knots (35 mph/16 m/s) or greater are forecast,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the Contractor shall be required to perform general area cleanup and monitor TCCOR levels.
When a local storm warning has been issued, the Contractor competent person and/or SSHO shall determine whether it is necessary to implement manufacturer recommendations for securing the equipment to include Weight Handling Equipment (WHE).
Contractor reviews project site storm preparation plans and discuss plan of action with Contracting Officer's Representative.
b. TCCOR 4: Winds of 50 knots (58 mph/26 m/s) sustained or greater are possible within 72 hours.
When wind gusts of 30 knots (35 mph/16 m/s) or greater are forecast, the Contractor will be required to perform general area cleanup and monitor TCCOR levels.
Cranes shall not be operated when wind speeds at the site attain the maximum wind velocity based on the surface/load ratio recommendations of the manufacturer.
At winds greater than 20 mph (17 knots/9 m/s), the operator, rigger, lift supervisor, and SSHO shall cease all crane operations, evaluate conditions and determineif the lift can proceed with Contracting Officer's Representative acceptance.
All elevated work above 6 ft (1.8 m) shall be risk assessed by the Contractor's competent person and/or SSHO and discussed with the Contracting Officer's Representative for acceptance.
c. TCCOR 3: Winds of 50 knots (58 mph/26 m/s) sustained or greater are possible within 48 hours.
(1) Clean and remove all loose debris and waste including scrap wood and metal, empty barrels, and construction form materials no longer required on the job site, to a safe area for proper disposition.
(2) Secure, tie down, and anchor construction field office and storage facilities, scaffolding, concrete forms and supports, doors, windows, opening covers, stored lumber and other materials, mechanized construction equipment, temporary power lines and supports, and other items that may be blown away or that might cause injury or damage.
(3) Inspect all excavation and trenching work in process, and provide necessary temporary drainage and proper protection and shoring for excavation sides and openings, in order to prevent damage to public roads and facilities by slides or flooding. Accumulation of water in the excavation of structure foundation work shall be controlled and minimized.
(4) Inspect scaffolding or work platforms for loose materials, planking, etc. that could become airborne projectile hazards and secure scaffold netting, tarps, etc. from wind loads.
d. TCCOR 2: Winds of 50 knots (58 mph/ 26 m/s) sustained or greater are possible within 24 hours.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Work required at remote areas such as off-shore facilities or high elevations shall cease immediately and the workers shall be evacuated to a safe area. During TCCOR 2, the Contractor shall continue the actions described in TCCOR 3 above and the construction site shall be inspected for storm preparation by the Contracting Officer's Representative. The Contractor shall request an inspection by calling the Contracting Officer's Representative at the appropriate Japan Engineer District field office.
e. TCCOR 1: Winds of 50 knots (58 mph/26 m/s) sustained or greater are possible within 12 hours.
All work shall cease immediately and the Contractor's representative shall insure that all necessary storm preparations, including the items listed below, are completed.
(1) All electrical circuits and equipment including temporary power lines are cut off and secured against unauthorized use.
(2) Gas cylinders, hot work equipment, and flammable materials properly stored at a safe area.
(3) No igniting source is present.
(4) All workers have been evacuated from the construction site. When TCCOR 1 is declared without the normal progression through TCCOR 3 and/or 2, the Contractor shall take the actions listed in TCCOR 3 above, and also follow the procedures described herein.
f. TCCOR 1 Caution: Winds of 35 to 49 knots (39/17 to 56/25 mph/ m/s) sustained are occurring.
Construction Sites Secured.
g. TCCOR 1 Emergency: Winds of 50 knots (58 mph/26 m/s) sustained or greater are occurring.
Construction Sites Secured.
h. TCCOR 1 Recovery: Winds of 50 knots (58 mph/26 m/s) sustained or greater are no longer forecast to occur. Strong winds may still exist.
Installation personnel begin storm damage assessments and clean up.
i. TCCOR Storm Clear: The storm is over and not forecast to return. Used to inform personnel that the threat of the storm is over, but the storm damamge could still present a danger.
Contractor may resume normal activities. The construction site shall be investigated for all damage caused by the typhoon or high winds, and the result of the investigation shall be furnished in verbal or written form to the Contracting Officer's Representative as soon as practicable.
Complete and submit PODWP 134 Typhoon Damage Report for storm damages or negative report of damage to Emergency Management, Construction Division, and Safety Office.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
j. TCCOR All Clear: The storm is over and not forecast to return, and recovery efforts are complete.
Resume normal activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
2.1.1 Bulletin Board
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered bulletin board not less than 915 by 1220 mm in size for displaying the Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained in the Contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information approved by the Contracting Officer. Locate the bulletin board at the project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.1.2 Project and Safety Signs
Provide one (1) project sign and one (1) safety sign fabricated to size and design as shown in Attachment 01 50 00-A. The signs shall be rigidly formed and erected at location designated by the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of work. A blue-line drawing of different letter sizes and style shall be made available by the Contracting Officer upon request. Prior to painting the sign, submit for approval a sketch, similar to diagram shown in Attachment 01 50 00-A, indicating the actual information for the project. The sketch shall indicate lettering dimensions and locations. The Corps of Engineers castle logo shall be painted red per Attachment 01 50 00-A. Correct the data required by the safety sign daily, with light-colored metallic or non-metallic numerals. No separate payment shall be made for the sign, and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the Contract price for the project. The sign shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. Erect signs within 15 days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed. Correct the data required by the safety sign daily, with light-colored metallic or non-metallic numerals. Upon completion of work under this Contract, the signs shall be removed from the job site and shall remain the property of the Contractor.
2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
2.2.1 Haul Roads
Construct access and haul roads necessary for proper prosecution of the work under this Contract. Construct with suitable grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic are to be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust control must be adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and hauling roads are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Lighting must be adequate to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during any night work operations.
2.2.2 Barricades
Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
hazardous areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic barricades will be required. Securely place barricades clearly visible with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and night.
2.2.3 Temporary Wiring
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70. Include frequent inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
2.2.4 Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements AWWA C511. Provide backflow preventers complete with 65 kg flanged, mounted gate valve and strainer, stainless steel or bronze, internal parts. After installation conduct Backflow Preventer Tests and provide test reports verifying that the installation meets the FCCCHR Manual Standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area designated by the Contracting Officer. This area shall be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking must not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of the government installation.
3.2 TEMPORARY BULLETIN BOARD
Locate the bulletin board at the project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
3.3.1 Payment for Utility Services
The Government shall make all reasonably required utilities available to the Contractor , without charge, from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract. Carefully conserve any utilities.
3.3.2 Meters and Temporary Connections
At the Contractor's expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, provide and maintain necessary temporary connections, distribution lines, and meter bases required to measure the amount of each utility used. Materials may be new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not create unsafe conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards. Submit a Temporary Utility Connections Plan for approval to the Contracting Officer, fifteen (15) working days before making temporary utility connections.
The Contractor shall Furnish the water meter Furnish the electric meter Furnish the backflow preventer
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Install the water meter Install the electric meter Install the backflow preventer
3.3.3 Final Meter Reading
Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the Government, notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, five working days before termination is desired. A final reading shall be taken by the Government. Afterwards, remove all temporary distribution lines, meter bases, meters, and associated appurtenances. Pay all outstanding utility bills before final acceptance of the work by the Government.
3.3.4 Sanitation
Provide and properly maintain temporary toilet facility for use of Contractor personnel. Government toilet facilities are not available to Contractor personnel. Toilet facility shall be constructed to size and design as shown in Attachment 01 50 00-B, where directed. Include provisions for pest control and elimination of odors. Upon completion of the Contract, dispose facility outside the limits of Government-controlled land and at Contractor's expense.
3.3.5 Electricity
The Contractor shall be responsible for all temporary connections required, as well as the removal of these temporary connections upon completion of the project. The Contractor's plan for temporary connections shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer Representative for approval prior to making any temporary connections.
Electrical power system frequencies for MCAS Iwakuni is 60 Hertz (Hz).
3.3.6 Telephone and Data
Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities and data connections.
3.3.7 Obstruction Lighting of Cranes
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 30 meter above ground level. Light construction and installation shall comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights shall be operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.8 Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials daily to minimize potential hazards.
3.4 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS
3.4.1 Maintenance of Traffic
a. Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or interfere in any way with traffic except with written permission of the Contracting Officer at least 30 calendar days prior to the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
proposed modification date, and provide a Traffic Control Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval. The plan must be in accordance with installation regulations. Coordinate with installation officials. Contractor may move oversized and slow-moving vehicles to the worksite once the requirements of the highway authority have been met. Include a schedule of planned road closures in the Inital Project Schedule.
b. Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity that will obstruct traffic.
c. At the Contractor's expense, provide, erect, and maintain: lights, barriers, signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be required by the Life Safety Signage overhead protection authority having jurisdiction.
3.4.2 Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment, the work, and the erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any damage to roads caused by construction operations.
3.4.3 Dust Control
Dust control methods and procedures must be approved by the Contracting Officer. Treat dust abatement on access roads with applications of calcium chloride, water sprinklers, or similar methods or treatment.
3.5 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES
3.5.1 Safety
Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety devices. If entrance into systems serving safety devices is required, the Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it is temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in order to accomplish contract requirements, provide alternative means of protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety devices or equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
3.5.2 Administrative Field Offices
Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.3 Temporary Project Safety and Storage Area Fencing
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project safety and storage area fencing along the construction site and at all open excavations and tunnels to control access by unauthorized people. Fencing shall be able to restrain a force of at least 114 kg. Safety and storage area fencing shall be 1.8 m high wire mesh fence with lockable gates and visibility screening (similar to tennis court screening). Fencing will be required for laydonw area only. Fencing on the flight line is not allowed. Fence posts may be driven, in lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit. Maintain the safety and storage area fencing during the life of the Contract and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the work site.
3.5.4 Storage Area
Do not place or store trailers, materials, or equipment outside the fenced area unless such trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of the construction site but within the installation boundaries. Trailers, equipment, or materials must not be open to public view with the exception of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Do not stockpile materials outside the fence in preparation for the next day's work. Park mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment, cranes, trucks, and like equipment within the fenced area at the end of each work day.
3.5.5 Supplemental Storage Area
Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will designate another or supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers, equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close proximity of the construction site but will be within the installation boundaries. Fencing of materials or equipment will be required at this site. The Contractor is responsible for cleanliness and orderliness of the area used and for the security of any material or equipment stored in this area. Utilities will not be provided to this area by the Government.
3.5.6 Appearance of Trailers
Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material storage purposes must present a clean and neat exterior appearance and be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not be allowed on installation property.
3.5.7 Maintenance of Storage Area
Keep fencing in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Grassed or unpaved areas, which are not established roadways, will be covered with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the Contractor elect to traverse them with construction equipment or other vehicles; gravel gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion. Mow and maintain grass to a maximum height of 100 mm located within the boundaries of the construction site for the duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings, under trailers, and in areas not accessible to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
mowers will be edged or trimmed neatly.
3.5.8 Security Provisions
Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own equipment.
3.5.9 Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building from damage.
3.5.9.1 Building and Site Storm Protection
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property. Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings; removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or any nearby Government property.
3.5.10 CONTRACTOR'S VEHICLE
The use of privately owned vehicle on the site is not allowed. Only Contractor's vehicle with the 400 series plate will be permitted.
3.6 PLANT COMMUNICATION
Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so located that operation by normal voice between these elements is not satisfactory, the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of communication, such as telephone or other suitable devices and made available for use by Government personnel.
3.7 CLEANUP
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store any salvageable materials resulting from demolition activities within the fenced area described above or at the supplemental storage area. Neatly stack stored materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.8 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletin board, signs, barricades, haul roads, and any other temporary products from the site. All tools, equipment, and materials not the property of the Government shall be removed from the premises and properly disposed of off Government property. After removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area, remove the temporary project safety and storage area fencing. Restore areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or material, or other use to the original or better condition.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Remove gravel used to traverse grassed areas and restore the area to its original condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary. Upon completion of the work, notify the Contracting Officer for final inspection.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 50 00 Page 11 Introduction: Construction Project Signs EP 310-1-6a 01 Jun 06
The use of signs to identify Corps All legends are to be die-cut or computer- managed or supervised design, construc- cut in the sizes and typefaces specified tion, and rehabilitation projects for military and applied to the white panel back- is an important part of efforts to keep the ground following the graphic formats public informed of Corps work. For this shown on pages 16-2 and 16-3. The purpose, a construction project sign Communication Red panel on the left package has been adopted. This side of the construction project sign with package consists of two signs: one for Corps Signature (reverse version) is project identification and the other to show screen-printed onto the white back- on-the-job safety performance of the ground. contractor. A display of these two signs is shown on These two signs are to be displayed side the following two pages. Mounting and by side and mounted for reading by fabrication details are provided on page passing viewers. Exact placement 16-4. location will be designated by the contracting officer’s representative. Special applications or situations not covered in these guidelines should be The panel sizes and graphic formats have referred to the district Sign Program been standardized for visual consistency Manager. throughout all Corps operations.
Panels are fabricated using HDO plywood or aluminum with dimensional lumber uprights and bracing. The sign faces are nonreflective vinyl.
16-1
01 50 00-A Page 1 EP 310-1-6a (Modified per ECB 2020-1) Construction Project Identification Sign 01 Jun 06 (ECB modified 1/31/2020)
Below is one sample of the Construction The 2’x 4' section of the sign on the This sign is to be placed with the Safety Project Identification sign showing how left with the full Corps Signature Performance sign shown on the following this panel is to identify military projects. (reverse version) is to be screen- page. Mounting and fabrication details are The graphic format for this 4’x 6' sign printed Communication Red on the provided on page 16-4. panel follows the legend guidelines and white background. The designation of layout as specified below. The large 4’x a sponsor in the area indicated is Special applications or situations not covered 4' section of the panel on the right is to optional with Military construction in these guidelines should be referred to the be white with black legend. signs. district Sign Program Manager.
Post size is 4"x4". Mounting height is 48".
Legend Group 1: One- to two-line description of Corps relationship to project. Color: White Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica Regular Maximum line length: 19”
Legend Group 2: Division or District Name (optional). Placed below 10.5” reverse Signature (6” Castle). Color: White Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica Regular
Legend Group 2a: Army Star emblem. Color: Various
Legend Group 3: One- to three-line project title legend describes the work being done under this contract. Color: Black Typeface: 3" Helvetica Bold Maximum line length: 42"
Legend Group 4: Logo of sponsoring department (military). Color: Various
Legend Groups 5a-b: One- to five-line identification of prime contractors including: type (architect, general contractor, etc.), corporate or firm name, city, state. Use of Legend Group 5 is optional. Color: Black Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica Regular Maximum line length: 21"
All typography is flush left and rag right, upper and lower case with initial capitals only as shown. Letter- and word-spacing to follow Corps standards as specified in Appendix D.
16-2
01 50 00-A Page 2 Safety Performance Sign EP 310-1-6a 01 Jun 06
Each contractor’s safety record is to be title with First Aid logo in the top section mounted to the background to allow for posted on Corps managed or supervised of the sign, and the performance record daily revisions to posted safety perfor- construction projects and mounted with captions are standard for all signs of this mance record. the Construction Project Identification type. Legend groups 2 and 3 below sign specified on page 16-2. identify the project and the contractor and Special applications or situations not are to be placed on the sign as shown. covered in these guidelines should be The graphic format, color, size and type- referred to the district Sign Program faces used on the sign are to be repro- Safety record numbers are mounted on Manager. duced exactly as specified below. The individual metal plates and are screw-
Legend Group 1: Standard two-line title “Safety 3” 33.030” eq. 8” eq. is a Job Requirement” with 8” (outside diameter) Safety Green first aid logo. Color: To match Pantone system 347 Typeface: 3" Helvetica Bold 6” Color: Black 4.5” Legend Group 2: One- to two-line project title legend describes the work being done under this contract and name of host project. 10.5” Color: Black Typeface: 1.5" Helvetica Regular Maximum line length: 42" 2.25” 3” Legend Group 3: One- to two-line identifica- 2.25” tion: name of prime contractor and city, state 3” address. Color: Black 4.875” Typeface: 1.5" Helvetica Regular 4.875” .75” Maximum line length: 42" 4.875” 4.875” Legend Group 4: Standard safety record 4.5” captions as shown. 6.75” Color: Black 3” Typeface: 1.25” Helvetica Regular
Replaceable numbers are to be mounted on 3” 42” 3” white .060 aluminum plates and screw- mounted to background. Color: Black Typeface: 3" Helvetica Regular Plate size: 2.5" x 4.5"
All typography is flush left and rag right, upper and lower case with initial capitals only as shown. Letter- and word-spacing to follow Corps standards as specified in Appendix D.
Sign Legend Panel Post Specification Mounting Color Type Size (A) Size Size Code Height Bkg/Lgd CID-02 various 4’x4’ 4”x4” HDO-3 48” WH/BK-SG
2.25” 2.25” 2.25” 2.25”
.75”
3”
16-3
01 50 00-A Page 3 EP 310-1-6a Fabrication and Mounting Guidelines 01 Jun 06
All Construction Project Identification tions for HDO plywood panel preparation For additional information on the proper signs and Safety Performance signs are are provided in Appendix B. method to prepare sign panel graphics, to be fabricated and installed as de- contact the district Sign Program scribed below. The signs are to be Shown below the mounting diagram is a Manager. erected at a location designated by the panel layout grid with spaces provided for contracting officer representative and project information. Photocopy this page shall conform to the size, format, and and use as a worksheet when preparing typographic standards shown on sign legend orders. pages16-2 and 16-3. Detailed specifica-
The sign panels are to be fabricated from .75" High Density Overlay Plywood. Panel preparation to follow HDO specifications provided in Appendix B.
Sign graphics to be prepared on a white nonreflective vinyl film with positionable adhesive backing.
All graphics except for the Communication Red background with Corps Signature on the 48” project sign are to be die-cut or computer-cut nonreflective vinyl, prespaced legends prepared in the sizes and typefaces specified and applied to the background panel following the graphic formats shown on pages 16-2 and 16-3. 48” The 2’x 4’ Communication Red panel (to match Pantone system 032) with full Corps Signa- ture (reverse version) is to be screen-printed on the white background. Identification of the district or division may be applied under the 18” signature with white cut vinyl letters prepared to Corps standards. Construction Project Identification Sign Legend Group 1: Corps Relationship Drill and insert six (6) .375" T-nuts from the front face of the HDO sign panel. Position 1. holes as shown. Flange of T-nut to be flush 2. with sign face. Legend Group 2: Division/District Name Legend Group 2a: Military/Civil Works Sponsor Apply graphic panel to prepared HDO 1. plywood panel following manufacturers’ 1. instructions. 2. 2.
Sign uprights to be structural grade 4" x 4" Legend Group 3: Project Title treated Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, 1. No.1 or better. Post to be 12' long. Drill six (6) 2. .375" mounting holes in uprights to align with 3. T-nuts in sign panel. Countersink (.5") back of hole to accept socket head cap screw (4" x Legend Group 4: Facility Name .375"). 1. Assemble sign panel and uprights. Imbed 2. assembled sign panel and uprights in 4' hole. Local soil conditions and/or wind loading may Legend Group 5: Contractor/A&E Legend Group 5b: Contractor/A&E require bolting additional 2" x 4" struts on 1. 1. inside face of uprights to reinforce installation as shown. 2. 2. 3. 3. 4. 4. 5. 5.
Safety Performance Sign Legend Group 2: Project Title 1. 2.
Legend Group 3: Contractor/A&E
1. 16-4 2.
01 50 00-A Page 4 Attachment 01 50 00-B FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
JEGS (2018) Japan Environmental Governing Standards
1.2 DEFINITIONS
In some cases, definitions are given only for illustrative purposes. Prevailing JEGS definitions shall be used for environmental compliance requirements.
1.2.1 Aboveground Storage Tank
A portable or fixed POL aboveground storage container as defined in JEGS C9.2.1 with a capacity greater than 55 gallons.
1.2.2 Asbestos Containing Material (ACM)
Any material containing more than one tenth of one percent (0.1%) asbestos by weight.
1.2.3 Bulky Waste
Large items of solid waste such as household appliances, furniture, large auto parts, trees, branches, stumps, and other oversize wastes whose large size precludes or complicates their handling by normal solid waste collection, processing, or disposal methods.
1.2.4 Chemical Wastes
Salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals, and spent products, which serve no purpose.
1.2.5 Class I and II Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I and II ODS are listed in JEGS Chapter 2, Table C2.T1.
1.2.6 Construction and Demolition Waste
The waste building materials, packaging, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations on pavements, houses, commercial buildings, and other structures.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2.7 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste is materials that, if abandoned or disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene), waste thinners, excess paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, excess pesticides, and contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.
1.2.8 Electronics Waste
Electronics waste is discarded electronic devices intended for salvage, recycling, or disposal.
1.2.9 Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment aesthetically, culturally or historically.
1.2.10 Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.
1.2.11 Food Waste
Organic residues generated by the handling, storage, sale, preparation, cooking, and serving of foods (commonly called garbage).
1.2.12 Hazardous Debris
As defined in paragraph SOLID WASTE, debris that contains listed hazardous waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore structure) in accordance with JEGS. Hazardous debris also includes debris that exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste in accordance with JEGS.
1.2.13 Hazardous Materials
Hazardous material is any material that is capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, or the environment if improperly handled, stored, issued, transported, labeled, or disposed because it displays a characteristic listed in JEGS Table C5.T1, "Typical Hazardous Materials Characteristics," or the material is listed in Table AP1.T.4, "List of Hazardous Waste/Substances/Materials". Munitions are excluded.
1.2.14 Hazardous Substances
Any substance having the potential to do serious harm to human health or the environment if spilled or released in reportable quantity. A list of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
these substances and the corresponding reportable quantities is contained in JEGS Appendix 1, AP1.1, "Characteristics of Hazardous Waste and Lists of Hazardous Waste and Hazardous Material."
1.2.15 Hazardous Waste
Hazardous Waste is discarded material that may be solid, semi-solid, liquid, or contained gas, and either exhibits a characteristic of a hazardous waste as defined in JEGS section AP1.T1 through AP1.T4. Excluded from this definition are domestic sewage sludge, household wastes, and medical wastes.
1.2.16 Installation Pest Management Consultant
Installation Pest Management Consultant (IPMC) is the professional DoD pest management personnel located at component headquarters, field operating agencies, major commands, facilities engineering field divisions or activities, or area support activities who provide technical and management guidance for the conduct of installation pest management operations. Some pest management consultants may be designated by their component as certifying officials.
1.2.17 Land Application
Land Application means spreading or spraying discharge water at a rate that allows the water to percolate into the soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers, or discharge into defined drainage areas (includes drainage ditches, streams, rivers, ocean, etc.) must occur. Comply with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
1.2.18 Lead-based Paint (LBP)
Paint or other surface coatings that contain lead greater than or equal to 1.0 milligram per square centimeter, or 0.5 percent by weight, or 5,000 ppm by weight.
1.2.19 Oily Wastes
Oily wastes are those materials that are, or were, mixed with Petroleum, Oils, and Lubricants (POLs) and have become separated from those POLs. Oily wastes also means materials, including wastewaters, centrifuge solids, filter residues or sludges, bottom sediments, tank bottoms, and sorbents which have come into contact with and have been contaminated by, POLs and may be appropriately tested and discarded in a manner which is in compliance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements..
This definition includes materials such as oily rags, "kitty litter" sorbent clay and organic sorbent material. These materials may be land filled provided that: It is not prohibited in JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements; the amount generated is "de minimus" (a small amount); it is the result of minor leaks or spills resulting from normal process operations; and free-flowing oil has been removed to the practicable extent possible. Large quantities of this material, generated as a result of a major spill or in lieu of proper maintenance of the processing equipment, are a solid waste. As a solid waste, perform a hazardous waste determination prior to disposal. As this can be an
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
expensive process, it is recommended that this type of waste be minimized through good housekeeping practices and employee education.
1.2.20 Petroleum, Oil, and Lubricants
Refined petroleum, oils, and lubricants, including, but not limited to, petroleum, fuel, lubricant oils, synthetic oils, mineral oils, animal fats, vegetable oil, sludge, and POL mixed with wastes other than dredged spoil.
1.2.21 Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB)
Any PCB article, PCB article container, PCB container, or PCB equipment that deliberately or unintentionally contains or has as a part of it any detectable concentration of PCB.
1.2.22 Regulated Waste
Regulated waste are solid wastes that have specific additional JEGS, Federal, or GOJ national and prefectural controls for handling, storage, or disposal.
1.2.23 Rubbish
A general term for solid waste, excluding food wastes and ashes, taken from residences, commercial establishments, and institutions.
1.2.24 Sanitary Waste
a. Sewage: Wastes characterized as domestic sanitary sewage.
b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of food.
1.2.25 Sediment
Sediment is soil and other debris that have eroded and have been transported by runoff water or wind.
1.2.26 Solid Waste
Solid waste is garbage, refuse, sludge, and other discarded materials, including solid, semi-solid, liquid, and contained gaseous materials resulting from industrial and commercial operations and from community activities. It does not include solids or dissolved material in domestic sewage or their significant pollutants in water resources, such as silt, dissolved or suspended solids in industrial wastewater effluent, dissolved materials in irrigation return flows, or other common water pollutants. Types of solid waste typically generated at construction sites may include:
1.2.26.1 Debris
Debris is non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction, demolition, or renovation of a structure that exceeds 60 mmparticle size that is: a manufactured object; plant or animal matter; or natural geologic material (for example, cobbles and boulders), broken or removed concrete, masonry, and rock asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper and shingles. Inert materials may not be reinforced with or contain ferrous wire, rods, accessories and weldments. A mixture of debris and other
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
material such as soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as debris if the mixture is comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual inspection.
1.2.26.2 Green Waste
Green waste is the vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing and grubbing, including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs, small trees and saplings, tree stumps and plant roots. Marketable trees, grasses and plants that are indicated to remain, be re-located, or be re-used are not included.
1.2.26.3 Material Not Regulated as Solid Waste
Material not regulated as solid waste is nuclear source or byproduct materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended; suspended or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent or irrigation return flows, or other regulated point source discharges; regulated air emissions; and fluids or wastes associated with natural gas or crude oil exploration or production.
1.2.26.4 Non-Hazardous Waste
Non-hazardous waste is waste that is excluded from, or does not meet, characteristic of a hazardous waste as defined in JEGS section AP1.1 or is listed as a hazardous waste in JEGS Tables AP1.T1 through AP1.T4. Excluded from this definition is medical wastes.
1.2.26.5 Recyclables
Recyclables are materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors, windows, door and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and mirrors that are recovered and sold as recyclable, wiring, insulated/non-insulated copper wire cable, wire rope, and structural components. It also includes commercial-grade refrigeration equipment with Freon removed, household appliances where the basic material content is metal, clean polyethylene terephthalate bottles, cooking oil, used fuel oil, textiles, high-grade paper products and corrugated cardboard, stackable pallets in good condition, clean crating material, and clean rubber/vehicle tires. Metal meeting the definition of lead contaminated or lead based paint contaminated may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal company.
1.2.26.6 Surplus Soil
Surplus soil is existing soil that is in excess of what is required for this work, including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site mixing of concrete, mortars, and paving. Contaminated soil meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included and must be managed in accordance with paragraph HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT.
1.2.26.7 Scrap Metal
This includes scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as reinforcing steel, structural shapes, pipe, and wire that are recovered or collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the definition of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2.26.8 Wood
Wood is dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard, hardboard. Treated or painted wood that meets the definition of lead contaminated or lead based contaminated paint is not included. Treated wood includes, but is not limited to, lumber, utility poles, crossties, and other wood products with chemical treatment.
1.2.27 Surface Discharge
Surface discharge means discharge of water into drainage ditches, storm sewers, or creeks, or waters of Japan. Surface discharges are discrete, identifiable sources and require a permit from the governing agency. Comply with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
1.2.28 Wastewater
Wastewater is the used water and solids from a community that flow to a treatment plant.
1.2.28.1 Stormwater
Stormwater is any precipitation in an urban or suburban area that does not evaporate or soak into the ground, but instead collects and flows into storm drains, rivers, and streams.
1.2.29 Wetlands
Wetlands are those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or groundwater at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for life in saturated soil conditions.
1.3 PROHIBITED PRODUCTS
The following items are forbidden for use by JEGS or other criteria. Details of each are included in the text of each chapter of the Environmental Protection Plan (EPP) described in this section.
a. Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM).
b. Lead-Containing Paint. Paint containing greater than 0.009 percent lead by weight.
c. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs). Materials containing PCBs greater than 0.5mg/kg shall not be used.
d. Class I Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS). Class 1 ODS listed in JEGS, Chapter 2 shall not be used.
e. Lead Drinking-Water Pipes, Solders, Flux, and Fittings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Preconstruction Survey
Solid Waste Management Permit;
Regulatory Notifications; G
Environmental Protection Plan; G
Employee Training Records;
Environmental Manager Qualifications; G
Waste Determination Documentation; G
Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Laboratory Analysis
Inspection Reports
Solid Waste Management Report;
Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report
SD-07 Certificates
Employee Training Records;
ECATTS Certificate Of Completion; G
Asbestos Certification; G
Lead Certification; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste; G
Assembled Employee Training Records; G
Solid Waste Management Permit; G
Solid Waste Management Report; G
Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log; G
Hazardous Waste/Debris Management; G
Regulatory Notifications; G
Sales Documentation; G
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Contractor Certification
Environmental Records Binder
General Use Permitted Equipment
1.5 PAYMENT
No separate payment shall be made for work covered under this section. Payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or notices obtained by the Contractor, and payment of all fines/fees for violation or non-compliance with GOJ, Federal, and local laws and regulations are the Contractor's responsibility. All costs associated with this section shall be included in the Contract price.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
Provide and maintain, during the life of the Contract, environmental protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project. Protect the environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work during the entire duration of this Contract. Comply with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements pertaining to the environment, including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily substances, and noise pollution.
Tests and procedures assessing whether construction operations comply with Applicable Environmental Laws may be required. Laboratory analyses necessary to implement JEGS shall be conducted in a laboratory certified by a U.S. or GOJ regulatory authority for the applicable test method, and where required by law, the laboratories shall be certified. In the absence of a certified laboratory, contact the Contracting Officer for further guidance.
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that subcontractors comply with all environmental protection requirements of this section.
The Contractor shall record any problems in complying with laws, regulations, permit requirements, ordinances, and corrective actions taken. The Contractor shall immediately inform the Contracting Officer of any environmental problems.
1.6.1 Training in Environmental Compliance Assessment Training and Tracking System (ECATTS)
1.6.1.1 Personnel Requirements
The Environmental Manager is responsible for environmental compliance on projects. The Environmental Manager and other staff, must complete applicable ECATTS training modules (installation specific or general) prior to starting respective portions of on-site work under this Contract. If personnel changes occur for any of these positions after starting work, replacement personnel must complete applicable ECATTS training within 14 days of assignment to the project.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6.1.2 Certification
Submit an ECATTS certificate of completion for personnel who have completed the required ECATTS training. This training is web-based and can be accessed from any computer with Internet access using the following instructions.
Register for NAVFAC Environmental Compliance Training and Tracking System, by logging on to https://environmentaltraining.ecatts.com/. Obtain the password for registration from the Contracting Officer.
1.6.1.3 Refresher Training
This training has been structured to allow Contractor personnel to receive credit under this Contract and to carry forward credit to future contracts. Ensure the Environmental Manager review their training plans for new modules or updated training requirements prior to beginning work.
ECATTS is available for use by all Contractor and subcontractor personnel associated with this project. These other personnel are encouraged (but not required) to take the training and may do so at their discretion.
1.6.2 Conformance with the Environmental Management System
Perform work under this Contract consistent with the policy and objectives identified in the installation's Environmental Management System (EMS). Perform work in a manner that conforms to objectives and targets of the environmental programs and operational controls identified by the EMS. Support Government personnel when environmental compliance and EMS audits are conducted by escorting auditors at the Project site, answering questions, and providing proof of records being maintained. Provide monitoring and measurement information as necessary to address environmental performance relative to environmental, energy, and transportation management goals. In the event an EMS nonconformance or environmental noncompliance associated with the contracted services, tasks, or actions occurs, take corrective and preventative actions. In addition, employees must be aware of their roles and responsibilities under the installation EMS and of how these EMS roles and responsibilities affect work performed under the Contract.
Coordinate with the installation's EMS coordinator to identify training needs associated with environmental aspects and the EMS, and arrange training or take other action to meet these needs. Provide training documentation to the Contracting Officer. The Installation Environmental Office will retain associated environmental compliance records. Make EMS Awareness training completion certificates available to Government auditors during EMS audits and include the certificates in the Employee Training Records. See paragraph EMPLOYEE TRAINING RECORDS.
1.7 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Comply with the special environmental requirements listed here.
1.7.1 Asbestos Prohibition and Certification
a. Materials or products containing more than one-tenth of one percent (0.1 percent) by total weight, of the material or product, of asbestos shall not be used in this project. The Contracting Officer, at any
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
time prior to acceptance of the work, or during the period designated for warranty of the work, if any, may reject materials and products that contain asbestos in excess of one-tenth of one percent by weight, and direct the removal of such materials and products from the job site, at the sole expense of the Contractor, and without additional time granted for performance of the work. After completion of this Contract, if asbestos (exceeding 0.1 percent by weight) is discovered in the products or materials (excluding items permitted by the exception) installed by the Contractor, the Government reserves the right to direct the Contractor to perform asbestos abatement and restoration work, as required, at the Contractor's sole cost. Asbestos abatement work (removal and disposal of asbestos-containing materials and products) shall be accomplished in accordance with currently applicable Government standards for such work.
Exception: Where suitable asbestos-free substitutes do not exist for a material or product, the Contractor may use a material or product containing asbestos in the excess of 0.1 percent by weight, with prior written approval of the Contracting Officer. Submit a written request for substitution, accompanied by a certification from the manufacturer of the material or product that shall set forth, in specific detail, the amount of asbestos present in the material or product. When available, laboratory analysis of the material or product for asbestos content shall be included with the submittal.
b. The Government may conduct asbestos testing on suspected asbestos-containing materials and products excluding items permitted by the "exception", and such testing shall be conducted at the expense of the Government. However, wherever destructive testing is required, or a material or product must be utilized by the Government for testing, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, repair or replace the material or product, or the item of work that has been disturbed by testing, if the results confirm presence of asbestos exceeding 0.1 percent by weight. In the event test results indicate 0.1 percent or less asbestos content or complete absence of asbestos, the Contractor shall restore the test site to its original condition and the cost of restoration work, as approved by the Contracting Officer, shall be borne by the Government.
c. As a minimum, furnish manufacturer's certification for the items listed below, excluding items permitted by the "exception", certifying that the items are asbestos-free and do not contain asbestos in excess of 0.1 percent by weight, as applicable. However, when presence of asbestos is suspected in other products and materials used in this project, the Contractor shall be required to provide such certification for those additional items when so directed by the Contracting Officer. Asbestos certification shall be required for the items applicable to this project only.
(1) Vinyl sheet/vinyl tile flooring, including accessories and adhesives.
(2) Insulation materials, including facing.
(3) Gaskets for piping and duct work.
(4) Acoustical tiles.
(5) Firestopping materials.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
(6) Fireproofing materials.
(7) Special coating, including factory applied coatings, on sheet metal roofing and siding.
(8) Wallboard for all interior and exterior applications, including joint compounds.
(9) Adhesives (other than item 1) used in the project.
(10)Tape materials used in the project.
(11)Roofing and siding, nonmetallic.
(12)Felt materials and cushion materials.
(13)Pre-mixed mortars, grouts, leveling compounds, fillers, and other cementitious materials.
(14)Caulking and sealing materials.
d. All submittals shall be accompanied by a certification from the manufacturer of the material or product that the material or product is asbestos-free; or shall set forth, in specific detail, the amount of asbestos present in the material or product. Documentary evidence of laboratory analysis of the material or product for asbestos content, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory, shall be included with the submittal.
1.7.2 Lead Prohibition and Certification
a. Paint or product coating containing more than 0.009 percent) by total weight of lead shall not be used in this project. The Contracting Officer, at any time prior to acceptance of the work, or during the period designated for warranty of the work, if any, may reject materials and products that contain lead in excess of 0.009 percent by weight, and direct the removal of such materials and products from the job site, at the sole expense of the Contractor, and without additional time granted for performance of the work. After completion of this Contract, if lead (exceeding 0.009 percent by weight) is discovered in the products or materials (excluding items permitted by the exception) installed by the Contractor, the Government reserves the right to direct the Contractor to perform lead abatement and restoration work, as required, at the Contractor's sole cost. Lead abatement work (removal and disposal of lead-containing materials and products) shall be accomplished in accordance with currently applicable Government standards for such work.
Exception: Where suitable lead-free substitutes do not exist for a paint or product coating, the Contractor may use a material or product containing lead in the excess of 0.009 percent by weight, with prior written approval of the Contracting Officer. Submit a written request for substitution, accompanied by a certification from the manufacturer of the material or product that shall set forth, in specific detail, the amount of lead present in the material or product. When available, laboratory analysis of the material or product for lead content shall be included with the submittal.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
b. The Government may conduct lead testing on suspected lead-containing materials and products excluding items permitted by the "exception", and such testing shall be conducted at the expense of the Government. However, wherever destructive testing is required, or a material or product must be utilized by the Government for testing, the Contractor shall, at its own expense, repair or replace the material or product, or the item of work that has been disturbed by testing, if the results confirm presence of lead exceeding 0.009 percent by weight. In the event test results indicate 0.009 percent or less lead content or complete absence of lead, the Contractor shall restore the test site to its original condition and the cost of restoration work, as approved by the Contracting Officer, shall be borne by the Government.
c. As a minimum, furnish manufacturer's certification for the items listed below, excluding items permitted by the "exception", certifying that the items are lead-free and do not contain lead in excess of 0.009 percent by weight, as applicable. However, when presence of lead is suspected in other products and materials used in this project, the Contractor shall be required to provide such certification for those additional items when so directed by the Contracting Officer. Lead certification shall be required for the items applicable to this project only.
1. Paints and Coatings
2. Any product or material with a factory applied coating
1.7.3 Class I and Class II Ozone Depleting Chemicals (ODC) or Substances (ODS)
Class I and II Ozone Depleting Substances listed in JEGS Chapter 2, Table C2.T1 are prohibited from being used. Contactor must provide certifications that materials utilized do not contain Class I and Class II ODC/ODS.
1.7.4 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB)
Materials (ballasts, capacitors, transformers, dielectric fluid, switches, etc.) that contain PCBs are prohibited. Contractor must provide certifications that materials utilized do not contain PCBs, in accordance with JEGS Chapter 14.
1.7.5 Hazardous Material Survey
No existing Hazardous Material Survey for the material to be disturbed under this project, exists. The Contractor shall assume that all suspected Asbestos Containing Material that will be handled and/or disturbed is Asbestos Containing. .
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.8.1 Preconstruction Survey and Protection of Features
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to start of any onsite construction activities, perform a Preconstruction Survey of the project site with the Contracting Officer, and take photographs showing existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the site. Submit a report for the record. Include in the report a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s), as applicable. The Contractor and the Contracting Officer will sign this survey report upon mutual agreement regarding its accuracy and completeness. Protect those environmental features included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings, regardless of interference that their preservation may cause to the work under the Contract.
1.8.2 Regulatory Notifications
Provide regulatory notification requirements in accordance with GOJ national and prefectural laws and regulations and installation requirements.. Submit copies of regulatory notifications to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to commencement of work activities.
1.8.3 Environmental Brief
Attend an environmental brief to be included in the preconstruction meeting. Provide the following information: types, quantities, and use of hazardous materials that will be brought onto the installation; and types and quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated during the Contract. Discuss the results of the Preconstruction Survey at this time.
Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer and installation Environmental Office to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection Plan (EPP). Develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of environmental protection, including measures for protecting natural and cultural resources, required reports, required permits, permit requirements (such as mitigation measures), and other measures to be taken.
Permits, licenses, or other forms of official approvals are not required by DoD activities and installations. Permits, licenses, or other forms of official approvals may, however, be required under GoJ law for certain contracted activities. When required, all such permits, licenses and other forms of official approval shall be obtained by the Contractor from the appropriate GoJ authorities. DoD Components shall assist Contractors when they are applying for a required permit, license or other form of official approval by providing necessary information only.
1.8.4 Environmental Manager
Appoint in writing an Environmental Manager for the project site. The Environmental Manager is directly responsible for Environmental Quality Control and coordinating Contractor compliance with JEGS, Federal, GOJ national and prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements. The Environmental Manager must ensure compliance with Hazardous Waste Program requirements (including hazardous waste handling, storage, manifesting, and disposal); implement the EPP; ensure environmental permits are obtained, maintained, and closed out; ensure compliance with Stormwater Program requirements; ensure compliance with Hazardous Materials (storage, handling, and reporting) requirements; and coordinate any remediation of regulated substances (lead, asbestos, PCB transformers). This can be a collateral position; however, the person in
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
this position must be trained to adequately accomplish the following duties: ensure waste segregation and storage compatibility requirements are met; inspect and manage Satellite Accumulation areas; ensure only authorized personnel add wastes to containers; ensure Contractor personnel are trained in JEGSrequirements in accordance with their position requirements; coordinate removal of waste containers; and maintain the Environmental Records binder and required documentation, including environmental permits compliance and close-out. Submit Environmental Manager Qualifications to the Contracting Officer to indicate the training and past experience which meets the requirements of this position as described in this seciton.
1.8.5 Employee Training Records
Prepare and maintain Employee Training Records throughout the term of the Contract meeting applicable JEGS requirements. Provide Employee Training Records in the Environmental Records Binder. Ensure every employee completes a program of classroom instruction or on-the-job training that teaches them to perform their duties in a way that ensures compliance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws or regulations and installation requirements. Submit these Assembled Employee Training Records to the Contracting Officer at the conclusion of the project, unless otherwise directed.
Train personnel to meet JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws or regulations, and Installation requirements. Conduct environmental protection/pollution control meetings for personnel prior to commencing construction activities. Conduct additional meetings for new personnel and when site conditions change. Include in the training and meeting agenda: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution; familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards; installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition and protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, waters of Japan, and endangered species and their habitat that are known to be in the area.
1.8.6 Non-Compliance Notifications
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with the JEGS, applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements, and other elements of the Contractor's EPP. After receipt of such notice, inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the Contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
The purpose of the EPP is to present an overview of known or potential environmental issues that must be considered and addressed during construction. Incorporate construction related objectives and targets from the installation's EMS into the EPP. Include in the EPP measures for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
protecting natural and cultural resources, required reports, and other measures to be taken. Meet with the Contracting Officer or Contracting Officer Representative to discuss the EPP and develop a mutual understanding relative to the details for environmental protection including measures for protecting natural resources, required reports, and other measures to be taken. Submit the EPP within 15 days after notice to proceed and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. Commencement of work will not begin until the Environmental Protection Plan has been approved.
Revise the EPP throughout the project to include any reporting requirements, changes in site conditions, or Contract modifications that change the project scope of work in a way that could have an environmental impact. No requirement in this section will relieve the Contractor of any JEGS, and applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements. During Construction, identify, implement, and submit for approval any additional requirements to be included in the EPP. Maintain the current version of the EPP onsite.
The EPP includes, but is not limited to, the following elements as they apply to this project:
1.9.1 General Overview and Purpose
1.9.1.1 Descriptions
A brief description of each specific plan required by environmental permit or elsewhere in this Contract such as stormwater pollution prevention plan, spill control plan, solid waste management plan, wastewater management plan, air pollution control plan, contaminant prevention plan, a historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands plan, traffic control plan Hazardous, Toxic and Radioactive Waste (HTRW) Plan Non-Hazardous Solid Waste Disposal Plan.
Include a list of applicable Federal, GOJ, JEGS, prefectural laws, regulations, and permits concerning environmental protection, pollution control, and abatement that are applicable to the Contractor's proposed operations and requirements imposed by those laws, regulations, and permits. Whenever there is conflict between Federal, GOJ, JEGS, or prefectural laws, regulations, and permit requirements, the strictest applicable rule applies.
1.9.1.2 Duties
The duties and level of authority assigned to the person(s) on the job site who oversee environmental compliance, such as who is responsible for adherence to the EPP, who is responsible for spill cleanup and training personnel on spill response procedures, who is responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from the site (if applicable), and who is responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection personnel.
Provide the name, telephone number, and address of a Primary and Alternate Environmental Representative.
1.9.1.3 Procedures
A copy of any standard or project-specific operating procedures that will
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
be used to effectively manage and protect the environment on the project site.
Provide schedule of digging or trenching actions to include date/time, location, purpose, method and depth.
1.9.1.4 Communications
Communication and training procedures that will be used to convey environmental management requirements to Contractor employees and subcontractors.
1.9.1.5 Contact Information
Emergency contact information contact information (office phone number, cell phone number, and e-mail address).
1.9.2 General Site Information
1.9.2.1 Drawings
Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, jurisdictional wetlands, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, storm drains and conveyances, and stockpiles of excess soil.
1.9.2.2 Work Area
Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identify the areas of limited use or nonuse. Include measures for marking the limits of use areas, including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas and methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site, and a traffic control plan.
1.9.2.3 Documentation
A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the Environmental Manager and stating that person is responsible for managing and implementing the Environmental Program as described in this Contract. Include in this letter the Environmental Manager's authority to direct the removal and replacement of non-conforming work.
1.9.3 Management of Natural Resources
a. Land resources
b. Tree protection
c. Replacement of damaged landscape features
d. Temporary construction
e. Stream crossings
f. Fish and wildlife resources
g. Wetland areas
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.9.4 Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources
a. Objectives
b. Methods
1.9.5 Stormwater Management and Control
a. Ground cover
b. Erodible soils
c. Temporary measures
(1) Structural Practices
(2) Temporary and permanent stabilization
d. Effective selection, implementation and maintenance of Best Management Practices (BMPs).
e. Erosion Control Plan. Prepared in accordance with JEGS, Chapter 13.
f. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. Prepared in accordance with paragraph Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan and JEGS, Chapter 4 (if required)
1.9.6 Hazardous Material List
Prepared in accordance with paragraph Hazardous Material and JEGS, Chapter 5 (if required). Safety Data Sheets (SDS): SDS in English for all Hazardous materials to be used in accordance with JEGS Chapter 5 (if required).
List shall include all pesticides and herbicides that will be brought onto the Installation.
1.9.7 Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from Contractor Operations
Control and disposal of solid and sanitary waste. Control and disposal of hazardous waste.
Include a Hazardous Waste Management and Disposal Plan prepared in accordance with paragraph Control and Management of Hazardous Waste and JEGS, Chapter 6 (if required). This item consists of the management procedures for hazardous waste to be generated. The elements of those procedures will coincide with the Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The Contracting Officer will provide a copy of the Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan. As a minimum, include the following:
a. List of the types of hazardous wastes expected to be generated
b. Procedures to ensure a written waste determination is made for appropriate wastes that are to be generated
c. Sampling/analysis plan, including laboratory method(s) that will be used for waste determinations and copies of relevant laboratory certifications
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
d. Methods and proposed locations for hazardous waste accumulation/storage (that is, in tanks or containers)
e. Management procedures for storage, labeling, transportation, and disposal of waste (treatment of waste is not allowed unless specifically noted)
f. Management procedures and regulatory documentation ensuring disposal of hazardous waste complies with Land Disposal Restrictions, applicable Federal, GOJ and prefectural laws and regulations, JEGS, and Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan. .
g. Management procedures for recyclable hazardous materials such as lead-acid batteries, used oil, and similar
h. Used oil management procedures in accordance with JEGS; Hazardous waste minimization procedures, and Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan.
i. Plans for the disposal of hazardous waste by permitted facilities; and Procedures to be employed to ensure required employee training records are maintained.
j. Procedures to be employed to ensure required employee training records are maintained.
k. Hazardous Waste Disposal local permits or licenses for hazardous waste disposal in accordance with JEGS, Chapter 6 (if required).
l. Hazardous Waste Disposal Statement of Agreement. From a treatment, storage, or disposal (TSD) facility that will accept the waste from the Contractor and also a statement from a certified hazardous waste transporter who will transport the waste to the TSD facility in accordance with JEGS, Chapter 6 (if required).
1.9.8 Solid Waste Management Plan
Prepared in accordance with paragraph Solid Waste Management Plan and JEGS, Chapter 7.
1.9.9 Site Specific Spill Prevention Plan
Prepared in accordance with paragraph SPILLS and JEGS, Chapter 18 (if required).
1.9.10 Prevention of Releases to the Environment
a. Procedures to prevent releases to the environment
b. Notifications in the event of a release to the environment
1.9.11 Regulatory Notification and Permits
List what notifications and permit applications must be made. Some permits require up to 180 days to obtain. Demonstrate that those permits have been obtained or applied for by including copies of applicable environmental permits. The EPP will not be approved until the permits have been obtained.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.9.12 Air Quality Compliance
1.9.12.1 Pollution Generating Equipment
Identify air pollution generating equipment or processes that may generate air emissions and require compliance with JEGS or GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations. Determine requirements based on any current JEGS and installation requirements and the impacts of the project. Provide a list of all fixed or mobile equipment, machinery or operations that could generate air emissions during the project to the Installation Environmental Office (Air Program Manager) in the EPP. Air emissions must comply with the JEGS.
1.9.12.2 Stationary Internal Combustion Engines
Identify portable and stationary internal combustion engines that will be supplied, used or serviced in the EPP. Comply with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements. At minimum, include the make, model, serial number, manufacture date, size (engine brake horsepower), and EPA emission certification status of each engine. Maintain applicable records and log hours of operation and fuel use. Logs must include reasons for operation and delineate between emergency and non-emergency operation.
1.9.12.3 Refrigerants
Identify management practices to ensure that heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) work involving refrigerants and ozone depleting substances comply with JEGS and installation requirements. Technicians shall be trained in proper recovery/recycling procedures, leak detection, safety, shipping, and disposal in accordance with recognized industry standards or Japanese equivalent. Any refrigerant reclaimed is the property of the Government, coordinate with the Installation Environmental Office to determine the appropriate turn in location.
1.9.12.4 Air Pollution-engineering Processes
Identify planned air pollution-generating processes and management control measures (including, but not limited to, spray painting, abrasive blasting, demolition, material handling, fugitive dust, and fugitive emissions). Log hours of operations and track quantities of materials used.
1.9.12.5 Compliant Materials
Provide the Government a list of and SDSs for all hazardous materials proposed for use on site. Materials must be compliant with the JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements for emissions including solvent and volatile organic compound contents, and applicable National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants requirements. The Government may alter or limit use of specific materials as needed to meet installation permit requirements for emissions.
1.10 LICENSES AND PERMITS
Obtain licenses and permits required for the construction of the project and in accordance with FAR 52.236-7. Notify the Government of all general
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
use permitted equipment the Contractor plans to use on site. This paragraph supplements the Contractor's responsibility under FAR 52.236-7.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL RECORDS BINDER
Maintain on-site a separate three-ring Environmental Records Binder and submit at the completion of the project. Maintain digital copies of records to submit. Make separate parts within the binder that correspond to each submittal listed under paragraph CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS in this section.
1.12 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT
Provide the Contracting Officer with written notification of the quantity of anticipated solid waste or debris that is anticipated or estimated to be generated by construction. Include in the report the locations where various types of waste will be disposed or recycled. Include letters of acceptance from the receiving location or as applicable; submit one copy of the receiving location state and local Solid Waste Management Permit or license showing such agency's approval of the disposal plan before transporting wastes off Government property.
1.12.1 Solid Waste Management Report
Monthly, submit a solid waste disposal report to the Contracting Officer. For each waste, the report will state the classification (using the definitions provided in this section), amount, location, and name of the business receiving the solid waste.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife, and plants, including their habitats. Prior to the commencement of activities, consult with the Installation Environmental Office, regarding rare species or sensitive habitats that need to be protected. The protection of rare, threatened, and endangered animal and plant species identified, including their habitats, is the Contractor's responsibility.
Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved condition upon completion of work that is consistent with the requirements of the Installation Environmental Office or as otherwise specified. Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated or specified.
The Contractor shall take precautions to preserve all such resources as they existed at the time they were first pointed out. The Contractor shall provide and install protection for these resources and be responsible for their preservation during the life of the Contract. Environmental protection shall be conducted as follows:
a. Except in areas indicated on the drawing or specified to be cleared,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the Contractor shall not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources, including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, topsoil, and land forms without the Contracting Officer's permission. Vegetation resources, land forms and other landscape features indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved shall be clearly identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other approved techniques. Any anticipated vegetation disturbance needs to be coordinated with the Government before it occurs.
3.1.1 Flow Ways
Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly disturb the native habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and wildlife, except as specified and permitted.
3.1.2 Vegetation
Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs without the Contracting Officer's permission. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing nearby trees for anchorages unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Where such use of attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor is responsible for any resultant damage.
Protect existing trees that are to remain to ensure they are not injured, bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove displaced rocks from uncleared areas. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer and Installation Environmental Office to determine appropriate action for trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by equipment operations.
3.1.3 GOJ-Protected Species
GoJ-Protected species are typically found in undeveloped and unmaintained portions of the base. Projects that may affect protected species shall include mitigation measures to eliminate or minimize effects.
3.1.4 Streams
Stream crossings must allow movement of materials or equipment without violating water pollution control standards of the JEGS and applicable, Federal, and GOJ national and prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements. Construction of stream crossing structures must be in compliance with JEGS, applicable Federal and GOJ national and prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements, including the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.
The Contracting Officer's approval and appropriate permits are required before any equipment will be permitted to ford live streams. In areas where frequent crossings are required, install temporary culverts or bridges. Obtain Contracting Officer's approval prior to installation. Remove temporary culverts or bridges upon completion of work, and repair the area to its original condition unless otherwise required by the Contracting Officer.
3.1.5 Endangered Species
At any time an endangered or threatened species, flora or fauna, to include sea turtle nests are encountered, all activities shall stop and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the Contracting Officer shall be notified.
3.1.6 Indigenous/Native Flora and Fauna
The Contractor shall place emphasis on the protection of habitats favorable to the reproduction and survival of indigenous flora and fauna. The Contractor shall use indigenous flora for planting/sodding.
3.1.7 Invasive Species
Invasive Species are prohibited to be raised, planted, stored or possessed on DoD installations. The Contractor shall not bring in any invasive species to DoD installations.
3.2 STORMWATER
Do not discharge stormwater from construction sites to the sanitary sewer. If the water is noted or suspected of being contaminated, it may only be released to the storm drain system if the discharge is specifically permitted. Obtain authorization in advance from the Installation Environmental Office for any release of contaminated water.
3.2.1 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan
If applicable, submit a project-specific Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to the Contracting Officer for approval, prior to the commencement of work. The Contractor shall maintain an approved copy of the SWPPP at the construction on-site office, and continually update as regulations require, to reflect current site conditions. The Contractor may be required to install, inspect, maintain best management practices (BMPs), and submit storm water BMPs inspection reports and storm water pollution prevention plan inspection reports.
The SWPPP must meet the requirements of JEGS and the Installation's SWPPP.
Include the following:
a. Identify potential sources of pollution which may be reasonably expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge from the site.
b. Comply with terms of the Installation SWPPP for stormwater discharges from construction activities. Prepare SWPPP in accordance with the JEGSand installation requirements.
c. Select applicable BMPs from JEGS and/or the Installation SWPPP. Applicable Best Management Practices in Table C4.T3 of the JEGS shall be incorporated into the site-specific SWPPP and implemented.
d. The SWPPP shall also address erosion and sediment control measures and stormwater management and control including, but not limited to ground cover, erodible soils, temporary measures - structural practices, temporary and permanent stabilization.
3.2.1.1 Inspection Reports
Submit "Inspection Reports" to the Contracting Officer in accordance with JEGS and applicable GOJ or local laws and regulations.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.2.2 Erosion and Sediment Control Measures
Provide erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with JEGS and applicable GOJ or local laws and regulations. Preserve vegetation to the maximum extent practicable.
Erosion control inspection reports may be compiled as part of a stormwater pollution prevention plan inspection reports.
3.2.2.1 Erosion Control
Prevent erosion by mulching, Compost Blankets, Geotextiles, temporary slope drains,. Stabilize slopes by chemical stabilization, sodding, or such combination of these methods necessary for effective erosion control. Use of hay bales is prohibited.
Any disturbed area with exposed soil that is not being worked on must be seeded or sodded no later than two weeks from the last disturbance regardless of the installation of any other erosion control measures in place. Remove any temporary measures after the area has been stabilized.
3.2.2.2 Sediment Control Practices
Implement sediment control practices to divert flows from exposed soils, temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Implement sediment control practices prior to soil disturbance and prior to creating areas with concentrated flow, during the construction process to minimize erosion and sediment laden runoff. Best Management Practices (BMPs) may include, but not limited to, vegetation cover, stream bank stabilization, slope stabilization, silt fences, construction of terraces, interceptor channels, sediment traps, inlet and outfall protection, diversion channels, and sedimentation basins. Include the following devices: silt fence, temporary diversion dikes, storm drain inlet protection,
3.2.3 Work Area Limits
Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this Contract prior to commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area that are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and markers before construction operations commence. Where construction operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible in the dark. Personnel must be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking and protecting particular objects.
3.2.4 Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
Place field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary buildings in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the Contracting Officer. Move or relocate the Contractor facilities only when approved by the Government. Provide erosion and sediment controls for onsite borrow and spoil areas to prevent sediment from entering nearby waters. Control temporary excavation and embankments for plant or work areas to protect adjacent areas.
3.2.5 Protection of Excavated Soil
During the temporary storing of excavated soil until off base disposal or backfill, the excavated soil/rocks shall be completely segregated with
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 23 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
materials from other locations, and covered with vinyl sheets to prevent the soil from run-off by rain, and label indicates "Project Name", "Contract Number", "Contractor's Name", "POC phone number" shall be posted on the vinyl sheet.
3.3 SURFACE AND GROUNDWATER
3.3.1 Cofferdams, Diversions, and Dewatering
Construction operations for dewatering, removal of cofferdams, tailrace excavation, and tunnel closure must be constantly controlled to maintain compliance with existing state water quality standards and designated uses of the surface water body. Comply with water quality standards and anti-degradation provisions. Do not discharge excavation ground water to the sanitary sewer, storm drains, or to surface waters without prior specific authorization in writing from the Installation Environmental Office. Discharge of hazardous substances will not be permitted under any circumstances. Use sediment control BMPs to prevent construction site runoff from directly entering any storm drain or surface waters.
If the construction dewatering is noted or suspected of being contaminated, it may only be released to the storm drain system if the discharge is specifically permitted. Obtain authorization for any contaminated groundwater release in advance from the Installation Environmental Officer and the federal or state authority, as applicable. Discharge of hazardous substances will not be permitted under any circumstances.
3.3.2 Waters of Japan
Do not enter, disturb, destroy, or allow discharge of contaminants into waters of Japan.
3.3.3 Water Protection
Contractor shall prevent oily wastes or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water.
3.3.4 Sewage
Contractor is not authorized sewage holding tanks on base and must procure a porta-potty service Contract. The porta-potty Contract must include the correct removal of sewage and maintenance of the facilities.
3.3.5 Wastewater
If the project generates wastewater from rinsing tanks, dewatering sites, etc., contact the Contracting Officer on proper disposal.
3.4 PROTECTION OF CULTURAL RESOURCES
3.4.1 Archaeological Resources
If, during excavation or other construction activities, any previously unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural resources are discovered or found, activities that may damage or alter such resources will be suspended. Resources covered by this paragraph include, but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock or coral
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 24 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery or find, immediately notify the Installation Cultural Resources Manager via the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources. The Government retains ownership and control over archaeological resources.
3.5 AIR RESOURCES
Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural air emission and performance laws and regulations.
3.5.1 Oil or Dual-fuel Boilers and Furnaces
Provide product data and details for new, replacement, or relocated fuel fired boilers, heaters, or furnaces to the Installation Environmental Office (Air Program Manager) through the Contracting Officer. Data to be reported include: equipment purpose (water heater, building heat, process), manufacturer, model number, serial number, fuel type (oil type, gas type) size (MMBTU heat input). Product data shall be provided prior to equipment installation.
3.5.2 Burning
Burning is prohibited on the Government premises.
3.5.3 Class I and II ODS Prohibition
Class I and II ODS are Government property and must be returned to the Government for appropriate management. Coordinate with the Installation Environmental Office to determine the required recovery cylinders and the appropriate location for turn in of all reclaimed refrigerant.Class I and II ODS as defined and identified herein shall not be used in the performance of this Contract.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Refrigerant, AC and Heating Shop, on the quantity of ODS recovered from system for the purpose of recycle, reuse or dilution. In the event the ODS can be recycled, reused or diluted, the entire quantity will be turned over to the Refrigerant, AC and Heating shop.
In cases where the ODS is sufficiently contaminated and cannot be recycled, reused and/or diluted, the Contractor shall dispose of the ODS according to JEGS and local regulations.
In the event of a release of ODS, base personnel and/or Contractor shall inform Fire and Emergency's Service Branch and Environmental Division.
3.5.4 Accidental Venting of Refrigerant
Accidental venting of a refrigerant is a release and must be reported immediately to the Contracting Officer. Comply with JEGS C2.3.6.2.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 25 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.5 Training/Certification Requirements
Heating and air conditioning technicians must be trained to meet requirements in JEGS Chapter 2, C2.3.6.1. . Maintain copies of certifications at the employees' places of business; technicians must carry certification wallet cards, as provided by GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations.
3.5.6 Dust Control
Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods. Sprinkle or treat, with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, haul roads, and other areas disturbed by operations. Dry power brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming. Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel reinforcing bars. Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous concrete. Do not unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.
3.5.6.1 Particulates
Dust particles, aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction activities, and processing and preparation of materials (such as from asphaltic batch plants) must be controlled at all times, including weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in progress. Maintain excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and other work areas within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates that would exceed JEGS and applicable US Federal, GOJ national or prefectural air pollution standards or that would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinkling, chemical treatment of an approved type, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators, or other methods will be permitted to control particulates in the work area. Sprinkling, to be efficient, must be repeated to keep the disturbed area damp. Provide sufficient, competent equipment available to accomplish these tasks. Perform particulate control as the work proceeds and whenever a particulate nuisance or hazard occurs. Comply with JEGS, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
3.5.6.2 Abrasive Blasting
Blasting operations cannot be performed without prior approval of the Installation Air Program Manager. The use of silica sand is prohibited in sandblasting.
Provide tarpaulin drop cloths and windscreens to enclose abrasive blasting operations to confine and collect dust, abrasive agent, paint chips, and other debris. Perform work involving removal of hazardous material in accordance with JEGS, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
3.5.7 Odors
Control odors from construction activities. The odors must be in compliance with applicable GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations and may not constitute a health hazard.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 26 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6 WATER RESOURCES
Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control, and monitor all water areas affected by construction activities in order to prevent pollution of surface and ground waters. Toxic or hazardous chemicals shall not be applied to soil or vegetation when such application may cause contamination. Prevent oily wastes or other hazardous substances from entering the ground, drainage areas, or local bodies of water.
3.6.1 Lead-Free Drinking Water Pipe, Solders, Flux and Fittings
The maximum allowable lead content for pipes, fittings, and fixtures intended to convey or dispense water for human consumption and cooking shall be a weighted average of 0.25 percent with respect to the wetted surfaces of pipes and pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures in accordance with NSF 61. Refer to section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
3.7 WASTE MINIMIZATION
Minimize the use of hazardous materials and the generation of waste. Include procedures for pollution prevention/ hazardous waste minimization in the Hazardous Waste Management Section of the EPP. Obtain a copy of the installation's Pollution Prevention/Hazardous Waste Minimization Plan for reference material when preparing this part of the EPP. If no written plan exists, obtain information by contacting the Contracting Officer. Describe the anticipated types of the hazardous materials to be used in the construction when requesting information.
3.7.1 Salvage, Reuse and Recycle
Identify anticipated materials and waste for salvage, reuse, and recycling. Describe actions to promote material reuse, resale or recycling. To the extent practicable, all scrap metal must be sent for reuse or recycling and will not be disposed of in a landfill.
Include the name, physical address, and telephone number of the hauler, if transported by a franchised solid waste hauler. Include the destination and, unless exempted, provide a copy of the state or local permit (cover) or license for recycling.
All solid wastes and materials that have been separated for the purpose of recycling shall be stored in such a manner that they do not constitute a fire, health or safety hazard, or provide food or harborage for vectors, and shall be contained or bundled so as to not result in spillage. Containers must be: leak proof, water proof, and vermin proof including sides, seams, tops and bottoms, durable enough to withstand anticipated usage, and stored on a firm, level, well-drained surface).
3.7.2 Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report
Maintain an inventory of nonhazardous solid waste diversion and disposal of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to the Installation Environmental Office _____ through the Contracting Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year quarter, starting the first quarter that nonhazardous solid waste has been generated. Include the following in the report:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 27 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris (_____) kilograms or metric tons as Disposed appropriate
C&D Debris Recycled (_____) kilograms or metric tons as appropriate
Total C&D Debris Generated (_____) kilograms or metric tons as appropriate
Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy Incineration (_____) kilograms or metric tons as Plant (This amount should not be included appropriate in the recycled amount)
3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
3.8.1 Waste Determination Documentation
Provide Waste Determination Documentation for Contractor-derived wastes to be generated. All potentially hazardous solid waste streams that are not subject to a specific exclusion or exemption from the hazardous waste regulations (e.g. scrap metal, domestic sewage) or subject to special rules, (lead-acid batteries and precious metals) must be characterized in accordance with the requirements of JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations. Base waste determination on user knowledge of the processes and materials used, and analytical data when necessary. Consult with the Installation environmental staff for guidance on specific requirements. Attach support documentation to the Waste Determination Documentation. As a minimum, provide Waste Determination Documentation for the following waste (this listing is not inclusive): oil- and latex -based painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives, aerosols, petroleum products, and containers of the original materials.
3.8.1.1 Sampling and Analysis of Waste
3.8.1.1.1 Waste Sampling
Sample waste in accordance with the JEGS, Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan, and appropriate Japanese or US EPA testing protocols that meet the purpose of the testing. Clearly mark each sampled drum or container with the Contractor's identification number, and cross reference to the chemical analysis performed.
Excess excavated soil shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off base at a properly licensed facility in accordance with the latest version of the JEGS and applicable GOJ federal and local laws and regulations. Any excess soil shall be sampled and tested according to the applicable GOJ federal and local laws and regulations and disposal facility requirements prior to disposal.
3.8.1.1.2 Laboratory Analysis
Follow the analytical procedure and methods in accordance with the JEGS and all applicable GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations and the Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan. Provide analytical
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 28 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
results and reports performed to the Contracting Officer.
3.8.1.1.3 Analysis Type
Identify hazardous waste by analyzing for the following characteristics: ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, toxicity based on TCLP results, .
3.8.2 Solid Waste Management
3.8.2.1 Solid Waste Management Report
Provide copies of the waste handling facilities' weight tickets, receipts, bills of sale, Contractor Certification and other sales documentation. In lieu of sales documentation, a statement indicating the disposal location for the solid waste that is signed by an employee authorized to legally obligate or bind the firm may be submitted. The sales documentation Contractor certification must include the receiver's tax identification number and business, GOJ or prefectural registration number, along with the receiver's delivery and business addresses and telephone numbers.
3.8.2.2 Control and Management of Solid Wastes
Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers that are regularly emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Employ segregation measures so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with non-hazardous solid waste. Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in compliance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installationrequirements for solid waste disposal. Solid waste disposal offsite must comply with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements. Verify that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and licenses to operate.
Manage hazardous material used in construction, including but not limited to, aerosol cans, waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, and used rags, in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
3.8.3 Control and Management of Hazardous Waste
Do not dispose of hazardous waste on Government property. Do not discharge any waste to a sanitary sewer, storm drain, or to surface waters or conduct waste treatment or disposal on Government property without written approval of the Contracting Officer.
3.8.3.1 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Identify construction activities that will generate hazardous waste or debris. Provide a documented waste determination for resultant waste streams. Identify, label, handle, store, and dispose of hazardous waste or debris in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements
Manage hazardous waste in accordance with the approved Hazardous Waste Management Section of the EPP. Store hazardous wastes in approved containers in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 29 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements. Do not bring hazardous waste onto Government property. Provide the Contracting Officer with a copy of waste determination documentation for any solid waste streams that have any potential to be hazardous waste or contain any chemical constituents listed in the JEGS. For hazardous wastes spills, verbally notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
3.8.3.2 Hazardous Waste Records
The Contractor shall maintain sampling, analysis, and turn-in records for all hazardous waste generated during the project. These records shall include, but not be limited to: waste profile sheets provided by HWSF personnel for wastes streams turned in to the HWSF, manifests (DD forms 1348-1A) for all wastes turned over to the HWSF,logs of sample locations or container identification data (including time and date of sample collection), analytical results, and quality control data provided by the analytical lab pertaining to the samples analyzed. Copies of this data shall be submitted to the COR after the work is completed.
3.8.3.3 Electronics End-of-Life Management
Recycle or dispose of electronics waste, including, but not limited to, used electronic devices such as computers, monitors, hard-copy devices, televisions, mobile devices, in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
3.8.3.4 Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
3.8.4 Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances
3.8.4.1 Response and Notifications
Exercise due diligence to prevent, contain, and respond to spills of hazardous material, hazardous substances, hazardous waste, sewage, regulated gas, petroleum, lubrication oil, and other substances regulated in accordance with JEGS and Installation plans. Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at the work site. In the event of a spill, take prompt, effective action to stop, contain, curtail, or otherwise limit the amount, duration, and severity of the spill/release. In the event of any releases of oil and hazardous substances, chemicals, or gases; immediately (within 15 minutes) notify the Installation Fire Department dial 911 on base, the Installation Command Duty Officer, the Installation Environmental Office, the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall immediately report all POL or Hazardous Substances spills to the Contracting Officer. Submit verbal and written notifications as required by the JEGS and installation and service component instructions and plans, and local regulations. Provide copies of the written notification and documentation that a verbal notification was made within the timeframes required by the JEGS and installation instructions. Spill response must be in accordance with JEGS and installation requirements. Contain and clean up these spills without cost to the Government.
3.8.4.2 Clean Up
Clean up hazardous and non-hazardous waste spills in accordance with the JEGS, local regulations and the installation's spill response procedures. Reimburse the Government for costs incurred including sample analysis
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 30 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
materials, clothing, equipment, and labor if the Government will initiate its own spill cleanup procedures, for Contractor-responsible spills, when: Spill cleanup procedures have not begun within one hour of spill discovery/occurrence; or, in the Government's judgment, spill cleanup is inadequate and the spill remains a threat to human health or the environment.
3.8.5 Mercury Materials
Immediately report to the Environmental Office and the Contracting Officer instances of breakage or mercury spillage. Clean mercury spill area to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.
Do not recycle a mercury spill cleanup; manage it as a hazardous waste for disposal.
3.8.6 Wastewater
3.8.6.1 Disposal of wastewater must be as specified below.
3.8.6.1.1 Treatment
Do not allow wastewater from construction activities, such as onsite material processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up, water used in concrete trucks, and forms to enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction- related waste water off-Government property in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and installation requirements.
3.8.6.1.2 Surface Discharge
For discharge of ground water,if applicable, obtain a GOJ or local prefectural permit specific for pumping and discharging ground water prior to surface discharging.
3.8.6.1.3 Land Application
Water generated from the flushing of lines after disinfection or disinfection in conjunction with hydrostatic testing must be land- applied in accordance with JEGS and applicable Federal, GOJ, prefectural and local laws and installation requirements for land application.
3.9 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
Include hazardous material control procedures in the Safety Plan, in accordance with Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. Address procedures and proper handling of hazardous materials, including the appropriate transportation requirements. Do not bring hazardous material onto Government property that does not directly relate to requirements for the performance of this Contract. Submit an Safety Data Sheet in both English and Japanese and estimated quantities to be used for each hazardous material to the Contracting Officer prior to bringing the material on the installation. Typical materials requiring SDS and quantity reporting include, but are not limited to, oil and latex based painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives, aerosol, and petroleum products. Use hazardous materials in a manner that minimizes the amount of hazardous waste generated. Containers of hazardous materials must have National Fire Protection Association labels or their
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 31 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
equivalent.
Storage and handling of hazardous materials will adhere to the applicable DoD Component policies, including Joint Service Publication on Storage and Handling of Hazardous Materials. Defense Logistics Agency Instruction (DLAI) 4145.11, Army Technical Manual (TM) 38-410, Naval Supply Publication (NAVSUP PUB) 573, Air Force Joint Manual (AFJMAN) 23-209, and Marine Corps Order (MCO) 4450.12A, "Storage and Handling of Hazardous Materials," January 13, 1999 provide additional guidance on the storage and handling of hazardous materials. The International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code and appropriate DoD and Component instructions provide requirements for international maritime transport of hazardous materials originating from DoD installations. International air shipments of hazardous materials originating from DoD installations are subject to International Civil Aviation Organization Technical Instructions or DoD Component guidance, including Air Force Manual 24-204, (Interservice) TM 38-250, NAVSUP PUB 505, MCO P4030.19J, and DLAI 4145.3, DCMAD1, Ch3.4 (HM24), "Preparing Hazardous Materials for Military Air Shipments," 3 December 2012. Certify that hazardous materials removed from the site are hazardous materials and do not meet the definition of hazardous waste, in accordance with the 40 CFR 261 ,JEGS (Appendix 1 and 2) and installation requirements.3.9.1 Contractor Hazardous Material Inventory Log
Hazardous material may require prior approval from the Installation prior to being transported to the project site. The installation shall be contacted for procedures to transport and store hazardous material required by the Contractor. An SDS in both English and Japanese is required to accompany all hazardous materials brought onto the installation.
The Contracting Officer may request documentation for any spills or releases, environmental reports, or off-site transfers.
3.10 PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT
Clean previously used construction equipment prior to bringing it onto the project site. Equipment must be free from soil residuals, egg deposits from plant pests, noxious weeds, and plant seeds.
3.11 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM)
Manage and dispose of asbestos- containing waste in accordance with JEGS and applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations. Refer to Section 02 82 13.00 10 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT. Manifest asbestos-containing waste and provide the manifest to the Contracting Officer. Notifications to the Contracting Officer and Installation Air Program Manager are required before starting any asbestos work.
Removal of mastics, necessary to achieve the Contract's objectives, shall be performed in a manner as if the material contains asbestos.
When applicable, a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the demolition or renovation of a facility that involves removing or disturbing friable ACM, the Contractor shall prepare a written assessment of friable asbestos disturbance and submit to the COR, who will, in turn submit to the Installation Commander in accordance with paragraph C15.3.4 of the JEGS.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 32 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.12 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF LEAD-BASED PAINT (LBP)
Manage and dispose of lead-contaminated waste in accordance with the JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations and installation requirements and Section 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION;. The Contractor is to assume that all existing paint encountered in this Contract contain detectable levels of lead, and the OSHA regulations referenced in these specification applies. Any attached lead material survey information is provided for disposal purposes only. Manifest any lead-contaminated waste and provide the manifest to the Contracting Officer.
3.13 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS)
Manage and dispose of PCB-contaminated waste in accordance with the JEGS, installation requirements, and Section 02 84 33 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBS).Purchase of electrical equipment and transformers containing PCBs is prohibited.
3.13.1 Removal Or Installation
Work on PCB equipment is forbidden using this supplement alone. If the project involves the disturbance, relocation, installation, or removal of products that have historically contained PCBs, follow the instructions in the supplement to the specification that pertains to that product's installation or removal (Transformer Replacement, Lighting Replacement, etc.).
3.14 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF LIGHTING BALLAST AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBS
Manage and dispose of contaminated waste in accordance with the JEGS and installation requirements. Refer to Section 02 84 16 HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBS AND MERCURY.
3.15 PETROLEUM, OIL, LUBRICANT (POL) STORAGE AND FUELING
POL products include flammable or combustible liquids, such as gasoline, diesel, lubricating oil, used engine oil, hydraulic oil, mineral oil, and cooking oil. Store POL products and fuel equipment and motor vehicles in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spills into the environment. Manage and store POL products in accordance with JEGS and installation requirements and applicable GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations. Use secondary containments, dikes, curbs, and other barriers, to prevent POL products from spilling and entering the ground, storm or sewer drains, stormwater ditches or canals, or navigable waters of Japan. Describe in the EPP (see paragraph ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN) how POL tanks and containers must be stored, managed, and inspected and what protections must be provided. Storage of oil, including fuel, on the project site is not allowed. Fuel must be brought to the project site each day that work is performed.
3.15.1 Used Oil Management
"Used oil," means any oil or other waste petroleum, oil, or lubricant (POL) product that has been refined from crude oil, or is synthetic oil, has been used and as a result of such use, is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities, or is off specification and cannot be used as intended. Although used oil may exhibit the characteristics of reactivity, toxicity, ignitability, or corrosivity, it is still considered used oil,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 33 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
unless it has been mixed with hazardous waste. Manage used oil generated on site in accordance with the JEGS and installation requirements. Determine if any used oil generated while onsite exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste. Used oil containing 1,000 parts per million of solvents is considered a hazardous waste and disposed of at the Contractor's expense. Used oil mixed with a hazardous waste is also considered a hazardous waste. Dispose in accordance with paragraph HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL.
3.15.2 Oil Storage Including Fuel Tanks
Provide secondary containment and overfill protection for oil storage tanks. A berm used to provide secondary containment must be of sufficient size and strength to contain the contents of the tanks plus 12 centimeters freeboard for precipitation. Construct the berm to be impervious to oil for 72 hours that no discharge will permeate, drain, infiltrate, or otherwise escape before cleanup occurs. Use drip pans during oil transfer operations; adequate absorbent material must be onsite to clean up any spills and prevent releases to the environment. Cover tanks and drip pans during inclement weather. Provide procedures and equipment to prevent overfilling of tanks. If tanks and containers with an aggregate aboveground capacity greater than 5000 liter will be used onsite (only containers with a capacity of 208 liter or greater are counted), provide and implement a SPCC plan meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 112. Do not bring underground storage tanks to the installation for Contractor use during a project. Submit the SPCC plan to the Contracting Officer for approval.
Monitor and remove any rainwater that accumulates in open containment dikes or berms. Inspect the accumulated rainwater prior to draining from a containment dike to the environment, to determine there is no oil sheen present.
3.16 INADVERTENT DISCOVERY OF PETROLEUM-CONTAMINATED SOIL OR HAZARDOUS WASTES
If petroleum-contaminated soil, or suspected hazardous waste is found during construction that was not identified in the Contract documents, immediately notify the Contracting Officer. Do not disturb this material until authorized by the Contracting Officer.
3.17 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
Clean up areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting Officer, remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of the work. Grade parking area and similar temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 57 19 Page 34 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY (DA)
DA AR 200-1 (2007) Environmental Protection and Enhancement
DA AR 420-1 (2008; Revision 2012) Army Facilities Management
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
JEGS (2018) Japan Environmental Governing Standards
1.2 GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design, construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that policy, practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials, and use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. Divert a minimum of 60 percent by weight of total project solid waste from the landfill.
1.3 MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program. Take a pro-active, responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort. The Environmental Manager, as specified in Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, is responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the project. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials for construction products, and other materials generated during the construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management of waste, consider the availability of viable markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets, and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. Implement any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste. Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recyclable materials not claimed by the Government will accrue to the Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal, state, and local regulations. Also,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 74 19 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Waste Management Plan; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Records
1.5 MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, discuss environmental and waste management goals and issues at the following additional meetings:
a. Pre-bid meeting.
b. Preconstruction meeting.
c. Regular QC meetings.
d. Work safety meetings.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
Submit a Waste Management Plan within 15 days after Notice to Proceed and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. The plan demonstrates how to meet the the project waste diversion goal. Also, include the following in the plan:
a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste prevention and management.
b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including coordination with Subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation.
c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste management.
d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse of the various materials generated, including the areas on site and equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of wastes.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 74 19 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the waste to be generated.
f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the project.
g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of the permit or license for each facility.
h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for reuse on a future project, or recycled. Identify the recycling facilities by name, location, and phone number, including a copy of the permit or license for each facility.
i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.
j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site).
l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval of Contractor's Plan shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to each Subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the Contracting Officer.
1.7 RECORDS
Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Quantities may be measured by weight or by volume, but must be consistent throughout. List each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date. Identify the landfill, recycling center, waste processor, or other organization used to process or receive the solid waste. Provide explanations for any waste not recycled or reused. With each application for payment, submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and diversion, and submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. Make the records available to the Contracting Officer during construction, and deliver to the Contracting
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 74 19 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Officer upon completion of the construction a copy of the records.
1.8 REPORTS
Provide quarterly reports and a final report to Contracting Officer. Include project name, information for waste generated this quarter, and cumulative totals for the project in quarterly and final reports. Also include in each report, supporting documentation to include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. Include timber harvest and demolition information, if any. See Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report requirements.
1.9 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to Subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and coordinate with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. Separate materials by one of the following methods:
1.9.1 Source Separated Method
Separate waste products and materials that are recyclable from trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers. Transport materials to the respective recycling facility for further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process). Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area:
a. Land clearing debris.
b. Asphalt.
c. Concrete and masonry.
d. Metal* (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead brass, bronze).
(1) Ferrous*.
(2) Non-ferrous*.
e. Wood (nails and staples allowed).
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 74 19 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
f. Debris.
g. Glass* (colored glass allowed).
h. Paper*.
(1) Bond*.
(2) Newsprint*.
(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials*.
i. Plastic*.
(1) Type 1* - Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).
(2) Type 2* - High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
(3) Type 3* - Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
(4) Type 4* - Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).
(5) Type 5* - Polypropylene (PP).
(6) Type 6* - Polystyrene (PS).
(7) Type 7 - Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
j. Gypsum.
k. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
l. Carpet.
m. Ceiling tiles.
n. Insulation.
o. Beverage containers.
1.9.2 Co-Mingled Method
Place waste products and recyclable materials into a single container and then transport to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and processed.
1.9.3 Other Methods
Other proposed methods may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.10 DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. The installation accepts the following recyclable materials: carboard, steel, aluminium.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 74 19 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
The Contractor shall coordinate with the local recyling center for materials accepted.
Where materials are to be turned over to the Contractor for disposal, every effort shall be made to obtain credit from the disposal to reduce the cost of the Contract. Recycle or dispose of collected materials off of Government property at intervals approved by the Contracting Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures of JEGS, DA AR 200-1, DA AR 420-1, and local laws and regulations. Except as otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, dispose of in accordance with the following:
1. Reuse. Give first consideration to salvage for reuse since little or no re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created when items are reused in their original form. Consider sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse.
2. Recycle. Recycle waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being recyclable. Recycle all fluorescent lamps, HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
3. Compost. Consider composting on-site if a reasonable amount of compostable material will be available. Compostable materials include plant material, sawdust, and certain food scraps.
4. Waste. Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit to waste-to-energy plants where available. As the last choice, dispose of materials at a landfill or incinerator.
5. Return. Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 74 19 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-37 (2017) Cleaning Products for Industrial and Institutional Use
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 (2015) A/E/C Graphics Standard, Release 2.0
ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 (2015) A/E/C CAD Standard - Release 6.0
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 1-300-08 (2009, with Change 2, 2011) Criteria for Transfer and Acceptance of DoD Real Property
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings are the marked-up drawings, maintained by the Contractor on-site, that depict actual conditions and deviations from the Contract Documents. These deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not limited to: contract modifications; official responses to submitted Requests for Information (RFI's); direction from the Contracting Officer; design that is the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site and/or red-lined PDF files. These files serve as the basis for the creation of the record drawings.
1.2.2 Record Drawings
The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions reflected in the as-built drawings.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2.3 USACE CAD/BIM Technology Center
The USACE CAD/BIM Technology Center hosts all standard content for USACE. This content can be accessed through the CAD/BIM Technology Center website, https://cadbimcenter.erdc.dren.mil/.
1.3 SOURCE DRAWING FILES
Request the full set of electronic drawings, in the source format, for Record Drawing preparation, after award and at least 30 days prior to required use.
1.3.1 Terms and Conditions
Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government. The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use of these electronic files.
These electronic CAD drawing files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between the CAD files and the corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic CAD files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents prepared by the Government and the furnished Source drawing files, the signed and sealed construction documents govern. The Contractor is responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of these Source Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project. If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic source drawing files for use in producing construction data related to this contract, remove all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos, signatures, initials and dates).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only; Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan; G
Warranty Tags
Final Cleaning
Spare Parts Data
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Posted Instructions
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Drawings; G
Record Drawings; G
As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials; G
Final Approved Shop Drawings; G
Construction Contract Specifications; G
Interim DD FORM 1354; G
Checklist for DD FORM 1354; G
1.5 SPARE PARTS DATA
Submit two copies of the Spare Parts Data list.
a. Indicate manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock level required for maintenance and repair. List those items that may be standard to the normal maintenance of the system.
b. Supply the necessary quantity of items of each part for spare parts inventory. Provision of spare parts does not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities listed under the contract guarantee provisions.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
Additions and corrections to the contract drawings must be equal in quality and detail to that of the originals. Line colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols must be the same as the original line colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols.
1.7 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
1.7.1 Warranty Management Plan
Develop a warranty management plan which contains information relevant to FAR 52.246-21 Warranty of Construction. At least 30 days before the planned pre-warranty conference, submit one set of the warranty management plan. Include within the warranty management plan all required actions and documents to assure that the Government receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan narrative must contain sufficient detail to render it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel, whether tradesmen, or of engineering background, not necessarily familiar with this contract. The term "status" as indicated below must include due
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
date and whether item has been submitted or was accomplished. Submit warranty information, made available during the construction phase, to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate. Assemble approved information in a binder and turn over to the Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period must begin on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full product warranty period. Conduct a joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection, measured from time of acceptance; with the Contractor, Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative. The warranty management plan must include, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Roles and responsibilities of personnel associated with the warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers within the organizations of the Contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers or suppliers involved.
b. For each warranty, the name, address, telephone number, and email of each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.
c. A list and status of delivery of Certificates of Warranty for extended warranty items, including roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps, motors, transformers, and for commissioned systems, such as fire protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, and lightning protection systems.
d. As-Built Record of Equipment and Materials list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or system indicating:
(1) Name of item. (2) Model and serial numbers. (3) Location where installed. (4) Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers. (5) Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts. (6) Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be indicated with separate warranty expiration dates. (7) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable. (8) Starting point and duration of warranty period. (9) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the warranty in force. (10) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance manuals. (11) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty service. (12) Typical response time and repair time expected for various warranted equipment.
e. The plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month post-construction warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
f. Procedure and status of tagging of equipment covered by extended warranties.
g. Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of equipment where operation is critical for warranty or safety reasons.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.7.2 Performance Bond
The Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the construction period.
a. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited to administrative expenses.
b. In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the construction warranty work performed by the Government at the Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to recoup expenses from the bonding company.
c. Following oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written verification will follow oral instructions. Failure to respond will be cause for the Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.
1.7.3 Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual understanding with respect to the requirements of this section. At this meeting, establish and review communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty In connection with these requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact must be located within the local service area of the warranted construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with other portions of this provision.
1.7.4 Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service Requirements
Following oral or written notification by the Contracting Officer, respond to construction warranty service requirements in accordance with the "Construction Warranty Service Priority List" and the three categories of priorities listed below. Submit a report on any warranty item that has been repaired during the warranty period. Include within the report the cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action taken, and when the repair was completed. If the Contractor does not perform the construction warranty within the timeframe specified, the Government will perform the work and back charge the construction warranty payment item established.
a. First Priority Code 1. Perform onsite inspection to evaluate situation, and determine course of action within 4 hours, initiate work within 6 hours and work continuously to completion or relief.
b. Second Priority Code 2. Perform onsite inspection to evaluate
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
situation, and determine course of action within 8 hours, initiate work within 24 hours and work continuously to completion or relief.
c. Third Priority Code 3. All other work to be initiated within 3 work days and work continuously to completion or relief.
d. The "Construction Warranty Service Priority List" is as follows:
Code 1-Life Safety Systems (1) Fire suppression systems. (2) Fire alarm system(s) in place in the building.
Code 1-Air Conditioning Systems (1) Recreational support. (2) Air conditioning leak in part of building, if causing damage. (3) Air conditioning system not cooling properly.
Code 1-Doors (1) Overhead doors not operational, causing a security, fire, or safety problem. (2) Interior, exterior personnel doors or hardware, not functioning properly, causing a security, fire, or safety problem.
Code 3-Doors (1) Overhead doors not operational. (2) Interior/exterior personnel doors or hardware not functioning properly.
Code 1-Electrical (1) Power failure (entire area or any building operational after 1600 hours). (2) Security lights (3) Smoke detectors
Code 2-Electrical (1) Power failure (no power to a room or part of building). (2) Receptacle and lights (in a room or part of building).
Code 3-Electrical Street lights.
Code 1-Gas (1) Leaks and breaks. (2) No gas to family housing unit or cantonment area.
Code 1-Heat (1) Area power failure affecting heat. (2) Heater in unit not working.
Code 2-Kitchen Equipment (1) Dishwasher not operating properly. (2) All other equipment hampering preparation of a meal.
Code 1-Plumbing (1) Hot water heater failure. (2) Leaking water supply pipes.
Code 2-Plumbing (1) Flush valves not operating properly.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
(2) Fixture drain, supply line to commode, or any water pipe leaking. (3) Commode leaking at base.
Code 3 -Plumbing Leaky faucets.
Code 3-Interior (1) Floors damaged. (2) Paint chipping or peeling. (3) Casework.
Code 1-Roof Leaks Temporary repairs will be made where major damage to property is occurring.
Code 2-Roof Leaks Where major damage to property is not occurring, check for location of leak during rain and complete repairs on a Code 2 basis.
Code 2-Water (Exterior) No water to facility.
Code 2-Water (Hot) No hot water in portion of building listed.
Code 3-All other work not listed above.
1.7.5 Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, tag each warranted item with a durable, oil and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach each tag with a copper wire and spray with a silicone waterproof coating. Also, submit two record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and design. The date of acceptance and the QC signature must remain blank until the project is accepted for beneficial occupancy. Show the following information on the tag.
Type of product/material
Model number
Serial number
Contract number
Warranty period from/to
Inspector's signature
Construction Contractor
Address
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Telephone number
Warranty contact
Address
Telephone number
Warranty response time priority code
WARNING - PROJECT PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
Prepare the CAD drawing files in AutoCAD Release 2013 format compatible with a Windows 7 or higher operating system.
2.1.1 Additional Drawings
If additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for original drawings. The title block and drawing border to be used for any new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract drawings.
2.1.1.1 Sheet Numbers and File Names
If a sheet needs to be added between two sequential sheets, append a Supplemental Drawing Designator in accordance with ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 Adding a drawing sheet, and ERDC/ITL TR-12-1.
2.2 PDF AS-BUILT FILES
Provide electronic PDF "plots" of all contract drawings sheets associated with the as-built drawing submittal. Compile and organize the PDF set to match the contract drawings.
2.3 REDLINES AND MARKUPS
Provide PDFs of the current working redlines and/or markups complying with the as-builts drawing and markup requirements contained in this specification.
2.4 AS-BUILT RE-SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
If elements of an as-built submittal or advanced modeling package are rejected, provide the following for each re-submission, in addition to any information required in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
a. Re-submit all components required under paragraph As-Builts or Advanced Modeling Package, including a new Advanced Modeling Submittal
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Checklist and updated content in response to Government comments.
b. Provide a copy of all Government review comments.
c. Provide a disposition/response to each Government review comment for a back-check of the re-submission deliverable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Provide and maintain two black line print copies of the PDF contract drawings for As-Built Drawings. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined hard copies on site and/or red-lined PDF files. Submit As-Built Drawings 30 days prior to Beneficial Occupance Date (BOD).
3.1.1 Markup Guidelines
Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing. Show what was changed, how it was changed, where item(s) were relocated and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be neat, legible and accurate as follows:
a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes as follows:
(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information, coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.
(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines), lettering in notes and leaders.
(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.
b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red, green, and blue are used.
c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities, service lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already shown in legend.
d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.
e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when marking prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and application of change involved.
f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related section views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation views, schedules, notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to avoid conflicting data on all other sheets.
g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that relate to that revision.
h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch to a markup print:
1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings
2) Change the contract drawing to show
3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.
j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup drawings.
3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content
Revise As-Built Drawings in accordance with ERDC/ITL TR-12-1 and ERDC/ITL TR-12-6. Keep these working as-built markup drawings current on a weekly basis and at least one set available on the jobsite at all times. Changes from the contract drawings which are made during construction or additional information which might be uncovered in the course of construction must be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. Submit the working as-built markup drawings for approval prior to submission of each monthly pay estimate. For failure to maintain the working and final record drawings as specified herein, the Contracting Officer will withhold 10 percent of the monthly progress payment until approval of updated drawings. Show on the as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following information:
a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines. In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of each run.
b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building structure.
c. Layout and schematic drawings of electrical circuits and piping.
d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans.
e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working drawings specified to be prepared or furnished by the Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication, erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of equipment, and foundations.
f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or affected as part of the project construction.
g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.
h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
drawings.
i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
j. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls, fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
k. Changes in location of equipment and architectural features.
j. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications).
l. Actual location of anchors, construction and control joints, etc., in concrete.
m. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract work area during construction.
n. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection particularly where it will be normally submerged by water.
3.2 RECORD DRAWING FILES
If additional drawings are required, prepare them using the specified electronic file format applying the same graphic standards specified for original drawings. The title block and drawing border to be used for any new final record drawings must be identical to that used on the contract drawings. Accomplish additions and corrections to the contract drawings using CAD files. Provide all program files and hardware necessary to prepare final PDF record drawings. The Contracting Officer will review final PDF record drawings for accuracy and return them to the Contractor for required corrections, changes, additions, and deletions.
3.2.1 Rename the CAD Drawing files
Rename the CAD Drawing files using the Contract number as the Project Code field, (e.g., W912HV-15-C-0001-A-101.DWG) as instructed in the Pre-Construction conference. Use only those renamed files for the Marked-up changes. Make all changes on the layer/level as the original item.
a. For AutoCAD files (DWG), enter all as-built delta changes and notations on the AS-BUILT layer.
c. When final revisions have been completed, show the wording "RECORD DRAWING AS-BUILTS" followed by the name of the Contractor in letters at least 5 mm high on the cover sheet drawing. Date RECORD DRAWING AS-BUILTS" drawing revisions in the revision block.
d. Within 20 days after Government approval of all of the working record drawings for a phase of work, prepare the final CAD record drawings for that phase of work and submit PDF drawing files and two sets of prints for review and approval. The Government will promptly return one set of prints annotated with any necessary corrections. Within 10 days revise the CAD files accordingly at no additional cost and submit one set of final prints for the completed phase of work to the Government. Within 20 days of substantial completion of all phases of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
work, submit the final record drawing package for the entire project. Submit one set of electronic CAD files, and one set of the approved working record PDF files on an optical disc with two sets of prints. The CAD files must be complete in all details and identical in form and function to the CAD drawing files supplied by the Government. Prepare AutoCAD files for transmittal using e-Transmit. Make any transactions or adjustments necessary to accomplish this. The Government reserves the right to reject any drawing files it deems incompatible with the customer's CAD system. Paper prints, drawing files and storage media submitted will become the property of the Government upon final approval. Failure to submit final record PDF drawing files, CAD files and marked prints as specified will be cause for withholding any payment due under this contract. Approval and acceptance of final record drawings must be accomplished before final payment is made.
3.3 RECORD DRAWINGS
Prepare final record drawings after the completion of each definable feature of work as listed in the Contractor Quality Control Plan (such as Foundations, Utilities, or Structural Steel as appropriate for the project). Transfer the changes from the approved working as-built markup drawings to the original electronic CAD drawing files. Modify the as-built CAD drawing files to correctly show the features of the project as-built by bringing the working CAD drawing set into agreement with approved working as-built markup drawings, and adding such additional drawings as may be necessary. Refer to ERDC/ITL TR-12-1. Jointly review the working as-built markup drawings with printouts from working as-built CAD drawing PDF files for accuracy and completeness. Monthly review of working as-built CAD drawing PDF file printouts must cover all sheets revised since the previous review. These PDF drawing files are part of the permanent records of this project. Any drawings damaged or lost must be satisfactorily replaced at no expense to the Government.
Drawing revisions (include within change order price the cost to change working and final record drawings to reflect revisions) and compliance with the following procedures.
a. Follow directions in the revision for posting descriptive changes.
b. The revision delta size must be 8 mm unless the area where the delta is to be placed is crowded. Use a smaller size delta for crowded areas.
c. Place a revision delta at the location of each deletion.
d. For new details or sections which are added to a drawing, place a revision delta by the detail or section title.
e. For minor changes, place a revision delta by the area changed on the drawing (each location).
f. For major changes to a drawing, place a revision delta by the title of the affected plan, section, or detail at each location.
g. For changes to schedules or drawings, place a revision delta either by the schedule heading or by the change in the schedule.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3.1 Final Record Drawing Package
Submit the final record PDF and CAD drawings package for the entire project within 20 days of substantial completion of all phases of work. Submit one set of A1 size PDF and CAD files on optical disc, read-only memory (ROM), two sets of A1 size prints and one set of the approved working record drawings. The package must be complete in all details and identical in form and function to the contract drawing files supplied by the Government.
3.4 FINAL APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit final approved project shop drawings 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.
3.5 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS
Submit final PDF file record construction contract specifications, including revisions thereto, 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.
3.6 AS-BUILT RECORD OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Furnish one copy of preliminary record of equipment and materials used on the project 15 days prior to final inspection. This preliminary submittal will be reviewed and returned 2 days after final inspection with Government comments. Submit Two sets of final record of equipment and materials 10 days after final inspection. Key the designations to the related area depicted on the contract drawings. List the following data:
RECORD OF DESIGNATED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DATA Description Specification Manufacturer Composition Where Used Section and Catalog, and Size Model, and Serial Number
3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide project operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS DATA. Provide one electronic copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual filesand three hard copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Submit to the Contracting Officer for approval within 30 calendar days of the Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD). Update and resubmit files for final approval at BOD.
3.8 CLEANUP
Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971 and submit two copies of the listing of completed final clean-up items. Leave premises "broom clean." Comply with GS-37 for general purpose cleaning and bathroom cleaning. Use only nonhazardous cleaning materials, including natural
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
cleaning materials, in the final cleanup. Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site. Recycle, salvage, and return construction and demolition waste from project in accordance with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, and 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL.
3.9 REAL PROPERTY RECORD
Near the completion of Project, but a minimum of 60 days prior to final acceptance of the work, complete and submit an accounting of all installed property with Interim DD FORM 1354. Include any additional assets, improvements, and alterations from the Draft DD FORM 1354. Contact the Contracting Officer for any project specific information necessary to complete the DD FORM 1354. Refer to UFC 1-300-08 for instruction on completing the DD FORM 1354. For convenience, a blank fillable PDF DD FORM 1354 may be obtained at the following link: www.esd.whs.mil/Portals/54/Documents/DD/forms/dd/dd1354.pdf
Submit the completed Checklist for DD FORM 1354 of Installed Building Equipment items. Attach this list to the updated DD FORM 1354.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 00 Page 14 Form Approved OMB No. 0704-0188 TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF DoD REAL PROPERTY PAGE OF PAGES The public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 30 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other aspect of this co information, including suggestions for reducing the burden, to the Department of Defense, Washington Headquarters Services, Executive Services Directorate, Information Management Division, 4800 Mark Center Drive, Alexandria,VA 22350-3100 (0704-0188). Respondents should be aware that notwithstanding any other provision of law, no person shall be subject to any penalty for failing to comply with a collection of information if itdoes not display a currently valid OMB control number. PLEASE DO NOT RETURN YOUR COMPLETED FORM TO THE ABOVE ORGANIZATION.
1. FROM (Organization Name) 2. DATE PREPARED 8. TRANSACTION DETAILS US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS IWAKUNI RESIDENT OFFICE (YYYYMMDD) 3. PROJECT/JOB a. METHOD (X all that apply) b. WHEN/EVENT (X one) 4. SERIAL NUMBER 96310 NUMBER ACQUISITION BY CONSTRUCTION 2/17/2020 TRANSFER BETWEEN SERVICES TOTAL ASSET PLACED-IN-SERVICE
5. TO (Organization - Installation Code and Name) CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PARTIAL ASSET PLACED-IN-SERVICE 7a. PLACED-IN- 7. CONTRACT INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS 6. RPSUID/SITENAME/ INSTCODE/INSTNAME SERVICE DATE NUMBER(S) MCAS IWAKUNI, REAL PROPERTY OFFICER (YYYYMMDD) c. TYPE (X one) 96310 DRAFT FINAL INTERIM 9 10a. 11 12 AREA OTHER 23 CATEGORY 13. TYPE 14. SUST. 15. 16. PRIMARY 20. FUND 22. INTER- ITEM NO. FACILITY NO. 10b. RPUID CATCODE DESCRIPTION 17. SECONDARY 18. SECONDARY 19. COST 21. FUND ORG ITEM CODE CODE CODE PRIMARY UM SOURCE EST CODE UM UM QUANTITY UM QUANTITY REMARKS 1 VTOL‐S 85123 TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS P 3 LS 1 11Project Name; Traffic Control 2 VTOL‐S 13630 RUNWAY EDGE LIGHTING P 3 M 1310 11Project Name; Electric Service 3 VTOL‐S 11125 FW A/C (VTOL) LANDING PAD P 3 M2 4960 11Project Name; Airfield Pavement 4 VTOL‐S 11340 AIRCRAFT ACCESS APRON P 3 M2 2949 11Project Name; Access Road 5 VTOL‐S 87135 RETAINING WALL P 3 M 239 11Project Name; Retaining Wall 6 VTOL‐S 87110 STORM SEWER P 3 M 592 11Project Name; Storm Drainage Project Name; Site 7 VTOL‐S 93220 OTHER SITE IMPRVMT (UTIL) P EA 1 11 3 Improvement/Demolition COMM LINES EXCL 8 VTOL‐S 13510 P 3 M 200 11Project Name; Site Communications TELEPHONE
24. STATEMENT OF COMPLETION. The facilities listed hereon are in accordance with maps, drawings, and 25a. ACCEPTED BY (Typed Name and Signature) b. DATE SIGNED specifications and change orders approved by the authorized representative of the using agency except for the deficiencies listed on the reverse side. b. DATE SIGNED (YYYYMMDD)
a. TRANSFERRED BY (Typed Name and Signature) c. TITLE (DPW/RPAO) (YYYYMMDD) 26. PROPERTY VOUCHER NUMBER c. TITLE (Area Engr./Base Engr./DPW/Construction Agent)
DD FORM 1354, AUG 2013
PREVIOUS EDITION MAY BE USED.
Adobe Designer 9.0
Attachment 01 78 00-A FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
O&M Database; G Training Plan; G Training Outline; G Training Content; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Training Video Recording; G Validation of Training Completion; G
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data for the provided equipment, product, or system, defining the importance of system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventive operation and maintenance. Compile, prepare, and aggregate O&M data to include clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.3.1 Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Operation and Maintenance data must be consistent with the manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3.2 Package Content
Provide data package content in both English and Japanese, and in accordance with paragraph SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES. Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system designated for data package submission, except as follows. Use Data Package 5 for commissioned items without a specified data package requirement in the individual technical sections. Provide a Data Package 5 instead of Data Package 1 or 2, as specified in the individual technical section, for items that are commissioned.
1.3.3 Changes to Submittals
Provide manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Submit changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement.
1.4 O&M DATABASE
Develop an editable, electronic spreadsheet based on the equipment in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals that contains the information required to start a preventive maintenance program. As a minimum, provide list of system equipment, location installed, warranty expiration date, manufacturer, model, and serial number.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FILE FORMAT
Assemble data packages into electronic Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file using the most current version of Adobe Acrobat or similar software capable of producing PDF file format. Provide compact disks (CD) or data digital versatile disk (DVD) as appropriate, so that each one contains operation, maintenance and record files, project record documents, and training videos. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.
1.5.1 Organization
Bookmark Product and Drawing Information documents using the current version of CSI Masterformat numbering system, and arrange submittals using the specification sections as a structure. Use CSI Masterformat and UFGS numbers along with descriptive bookmarked titles that explain the content of the information that is being bookmarked.
1.5.2 CD or DVD Label and Disk Holder or Case
Provide the following information on the disk label and disk holder or case:
a. Building Number.
b. Project Title.
c. Activity and Location.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
d. Construction Contract Number.
e. Prepared For: (Contracting Agency).
f. Prepared By: (Name, title, phone number and email address).
g. Include the disk content on the disk label.
h. Date.
i. Virus scanning program used.
1.6 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
The following are a detailed description of the data package items listed in paragraph SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES.
1.6.1 Operating Instructions
Provide specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system:
1.6.1.1 Safety Precautions and Hazards
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for operating conditions. List all residual hazards identified in the Activity Hazard Analysis provided under Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. Provide recommended safeguards for each identified hazard.
1.6.1.2 Operator Prestart
Provide procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for use.
1.6.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
1.6.1.4 Normal Operations
Provide Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment. Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures.
1.6.1.5 Emergency Operations
Provide Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Provide Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled.
1.6.1.6 Operator Service Requirements
Provide instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gauge readings.
1.6.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Provide a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item equipment should not be allowed to run.
1.6.1.8 Operating Log
Provide forms, sample logs, and instructions for maintaining necessary operating records.
1.6.1.9 Additional Requirements for HVAC Control Systems
Provide Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:
a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply functions, features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and algorithms.
b. Full as-built sequence of operations.
c. Copies of checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not Cx tests).
d. Full points list. Provide a listing of rooms with the following information for each room:
(1) Floor.
(2) Room number.
(3) Room name.
(4) Air handler unit ID.
(5) Reference drawing number.
(6) Air terminal unit tag ID.
(7) Heating or cooling valve tag ID.
(8) Minimum cfm.
(9) Maximum cfm.
e. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the system.
f. Full as-built print out of software program.
g. Marking of system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6.2 Preventive Maintenance
Provide the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize repairs for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.6.2.1 Lubrication Data
Include the following preventive maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for lubrication required under paragraph OPERATOR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS:
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges and applications.
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
1.6.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan, Schedule, and Procedures
Provide manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, condition monitoring (predictive tests) and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize repairs. Provide instructions stating when the systems shall be retested. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation.
a. Define the anticipated time required to perform each of each test (work-hours), test apparatus, number of personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements within the schedule. Provide a remarks column for the testing validation procedure referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature, volume, voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration, adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate procedures for preventive maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and cleaning necessary to minimize repairs.
b. Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out, troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the system after acceptance.
1.6.2.3 Cleaning Recommendations
Provide environmentally preferable cleaning recommendations in accordance with ASTM E1971.
1.6.3 Repair
Provide manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs for the installed model and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.6.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Provide step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement.
1.6.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Provide point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.
1.6.3.3 Repair Procedures
Provide instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
1.6.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions
Provide step-by-step procedures and a list of required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Use a combination of text and illustrations.
1.6.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Provide lists of spare parts and supplies required for repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain.
1.6.3.6 Repair Work-Hours
Provide manufacturer's projection of repair work-hours including requirements by type of craft. Identify, and tabulate separately, repair that requires the equipment manufacturer to complete or to participate.
1.6.4 Real Property Equipment
Provide a list of installed equipment furnished under this Contract. Include all information usually listed on manufacturer's name plate. In the "EQUIPMENT-IN-PLACE LIST" include, as applicable, the following for each piece of equipment installed: description of item, location (by room number), model number, serial number, capacity, name and address of manufacturer, name and address of equipment supplier, condition, spare parts list, manufacturer's catalog, and warranty. Submit the final list 30 days after transfer of the completed facility.
Key the designations to the related area depicted on the Contract drawings. List the following data:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
RECORD OF DESIGNATED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DATA
Description Specification Manufacturer Composition Where Used Section and Catalog, and Size Model, and Serial Number
1.6.5 Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following:
1.6.5.1 Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of SD-03 Product Data submittals documented with the required approval.
1.6.5.2 Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals documented with the required approval.
1.6.5.3 O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals documented with the required approval.
1.6.5.4 Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for the parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and separate listing must show the index, reference, or key number that shall cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Group the parts shown in the listings by components, assemblies, and subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as typically shown in a master parts catalog.
1.6.5.5 Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or Contract documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty information for primary componentsof the system. Provide copies of warranties required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
1.6.5.6 Extended Warranty Information
List all warranties for products, equipment, components, and sub-components whose duration exceeds one year. For each warranty listed,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
indicate the applicable specification section, duration, start date, end date, and the point of contact for warranty fulfillment. Also, list or reference the specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be performed to keep the warranty valid. Provide copies of warranties required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
1.6.5.7 Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems.
1.6.5.8 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components. Provide final set points.
1.6.5.9 Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms. Provide final set points.
1.6.5.10 Field Test Reports
Provide a copy of Field Test Reports (SD-06) submittals documented with the required approval.
1.6.5.11 Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.7 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Provide the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The information required in each type of data package follows:
1.7.1 Data Package 1
a. Safety precautions and hazards.
b. Cleaning recommendations.
c. Maintenance and repair procedures.
d. Warranty information.
e. Extended warranty information.
f. Contractor information.
g. Spare parts and supply list.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.7.2 Data Package 2
a. Safety precautions and hazards.
b. Normal operations.
c. Environmental conditions.
d. Lubrication data.
e. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures.
f. Cleaning recommendations.
g. Maintenance and repair procedures.
h. Removal and replacement instructions.
i. Spare parts and supply list.
j. Parts identification.
k. Warranty information.
l. Extended warranty information.
m. Contractor information.
1.7.3 Data Package 3
a. Safety precautions and hazards.
b. Operator prestart.
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures.
d. Normal operations.
e. Emergency operations.
f. Environmental conditions.
g. Operating log.
h. Lubrication data.
i. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures.
j. Cleaning recommendations.
k. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques.
l. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
m. Maintenance and repair procedures.
n. Removal and replacement instructions.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
o. Spare parts and supply list.
p. Product submittal data.
q. O&M submittal data.
r. Parts identification.
s. Warranty information.
t. Extended warranty information.
u. Testing equipment and special tool information.
v. Testing and performance data.
w. Contractor information.
x. Field test reports.
1.7.4 Data Package 4
a. Safety precautions and hazards.
b. Operator prestart.
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures.
d. Normal operations.
e. Emergency operations.
f. Operator service requirements.
g. Environmental conditions.
h. Operating log.
i. Lubrication data.
j. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures.
k. Cleaning recommendations.
l. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques.
m. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams.
n. Repair procedures.
o. Removal and replacement instructions.
p. Spare parts and supply list.
q. Repair work-hours.
r. Product submittal data.
s. O&M submittal data.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
t. Parts identification.
u. Warranty information.
v. Extended warranty information.
w. Personnel training requirements.
x. Testing equipment and special tool information.
y. Testing and performance data.
z. Contractor information.
aa. Field test reports.
1.7.5 Data Package 5
a. Safety precautions and hazards.
b. Operator prestart.
c. Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures.
d. Normal operations.
e. Environmental conditions.
f. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures.
g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques.
h. Wiring and control diagrams.
i. Maintenance and repair procedures.
j. Removal and replacement instructions.
k. Spare parts and supply list.
l. Product submittal data.
m. Manufacturer's instructions.
n. O&M submittal data.
o. Parts identification.
p. Testing equipment and special tool information.
q. Warranty information.
r. Extended warranty information.
s. Testing and performance data.
t. Contractor information.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
u. Field test reports.
v. Additional requirements for HVAC control systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TRAINING
Prior to acceptance of the facility by the Contracting Officer for Beneficial Occupancy, provide comprehensive training conducted in English for the systems and equipment specified in the technical specifications. The training must be targeted for the Facilities Management Specialist, building maintenance personnel, and applicable building occupants. Instructors must be well-versed in the particular systems that they are presenting. Address aspects of the Operation and Maintenance Manual submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Training must include classroom or field lectures based on the system operating requirements. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing seven (7) calendar days prior of the scheduled instructional services. The location of classroom training requires approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.1.1 Training Plan
Submit a written training plan to the Contracting Officer for approval at least 60 calendar days prior to the scheduled training. Include within the plan the following elements:
a. Equipment included in training.
b. Intended audience.
c. Location of training.
d. Dates of training.
e. Objectives.
f. Outline of the information to be presented and subjects covered including description.
g. Start and finish times and duration of training on each subject.
h. Methods (e.g. classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations, written handouts).
i. Instructor names and instructor qualifications for each subject.
j. List of texts and other materials to be furnished by the Contractor that are required to support training.
k. Description of proposed software to be used for video recording of training sessions.
3.1.2 Training Content
The core of this training must be based on manufacturer's recommendations
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and the operation and maintenance information. Spend 95 percent of the instruction time during the presentation on the OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Include the following for each system training presentation:
a. Start-up, normal operation, shutdown, unoccupied operation, seasonal changeover, manual operation, controls set-up and programming, troubleshooting, and alarms.
b. Relevant health and safety issues.
c. Discussion of how the feature or system is environmentally responsive. Advise adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation.
d. Design intent.
e. Use of O&M Manual Files.
f. Review of control drawings and schematics.
g. Interactions with other systems.
h. Special maintenance and replacement sources.
i. Tenant interaction issues.
3.1.3 Training Outline
Provide the Operation and Maintenance Manual Files (Bookmarked PDF) and a written course outline listing the major and minor topics to be discussed by the instructor on each day of the course to each trainee in the course. Provide the course outline 14 calendar days prior to the training.
3.1.4 Training Video Recording
Record classroom training session(s) on video. Provide to the Contracting Officer two copies of the training session(s) in DVD video recording format. Capture within the recording, in video and audio, the instructors' training presentations including question and answer periods with the attendees. The recording camera(s) must be attended by a person during the recording sessions to assure proper size of exhibits and projections during the recording are visible and readable when viewed as training.
3.1.5 Unresolved Questions from Attendees
If, at the end of the training course, there are questions from attendees that remain unresolved, the instructor must send the answers, in writing, to the Contracting Officer for transmittal to the attendees, and the training video must be modified to include the appropriate clarifications.
3.1.6 Validation of Training Completion
Ensure that each attendee at each training session signs a class roster daily to confirm Government participation in the training. At the completion of training, submit a signed validation letter that includes a sample record of training for reporting what systems were included in the training, who provided the training, when and where the training was performed, and copies of the signed class rosters. Provide two copies of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the validation to the Contracting Officer, and one copy to the Operation and Maintenance Manual Preparer for inclusion into the Manual's documentation.
3.1.7 Quality Control Coordination
Coordinate this training with Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 01 78 23 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY PROFESSIONALS (ASSP)
ASSP A10.6 (2006) Safety & Health Program Requirements for Demolition Operations - American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2015; Rev L) Obstruction Marking and Lighting
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Definitions
1.2.1.1 Demolition
Demolition is the process of wrecking or taking out any load-supporting structural member of a facility together with any related handling and disposal operations.
1.2.1.2 Demolition Plan
Demolition Plan is the planned steps and processes for managing demolition activities and identifying the required sequencing activities and disposal
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
mechanisms.
1.2.2 Demolition/Deconstruction Plan
Prepare a Demolition Plan and submit proposed salvage, demolition, and removal procedures for approval before work is started. Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, and airfield lighting, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of operations. Identify components and materials to be salvaged for reuse or recycling with reference to paragraph Existing Facilities to be Removed. Append tracking forms for all removed materials indicating type, quantities, condition, destination, and end use. Coordinate with Waste Management Plan in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL. Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Plan shall be approved by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning.
1.2.3 General Requirements
Do not begin demolition or deconstruction until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer. The work of this section is to be performed in a manner that maximizes the value derived from the salvage and recycling of materials. Remove rubbish and debris from the station daily; do not allow accumulations on airfield pavements. The work includes demolition, deconstruction, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from Government property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.
1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload pavements to remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.
1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove snow, dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3.2 Weather Protection
For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and materials and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of existing roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and workmen ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas.
1.3.3 Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition and deconstruction operations. Prior to start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor.
1.3.4 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing, shoring, or lateral support until demolished, unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract.
1.4 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Demolition Plan; G Existing Conditions
SD-07 Certificates
Notification; G
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit timely notification of demolition projects to Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Notify the local air pollution control district/agency and the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Comply with federal, state, and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSP A10.6. Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of explosives will not be permitted.
1.6.1 Dust and Debris Control
Prevent the spread of dust and debris on airfield pavements and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris that may result in foreign object damage potential to aircraft.
1.7 PROTECTION
1.7.1 Traffic Control Signs
a. Where pedestrian and driver or aircraft safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Anchor barricades in a manner to prevent displacement by wind, jet or prop blast. Notify the Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work.
Provide a minimum of 2 FAA type L-810 steady burning red obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 30 m, but less than 60 m above ground level. The use of LED based obstruction lights are not permitted. For temporary structures (including cranes) over 60 m above ground level provide obstruction lighting in accordance with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Light construction and installation shall comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights shall be operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer. Maintain the temporary services during the period of construction and remove only after permanent services have been installed and tested and are in operation.
1.7.2 Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area, section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.
1.8 FOREIGN OBJECT DAMAGE (FOD)
Aircraft and aircraft engines are subject to FOD from debris and waste material lying on airfield pavements. Remove all such materials that may appear on operational aircraft pavements due to the Contractor's operations. If necessary, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to install a temporary barricade at the Contractor's expense to control the spread of FOD potential debris. The barricade shall include a fence covered with a fabric designed to stop the spread of debris. Anchor the fence and fabric to prevent displacement by winds or jet/prop blasts. Remove barricade when no longer required.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.9 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 100 mm will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible conflicting electrical conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages on the record document. Submit survey results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIAL
a. Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for soils used as backfill material to fill basements, voids, depressions or excavations resulting from demolition or deconstruction of structures. Fill material shall be waste products from demolition or deconstruction until all waste appropriate for this purpose is consumed.
b. Fill material shall conform to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for reuse. Existing construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled. Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse, remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified. Materials shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible.
3.1.1 Structures
a. Remove existing structures indicated to be removed to bottom of foundation slabs/walls. Break up basement slabs to permit drainage. Remove sidewalks, curbs, gutters and street light bases as indicated.
b. Demolish structures in a systematic manner from the top of the structure to the ground. Complete demolition work above each tier or floor before the supporting members on the lower level are disturbed. Demolish concrete in small sections. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by means of derricks, platforms hoists, or other suitable methods as approved by the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.2 Utilities and Related Equipment
3.1.2.1 General Requirements
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap utilities for future use, as indicated.
3.1.2.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities, as indicated and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Contracting Officer. When utility lines are encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the Contracting Officer prior to further work in that area. Remove meters and related equipment and deliver to a location on the station in accordance with instructions of the Contracting Officer.
3.1.3 Paving and Slabs
Remove concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs including aggregate base as indicated to full depth. Provide neat sawcuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated. Pavement and slabs designated to be recycled and utilized in this project shall be moved, ground and stored as directed by the Contracting Officer. Pavement and slabs not to be used in this project shall be removed from the Installation at Contractor's expense.
3.1.4 Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 50 mm. Make each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete.
3.1.5 Structural Steel
Dismantle structural steel at field connections and in a manner that will prevent bending or damage. Salvage for recycle structural steel, steel joists, girders, angles, plates, columns and shapes. Do not use flame-cutting torches. Transport steel joists and girders as whole units and not dismantled. Transport structural steel shapes to a designated recycling facility, stacked according to size, type of member and length, and stored off the ground, protected from the weather.
3.1.6 Miscellaneous Metal
Salvage shop-fabricated items such as access doors and frames, steel gratings, metal ladders, wire mesh partitions, metal railings, metal windows and similar items as whole units. Salvage light-gage and cold-formed metal framing, such as steel studs, steel trusses, metal gutters, roofing and siding, metal toilet partitions, toilet accessories
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and similar items. Scrap metal shall become the Contractor's property. Recycle scrap metal as part of demolition operations. Provide separate containers to collect scrap metal and transport to a scrap metal collection or recycling facility, in accordance with the Waste Management Plan.
3.1.7 Airfield Lighting
Remove existing airfield lighting as indicated and terminate in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Remove edge lights and associated transformers as indicated and dispose of off station.
3.1.8 Items With Unique/Regulated Disposal Requirements
Remove and dispose of items with unique or regulated disposal requirements in the manner dictated by law or in the most environmentally responsible manner.
3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS
Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that are sequential to demolition work in areas occupied by structures to be demolished until all demolition in the area has been completed and debris removed. Fill holes, open basements and other hazardous openings.
3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.3.1 Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractor's demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition. The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited.
3.3.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment to be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses. Coordinate the re-use of materials and equipment with the re-use requirements in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL. Capture re-use of materials in the diversion calculations for the project.
3.3.2.1 Materials Identified for Reuse
Salvage and store for reuse the wind direction indicator and sloped inlet structure grating as indicated on the project drawings.
3.3.3 Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are indicated to be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of the Government, and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
deliver to a storage site.
a. Salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
b. Store all materials salvaged for the Contractor as approved by the Contracting Officer and remove from Government property before completion of the contract. Coordinate the salvaged materials with tracking requirements in accordance with Section 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL. Capture salvaged materials in the diversion calculations for the project.
c. Remove salvaged items to remain the property of the Government in a manner to prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items from damage while in storage or during shipment. Items damaged during removal or storage must be repaired or replaced to match existing items. Properly identify the contents of containers. Deliver the following items reserved as property of the Government to the areas designated by Contracting Officer.
3.3.4 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material
Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable noncombustible material off the site. Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable combustible material off the site.
3.4 CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations. Remove and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
3.5.1 Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified off the station. Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited.
3.5.2 Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished structures will not be permitted on Government property.
3.5.3 Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from demolished structures, except waste soil, from Government property for legal disposal. Dispose of waste soil as directed.
3.6 REUSE OF SALVAGED ITEMS
Recondition salvaged materials and equipment designated for reuse before installation. Replace items damaged during removal and salvage operations or restore them as necessary to usable condition.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 41 00 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 02 56 13
WASTE CONTAINMENT GEOMEMBRANE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D638 (2014) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D1004 (2013) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting
ASTM D1505 (2018) Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique
ASTM D1603 (2014) Carbon Black Content in Olefin Plastics
ASTM D3895 (2014) Oxidative-Induction Time of Polyolefins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry
ASTM D4218 (2015) Determination of Carbon Black Content in Polyethylene Compounds by the Muffle-Furnace Technique
ASTM D4833/D4833M (2007; E 2013; R 2013) Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products
ASTM D5199 (2012) Measuring Nominal Thickness of Geosynthetics
ASTM D5397 (2019) Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Stress Crack Resistance of Polyolefin Geomembranes Using Notched Constant Tensile Load Test
ASTM D5596 (2003; R 2016) Standard Test Method For Microscopic Evaluation of the Dispersion
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
of Carbon Black in Polyolefin Geosynthetics
ASTM D5721 (2008; R 2013) Air-Oven Aging of Polyolefin Geomembranes
ASTM D5885/D5885M (2017) Standard Test Method for Oxidative Induction Time of Polyolefin Geosynthetics by High-Pressure Differential Scanning Calorimetry
ASTM D6392 (2012; R 2018) Standard Test Method for Determining the Integrity of Nonreinforced Geomembrane Seams Produced Using Thermo-Fusion Methods
ASTM D6497/D6497M (2002; R 2015; E 2015)Standard Guide for Mechanical Attachment of Geomembrane to Penetrations or Structures
ASTM D7238 (2006; R 2012) Standard Test Method for Effect of Exposure of Unreinforced Polyolefin Geomembrane Using Fluorescent UV Condensation Apparatus
GEOSYNTHETIC INSTITUTE (GSI)
GSI GRI GM7 (1995) Accelerated Curing of Geomembrane Test Strip Seams Made by Chemical Fusion Methods
GSI GRI GM9 (1995; R 2013) Cold Weather Seaming of Geomembranes
1.2 PANEL LAYOUT
Submit geomembrane panel layout and penetration detail drawings, a minimum of 7 days prior to geomembrane placement.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Geomembrane Panel Layout Penetrations As-Built Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Materials; G Field Seaming; G Qualifications
SD-04 Samples
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Samples
SD-06 Test Reports
Surface Preparation Non-Destructive Field Seam Continuity Testing Destructive Field Seam Testing Destructive Seam Test Repairs Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Samples Materials Surface Preparation Destructive Field Seam Testing Destructive Seam Test Repairs Tests
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Qualifications
1.4.1.1 Manufacturer
Manufacturer shall have produced the proposed geomembrane sheets for at least 5 completed projects having a total minimum area of 930,000 square meters.
1.4.1.2 Fabricator
The fabricator is responsible for seaming geomembrane sheets into panels. Fabricator shall have fabricated the proposed geomembrane panels for at least 5 completed projects having a total minimum area of 186,000 square meters.
1.4.1.3 Installer
The installer is responsible for field handling, deploying, seaming, anchoring, and field Quality Control (QC) testing of the geomembrane. The installer shall have installed the proposed geomembrane material for at least 3 completed projects having a total minimum area of 10,000 square meters. At least one seamer shall have experience seaming a minimum of 2,500 square meters of the proposed geomembrane using the same type of seaming equipment and geomembrane thickness specified for this project.
1.4.1.4 QC Inspector
The QC inspector is the person or corporation hired by the Contractor, who is responsible for monitoring and documenting activities related to the QC of the geomembrane from manufacturing through installation. The QC inspector shall have provided QC inspection during installation of the proposed geomembrane material for at least 5 completed projects having a total minimum area of 10,000 square meters.
1.4.1.5 QC Laboratory
The QC laboratory shall have provided QC and/or Quality Assurance (QA)
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
testing of the proposed geomembrane and geomembrane seams for at least five completed projects having a total minimum area of 186,000 square meters. The QC laboratory shall be accredited via the Geosynthetic Accreditation Institute's Laboratory Accreditation Program (GAI-LAP) for the tests the QC laboratory will be required to perform.
1.4.2 Submittal Requirements
Submit manufacturer's, and fabricator's qualification statements, including resumes of key personnel involved in the project, a minimum of 7 days prior to geomembrane shipment. Also submit installer's, QC inspector's, and QC laboratory's qualification statements including resumes of key personnel involved in the project a minimum of 7 days prior to geomembrane placement. The submittal from the QC laboratory shall include verification that the laboratory is accredited via the Geosynthetic Accreditation Institute's Laboratory Accreditation Program (GAI-LAP) for the tests the QC laboratory will be required to perform. The following shall also be submitted:
a. Manufacturer's and fabricator's QC manuals, a minimum of 7 days prior to geomembrane shipment. Installer's QC manual, a minimum of 7 days prior to geomembrane placement.
b. Geomembrane QA and QC samples.
c. Manufacturer's certified raw and sheet material test reports and a copy of the QC certificates, a minimum of 7 days prior to shipment of geomembrane to the site.
d. Certification from the QC inspector and installer of the acceptability of the surface on which the geomembrane is to be placed, immediately prior to geomembrane placement.
e. QC inspector certified test results on all field seams. Installer and certified QC laboratory test results on all destructively tested field seams. QC inspector certified test results on all repaired seams. Certified QC test results.
f. Certified laboratory interface friction test results including description of equipment and test method, a minimum of 7 days prior to geomembrane shipment.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Delivery
The QC inspector shall be present during delivery and unloading of the geomembrane. Each geomembrane roll/panel shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, product identification number, roll/panel number, and roll dimensions.
1.5.2 Storage
Temporary storage at the project site shall be on a level surface, free of sharp objects where water cannot accumulate. The geomembrane shall be protected from puncture, abrasion, excessive heat or cold, material degradation, or other damaging circumstances. Storage shall not result in crushing the core of roll goods or flattening of the rolls. Rolls shall not be stored more than two high. Palleted materials shall be stored on level surfaces and shall not be stacked on top of one another.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Ultraviolet sensitive materials (i.e., PVC) shall be covered with a sacrificial opaque and waterproof covering or placed in a temporary shelter. Damaged geomembrane shall be removed from the site and replaced with geomembrane that meets the specified requirements.
1.5.3 Handling
Rolls/panels shall not be dragged, lifted by one end, or dropped. A pipe or solid bar, of sufficient strength to support the full weight of a roll without significant bending, shall be used for all handling activities. The diameter of the pipe or solid bar shall be small enough to be easily inserted through the core of the roll. Chains shall be used to link the ends of the pipe or bar to the ends of a spreader bar. The spreader bar shall be wide enough to prevent the chains from rubbing against the ends of the roll. Alternatively, a stinger bar protruding from the end of a forklift or other equipment may be used. The stinger bar shall be at least three-fourths the length of the core and also must be capable of supporting the full weight of the roll without significant bending. If recommended by the manufacturer, a sling handling method utilizing appropriate loading straps may be used.
1.6 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Geomembrane shall not be deployed or field-seamed in the presence of excess moisture (i.e., rain, fog, dew), in areas of ponded water, or in the presence of excess wind. Unless authorized by the Contracting Officer, no placement or seaming shall be attempted at ambient temperatures below 0 degrees C or above 40 degrees C. Ambient temperature shall be measured at a height no greater than 150 mm above the ground or geomembrane surface. If seaming is allowed below 0 degrees C, the procedures outlined in GSI GRI GM9 shall be followed. In marginal conditions, seaming shall cease unless destructive field seam tests, conducted by the QC laboratory, confirm that seam properties meet the requirements listed in Table 2. Tests shall be conducted in accordance with paragraph Destructive Field Seam Testing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Raw Materials
Resin used in manufacturing geomembrane sheets shall be made of virgin uncontaminated ingredients. No more than 10 percent regrind, reworked, or trim material in the form of chips or edge strips shall be used to manufacture the geomembrane sheets. All regrind, reworked, or trim materials shall be from the same manufacturer and exactly the same formulation as the geomembrane sheet being produced. No post consumer materials or water-soluble ingredients shall be used to produce the geomembrane. For geomembranes with plasticizers, only primary plasticizers that are resistant to migration shall be used. Submit a copy of the test reports and QC certificates for materials used in the manufacturing of the geomembrane shipped to the site.
2.1.2 Sheet Materials
Geomembrane sheets shall be unreinforced and manufactured as wide as possible to minimize factory and field seams. Geomembrane sheets shall be uniform in color, thickness, and surface texture. The textured surface
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
features shall consist of raw materials identical to that of the parent sheet material and shall be uniform over the entire face of the geomembrane. The sheets shall be free of and resistant to fungal or bacterial attack and free of cuts, abrasions, holes, blisters, contaminants and other imperfections. Geomembrane sheets and factory seams shall conform to the requirements listed in Table 1 for Manufacturing Quality Control (MQC). TABLE 1 - SMOOTH HDPE GEOMEMBRANE PROPERTIES
PROPERTY TEST VALUE MQC TESTING TEST METHOD FREQUENCY (MIN.)
Thickness (min ave) 1 mm per roll ASTM D5199
Lowest individual of 10 values -10 percent per roll ASTM D5199
Density (min) 0.940 g/cc per 90,000 kg ASTM D1505
Tensile Properties(1)(min ave) per 9,000 kg ASTM D638 Type IV
yield stress 15 kN/m
break stress 27 kN/m
yield elong 12 percent
break elong 700 percent
Tear Resistance (min ave) 125 N per 20,000 kg ASTM D1004
Puncture Resistance(min ave) 320 N per 20,000 kg ASTM D4833/D4833M
Stress Crack Resistance (2) 200 hr per 90,000 kg ASTM D5397 (Appendix)
Carbon Black Content 2.0-3.0 percent per 9,000 kg ASTM D1603 (3)
Carbon Black Dispersion Note (4) per 20,000 kg ASTM D5596
Oxidative Induction Time per 90,000 kg (OIT)(min ave)(5)
-Std OIT 100 min ASTM D3895
-High Pres OIT 400 min ASTM D5885/D5885M
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 1 - SMOOTH HDPE GEOMEMBRANE PROPERTIES
PROPERTY TEST VALUE MQC TESTING TEST METHOD FREQUENCY (MIN.)
Oven Aging at 85 deg C (min per year and ASTM D5721 ave) (5), (6) change in formulation
Std OIT 55 percent at 90 ASTM D3895 days
or High Pres OIT 80 percent at 90 ASTM D5885/D5885M days
UV Resistance (min ave) (7) per year and ASTM D7238 change in formulation
High Pres OIT(8)(9) 50 percent at ASTM D5885/D5885M 1600 hours
TABLE 1 NOTES
MQC Manufacturing Quality Control
Note (1) Minimum average machine direction and minimum average cross machine direction values shall be based on 5 test specimens in each direction. For HDPE geomembrane, yield elongation is calculated using a gauge length of 33 mm. For HDPE geomembrane, break elongation is calculated using a gauge length of 50 mm. For LLDPE geomembrane, break elongation is calculated using a gage length of 50 mm at 50 mm/min.
Note (2) For HDPE geomembrane, the yield stress used to calculate the applied load for test method ASTM D5397 (Appendix), shall be the manufacturer's mean value. ASTM D5397 does not need to be run on LLDPE geomembrane.
Note (3) Other methods such as ASTM D4218 or microwave methods are acceptable if an appropriate correlation to ASTM D1603 can be established.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 1 NOTES
Note (4) Carbon black dispersion for 10 different views: - minimum 8 of 10 in Categories 1 or 2 - all 10 in Categories 1,2, or 3
Note (5) The manufacturer has the option to select either one of the OIT methods to evaluate the antioxidant content.
Note (6) Evaluate samples at 30 and 60 days and compare with the 90 day response.
Note (7) The condition of the test shall be a 20 hour UV cycle at 75 degrees C followed by a 4 hour condensation cycle at 60 degrees C.
Note (8) The standard OIT test (ASTM D3895) shall not be used in determining UV resistance.
Note (9) UV resistance is based on percent retained value regardless of the original HP-OIT value.
Note (10) Textured Geomembrane Only: Of 10 readings; 8 out of 10 must be 0.18 mm, and lowest individual reading must be 0.13 mm.
Note (11) Textured Geomembrane Only: Alternate the measurement side for double sided textured sheet.
TABLE 2 - HDPE SEAM PROPERTIES
PROPERTY TEST VALUE TEST METHOD
Seam Shear Strength (min) (1) 14.0 kN/m ASTM D6392
Seam Peel Strength (min) (1) 8.4 kN/m ASTM D6392 (2)
Note (1): Seam tests for peel and shear must fail in the Film Tear Bond mode. This is a failure in the ductile mode of one of the bonded sheets by tearing or breaking prior to complete separation of the bonded area.
Note (2): Where applicable, both tracks of a double hot wedge seam shall be tested for peel adhesion.
2.1.3 Factory Seams
Geomembrane sheets shall be factory seamed into maximum sized panels to minimize field seaming. Factory seaming shall be by methods approved by
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the geomembrane manufacturer. Seams shall meet the minimum shear and peel strength requirements shown in Table 2. Factory seams shall extend to the end of the sheet so that no unbonded edges greater than 3.2 mm wide are present.
2.2 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.2.1 Manufacturing, Sampling, and Testing
2.2.1.1 Raw Materials
Raw materials shall be tested in accordance with the approved MQC manual. Any raw material which fails to meet the geomembrane manufacturer's specified physical properties shall not be used in manufacturing the sheet. Seaming rods and pellets shall be manufactured of materials which are essentially identical to that used in the geomembrane sheet. Seaming rods and pellets shall be tested for density, melt index and carbon black content in accordance with the approved MQC manual. Seaming rods and pellets which fail to meet the corresponding property values required for the sheet material, shall not be used for seaming.
2.2.1.2 Sheet Material
Geomembrane sheets shall be tested in accordance with the approved MQC manual. As a minimum, MQC testing shall be conducted at the frequencies shown in Table 1. Sheets not meeting the minimum requirements specified in Table 1 shall not be sent to the site.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
Equipment used in performance of the work shall be in accordance with the geomembrane manufacturer's recommendations and shall be maintained in satisfactory working condition.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Surface Preparation
Surface preparation shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Rocks larger than 13 mm in diameter and any other material which could damage the geomembrane shall be removed from the surface to be covered with the geomembrane. Construction equipment tire or track deformations beneath the geomembrane shall not be greater than 25 mm in depth. Each day during placement of geomembrane, the Contracting Officer and installer shall inspect the surface on which geomembrane is to be placed and certify in writing that the surface is acceptable. Repairs to the subgrade shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government.
3.1.2 Anchor Trenches
Where an anchor trench is required, it shall be placed 610 mm back from the edge of the slope to be covered. The anchor trench shall be 610 mm deep and 460 mm wide. If the anchor trench is excavated in cohesive soil susceptible to desiccation, only the amount of anchor trench required for placement of geomembrane in a single day shall be excavated. Ponded water shall be removed from the anchor trench while the trench is open. Trench corners shall be slightly rounded to avoid sharp bends in the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
geomembrane. Loose soil, rocks larger than 13 mm in diameter, and any other material which could damage the geomembrane shall be removed from the surfaces of the trench. The geomembrane shall extend down the front wall and across the bottom of the anchor trench. Backfilling and compaction of the anchor trench shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.2 GEOMEMBRANE DEPLOYMENT
The procedures and equipment used shall not elongate, wrinkle, scratch, or otherwise damage the geomembrane, other geosynthetic layers, or the underlying subgrade. Geomembrane damaged during installation shall be replaced or repaired, at the Contracting Officer's discretion. Only geomembrane panels that can be anchored and seamed together the same day shall be deployed. Adequate ballast (i.e., sand bags) shall be placed on the geomembrane, without damaging the geomembrane, to prevent uplift by wind. No equipment shall be operated on the top surface of the geomembrane without permission from the Contracting Officer. Seams shall be oriented parallel to the line of maximum slope. Where seams can only be oriented across the slope, the upper panel shall be lapped over the lower panel. The methods used to deploy and backfill over the geomembrane shall minimize wrinkles and tensile stresses in the geomembrane. The geomembrane shall have adequate slack to prevent the creation of tensile stress. The wrinkle height to width ratio for installed geomembrane shall not exceed 0.5. In addition, geomembrane wrinkles shall not exceed 150 m in height. Wrinkles that do not meet the above criteria shall be cut out and repaired in accordance with the installer's approved QC manual.
3.3 FIELD SEAMING
3.3.1 Trial Seams
Trial seams shall be made under field conditions on strips of excess geomembrane. Trial seams shall be made each day prior to production seaming, whenever there is a change in seaming personnel or seaming equipment and at least once every four hours, by each seamer and each piece of seaming equipment used that day. Trial seam samples shall be collected and tested in accordance with ASTM D6392. One sample shall be obtained from each trial seam. This sample shall be at least 920 mm long by 305 mm wide with the seam centered lengthwise. Ten random specimens 25.4 mm wide shall be cut from the sample. Five seam specimens shall be field tested for shear strength and 5 seam specimens shall be field tested for peel adhesion using an approved quantitative tensiometer. Where necessary, accelerated curing of trial seams made by chemical methods shall be conducted in accordance with GSI GRI GM7. To be acceptable, 4 out of 5 replicate test specimens shall meet seam strength requirements specified in Table 2. If the field tests fail to meet these requirements, the entire operation shall be repeated. If the additional trial seam fails, the seaming apparatus or seamer shall not be used until the deficiencies are corrected by the installer and 2 consecutive successful trial seams are achieved.
3.3.2 Field Seams
Panels shall be seamed in accordance with the geomembrane manufacturer's recommendations. In sumps, corners and odd-shaped geometric locations, the number of field seams shall be minimized. Seaming shall extend to the outside edge of panels. Soft subgrades shall be compacted and approved prior to seaming. The seam area shall be free of moisture, dust, dirt,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and foreign material at the time of seaming. Fish mouths in seams shall be repaired.
3.3.2.1 Polyethylene Seams
Polyethylene geomembranes shall be seamed by thermal fusion methods. Extrusion welding shall only be used for patching and seaming in locations where thermal fusion methods are not feasible. Seam overlaps that are to be attached using extrusion welds shall be ground prior to welding. Grinding marks shall be oriented perpendicular to the seam direction and no marks shall extend beyond the extrudate after placement. Extrusion welding shall begin within 10 minutes after grinding. Where extrusion welds are temporarily terminated long enough to cool, they shall be ground prior to applying new extrudate over the existing seam. The total depth of the grinding marks shall be no greater than 10 percent of the sheet thickness.
3.4 SAMPLES
One QC sample, 500 mm in length, for the entire width of a roll, shall be obtained for every 9,000 square meters of material delivered to the site. Samples shall not be obtained from the first 1 m of the roll. For accordion folded geomembranes, samples of equivalent size shall be collected from approved locations. The samples shall be identified by manufacturer's name, product identification, lot and roll/panel number. The date, a unique sample number, and the machine direction shall also be noted. In addition, a 305 by 305 mm QA sample shall be collected, labeled, and submitted to the Contracting Officer each time QC samples are collected.
3.5 TESTS
Provide all QC samples to the QC laboratory to determine density, thickness, tensile strength at break, and elongation at break in accordance with the methods specified in Table 1. Samples not meeting the specified requirements shall result in the rejection of applicable rolls/panels. As a minimum, rolls/panels produced immediately prior to and immediately after the failed roll/panel shall be tested for the same failed parameter. Testing shall continue until a minimum of three successive rolls/panels on both sides of the original failing roll/panel pass the failed parameter.
3.5.1 Non-Destructive Field Seam Continuity Testing
Field seams shall be non-destructively tested for continuity over their full length in accordance with the installer's approved QC manual. Seam testing shall be performed as the seaming work progresses, not at the completion of field seaming. Any seams which fail shall be documented and repaired in accordance with the installer's approved QC manual.
3.5.2 Destructive Field Seam Testing
A minimum of one destructive test sample per 230 m of field seam shall be obtained at locations specified by the Contracting Officer. Sample locations shall not be identified prior to seaming. Samples shall be a minimum of 305 mm wide by 1.1 m long with the seam centered lengthwise. Each sample shall be cut into 3 equal pieces, with one piece retained by the installer, one piece given to the QC laboratory, and the remaining piece given to the Contracting Officer for QA testing and/or permanent
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
record. Each sample shall be numbered and cross referenced to a field log which identifies: (1) panel number; (2) seam number; (3) date and time cut; (4) ambient temperature within 150 mm above the geomembrane; (5) seaming unit designation; (6) name of seamer; and (7) seaming apparatus temperature and pressures (where applicable). Ten 25 mm wide replicate specimens shall be cut from the installer's sample. Five specimens shall be tested for shear strength and 5 for peel adhesion using an approved field quantitative tensiometer. Jaw separation speed shall be in accordance with the approved QC manual. To be acceptable, 4 out of 5 replicate test specimens shall meet the seam strength requirements specified in Table 2. If the field tests pass, 5 specimens shall be tested at the QC laboratory for shear strength and 5 for peel adhesion in accordance with the QC laboratory's approved procedures. To be acceptable, 4 out of 5 replicate test specimens shall meet the seam strength requirements specified in Table 2. If the field or laboratory tests fail, the seam shall be repaired in accordance with paragraph Destructive Seam Test Repairs. Holes for destructive seam samples shall be repaired the same day they are cut.
3.6 DEFECTS AND REPAIRS
3.6.1 Destructive Seam Test Repairs
Seams that fail destructive seam testing may be overlaid with a strip of new material and seamed (cap stripped). Alternatively, the seaming path shall be retraced to an intermediate location a minimum of 3 m on each side of the failed seam location. At each location a 305 by 460 mm minimum size seam sample shall be taken for 2 additional shear strength and 2 additional peel adhesion tests using an approved quantitative field tensiometer. If these tests pass, then the remaining seam sample portion shall be sent to the QC laboratory for 5 shear strength and 5 peel adhesion tests in accordance with the QC laboratory's approved procedures. To be acceptable, 4 out of 5 replicate test specimens must meet specified seam strength requirements. If these laboratory tests pass, then the seam shall be cap stripped or repaired using other approved methods between that location and the original failed location. If field or laboratory tests fail, the process shall be repeated. After repairs are completed, the repaired seam shall be non-destructively tested in accordance with paragraph Non-Destructive Field Seam Continuity Testing.
3.6.2 Patches
Tears, holes, blisters and other defects shall be repaired with patches. Patches shall have rounded corners, be made of the same geomembrane, and extend a minimum of 150 mm beyond the edge of defects. Minor localized flaws shall be repaired by spot welding or seaming as determined by the QC inspector. Repairs shall be non-destructively tested. The Contracting Officer or the QC inspector may also elect to perform destructive seam tests on suspect areas.
3.7 VISUAL INSPECTION AND EVALUATION
Immediately prior to covering, the geomembrane, seams, and non-seam areas shall be visually inspected by the QC inspector and Contracting Officer for defects, holes, or damage due to weather conditions or construction activities. At the Contracting Officer's or the QC inspector's discretion, the surface of the geomembrane shall be brushed, blown, or washed by the installer if the amount of dust, mud, or foreign material inhibits inspection or functioning of the overlying material. Each
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
suspect location shall be non-destructively tested in accordance with paragraph Non-Destructive Field Seam Continuity Testing. Each location that fails non-destructive testing shall be repaired in accordance with paragraph Patches and non-destructively retested.
3.8 PENETRATIONS
Geomembrane penetration details shall be in accordance with ASTM D6497/D6497M or as recommended by the geomembrane manufacturer. Use factory fabricated boots wherever possible. Non-destructively test field seams for penetrations in accordance with the installer's approved QC manual. Repair seams that fail non-destructive testing in accordance with the installer's approved QC manual and non-destructively tested prior to acceptance.
3.9 PROTECTION AND BACKFILLING
The deployed and seamed geomembrane shall be covered with the specified material within 5 calendar days of acceptance. Wrinkles in the geomembrane shall be prevented from folding over during placement of cover materials. Cover soil shall not be dropped onto the geomembrane or overlying geosynthetics from a height greater than 1 m. The soil shall be pushed out over the geomembrane or overlying geosynthetics in an upward tumbling motion. Soil shall be placed from the bottom of the slope upward. The initial loose soil lift thickness shall be 350 mm. Equipment with ground pressures less than 50 kPa shall be used to place the first lift over the geomembrane. A minimum of 460 mm of soil shall be maintained between construction equipment with ground pressures greater than 50 kPa and the geomembrane. Cover soil compaction and testing requirements are described in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Equipment placing cover soil shall not stop abruptly, make sharp turns, spin their wheels, or travel at speeds exceeding 2.2 m/s.
3.10 As-Built drawings
Submit final as-built drawings of the geomembrane installation. These drawings shall include panel numbers, seam numbers, location of repairs, destructive seam samples, and penetrations.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 56 13 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 02 82 13.00 10
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Submit copies of weight bills and delivery tickets for payment to the Contracting Officer during the progress of the work. Furnish scale tickets for each load of ACM weighed and certified. These tickets shall include tare weight; identification mark for each vehicle weighed; and date, time and location of loading and unloading. Tickets shall be furnished at the point and time individual trucks arrive at the worksite. A master log of all vehicle loading shall be furnished for each day of loading operations. Before the final statement is allowed, file with the Contracting Officer certified weigh bills and/or certified tickets and manifests of all ACM actually disposed by the Contractor for this contract.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE Z9.2 (2012) Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation Systems
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D4397 (2016) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
ASTM E1368 (2014) Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects
COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION (CGA)
CGA G-7 (2014) Compressed Air for Human Respiration; 6th Edition
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)
ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 (2015) Occupational and Educational Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 701 (2015) Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH (NIOSH)
NIOSH NMAM (2016; 5th Ed) NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
EP 1110-1-11 (1992; Change 1 1997) Engineering and Design -- Asbestos Abatement Guideline Detail Sheets
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
JEGS (2018) Japan Environmental Governing Standards
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1910.141 Sanitation
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)
29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos
29 CFR 1926.32 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction - Definition
29 CFR 1926.62 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction - Definition
40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
40 CFR 763 Asbestos
42 CFR 84 Approval of Respiratory Protective Devices
49 CFR 107 Hazardous Materials Program Procedures
49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and Definitions
49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special Provisions, Hazardous Materials Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training Requirements
49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for Shipments and Packagings
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 586 (2009; Reprint Sep 2014) Standard for High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Amended Water
Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant with a surface tension of at least 29 dynes per square centimeter.
1.3.2 Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM)
Any materials containing more than one tenth of one percent (0.1%) asbestos.
1.3.3 Asbestos Control Area
An area, isolated by physical boundaries, where asbestos removal operations are performed in order to assist in the prevention of the uncontrolled release of asbestos dust, fibers, and debris.
1.3.4 Authorized Person
Any person authorized by the Contractor and required by work duties to be present in the regulated areas.
1.3.5 Building Inspector
Individual who inspects buildings for asbestos and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Building Inspector" training; accreditation required by 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix C, has EPA/State certification/license as a "Building Inspector".
1.3.6 Class I Asbestos Work
Activities defined by OSHA involving the removal of thermal system insulation (TSI) and surfacing ACM.
1.3.7 Class II Asbestos Work
Activities defined by OSHA involving the removal of ACM which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the removal of asbestos - containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles, and construction mastic. Certain "incidental" roofing materials such as mastic, flashing and cements when they are still intact are excluded from Class II asbestos work. Removal of small amounts of these materials which would fit into a glovebag may be classified as a Class III job.
1.3.8 Class III Asbestos Work
Activities defined by OSHA that involve repair and maintenance operations, where ACM, including TSI and surfacing ACM, is likely to be disturbed. Operations may include drilling, abrading, cutting a hole, cable pulling, crawling through tunnels or attics and spaces above the ceiling, where asbestos is actively disturbed or asbestos-containing debris is actively
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
disturbed.
1.3.9 Class IV Asbestos Work
Maintenance and custodial construction activities during which employees contact but do not disturb ACM and activities to clean-up dust, waste and debris resulting from Class I, II, and III activities. This may include dusting surfaces where ACM waste and debris and accompanying dust exists and cleaning up loose ACM debris from TSI or surfacing ACM following construction
1.3.10 Clean Room
An uncontaminated room having facilities for the storage of employees' street clothing and uncontaminated materials and equipment.
1.3.11 Competent Person
In addition to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32(f), a person who is capable of identifying existing asbestos hazards as defined in 29 CFR 1926.1101, selecting the appropriate control strategy, has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Contractor/Supervisor" training; and is AHERA certified as a "Contractor/Supervisor".
1.3.12 Contractor/Supervisor
Individual who supervises asbestos abatement work and has EPA Model Accreditation Plan "Contractor/Supervisor" training; and is AHERA certified as a "Contractor/Supervisor".
1.3.13 Critical Barrier
One or more layers of plastic sealed over all openings into a regulated area or any other similarly placed physical barrier sufficient to prevent airborne asbestos in a regulated area from migrating to an adjacent area.
1.3.14 Decontamination Area
An enclosed area adjacent and connected to the regulated area and consisting of an equipment room, shower area, and clean room, which is used for the decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment that are contaminated with asbestos.
1.3.15 Demolition
The wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structural member and any related razing, removing, or stripping of asbestos products.
1.3.16 Disposal Bag
A 0.15 mm thick, leak-tight plastic bag, pre-labeled in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101, used for transporting asbestos waste from containment to disposal site.
1.3.17 Disturbance
Activities that disrupt the matrix of ACM, crumble or pulverize ACM, or generate visible debris from ACM. Disturbance includes cutting away small
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
amounts of ACM, no greater than the amount which can be contained in 1 standard sized glovebag or waste bag, not larger than 1.5 m in length and width in order to access a building component.
1.3.18 Equipment Room or Area
An area adjacent to the regulated area used for the decontamination of employees and their equipment.
1.3.19 Fiber
A fibrous particulate, 5 micrometers or longer, with a length to width ratio of at least 3 to 1.
1.3.20 Friable ACM
A term defined in the JEGS meaning any material which contains more than 0. 1 percent asbestos, , that when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure.
1.3.21 Glovebag
Not more than a 1.5 by 1.5 m impervious plastic bag-like enclosure affixed around an asbestos-containing material, with glove-like appendages through which material and tools may be handled.
1.3.22 High-Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter
A filter capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97 percent of all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter.
1.3.23 Industrial Hygienist (IH)/Private Qualified Person (PQP)
A registered Architect, Professional Engineer (licensed), or U.S. Certified Industrial Hygienist who has successfully completed training in, and is accredited under a legitimate Model Accreditation Plan, as described in 40 CFR 763, as a certified Building Inspector, Abatement Worker, Contractor/Supervisor, Management Planner, and Project Designer, and has successfully completed the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust" or equivalent. The IH/PQP shall have working knowledge of applicable U.S. Federal and Japanese occupational safety and health regulations for asbestos in construction.
The IH/PQP shall be considered a competent person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.62. The IH/PQP shall be a third party Contractor and have no employee/employer relationship or financial relationship which could constitute a conflict of interest.
1.3.24 Industrial Hygiene Technician
The Industrial Hygiene Technician (IHT) shall be an employee of the IH/PQP or the testing laboratory, have a minimum of 2 years experience in the industrial hygiene field working under the direction of the IH/PQP, and have completed the following courses: "Contractor Supervisor Abatement Worker", "Asbestos Project Designer", and National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust" or equivalent.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3.25 Intact
ACM which has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so that the asbestos is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix. Removal of "intact" asphaltic, resinous, cementitious products does not render the ACM non-intact simply by being separated into smaller pieces.
1.3.26 Model Accreditation Plan (MAP)
USEPA training accreditation requirements for persons who work with asbestos as specified in 40 CFR 763.
1.3.27 Negative Initial Exposure Assessment
A demonstration by the Contractor to show that employee exposure during an operation is expected to be consistently below the OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs).
1.3.28 NESHAP
National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. The USEPA NESHAP regulation for asbestos is at 40 CFR 61, Subpart M.
1.3.29 Nonfriable ACM
Any material containing more than 0.1 percent asbestos that, when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure.
1.3.30 Nonfriable ACM (Category I)
A term defined in the JEGS meaning asbestos-containing packings, gaskets, resilient floor covering, and asphalt roofing products containing more than 0.1 percent asbestos.
1.3.31 Nonfriable ACM (Category II)
A term defined in the JEGS meaning any material, excluding Category I nonfriable ACM, containing more than 0.1 percent asbestos.
1.3.32 Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs)
1.3.32.1 PEL-Time Weighted Average(TWA)
Concentration of asbestos not in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air (f/cc) as an 8 hour time weighted average (TWA).
1.3.32.2 PEL-Excursion Limit
An airborne concentration of asbestos not in excess of 1.0 f/cc of air as averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes.
1.3.33 Regulated Area
An OSHA term defined in 29 CFR 1926.1101 meaning an area established by the Contractor to demarcate areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos work is conducted; also any adjoining area where debris and waste from such asbestos work accumulate; and an area within which airborne concentrations of asbestos exceed, or there is a reasonable possibility they may exceed, the permissible exposure limit.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3.34 Removal
All operations where ACM is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, and includes demolition operations.
1.3.35 Repair
Overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of ACM attached to structures or substrates.
1.3.36 Surfacing ACM
Asbestos-containing material which contains more than 0.1 percent asbestos and is sprayed-on, troweled-on, or otherwise applied to surfaces, such as acoustical plaster on ceilings and fireproofing materials on structural members, or other materials on surfaces for acoustical, fireproofing, or other purposes.
1.3.37 Thermal System Insulation (TSI) ACM
ACM which contains more than 0.1 percent asbestos and is applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, breeching, tanks, ducts, or other interior structural components to prevent heat loss or gain or water condensation.
1.3.38 Transite
A generic name for asbestos cement wallboard and pipe.
1.3.39 Worker
Individual (not designated as the Competent Person or a supervisor) who performs asbestos work and has completed asbestos worker training required by 29 CFR 1926.1101, to include EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Worker" training; accreditation if required by the OSHA Class of work to be performed.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section covers all operations in which asbestos-containing materials (ACM) are encountered. These procedures and equipment are required to protect workers and building occupants from airborne asbestos fibers and ACM dust and debris. Activities include OSHA Class I Class II Class III work operations. This section also includes containment, storage, transportation and disposal of the generated ACM wastes. Submit Detailed Drawings in accordance with EP 1110-1-11 and containing descriptions, and site layout to include worksite containment area(s), local exhaust systems locations, decontamination units and load-out units, other temporary waste storage facility, access tunnels, location of temporary utilities (electrical, water, sewer) and boundaries of each regulated area. When the detail sheets are not attached to this specification, the Contractor can get them from the web at: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/Portals/76/Publications/EngineerPamphlets/EP_1110-1-11.pdf
The Contractor shall assume the following materials contain asbestos:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
(1)Pavement caulking and sealants;
(2)Manhole and handhole caulking and sealants around conduit/pipe penetrations and lids/covers.
The Contractor shall provide a copy of all surveys/sampling activities and analytical results regarding asbestos to the Contracting Officer. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall also submit an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan to the Contracting Officer for review and approval before asbestos abatement work begins.
The Contractor shall be responsible for visually confirming the presence of these materials. The Contractor shall remove ACM which would otherwise be disturbed during normal work practices to execute the work required by this project.
1.4.1 Abatement Work Tasks
The Contractor's IH/PQP shall develop the appropriate work response to ACM which may be disturbed as part of this project.
1.4.2 Unexpected Discovery of Asbestos
For any previously untested building components suspected to contain asbestos and located in areas impacted by the work, notify the Contracting Officer (CO) who will have the option of ordering up to 30 bulk samples to be obtained at the Contractor's expense and delivered to a laboratory accredited under the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) "National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)" and analyzed by PLM. The laboratory shall have a working definition of “Trace” amounts of asbestos, and the laboratory shall report any detectable amount of asbestos in a bulk sample that is less than the PLM Limit of Quantification of 1% as a “Trace” concentration. If PLM does not detect the presence of asbestos (e.g. “non-detect”), the material shall be considered <0.1% asbestos. If PLM analysis detects asbestos in any discernible amount (to include “trace” or “less than 1%”), the material shall be considered >0.1% asbestos unless proven to be non-ACM by the use of quantification methods capable of achieving an analytical sensitivity of less than 0.1%, such as Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) or 1000 point counting. Any additional components identified as ACM that have been approved by the CO for removal shall be removed and will be paid for by an equitable adjustment to the contract price under the CONTRACT CLAUSE titled "changes". Sampling shall be conducted by personnel who have successfully completed the EPA Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) "Building Inspector" training course and is EPA/State certified/licensed as a "Building Inspector".
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detailed Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Asbestos Waste Shipment Records; G
Weight Bills and Delivery Tickets
Encapsulants; G
Respiratory Protection Program; G
Cleanup and Disposal; G
Qualifications; G
Training Program
Licenses, Permits and Notifications
Asbestos Management Plan; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Exposure Assessment and Air Monitoring
Local Exhaust System
SD-07 Certificates
Local Exhaust System
Encapsulants; G
Medical Surveillance Requirements
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, work performed under this contract shall comply with the JEGS, EM 385-1-1, applicable federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations regarding handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of asbestos waste materials. Matters of interpretation of standards shall be submitted to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements shall apply. The following state and local laws, rules and regulations regarding demolition, removal, encapsulation, construction alteration, repair, maintenance, renovation, spill/emergency cleanup, housekeeping, handling, storing, transporting and disposing of asbestos material apply:
Japan Environmental Governing Standards (JEGS), most recent version .
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6.1 Written Qualifications and Organization Report
Submit a written qualifications and organization report providing evidence of qualifications of the Contractor, Contractor's Project Supervisor, Designated Competent Person, supervisors and workers; Designated IH/PQP; independent testing laboratory; all subcontractors to be used including disposal transportation and disposal facility firms, subcontractor supervisors, subcontractor workers; and any others assigned to perform asbestos abatement and support activities. Include in the report an organization chart showing the Contractor's staff organization chain of command and reporting relationship with all subcontractors.
The report shall be signed by the Contractor, the Contractor's onsite project manager, Designated Competent Person, Designated IH/PQP, designated testing laboratory and the principals of all subcontractors to be used. Include the following statement in the report: "By signing this report I certify that the personnel I am responsible for during the course of this project fully understand the contents of 29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and the U.S. federal, Government of Japan (GOJ), and local requirements for those asbestos abatement activities that they will be involved in."
1.6.2 Specific Requirements
Designate in writing, personnel meeting the following qualifications:
a. Asbestos Abatement Contractor: Certified/licensed to perform asbestos-related activities.
b. Designated Competent Person: Qualified in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.32 and 29 CFR 1926.1101, has EPA MAP "Contractor/Supervisor" training accreditation, is AHERA certified as a "Contractor/Supervisor" and is experienced in the administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects, including exposure assessment and monitoring, work practices, abatement methods, protective measures for personnel, setting up and inspecting asbestos abatement work areas, evaluating the integrity of containment barriers, placement and operation of local exhaust systems, ACM generated waste containment and disposal procedures, decontamination units installation and maintenance requirements, site safety and health requirements, notification of other employees onsite, etc. The Designated Competent Person shall be responsible for compliance with the JEGS, applicable U.S. federal, GOJ, and local requirements, the Contractor's Accident Prevention Plan (APP) and Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP). Submit the "Contractor/Supervisor" course completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required refresher training, with the employee "Certificate of Worker Acknowledgment". Submit evidence that this person has a minimum of 2 years of on-the-job asbestos abatement experience relevant to OSHA competent person requirements. The Designated Competent Person shall be onsite at all times during the conduct of this project.
c. Project and Other Supervisors: Have EPA MAP "Contractor/Supervisor" training accreditation. Submit the "Contractor/Supervisor" course completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required refresher training, EPA/State certification/license with the employee "Certificate of Worker Acknowledgment". Also submit evidence that the Project Supervisor has a minimum of 2 years of on-the-job asbestos
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
abatement experience relevant to project supervisor responsibilities and the other supervisors have a minimum of 1 year on-the-job asbestos abatement experience commensurate with the responsibilities they will have on this project.
d. Designated Industrial Hygienist (IH)/Private Qualified Person (PQP): Resume for the Industrial Hygienist (IH)/Private Qualified Person (IH/PQP) selected to prepare the Contractor's AHAP, prepare and perform training, direct air monitoring and assist the Contractor's Competent Person in implementing and ensuring that safety and health requirements are complied with during the performance of all required work. The Designated IH/PQP shall be a person who has successfully completed training in and is accredited and certified as an Asbestos Building Inspector, Contractor/Supervisor, Abatement Worker, Management Planner, and Project Designer as described by 40 CFR 763 and has successfully completed the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust" or equivalent, and has a minimum of 2 years of comprehensive experience in planning and overseeing asbestos abatement activities. Demonstrate that the IH/PQP is a Registered Architect, Professional Engineer (licensed) or US Certified Industrial Hygienist determined and documented by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene (ABIH). A copy of the IH/PQP's current valid ABIH certification and/or documentation that the IH/PQP is a Registered Architect or Professional Engineer shall be provided.
Submit the "Contractor/Supervisor" course completion certificate and the most recent certificate for required refresher training with the employee "Certificate of Worker Acknowledgment". The Designated IH/PQP shall be completely independent from the Contractor according to federal, GOJ, or local regulations; that is, shall not be a Contractor's employee or be an employee or principal of a firm in a business relationship with the Contractor negating such independent status. The Designated IH/PQP shall be onsite at all times for the duration of asbestos activities and shall be available for emergencies. In addition, submit resumes of additional IH/PQP's and industrial hygiene technicians (IHT) who will be assisting the Designated IH/PQP in performing onsite tasks. IH/PQPs and IHTs supporting the Designated IH/PQP shall have a minimum of 2 years of practical onsite asbestos abatement experience. Indicate the formal reporting relationship between the Designated IH/PQP and the support IH /PQPs and IHTs, the Designated Competent Person, and the Contractor.
e. Asbestos Abatement Workers: Meet the requirements contained in 29 CFR 1926.1101, 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, and other applicable federal, state and local requirements. Worker training documentation shall be provided as required on the "Certificate of Workers Acknowledgment". Training documentation is required for each employee who will perform OSHA Class I, Class II, Class III, or Class IV asbestos abatement operations. Such documentation shall be submitted on a Contractor generated form titled "Certificate of Workers Acknowledgment", to be completed for each employee in the same format and containing the same information as the example certificate at the end of this section. Training course completion certificates (initial and most recent update refresher) required by the information checked on the form shall be attached.
f. Physician: Resume of the physician who will or has performed the medical examinations and evaluations of the persons who will conduct
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the asbestos abatement work tasks. The physician shall be currently licensed by the state where the workers will be or have been examined, have expertise in pneumoconiosis and shall be responsible for the determination of medical surveillance protocols and for review of examination/test results performed in compliance with 29 CFR 1926.1101. The physician shall be familiar with the site's hazards and the scope of this project.
g. Independent Testing Laboratory: identify the independent testing laboratory selected to perform the sample analyses and report the results. The testing laboratory shall be completely independent from the Contractor as recognized by U.S. federal, GOJ, or local regulations. Written verification of the following criteria, signed by the testing laboratory principal and the Contractor, shall be submitted:
(1) Phase contrast microscopy (PCM): The laboratory is fully equipped and proficient in conducting PCM of airborne samples using the methods specified by 29 CFR 1926.1101, OSHA method ID-160, the most current version of NIOSH NMAM Method 7400 as shown in Table 3 at the end of this Section. The laboratory shall be currently judged proficient (classified as acceptable) in counting airborne asbestos samples by PCM by successful participation in each of the last 4 rounds in the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT) Program or by participating in the AIHA PAT Program, and being judged proficient in counting samples.
(2) Polarized light microscopy (PLM): The laboratory is fully equipped and proficient in conducting PLM analyses of suspect ACM bulk samples in accordance with 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E; the laboratory is currently accredited by NIST under the NVLAP for bulk asbestos analysis and will use analysts with demonstrated proficiency to conduct PLM analyses.
(3) Transmission electron microscopy (TEM): The laboratory is proficient in conducting analysis for low asbestos concentration, enhanced analysis of floor tiles and bulk materials where multiple layers are present, using an improved EPA test method titled, "Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials".
(4) PCM/TEM: The laboratory is fully equipped and each analyst is proficient in conducting PCM and TEM analysis of airborne samples using NIOSH NMAM Method 7400 PCM and NIOSH NMAM Method 7402 (TEM confirmation of asbestos content of PCM results) from the same filter.
h. Disposal Facility, Transporter: Written evidence that the landfill to be used is approved for asbestos disposal in accordance with the requirements of JEGS and all applicable GOJ and local regulatory agencies. Copies of signed agreements between the Contractor (including subcontractors and transporters) and the asbestos waste disposal facility to accept and dispose of all asbestos containing waste shall be provided. The Contractor and transporters shall meet the DOT requirements of 49 CFR 171, 49 CFR 172, and 49 CFR 173 as well as registration requirements of 49 CFR 107 and other applicable GOJ or local requirements. The disposal facility shall meet the requirements of 40 CFR 61, Sections .154 or .155, as required in 40 CFR 61 150(b),
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and other applicable GOJ and/or local prefecture requirements for disposal of ACM.
1.6.3 U.S. Federal, Government of Japan, and/or Local Citations on Previous Projects
The Contractor and all subcontractors shall submit a statement, signed by an officer of the company, containing a record of any citations issued by U.S Federal, GOJ and/ or local regulatory agencies relating to asbestos activities (including projects, dates, and resolutions); a list of penalties incurred through non-compliance with asbestos project specifications, including liquidated damages, overruns in scheduled time limitations and resolutions; and situations in which an asbestos-related contract has been terminated (including projects, dates, and reasons for terminations). If there are none, a negative declaration signed by an officer of the company shall be provided.
1.6.4 Preconstruction Conference
The Contractor and the Contractor's Designated Competent Person, Project Supervisor, and Designated IH/PQP shall meet with the Contracting Officer (CO) prior to beginning work at a safety preconstruction conference to discuss the details of the Contractor's submitted APP to include the AHAP and AHAs appendices. Deficiencies in the APP will be discussed. Onsite work shall not begin until the APP has been accepted.
1.7 SAFETY
Prepare a written comprehensive site-specific Accident Prevention Plan (APP) at least 30 days prior to the preconstruction conference. The APP shall be in accordance with the format and requirements in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The APP shall incorporate an Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan (AHAP), and Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs) as separate appendices into one site-specific document. The APP shall take into consideration all the individual asbestos abatement work tasks identified in Table 1. See Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY REQUIREMENTS for additional requirements.
1.7.1 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan Appendix
Submit a detailed plan of the safety precautions such as lockout, tagout, tryout, fall protection, confined space entry procedures, and equipment and work procedures to be used in the removal and demolition of materials containing asbestos. The plan, not to be combined with other hazard abatement plans, shall be prepared, signed, and sealed by the IH/PQP. Provide a Table of Contents for each abatement submittal, which shall follow the sequence of requirements in the Contract.The AHAP shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
The AHAP shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Project Name.
b. Scope of Work.
c. Asbestos material(s) to be abated.
d. Detailed step by step abatement methods to be used for each material to include containment and control procedures.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
e. Equipment/Tools to be used.
f. Detailed Drawings. Descriptions, detailed drawings, and site layout to include worksite containment areas, local exhaust systems location, decontamination units, load-out units, other temporary waste storage facility, access tunnels, location of temporary utilities (electrical, water, sewer), and boundaries of each regulated area. The ACM being removed shall be clearly shown on the drawings.
g. The personal protective equipment to be used including, but not limited to, respiratory protection and type of whole-body protection.;
h. The location and description of regulated areas including clean and dirty areas,access tunnels, and decontamination unit (clean room, shower room, equipment room, storage areas such as load-out unit);
i. Initial exposure assessment in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101;
j. Level of supervision;
k. Method of notification of other employers at the worksite;
l. Abatement method to include containment and control procedures;
m. Interface of trades involved in the construction;
n. Sequencing of asbestos related work;
o. Storage and disposal procedures and plan,including transportation;
p. Type of wetting agent and asbestos encapsulant;
q. Location of local exhaust equipment;
r. Description of air monitoring methods (personal, environmental and clearance). A copy of the initial/negative exposure assessment or daily air monitoring results shall be submitted to the Government representative once received from the laboratory. Air monitoring results shall be submitted at the end of the project for Contracting Officer Representative (COR) records. ;
s. Name of third party air monitoring consultant with the following information:
(1) Past asbestos experience information (project names).
(2) Required training certification.
(3) Medical clearance information.
(4) Respirator fit test record.
(5) Respirator medical clearance.
(6) Project certificate of acknowledgement.
t. Bulk sampling and analytical methods (if required);
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
u. A detailed description of the method to be employed in order to control the spread of ACM wastes and airborne fiber;
v. Fire and medical emergency response procedures;
w. The security procedures to be used for all regulated areas.
x. Qualifications. A written report providing evidence of qualifications for personnel, facilities and equipment assigned to the work, including, but not limited to:
(1) IH/PQP. Provide proof of IH/PQP's qualifications including training certifications.
(2) Industrial Hygiene Technicians. Provide proof of qualfications.
(3) Workers. Provide abatement worker personnel training certifications.
(4) Supervisor. Provide training certifications.
(5) Competent Person. Provide trianing certifications.
(6) Equipment. Certification/written approval letter from the manufacturer stating that equipment is qualified for abatement use.
(7) Landfill. Certification/approval letter from the disposal facility must meet requirements of JEGS Section 7.3.
y. Manufacturer's Catalog Data for all materials and equipment to be used, including brand name, model, capacity, performance characteristics and any other pertinent information.
1.7.2 Activity Hazard Analyses Appendix
AHAs for each major phase of work, shall be submitted and updated during the project. The AHAs format shall be in accordance with Figure 1-1 of EM 385-1-1. The analysis shall define the activities to be performed for a major phase of work, identify the sequence of work, the specific hazards anticipated, and the control measures to be implemented to eliminate or reduce each hazard to an acceptable level. Work shall not proceed on that phase until the AHA has been accepted and a preparatory meeting has been conducted by the Contractor to discuss its contents with everyone engaged in the activities, including the onsite Government representatives. The AHAs shall be continuously reviewed and, when appropriate, modified to address changing site conditions or operations.
1.7.3 Local Exhaust System
Local exhaust units shall conform to ASSE/SAFE Z9.2 and 29 CFR 1926.1101. Filters on local exhaust system equipment shall conform to ASSE/SAFE Z9.2 and UL 586. Filter shall be UL labeled. Submit pressure differential recordings and Manufacturer's certifications showing compliance with ASSE/SAFE Z9.2 for: a. Vacuums. b. Water filtration equipment. c. Ventilation equipment. d. Other equipment required to contain airborne asbestos fibers.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.8 SECURITY
Fenced and locked security area shall be provided for each regulated area. A log book shall be kept documenting entry into and out of the regulated area. Entry into regulated areas shall only be by personnel authorized by the Contractor and the CO. Personnel authorized to enter regulated areas shall be trained, medically evaluated, and wear the required personal protective equipment.
1.8.1 Licenses, Permits and Notifications
Obtain necessary licenses, permits and notifications in conjunction with the project's asbestos abatement, transportation and disposal actions and timely notification furnished of such actions as required by the GOJ and/or local Japanese regional and/orlocal authorities. As required by the GOJ and local prefecture authorities, all required licenses, permits, and notifications shall be obtained by the Contractor prior to the project's asbestos abatement activity and transportation/disposal actions. The Contractor shall furnish copies of the receipts to the Contracting Officer, in writing prior to the commencement of the activity/action. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 10 days prior to the commencement of work.
Notify the local fire department 3 days before fireproofing material is removed from a building and the notice shall specify whether or not the material contains asbestos. The associated fees/costs for licenses, permits, and notifications are is contract.
1.8.2 Regulated Areas
All Class I, II, and III asbestos work shall be conducted within regulated areas. The regulated area shall be demarcated to minimize the number of persons within the area and to protect persons outside the area from exposure to airborne asbestos. Control access to regulated areas, ensure that only authorized personnel enter, and verify that Contractor required medical surveillance, training and respiratory protection program requirements are met prior to allowing entrance.
1.8.3 Warning Signs and Tape
Warning signs and tape printed in English and Japanese and shall be provided at the regulated boundaries and entrances to regulated areas. Signs shall be located to allow personnel to read the signs and take the necessary protective steps required before entering the area. Warning signs, as shown and described in DETAIL SHEET 11, and displaying the following legend in the lower panel:
DANGER ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
See DETAIL SHEET 11 and DETAIL SHEET 15. Decontamination unit signage shall be as shown and described on DETAILED SHEET 15.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.8.4 Warning Labels
Warning labels shall be affixed to all asbestos disposal containers, asbestos materials, scrap, waste debris, and other products contaminated with asbestos. Containers with preprinted warning labels conforming to requirements are acceptable. See DETAIL SHEET 14,
1.9 MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
Medical surveillance requirements shall conform to 29 CFR 1926.1101. Asbestos workers shall be enrolled in a medical surveillance program that meets 29 CFR 1926.1101 (m) requirements and other pertinent state or local requirements. This requirement shall have been satisfied within the last 12 months. Submit required medical certification and the Physician's written opinion.
1.9.1 Respiratory Protection Program
The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall establish in writing, and implement a respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1910.134. The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall establish minimum respiratory protection requirements based on measured or anticipated levels of airborne asbestos fiber concentrations.
1.9.2 Respiratory Fit Testing
The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall conduct a qualitative or quantitative fit test conforming to Appendix A of 29 CFR 1910.134 for each worker required to wear a respirator, and any authorized visitors who enter a regulated area where respirators are required to be worn. A respirator fit test shall be performed prior to initially wearing a respirator and every 12 months thereafter. If physical changes develop that will affect the fit, a new fit test shall be performed. Functional fit checks shall be performed each time a respirator is put on and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
1.9.3 Respirator Selection and Use Requirements
Provide respirators, and ensure that they are used as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 and in accordance with CGA G-7 and the manufacturer's recommendations. Respirators shall be approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health NIOSH, under the provisions of 42 CFR 84, for use in environments containing airborne asbestos fibers. For air-purifying respirators, the particulate filter shall be high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA)/(N-,R-,P-100). The initial respirator selection and the decisions regarding the upgrading or downgrading of respirator type shall be made by the Contractor's Designated IH/PQP based on the measured or anticipated airborne asbestos fiber concentrations to be encountered.
1.9.4 Personal Protective Equipment
Three complete sets of personal protective equipment shall be made available to the CO and authorized visitors for entry to the regulated area. The CO and authorized visitors shall be provided with training equivalent to that provided to Contractor employees in the selection, fitting, and use of personal protective equipment and the site safety and health requirements. Provide workers with personal protective clothing and equipment and ensure that it is worn properly. The Designated IH/PQP
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and Designated Competent Person shall select and approve all the required personal protective clothing and equipment.
1.9.5 Whole Body Protection
Personnel exposed to or having the potential to be exposed to airborne concentrations of asbestos that exceed the PELs, or for all OSHA Classes of work for which a required negative exposure assessment is not produced, shall be provided with whole body protection and such protection shall be worn properly. Disposable whole body protection shall be disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste upon exiting from the regulated area. Reusable whole body protection worn shall be either disposed of as asbestos contaminated waste upon exiting from the regulated area or be properly laundered in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101. The Contractor's Designated Competent Person, in consultation with the Designated IH/PQP, has the authority to take immediate action to upgrade or downgrade whole body protection when there is an immediate danger to the health and safety of the wearer.
1.9.5.1 Coveralls
Disposable-breathable coveralls with a zipper front shall be provided. Sleeves shall be secured at the wrists, and foot coverings secured at the ankles. See DETAIL SHEET 13.
1.9.5.2 Gloves
Gloves shall be provided to protect the hands where there is the potential for hand injuries (i.e., scrapes, punctures, cuts, etc.).
1.9.5.3 Foot Coverings
Cloth socks shall be provided and worn next to the skin. Footwear, as required by OSHA and EM 385-1-1, that is appropriate for safety and health hazards in the area shall be worn. Reusable footwear removed from the regulated area shall be thoroughly decontaminated or disposed of as ACM waste.
1.9.5.4 Head Covering
Hood type disposable head covering shall be provided. In addition, protective head gear (hard hats) shall be provided as required. Hard hats shall only be removed from the regulated area after being thoroughly decontaminated.
1.9.5.5 Protective Eye Wear
Eye protection shall be provided, when operations present a potential eye injury hazard, and shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISEA Z87.1.
1.10 HYGIENE
Establish a decontamination area for the decontamination of employees, material and equipment. Ensure that employees enter and exit the regulated area through the decontamination area.
1.10.1 3-Stage Decontamination Area
A temporary negative pressure decontamination unit that is adjacent and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
attached in a leak-tight manner to the regulated area shall be provided as described in SET-UP DETAIL SHEET Numbers 22 and 23. The decontamination unit shall have an equipment room and a clean room separated by a shower that complies with 29 CFR 1910.141, unless the Contractor can demonstrate that such facilities are not feasible. Equipment and surfaces of containers filled with ACM shall be cleaned prior to removing them from the equipment room or area. Two separate lockers shall be provided for each asbestos worker, one in the equipment room and one in the clean room. Provide a minimum of 2 showers. Wastewater shall be collected and filtered to remove asbestos contamination. Filters and residue shall be disposed of as asbestos contaminated material, in accordance with DETAIL SHEETS 9 and 14. Filtered water shall be discharged to the sanitary sewer system. Wastewater filters shall be installed in series with the first stage pore size of 20 microns and the second stage pore size of 5 microns. The floor of the decontamination unit's clean room shall be kept dry and clean at all times. Proper housekeeping and hygiene requirements shall be maintained. Soap and towels shall be provided for showering, washing and drying. Any cloth towels provided shall be disposed of as ACM waste or shall be laundered in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.10.2 Load-Out Unit
A temporary load-out unit that is adjacent and connected to the regulated area and access tunnel shall be provided as described in DETAIL SHEET Number 20 and 25. The load-out unit shall be attached in a leak-tight manner to each regulated area.
1.10.3 Single Stage Decontamination Area
A decontamination area (equipment room/area) shall be provided for Class I work involving less than 7.5 m or 0.9 square meters of TSI or surfacing ACM, and for Class II and Class III asbestos work operations where exposures exceed the PELs or where there is no negative exposure assessment. The equipment room or area shall be adjacent to the regulated area for the decontamination of employees, material, and their equipment which could be contaminated with asbestos. The area shall be covered by an impermeable drop cloth on the floor or horizontal working surface. The area must be of sufficient size to accommodate cleaning of equipment and removing personal protective equipment without spreading contamination beyond the area.
1.10.4 Decontamination Area Exit Procedures
Ensure that the following procedures are followed:
a. Before leaving the regulated area, remove all gross contamination and debris from work clothing using a HEPA vacuum.
b. Employees shall remove their protective clothing in the equipment room and deposit the clothing in labeled impermeable bags or containers (see Detail Sheets 9A and 14) for disposal and/or laundering.
c. Employees shall not remove their respirators until showering.
d. Employees shall shower prior to entering the clean room. If a shower has not been located between the equipment room and the clean room or the work is performed outdoors, ensure that employees engaged in Class I asbestos jobs: a) Remove asbestos contamination from their work suits in the equipment room or decontamination area using a HEPA
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
vacuum before proceeding to a shower that is not adjacent to the work area; or b) Remove their contaminated work suits in the equipment room, without cleaning worksuits, and proceed to a shower that is not adjacent to the work area.
1.10.5 Smoking
Smoking, if allowed by the Contractor, shall only be permitted in designated areas approved by the CO.
1.11 TRAINING PROGRAM
Establish and submit a training program as specified by EPA MAP, training requirements at 40 CFR 763, OSHA requirements at 29 CFR 1926.1101 (k)(9). Contractor employees shall complete the required training for the type of work they are to perform and such training shall be documented and provided to the CO.
Prior to commencement of work the Contractor's Designated IH/PQP and Competent Person shall instruct each worker about:
a. The hazards and health effects of the specific types of ACM to be abated; and
b. The content and requirements of the Contractor's APP to include the AHAP and AHAs and site-specific safety and health precautions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCAPSULANTS
Encapsulants shall conform to USEPA requirements, shall contain no toxic or hazardous substances and no solvent. Submit certificates stating that encapsulants meet the applicable specified performance requirements.
2.2 ENCASEMENT PRODUCTS
Encasement shall consist of primary cellular polymer coat, polymer finish coat, and any other finish coat as approved by the CO.
2.3 EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES
2.3.1 Glovebag
Glovebags shall be provided as described in 29 CFR 1926.1101 and SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 10. The glovebag assembly shall be 0.15 mm thick plastic, prefabricated and seamless at the bottom with preprinted OSHA warning label.
2.3.2 Duct Tape
Industrial grade duct tape of appropriate widths suitable for bonding sheet plastic and disposal container.
2.3.3 Disposal Containers
Leak-tight (defined as solids, liquids, or dust that cannot escape or spill out) disposal containers shall be provided for ACM wastes as
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 and DETAIL SHEETS 9A, 9B, 9C and 14. Disposal containers can be in the form of:
a. Disposal Bags
b. Fiberboard Drums
c. Cardboard Boxes
2.3.4 Sheet Plastic
Sheet plastic shall be polyethylene of 0.15 mm minimum thickness and shall be provided in the largest sheet size necessary to minimize seams ,. Film shall conform to ASTM D4397, except as specified below:
2.3.4.1 Flame Resistant
Where a potential for fire exists, flame-resistant sheets shall be provided. Film shall be shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 701.
2.3.4.2 Reinforced
Reinforced sheets shall be provided where high skin strength is required, such as where it constitutes the only barrier between the regulated area and the outdoor environment. The sheet stock shall consist of translucent, nylon-reinforced or woven-polyethylene thread laminated between 2 layers of polyethylene film. Film shall meet flame resistant standards of NFPA 701.
2.3.5 Mastic Removing Solvent
Mastic removing solvent shall be nonflammable and shall not contain methylene chloride, glycol ether, or halogenated hydrocarbons. Solvents used onsite shall have a flash point greater than 60 degrees C.
2.3.6 Leak-tight Wrapping
Two layers of 0.15 mm minimum thick polyethylene sheet stock shall be used for the containment of removed asbestos-containing components or materials such as reactor vessels, large tanks, boilers, insulated pipe segments and other materials too large to be placed in disposal bags as described in DETAIL SHEET 9B. Upon placement of the ACM component or material, each layer shall be individually leak-tight sealed with duct tape.
2.3.7 Viewing Inspection Window
Where feasible, a minimum of 1 clear, 3 mm thick, acrylic sheet, 450 by 610 mm, shall be installed as a viewing inspection window at eye level on a wall in each containment enclosure. The windows shall be sealed leak-tight with industrial grade duct tape.
2.3.8 Wetting Agents
Removal encapsulant (a penetrating encapsulant) shall be provided when conducting removal abatement activities that require a longer removal time or are subject to rapid evaporation of amended water. The removal encapsulant shall be capable of wetting the ACM and retarding fiber release during disturbance of the ACM greater than or equal to that provided by amended water. Performance requirements for penetrating
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
encapsulants are specified in paragraph ENCAPSULANTS above.
2.3.9 Strippable Coating
Strippable coating in aerosol cans shall be used to adhere to surfaces and to be removed cleanly by stripping, at the completion of work.
2.4 EQUIPMENT
2.4.1 Tools
Vacuums shall be equipped with HEPA filters, of sufficient capacity and necessary capture velocity at the nozzle or nozzle attachment to efficiently collect, transport and retain the ACM waste material. Power tools shall not be used to remove ACM unless the tool is equipped with effective, integral HEPA filtered exhaust ventilation capture and collection system. Reusable tools shall be thoroughly decontaminated prior to being removed from regulated areas.
2.4.2 Rental Equipment
If rental equipment is to be used, written notification shall be provided to the rental agency, concerning the intended use of the equipment, the possibility of asbestos contamination of the equipment and the steps that will be taken to decontaminate such equipment.
2.4.3 Air Monitoring Equipment
The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall approve air monitoring equipment. The equipment shall include, but shall not be limited to:
a. High-volume sampling pumps that can be calibrated and operated at a constant airflow up to 16 liters per minute.
b. Low-volume, battery powered, body-attachable, portable personal pumps that can be calibrated to a constant airflow up to approximately 3.5 liters per minute, and a self-contained rechargeable power pack capable of sustaining the calibrated flow rate for a minimum of 10 hours. The pumps shall also be equipped with an automatic flow control unit which shall maintain a constant flow, even as filter resistance increases due to accumulation of fiber and debris on the filter surface.
c. Single use standard 25 mm diameter cassette, open face, 0.8 micron pore size, mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and cassettes with 50 mm electrically conductive extension cowl, and shrink bands for personal air sampling.
d. Single use standard 25 mm diameter cassette, open face, 0.45 micron pore size, mixed cellulose ester membrane filters and cassettes with 50 mm electrically conductive cowl, and shrink bands when conducting environmental area sampling using NIOSH NMAM Methods 7400 and 7402, (and the transmission electric microscopy method specified at 40 CFR 763 if required).
e. A flow calibrator capable of calibration to within plus or minus 2 percent of reading over a temperature range of minus 20 to plus 60 degrees C and traceable to a NIST primary standard.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Asbestos abatement work tasks shall be performed as shown in the Contractor's approved Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan. Use the engineering controls and work practices required in 29 CFR 1926.1101(g) in all operations regardless of the levels of exposure. Personnel shall wear and utilize protective clothing and equipment. Do not permit eating, smoking, drinking, chewing or applying cosmetics in the regulated area. Personnel of other trades, shall not be exposed at any time to airborne concentrations of asbestos unless all the administrative and personal protective provisions of the Contractor's APP are complied with. Power to the regulated area shall be locked-out and tagged in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147, and temporary electrical service with ground fault circuit interrupters shall be provided as needed. Temporary electrical service shall be disconnected when necessary for wet removal. Stop abatement work in the regulated area immediately when the airborne total fiber concentration: (1) equals or exceeds 0.01 f/cc, or the pre-abatement concentration, whichever is greater, outside the regulated area; or (2) equals or exceeds 1.0 f/cc inside the regulated area. Correct the condition to the satisfaction of the CO, including visual inspection and air sampling. Work shall resume only upon notification by the CO. Corrective actions shall be documented.
3.2 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK OR AREAS TO REMAIN
Perform asbestos abatement without damage to or contamination of adjacent work or area. Where such work or area is damaged or contaminated, it shall be restored to its original condition or decontaminated at no expense to the Government. When spills occur, work shall stop in all effected areas immediately and the spill shall be cleaned. When satisfactory visual inspection and air sampling analysis results are obtained and have been evaluated by the Contractor's Designated IH/PQP and the CO, work shall proceed.
3.3 OBJECTS
3.3.1 Removal of Mobile Objects
To avoid contamination, the Contractor shall remove all furniture, equipment, and supplies (as necessary) from the regulated work area prior to disturbing any ACM. Upon completion of asbestos removal and final clearance, the Contractor shall return all furniture, equipment and supplies (if applicable) to its original location.
3.3.2 Stationary Objects
Stationary objects, furniture and equipment as shown on DETAIL SHEET 27, shall remain in place and shall be precleaned using HEPA vacuum followed by adequate wet wiping. Stationary objects and furnishings shall be covered with 2 layers of polyethylene and edges sealed with duct tape.
3.4 BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM AND CRITICAL BARRIERS
Building ventilation system supply and return air ducts in a regulated area shall be shut down and isolated by lockable switch or other positive means in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. The airtight seals shall consist of 2 layers of polyethylene. Edges to wall, ceiling and floor surfaces
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 23 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
shall be sealed with industrial grade duct tape.
3.5 PRECLEANING
Surfaces shall be cleaned by HEPA vacuum and adequately wet wiped prior to establishment of containment.
3.6 METHODS OF COMPLIANCE
3.6.1 Mandated Practices
The specific abatement techniques and items identified shall be detailed in the Contractor's AHAP. Use the following engineering controls and work practices in all operations, regardless of the levels of exposure:
a. Vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters.
b. Wet methods or wetting agents except where it can be demonstrated that the use of wet methods is unfeasible due to the creation of electrical hazards, equipment malfunction, and in roofing.
c. Prompt clean-up and disposal.
d. Inspection and repair of polyethylene.
e. Cleaning of equipment and surfaces of containers prior to removing them from the equipment room or area.
3.6.2 Control Methods
Use the following control methods:
a. Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter;
b. Enclosure or isolation of processes producing asbestos dust;
c. Where the feasible engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the PELs, use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest levels attainable and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory protection.
3.6.3 Unacceptable Practices
The following work practices shall not be used:
a. High-speed abrasive disc saws that are not equipped with point of cut ventilator or enclosures with HEPA filtered exhaust air.
b. Compressed air used to remove asbestos containing materials, unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with an enclosed ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the compressed air.
c. Dry sweeping, shoveling, or other dry clean up.
d. Employee rotation as a means of reducing employee exposure to asbestos.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 24 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6.4 Class I Work Procedures
In addition to requirements of paragraphs Mandated Practices and Control Methods, the following engineering controls and work practices shall be used:
a. A Competent Person shall supervise the installation and operation of the control methods.
b. For jobs involving the removal of more than 7.5 m or 0.9 square m of TSI or surfacing material, place critical barriers over all openings to the regulated area.
c. HVAC systems shall be isolated in the regulated area by sealing with a double layer of plastic or air-tight rigid covers.
d. Impermeable dropcloths (0.15 mm or greater thickness) shall be placed on surfaces beneath all removal activity.
e. Where a negative exposure assessment has not been provided or where exposure monitoring shows the PEL was exceeded, the regulated area shall be ventilated with a HEPA unit and employees must use PPE.
3.6.5 Specific Control Methods for Class I Work
3.6.5.1 Negative Pressure Enclosure (NPE) System
The NPE system shall be as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 2 3 4 8. The system shall provide at least 4 air changes per hour inside the containment. The local exhaust unit equipment shall be operated 24 hours per day until the containment is removed. The NPE shall be smoke tested for leaks at the beginning of each shift and be sufficient to maintain a minimum pressure differential of minus 0.5 mm of water column relative to adjacent, unsealed areas. Pressure differential shall be monitored continuously, 24 hours per day, with an automatic manometric recording instrument and Records shall be provided daily on the same day collected to the CO. The CO shall be notified immediately if the pressure differential falls below the prescribed minimum. The building ventilation system shall not be used as the local exhaust system for the regulated area. The NPE shall terminate outdoors unless an alternate arrangement is allowed by the CO. All filters used shall be new at the beginning of the project and shall be periodically changed as necessary and disposed of as ACM waste.
3.6.5.2 Glovebag Systems
Glovebag systems shall be as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 10. Glovebags shall be used without modification, smoke-tested for leaks, and completely cover the circumference of pipe or other structures where the work is to be done. Glovebags shall be used only once and shall not be moved. Glovebags shall not be used on surfaces that have temperatures exceeding 66 degrees C. Prior to disposal, glovebags shall be collapsed using a HEPA vacuum. Before beginning the operation, loose and friable material adjacent to the glovebag operation shall be wrapped and sealed in 2 layers of plastic or otherwise rendered intact. At least 2 persons shall perform glovebag removal. Asbestos regulated work areas shall be established for glovebag abatement. Designated boundary limits for the asbestos work shall be established with rope or other continuous barriers and all other requirements for asbestos control areas shall be maintained, including
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 25 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
area signage and boundary warning tape as specified in SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 11.
a. Attach HEPA vacuum systems to the bag to prevent collapse during removal of ACM.
b. The negative pressure glove boxes shall be fitted with gloved apertures and a bagging outlet and constructed with rigid sides from metal or other material which can withstand the weight of the ACM and water used during removal. A negative pressure shall be created in the system using a HEPA filtration system. The box shall be smoke tested for leaks prior to each use.
3.6.5.3 Mini-Enclosures
Double bulkhead containment or Mini-containment (small walk-in enclosure) as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 5 6 7 to accommodate no more than 2 persons, may be used if the disturbance or removal can be completely contained by the enclosure. The mini-enclosure shall be inspected for leaks and smoke tested before each use. Air movement shall be directed away from the employee's breathing zone within the mini-enclosure.
3.6.5.4 Wrap and Cut Operation
Wrap and cut operations shall be as shown in SETUP DETAIL SHEET 9B 10. Prior to cutting pipe, the asbestos-containing insulation shall be wrapped with polyethylene and securely sealed with duct tape to prevent asbestos becoming airborne as a result of the cutting process. The following steps shall be taken: install glovebag, strip back sections to be cut 150 mm from point of cut, and cut pipe into manageable sections.
3.6.6 Class II Work
In addition to the requirements of paragraphs Mandated Practices and Control Methods, the following engineering controls and work practices shall be used:
a. A Competent Person shall supervise the work.
b. For indoor work, critical barriers shall be placed over all openings to the regulated area.
c. Impermeable dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces beneath all removal activity.
3.6.7 Specific Control Methods for Class II Work
3.6.7.1 Vinyl and Asphalt Flooring Materials
When removing vinyl and asphalt flooring materials from a building in which ACM has not been verified, use the following practices as shown in RESPONSE ACTION DETAIL SHEET 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64. Resilient sheeting shall be removed by adequately wet methods. Tiles shall be removed intact (if possible); wetting is not required when tiles are heated and removed intact. Flooring or its backing shall not be sanded. Scraping of residual adhesive and/or backing shall be performed using wet methods. Mechanical chipping is prohibited unless performed in a negative pressure enclosure. Dry sweeping is prohibited. Use vacuums equipped with HEPA filter, disposable dust bag, and metal floor tool (no brush) to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 26 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
clean floors.
3.6.7.2 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be thoroughly wetted with amended water prior to removal and immediately placed in a disposal container. If a gasket is visibly deteriorated and unlikely to be removed intact, removal shall be undertaken within a glovebag. Any scraping to remove residue shall be performed wet.
3.6.8 Specific Control Methods for Class III Work
Class III asbestos work shall be conducted using engineering and work practice controls which minimize the exposure to employees performing the asbestos work. The work shall be performed using wet methods and, to the extent feasible, using local exhaust. Use impermeable drop cloths and shall isolate the operation, using mini-enclosures or glovebag systems, where the disturbance involves drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding, chipping, breaking, or sawing of TSI or surfacing material.
3.6.9 Specific Control Methods for Class IV Work
Class IV jobs shall be conducted using wet methods and HEPA vacuums. Employees cleaning up debris and waste in a regulated area where respirators are required shall wear the selected respirators.
3.6.10 Methods for Asphaltic Wrap
Removal or disturbance of pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be performed using wet methods.
3.6.11 Class I Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheets
The Contractor's IH/PQP shall identify the appropriate actions for the abatement of ACM that would otherwise be disturbed during the completion of the demolition/renovation work. The following Class I Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheet is specified on Table 1 for each individual work task to be performed:
a. Troweled Wall Plaster on Masonry: See Sheet 32
b. Troweled Wall Plaster on Stud Wall: See Sheet 33
c. Troweled Ceiling Plaster on Structural Substrate: See Sheet 35
d. Troweled Ceiling Plaster on Hung Ceiling: See Sheet 36
e. Acoustical Wall Plaster on Masonry: See Sheet 42
f. Acoustical Ceiling Plaster (Non-Asbestos Substrate): See Sheet 44
g. Asbestos Decorative Paint on Plaster: See Sheet 46
h. Asbestos-contaminated Masonry for Masonry Chimney: See Sheet 50
i. Asbestos-contaminated Masonry Wall or Thermal Insulation: See Sheet 51
j. Fireproofing or Thermal Surface Insulation: See Sheet 68
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 27 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
k. Acoustical Ceiling Insulation: See Sheet 70
l. Exterior Asbestos Stucco: See Sheet 79
m. Duct Insulation: Air circulation is not permitted in ductwork while abatement work is in progress. See Sheet 101. The HVAC system shall be isolated or inoperative and locked out of service prior to removal of duct insulation. Air circulation is not permitted in ductwork during abatement work.
n. Pipe Insulation (Using a Glovebag): See Sheet 87
o. Horizontal Pipe Insulation (Using a Containment Area): See Sheet 88
p. Pipe Insulation (Using a Mini-Containment Area): See Sheet 89
q. Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching Insulation: See Sheet 93. Storage tanks and boilers shall be valved off an allowed a sufficient amount of time to cool down prior to abatement work. Insulation shall be sprayed with a mist of amended water or removal encapsulant. Amended water or removal encapsulant shall be allowed to saturate material to substrate. Cover jackets shall be slit at seams, and sections removed and hand-placed in a polyethylene disposable bag. Exposed surfaces shall be continuously sprayed with amended water to minimize airborne dust. Insulation on tanks and boiler breeching shall not be allowed to drop to the floor. Lagging on piping and insulation on fittings shall be removed. A penetrating encapsulant shall be sprayed on all exposed tank, boiler and boiler breeching surfaces.
r. Troweled Wall Plaster on Studs: See Sheet 30
s. Troweled Ceiling or Wall Plaster on Masonry: See Sheet 31
t. Acoustical Ceiling on Wall Plaster: See Sheet 41
u. Interior Stucco: See Sheet 78
v. Exterior Stucco: See Sheet 80
w. Pipe and Fitting Insulation (using Glovebag): See Sheet 86
x. Storage Tank and Boiler Breeching: See Sheet 92
y. Duct Insulation: See Sheet 100.
3.6.12 Class II Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheets
The Contractor's IH/PQP shall identify the appropriate actions for the abatement of ACM that would otherwise be disturbed during the completion of the demolition/renovation work. The following Class II Asbestos Work Response Action Detail Sheet is specified on Table 1 for each individual work task to be performed:
a. Light Curtain: See Sheet 47
b. Interior Asbestos Cement, Fiberboard and Drywall Panels: See Sheet 48
c. Suspended Asbestos Cement Ceiling Tile: See Sheet 52
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 28 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
d. Asbestos Cement Architectural Products: See Sheet 53
e. Glued-on Acoustical Ceiling and Wall Tile: See Sheet 55
f. Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Tile: See Sheet 54
g. Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 56
h. Vinyl or Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by Asbestos Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 60
i. Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by Asbestos Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 57
j. Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Concrete Floor System by Asbestos Free Adhesive: See Sheet 58
k. Vinyl Asbestos Tile and Chemical Dissolution of Asbestos-Containing Adhesives on Concrete Floor System: See Sheet 59
l. Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 61
m. Vinyl Asbestos Tile Adhered to Wood Floor System by Asbestos Free Adhesive: See Sheet 62
n. Sheet Flooring Adhered Wood Floor System: See Sheet 63
o. Asbestos-Containing Sheet Flooring Adhered to Concrete Floor System by Asbestos-Containing Adhesive: See Sheet 64
p. Carpeting (Asbestos-Containing or Contaminated): See Sheet 65
q. Miscellaneous Asbestos-Containing Materials: See Sheet 45
r. Built-Up Roofing and Flashing: See Sheet 74
s. Roof, Shingles and Underlayment: See Sheet 75
t. Asbestos Cement Siding: See Sheet 81
u. Asbestos Cement Roofing: See Sheet 82
v. Asbestos-Containing Walkway Cover: See Sheet 83
w. Asbestos-Contaminated Metal Siding: See Sheet 84
x. Asbestos Cement Sunscreen Louvers: See Sheet 85
y. Electrical Wiring and Fixtures: See Sheet 95
z. Asbestos Insulated Electrical Fixture: See Sheet 96
aa. Boiler Firebox Insulation: Firebox lining shall be removed from out-of-service boilers before the boiler is dismantled: See Sheet 97.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 29 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6.13 Sealing Contaminated Items Designated for Disposal
Contaminated items designated for removal shall be coated with an asbestos lockdown encapsulant before being removed from the asbestos control area. The asbestos lockdown encapsulant shall be tinted a contrasting color and shall be spray applied by airless method. Thoroughness of sealing operation shall be visually gauged by the extent of colored coating on exposed surfaces.
3.7 FINAL CLEANING AND VISUAL INSPECTION
After completion of all asbestos removal work and the gross amounts of asbestos have been removed from every surface, any remaining visible accumulations of asbestos shall be collected. For all classes of indoor asbestos abatement projects a final cleaning shall be performed using HEPA vacuum and wet cleaning of all exposed surfaces and objects in the regulated area. Upon completion of the cleaning, conduct a visual pre-inspection of the cleaned area in preparation for a final inspection before final air clearance monitoring. The Contractor's IH/PQP shall conduct a final visual inspection of the cleaned regulated area in accordance with ASTM E1368 and document the results on the Final Cleaning and Visual Inspection as specified on the SET-UP DETAIL SHEET 19. This document shall be signed by the IH/PQP, certifying that the regulated area is ready for the final air clearance monitoring. If the IH/PQP rejects the clean regulated area as not meeting final cleaning requirements, reclean as necessary and have a follow-on inspection conducted with the IH/PQP. Recleaning and follow-up reinspection shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3.8 LOCKDOWN
Prior to removal of plastic barriers and after final visual inspection, a (lockdown) encapsulant shall be spray applied to ceiling, walls, floors, and other surfaces in the regulated area.
3.9 EXPOSURE ASSESSMENT AND AIR MONITORING
3.9.1 General Requirements
a. Exposure assessment, air monitoring and analysis of airborne concentration of asbestos fibers shall be performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101, and the Contractor's air monitoring plan. Results of breathing zone samples shall be posted at the job site and made available to the CO. Submit all documentation regarding initial exposure assessments, negative exposure assessments, and air-monitoring results.
b. Worker Exposure.
(1) The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall collect samples representative of the exposure of each employee who is assigned to work within a regulated area. Breathing zone samples shall be taken for at least 25 percent of the workers in each shift, or a minimum of 2, whichever is greater. Air monitoring results at the 95 percent confidence level shall be calculated as shown in Table 2 at the end of this section.
(2) Providean independent testing laboratory with qualified analysts and appropriate equipment and personnel to conduct sample analyses
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 30 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
of air samples using the methods prescribed in 29 CFR 1926.1101, to include NIOSH NMAM Method 7400.
(3) Workers shall not be exposed to an airborne fiber concentration in excess of 1.0 f/cc, as averaged over a sampling period of 30 minutes. Should a personal excursion concentration of 1.0 f/cc expressed as a 30-minute sample occur inside a regulated work area, stop work immediately, notify the Contracting Officer, and implement additional engineering controls and work practice controls to reduce airborne fiber levels below prescribed limits in the work area. Do not restart work until authorized by the CO.
c. Environmental Exposure
(1) All environmental air monitoring shall be performed by the Contractor's Designated IH/PQP .
(2) Environmental and final clearance air monitoring shall be performed using NIOSH NMAM Method 7400 (PCM) with optional confirmation of results by TEM.
(3) For environmental and final clearance, air monitoring shall be conducted at a sufficient velocity and duration to establish the limit of detection of the method used at 0.005 f/cc.
(4) When confirming asbestos fiber concentrations (asbestos f/cc) from environmental and final clearance samples, use TEM in accordance with NIOSH NMAM Method 7402. When such confirmation is conducted, it shall be from the same sample filter used for the NIOSH NMAM Method 7400 PCM analysis. All confirmation of asbestos fiber concentrations, using NIOSH NMAM Method 7402, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
(5) Monitoring may be duplicated by the Government at the discretion of the CO and at the Government's expense.
(6) Maintain a fiber concentration inside a regulated area less than or equal to 0.1 f/cc expressed as an 8 hour, time-weighted average (TWA) during the conduct of the asbestos abatement.
(7) At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, fiber concentration may exceed 0.1 f/cc but shall not exceed 1.0 f/cc expressed as an 8-hour TWA. Should an environmental concentration of 1.0 f/cc expressed as an 8-hour TWA occur inside a regulated work area, stop work immediately, notify the Contracting Officer, and implement additional engineering controls and work practice controls to reduce airborne fiber levels below prescribed limits in the work area. Work shall not restart until authorized by the CO.
3.9.2 Initial Exposure Assessment
The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall conduct an exposure assessment immediately before or at the initiation of an asbestos abatement operation to ascertain expected exposures during that operation. The assessment shall be completed in time to comply with the requirements, which are triggered by exposure data or the lack of a negative exposure assessment, and to provide information necessary to assure that all control systems planned are appropriate for that operation. The assessment shall take
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 31 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
into consideration both the monitoring results and all observations, information or calculations which indicate employee exposure to asbestos, including any previous monitoring conducted in the workplace, or of the operations of the Contractor which indicate the levels of airborne asbestos likely to be encountered on the job. For Class I asbestos work, until the employer conducts exposure monitoring and documents that employees on that job will not be exposed in excess of PELs, or otherwise makes a negative exposure assessment, presume that employees are exposed in excess of the PEL-TWA and PEL-Excursion Limit.
3.9.3 Negative Exposure Assessment
Provide a negative exposure assessment for the specific asbestos job which will be performed within 5 days of the initiation of the project and conform to the following criteria:
a. Objective Data: Objective data demonstrating that the product or material containing asbestos minerals or the activity involving such product or material cannot release airborne fibers in concentrations exceeding the PEL-TWA and PEL-Excursion Limit under those work conditions having the greatest potential for releasing asbestos.
b. Prior Asbestos Jobs: Where the Contractor has monitored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL and the PEL-Excursion Limit within 12 months of the current job, the monitoring and analysis were performed in compliance with asbestos standard in effect; the data were obtained during work operations conducted under workplace conditions closely resembling the processes, type of material, control methods, work practices, and environmental conditions used and prevailing in the Contractor's current operations; the operations were conducted by employees whose training and experience are no more extensive than that of employees performing the current job; and these data show that under the conditions prevailing and which will prevail in the current workplace, there is a high degree of certainty that the monitoring covered exposure from employee exposures will not exceed the PEL-TWA and PEL-Excursion Limit.
c. Initial Exposure Monitoring: The results of initial exposure monitoring of the current job, made from breathing zone air samples that are representative of the 8-hour PEL-TWA and 30-minute short-term exposures of each employee. The monitoring covered exposure from operations which are most likely during the performance of the entire asbestos job to result in exposures over the PELs.
3.9.4 Independent Environmental Monitoring
The Government has retained an independent air monitoring firm to perform final clearance air monitoring. The air monitoring Contractor has been provided a copy of the contract that includes this abatement work. The abatement Contractor will provide the air monitoring Contractor with an up-to-date copy of the accepted AHAP, APP and pertinent detailed drawings. The air monitoring Contractor is required to comply with the abatement Contractor's safety and health requirements. The abatement Contractor will coordinate all onsite activities with the air monitoring Contractor, the COR, and other affected parties as directed by the COR. The abatement Contractor will provide the air monitoring Contractor with an up-to-date schedule of abatement Contractor work activities. The air monitoring Contractor will coordinate with the abatement Contractor and the COR during the performance Government required air monitoring. The
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 32 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
abatement Contractor is responsible for performing exposure assessment and personal air monitoring of abatement Contractor's work. The air monitoring Contractor is responsible for performing these tasks for its employee.
3.9.5 Preabatement Environmental Air Monitoring
Preabatement environmental air monitoring shall be established 1 day prior to the masking and sealing operations for each regulated area to determine background concentrations before abatement work begins. As a minimum, preabatement air samples shall be collected using NIOSH NMAM Method 7400, PCM at these locations: outside the building; inside the building, but outside the regulated area perimeter; and inside each regulated work area. One sample shall be collected for every 185 square meters of floor space. At least 2 samples shall be collected outside the building: at the exhaust of the HEPA unit; and downwind from the abatement site. The PCM samples shall be analyzed within 24 hours; and if any result in fiber concentration greater than 0.01 f/cc, asbestos fiber concentration shall be confirmed using NIOSH NMAM Method 7402 (TEM).
3.9.6 Environmental Air Monitoring During Abatement
Until an exposure assessment is provided to the CO, environmental air monitoring shall be conducted at locations and frequencies that will accurately characterize any evolving airborne asbestos fiber concentrations. The assessment shall demonstrate that the product or material containing asbestos minerals, or the abatement involving such product or material, cannot release airborne asbestos fibers in concentrations exceeding 0.01 f/cc as a TWA under those work conditions having the greatest potential for releasing asbestos. The monitoring shall be at least once per shift at locations including, but not limited to, close to the work inside a regulated area; preabatement sampling locations; outside entrances to a regulated area; close to glovebag operations; representative locations outside of the perimeter of a regulated area; inside clean room; and at the exhaust discharge point of local exhaust system ducted to the outside of a containment (if used). If the sampling outside regulated area shows airborne fiber levels have exceeded background or 0.01 f/cc, whichever is greater, work shall be stopped immediately, and the Contracting Officer notified. The condition causing the increase shall be corrected. Work shall not restart until authorized by the CO.
3.9.7 Final Clearance Air Monitoring
The Contractor's Designated IH/PQP shall conduct final clearance air monitoring using aggressive air sampling techniques as defined in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix A, Unit III, TEM Method B.7(d-f) and Table 4 of this section for all indoor asbestos abatement projects. Clearance air monitoring is not required for outside work or for soil cleanups.
3.9.7.1 Final Clearance Requirements, NIOSH PCM Method
For PCM sampling and analysis using NIOSH NMAM Method 7400, the fiber concentration inside the abated regulated area, for each airborne sample, shall be less than 0.01 f/cc. The abatement inside the regulated area is considered complete when every PCM final clearance sample is below the clearance limit. If any sample result is greater than 0.01 total f/cc, the asbestos fiber concentration (asbestos f/cc) shall be confirmed from that same filter using NIOSH NMAM Method 7402 (TEM) at Contractor's
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 33 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
expense. If any confirmation sample result is greater than 0.01 asbestos f/cc, abatement is incomplete and cleaning shall be repeated. Upon completion of any required recleaning, resampling with results to meet the above clearance criteria shall be done.
3.9.7.2 Final Clearance Requirements, EPA TEM Method
For EPA TEM sampling and analysis, using the EPA Method specified in 40 CFR 763, abatement inside the regulated area is considered complete when the arithmetic mean asbestos concentration of the 5 inside samples is less than or equal to 70 structures per square millimeter (70 S/mm). When the arithmetic mean is greater than 70 S/mm, the 3 blank samples shall be analyzed. If the 3 blank samples are greater than 70 S/mm, resampling shall be done. If less than 70 S/mm, the 5 outside samples shall be analyzed and a Z-test analysis performed. When the Z-test results are less than 1.65, the decontamination shall be considered complete. If the Z-test results are more than 1.65, the abatement is incomplete and cleaning shall be repeated. Upon completion of any required recleaning, resampling with results to meet the above clearance criteria shall be done.
3.9.7.3 Air Clearance Failure
If clearance sampling results fail to meet the final clearance requirements, pay all costs associated with the required recleaning, resampling, and analysis, until final clearance requirements are met.
3.9.8 Air-Monitoring Results and Documentation
Air sample fiber counting shall be completed and results provided as soon as possible after completion of a sampling period. The CO shall be notified immediately of any airborne levels of asbestos fibers in excess of established requirements. Written sampling results shall be provided within 5 working days of the date of collection. The written results shall be signed by testing laboratory analyst, testing laboratory principal and the Contractor's Designated IH/PQP . The air sampling results shall be documented on a Contractor's daily air monitoring log. The daily air monitoring log shall contain the following information for each sample:
a. Sampling and analytical method used;
b. Date sample collected;
c. Sample number;
d. Sample type: BZ = Breathing Zone (Personal), P = Preabatement, E = Environmental, C = Abatement Clearance;
e. Location/activity/name where sample collected;
f. Sampling pump manufacturer, model and serial number, beginning flow rate, end flow rate, average flow rate (L/min);
g. Calibration date, time, method, location, name of calibrator, signature;
h. Sample period (start time, stop time, elapsed time (minutes);
i. Total air volume sampled (liters);
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 34 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
j. Sample results (f/cc and S/mm square) if EPA methods are required for final clearance;
k. Laboratory name, location, analytical method, analyst, confidence level. In addition, the printed name and a signature and date block for the Industrial Hygienist who conducted the sampling and for the Industrial Hygienist who reviewed the daily air monitoring log verifying the accuracy of the information.
3.10 CLEARANCE CERTIFICATION
When asbestos abatement is complete, ACM waste is removed from the regulated areas, and final clean-up is completed, the CO will allow the warning signs and boundary warning tape to be removed. After final clean-up and acceptable airborne concentrations are attained, but before the HEPA unit is turned off and the containment removed, the Contractor shall remove all pre-filters on the building HVAC system and provide new pre-filters. Dispose of such filters as asbestos contaminated materials. HVAC, mechanical, and electrical systems shall be re-established in proper working order. The Contractor and the CO shall visually inspect all surfaces within the containment for residual material or accumulated debris. Reclean all areas showing dust or residual materials. The CO will certify in writing that the area is safe before unrestricted entry is permitted. The Government will have the option to perform monitoring to certify the areas are safe before entry is permitted.
3.11 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL
3.11.1 Title to ACM Materials
ACM material resulting from abatement work, except as specified otherwise, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of as specified and in accordance with the JEGS, applicable U.S. federal, GOJ, and local regulations.
3.11.2 Collection and Disposal of Asbestos
All ACM waste shall be collected including contaminated wastewater filters, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and asbestos contaminated clothing and placed in leak-tight containers. Waste within the containers shall be wetted in case the container is breeched. Asbestos-containing waste shall be disposed of off Government property at a GOJ and/or local prefecture approved asbestos landfill.
For temporary storage, sealed impermeable containers shall be stored in an asbestos waste load-out unit or in a storage/transportation conveyance (i.e., dumpster, roll-off waste boxes, etc.) in a manner acceptable to and in an area assigned by the CO. Procedure for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, applicable GOJ, regional, and local standards. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for all materials and equipment to be used, including brand name, model, capacity, performance characteristics and any other pertinent information. Test results and certificates from the manufacturer of encapsulants substantiating compliance with performance requirements of this specification. Material Safety Data Sheets for all chemicals to be used onsite in the same format as implemented in the Contractor's HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM. Data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following items:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 35 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
a. High Efficiency Filtered Air (HEPA) local exhaust equipment
b. Vacuum cleaning equipment
c. Pressure differential monitor for HEPA local exhaust equipment
d. Air monitoring equipment
e. Respirators
f. Personal protective clothing and equipment
g. Glovebags. Written manufacturer's proof that glovebags will not break down under expected temperatures and conditions.
h. Duct Tape
i. Disposal Containers
j. Sheet Plastic
k. Wetting Agent
l. Strippable Coating
m. Prefabricated Decontamination Unit
n. Material Safety Data Sheets (for all chemicals proposed)
3.11.3 Records and Management Plan
3.11.3.1 Asbestos Waste Shipment Records
Complete and provide the CO final completed copies of the Waste Shipment Record for all shipments of waste material as specified in 40 CFR 61, Subpart M and other required state waste manifest shipment records, within 3 days of delivery to the landfill. Each Waste Shipment Record shall be signed and dated by the Contractor , the waste transporter and disposal facility operator.
3.11.3.2 Asbestos Management Plan
Provide a summary, in electronic form, of site activities (bulk samples, asbestos removed, repaired, encased, etc.) for updating the installation Asbestos Management Plan.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 36 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 2
FORMULA FOR CALCULATION OF THE 95 PERCENT CONFIDENCE LEVEL (Reference: NIOSH 7400)
______
Fibers/cc(01.95 percent CL) = X + (X) * (1.645) * (CV)
Where: X = ((E)(AC))/((V)(1000))
E = ((F/Nf) - (B/Nb))/Af
CV = The precision value; 0.45 shall be used unless the analytical laboratory provides the Contracting Officer with documentation (Round Robin Program participation and results) that the laboratory's precision is better.
AC = Effective collection area of the filter in square millimeters
V = Air volume sampled in liters
E = Fiber density on the filter in fibers per square millimeter
F/Nf = Total fiber count per graticule field
B/Nb = Mean field blank count per graticule field
Af = Graticule field area in square millimeters
TWA = C1/T1 + C2/T2 = Cn/Tn
Where: C = Concentration of contaminant
T = Time sampled.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 37 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 3 NIOSH METHOD 7400 PCM ENVIRONMENTAL AIR SAMPLING PROTOCOL (NON-PERSONAL)
Sample Location Minimum No. of Samples Filter Pore Min. Vol. Sampling Rate Size (Note 1) (Note 2) (liters/min. (Liters)
Inside 0.5/140 Square Meters 0.45 microns 3850 2-16 Abatement Area (Notes 3 & 4)
Each Room in 1 0.45 microns 3850 2-16 Abatement Area Less than 140 Square meters
Field Blank 2 0.45 microns 0 0
Laboratory Blank 1 0.45 microns 0 0
Notes: 1. Type of filter is Mixed Cellulose Ester. 2. Ensure detection limit for PCM analysis is established at 0.005 fibers/cc. 3. One sample shall be added for each additional 140 square meters. (The corresponding I-P units are 5/1500 square feet). 4. A minimum of 5 samples are to be taken per abatement area, plus 2 field blanks.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 38 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 4 EPA AHERA METHOD: TEM AIR SAMPLING PROTOCOL
Location Sampled Minimum No. Filter Pore Size Min. Vol. Sampling Rate of Samples (Liters) (liters/min.)
Inside 5 0.45 microns 1500 2-16 Abatement Area
Outside 5 0.45 microns 1500 2-16 Abatement Area
Field Blank 2 0.45 microns 0 0
Laboratory Blank 1 0.45 microns 0 0
Notes: 1. Type of filter is Mixed Cellulose Ester. 2. The detection limit for TEM analysis is 70 structures/square mm.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 39 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT
PROJECT NAME ______CONTRACT NO. ______PROJECT ADDRESS ______CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME ______EMPLOYEE'S NAME ______,______,______, (Print) (Last) (First) (MI)
Social Security Number: ______-______-______,__(Optional)
WORKING WITH ASBESTOS CAN BE DANGEROUS. INHALING ASBESTOS FIBERS HAS BEEN LINKED WITH TYPES OF LUNG DISEASE AND CANCER. IF YOU SMOKE AND INHALE ASBESTOS FIBERS, THE CHANCE THAT YOU WILL DEVELOP LUNG CANCER IS GREATER THAN THAT OF THE NONSMOKING PUBLIC.
Your employer's contract for the above project requires that you be provided and you complete formal asbestos training specific to the type of work you will perform and project specific training; that you be supplied with proper personal protective equipment including a respirator, that you be trained in its use; and that you receive a medical examination to evaluate your physical capacity to perform your assigned work tasks, under the environmental conditions expected, while wearing the required personal protective equipment. These things are to be done at no cost to you. By signing this certification, you are acknowledging that your employer has met these obligations to you. The Contractor's Designated Industrial Hygienist will check the block(s) for the type of formal training you have completed. Review the checked blocks prior to signing this certification.
FORMAL TRAINING: _____ a. For Competent Persons and Supervisors: I have completed EPA's Model Accreditation Program (MAP) training course, "Contractor/Supervisor", that meets this State's requirements.
b. For Workers: _____ (1) For OSHA Class I work: I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker", that meets this State's requirements. _____ (2) For OSHA Class II work (where there will be abatement of more than one type of Class II materials, i.e., roofing, siding, floor tile, etc.): I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker", that meets this State's requirements. (3) For OSHA Class II work (there will only be abatement of one type of Class II material): _____ (a) I have completed an 8-hour training class on the elements of 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific work practices and engineering controls of 29 CFR 1926.1101(g) and hands-on training. _____ (b) I have completed EPA's MAP training course, "Worker", that meets this State's requirements. _____ (4) For OSHA Class III work: I have completed at least a 16-hour course consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education agency maintenance and custodial staff at 40 CFR 763, Section .92(a)(2) and the elements of 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific work practices and engineering controls at 29 CFR 1926.1101, and hands-on training.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 40 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT
_____ (5) For OSHA Class IV work: I have completed at least a 2-hr course consistent with EPA requirements for training of local education agency maintenance and custodial staff at 40 CFR 763, (a)(1), and the elements of 29 CFR 1926.1101(k)(9)(viii), in addition to the specific work practices and engineering controls at 29 CFR 1926.1101(g) and hands-on training.
_____ c. Workers, Supervisors and the Designated Competent Person: I have completed annual refresher training as required by EPA's MAP that meets this State's requirements.
PROJECT SPECIFIC TRAINING: _____ I have been provided and have completed the project specific training required by this Contract. My employer's Designated Industrial Hygienist and Designated Competent Person conducted the training.
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION: _____ I have been trained in accordance with the criteria in the Contractor's Respiratory Protection program. I have been trained in the dangers of handling and breathing asbestos dust and in the proper work procedures and use and limitations of the respirator(s) I will wear. I have been trained in and will abide by the facial hair and contact lens use policy of my employer.
RESPIRATOR FIT-TEST TRAINING: _____ I have been trained in the proper selection, fit, use, care, cleaning, maintenance, and storage of the respirator(s) that I will wear. I have been fit-tested in accordance with the criteria in the Contractor's Respiratory Program and have received a satisfactory fit. I have been assigned my individual respirator. I have been taught how to properly perform positive and negative pressure fit-check upon donning negative pressure respirators each time.
EPA CERTIFICATION/LICENSE
I have an EPA certification/license as: Building Inspector/Management Planner; Certification #______Contractor/Supervisor, Certification # ______Project Designer, Certification # ______Worker, Certification # ______
MEDICAL EXAMINATION: _____ I have had a medical examination within the last twelve months which was paid for by my employer. The examination included: health history, pulmonary function tests, and may have included an evaluation of a chest x-ray. A physician made a determination regarding my physical capacity to perform work tasks on the project while wearing personal protective equipment including a respirator. I was personally provided a copy and informed of the results of that examination. My employer's Industrial Hygienist evaluated the medical certification provided by the physician and checked the appropriate blank below. The physician determined that there:
_____ were no limitations to performing the required work tasks. _____ were identified physical limitations to performing the required work tasks.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 41 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
CERTIFICATE OF WORKER'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT Date of the medical examination ______
Employee Signature ______date ______Contractor's Industrial Hygienist Signature ______date ______
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 82 13.00 10 Page 42 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20
LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION - MASTER DRAFT 08/17
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)
AIHA Z88.6 (2006) Respiratory Protection - Respirator Use-Physical Qualifications for Personnel
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
JEGS (2018) Japan Environmental Governing Standards
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD)
HUD 6780 (1995; Errata Aug 1996;Rev Ch. 7 - 1997) Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead-Based Paint Hazards in Housing
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1926.103 Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1926.21 Safety Training and Education
29 CFR 1926.33 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical Records
29 CFR 1926.55 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists
29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead
29 CFR 1926.65 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 745 Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention in Certain Residential Structures
49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special Provisions, Hazardous Materials Communications, Emergency Response Information, and Training Requirements
49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 586 (2009; Reprint Sep 2014) Standard for High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Action Level
Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged over an 8 hour period.
1.2.2 Area Sampling
Sampling of lead concentrations within the lead control area and inside the physical boundaries which is representative of the airborne lead concentrations but is not collected in the breathing zone of personnel (approximately 1.5 to 1.8 meters above the floor).
1.2.3 Contaminated Room
Refers to a room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment (PPE).
1.2.4 Decontamination Shower Facility
That facility that encompasses a clean clothing storage room, and a contaminated clothing storage and disposal rooms, with a shower facility in between.
1.2.5 Eight Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA)
Airborne concentration of lead to which an employee is exposed, averaged over an 8 hour workday as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.62.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2.6 High Efficiency Particulate Arrestor (HEPA) Filter Equipment
HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment with a UL 586 filter system capable of collecting and retaining lead-contaminated particulate. A high efficiency particulate filter demonstrates at least 99.97 percent efficiency against 0.3 micron or larger size particles.
1.2.7 Industrial Hygienist/Private Qualified Person (IH/PQP)
The IH/PQP shall have demonstratable experience in lead air monitoring techniques and in the establishment of a respiratory protection program for employees. The IH/PQP shall have working knowledge of applicable Federal and Japanese regulations occupational safety and health regulations for lead in construction. The IH/PQP shall have attended and completed Lead Abatement Supervision and Monitoring training and shall be considered a competent person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.62. The IH/PQP shall be a registered Architect, Professional Engineer, or Certified Industrial Hygienist, who has successfully completed training and is therefore accredited under a legitimate Model Accreditation Plan. The IH/PQP must be qualified to perform visual inspections.
1.2.8 Industrial Hygiene Technician (IHT)
The Industrial Hygiene Technician (IHT) shall be an employee of the IH/PQP or the testing laboratory and shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the industrial hygiene field working under the direction of the IH/PQP and has completed the following course: Lead Abatement Supervision and Monitoring - Covering practices and procedures in lead abatement, lead air sampling and abatement monitoring.
1.2.9 Lead
Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Excludes other forms of organic lead compounds.
1.2.10 Lead-Based Paint (LBP)
Paint or other surface coating that contains lead equal to or greater than 1.0 milligrams per square centimeter, or 0.5 percent by weight, or 5,000 ppm by weight.
1.2.11 Lead-Based Paint Hazard (LBP Hazard)
Any condition that causes exposure to lead from lead-contaminated dust, lead-contaminated soil, lead-based paint that is deteriorated or present in accessible surface, friction surfaces, or impact surfaces that would result in adverse human health effects.
1.2.12 Lead Containing Paint
Paint or other surface coating that contains lead in excess of 0.009 percent by weight (90 PPM) and up to 0.5 percent by weight (5,000 ppm).
1.2.13 Lead Control Area
A system of control methods to prevent the spread of lead dust, paint chips or debris to adjacent areas that may include temporary containment, floor or ground cover protection, physical boundaries, and warning signs to prevent unauthorized entry of personnel. HEPA filtered local exhaust
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
equipment may be used as engineering controls to further reduce personnel exposures or building/outdoor environmental contamination.
1.2.14 Lead Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
Fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8 hour time weighted average as determined by 29 CFR 1926.62. If an employee is exposed for more than eight hours in a work day, the PEL shall be determined by the following formula:
PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. hrs worked per day
1.2.15 Material Containing Lead/Paint with Lead (MCL/PWL)
Any material, including paint, which contains lead as determined by the testing laboratory using a valid test method. The requirements of this section does not apply if no detectable levels of lead are found using a quantitative method for analyzing paint or MCL using laboratory instruments with specified limits of detection (usually 0.01 percent). An X-Ray Fluorescence (XRF) instrument is not considered a valid test method.
1.2.16 Personal Sampling
Sampling of airborne lead concentrations within the breathing zone of an employee to determine the 8 hour time weighted average concentration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Samples shall be representative of the employees' work tasks. Breathing zone shall be considered an area within a hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 150 to 225 mm and centered at the nose or mouth of an employee.
1.2.17 Physical Boundary
Area physically roped or partitioned off around lead control area to limit unauthorized entry of personnel.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Description of Work
The Contractor shall assume that all coatings will contain some level of lead, and follow the requirements of this section for protectin of workers and the surrounding environment.
1.3.2 Coordination with Other Work
The Contractor's IH/PQP shall coordinate with work being performed in adjacent areas. Coordination procedures shall be explained in the Plan and shall describe how the Contractor will prevent lead exposure to other contractors and/or Government personnel performing work unrelated to lead activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Lead Work Plan including IH/PQP approval (signature, date, and certification number); G
Industrial Hygienist/Private Qualified Person (IH/PQP) qualifications; G
Training Certification of workers and supervisors; G
lead waste management plan; G
Certification of Medical Examinations; G
SD-06 Test Reports
sampling results; G
Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Testing laboratory qualifications; G
Occupant Notification; G
Third party consultant qualifications; G
Hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility (TSD)
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Completed and signed hazardous waste manifest from treatment or disposal facility; G
Waste turn-in documents or weight tickets for non-hazardous wastes that are disposed of at sanitary or construction and demolition landfills; G
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Industrial Hygienist/Private Qualified Person (IH/PQP)
Submit name, address, and telephone number of the IH/PQP selected to perform responsibilities specified in paragraph entitled "Industrial Hygienist/Private Qualified Person (IH/PQP) Responsibilities." Provide documented construction project-related experience with implementation of OSHA's Lead in Construction standard ( 29 CFR 1926.62) which shows ability to assess occupational and environmental exposure to lead, experience with the use of respirators, personal protective equipment and other exposure reduction methods to protect employee health. Submit proper documentation that the IH/PQP is trained and certified in accordance with U.S. federal (e.g. EPA), laws and regulations and local laws.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5.1.2 Training Certification
Submit a certificate for each worker and supervisor, signed and dated by the accredited training provider, stating that the employee has received the required lead training specified in 29 CFR 1926.62(l)and is certified to perform or supervise deleading, lead removal or demolition activities .
1.5.1.3 Testing Laboratory
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the testing laboratory selected to perform the air and wipe analysis, testing, and reporting of airborne concentrations of lead. Use a laboratory participating in the EPA National Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (NLLAP) by being accredited by either the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) or the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) and that is successfully participating in the Environmental Lead Proficiency Analytical Testing (ELPAT) program to perform sample analysis. Laboratories selected to perform blood lead analysis shall be OSHA approved.
1.5.1.4 Third Party Consultant Qualifications
Submit the name, address and telephone number of the third party consultant selected to perform the wipe sampling for determining concentrations of lead in dust. Submit proper documentation that the consultant is trained and certified as an inspector technician or inspector/risk assessor by the USEPA authorized State (or local) certification and accreditation program.
1.5.2 Requirements
1.5.2.1 Industrial Hygienist/Private Qualified Person (IH/PQP) Responsibilities
a. Verify training meets all applicable U.S. Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and local requirements.
b. Review and approve Lead Work Plan for conformance to the applicable referenced standards.
c. Continuously inspect PWL or MCL work for conformance with the approved plan.
d. Perform (or oversee performance of) air sampling. Recommend upgrades or downgrades (whichever is appropriate based on exposure) on the use of PPE (respirators included) and engineering controls.
e. Ensure work is performed in strict accordance with specifications at all times.
f. Control work to prevent hazardous exposure to human beings and to the environment at all times.
g. Supervise final cleaning of the lead control area, take clearance wipe samples if necessary; review clearance sample results and make recommendations for further cleaning.
h. Certify the conditions of the work as called for elsewhere in this specification.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5.2.2 Lead Work Plan (LWP)
The purpose of the plan for this project is to verify that the Contractor understands that they will encounter paint with lead (PWL). The Contractor shall assume that all coatings will contain some level of lead. The Contractor's LWP shall identify the Contractor's process to comply with all applicable regulations depending on the method of work the Contractor choose when encountering paint with lead.
The Lead Work Plan shall be reviewed and approved (with signature, date of approval, and certification number) by the IH/PQP.
Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in the disturbance of PWL or MCL. The plan shall include a sketch showing the location, size, and details of lead control areas, critical barriers, physical boundaries, location and details of decontamination facilities, viewing ports, and mechanical ventilation system. Include a description of equipment and materials, work practices, controls and job responsibilities for each activity from which lead is emitted. Include in the plan, eating, drinking, smoking, hygiene facilities and sanitary procedures, interface of trades, sequencing of lead related work, collected waste water and dust containing lead and debris, air sampling, respirators, personal protective equipment, and a detailed description of the method of containment of the operation to ensure that lead is not released outside of the lead control area. Include site preparation, cleanup and clearance procedures. Include occupational and environmental sampling, training and strategy, sampling and analysis strategy and methodology, frequency of sampling, duration of sampling, and qualifications of sampling personnel in the air sampling portion of the plan. Include a description of arrangements made among contractors on multicontractor worksites to inform affected employees and to clarify responsibilities to control exposures.
In occupied buildings, the plan shall also include an occupant protection program that describes the measures that will be taken during the work to notify and protect the building occupants.
The Lead Work Plan (LWP) shall comply with applicable requirements of JEGS, GOJ national or prefectural hazardous waste laws and regulations, and include (if applicable):
a. Project name.
b. Identification and classification of wastes associated with the work. Define area to be abated.
c. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
d. Worker Protection (PPE).
e. Contractor organization chart.
f. Names and qualifications of each Contractor that will be transporting, storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility location and operator and a 24-hour point of contact.
g. Names and qualifications (experience and training) or personnel who will be working on-site with hazardous wastes.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
h. Name of IH/PQP. The following information shall be included:
(1) Educational background.
(2) Past lead experience information (project name).
(3) Required training certificate.
(4) Medical clearance information.
(5) Respirator fit test record.
(6) Respirator medical clearance.
(7) Project certification of acknowledgement.
i. Name of third party air monitoring consultant (IHT) and the following information shall be included:
(1) Past lead experience information (project name).
(2) Required training certification.
(3) Medical clearance.
j. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
k. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.
l. Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal. Proper containment of the waste includes using acceptable waste containers (e.g., 55-gallon drum) was well as proper marking/labeling of the containers. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily.
m. Landfill certifications.
n. Include any process that may alter or treat waste rendering a hazardous waste non-hazardous.
o. Unit cost for hazardous wastes disposal according to this plan.
p. Detailed step-by-step abatement methods to be used for each material.
q. Equipment/tools to be used.
1.5.2.3 Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report
If initial monitoring is necessary, submit occupational and environmental sampling results to the Contracting Officer within three working days of collection, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing the analysis, the employee that performed the sampling, and the IH/PQP. In order to reduce the full implementation of 29 CFR 1926.62, the Contractor shall provide documentation. Submit a report that supports the determination to reduce full implementation of the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62 and supporting the Lead Compliance Plan.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
a. The initial monitoring shall represent each job classification, or if working conditions are similar to previous jobs by the same employer, provide previously collected exposure data that can be used to estimate worker exposures per 29 CFR 1926.62. The data shall represent the worker's regular daily exposure to lead for stated work.
b. Submit worker exposure data gathered during the task based trigger operations of 29 CFR 1926.62 with a complete process description. This includes manual demolition, manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun, power tool cleaning, rivet busting, cleanup of dry expendable abrasives, abrasive blast enclosure removal, abrasive blasting, welding, cutting and torch burning where lead containing coatings are present.
c. The initial assessment shall determine the requirement for further monitoring and the need to fully implement the control and protective requirements including the lead work plan per 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.5.2.4 Medical Examinations
Initial medical surveillance as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 shall be made available to all employees exposed to lead at any time (1 day) above the action level. Full medical surveillance shall be made available to all employees on an annual basis who are or may be exposed to lead in excess of the action level for more than 30 days a year or as required by 29 CFR 1926.62. Adequate records shall show that employees meet the medical surveillance requirements of 29 CFR 1926.33, 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1926.103. Provide medical surveillance to all personnel exposed to lead as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.62. Maintain complete and accurate medical records of employees for the duration of employment plus 30 years.
1.5.2.5 Training
Train each employee performing work that disturbs lead, who performs MCL/PWL disposal, and air sampling operations prior to the time of initial job assignment and annually thereafter, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21, 29 CFR 1926.62, and local regulations where appropriate.
1.5.2.6 Respiratory Protection Program
a. Provide each employee required to wear a respirator a respirator fit test at the time of initial fitting and at least annually thereafter as required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as required by AIHA Z88.6, 29 CFR 1926.103, 29 CFR 1926.62, and 29 CFR 1926.55.
1.5.2.7 Hazard Communication Program
Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by 29 CFR 1926.59.
1.5.2.8 Lead Waste Management
The Lead Waste Management Plan shall comply with applicable requirements of the JEGS, U.S. federal, GOJ national or prefectural and local hazardous waste laws and regulations and address:
a. Identification and classification of wastes associated with the work.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
c. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting, storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility location and operator and a 24-hour point of contact. Furnish two copies of local hazardous waste manifests .
d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who will be working on-site with hazardous wastes.
e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.
g. Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal. Proper containment of the waste includes using acceptable waste containers (e.g., 55-gallon drums) as well as proper marking/labeling of the containers. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily.
h. Include any process that may alter or treat waste rendering a hazardous waste non hazardous.
i. Unit cost for hazardous waste disposal according to this plan.
j. Identification of location(s) where material will be stored prior to disposal.
k. Transportation
l. Identification and certification for EPA, GOJ, or local prefecture approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility for lead disposal.
1.5.2.9 Environmental, Safety and Health Compliance
In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification, comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations in the JEGS, and all applicable U.S. federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations regarding lead. Comply with the applicable requirements of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Submit matters regarding interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution before starting work. Where specification requirements and the referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply. The following laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations regarding removing, handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of lead-contaminated materials apply:
a. JEGS
b. Waste Disposal and Public Cleaning Law - licensing and certifiation in accordance with Japanese law
1.5.3 Pre-Construction Conference
Along with the IH/PQP, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss in detail the Lead Waste Management Plan and the Lead Work Plan, including
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
procedures and precautions for the work.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Respirators
Furnish appropriate respirators approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human Services, for use in atmospheres containing lead dust, fume and mist. Respirators shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62 and any other GOJ and local prefectureal requirements on respirators.
1.6.2 Special Protective Clothing
Furnish personnel who will be exposed to lead-contaminated dust with proper disposable protective whole body clothing, head covering, gloves, eye, and foot coverings as required by 29 CFR 1926.62. Furnish proper disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Reduce the level of protection only after obtaining approval from the IH/PQP.
1.6.3 Rental Equipment Notification
If rental equipment is to be used during PWL or MCL handling and disposal, notify the rental agency in writing concerning the intended use of the equipment.
1.6.4 Vacuum Filters
UL 586 labeled HEPA filters.
1.6.5 Equipment for Government Personnel
Furnish the Contracting Officer with two complete sets of personal protective equipment (PPE) daily, as required herein, for entry into and inspection of the lead removal work within the lead controlled area. Personal protective equipment shall include disposable whole body covering, including appropriate foot, head, eye, and hand protection. PPE shall remain the property of the Contractor. The Government will provide respiratory protection for the Contracting Officer.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Protection of Existing Work to Remain
Perform work without damage or contamination of adjacent areas. Where existing work is damaged or contaminated, restore work to its original condition or better as determined by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
3.1.1.1 Notification
a. Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of any lead work.
b. Occupant Notification
Submit occupant written acknowledgment of the delivery of lead hazard information pamphlet (EPA 747-K-99-001 "Protect Your Family From Lead in Your Home") prior to commencing the renovation work for each affected unit using language provided in 40 CFR 745 Subpart E.
3.1.1.2 Lead Control Area
a. Physical Boundary - Provide physical boundaries around the lead control area by roping off the area designated in the work plan or providing curtains, portable partitions or other enclosures to ensure that lead will not escape outside of the lead control area.
b. Warning Signs - Provide bilingual warning signs in English and Japanese at approaches to lead control areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary precautions before entering the area. Signs shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62 and the JEGS.
3.1.1.3 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems
Shut down, lock out, and isolate HVAC systems that supply, exhaust, or pass through the lead control areas. Seal intake and exhaust vents in the lead control area with 0.15 mm plastic sheet and tape. Seal seams in HVAC components that pass through the lead control area.
3.1.1.4 Decontamination Shower Facility
Provide clean and contaminated change rooms and shower facilities in accordance with this specification and 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.1.1.5 Eye Wash Station
Where eyes may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes shall be provided within the work area.
3.1.1.6 Mechanical Ventilation System
a. To the extent feasible, use local exhaust ventilation or other collection systems, approved by the IH/PQP. Local exhaust ventilation systems shall be evaluated and maintained in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Vent local exhaust outside the building and away from building ventilation intakes or ensure system is connected to HEPA filters.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
c. Use locally exhausted, power actuated tools or manual hand tools.
3.1.1.7 Personnel Protection
Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as specified herein. Eating, smoking, or drinking or application of cosmetics is not permitted in the lead control area. No one will be permitted in the lead control area unless they have been appropriately trained and provided with protective equipment.
3.2 ERECTION
3.2.1 Lead Control Area Requirements
Establish a lead control area by completely establishing barriers and physical boundaries around the area or structure where PWL or MCL removal operations will be performed.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Lead Work
Perform lead work in accordance with approved Lead Work Plan. Use procedures and equipment required to limit occupational exposure and environmental contamination with lead when the work is performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 , and as specified herein. Dispose of all LBP, PWL or MCL and associated waste in compliance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and local requirements.
3.3.2 Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead Removal
Manual or power sanding or grinding of lead surfaces or materials is not permitted unless tools are equipped with HEPA attachments or wet methods. The dry sanding or grinding of surfaces that contain lead is prohibited. Provide methodology for removing lead in the Lead Compliance Plan. Select lead removal processes to minimize contamination of work areas outside the control area with lead-contaminated dust or other lead-contaminated debris or waste and to ensure that unprotected personnel are not exposed to hazardous concentrations of lead. Describe this removal process in the Lead Work Plan.
3.3.2.1 Lead Based Paint, Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead - Indoor Removal
Perform mechanical removal in the lead control areas using enclosures, barriers or containments . Collect residue for disposal in accordance with the JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations, and local requirements.
3.3.2.2 Lead Based Paint, Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead - Outdoor Removal
Perform outdoor removal as indicated in accordance with JEGS federal, State, and local regulations and in the Lead Work Plan. The worksite preparation (barriers or containments) shall be job dependent and presented in the Lead Work Plan.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3.3 Personnel Exiting Procedures
Whenever personnel exit the lead-controlled area, they shall perform the following procedures and shall not leave the work place wearing any clothing or equipment worn in the control area:
a. Vacuum all clothing before entering the contaminated change room.
b. Remove protective clothing in the contaminated change room, and place them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.
c. Wash hands and face at the site, don appropriate disposable or uncontaminated reusable clothing, move to an appropriate shower facility, shower.
d. Change to clean clothes prior to leaving the clean clothes storage area.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Air and Wipe Sampling
Conduct sampling for lead in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and as specified herein. Air and wipe sampling shall be directed or performed by the IH/PQP.
a. The IH/PQP shall be on the job site directing the air and wipe sampling and inspecting the LBP, PWL or MCL removal and/or disturbance work to ensure that the requirements of the contract have been satisfied during the entire LBP, PWL or MCL operation.
b. Collect personal air samples on employees who are anticipated to have the greatest risk of exposure as determined by the IH/PQP. In addition, collect air samples on at least twenty-five percent of the work crew or a minimum of two employees, whichever is greater, during each work shift.
c. Submit results of air samples, signed by the IH/PQP, within 72 hours after the air samples are taken.
d. Conduct area air sampling daily, on each shift in which lead-based paint removal/disturbance operations are performed, in areas immediately adjacent to the lead control area. Sufficient area monitoring shall be conducted to ensure unprotected personnel are not exposed at or above 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air. If 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air is reached or exceeded, stop work, correct the conditions(s) causing the increased levels. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Determine if condition(s) require any further change in work methods. Removal work shall resume only after the IH/PQP and the Contracting Officer give approval.
3.4.1.2 Sampling After Removal
After the visual inspection, collect wipe samples according to the HUD protocol contained in HUD 6780 to determine the lead content of settled dust in micrograms per square meter of surface area .
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL
3.5.1 Cleanup
Maintain surfaces of the lead control area free of accumulations of dust and debris. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed over the work area. Do not dry sweep or use pressurized air to clean up the area. At the end of each shift and when the lead operation has been completed, clean the controlled area of visible contamination by vacuuming with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner, wet mopping the area and wet wiping the area as indicated by the Lead Work Plan. Reclean areas showing dust or debris. After visible dust and debris is removed, wet wipe and HEPA vacuum all surfaces in the controlled area. If adjacent areas become contaminated at any time during the work, clean, visually inspect, and then wipe sample all contaminated areas. The IH/PQP shall then certify in writing that the area has been cleaned of lead contamination before clearance testing.
3.5.1.1 Clearance Certification
The IH/PQP shall certify in writing that air samples collected outside the lead control area during paint removal operations are less than 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air; the respiratory protection used for the employees was adequate; the work procedures were performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62; and that there were no visible accumulations of material and dust containing lead left in the work site. Do not remove the lead control area or roped off boundary and warning signs prior to the Contracting Officer's acknowledgement of receipt of the IH/PQP certification.
The third party consultant shall certify surface wipe sample results collected inside and outside the work area are less than 200 micrograms per 0.1 square meter on floors or horizontal surfaces.
Clear the lead control area in industrial facilities of all visible dust and debris.
3.5.2 Disposal
a. All material, whether hazardous or non-hazardous shall be disposed of off-base, in accordance with JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations and local municipal Government ordinances. Ensure all waste is properly characterized. The result of each waste characterization (TCLP for RCRA materials) will dictate disposal requirements.
b. Contractor is responsible for segregation of waste. Collect lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and lead-contaminated clothing that may produce airborne concentrations of lead particles. Label the containers in accordance with JEGS, 29 CFR 1926.62 ,40 CFR 261, and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations .
c. Dispose of lead-contaminated material classified as hazardous waste at a locally approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility off Government property.
d. Store waste materials in U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178) approved 208 liter drums. Properly label each drum to identify the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
type of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date the drum was filled. For hazardous waste, the collection drum requires marking/labeling in accordance with 40 CFR 262 during the accumulation/collection timeframe. The Contracting Officer or an authorized representative will assign an area for interim storage of waste-containing drums. Do not store hazardous waste drums in interim storage longer than 90 calendar days from the date affixed to each drum.
e. Handle, store, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated waste in accordance with JEGS, 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply with land disposal restriction notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268, JEGS and all applicable Federal, GOJ national or prefectural laws and regulations and local municipal Government ordinances.
3.5.2.1 Disposal Documentation
Submit Hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility (TSD) to demonstrate the hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility (TSD) is approved for lead disposal by the JEGS GOJ, Federal, Prefectural and local regulatory agencies. Submit one copy of the completed hazardous waste manifest, signed and dated by the initial transporter in accordance with 40 CFR 262. Contractor shall provide a certificate that the waste was accepted by the disposal facility. Provide turn-in documents or weight tickets for non-hazardous waste disposal.
3.5.2.2 Payment for Hazardous Waste
Payment for disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste will not be made until a signed copy of the manifest from the treatment or disposal facility certifying the amount of lead-containing materials or non-hazardous waste delivered is returned and a copy is furnished to the Government.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 03 30 53
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Perform all work in accordance withACI 318M.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 117 (2010; Errata 2011) Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary
ACI 301 (2016) Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 301M (2016) Metric Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 304R (2000; R 2009) Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 318 (2014; Errata 1-2 2014; Errata 3-5 2015; Errata 6 2016; Errata 7-9 2017) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-14) and Commentary (ACI 318R-14)
ACI 318M (2014; ERTA 2015) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete & Commentary
ACI 347R (2014; Errata 1 2017) Guide to Formwork for Concrete
ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A615/A615M (2016) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A1064/A1064M (2017) Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
ASTM C31/C31M (2019) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33/C33M (2018) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39/C39M (2018) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C94/C94M (2018) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C143/C143M (2015) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150/C150M (2018) Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C172/C172M (2017) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C173/C173M (2016) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
ASTM C231/C231M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C494/C494M (2017) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C595/C595M (2018) Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C618 (2019) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM C685/C685M (2017) Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing
ASTM C920 (2018) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C989/C989M (2018a) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM C1064/C1064M (2017) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C1157/C1157M (2017) Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C1602/C1602M (2018) Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM D98 (2015) Calcium Chloride
ASTM D412 (2016) Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D1752 (2018) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
COE CRD-C 572 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for Products Containing Recovered Materials
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Air-Entraining Admixture Accelerating Admixture Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture Curing Materials Expansion Joint Filler Strips, Premolded Joint Sealants - Field Molded Sealants Waterstops Batching and Mixing Equipment Conveying and Placing Concrete Formwork Mix Design Data; G Ready-Mix Concrete Curing Compound Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors
SD-07 Certificates
Cementitious Materials Pozzolan Aggregates Delivery Tickets
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Indicate specific locations of Concrete Placement, Steel Reinforcement, Accessories, Expansion Joints, and Construction Joints on installation drawings and include, but not be limited to, square meters of concrete placements, thicknesses and widths, plan dimensions, and arrangement of cast-in-place concrete section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Government retains the option to sample and test aggregates and concrete to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary to assist the Government in procurement of representative test samples. Obtain samples of aggregates at the point of batching in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M. Sample concrete in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Determine slump and air content in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M and ASTM C231/C231M, respectively, when cylinders are molded. Prepare, cure, and transport compression test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M. Test compression test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M. Take samples for strength tests not less than once each shift in which concrete is produced. Provide a minimum of five specimens from each sample; two to be tested at 28 days (90 days if pozzolan is used) for acceptance, two will be tested at 7 days for information and one held in reserve.
2.1.1 Strength
Acceptance test results are the average strengths of two specimens tested at 28 days (90 days if pozzolan is used). The strength of the concrete is considered satisfactory so long as the average of three consecutive acceptance test results equal or exceed the specified compressive strength, f'c, and no individual acceptance test result falls below f'c by more than 3.4 MPa.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.2 Construction Tolerances
Apply a Class "C" finish to all surfaces except those specified to receive a Class "D" finish. Apply a Class "D" finish to all post-construction surfaces which will be permanently concealed. Surface requirements for the classes of finish required are as specified in ACI 117.
2.1.3 Concrete Mixture Proportions
Concrete mixture proportions are the responsibility of the Contractor. Mixture proportions must include the dry weights of cementitious material(s); the nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate; the specific gravities, absorptions, and saturated surface-dry weights of fine and coarse aggregates; the quantities, types, and names of admixtures; and quantity of water per cubic meter of concrete. Provide materials included in the mixture proportions of the same type and from the same source as will be used on the project. The specified compressive strength f'c is 30 MPa at 28 days (90 days if pozzolan is used). The maximum nominal size coarse aggregate is 19 mm, in accordance with ACI 304R. The air content must be between 4.5 and 7.5 percent with a slump between 50 and 125 mm. The maximum water-cementitious material ratio is 0.45. Submit the applicable mixture proportions that will produce concrete of the quality required, ten days prior to placement of concrete.
2.2 MATERIALS
Submit manufacturer's literature from suppliers which demonstrates compliance with applicable specifications for the specified materials.
2.2.1 Cementitious Materials
Submit Manufacturer's certificates of compliance attesting that the concrete materials meet the requirements of the specifications in accordance with the Special Clause "CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE". Also, certificates for all material conforming to EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG), in accordance with 40 CFR 247. Provide cementitious materials that conform to the appropriate specifications listed:
2.2.1.1 Portland Cement
ASTM C150/C150M, Type V, low alkali.
2.2.1.2 Blended Hydraulic Cement
Provide blended cement conforming to ASTM C595/C595M and ASTM C1157/C1157M, Type IP or IS, including the optional requirement for mortar expansion and consist of a mixture of ASTM C150/C150M Type I, or Type II cement and a complementary cementing material. The slag added to the Type IS blend must be ASTM C989/C989M ground granulated blast-furnace slag. The pozzolan added to the Type IP blend must be ASTM C618 Class F, interground with the cement clinker. Provide the manufacturer's written statement that the amount of pozzolan in the finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the finished cement from lot-to-lot or within a lot. Do not change the percentage and type of mineral admixture used in the blend from that submitted for the aggregate evaluation and mixture proportioning.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.2.1.3 Pozzolan
Provide pozzolan that conforms to ASTM C618, Class F, including requirements of Tables 1A and 2A.
2.2.2 Aggregates
For fine and coarse aggregates meet the quality and grading requirements of ASTM C33/C33M. Submit certificates of compliance for aggregates showing the material(s) meets the quality and grading requirements of the specifications under which it is furnished.
2.2.3 Admixtures
Provide admixtures, when required or approved, in compliance with the appropriate specification listed. Retest chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site, for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing, at the expense of the Contractor at the request of the Contracting Officer and will be rejected if test results are not satisfactory.
2.2.3.1 Air-Entraining Admixture
Provide air-entraining admixture that meets the requirements of ASTM C260/C260M.
2.2.3.2 Accelerating Admixture
Provide calcium chloride meeting the requirements of ASTM D98. Other accelerators must meet the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type C or E.
2.2.3.3 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture
Provide water-reducing or retarding admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type A, B, or D.
2.2.4 Water
Mixing and curing water in compliance with the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M; free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali.
2.2.5 Reinforcing Steel
Provide reinforcing bars conforming to the requirements of ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed. Provide welded steel wire reinforcement conforming to the requirements of ASTM A1064/A1064M. Detail reinforcement not indicated in accordance with ACI 301M and ACI SP-66. Provide mechanical reinforcing bar connectors in accordance with ACI 301M and provide 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar.
2.2.6 Expansion Joint Filler Strips, Premolded
Expansion joint filler strips, premolded of sponge rubber conforming to ASTM D1752, Type I.
2.2.7 Joint Sealants - Field Molded Sealants
Conform to ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT for vertical joints and Type M, Grade P, Class 25, use T for horizontal joints.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Provide polyethylene tape, coated paper, metal foil, or similar type bond breaker materials. The backup material needs to be compressible, nonshrink, nonreactive with the sealant, and a nonabsorptive material such as extruded butyl or polychloroprene foam rubber. Immediately prior to installation of field-molded sealants, clean the joint of all debris and further cleaned using water, chemical solvents, or other means as recommended by the sealant manufacturer or directed.
2.2.8 Formwork
Design and engineer the formwork as well as its construction in accordance with ACI 301M Section 2 and 5 and ACI 347R. Fabricate of wood, steel, or other approved material.
2.2.9 Form Coatings
Provide form coating in accordance with ACI 301M.
2.2.10 Curing Materials
Provide curing materials in accordance with ACI 301M, Section 5.
2.3 READY-MIX CONCRETE
Provide ready-mix concrete with mix design data conforming to ACI 301M Part 2. Submit delivery tickets in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M for each ready-mix concrete delivery, include the following additional information: .
a. Type and brand cement
b. Cement content in 43 kilogram bags per cubic meter of concrete
c. Maximum size of aggregate
d. Amount and brand name of admixture
e. Total water content expressed by water cementitious material ratio
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Waterstops
2.4.1.1 PVC Waterstop
Polyvinylchloride waterstops conforming to COE CRD-C 572.
2.4.1.2 Hydrophilic Waterstop
Swellable strip type compound of polymer modified chloroprene rubber that swells upon contact with water conforming to ASTM D412 as follows: Tensile strength 2.9 MPa minimum; ultimate elongation 600 percent minimum. Minimum hardness of 50 on the type A durometer and the volumetric expansion ratio in distilled water at 20 degrees C; 3 to 1 minimum.
2.4.2 Curing Compound
Provide curing compound conforming to ASTM C309.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Prepare construction joints to expose coarse aggregate. The surface must be clean, damp, and free of laitance. Construct ramps and walkways, as necessary, to allow safe and expeditious access for concrete and workmen. Remove snow, ice, standing or flowing water, loose particles, debris, and foreign matter. Satisfactorily compact earth foundations. Make spare vibrators available. Placement cannot begin until the entire preparation has been accepted by the Government.
3.1.1 Embedded Items
Secure reinforcement in place after joints, anchors, and other embedded items have been positioned. Arrange internal ties so that when the forms are removed the metal part of the tie is not less than 50 mm from concrete surfaces permanently exposed to view or exposed to water on the finished structures. Prepare embedded items so they are be free of oil and other foreign matters such as loose coatings or rust, paint, and scale. The embedding of wood in concrete is permitted only when specifically authorized or directed. Provide all equipment needed to place, consolidate, protect, and cure the concrete at the placement site and in good operating condition.
3.1.2 Formwork Installation
Forms must be properly aligned, adequately supported, and mortar-tight. Provide smooth form surfaces, free from irregularities, dents, sags, or holes when used for permanently exposed faces. Chamfer all exposed joints and edges , unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.3 Production of Concrete
3.1.3.1 Ready-Mixed Concrete
Provide ready-mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94/C94M except as otherwise specified.
3.1.3.2 Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing
Conform to ASTM C685/C685M.
3.1.3.3 Batching and Mixing Equipment
The option of using an on-site batching and mixing facility is available. The facility must provide sufficient batching and mixing equipment capacity to prevent cold joints. Submit the method of measuring materials, batching operation, and mixer for review, and manufacturer's data for batching and mixing equipment demonstrating compliance with the applicable specifications. Provide an Onsite Plant conforming to the requirements of either ASTM C94/C94M or ASTM C685/C685M.
3.1.4 Waterstops
Install and splice waterstops as directed by the manufacturer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.2 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE
Convey and place concrete in accordance with ACI 301M, Section 5.
3.2.1 Cold-Weather Requirements
Place concrete in cold weather in accordance with ACI 306R
3.2.2 Hot-Weather Requirements
Place concrete in hot weather in accordance with ACI 305R
3.3 FINISHING
3.3.1 Temperature Requirement
Do not finish or repair concrete when either the concrete or the ambient temperature is below 10 degrees C.
3.3.2 Finishing Formed Surfaces
Remove all fins and loose materials , and surface defects including filling of tie holes. Repair all honeycomb areas and other defects. Remove all unsound concrete from areas to be repaired. Ream or chip surface defects greater than 13 mm in diameter and holes left by removal of tie rods in all surfaces not to receive additional concrete and fill with dry-pack mortar. Brush-coat the prepared area with an approved epoxy resin or latex bonding compound or with a neat cement grout after dampening and filling with mortar or concrete. Use a blend of portland cement and white cement in mortar or concrete for repairs to all surfaces permanently exposed to view shall be so that the final color when cured is the same as adjacent concrete.
3.3.3 Finishing Unformed Surfaces
Finish unformed surfaces in accordance with ACI 301M , Section 5.
3.3.3.1 Expansion Joints
Make expansion joints in accordance with the details shown or as otherwise specified. Provide 13 mm thick transverse expansion joints where new work abuts an existing concrete. Provide expansion joints at a maximum spacing of 10 m on center in slabs, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION
Cure and protect in accordance with ACI 301M, Section 5.
3.5 FORM WORK
Provide form work in accordance with ACI 301M, Section 2 and Section 5.
3.5.1 Removal of Forms
Remove forms in accordance with ACI 301M, Section 2.
3.6 STEEL REINFORCING
Reinforcement must be free from loose, flaky rust and scale, and free from
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
oil, grease, or other coating which might destroy or reduce the reinforcement's bond with the concrete.
3.6.1 Fabrication
Shop fabricate steel reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI SP-66. Provide shop details and bending in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
3.6.2 Splicing
Perform splices in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
3.6.3 Supports
Secure reinforcement in place by the use of metal or concrete supports, spacers, or ties.
3.7 EMBEDDED ITEMS
Before placing concrete, take care to determine that all embedded items are firmly and securely fastened in place. Provide embedded items free of oil and other foreign matter, such as loose coatings of rust, paint and scale. Embedding of wood in concrete is permitted only when specifically authorized or directed.
3.8 TESTING AND INSPECTING
Report the results of all tests and inspections conducted at the project site informally at the end of each shift. Submit written reports weekly. Deliver within three days after the end of each weekly reporting period. See Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL.
3.8.1 Field Testing Technicians
The individuals who sample and test concrete must have demonstrated a knowledge and ability to perform the necessary test procedures equivalent to the ACI minimum guidelines for certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade I.
3.8.2 Preparations for Placing
Inspect foundation or construction joints, forms, and embedded items in sufficient time prior to each concrete placement to certify that it is ready to receive concrete.
3.8.3 Sampling and Testing
a. Obtain samples and test concrete for quality control during placement. Sample fresh concrete for testing in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Make six test cylinders.
b. Test concrete for compressive strength at 7 and 28 days for each design mix and for every 77 cubic meters of concrete. Test two cylinders at 7 days; two cylinders at 28 days; and hold two cylinders in reserve. Conform test specimens to ASTM C31/C31M. Perform compressive strength testing conforming to ASTM C39/C39M.
c. Test slump at the site of discharge for each design mix in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M. Check slump once during each shift that
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
concrete is produced.
d. Test air content for air-entrained concrete in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M. Test concrete using lightweight or extremely porous aggregates in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. Check air content at least once during each shift that concrete is placed.
e. Determine temperature of concrete at time of placement in accordance with ASTM C1064/C1064M. Check concrete temperature at least once during each shift that concrete is placed.
3.8.4 Action Required
3.8.4.1 Placing
Do not begin placement until the availability of an adequate number of acceptable vibrators, which are in working order and have competent operators, has been verified. Discontinue placing if any lift is inadequately consolidated.
3.8.4.2 Air Content
Whenever an air content test result is outside the specification limits, adjust the dosage of the air-entrainment admixture prior to delivery of concrete to forms.
3.8.4.3 Slump
Whenever a slump test result is outside the specification limits, adjust the batch weights of water and fine aggregate prior to delivery of concrete to the forms. Make the adjustments so that the water-cementitious material ratio does not exceed that specified in the submitted concrete mixture proportion and the required concrete strength is still met.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 03 30 53 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 05 50 15
CIVIL WORKS FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B18.2.1 (2012; Errata 2013) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 (2015) Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B18.6.2 (1998; R 2010) Slotted Head Cap Screws, Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted Headless Set Screws: Inch Series
ASME B18.6.3 (2013; R 2017) Machine Screws, Tapping Screws, and Machine Drive Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.21.1 (2009; R 2016) Washers: Helical Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers (Inch Series)
ASME B18.22M (1981; R 2017) Metric Plain Washers
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A36/A36M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A48/A48M (2003; R 2012) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM A123/A123M (2017) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A307 (2014; E 2017) Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A563 (2015) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A563M (2007; R 2013) Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric)
ASTM A653/A653M (2018) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A780/A780M (2009; R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A924/A924M (2018) Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C1513 (2018) Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections
ASTM D1187/D1187M (1997; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM E488/E488M (2015) Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
ASTM F844 (2007a; R 2013) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
ASTM F1554 (2018) Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)
NAAMM MBG 532 (2009) Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)
SSPC Paint 29 (2002; E 2004) Zinc Dust Sacrificial Primer, Performance-Based
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-60005 (Basic; Notice 2) Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump And Catch Basin, Manhole
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Fabricated Metal Items; G
SD-03 Product Data
Expansion Anchors
Adhesive Anchors
Gratings
Shop Fabricated Metal Items; G
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. Form miscellaneous metalwork to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drill and punch producing clean true lines and surfaces. Provide exposed surfaces of work in place with a smooth finish, and unless otherwise approved. Where tight fits are required, mill joints. Cope or miter corner joints, well formed, and in true alignment. Accurately set work to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.
b. Perform welding continuously along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not tack weld exposed connections of work in place. Grind exposed welds smooth.
c. Qualify welders, perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures, materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 3 degrees C above the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 7 degrees C or over 35 degrees C, unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND STANDARD METAL ARTICLES
Conform to the respective specifications and other designated requirements for miscellaneous metal materials and standard metal articles. Size as specified or indicated. Where material requirements are not specified, furnish materials suitable for the intended use and subject to approval.
2.1.1 Structural Steel
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.1.2 Steel Plates
2.1.2.1 Structural
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.1.3 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
Provide bolts, nuts, and washers of the material, grade, type, class, style and finish indicated or best suited for intended use.
2.1.3.1 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
a. Bolts and Nuts - ASTM A307, Grade A, hot-dip galvanized.
b. Bolts - ASME B18.2.1.
c. Nuts - ASME B18.2.2.
d. Washers
(1) Plain Washers - ASME B18.22M, Type B.
(2) Lock Washer - ASME B18.21.1.
2.1.3.2 Foundation Anchorage
2.1.3.2.1 Anchor Rods
ASTM F1554 Gr 36, Class 1A.
2.1.3.2.2 Anchor Nuts
ASTM A563M (ASTM A563), Grade A, hex style.
2.1.3.2.3 Anchor Washers
ASTM F844.
2.1.3.2.4 Anchor Plate Washers
ASTM A36/A36M.
2.1.4 Expansion Anchors and Adhesive Anchors
Provide 13 mm diameter expansion anchors and adhesive anchors. Minimum
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
concrete embedment must be 100 mm. Design values listed must be as tested according to ASTM E488/E488M.
a. Minimum ultimate pullout value: 21.9 kN.
b. Minimum ultimate shear value: 47.3 kN.
2.1.5 Lag Screws and Bolts
ASME B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.
2.1.6 Screws
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.2, ASME B18.6.3 and ASTM C1513.
2.1.7 Cast Iron Frames and Covers
CID A-A-60005, heavy duty manhole frame and solid cover or grating, as indicated, traffic-rated.
2.1.8 Gratings
a. Gray cast iron ASTM A48/A48M, Class 40.
b. Metal bar type grating NAAMM MBG 532.
2.1.9 Submittals Requirements
This applies to SHOP FABRICATED METAL ITEMS also. Submit the following:
a. Detail drawings indicating material thickness, type, grade, and class; dimensions; and construction details. Include in the drawings catalog cuts, erection details, manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions, and templates.
b. Lists of materials, and records which identify the disposition of approved material and fabricated items in the work.
2.2 SHOP FABRICATED METAL ITEMS
Conform shop fabricated metal items to the requirements and details as specified or shown.
2.2.1 Gratings
Provide grating of the material and size shown, and fabricated in sectional panels of the width and length shown, or as appropriate, to accurately fit within the supporting recess frames. Provide openings through panels as shown or as required. Galvanize steel gratings after fabrication.
2.2.1.1 Grating
Gratings are as specified in previous paragraph GRATINGS. Band edges of gratings and openings through gratings which require the cutting of more than one bearing bar. Provide fasteners of the type recommended by the manufacturer and approved.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.2.2 Recess Frames
Fabricate recess frames of structural shapes of the type shown. Grind welded joints in frames smooth. Galvanize steel frames after fabrication. Anchor frames to supports in the manner shown and not be continuous across contraction or expansion joints.
2.2.3 Surface Finishes
2.2.3.1 Galvanizing and Zinc Repair
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be galvanized, when practicable and not indicated otherwise, after fabrication. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A653/A653M, or ASTM A924/A924M, as applicable. Regalvanize areas where zinc coatings are destroyed by cutting, welding or other causes. Regalvanize coatings 50 g or heavier with a suitable low-melting zinc base alloy similar to the recommendations of the American Hot-Dip Galvanizers Association to the thickness and quality specified for the original zinc coating. Repair coatings less than 50 g in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.
2.2.3.2 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings must be compatible materials, generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with the material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners is cause for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports provide strength and stiffness. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water. Items listed below require additional procedures.
3.2 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion anchors, when approved for concrete; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.3 FINISHES
3.3.1 Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat conforming to SSPC Paint 20 or SSPC Paint 29 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D1187/D1187M, asphalt-base emulsion.
3.3.2 Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Provide surfaces, when assembled, free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.
3.4 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES
Install the tops of cover plates and frames flush with floor.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 05 50 15 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 26 56 20
AIRFIELD AND HELIPORT LIGHTING AND VISUAL NAVIGATION AIDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A123/A123M (2017) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA C119.1 (2016) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10; TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 ) National Electrical Code
NFPA 70B (2019) Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2015; Rev L) Obstruction Marking and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Lighting
FAA AC 150/5345-7 (2013; Rev F) Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits
FAA AC 150/5345-26 (2008; Rev D) FAA Specification for L-823 Plug and Receptacle, Cable Connectors
FAA AC 150/5345-42 (2013; Rev G) Specification for Airport Light Bases, Transformer Housings, Junction Boxes and Accessories
FAA AC 150/5345-43 (2016; Rev H2019; Rev J) Specification for Obstruction Lighting Equipment
FAA AC 150/5345-44 (2007; Rev H) Specification for Runway and Taxiway Signs
FAA AC 150/5345-46 (2016; Rev E) Specification for Runway and Taxiway Light Fixtures
FAA AC 150/5345-47 (2005; Rev B) Specification for Series to Series Isolation Transformers for Airport Lighting Systems
FAA AC 150/5345-53 (2012; Rev D) Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program
FAA AC 150/5370-10 (2018; Rev H; Errata 1 2019) Standard Specifications for Construction of Airports
FAA E-2519 (1972; Rev A) Types I and II
FAA FO 6850.19 (1978) Frangible Coupling
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 486A-486B (2018) UL Standard for Safety Wire Connectors
UL 797 (2007; Reprint Mar 2017) UL Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide airfield and VTOL pad (VLP) lighting and visual navigation aids as indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Lighting and visual navigation aids; G
Composite drawings showing coordination of work of one trade with that of other trades and with structural and architectural elements of the work. Provide sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of related items, clearances, and relative locations of work in allotted spaces. Indicate where conflicts or clearance problems exist between the various trades.
SD-03 Product Data
When equipment or materials are specified to conform to the standards or publications and requirements of AASHTO, ANSI, ASTM, AEIC, ETL, IEEE, IES, NEMA, NFPA, or UL, or to an FAA, FS, or MS, include proof that the items furnished under this section conform to the specified requirements. The label or listing in UL Electrical Constructn or ETL or the manufacturer's certification or published catalog specification data statement that the items comply with applicable specifications, standards, or publications and with the manufacturer's standards will be acceptable evidence of such compliance. Provide manufacturer prepared certificates when the manufacturer's published data or drawings do not indicate conformance with other requirements of these specifications.
Taxiway edge lights; G
Guidance signs; G
Obstruction lighting; G
Light bases, each type; G
List of airfield lighting materials and equipment with the FAA AC 150/5345-53 Appendix C review date.
Isolation transformers; G
Encapsulated isolation transformers; G
Frangible couplings; G
Materials and equipment; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Visual inspection
Progress testing for series lighting circuits
Counterpoise system test and inspection
Operating test
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Distribution conductors, 600-volt class
Electrical acceptance tests
Low-voltage continuity tests
High-voltage insulation resistance tests
SD-07 Certificates
Special tools
List of special tools and test equipment required for installation, maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-built drawings
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Regulatory Requirements
In each standard referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "must" has been substituted for "shall" or "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these standards to "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean Contracting Officer.
1.4.1.1 Code Compliance
Comply with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and local codes where required.
1.4.2 Standard Products
a. Use only approved equipment listed in FAA AC 150/5345-53 with addendum for the date of delivery the exception of Air Force threshold lights and Army heliport fixture colors and intensities. Inspect wire and cable for date of manufacture. Materials must be certified and listed as "Approved Airport Lighting Equipment" downloadable from: http://www.faa.gov/arp/pdf/534553ad.pdf. Do not use wire and cable manufactured more than one year before delivery to job site.
b. Provide materials and equipment listed by FAA, UL, or ETL, when such equipment is listed or approved. Do not use askarel, tetrachlorethylene and insulating liquids containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) in equipment.
c. Material and equipment must be a standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
d. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be products of the same manufacturer unless
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
stated in this section.
1.4.3 Prevention of Corrosion
1.4.3.1 Metallic Materials
Protect metallic materials against corrosion as specified. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth or concrete. Do not use aluminum conductors.
1.4.3.2 Ferrous Metal Hardware
Ferrous metal hardware must be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M and ASTM A153/A153M.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
The Contractor must deliver, store and secure all airfield lighting materials an equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' requirements.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Items furnished under this section must be specifically suitable for the following unusual service conditions:
1.6.1 Other
Material or equipment to be installed underground; in handholes, manholes, or underground vaults; or in light bases must be suitable for submerged operation.
1.6.2 Environmental Requirements
The airfield for this project has the following requirements:
Location - Iwakuni, Japan Altitude - 3 m above mean sea level. Maximum Exterior Temperature - 37.8 degrees C. Minimum Exterior Temperature - -7.2 degrees C. Maximum Relative Humidity - 97 percent non-condensing.
1.6.3 Existing Airfield Lighting Systems
Existing airfield lighting systems must remain in operating condition and interruptions must be held to a minimum. Where interruptions are necessary, they must be scheduled as approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Prior to the scheduled time for each of the interruptions, all necessary materials and a sufficient labor force must be assembled to permit completing the work within the scheduled time interval. Under no circumstances must any of the existing airfield lighting circuits be left inoperative without making provisions for suitable temporary connections in the affected area or areas. All airfield lighting circuits covered under this contract must be replaced or modified in such a manner that they will be operational at dusk each day. The Contractor must submit to the Contracting Officer a plan for outages and maintaining lighting and lighting control.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide airfield lighting and visual navigation aids as indicated on contract drawings.
2.1.1 Design Requirements
2.2 TAXIWAY LIGHTING SYSTEMS
Include edge lights and all associated equipment, power supplies and controls, mounting devices, and interconnecting wiring to provide complete systems. If LED fixtures are used, provide fixtures that are compatible with the associated constant current regulators.
2.2.1 Taxiway Edge Lights
FAA AC 150/5345-46, Type L-861T(L) LED for elevated taxiway edge lights with LED as indicated and FAA AC 150/5345-46, Type L-852E(L) LED, Class 1 for semiflush taxiway edge lights with LED as indicated.
2.3 AIRFIELD GUIDANCE SIGN SYSTEMS
2.3.1 General
Provide guidance signs compatible with all L-828/L-829 regulators.
2.3.2 Photometric Requirements
Guidance signs must meet FAA minimum luminance requirements.
2.3.3 Taxiway Guidance Signs
FAA AC 150/5345-44, Type L-858Y for information. Provide signs of the size and with the information indicated. Sign must operate on a multistep 6.6 amp circuit.
2.4 VTOL PAD LIGHTING SYSTEMS
2.4.1 VTOL Pad Perimeter Lights
2.4.1.1 In-Pavement Lights
FAA AC 150/5345-46, Type L-852E(L) LED with aviation yellow filters. Mount fixtures on FAA Type L-868 bases.
2.5 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING AND MARKING
2.5.1 Obstruction Lights
Mark obstructions on or near the VTOL pad and/or lighted as indicated. Use obstruction marker lights emitting aviation red steady burning light. Use FAA AC 150/5345-43, Type L-810 light fixtures. Use single-unit type obstruction marker lights as indicated. Energize the obstruction lights as indicated.
Do not use LED-based obstruction lights on military facilities.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.6 LIGHT BASES
FAA AC 150/5345-42 Type L-868. Use steel bases, Class 1, Size B as indicated or as required to accommodate the fixture or device installed. Where used as pull boxes in (single or multiple) can plazas use L-867D bases. Provide base plates, cover plates, and adapter plates to accommodate various sizes of fixtures.
Furnish each base with internal and external one-hole ground lugs for attaching ground or counterpoise cables.
Furnish each base with a 1.2 m braided, ground strap with one-hole lug compression fittings. Utilize straps made for the purpose of grounding the light fixture to the base can interior grounding lug.
2.7 LAMPS AND FILTERS
Provide lamps of the size and type indicated, or as required by fixture manufacturer for each lighting fixture required. Include filters of colors as indicated and conforming to the specification for the light concerned or to the standard referenced.
2.8 ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
2.8.1 Encapsulated Isolation Transformers
FAA AC 150/5345-47, Type (G) L-830. Provide each transformer with rating as indicated. Insulation Level Primary voltage rating 5000 volts RMS, Secondary 600 V RMS. Operating Temperature range minus 55 degrees C to plus 65 degrees C. Resistant to UV exposure and ozone. Suitable for areas contaminated with oils, aircraft fuels, soil acids, alkalis, and deicing fluids. Compatible with FAA Style 2 and Style 9 connectors.
2.9 MATERIALS AND HARDWARE
2.9.1 Wire and Cable
Use copper conductors installed in conduit. Do not provide or install wire and cable manufactured more than one year before delivery to the job site.
2.9.1.1 Conductor Sizes
Conductor size conforming to American Wire Gage (AWG) or metric trade size. Use stranded conductors for sizes larger 10 square mm. Unless otherwise indicated 10 square mm and smaller may be solid or stranded.
2.9.1.2 Wire and Cable for Series Lighting Circuits
FAA AC 150/5345-7, Type L-824 for crosslinked polyethylene Type C 5000-volt cable. Use unshielded cable for series airfield and VTOL pad lighting.
2.9.1.3 Safety (Equipment) Grounding System
Safety (Equipment) Grounding System for constant voltage (parallel) circuits: minimum 16 square mm bare stranded copper, annealed or soft drawn.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.9.1.4 Cable Tags
Install cable tags for each cable or wire at duct entrances entering or leaving manholes, handholes, and at each terminal within the lighting vault, and in all base cans. Use stainless steel, bronze or copper strip cable tags, approximately 1.59 mm thick or hard plastic 3.18 mm thick suitable for immersion in salt water and impervious to petroleum products. Use sufficient material length for imprinting the legend on one line using raised letters. Permanently mark or stamped with letters not less than 6.4 mm in height as indicated. Two-color laminated plastic is acceptable. When providing plastic tags utilize white colored with markings of black color to provide contrast so that identification can be easily read. Use nylon or stainless steel ties must be of a type that will not deteriorate when exposed to water with a high saline content and to petroleum products.
2.9.1.5 Cable Connectors and Splices
FAA AC 150/5345-26, Item L-823 for connections and splices appropriate for FAA Type L-824 cable.
2.9.2 Conduit, Conduit Fittings, and Boxes
2.9.2.1 Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) or Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings
UL 6 and UL 797.
2.9.2.2 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial
Provide as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
2.9.2.3 Frangible Couplings and Adapters
FAA FO 6850.19 and FAA E-2519. Provide upper section of frangible coupling with one of the following:
a. Unthreaded for slip-fitter connections.
b. 61.1 mm 16N-1A modified thread for nut and compression ring to secure 53 mm EMT.
c. 53 mm 11-1/2-N.P.T. (tapered) with 5.6 mm nominal wall thickness to accept rigid conduit coupling.
d. Frangible Couplings for specialized applications as approved.
e. Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 797, where indicated for use with frangible couplings and adapters.
2.9.3 Electrical Tape
Provide as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
2.9.4 Ground Rods
As specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.9.5 Bolts and Hardware
2.9.5.1 Locking Type Washers
Use locking washers of the two-piece wedge-lock design to prevent damage to the fixture. Do not use split-ring, serrated or star type lock washers.
2.9.5.2 Anti-Seize Compound
Use anti-seize compounds for elevated light fixtures with stainless steel bolts but not for ceramic-metallic/fluorocarbon polymer coated bolts for in-pavement light fixtures. Use as recommended by the fixture manufacturer to provide the required clamping force except as indicated in Part 3 of this specification.
2.9.5.3 Ceramic-Metallic/Fluorocarbon Polymer Coated Bolts
Ceramic-metallic/fluorocarbon polymer coated bolts must be used for in-pavement light fixtures or may be used where recommended by the fixture manufacturer in lieu of using an anti-seize compound.
2.9.5.4 Stainless Steel Bolts for Elevated Fixtures
Use anti-seize lubricating compound.
2.9.6 Sealants for Fixtures and Wires in Drilled Holes or Saw Kerfs
FAA AC 150/5370-10, for use in asphaltic concrete (AC) or Portland cement concrete (PCC) pavement compatible with AC pavement and having a minimum elongation of 50 percent. Do not use formulations of Type P-606 which are compatible with PCC pavement only.
2.9.7 Manufacturer's Nameplates
Provide on each item of equipment a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
2.10.1 Special Tools
List of special tools and test equipment required for installation, maintenance of testing of the products supplied by the Contractor. Items to be listed include, but are not limited to, the following:
4-Jack Positioning Jig, used to install the light base to ensure correct orientation and leveling of in-pavement fixtures.
Crimping Tool
Cable Penciler
Elevated Light Level
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 General Installation Requirements
Conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, NFPA 70B, and requirements specified herein. Circuits installed underground must conform to the requirements of Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
3.1.2 Airfield Light Fixture Installation
Use 2-part locking type washers for the installation of all airfield light fixtures. Tighten bolts to washer manufacturers recommended torque based on bolt type used. Use only adjustable torque limiting tools.
Where stainless steel bolts are used for elevated fixture installation use an anti-seize lubricating compound.
Where ceramic-metallic/fluorocarbon polymer coated bolts are used for in-pavement fixture installation do not use anti-seize lubricating compounds.
3.1.3 Light Base Installation
3.1.3.1 Installation in Cored Pavement
Wipe down the sides and bottom of each light base immediately prior to installation. For bored hole installations cover the inside faces of bored hole and bottom and sides of light base with a coating of sealant that will completely fill the void between concrete and base. Use a jig or holding device when installing each light fixture to ensure positioning to the proper elevation, alignment, level control, and azimuth control. Orient the light fixture with the light beams parallel to the runway or taxiway centerline and facing in the required direction. Outermost edge of fixture must be level with the surrounding pavement. Remove surplus sealant or flexible embedding material. The holding device must remain in place until sealant has reached its initial set. Properly arrange fixture lead wires with respect to their connecting position. Block the wireway entrance into the light recess to retain the sealant material during curing.
3.1.3.2 Installation in Concrete Bed
Where light base can is partially embedded in concrete with jig or holding devices, leave device in place for minimum 24 hours. Let base can set for an additional 48 hours before remaining concrete is placed to the top of the light base.
3.1.4 Frangible Requirements
Install frangible supports, couplings, and adapters as indicated or specified. At the 300 m cross bar and beyond, mount approach lights up to 1.83 m above concrete foundation on threaded frangible couplings and 53 mm electrical metallic tubing (EMT). For mounting heights greater than 1.8 m, mount approach lights on low-impact resistant frangible towers as indicated. The elevation of approach lights must be as indicated on drawings.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.5 Elevated Light Fixtures
Elevated lights must be frangibly mounted, not to exceed 350 mm in height except where higher mounting is permitted in snow accumulation areas. For equipment exceeding 350 mm in height, frangibly mount as indicated. Use a 4-jack positioning jig to install the light base to ensure correct orientation and leveling. The individual setting the jig must fully understand reference marks that are provided by the surveyor. Check azimuth by survey before the concrete anchor is placed and again before paving. Do not place the near light base edge closer than 609.6 mm from a planned pavement joint. If conflict occurs, immediately notify the Contracting Officer Representative of the conflict.
3.1.5.1 Elevated Light Level
Level elevated light fixture using manufacturers system required for fixture type.
3.1.6 In-Pavement Airfield and VTOL Pad Lights
Remove water, debris, and other foreign substances prior to installing in-pavement light base and light. Use a 4-jack positioning jig, obtained from the L-868 base manufacturer, to install the light base to ensure correct orientation and leveling. The individual setting the jig must fully understand reference marks that are provided by the surveyor. Check azimuth by survey before the concrete anchor is placed and again before paving. Do not place the near light base edge closer than 609.6 mm from a planned pavement joint. If conflict occurs, immediately notify the Contracting Officer Representative of the conflict.
3.1.6.1 In-Pavement Light Installation
For in-pavement installations, pavement around the light base must be level with the surrounding pavement; dished or mounded pavement near the light base is not acceptable.
3.1.7 Light Fixture Installation Tolerances
IN-PAVEMENT ELEVATED ELEVATION +0 mm, -1.59 mm (fixture +6.35 mm, -0 mm (relative to finished edge on low side in snow pavement surface) areas or on high side in non-snow areas)
AZMUTH (*) +/- 1/2 degree +/- 1/2 degree (w/respect to line parallel to RW/TW centerline)
LEVEL +/- 1/2 degree +/- 1/2 degree
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
IN-PAVEMENT ELEVATED STATIONING +/- 50.8 mm +/- 50.8 mm (in line parallel to RW/TW centerline)
OFFSET +/- 6.35 mm +/- 6.35 mm (perpendicular to RW/TW centerline)
(*)For omni-directional fixtures the Azimuth does not apply.
3.1.8 Enclosures in Saw Kerfs and Drilled Holes
3.1.8.1 Holes for Light Fixtures
Bore holes in existing pavement to the dimensions indicated with a diamond-edged bit to provide a smooth, straight cut. Bottom of hole must be flat or slightly concave, except that an area at least 25 mm wide around the perimeter must be flat. Fill surfaces deeper than the prescribed depth with sealant to the level of the flat area and allow sealant to cure before further placement.
3.1.8.2 Holes for Transformer Enclosures
Drill or excavate holes through concrete pavement and remove loose material. Fill hole with concrete to depth indicated. Provide a minimum of 75 mm of concrete at bottom of hole.
3.1.9 Isolation Transformers
Conform to FAA AC 150/5345-26 for transformer lead connections. Plug transformer secondary connectors directly into a mating connector on the transformer secondary leads. During installation, cover mating surfaces of connectors until connected and clean when plugged together. At joint where connectors come together, install heat shrinkable tubing with waterproof sealant or with two half-lapped layers of tape over the entire joint. Joint must prevent entrapment of air which might subsequently loosen the joint.
3.2 CABLES
3.2.1 Cable Installation
In addition to the requirements of Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION, use kit type connectors to splice 5 kV single-conductor series lighting cables. During installation, keep mating surfaces of connectors covered until connected and clean when plugged together. At joint where connectors come together, install heat shrinkable tubing with waterproof sealant. Joint must prevent entrapment of air which might subsequently loosen the joint.
3.2.2 Low Voltage Cables
For splices in wires 10 square mm single conductor cable, use FAA AC 150/5345-26 Type L-823 connectors. Splices below grade or in wet locations must be sealed type conforming to NEMA C119.1 or must be
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductors.
Cable must be rated 600 volts, except that secondaries of isolation transformer to in-pavement lights installed in pavement saw kerf and 48 volt DC control cables may be 300 volts. Other parts of cable systems such as splices and terminations must be rated at not less than 600 volts. Splices in wires 16 square mm and smaller must be made with an insulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices in wires 10 square mm single conductor cable must be made with FAA AC 150/5345-26 Type L-823 connectors. Splices below grade or in wet locations must be sealed type conforming to NEMA C119.1 or must be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductors.
3.2.3 Airfield 5kV Series Lighting Cables
3.2.3.1 Connectors
Use kit type connectors to splice 5 kV single-conductor series lighting cables. During installation and prior to covering with earth, cover mating surfaces of connectors until connected and clean when plugged together. At joint where connectors come together, install heat shrinkable tubing with waterproof sealant with two half-lapped layers of tape over the entire joint. Joint must prevent entrapment of air which might subsequently loosen the joint.
3.2.3.2 Crimping Tool
Use only splice kit manufacturer's crimping tool on splice connectors for all primary and secondary airfield cable splices. Crimping tool must have an embossed die with gauge marks for gauge of cable being used.
3.2.3.3 Cable Penciler
Airfield cable insulation must only be removed using cabling penciler made specifically for airfield cable.
3.2.4 Cable Markers
Provide cable markers or tags for each cable at duct entrances entering or leaving manholes or handholes and at each termination within the lighting vault. Provide not less than two tags per cable in in each manhole or handhole, one near each duct entrance hole. Immediately after cable installation, permanently attached tags to cables and wires so that they cannot be accidentally detached.
3.2.5 Maximum Allowable Non-Armored Cable Pulling Tension, Using Dynamometer
Cable Tension Kg 2 - 1/C #8 solid 125 3 - 1/C #8 solid 167
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Cable Tension Kg 4 - 1/C #8 solid 250 2 - 1/C #6 stranded 191 3 - 1/C #6 stranded 286 4 - 1/C #6 stranded 382 1 - 2/C #8 stranded 139 1 - 3/C #8 stranded 180 1 - 4/C #8 stranded 266 1 - 2/C #6 stranded 207 1 - 3/C #6 stranded 311 1 - 4/C #6 stranded 400 1 - 6/C #12 stranded 143 1 - 12/C #12 stranded 286 1 - 12 pair #19 solid 105 1 - 25 pair #19 solid 246 1 - 50 pair #19 solid 482 1 - 100 pair #19 solid
3.3 COUNTERPOISE
Install counterpoise above multiple conduits/duct banks for airfield lighting cables, with the intent being to provide a complete cone of protection over the airfield lighting cables. When multiple conduits and/or duct banks for airfield cable are installed in the same trench, the number and location of counterpoise conductors above the conduits must be adequate to provide a cone of protection measured 22 1/2 degrees each side of vertical. Install one continuous length of conductor, except where distance exceeds the length usually supplied. Install the counterpoise approximately 300 mm above single duct lines that are not adjacent to pavement. Where trenches or duct lines intersect, electrically interconnect the counterpoise wires. Connect the counterpoise conductor to a ground rod at every 600 m of cable run, at lighting vault(s) (but not to vault equipment), and at feeder connection to light circuit(s). Install the counterpoise conductor in a separate duct under roads, railroads and paved areas, above the highest duct containing electrical or communications circuits.
The counterpoise must be connected to the exterior one-hole ground lug on fixture bases. Use bolted ground clamps when bases are supplied with ground lug. Bolts and fasteners must be bronze or stainless steel. Torque to manufacturer's recommendation.
3.4 SAFETY (EQUIPMENT) GROUNDING SYSTEM
The purpose of the safety ground is to protect personnel from possible contact with an energized light base that may result from a shorted power cable or isolation transformer. Install and connect a 16 square mm conductor by one of the following methods from base to a ground rod
a. Connect each fixture base to a dedicated ground rod located outside the base on the side opposite the counterpoise.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
b. Bond a group of adjacent fixture bases to a common safety ground conductor.
Connect the safety ground conductor to ground rods by exothermic welding and bolted connections. A safety ground is not required for in-pavement fixture bases where a counterpoise is connected to the exterior ground lug. In all cases connect the light fixture, whether in-pavement or elevated, to the base interior ground lug by means of a braided ground strap specified in paragraph "Light Bases".
3.5 DUCT LINES
Duct lines as required in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and as indicated. Ducts must be installed in trench for 24 hours before trench is backfilled to allow ducts to reach final ground temperature.
3.6 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
The manholes and handholes as required in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
3.6.1 Manholes and Handholes Within Paved Areas
Manholes and handholes within paved areas must have their top surface flush with grade, -0 to +6.35 mm.
3.6.2 Manholes and Handholes Within Unpaved Areas
Manholes and handholes within unpaved areas must have their top surface +/-25.4 to +50.8 mm above grade.
3.7 MARKING AND LIGHTING OF AIRWAY OBSTRUCTIONS
Mark and light seawall in accordance with FAA AC 70/7460-1 and as indicated.
3.7.1 Painting of Airway Obstructions
Conform with FAA AC 70/7460-1 and as indicated for patterns and colors to mark obstructions.
3.7.2 Obstruction Lights
Install obstruction lights on seawall with 22 mm zinc-coated rigid steel conduit.
3.8 APPLICATION
3.8.1 Exothermic Welding
Utilize only personnel who are experienced in and regularly engaged in this type of work to make these connections. Prior to any installations in the field, provide documentation that the welding kits, materials and procedures to be used for welded connections are satisfactory. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations and the following:
a. Remove all slag from welds.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
b. The light fixture base cans should be provided with internal and external one-hole ground lugs that are coated with hot dipped galvanizing, the same as the rest of the base cans. The external ground lug should be bolted to a separate ground lug that is exothermically welded to a 25 square mm stranded bare copper grounding cable. That is connected to a ground rod for Air Force or Army projects or the counterpoise for Navy projects.
3.8.2 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.8.3 Equipment for Silicone Sealant
Equipment for silicone sealant must be air-powered pump, components, and hoses as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Hoses and seals must be lined to prevent moisture penetration and withstand pumping pressures. Equipment must be free of contamination from previously used other type sealant.
3.8.4 Concrete
Concrete used in underground structures, such as manholes, handholes, pull boxes and foundations must have minimum 28-day strength of 27.56 MPa. Similar structures in areas where freeze/thaw conditions are common, must have minimum 28-day strength of 31.00 MPa. Concrete used for non-structural items, such as equipment pads, must have minimum 28-day strength of 13.78 MPa.
3.8.5 Grounding
Ground non-current carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment as specified in Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Notify the Contracting Officer five working days prior to each test. Correct all deficiencies and repeat tests. Field test reports must be written, signed and provided as each circuit or installation item is completed. Include resistance-to-ground and resistance between conductors field tests, and continuity measurements for each circuit. For each series circuit measure the input voltage and output current of the constant current regulator at each intensity. For multiple circuits measure the input and output voltage of the transformer for each intensity setting. Provide report documenting the visual inspection of the lights operation installed fixtures or units.
3.9.1 Visual Inspection
Inspection reports must be prepared and provided as each stage of installation is completed. Identify the activity by contract number, location, quantity of material placed, and compliance with requirements.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.9.2 Operating Test
Upon completion of tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits, control equipment, and lights covered by the contract are in good operating condition. Operate the switches of the effected circuits in the control tower lighting panels so that each switch position is engaged at least twice. During this process, observe lights and associated equipment to determine that each switch controls properly corresponding circuit. Provide telephone or radio communication between the operator and the observers. Repeat tests from the alternate control station, from the remote control points, and again from the local control switches on the regulators. Test each lighting circuit effected by the project by operating the lamps at maximum brightness for not less than 30 minutes. Visually examine at the beginning and at the end of this test to ensure that the correct number of lights are burning at full brightness. Conduct one day and one night operating test for the Contracting Officer.
Provide performance test reports, upon completion and testing of the installed system, in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field tests performed to provide compliance with the specified performance criteria. For each test, indicate the final position of controls.
3.9.3 Distribution Conductors, 600-Volt Class
Using an instrument which applies a voltage of approximately 500 volts providing a direct reading in resistance, performing testing to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist.
3.9.4 Counterpoise System Test and Inspection
At accessible locations, visually inspect counterpoise system to ensure continuity of counterpoise system. Test continuity of counterpoise system to the vault grounding system in handhole.
3.9.5 Progress Testing for Series Lighting Circuits
Conduct a megger test on each section of circuit or progressive combinations of sections as they are installed. Test each section or progressive combination of sections with a megohmmeter providing a voltage of approximately 1000 volts, a direct reading in resistance. Document all results. Eliminate faults found by these tests, and re-test before proceeding with the circuit installation.
3.9.6 Electrical Acceptance Tests
Perform acceptance tests for series and multiple airfield and heliport lighting circuits only on complete lighting circuits. Each series and multiple lighting circuit must receive a high voltage insulation test. Check that cable insulation resistance to ground is not less than 50 megohms per FAA-C-1391, Installation and Splicing of Underground Cable.
3.9.7 Low-Voltage Continuity Tests
Test each series circuit for electrical continuity. Eliminate faults indicated by this test and perform retest before proceeding with the high-voltage insulation resistance test.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.9.8 High-Voltage Insulation Resistance Tests
Subject each series lighting circuit to a high-voltage insulation resistance test by measurement of the insulation leakage current with a suitable high-voltage test instrument which has a steady, filtered direct current output voltage and limited current. High-voltage tester must include an accurate voltmeter and microammeter for reading voltage applied to the circuit and resultant insulation leakage current. Do not exceed voltage test values specified below.
a. Test Procedure: Disconnect both leads from regulator output terminals and support so that air gaps of at least 75 mm or as defined by FAA AC 150/5345-7 Table 1 exists between bare conductors and ground. Clean and dry cable sheaths for a distance of 25 m from ends of cables and exposed insulation at ends of cables. Connect ends of both conductors of the circuit together and to high-voltage terminals of test equipment, and test voltage applied as specified in the following tabulation between conductors and ground for a period of 5 minutes.
Test Voltage, DC
First Test on New Test on Existing Circuits Circuits
High Intensity Series 9000 5000 Lighting Circuits (5,000 volt leads, 500 and 200 watt transformers)
Medium Intensity 6000 3000 Series Lighting Circuits (5,000 volt leads, 30/45 watt transformers)
600-Volt Circuits 900 600
When additions are made to existing circuits, test only new sections in accordance with "First Test on New Circuits" in table above. To ensure reliable operation, test complete circuit at reduced voltages indicated above.
b. Leakage Current: Measure and record insulation leakage current for each circuit after a 1 minute application of the test voltage. If leakage current exceeds values specified below, sectionalize the circuit and retest, and repair or replace defective parts. Leakage current limits include allowances for the normal number of connectors and splices for each circuit as follows:
1. Three microamperes for each 300 m of cable.
2. Two microamperes for each isolation transformer.
3. If measured value of insulation leakage current exceeds calculated value, sectionalize the circuit and test as specified for each section. Repair or replace defective components until repeated tests indicate an acceptable value of leakage current for the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
entire circuit.
c. Resistance Values versus Cable Length
An alternate test procedure for circuit validation is to use a megohmeter. Use 5000V test for new circuits and 3000V test for existing circuits. If the minimum resistance values are not achieved then use the leakage current test indicated above.
Circuit Length in Meters Minimum Resistance to Ground (Megohms) <3,000 50
3,000-6,000 40
6,000 30
3.10 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
3.10.1 Demonstration
After completion of installations and the above tests, circuits, control equipment, and lights covered by the contract must be demonstrated to be in acceptable operating condition. Each switch effected by the project in the control tower lighting panels must be operated so that each switch position is engaged at least twice. During this process, lights and associated equipment must be observed to determine that each switch properly controls the corresponding circuit. Telephone or radio communication must be provided between the operator and the observer. Tests must be repeated from the alternate control station, from the remote control points, and again from the local control switches on the regulators. Each lighting circuit effected by the project must be tested by operating the lamps at maximum brightness for not less than 30 minutes. At the beginning and at the end of this test the correct number of lights must be observed to be burning at full brightness. One day and one night operating test must be conducted for the Contracting Officer.
3.10.2 As-Built Drawings
Submit as-built drawings that provide current factual information including deviations from, and amendments to the drawings and changes in the work, concealed and visible, as instructed. The as-built drawings must show installations with respect to fixed installations not associated with the systems specified herein. Cable and wire must be accurately identified as to direct-burial or in conduit and must locate the connection and routing to and away from bases, housings, and boxes.
3.11 SCHEDULES
Refer to Section 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES for construction outage plan requirements.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 26 56 20 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 31 00 00
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.
c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of construction.
d. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180 (2017) Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224 (2010) Standard Method of Test for Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C600 (2017) Installation of Ductile-Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C33/C33M (2018) Standard Specification for Concrete
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Aggregates
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D698 (2012; E 2014; E 2015) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600 kN-m/cu. m.))
ASTM D1140 (2017) Standard Test Methods for Determining the Amount of Material Finer than 75-µm (No. 200) Sieve in Soils by Washing
ASTM D1556/D1556M (2015; E 2016) Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D2487 (2017) Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D4318 (2017; E 2018) Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D6938 (2017a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 600/4-79/020 (1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes
EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste: Physical/Chemical Methods
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Satisfactory Materials
Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, or SP-SC. Satisfactory materials for grading comprise stones less
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
than 200 mm, except for fill material for pavements and structures which comprise stones less than 75 mm in any dimension.
1.3.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. Notify the Contracting Officer when encountering any contaminated materials.
1.3.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Perform testing, required for classifying materials, in accordance with ASTM D4318, ASTM C136/C136M and ASTM D1140.
1.3.4 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 19.0 mm sieve, express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 19.0 mm sieve as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse material, use the "remove and replace" procedure as described in NOTE 8 of Paragraph 7.2 in AASHTO T 180. For structures, express degree of compaction using the procedure presented in ASTM D1557/JIS A 1210.
1.3.5 Topsoil
Material suitable for topsoils is defined as: Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than 25 mm diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
1.3.6 Unstable Material
Unstable materials are too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structure.
1.3.7 Select Granular Material
1.3.7.1 General Requirements
Select granular material consist of materials classified as GW, GP, SW, or SP by ASTM D2487 where indicated. Select granular material shall be used as fill material for structures and pavements.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3.8 Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks 75 mm or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free the initial backfill material of stones larger than 75 mm in any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
1.3.9 Nonfrost Susceptible (NFS) Material
Nonfrost susceptible material are a uniformly graded washed sand with a maximum particle size of 50 mm and less than 5 percent passing the 0.075 mm size sieve, and with not more than 3 percent by weight finer than 0.02 mm grain size.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Subsurface soil boring logs are appended to the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. These data represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.
1.4.1 Classification of Excavation
No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.
1.4.2 Blasting
Blasting will not be permitted.
1.4.3 Dewatering Work Plan
Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.
1.4.4 Shoring and Sheeting Plan
Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations. Drawings shall include material sizes and types, arrangement of members, and the sequence and method of installation and removal. Calculations shall include data and references used.
The Contractor is required to hire a Professional Geotechnical Engineer to provide inspection of excavations and soil/groundwater conditions throughout construction. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be responsible for performing pre-construction and periodic site visits throughout construction to assess site conditions. The Geotechnical Engineer shall update the excavation, sheeting and dewatering plans as construction progresses to reflect changing conditions and shall submit an updated plan if necessary. A written report shall be submitted, at least monthly, informing the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the status of the plan and an accounting of the Contractor's adherence to the plan addressing any present or potential problems. The Geotechnical Engineer shall be available to meet with the Contracting Officer at any time throughout the contract duration.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Dewatering Work Plan; G
Shoring And Sheeting Plan for Retaining Wall; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Borrow Site Testing
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS
Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain a maximum of 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and a maximum of 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall pass the TCPL test. Determine TPH concentrations by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5030/8020. Perform TCLP in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at least one test from each borrow site. Do not bring material onsite until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 75 mm minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red Electric
Yellow Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials
Orange Telephone and Other Communications
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Warning Tape Color Codes
Blue Water Systems
Green Sewer Systems
White Steam Systems
Gray Compressed Air
2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.08 mm and a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa lengthwise, and 8.6 MPa crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.
2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.10 mm, and a minimum strength of 10.3 MPa lengthwise and 8.6 MPa crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 920 mm deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12 AWG.
2.4 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
Provide capillary water barrier of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below. Conform to ASTM C33/C33M for fine aggregate grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D1140, 75 micrometers sieve and conforming to the general soil material requirements specified in SATISFACTORY MATERIALS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to full depth. Spread topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified. Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter, objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, and other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance operations. Remove from the site any surplus of topsoil from excavations and gradings.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Dispose unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. Excavate material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved areas selected by the Contractor as specified.
3.2.1 Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes
Finish excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown on project civil grading (CG) drawings. Do not excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown. Backfill the excessive open ditch or gutter excavation with satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades shown. Dispose excavated material as shown or as directed, except in no case allow material be deposited a maximum 1 meter from edge of a ditch. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the work.
3.2.2 Drainage Structures
Make excavations to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as directed. Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Do not disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete is to be placed in an excavated area. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete is to be placed.
3.2.3 Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. Construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity and provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
construction to proceed.
3.2.4 Dewatering
Control groundwater flowing toward or into excavations to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. Do not permit French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches within 0.9 m of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Take control measures by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, maintain the water level continuously, at least 0.9 m below the working level. Operate dewatering system continuously until construction work below existing water levels is complete. Submit performance records weekly. Measure and record performance of dewatering system at same time each day by use of observation wells or piezometers installed in conjunction with the dewatering system.
3.2.5 Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make vertical, and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed installation manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer's printed installation manual is available. Shore trench walls more than 1.5 meters high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with equivalent means of protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in. Shore vertical trench walls more than 1.2 meters high. Excavate trench walls which are cut back to at least the angle of repose of the soil. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width below the pipe top of 600 mm plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 600 mm inside diameter, and do not exceed 900 mm plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 600 mm inside diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded, provide redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures without any additional cost to the Government.
3.2.5.1 Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Remove stones of 75 mm or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point bearing.
3.2.5.2 Removal of Unyielding Material
Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material 100 mm below the required grade and replace with suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.2.5.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without additional cost to the Government.
3.2.5.4 Excavation for Appurtenances
Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar structures of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Specify removal of unstable material. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete is to be placed.
3.2.6 Underground Utilities
The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within 600 mm of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
3.2.7 Structural Excavation
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Keep excavations free from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Remove existing undocumented fill material below structures. Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed. Refill excavations cut below indicated depth with select granular material and compact to 95 percent of JIS A 1210 maximum density. For placement of fill below foundations, the excavation shall be widened laterally, at least 200 mm for each meter of fill placed below foundation base elevations.
3.2.8 Shoring and Sheeting
Provide shoring and sheeting where required. In addition to Section 25 A and B of EM 385-1-1, include provisions in the shoring and sheeting plan that will accomplish the following:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
a. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.
b. Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation.
c. Allow for the abandonment of shoring and sheeting materials in place in critical areas as the work is completed. In these areas, backfill the excavation to within 900 mm of the finished grade and remove the remaining exposed portion of the shoring before completing the backfill.
3.3 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Obtain borrow material from the borrow areas from approved private sources. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining the right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved, and bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling from the owners. Borrow material from approved sources on Government-controlled land may be obtained without payment of royalties. Unless specifically provided, do not obtain borrow within the limits of the project site without prior written approval. Consider necessary clearing, grubbing, and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of debris thereon related operations to the borrow excavation.
3.4 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
Except as otherwise permitted, excavate borrow pits and other excavation areas providing adequate drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed. Provide neatly trimmed and drained borrow pits after the excavation is completed. Ensure that excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits, or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on natural environmental conditions.
3.5 GRADING AREAS
Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and grade stockpiles of satisfactory and wasted materials as specified. Keep stockpiles in a neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration to drainage at all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment, the ground surface at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality and fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace such material with satisfactory material from approved sources.
3.6 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be placed.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.7 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION
3.7.1 General Requirements
Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 150 mm before the fill is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density, break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 150 mm, pulverizing, and compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated or natural ground portion to a depth of 300 mm and compact it as specified for the adjacent fill.
3.7.2 Frozen Material
Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Moisten material as necessary to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used.
3.8 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Dispose unsatisfactory materials removing from excavations into designated waste disposal or spoil areas. Use satisfactory material removed from excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills, embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar purposes. Do not waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material, authorized to be wasted, in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on Government-controlled land before disposal of waste material thereon. Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to streams, or sides and bottoms of channels and for protecting against erosion. Do not dispose excavated material to obstruct the flow of any stream, endanger a partly finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure, or be detrimental to the completed work in any way.
3.9 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
3.9.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 300 mm below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 150 mm below top of subgrade.
3.9.2 Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 300 mm above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 0.9 m of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over its entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.
3.10 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Place backfill in successive horizontal layers of loose materia not more than 200 mm in depth. Compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials, to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure, except as noted in paragraphs SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction, except as noted in paragraphs SUBGRADE PREPARATION.
Prepare ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.10.1 Trench Backfill
Backfill trenches to the grade shown. Backfill the trench to 0.6 meters above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests. Leave the joints and couplings uncovered during the pressure test.
3.10.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material
Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with select granular material or initial backfill material.
3.10.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material
Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm loose thickness.
3.10.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill
Provide bedding of the type and thickness shown. Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least 300 mm above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Provide plastic piping with bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:
3.10.1.3.1 Class I
Angular, 6 to 40 mm, graded stone, including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.10.1.3.2 Class II
Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 40 mm, including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D2487.
3.10.1.3.3 Sand
Clean, coarse-grained sand classified as SW or SP by ASTM D2487 for bedding and backfill.
3.10.1.4 Final Backfill
Fill the remainder of the trench, except for special materials for roadways, railroads and airfields, with satisfactory material. Place backfill material and compact as follows:
3.10.1.4.1 Roadways, Structures, and Airfields
Place backfill up to the required elevation as specified. Do not permit water flooding or jetting methods of compaction.
3.10.1.4.2 Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas
Deposit backfill in layers of a maximum of 300 mm loose thickness, and compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent maximum density for cohesionless soils. Do not permit compaction by water flooding or jetting. Apply this requirement to all other areas not specifically designated above.
3.10.2 Backfill for Appurtenances
After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been constructed and the concrete has been allowed to cure for 3 days, place backfill in such a manner that the structure is not damaged by the shock of falling earth. Deposit the backfill material, compact it as specified for final backfill, and bring up the backfill evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress.
3.10.3 Backfill for Foundations
Place in 150 mm lifts. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted in layers not more than 100 mm in compacted thickness with power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to 7 days after completion of the walls.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.11.1 Electrical Distribution System
Provide a minimum cover of 600 mm from the finished grade to direct burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12 EMBANKMENTS
3.12.1 Earth Embankments
Construct earth embankments from satisfactory materials free of organic or frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 75 mm. Place the material in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 200 mm in depth. Spread each layer uniformly on a soil surface that has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed. After spreading, plow, disk, or otherwise break up each layer; moisten or aerate as necessary; thoroughly mix; and compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.
Compaction requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade for pavements are identical with those requirements specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.13.1 Proof Rolling
Finish proof rolling on an exposed subgrade free of surface water (wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which would promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. Proof roll the existing subgrade of the airfield pavement and structures with six passes of a 13.6 meter tons, pneumatic-tired roller. Operate the roller in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 4 to 5.5 km/hour. When proof rolling, provide one-half of the passes made with the roller in a direction perpendicular to the other passes. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Perform proof rolling in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Undercut rutting or pumping of material and replace with select material.
3.13.2 Construction
Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered in the cut section to a depth of 150 mm below finished grade for the subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section and compact as specified. After rolling, the surface of the subgrade for roadways shall not show deviations greater than 13 mm when tested with a 4 m straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the area. After rolling, do not show deviations for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the surface of the subgrade for airfields greater than 4 mm when tested with a 4 meter straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the centerline of the area. Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade more than 15 mm from the established grade and cross section.
3.13.3 Compaction
Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment. Except for paved areas and structures, compact each layer of the embankment to at least 90 percent of laboratory maximum density.
3.13.3.1 Subgrade for Structures
Compact subgrade for strutures to at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density per JIS A 1210 Modified Proctor Test. Obtain moisture content beneath foundations within the range of -2 percent to +2 percent referenced from optimum moisture content.
3.13.3.2 Subgrade for Pavements
Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. When more than one soil classification is present in the subgrade, thoroughly blend, reshape, and compact the top 200 mm of subgrade.
3.13.3.3 Subgrade for Shoulders
Compact subgrade for shoulders to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of shoulder shown.
3.13.3.4 Subgrade for Airfield Pavements
Compact top 600 mm below finished pavement or top 300 mm of subgrades, whichever is greater, to 100 percent of ASTM D1557; compact fill and backfill material to 100 percent of ASTM D1557.
3.14 FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded areas within 30 mm of the grades and elevations indicated except that the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required elevations and slopes.
3.14.1 Subgrade and Embankments
During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained. Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory condition until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Do not lay subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base, surfacing, pavement, or ballast on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.
3.14.2 Capillary Water Barrier
Place a capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs grade directly on the subgrade and compact with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor. Place in 100 mm lifts.
3.14.3 Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 1.5 m outside of each building and structure line true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.
3.15 PLACING TOPSOIL
On areas to receive topsoil, prepare the compacted subgrade soil to a 50 mm depth for bonding of topsoil with subsoil. Spread topsoil evenly to a thickness of 150 mm and grade to the elevations and slopes shown. Do not spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Obtain material required for topsoil in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from offsite areas.
3.16 TESTING
Perform testing by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facility. If the Contractor elects to establish testing facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until the Contractor's facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and approved by the Contracting Officer.
a. Determine field in-place density in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M.
b. Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance with specification requirements. Appoint a registered professional civil engineer to certify inspections and test results. These certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation.
3.16.1 Fill and Backfill Material Testing
One test per 500 cubic meters stockpiled or in-place source material. Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M and ASTM D1140. Test in accordance with ASTM D1140 for material finer than the 75 micrometers No. 200 sieve; ASTM D4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit; JIS A 1210 for moisture density relations.
3.16.2 In-Place Densities
a. One test per 900 square meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
b. One test per 250 square meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c. One test per 100 linear meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift of embankment or backfill for roads.
d. One test per lift of compacted fill or backfill, but no less than every 250 square meters of existing grade in fills for structures.
3.16.3 Check Tests on In-Place Densities
If ASTM D6938 is used, check in-place densities by ASTM D1556/D1556M as follows:
a. One check test per lift for each 10,000 square meters, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than hand-operated machines.
b. One check test per lift for each 3,000 square meters, of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c. One check test per lift for each 400 linear meters, or fraction thereof, of embankment or backfill for roads, airfields, and structures.
3.16.4 Moisture Contents
In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, perform tests as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.16.5 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density values. One representative test per 2,000 cubic meters of fill and backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density. Perform one test per lift of compacted fill or backfill, but no less than every 250 square meters of existing grade in fills for structures and slabs-on-grade.
3.16.6 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.
3.16.7 Displacement of Sewers
After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill compacted to the finished grade surface, inspect the pipe to determine whether significant displacement has occurred. Conduct this inspection in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Inspect pipe sizes larger than 900 mm, while inspecting smaller diameter pipe by shining a light or laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, replace or repair the defects as directed at no additional cost to the Government.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.16.8 Select Material Testing
One test per source material. Test select material in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M for conformance to ASTM D2487 gradation limits; ASTM D1140 for material finer than the 75 micrometers 200 sieve; JIS A 1210 for moisture density relations.
3.16.9 Porous Fill Testing
One test per source material. Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M for conformance to gradation specified in ASTM C33/C33M.
3.17 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber from Government property and delivered to a licensed/permitted facility or to a location approved by the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 31 05 19
GEOTEXTILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D4354 (2012) Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing
ASTM D4355/D4355M (2014) Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus
ASTM D4491/D4491M (2017) Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
ASTM D4533/D4533M (2015) Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
ASTM D4632/D4632M (2015a) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles
ASTM D4751 (2016) Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile
ASTM D4759 (2011; R 2018) Standard Practice for Determining the Specification Conformance of Geosynthetics
ASTM D4873/D4873M (2017) Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples
ASTM D6241 (2014) Standard Test Method for the Static Puncture Strength of Geotextiles and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50-mm Probe
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 05 19 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Thread Manufacturing Quality Control Sampling and Testing
SD-04 Samples
Quality Assurance Samples and Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Geotextile
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle geotextile in accordance with ASTM D4873/D4873M.
1.3.1 Delivery
Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 24 hours prior to delivery and unloading of geotextile rolls packaged in an opaque, waterproof, protective plastic wrapping. The plastic wrapping shall not be removed until deployment. If quality assurance samples are collected, immediately rewrap rolls with the plastic wrapping. Geotextile or plastic wrapping damaged during storage or handling shall be repaired or replaced, as directed. Label each roll with the manufacturer's name, geotextile type, roll number, roll dimensions (length, width, gross weight), and date manufactured.
1.3.2 Storage
Protect rolls of geotextile from construction equipment, chemicals, sparks and flames, temperatures in excess of 71 degrees C, or any other environmental condition that may damage the physical properties of the geotextile. To protect geotextile from becoming saturated, either elevate rolls off the ground or place them on a sacrificial sheet of plastic in an area where water will not accumulate.
1.3.3 Handling
Handle and unload geotextile rolls with load carrying straps, a fork lift with a stinger bar, or an axial bar assembly. Rolls shall not be dragged along the ground, lifted by one end, or dropped to the ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RAW MATERIALS
A minimum of 7 days prior to scheduled use, submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating that the geotextile meets the requirements of this section. For needle punched geotextiles, the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 05 19 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
manufacturer shall also certify that the geotextile has been continuously inspected using permanent on-line full-width metal detectors and does not contain any needles which could damage other geosynthetic layers. The certificate of compliance shall be attested to by a person having legal authority to bind the geotextile manufacturer.
2.1.1 Geotextile
Provide geotextile that is a nonwoven pervious sheet of polymeric material consisting of long-chain synthetic polymers composed of at least 95 percent by weight polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides. The use of woven slit film geotextiles (i.e. geotextiles made from yarns of a flat, tape-like character) will not be allowed. Add stabilizers and/or inhibitors to the base polymer, as needed, to make the filaments resistant to deterioration by ultraviolet light, oxidation, and heat exposure. Regrind material, which consists of edge trimmings and other scraps that have never reached the consumer, may be used to produce the geotextile. Post-consumer recycled material shall not be used. Geotextile shall be formed into a network such that the filaments or yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each other, including the edges. Geotextiles shall meet the requirements specified in Table 1. Where applicable, Table 1 property values represent minimum average roll values (MARV) in the weakest principal direction. Values for AOS represent maximum average roll values. TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE
PROPERTY UNITS ACCEPTABLE VALUES TEST METHOD
GRAB STRENGTH N 700 ASTM D4632/D4632M
SEAM STRENGTH N 1000 ASTM D4632/D4632M
PUNCTURE N 250 ASTM D6241
TRAPEZOID TEAR N 250 ASTM D4533/D4533M
APPARENT OPENING um 210 ASTM D4751 SIZE
PERMITTIVITY SEC -1 0.5 ASTM D4491/D4491M
ULTRAVIOLET PERCENT 50 AT 500 HRS ASTM D4355/D4355M DEGRADATION
2.1.2 Thread
A minimum of 7 days prior to scheduled use, submit proposed thread type for sewn seams along with data sheets showing the physical properties of the thread. Construct sewn seams with high-strength polyester, nylon, or other approved thread type. Thread shall have ultraviolet light stability equivalent to the geotextile and the color shall contrast with the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 05 19 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
geotextile.
2.2 MANUFACTURING QUALITY CONTROL SAMPLING AND TESTING
The Manufacturer is responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality control program to assure compliance with the requirements of the specification. A minimum of 7 days prior to scheduled use, submit manufacturer's quality control manual. Documentation describing the quality control program shall be made available upon request. Perform manufacturing quality control sampling and testing in accordance with the manufacturer's approved quality control manual. As a minimum, geotextiles shall be randomly sampled for testing in accordance with ASTM D4354, Procedure A. Acceptance of geotextile shall be in accordance with ASTM D4759. Tests not meeting the specified requirements will result in the rejection of applicable rolls.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE SAMPLES AND TESTS
3.1.1 Quality Assurance Samples
Provide assistance to the Contracting Officer in the collection of quality assurance samples for quality assurance testing; assign 7 days in the schedule to allow for testing. Collect samples upon delivery to the site at the request of the Contracting Officer. Identify samples with a waterproof marker by manufacturer's name, product identification, lot number, roll number, and machine direction. The date and a unique sample number shall also be noted on the sample. Discard the outer layer of the geotextile roll prior to sampling a roll. Samples shall then be collected by cutting the full-width of the geotextile sheet a minimum of 1 meter long in the machine direction. Rolls which are sampled shall be immediately resealed in their protective covering.
3.1.2 Quality Assurance Tests
Provide quality assurance samples to an Independent Laboratory. Samples will be tested to verify that geotextile meets the requirements specified in Table 1. Test method ASTM D4355/D4355M shall not be performed on the collected samples. Geotextile product acceptance shall be based on ASTM D4759. Tests not meeting the specified requirements will result in the rejection of applicable rolls.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Subgrade Preparation
The surface underlying the geotextile shall be smooth and free of ruts or protrusions which could damage the geotextile. Subgrade materials and compaction requirements shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.2.2 Placement
Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation of geotextile. Geotextile rolls which are damaged or contain imperfections shall be repaired or replaced as directed. The geotextile shall be laid flat and smooth so that it is in direct contact with the subgrade. The geotextile shall also be free of tensile stresses, folds,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 05 19 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and wrinkles. On slopes steeper than 10 horizontal on 1 vertical, lay the geotextile with the machine direction of the fabric parallel to the slope direction.
3.3 SEAMS
3.3.1 Overlap Seams
Continuously overlap geotextile panels a minimum of 300 mm at all longitudinal and transverse joints. Where seams must be oriented across the slope, lap the upper panel over the lower panel. If approved, sewn seams may be used instead of overlapped seams.
3.3.2 Sewn Seams
Factory and field seams shall be continuously sewn on all slopes steeper than 1 vertical on 4 horizontal. The stitch type used shall be a 401 locking chain stitch or as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide Quality Assurance seam samples to the Government at the request of the Contracting Officer. Seam strength shall meet the minimum requirements specified in Table 1. The thread at the end of each seam run shall be tied off to prevent unraveling. Skipped stitches or discontinuities shall be sewn with an extra line of stitching with a minimum of 450 mm of overlap.
3.4 PROTECTION
Protect the geotextile during installation from clogging, tears, and other damage. Damaged geotextile shall be repaired or replaced as directed. Use adequate ballast (e.g. sand bags) to prevent uplift by wind. The geotextile shall not be left uncovered for more than 14 days after installation.
3.5 REPAIRS
Repair torn or damaged geotextile. Clogged areas of geotextile shall be removed. Perform repairs by placing a patch of the same type of geotextile over the damaged area. The patch shall extend a minimum of 300 mm beyond the edge of the damaged area. Patches shall be continuously fastened using approved methods. The machine direction of the patch shall be aligned with the machine direction of the geotextile being repaired. Remove and replace geotextile rolls which cannot be repaired. Repairs shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government
3.6 PENETRATIONS
Construct engineered penetrations of the geotextile by methods recommended by the geotextile manufacturer.
3.7 COVERING
Do not cover geotextile prior to inspection and approval by the Contracting Officer. Place cover soil in a manner that prevents soil from entering the geotextile overlap zone, prevents tensile stress from being mobilized in the geotextile, and prevents wrinkles from folding over onto themselves. On side slopes, soil backfill shall be placed from the bottom of the slope upward. Cover soil shall not be dropped onto the geotextile from a height greater than 1 m. No equipment shall be operated directly on top of the geotextile without approval of the Contracting Officer. Use
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 05 19 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
equipment with ground pressures less than 50 kPa to place the first lift over the geotextile. A minimum of 300 mm of soil shall be maintained between full-scale construction equipment and the geotextile. Cover soil material type, compaction, and testing requirements are described in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Equipment placing cover soil shall not stop abruptly, make sharp turns, spin their wheels, or travel at speeds exceeding 2.2 m/s.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 05 19 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 31 11 00
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Herbicide Application Plan
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Herbicide Application Plan
Prior to commencing application of herbicide, submit a herbicide application plan with proposed sequence of treatment work including dates and times of application. Include the herbicide trade name, EPA registration number, chemical composition, formulation, application rate of active ingredients, method of application, area or volume treated, and amount applied. Include a copy of the pesticide applicator certificates.
3.1.2 Protection
3.1.2.1 Roads and Walks
Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.
3.1.2.2 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities
Provide protection in accordance with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
3.1.2.3 Utility Lines
Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor is responsible for the repair of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer in ample time to minimize interruption of the service. Refer to Section 01 57 19
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 11 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for additional utility protection.
3.2 CLEARING
Clearing consists of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Cut off flush with or below the original ground surface trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing. Trim dead branches that are 40 mm or more in diameter on trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas and trim all branches to the heights indicated or directed. Neatly cut close to the bole of the tree or main branches, limbs and branches to be trimmed. Paint, with an approved tree-wound paint, cuts more than 40 mm in diameter.
3.2.1 Tree Removal
Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and grubbing. This work includes the felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING. Dispose of trees as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.
3.2.2 Grubbing
Grubbing consists of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than 75 mm in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas. Fill depressions made by grubbing with suitable material and compact to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
Dispose of excess materials in accordance with the approved solid waste management permit and include those materials in the solid waste management report.
All wood or wood like materials, except for salable timber, remaining from clearing, prunning or grubbing such as limbs, tree tops, roots, stumps, logs, rotten wood, and other similiar materials shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of as specified. All non-saleable timber and wood or wood like materials remaining from timber harvesting such as limbs, tree tops, roots, stumps, logs, rotten wood, and other similiar materials shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed as specified.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 11 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 31 36 00
WIRE MESH GABION MATTRESSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The work under this specification includes furnishing, assembling, filling and tying open wire mesh rectangular compartmented gabions mattresses placed on a prepared surface of geotextile, as specified, and in accordance with the lines, grades, and dimensions shown or otherwise established in the field.
a. Gabion and mattresses are wire mesh containers of variable sizes, uniformly partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other similar units, and filled with stone at the project site to form flexible, permeable, monolithic structures. Gabion mattresses shall be manufactured with all components mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of the mattress lid, which is produced separately from the base. The supply to the jobsite of unassembled individual wire mesh components (panels) forming gabion mattresses will not be permitted.
b. Definitions of terms specific to this specification and to all materials furnished on the jobsite, with the exception of the rock to fill the baskets and the filter material, shall refer and be in compliance with ASTM A974 for welded wire fabric Gabion Mattresses. For ease of reference, the term "mattress" will be used in this specification in place of Revet mattress and/or Gabion mattress, where the statement is of general nature and it is not specific to the double twisted or welded wire mesh products.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A90/A90M (2013; R 2018) Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings
ASTM A313/A313M (2017) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM A428/A428M (2010; R 2014) Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles
ASTM A764 (2007; R 2017) Standard Specification for Metallic Coated Carbon Steel Wire, Coated at Size and Drawn to Size for Mechanical Springs
ASTM A856/A856M (2003; R 2014) Standard Specification for Zinc-5% Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Carbon Steel Wire
ASTM A974 (1997; R 2016) Standard Specification for Welded Wire Fabric Gabion and Gabion Mattresses (Metallic Coated or Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated)
ASTM A975 (2011; R 2016) Standard Specification for Double-Twisted Hexagonal Mesh Gabions and Revet Mattresses (Metallic-Coated Steel Wire or Metallic-Coated Steel Wire With Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coating)
ASTM B117 (2016) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM C33/C33M (2018) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D638 (2014) Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D746 (2014) Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
ASTM D792 (2013) Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
ASTM D1499 (2013) Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Type Exposures of Plastics
ASTM D2240 (2015; E 2017) Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM G152 (2013) Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
COE CRD-C 144 (1992) Standard Test Method for Resistance of Rock to Freezing and Thawing
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Rate of Aggressiveness
The determination of the rate of aggressiveness (non-aggressive, moderately, or highly aggressive) shall be made on a project-to-project basis, due to the many variables involved and the lack of criteria of general validity. It is normally recommended for the choice to be based on all the available data and on the experience of existing gabion structures in similar environments.
1.3.2 Welded Wire Fabric Gabion Mattresses
Classified according to wire coating styles as follows:
1.3.2.1 Style 3
Welded wire fabric made from wire which is coated with zinc-5 percent aluminum-mischmetal alloy (Zn-5Al-MM) before being welded into fabric. Spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners are also produced from zinc-5 percent aluminum-mischmetal alloy (Zn-5Al-MM) coated wire. Style 3 for the wire coating is normally recommended for:
1.3.2.1.1 Permanent
Gabion mattress structures, for works installed in moderately aggressive environments.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-04 Samples
Gabions or Mattresses Alternative Wire Fasteners
SD-06 Test Reports
Gabions or Mattresses Alternative Wire Fasteners
SD-07 Certificates
Stone Fill
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Samples
Furnish samples of materials used to fabricate the gabions or mattresses to the Contracting Officer 60 days prior to start of installation. Samples will be tested in accordance with specification and either ASTM A974 or ASTM A975 depending on which system is being furnished by the Contractor. The Government reserves the right to test additional samples
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
to verify the submitted test records at the Government's expense. When the first test results indicate that the fasteners do not meet the specified requirements, the additional test will be at the Contractor's expense. The fasteners will be rejected after two tests failing to meet the requirements.
1.5.2 Test Report or Documents
Copies of all test results shall be furnished to the Technical Representative of this specification, USACE District, Vicksburg, 4155 Clay St., Vicksburg, MS 39183-3435, Attn: Dale Goss (ED-GI).
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Gabion mattresses shall be delivered with all components mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of the mattress lid, which is produced separately from the base. All gabion mattresses are supplied in the collapsed form, either folded or bundled or rolled, for shipping. Bundles are banded together at the factory for ease of shipping and handling. Mattress bases and lids may be packed in separate bundles.
a. Mattress lids may be supplied either as individual units (bundled) or in roll form. Lacing wire shall be shipped in coils with a diameter of the coil approximately 0.60 m. Fasteners shall be shipped in boxes. Preformed stiffeners shall be shipped in bundles.
b. Deliver gabion mattresses to the jobsite labeled in bundles. Labels show the dimensions of the gabion mattresses included, the number of pieces and the color code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Welded Wire Fabric Gabions Mattresses
Welded wire fabric gabions mattresses shall be Style 3 manufactured with a welded wire mesh composed of a series of longitudinal and transverse steel wires arranged substantially at right angles to each other, and welded together at the points of intersection by electrical resistance welding to form fabricated sheets. Gabion mattress sizes, wire diameters, mesh opening sizes, physical properties of the PVC for coating, and tolerances shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A974 (Tables 1, 2, 3, and Sections 9). Gabion and Mattresses shall meet the following test requirements:
2.1.1.1 Metallic Coating
The coating weights shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A90/A90M or ASTM A428/A428M as applicable.
2.1.1.2 PVC for Coating
PVC adhesion test shall be PVC coating shall show no cracks or breaks after the wires are twisted in the fabrication of the mesh. The initial properties of the PVC coating on the wire and welded wire fabric shall have a demonstrated ability to conform to the following requirements:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.1.2.1 Adhesion
The PVC coating shall adhere to the wire such that the coating breaks rather than separates from the wire, in accordance with test method ASTM A974 Section 13.3;
2.1.1.2.2 Mandrel Bend
The PVC-coated wire when subjected to a single 360 bend at -18 degrees C around a mandrel ten times the diameter of the wire, shall not exhibit breaks or cracks in the PVC coating;
2.1.1.2.3 Specific Gravity
In the range from 1.20 to 1.40 dN/dm3, when tested in accordance with test method ASTM D792;
2.1.1.2.4 Tensile Strength
Not less than 15.7 MPa when tested in accordance with test method ASTM D638;
2.1.1.2.5 Modulus of Elasticity
Not less than 13.7 MPa at 100 percent strain, when tested in accordance with test method ASTM D638;
2.1.1.2.6 Hardness
Shore "A" not less than 75, when tested in accordance with test method ASTM D2240;
2.1.1.2.7 Brittleness Temperature
Not higher than -9 degrees C, or lower temperature when specified by the purchaser, when tested in accordance with test method ASTM D746.
2.1.1.2.8 Resistance to Abrasion
The percentage of the weight loss shall be less than 12 percent;
2.1.1.2.9 Salt Spray Exposure and Ultra Violet Light Exposure
The PVC shall show no effect after 3,000 h of salt spray exposure in accordance with ASTM B117. The PVC shall show no effect of exposure to ultra violet light with test exposure of 3,000 h, using apparatus Spectral Irradiance of Open Flame Carbon Arc with Daylight Filters and 63 degrees C, when tested in accordance with practice ASTM D1499 and ASTM G152;
2.1.1.2.10 Evaluation of Coating After Salt Spray and Ultraviolet Exposure Test
After the salt spray test and exposure to ultraviolet light, the PVC coating shall not show cracks nor noticeable change of color, or blisters or splits. In addition, the specific gravity, tensile strength, hardness and resistance to abrasion shall not change more than 6 percent, 25 percent, and 10 percent respectively, from their initial values.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.1.3 Wire Tensile Strength
The tensile strength of the wire used for the welded wire fabric, spiral binders, lacing wire and stiffeners shall be soft medium in accordance with ASTM A856/A856M (Style 3). The cross-sectional area of the test specimen shall be based on the diameter of the metallic coated wire. All the wires used in the fabrication of gabion mattresses must use the same temper wire in accordance with given order.
2.1.1.4 Weld Shear Strength
2.1.1.4.1 Minimum Average Shear Value
The minimum average shear value in Newtons shall be 70 percent of the breaking strength of the wire or as indicated in the table as follows, whichever is greater, when tested in accordance with ASTM A974 Section 13.4. Typical minimum average shear strengths as specified are as follows:
TABLE 2 Minimum average shear strength values for the welded mesh Wire diameter Min. Av. Shear Strength Min. Shear Strength mm N N 2.20 1300 1000
2.70 2100 1600
3.05 2600 2000
The material shall be deemed to conform with the requirements for weld shear strength if the average of the test results of the first four specimens or if the average of the test results for all welds tested comply with TABLE 2.
2.1.1.4.2 Panel to Panel Joint Strength
The minimum strength of the joined panels, when tested as described in ASTM A974 Section 13.5, shall be as follows:
TABLE 3 Panel to panel joint strength for welded gabions Test Description Gabions, metallic Gabions, PVC coated ( Revet mattresses coated (kN/m) kN/m) (metallic and PVC coated) (kN/m) Connection to 20.4 17.5 10.2 selvedges Panel to panel 20.4 17.5 10.2 (using lacing wire or ring fasteners
The strength values reported in kN/m are referred to the unitary width of the specimen. The panel to panel test shall demonstrate the ability of the fastening system to achieve the required strength, and indicate the number of wire revolutions for the lacing wire used. The same number of wire revolutions shall be used in the field installation.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.2 Alternative Wire Fasteners for Gabion Mattresses
Subject to approval of the Contracting Officer, alternative fastening systems may be used in lieu of lacing wire. Alternative fasteners to lacing wire recommended for woven wire gabions and mattresses, according to ASTM A975, are steel ring fasteners for metallic coated gabions and mattresses, or stainless steel rings for PVC coated gabions and mattresses. For each shipment of wire gabions or mattresses delivered to the site, furnish the Contracting Officer, in duplicate, test reports or records that have been performed during the last year on all material contained within the shipment meets the composition, physical, and manufacturing requirements stated in this specification. Ring fasteners for woven wire gabions and mattresses shall comply with the minimum requirements indicated in paragraph Ring Fasteners below, and they shall develop a minimum panel to panel joint strength as indicated in TABLE 1. Alternative fasteners to lacing wire for welded wire gabions and mattresses, according to ASTM A974, are spiral binders. Spiral binders for welded wire gabions and mattresses shall comply with the minimum requirements indicated in paragraph Spiral Binders below. Ring fasteners may alternatively be used for welded wire gabions or mattresses, provided that they comply with the minimum specified requirements (salt spray and pull-apart resistance). Connections panel to panel for welded gabions and mattresses with ring fasteners shall develop a minimum joint strength as indicated in TABLE 3. Provide a complete description of the fastener system and a description of a properly installed fastener, including drawings or photographs if necessary. Provide test results that demonstrate that the alternative-fastening system meets the requirements of the specifications, according to the following criteria:
a. That the proposed fastener system can consistently produce a panel to panel joint strength as indicated in the TABLE 1 for double twisted wire mesh gabions and TABLE 3 for welded wire mesh gabions;
b. That the proposed fastener system does not cause damage to the protective coating on the wire;
c. That the Contractor has the proper equipment and trained employees to correctly install the fasteners;
d. That proper installation can be readily verified by visual inspection.
Samples of wire fasteners with their certified test records shall be submitted at least 60 days in advance to the Contracting Officer for approval. The Government reserves the right to test additional samples to verify the submitted test records at the Government's expense. When the first test results indicate that the fasteners do not meet the specified requirements, the additional test will be at the Contractor's expense. The fasteners will be rejected after two tests failing to meet the requirements.
2.1.2.1 Ring Fasteners
The tensile strength of the zinc-coated steel wire, zinc-5 percent aluminum coated mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire and aluminum-coated steel wire used for fasteners shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2 or Table 3. The tensile strength of stainless steel wire used for fasteners shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A313/A313M, Type 302, Table 2. Any fastener system shall give the number of fasteners required to comply with TABLE 1, in
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
accordance with ASTM A975 (Section 13.1.2) for woven wire gabions and mattresses, and TABLE 3, in accordance with ASTM A974 (Section 7.3), for welded wire gabions and mattresses. Ring fasteners shall not be installed more than 100 mm apart. Each fastener type shall be closed and the free ends of the fastener shall overlap a minimum of 25 mm. The manufacturer or supplier shall state the number of fasteners required for all vertical and horizontal connections for single and multiple basket joining. Approved ring fasteners including fasteners made of stainless steel shall be subject to the salt spray test and pull-apart resistance test and shall be documented by actual testing of panel to panel connections within the last year by validated laboratories.
2.1.2.1.1 Salt Spray Test
A set of two identical rectangular gabion panels, each with a width about 10-1/2 mesh openings along a selvedge wire, shall be joined by properly installed wire fasteners along the two selvedge wires so that each fastener confines two selvedge and two mesh wires. If the fasteners are also to be used to joint two individual empty gabion baskets, two additional selvedge wires which are each mechanically wrapped with mesh wires shall be included so that each fastener confines four selvedge and four mesh wires. The set of the jointed panels shall be subject to salt spray test, ASTM B117, for a period of not less than 48 hours. At the end of the test, the fasteners, the selvedge, or mesh wires confined by the fasteners shall show no rusty spots on any part of the surface excluding the cut ends. A properly installed fastener shall meet the following requirements:
a. Each interlocking fastener shall be in a locked and closed position.
b. Each ring fastener shall be closed, and the free ends of the fastener shall overlap a minimum of 25 mm.
2.1.2.1.2 Pull-Apart Resistance Test
A new set of the jointed panels, which are prepared by the same method as specified in the salt spray test but without being subject to the 48-hour salt spray test, shall be mounted on a loading machine with grips or clamps such that the panels are uniformly secured along the full width. The grips or clamps shall be designed to transmit only tension forces. The load will then be applied at a uniform rate of 220 N/s until failure occurs. The failure is defined as when the maximum load is reached and a drop of strength is observed with subsequent loading or the opening between any two closest selvedge wires, applicable to a fastener confining either two or four selvedge wires, becomes greater than 50 mm at any place along the panel width. The strength of the jointed panels at failure shall have a minimum as indicated in TABLE 1 or TABLE 3.
2.1.2.2 Spiral Binders
Spiral binders are defined as a length of metallic coated steel wire or metallic coated steel wire with PVC coating preformed into a spiral, used to assemble and interconnect empty gabion and/or mattress units, and to close and secure stone-filled units. Spiral binders shall be fabricated with the same wire and coating style as the wire mesh. Test requirements for spiral binders shall refer to TABLE 3 regarding Metallic Coating, PVC for coating, Tensile Strength, and Panel to Panel Joint Strength.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
.2.1.3 Testing
Test records made within one year by certified laboratories and Government agencies will be used to determine the acceptability of the fastening system. Samples of wire fasteners and samples of material for fabricating the gabions and mattresses with their certified test records shall be submitted at least 60 days in advance to the Contracting Officer for approval. The Government reserves the right to test additional samples to verify the submitted test records at the Government's expense. When the first test results indicate that the fasteners do not meet the specified requirements, the additional test will be at the Contractor's expense. The fasteners will be rejected after two tests failing to meet the requirements.
2.1.4 Stone Fill
Submit a certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official of the supplier of the stone fill and the supplier of the natural filter material (se next main paragraph below) that it meets the quality required and gradation limits specified.
2.1.4.1 General
For gabion mattresses, the ability to function properly depends upon their stability, which is partly depending upon the rocks filling them. Rock sizes should be chosen to prevent them from falling through the mesh of the gabion mattresses. The rock has also to withstand natural weathering processes during the life of the project that would cause it to breakdown to sizes smaller than the wire mesh opening dimensions. Rock to fill gabion mattresses shall be durable and of suitable quality to ensure permanence in the structure and climate in which it is to be used.
2.1.4.1.1 Delivery
Deliver rock to the work site in a manner to minimize its reduction in sizes (breakdown) during the handling of the rock, and place and secure within the assembled and interconnected gabion mattress.
2.1.4.1.2 Sources
The sources from which the Contractor proposes to obtain the material shall be selected well in advance of the time when the material will be required in the work. The inclusion of more than 5 percent by weight of dirt, sand, clay, and rock fines will not be permitted. Rock may be of a natural deposit of the required sizes, or may be crushed rock produced by any suitable method and by the use of any device that yields the required size limits chosen in TABLE 4.
2.1.4.1.3 Properties
Rocks shall be hard, angular to round, durable and of such quality that they shall not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering during the life of the structure.
2.1.4.2 Stone Quality
Stone fill, crushed stone, shall meet the quality requirements of ASTM C33/C33M, and freezing and thawing requirements of COE CRD-C 144.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.4.3 Gradation
Gradation of stone for gabions shall be performed every 1000 tons placed under this contract in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M. Sizes of rock to fill gabions and mattresses are chosen on the basis of the mesh sizes, the structure's thickness, and within the limits shown in TABLE 4. Within each range of sizes, the rock shall be large enough to prevent individual pieces from passing through the mesh openings. Each range of sizes may allow for a variation of 5 percent oversize rock by weight, or 5 percent undersize rock by weight, or both.
2.1.4.3.1 Oversize Rock
In all cases, the sizes of any oversize rock shall allow for the placement of two or more layers of rock within each mattress compartment dependent upon the height of the mattress.
2.1.4.3.2 Undersize Rock
In all cases, undersize rock shall be placed within the interior of the gabion or mattress compartment and shall not be placed on the exposed surface of the structure. There shall be a maximum limit of 5 percent undersize or 5 percent oversize rock, or both, within each gabion mattress compartment. The required rock gradation is reported in Table 4.
TABLE 4 Required rock gradation for gabion mattresses
Type of Structure Thickness/Height (mm Rock Sizes (mm)
Mattresses 300 100 - 200
2.1.5 Filter Material
Filter fabrics shall meet the provisions of Section 31 05 19 GEOTEXTILE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FOUNDATION PREPARATION
Foundation preparation shall not take place on frozen or snow-covered ground. After excavation or stripping, to the extent indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Contracting Officer, all remaining loose or otherwise unsuitable materials shall be removed. All depressions shall be carefully backfilled to grade. If pervious materials are encountered in the foundation depressions, the areas shall be backfilled with free-draining materials. Otherwise, the depressions shall be backfilled with suitable materials from adjacent required excavation, or other approved source, and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the adjacent foundation. Any debris that will impede the proper installation
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and final appearance of the gabion layer shall also be removed, and the voids carefully backfilled and compacted as specified above. Immediately prior to placing the material, the Contracting Officer shall inspect the prepared foundation surface, and no material shall be placed thereon until that area has been approved.
3.2 ASSEMBLY
3.2.1 Welded Wire and Gabion Mattresses
The gabion mattresses shall be opened and unfolded on a flat, hard surface. The units shall be rotated into position and the edges joined with fasteners for assembly. Where spiral fasteners are used, the ends shall be crimped to secure them in place. Where lacing wire is used, the wire shall be wrapped with alternating double and single loops with spacings not to exceed 150 mm. Ends shall be secured with two complete revolutions and finished with a one-half hitch. The same fastening procedures shall be used to secure interior diaphragms and end panels. When two gabions are placed side by side, the two end panels may be connected along the vertical edges with a single spiral fastener.
3.3 LACING OPERATIONS
3.3.1 Welded Wire Mesh Gabion Mattresses
Either lacing wire or spiral binders are permitted to lace welded wire mesh gabion mattresses. The empty units shall be placed on the foundation and interconnected with the adjacent unit along the top, bottom and vertical edges using spiral fasteners. Lacing wire may be used in lieu of spiral binders for the interconnection of gabion mattresses as specified above. The connection with lacing wire or spiral binders shall be based on the minimum panel to panel joint strength as specified in TABLE 3. Spiral binders shall be screwed along the connecting edges, and then each end crimped to secure the spiral in place. Each layer of gabion mattresses shall be interconnected to the underlying layer along the front, back and sides.
3.4 INSTALLATION AND FILLING
Empty gabion mattress units shall be assembled individually and placed on the approved surface to the lines and grades as shown or as directed, with the sides, ends, and diaphragms erected in such a manner to ensure the correct position of all creases and that the tops of all sides are level.
a. The initial line of basket units shall be placed on the prepared filter layer. The basket units then shall be partially filled to provide anchorage against deformation and displacement during the filling operation. The stone shall be placed in the units as specified in paragraph Stone Fill, subparagraph Gradation, part b.
b. Undue deformation and bulging of the mesh shall be corrected prior to further stone filling. Care shall be taken, when placing the stone by hand or machine, to assure that the PVC coating on gabions will not be damaged. All visible faces shall be filled with some hand placement to ensure a neat and compact appearance and that the void ratio is kept to a minimum.
c. Uniformly overfill gabion mattresses by about 25 to 50 mm to compensate for future rock settlements. Gabion mattresses can be
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
filled by any kind of earth-filling equipment, such as a backhoe, gradall, crane, etc. The maximum height from which the stones may be dropped into the baskets shall be 0.91 to 1.20 m. If PVC coated materials are used, no work shall take place unless the ambient temperature is above -7 degrees C.
3.4.1 Welded Wire Fabric Gabion Mattresses
After being assembled, the Gabion mattresses shall be placed in their proper location and securely attached to the adjacent units. For structural integrity, all adjoining empty units shall be connected by means of lacing wire or spiral binders along the edges of their contact surfaces in order to form a monolithic structure. Gabion mattresses shall be placed and securely connected while empty. The filling shall be done unit by unit; however, it is recommended that several units be pre-assembled prior to filling the units. Gabion mattress units shall be filled with hard, durable, clean stone having a gradation as indicated in paragraph Gradation. Care shall be taken to ensure that diaphragm tops are accessible for wiring.
a. On slopes, the Gabion mattress shall be laid with the 1.83 m dimension (width) longitudinal to the bank, with the exception of small ditches or when otherwise specified in project. When the installation is performed on a slope, the filling of the units shall start from the lower side of the bank. Where Gabion mattresses are to be placed on steep slopes (3H to 2V), the units shall be secured by galvanized pipes driven into the ground inside the upper end panel, at 1.83 m centers, or as specified in the project.
b. When the Gabion mattress is to be placed over a geotextile, care shall be taken to ensure that any projecting ends of wire are bent upward to avoid puncturing or tearing the cloth.
c. Lids shall be securely connected to the ends of the mattress and to the sides and diaphragms using alternate double and single loops, or steel wire ring fasteners, as indicated in paragraph FOUNDATION PREPARATION. In case that more adjacent bases are to be covered at one time, mesh rolls can be used in place of unit size lids. Gabions mattresses shall be uniformly overfilled by about 25 to 50 mm to compensate for future rock settlements.
3.5 CLOSING
Lids shall be tightly secured along all edges, ends and diaphragms in the same manner as described for assembling. Adjacent lids may be securely attached simultaneously. The panel edges shall be pulled to be connected using the appropriate closing tools where necessary. Single point leverage tools, such as crowbars, may damage the wire mesh and shall not be used. All end wires shall then be turned in.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 31 36 00 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 01 11.51
PAINT REMOVAL FROM AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 LEAD BASED PAINT
Assume all paints and coatings (including airfield striping) to be lead based paint (LBP) unless sampled and confirmed otherwise. Follow the requirements of Section 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION for work safey and disposal of lead waste.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Submit a schedule of work to the Contracting Officer. Describe the work to be accomplished; noting the location of work, distances from the ends of runways, taxiways, buildings, and other structures; and indicating dates and hours during which the work will be accomplished. Schedule the work to conform to aircraft operating schedules. The Government will try to schedule aircraft operations so as to permit the maximum amount of time for the Contractor's work. However, in the event of any emergency, intense operational demands, adverse wind conditions, and other unforseen difficulties, discontinue all work at locations in the aircraft operational area. Keep the approved schedule of work current and notify the Contracting Officer of any changes prior to beginning each day's work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Schedule of work; G
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 11.51 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Paint Removal Process Plan; G
Waste Collection, Identification and Disposal Plan; G
SD-03 Product Data
Mechanical paint removal equipment
1.5 MECHANICAL REMOVAL EQUIPMENT
Submit product data for mechanical paint removal equipment including area of coverage per pass, range of water pressures, and water tank capacity.
Mechanical removal equipment includes waterblasting, grinding or scarifying, or other approved non-chemical systems. Control the equipment used on asphalt or tar concrete to remove paint accumulations while minimizing disturbances to asphalt or tar mixtures. Control the equipment used on portland cement concretes to remove paint accumulations and prevent removal of hardened paste from the concrete. Basic hand tools and the following major types of mechanical equipment are considered acceptable for this project:
a. Waterblasting Equipment.
b. Grinding or Scarifying Equipment.
1.5.1 Waterblasting Equipment
Provide mobile waterblasting equipment capable of producing a pressurized stream of water that effectively removes paint from the pavement surface without significantly damaging the pavement. Provide equipment, tools, and machinery which are safe and and in good working order at all times. Provide equipment interlocks to prohibit high pressure water discharge when the vehicle or cleaning head is stationary (not moving forward or side to side).
1.5.2 Grinding or Scarifying Equipment
Provide equipment capable of removing surface contaminates, paint build-up, or extraneous markings from the pavement surface without leaving any residue. If a weed torch is used to remove paint, the surface must be cleaned by hydro blast afterwards to remove surface contaminates and ash.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver required materials in original manufacturer's containers labeled with appropriate EPA, OSHA, or other agency warnings, if applicable, and Safety Data Sheets. Protect materials from degrading until their use is required during execution of the work.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Environmental Requirements
Ensure pavement surface is free of snow, ice or slush. Ensure surface temperature is at least 5 degrees C and rising at the beginning of operations. Cease operation during thunder and lightning storms. Cease operation during rainfall except for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Cease waterblasting where surface water
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 11.51 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
accumulation alters the effectiveness of material removal.
1.7.2 Airfield Traffic Control
Coordinate performance of all work in the controlled zones of the airfield with the Contracting Officer and with the Flight Operations Officer or Airfield Manager. Neither equipment nor personnel can use any portion of the airfield without permission of these officers unless the runway is closed.
1.7.3 Radio Communication
No personnel or equipment will be allowed in the controlled zones of the airfield until radio contact has been made with the control tower and permission is granted by the control tower. A radio for this purpose is to be provided by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer. Maintain contact with the control tower at all times during work in vicinity of the airfield. Notify the control tower when work is completed and all personnel, equipment and materials have been removed from all aircraft operating surfaces.
1.7.4 Emergency Landing and Takeoff
Emergencies take precedence over all operations. Upon notification from the Control Tower of an emergency landing or imminent takeoff, stop all operations immediately and evacuate all personnel and equipment to an area not utilized for aircraft traffic which is at least 76 m measured perpendicular to and away from the near edge of the runway unless otherwise authorized by the Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer's Representative. Equipment and chemicals or detergents as well as excess water must be able to clear the work area within 3 minutes.
1.7.5 Airfield Lighting
When night operations are necessary, provide all necessary lighting and equipment. Direct or shade lighting to prevent interference with aircraft, the air traffic control tower, and other base operations. Provide lighting and related equipment capable of being removed from the runway within 15 minutes of notification of an emergency. Night work must be coordinated with the Flight Operations Manager or Airfield Manager and approved in advance by the Contracting Officer or authorized representative.
1.7.6 Water
Water to be used for high-pressure water equipment will be made available from Government hydrants, at no cost to the Contractor. Furnish equipment and labor for delivery of water from the hydrant to the job site. Notify the Contracting Officer on location of fire hydrants to be used and the respective times of use. The Contracting Officer will notify the Fire Department of fire hydrants to be used and designated times of use. Connections to a fire hydrant will be subject to the Contracting Officer's inspection and approval. The Contractor must provide and use a backflow prevention device for filling water tanks. The Contractor is responsible for testing, treating, and filtering the water to ensure it will not interfere with the rubber removal or damage or clog the rubber removal equipment.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 11.51 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.8 SAFETY
Comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PAINT REMOVAL
Prior to any work being completed, submit a Paint Removal Process Plan for approval by the Contracting Officer.
a. The pavement surface type is portland cement concrete and asphalt mixture.
b. Remove 85 percent of paint on portland cement and asphaltic concrete pavement. Remove all paint that is loose, flaking, chalky, or not to be re-marked or does not comply with size or pattern standards.
c. Exercise close control of water pressure and blasting time/duration to prevent damage to joints, existing markings that are not intended for removal, or the wearing surface.
d. Demonstrate the ability to remove rubber at a touchdown area of the runway selected by the Contracting Officer; at least one site per runway will be chosen. Rubber removal must not damage the pavement surface. The surface texture of the cleaned demonstration area will be compared to that of non-rubber traffic areas to determine satisfactory completion of the removal operation.
e. After approval of the Contractor's operations by the Contracting Officer, the cleaned sample area will become the standard for rubber removal and final surface texture for the remainder of work.
f. Compliance testing for the amount of rubber and paint to be removed must conform to the requirements in paragraph COMPLIANCE TESTING.
3.2 RATE OF REMOVAL
Remove paint at a minimum rate of 93 square meter per hour. Do not permit high-pressure water application to remove the existing pavement surface, joint seals or crack seals.
3.3 WATER PRESSURE
Provide water pressure impact upon the indicated pavement areas sufficient to remove the designated paint to the required degree of removal without damaging the existing pavement, joint sealant, or other airfield appurtenances. The Contractor is responsible for repairing any damage caused by the removal work.
3.4 CLEANUP AND WASTE DISPOSAL
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 11.51 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Keep the worksite clean of by-products, debris and waste from paint removal operations. Perform cleanup operations continuously. Remove all residue from the pavement. Obtain the approval of residue removal and disposal method from the Contracting Officer prior to beginning work. Submit a Waste Collection, Identification and Disposal Plan describing proposed actions regarding waste collection, control, identification, and disposal to the Contracting Officer's Representative for approval prior to the start of work. The plan will address disposal methods and requirements for hazardous and non-hazardous wastes.
3.5 COMPLIANCE TESTING
a. Compliance with the paint removal requirements must be determined by direct testing within the designated work area.
b. Use a 0.1 square meter section of transparent material inscribed with a grid of 100 equal squares as a tool for quantitative measure of the percent removal. Place the grid pattern on the pavement surface at random locations. Then count the squares which contain rubber and/or paint deposits. The number of squares containing rubber and/or paint deposits must not exceed the allowed percentage in each of the randomly selected locations.
c. Divide each work area designated for paint removal into at least four equal zones for the purpose of compliance testing. The layout of each zone must be approved by the Contracting Officer. Within each zone, a minimum of seven random locations must be evaluated. The amount of paint removed at each of the randomly selected test locations within each zone must meet the requirement described in paragraph PAINT REMOVAL. Evaluate each zone independently. A zone not meeting the required percentage must be recleaned by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
d. Deposits of paint are defined as any surface deposit that can be removed by scratching the deposit with a flat sharp object (such as a pocket knife) without damaging the pavement surface. Stains are defined as materials in the pavement surface microtexture that cannot be removed without damaging the pavement surface. Stain is generally embedded in the surface of the pavement below the horizontal plane of the surface texture. The Contractor is not responsible for stain removal.
3.6 DAMAGE REPAIR
Repair any damage to the pavement surface, joint, joint and crack seals, or other Government property caused during the performance of the work at the Contractor's expense. Submit a repair plan to include methods and material to the Contracting Officer's Representative for approval prior to performance of the repairs. Complete the repairs within the performance period of the Contract.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 11.51 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 01 19
FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C1016 (2014) Standard Test Method for Determination of Water Absorption of Sealant Backing (Joint Filler) Material
ASTM D789 (2015) Determination of Relative Viscosity and Moisture Content of Polyamide (PA)
ASTM D5893/D5893M (2016) Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
ASTM D6690 (2015) Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
COE CRD-C 525 (1989) Corps of Engineers Test Method for Evaluation of Hot-Applied Joint Sealants for Bubbling Due to Heating
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 19 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SD-04 Samples
Materials
SD-06 Test Reports
Certified Copies of the Test Reports
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Test Requirements
Test the joint sealant and backup or separating material for conformance with the referenced applicable material specification. Perform testing of the materials in an approved independent laboratory and submit certified copies of the test reports for approval 30 days prior to the use of the materials at the job site. Samples will be retained by the Government for possible future testing should the materials appear defective during or after application. Conformance with the requirements of the laboratory tests specified will not constitute final acceptance of the materials. Final acceptance will be based on the performance of the in-place materials. Submit samples of the materials (sealant, primer if required, and backup material), in sufficient quantity for testing and approval 30 days prior to the beginning of work. No material will be allowed to be used until it has been approved.
1.3.2 Trial Joint Sealant Installation
Prior to the cleaning and sealing of the joints for the entire project, prepare a test section at least 60 m long using the specified materials and approved equipment, so as to demonstrate the proposed joint preparation and sealing of all types of joints in the project. Following the completion of the test section and before any other joint is sealed, inspect the test section to determine that the materials and installation meet the requirements specified. If it is determined that the materials or installation do not meet the requirements, remove the materials, and reclean and reseal the joints at no cost to the Government. When the test section meets the requirements, it may be incorporated into the permanent work and paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for sealing items scheduled. Prepare and seal all other joints in the manner approved for sealing the test section.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect materials delivered to the job site for defects, unload, and store them with a minimum of handling to avoid damage. Provide storage facilities at the job site for maintaining materials at the temperatures and conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The ambient air temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint wall shall be a minimum of 10 degrees C and rising at the time of application of the materials. Do not apply sealant if moisture is observed in the joint.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 19 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
Materials for sealing cracks in the various paved areas indicated on the drawings shall be as follows:
Area Sealing Material
PCCP/HMA INTERFACE ASTM D6690, Type II and COE CRD-C 525
PCC/HTC JOINTS ASTM D5893/D5893M
2.2 PRIMERS
When primers are recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, use them in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer.
2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS
Provide backup material that is a compressible, nonshrinking, nonstaining, nonabsorbing material, nonreactive with the joint sealant. The material shall have a melting point at least 3 degrees C greater than the pouring temperature of the sealant being used when tested in accordance with ASTM D789. The material shall have a water absorption of not more than 5 percent of the sample weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C1016. Use backup material that is 25 plus or minus 5 percent larger in diameter than the nominal width of the crack.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTING EQUIPMENT
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work required by this section shall be approved before the work is started maintained in satisfactory condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed equipment to be used in performance of construction work including descriptive data, 30 days prior to use on the project.
3.1.1 Joint Cleaning Equipment
3.1.1.1 Tractor-Mounted Routing Tool
Provide a routing tool, used for removing old sealant from the joints, of such shape and dimensions and so mounted on the tractor that it will not damage the sides of the joints. The tool shall be designed so that it can be adjusted to remove the old material to varying depths as required. The use of V-shaped tools or rotary impact routing devices will not be permitted. Hand-operated spindle routing devices may be used to clean and enlarge random cracks.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 19 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.1.2 Concrete Saw
Provide a self-propelled power saw, with water-cooled diamond or abrasive saw blades, for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified or for refacing joints or cleaning sawed joints where sandblasting does not provide a clean joint.
3.1.1.3 Sandblasting Equipment
Include with the sandblasting equipment an air compressor, hose, and long-wearing venturi-type nozzle of proper size, shape and opening. The maximum nozzle opening should not exceed 6.4 mm. The air compressor shall be portable and capable of furnishing not less than 71 L/s and maintaining a line pressure of not less than 621 kPa at the nozzle while in use. Demonstrate compressor capability, under job conditions, before approval. The compressor shall be equipped with traps that will maintain the compressed air free of oil and water. The nozzle shall have an adjustable guide that will hold the nozzle aligned with the joint approximately 25 mm above the pavement surface. Adjust the height, angle of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to secure satisfactory results.
3.1.1.4 Hand Tools
Hand tools may be used, when approved, for removing defective sealant from a crack and repairing or cleaning the crack faces.
3.1.2 Sealing Equipment
3.1.2.1 Hot-Poured Sealing Equipment
The unit applicators used for heating and installing ASTM D6690 joint sealant materials shall be mobile and shall be equipped with a double-boiler, agitator-type kettle with an oil medium in the outer space for heat transfer; a direct-connected pressure-type extruding device with a nozzle shaped for inserting in the joint to be filled; positive temperature devices for controlling the temperature of the transfer oil and sealant; and a recording type thermometer for indicating the temperature of the sealant. The applicator unit shall be designed so that the sealant will circulate through the delivery hose and return to the inner kettle when not in use.
3.1.2.2 Cold-Applied, Single-Component Sealing Equipment
The equipment for installing ASTM D5893/D5893M single component joint sealants shall consist of an extrusion pump, air compressor, following plate, hoses, and nozzle for transferring the sealant from the storage container into the joint opening. The dimension of the nozzle shall be such that the tip of the nozzle will extend into the joint to allow sealing from the bottom of the joint to the top. Maintain the initially approved equipment in good working condition, serviced in accordance with the supplier's instructions, and unaltered in any way without obtaining prior approval. Small hand-held air-powered equipment (i.e., caulking guns) may be used for small applications.
3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS
Immediately before the installation of the sealant, thoroughly clean the joints to remove all laitance, curing compound, filler, protrusions of hardened concrete, and old sealant from the sides and upper edges of the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 19 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
joint space to be sealed.
3.2.1 Sawing
3.2.1.1 Facing of Joints
Accomplish facing of joints using a concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT. Stiffen the blade with a sufficient number of suitable dummy (used) blades or washers. Thoroughly clean, immediately following the sawing operation, the joint opening using a water jet to remove all saw cuttings and debris.
3.2.2 Sandblasting
The newly exposed concrete joint faces and the pavement surfaces extending a minimum of 13 mm from the joint edges shall be sandblasted clean. use a multiple-pass technique until the surfaces are free of dust, dirt, curing compound, filler, old sealant residue, or any foreign debris that might prevent the bonding of the sealant to the concrete. After final cleaning and immediately prior to sealing, blow out the joints with compressed air and leave them completely free of debris and water.
3.2.3 Back-Up Material
When the joint opening is of a greater depth than indicated for the sealant depth, plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth. Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation.
3.2.4 Rate of Progress of Joint Preparation
Limit the stages of joint preparation, which include sandblasting, air pressure cleaning and placing of the back-up material to only that lineal footage that can be sealed during the same day.
3.3 PREPARATION OF SEALANT
3.3.1 Hot-Poured Sealants
Do not heat sealants conforming to ASTM D6690 in excess of the safe heating temperature recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the sealant containers. Withdraw and waste sealant that has been overheated or subjected to application temperatures for over 4 hours or that has remained in the applicator at the end of the day's operation.
3.3.2 Single-Component, Cold-Applied Sealants
Inspect the ASTM D5893/D5893M sealant and containers prior to use. Reject any materials that contain water, hard caking of any separated constituents, nonreversible jell, or materials that are otherwise unsatisfactory. Settlement of constituents in a soft mass that can be readily and uniformly remixed in the field with simple tools will not be cause for rejection.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 19 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT
3.4.1 Time of Application
Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint walls and following the placement of the separating or backup material. Open joints, that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified, or when rain interrupts sealing operations shall be recleaned and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant.
3.4.2 Sealing Joints
Immediately preceding, but not more than 15 m ahead of the joint sealing operations, perform a final cleaning with compressed air. Fill the joints from the bottom up to 3 mm plus or minus 1.5 mm below the pavement surface. Remove and discard excess or spilled sealant from the pavement by approved methods. Install the sealant in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air. In no case shall gravity methods or pouring pots be used to install the sealant material. Traffic shall not be permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the Contracting Officer. When a primer is recommended by the manufacturer, apply it evenly to the joint faces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check the joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified.
3.5 INSPECTION
3.5.1 Joint Cleaning
Inspect joints during the cleaning process to correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques that damage the concrete pavement in any manner. Cleaned joints will be approved prior to installation of the separating or back-up material and joint sealant.
3.5.2 Joint Sealant Application Equipment
Inspect the application equipment to ensure conformance to temperature requirements, proper proportioning and mixing (if two-component sealant) and proper installation. Evidences of bubbling, improper installation, failure to cure or set will be cause to suspend operations until causes of the deficiencies are determined and corrected.
3.5.3 Joint Sealant
Inspect the joint sealant for proper rate of cure and set, bonding to the joint walls, cohesive separation within the sealant, reversion to liquid, entrapped air and voids. Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from the joint, wasted, and replaced as specified herein at no additional cost to the Government.
3.6 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the project, remove all unused materials from the site and leave the pavement in a clean condition.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 01 19 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 11 23
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180 (2017) Standard Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224 (2010) Standard Method of Test for Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test
AASHTO T 88 (2013) Standard Method of Test for Particle Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C117 (2017) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C127 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C128 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM C29/C29M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate
ASTM C88 (2018) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM D1556/D1556M (2015; E 2016) Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D2167 (2015) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D2487 (2017) Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D4318 (2017; E 2018) Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D5821 (2013; R 2017) Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D6938 (2017a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM E11 (2016) Standard Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves
1.2 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply.
1.2.1 Aggregate Base Course
Aggregate base course (ABC) is well graded, durable aggregate uniformly moistened and mechanically stabilized by compaction.
1.2.2 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
laboratory maximum dry density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 19.0 mm sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 19.0 mm sieve will be expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Plant, Equipment, and Tools
SD-06 Test Reports
Initial Tests; G In-Place Tests; G
1.4 EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, AND MACHINES
All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer before the work is started. Maintain all plant, equipment, and tools in satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed equipment, including descriptive data. Use equipment capable of minimizing segregation, producing the required compaction, meeting grade controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth herein.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform sampling and testing using a laboratory approved in accordance with Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. Work requiring testing will not be permitted until the testing laboratory has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish compliance with the specified requirements and perform testing at the specified frequency. The Contracting Officer may specify the time and location of the tests. Furnish copies of test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of completion of the tests.
1.5.1 Sampling
Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D75/D75M. When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5.2 Tests
1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis
Perform sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136/C136M using sieves conforming to ASTM E11. Perform particle-size analysis of the soils in conformance with AASHTO T 88.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D4318.
1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations
Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture content in accordance with paragraph DEGREE OF COMPACTION.
1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests
Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167 or ASTM D6938. For the method presented in ASTM D1556/D1556M use the base plate as shown in the drawing. For the method presented in ASTM D6938 check the calibration curves and adjust them, if necessary, using only the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication. Tests performed in accordance with ASTM D6938 result in a wet unit weight of soil and ASTM D6938 will be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. Also check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938. Make the calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges using the prepared containers of material method, as described in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D6938, on each different type of material being tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as directed. Submit calibration curves and related test results prior to using the device or equipment being calibrated.
1.5.2.5 Wear Test
Perform wear tests on ABC course material in conformance with ASTM C131/C131M.
1.5.2.6 Soundness
Perform soundness tests on GCA in accordance with ASTM C88.
1.5.2.7 Weight of Slag
Determine weight per cubic meter of slag in accordance with ASTM C29/C29M on the ABC course material.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 2 degrees C. When the temperature falls below 2 degrees C, protect all completed areas by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions to meet specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
Provide ABC consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, angular sand, or other approved material. Provide ABC that is free of lumps of clay, organic matter, and other objectionable materials or coatings. The portion retained on the 4.75 mm sieve is known as coarse aggregate; that portion passing the 4.75
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
mm sieve is known as fine aggregate. When the coarse and fine aggregate is supplied form more than one source, provide aggregate from each source that meets the specified requirements.
2.1.1 Coarse Aggregate
Provide coarse aggregates with angular particles of uniform density. Separately stockpile coarse aggregate supplied from more than one source.
a. Crushed Gravel: Provide crushed gravel that has been manufactured by crushing gravels and that meets all the requirements specified below.
b. Crushed Stone: Provide crushed stone consisting of freshly mined quarry rock, meeting all the requirements specified below.
c. Crushed Slag: Provide crushed slag that is an air-cooled blast-furnace product having an air dry unit weight of not less than 1120 kg/cubic meter as determined by ASTM C29/C29M, and meets all the requirements specified below.
2.1.1.1 Aggregate Base Course
The percentage of loss of ABC coarse aggregate must not exceed 50 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C131/C131M. Provide aggregate that contains no more than 30 percent flat and elongated particles. A flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width greater than 3. In the portion retained on each sieve specified, the crushed aggregates must contain at least 50 percent by weight of crushed pieces having two or more freshly fractured faces determined in accordance with ASTM D5821. When two fractures are contiguous, the angle between planes of the fractures must be at least 30 degrees in order to count as two fractured faces. Manufacture crushed gravel from gravel particles 50 percent of which, by weight, are retained on the maximum size sieve listed in TABLE 1.
2.1.2 Fine Aggregate
Provide fine aggregates consisting of angular particles of uniform density.
2.1.2.1 Aggregate Base Course
Provide ABC fine aggregate that consists of screenings, angular sand, crushed recycled concrete fines, or other finely divided mineral matter processed or naturally combined with the coarse aggregate.
2.1.3 Gradation Requirements
Apply the specified gradation requirements to the completed base course. Provide aggregates that are continuously well graded within the limits specified in TABLE 1. Use sieves that conform to ASTM E11.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 1. GRADATION OF AGGREGATES
Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve
Sieve Designation No. 2 No. 3 ------
50.0 mm ------37.5 mm 100 ---- 25.0 mm 60-100 100 12.5 mm 30-65 40-70 4.75 mm 20-50 20-50 2.00 mm 15-40 15-40 0.425 mm 5-25 5-25 0.075 mm 0-8 0-8
NOTE 1: Particles having diameters less than 0.02 mm must not be in excess of 3 percent by weight of the total sample tested as determined in accordance with AASHTO T 88.
NOTE 2: The values are based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity. If materials from different sources are used for the coarse and fine aggregates, test the materials in accordance with ASTM C127 and ASTM C128 to determine their specific gravities. Correct the percentages passing the various sieves as directed by the Contracting Officer if the specific gravities vary by more than 10 percent.
2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX
Apply liquid limit and plasticity index requirements to the completed course and to any component that is blended to meet the required gradation. The portion of any component or of the completed course passing the 0.425 mm sieve must be either nonplastic or have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.
2.3 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.3.1 Initial Tests
Perform one of each of the following tests, on the proposed material prior to commencing construction, to demonstrate that the proposed material meets all specified requirements when furnished. Complete this testing for each source if materials from more than one source are proposed.
a. Sieve Analysis including 0.02 mm material.
b. Liquid limit and plasticity index.
c. Moisture-density relationship.
d. Wear.
e. Soundness.
f. Weight per cubic meter of Slag.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Submit certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30 days before material is required for the work.
2.3.2 Approval of Material
Tentative approval of material will be based on initial test results.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
When the ABC is constructed in more than one layer, clean the previously constructed layer of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers or power brooms, except that hand brooms may be used in areas where power cleaning is not practicable. Provide adequate drainage during the entire period of construction to prevent water from collecting or standing on the working area.
3.2 OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES
Condition aggregate sources on private lands in accordance with local laws or authorities.
3.3 STOCKPILING MATERIAL
Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling of material. Stockpile all materials, including approved material available from excavation and grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Stockpile aggregates on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Stockpile materials obtained from different sources separately.
3.4 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE OR SUBGRADE
Clean the underlying course or subgrade of all foreign substances prior to constructing the base course(s). Do not construct base course(s) on underlying course or subgrade that is frozen. Construct the surface of the underlying course or subgrade to meet specified compaction and surface tolerances. Correct ruts or soft yielding spots in the underlying courses, areas having inadequate compaction, and deviations of the surface from the specified requirements set forth herein by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses or subgrades containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D2487, stabilize the surface prior to placement of the base course(s). Stabilize by mixing ABC into the underlying course and compacting by approved methods. Consider the stabilized material as part of the underlying course and meet all requirements of the underlying course. Do not allow traffic or other operations to disturb the finished underlying course and maintain in a satisfactory condition until the base course is placed.
3.5 GRADE CONTROL
Provide a finished and completed base course conforming to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown. Place line and grade stakes as necessary for control.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6 MIXING AND PLACING MATERIALS
Mix the coarse and fine aggregates in a stationary plant, or in a traveling plant or bucket loader on an approved paved working area. Make adjustments in mixing procedures or in equipment, as directed, to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation or degradation, to obtain the required water content, and to insure a satisfactory base course meeting all requirements of this specification. Place the mixed material on the prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of uniform thickness with an approved spreader. Place the layers so that when compacted they will be true to the grades or levels required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is placed in more than one layer, clean the previously constructed layers of loose and foreign matter by sweeping with power sweepers, power brooms, or hand brooms, as directed. Make adjustments in placing procedures or equipment as may be directed by the Contracting Officer to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to adjust the water content, and to insure an acceptable base course.
3.7 LAYER THICKNESS
Compact the completed base course to the thickness indicated. No individual layer may be thicker than 150 mm nor be thinner than 75 mm in compacted thickness. Compact the base course(s) to a total thickness that is within 13 mm of the thickness indicated. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm deficient, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting as directed. Where the measured thickness is more than 13 mm thicker than indicated, the course will be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements. The average job thickness will be the average of all thickness measurements taken for the job and must be within 6 mm of the thickness indicated. Measure the total thickness of the base course at intervals of one measurement for each 500 square meters of base course. Measure total thickness using 75 mm diameter test holes penetrating the base course.
3.8 COMPACTION
Compact each layer of the base course, as specified, with approved compaction equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction procedure to within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum water content determined from laboratory tests as specified in this Section. Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center, overlapping on successive trips at least one-half the width of the roller. Slightly vary the length of alternate trips of the roller. Adjust speed of the roller as needed so that displacement of the aggregate does not occur. Compact mixture with hand-operated power tampers in all places not accessible to the rollers. Continue compaction until each layer is compacted through the full depth to at least 100 percent of laboratory maximum density. Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as may be directed by the Contracting Officer to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a satisfactory base course. Remove any materials found to be unsatisfactory and replace with satisfactory material or rework, as directed, to meet the requirements of this specification.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.9 EDGES OF BASE COURSE
Place the base course(s) so that the completed section will be a minimum of 1500 mm wider, on all sides, than the next layer that will be placed above it. Place approved material along the outer edges of the base course in sufficient quantity to compact to the thickness of the course being constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or more layers, simultaneously roll and compact at least a 600 mm width of this shoulder material with the rolling and compacting of each layer of the base course, as directed.
3.10 FINISHING
Finish the surface of the top layer of base course after final compaction by cutting any overbuild to grade and rolling with a steel-wheeled roller. Do not add thin layers of material to the top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer of base course is 13 mm or more below grade, scarify the top layer to a depth of at least 75 mm and blend new material in and compact to bring to grade. Make adjustments to rolling and finishing procedures as directed by the Contracting Officer to minimize segregation and degradation, obtain grades, maintain moisture content, and insure an acceptable base course. Should the surface become rough, corrugated, uneven in texture, or traffic marked prior to completion, scarify the unsatisfactory portion and rework and recompact it or replace as directed.
3.11 SMOOTHNESS TEST
Construct the top layer so that the surface shows no deviations in excess of 10 mm when tested with a 3.66 meter straightedge. Take measurements in successive positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Also take measurements perpendicular to the centerline at 15 meter intervals. Correct deviations exceeding this amount by removing material and replacing with new material, or by reworking existing material and compacting it to meet these specifications.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.12.1 In-Place Tests
Perform each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed and compacted ABC. Take samples and test at the rates indicated.
a. Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one set of tests for every 250 square meters, or portion thereof, of completed area.
b. Perform sieve analysis including 0.02 mm size material on every lift of material placed and at a frequency of one sieve analysis for every 500 square meters, or portion thereof, of material placed.
c. Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency as the sieve analysis.
d. Measure the thickness of the base course at intervals providing at least one measurement for each 500 square meters of base course or part thereof. Measure the thickness using test holes, at least 75 mm in diameter through the base course.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.12.2 Approval of Material
Final approval of the materials will be based on tests for gradation, liquid limit, and plasticity index performed on samples taken from the completed and fully compacted course(s).
3.13 TRAFFIC
For airfield pavement do not allow traffic on the completed base course. For roadway pavements, completed portions of the base course may be opened to limited traffic, provided there is no marring or distorting of the surface by the traffic. Do not allow heavy equipment on the completed base course except when necessary for construction. When it is necessary for heavy equipment to travel on the completed base course, protect the area against marring or damage to the completed work.
3.14 MAINTENANCE
Maintain the base course in a satisfactory condition until the full pavement section is completed and accepted. Immediately repair any defects and repeat repairs as often as necessary to keep the area intact. Retest any base course that was not paved over prior to the onset of winter to verify that it still complies with the requirements of this specification. Rework or replace any area of base course that is damaged as necessary to comply with this specification.
3.15 DISPOSAL OF UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
Dispose of any unsuitable materials that have been removed outside the limits of Government-controlled land. No additional payments will be made for materials that have to be replaced.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 11 23 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 12 13
BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO T 102 (2009; R 2013) Standard Method of Test for Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D140/D140M (2016) Standard Practice for Sampling Asphalt Materials
ASTM D2397/D2397M (2017) Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D2995 (1999; R 2009) Determining Application Rate of Bituminous Distributors
ASTM D977 (2017) Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Certificates of compliance for asphalt materials delivered will be obtained and checked to ensure that specification requirements are met.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 13 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Quantities of applied material will be determined. Payment will be for amount of residual asphalt applied. Tack coat materials will not be diluted. Prime coat materials when emulsions are used can be diluted on site with potable water up to 1 part emulsion to 1 part water.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect the materials delivered to the site for contamination and damage. Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling.
1.5 EQUIPMENT, TOOLS AND MACHINES
1.5.1 General Requirements
Equipment, tools and machines used in the work are subject to approval. Maintain in a satisfactory working condition at all times. Calibrate equipment such as asphalt distributors, scales, batching equipment, spreaders and similar equipment within 12 months of their use. If the calibration expires during project, recalibrate the equipment before work can continue.
1.5.2 Bituminous Distributor
Provide a self propelled distributor with pneumatic tires of such size and number to prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the surface being sprayed. Calibrate the distributer in accordance with ASTM D2995. Design and equip the distributor to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified temperature, at readily determined and controlled total liquid rates from 0.14 to 4.5 L/square meter, with a pressure range of 172.4 to 517.1 kPa and with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent, and at variable widths. Include with the distributor equipment a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray bars, tachometer, pressure gauges, volume-measuring devices, adequate heaters for heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor. The distributor will be capable of circulating and agitating the bituminous material during the heating process.
1.5.3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks
Use steam, electric, or hot oil heaters for heating the bituminous material. Provide steam heaters consisting of steam coils and equipment for producing steam, so designed that the steam cannot come in contact with the bituminous material. Fix an armored thermometer to the tank with a temperature range from 4.4 to 204.4 degrees C so that the temperature of the bituminous material may be determined at all times.
1.5.4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers
Use power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning the surfaces to which the bituminous coat is to be applied.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Apply bituminous coat only when the surface to receive the bituminous coat is dry. A limited amount of moisture (approximately 0.14 liter/square meter) can be sprayed on the surface of unbound material when prime coat
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 13 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
is used to improve coverage and penetration of asphalt material. Apply bituminous coat only when the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 10 degrees C or above and when the temperature has not been below 2 degrees C for the 12 hours prior to application, unless otherwise directed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIME COAT
Provide asphalt conforming to one of the following grades:
2.1.1 Emulsified Asphalt
Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D977, Type SS1h, ASTM D2397/D2397M, Type CSS-1h. Asphalt emulsion can be diluted up to 1 part water to 1 part emulsion for prime coat use. Do not dilute asphalt emulsion for tack coat use.
2.2 TACK COAT
2.2.1 Emulsified Asphalt
Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D977, Type SS1h, ASTM D2397/D2397M, Type CSS-1h. For prime coats the emulsified asphalt can be diluted with up to 1 part emulsion to 1 part water. No dilution is allowed for tack coat applications. The base asphalt used to manufacture the emulsion is required to show a negative spot when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 102 using standard naphtha.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
Immediately before applying the bituminous coat, remove all loose material, dirt, clay, or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated by means of a power broom or blower supplemented with hand brooms. Apply treatment only when the surface is dry and clean.
3.2 APPLICATION RATE
The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer.
3.2.1 Tack Coat
Apply bituminous material for the tack coat in quantities of not less than 0.14 L nor more than 0.46 L/square meter of residual asphalt onto the pavement surface as approved by the Contracting Officer. Do not dilute asphalt emulsion when used as a tack coat.
3.2.2 Prime Coat
Apply bituminous material for the prime coat in quantities of not less than 0.23 L nor more than 0.54 L/square meter of residual asphalt for asphalt emulsion up to a 1 to 1 dilution rate or for residual asphalt for cutback asphalt.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 13 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE
3.3.1 Viscosity Relationship
Apply asphalt at a temperature that will provide a viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 square mm/sec, kinematic. Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the Contracting Officer.
3.3.2 Temperature Ranges
The viscosity requirements determine the application temperature to be used. The following is a normal range of application temperatures:
Cutback Asphalts
Asphalt Emulsion
All Grades 20-70 degrees C
Some of these temperatures for rapid cure cutbacks are above the flash point of the material and care should be taken in their heating.
3.4 APPLICATION
3.4.1 General
Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, apply the bituminous prime or tack coat with the bituminous distributor at the specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated. Properly treat all areas and spots, not capable of being sprayed with the distributor, with the hand spray. Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, maintain the surface by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing deficient areas at no additional cost to the Government. If required, spread clean dry sand to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material. No smoking, fires, or flames other than those from the heaters that are a part of the equipment are permitted within 8 meters of heating, distributing, and transferring operations of cutback materials. Prevent all traffic, except for paving equipment used in constructing the surfacing, from using the underlying material, whether primed or not, until the surfacing is completed. The bituminous coat requirements are described herein.
3.4.2 Prime Coat
Apply a prime coat at locations shown on the Drawings. Apply the bituminous material uniformly over the surface to be treated at a pressure
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 13 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
range of 172.4 to 517.1 kPa; the rate will be as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE. To obtain uniform application of the prime coat on the surface treated at the junction of previous and subsequent applications, spread building paper on the surface for a sufficient distance back from the ends of each application to start and stop the prime coat on the paper and to ensure that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface to be treated. Immediately after application remove and destroy the building paper.
3.4.3 Tack Coat
Apply tack coat at the locations shown on the drawings. A tack coat should be applied to every bound surface (asphalt or concrete pavement) that is being overlaid with asphalt mixture and at transverse and longitudinal joints. Apply the tack coat when the surface to be treated is clean and dry. Immediately following the preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by means of the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature specified herein and at a rate as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be treated. Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed by the distributor by spraying with a hand wand or using other approved method. Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of time necessary to permit setting of the tack coat. Apply the bituminous tack coat only as far in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day's operation. Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding course of pavement is placed.
3.5 CURING PERIOD
Following application of the bituminous material and prior to application of the succeeding layer of asphalt mixture allow the bituminous coat to cure and water or volatiles to evaporate prior to overlaying. Maintain the tacked surface in good condition until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing and recoating deficient areas. Allow the prime coat to cure without being disturbed for a period of at least 48 hours or longer, as may be necessary to attain penetration into the treated course. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up excess bituminous material.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Obtain certificates of compliance for all asphalt material delivered to the project. Obtain samples of the bituminous material under the supervision of the Contracting Officer. The sample may be retained and tested by the Government at no cost to the Contractor.
3.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Furnish certified copies of the manufacturer's test reports indicating temperature viscosity relationship for cutback asphalt or asphalt cement, compliance with applicable specified requirements, not less than 5 days before the material is required in the work.
3.7.1 Sampling
Unless otherwise specified, sample bituminous material in accordance with ASTM D140/D140M.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 13 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.7.2 Calibration Test
Furnish all equipment, materials, and labor necessary to calibrate the bituminous distributor. Calibrate using the approved job material and prior to applying the bituminous coat material to the prepared surface. Calibrate the bituminous distributor in accordance with ASTM D2995.
3.7.3 Trial Applications
Before applying the spray application of tack or prime coat, apply three lengths of at least 30 meters for the full width of the distributor bar to evaluate the amount of bituminous material that can be satisfactorily applied.
3.7.3.1 Tack Coat Trial Application Rate
Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous tack coat materials in the amount of 0.23 L/square meter. Make other trial applications using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.
3.7.3.2 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate
Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous materials in the amount of 0.66 L/square meter. Make other trial applications using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary.
3.7.4 Sampling and Testing During Construction
Perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS
Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material. Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not travel over freshly treated surfaces.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 13 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 12 15.13
ASPHALT PAVING FOR AIRFIELDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 FULL PAYMENT
1.1.1 Method of Measurement
Measurement of the quantity of hot-mix asphalt pavement, per ton placed and accepted, shall be made for the purposes of assessing the pay factors stipulated below.
1.1.2 Basis of Payment
The measured quantity of hot-mixed asphalt pavement will be paid for and included in the lump sum contract price. If less than 100 percent payment is due based on the pay factors stipulated in paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE, a unit price of 65 per ton will be used for purposes of calculating the payment reduction.
1.2 PERCENT PAYMENT
When a lot of material fails to meet the specification requirements for 100 percent pay as outlined in the following paragraphs, that lot shall be removed and replaced, or accepted at a reduced price which will be computed by multiplying the unit price by the lot's pay factor. The lot pay factor is determined by taking the lowest computed pay factor based on either laboratory air voids, in-place density, grade or smoothness (each discussed below). At the end of the project, an average of all lot pay factors will be calculated. If this average lot pay factor exceeds 95.0 percent and no individual lot has a pay factor less than 75.0 percent, then the percent payment for the entire project will be 100 percent of the unit bid price. If the average lot pay factor is less than 95.0 percent, then each lot will be paid for at the unit price multiplied by the lot's pay factor. For any lots which are less than 2000 metric tons, a weighted lot pay factor will be used to calculate the average lot pay factor. When work on a lot is required to be terminated before all sublots are completed, the results from the completed sublots will be analyzed to determine the percent payment for the lot following the same procedures and requirements for full lots but with fewer test results.
1.2.1 Mat and Joint Densities
The average in-place mat and joint densities are expressed as a percentage of the average theoretical maximum density (TMD) for the lot. The average TMD for each lot will be determined as the average TMD of the four random samples per lot. The average in-place mat density and joint density for a lot are determined and compared with Table 1 to calculate a single pay factor per lot based on in-place density, as described below. First, a pay factor for both mat density and joint density are determined from Table 1. The area associated with the joint is then determined and will be considered to be 3 m wide times the length of completed longitudinal construction joint in the lot. This area will not exceed the total lot size. The length of joint to be considered will be that length where a
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
new lane has been placed against an adjacent lane of asphalt pavement, either an adjacent freshly paved lane or one paved at any time previously. The area associated with the joint is expressed as a percentage of the total lot area. A weighted pay factor for the joint is determined based on this percentage (see example below). The pay factor for mat density and the weighted pay factor for joint density is compared and the lowest selected. This selected pay factor is the pay factor based on density for the lot. When the TMD on both sides of a longitudinal joint is different, the average of these two TMD will be used as the TMD needed to calculate the percent joint density. Rejected lots shall be removed and replaced. Rejected areas adjacent to longitudinal joints shall be removed 100 mm into the cold (existing) lane. All density results for a lot will be completed and reported within 24 hours after the construction of that lot.
Table 1. Pay Factor Based on In-place Density
Average Mat Density (4 Pay Factor, percent Average Joint Density (4 cores) cores) 94.0 - 96.0 100.0 Above 92.5
93.9 100.0 92.4
93.8 or 96.1 99.9 92.3
93.7 99.8 92.2
93.6 or 96.2 99.6 92.1
93.5 99.4 92.0
93.4 or 96.3 99.1 91.9
93.3 98.7 91.8
93.2 or 96.4 98.3 91.7
93.1 97.8 91.6
93.0 or 96.5 97.3 91.5
92.9 96.3 91.4
92.8 or 96.6 94.1 91.3
92.7 92.2 91.2
92.6 or 96.7 90.3 91.1
92.5 87.9 91.0
92.4 or 96.8 85.7 90.9
92.3 83.3 90.8
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Table 1. Pay Factor Based on In-place Density
Average Mat Density (4 Pay Factor, percent Average Joint Density (4 cores) cores) 92.2 or 96.9 80.6 90.7
92.1 78.0 90.6
92.0 or 97.0 75.0 90.5
below 92.0, above 97.0 0.0 (reject) below 90.5
1.2.2 Pay Factor Based on In-place Density
An example of the computation of a pay factor (in I-P units only) based on in-place density, is as follows: Assume the following test results for field density made on the lot: (1) Average mat density = 93.2 percent (of lab TMD). (2) Average joint density = 91.5 percent (of lab TMD). (3) Total area of lot = 2787.1 square meters. (4) Length of completed longitudinal construction joint = 609.6 meters.
a. Step 1: Determine pay factor based on mat density and on joint density, using Table 1:
Mat density of 93.2 percent = 98.3 pay factor.
Joint density of 91.5 percent = 97.3 pay factor.
b. Step 2: Determine ratio of joint area (length of longitudinal joint x 3.05 meters) to mat area (total paved area in the lot): Multiply the length of completed longitudinal construction joint by the specified 3.05 meters width and divide by the mat area (total paved area in the lot).
(609.6 meters x 3.05 meters/2787.1 square meters = 0.6667 ratio of joint area to mat area (ratio).
c. Step 3: Weighted pay factor (wpf) for joint is determined as indicated below:
wpf = joint pay factor + (100 - joint pay factor) (1 - ratio) wpf = 97.3 + (100-97.3) (1-0.6667) = 98.2 percent
d. Step 4: Compare weighted pay factor for joint density to pay factor for mat density and select the smaller:
Pay factor for mat density: 98.3 percent. Weighted pay factor for joint density: 98.2 percent
Select the smaller of the two values as pay factor based on density: 98.2 percent
1.2.3 Laboratory Air Voids and Theoretical Maximum Density
Laboratory air voids will be calculated in accordance with
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM D3203/D3203M by determining the density of each lab compacted specimen using the laboratory-prepared, thoroughly dry method in ASTM D2726/D2726M and determining the theoretical maximum density (TMD) of four of the sublots using ASTM D2041/D2041M. Laboratory air void calculations for each lot will use the average theoretical maximum density values obtained for the lot. The mean absolute deviation of the four laboratory air void contents (one from each sublot) from the JMF air void content will be evaluated and a pay factor determined from Table 2. All laboratory air void tests will be completed and reported within 24 hours after completion of construction of each lot. The TMD is also used for computation of compaction, as required in paragraph MAT AND JOINT DENSITIES above.
1.2.4 Mean Absolute Deviation
An example of the computation of mean absolute deviation for laboratory air voids is as follows: Assume that the laboratory air voids are determined from 4 random samples of a lot (where 3 specimens were compacted from each sample). The average laboratory air voids for each sublot sample are determined to be 3.5, 3.0, 4.0, and 3.7. Assume that the target air voids from the JMF is 4.0. The mean absolute deviation is then:
Mean Absolute Deviation = (|3.5 - 4.0| + |3.0 - 4.0| + |4.0 - 4.0| + |3.7 - 4.0|)/4
= (0.5 + 1.0 + 0.0 + 0.3)/4 = (1.8)/4 = 0.45
The mean absolute deviation for laboratory air voids is determined to be 0.45. It can be seen from Table 2 that the lot's pay factor based on laboratory air voids, is 100 percent.
Table 2. Pay Factor Based on Laboratory Air Voids
Mean Absolute Deviation of Lab Air Voids from JMF Pay Factor, Percent
O.60 or less 100
0.61 - 0.80 98
0.81 - 1.00 95
1.01 - 1.20 90
Above 1.20 reject (0)
1.2.5 Pay Adjustment Based on Grade
Within 5 working days after completion of a particular lot incorporating the final wearing course, test the final wearing surface of the pavement for conformance with specified plan grade requirements. Perform all testing in the presence of the Government. Provide a final wearing surface of pavement conforming to the elevations and cross sections shown and not vary more than 9 mm for runways or 15 mm for taxiways and aprons from the plan grade established and approved at site of work. Match finished surfaces at juncture with other pavements with finished surfaces of abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running lines of levels at intervals of 7.6 m, or less, longitudinally and transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement surface. Maintain detailed notes of the results of the testing and provide a copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. When more than 5 percent of all measurements made within a lot are outside the 9 or 15 mm tolerance, the pay factor based on grade for that lot will be 95 percent. In areas where the grade exceeds the tolerance by more than 50 percent, remove the surface lift full depth; and replace the lift with asphalt pavement to meet specification requirements, at no additional cost to the Government. Diamond grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high areas will not be permitted.
1.3 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO M 156 (2013; R 2017) Standard Specification for Requirements for Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T 304 (2011; R 2015) Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T 308 (2016) Standard Method of Test for Determining the Asphalt Binder Content of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by the Ignition Method
AASHTO T 329 (2015) Standard Test Method for Moisture Content of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) by Oven Method
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)
AI MS-2 (2015) Asphalt Mix Design Methods
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C29/C29M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM C88 (2018) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C117 (2017) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C127 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C128 (2015) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C142/C142M (2017) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTM C566 (2013) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying
ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM D242/D242M (2009; R 2014) Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D946/D946M (2015) Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction
ASTM D979/D979M (2015) Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D1461 (2017) Standard Test Method for Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Asphalt Mixtures
ASTM D2041/D2041M (2011) Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D2172/D2172M (2017; E 2018) Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Asphalt Binder from Asphalt Mixtures
ASTM D2419 (2014) Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate
ASTM D2489/D2489M (2016) Standard Test Method for Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of Asphalt
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Mixtures
ASTM D2726/D2726M (20172019) Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM D3203/D3203M (2017) Standard Test Method for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Asphalt Mixtures
ASTM D3665 (2012; R 2017) Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials
ASTM D3666 (2016) Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials
ASTM D4125/D4125M (2010) Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
ASTM D4791 (2010) Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D4867/D4867M (2009; R 2014) Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete Paving Mixtures
ASTM D5444 (2015) Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate
ASTM D5821 (2013; R 2017) Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D6307 (2019) Standard Test Method for Asphalt Content of Asphalt Mixture by Ignition Method
ASTM D6925 (2014) Standard Test Method for Preparation and Determination of the Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor
ASTM D6926 (2016) Standard Practice for Preparation of Asphalt Mixture Specimens Using Marshall Apparatus
ASTM D6927 (2015) Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Placement Plan
SD-03 Product Data
Diamond Grinding Plan Mix Design; G Contractor Quality Control; G
SD-04 Samples
Aggregates Asphalt Cement Binder
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates; G QC Monitoring
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder; G Testing Laboratory
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
Acquire the services of an independent commercial laboratory to perform acceptance testing. Acceptance of the plant produced mix and in-place requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A standard lot for all requirements will be equal to 2000 metric tons. Where appropriate, adjustment in payment for individual lots of asphalt pavement will be made based on in-place density, laboratory air voids, grade and smoothness in accordance with the following paragraphs. Grade and surface smoothness determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Exceptions or adjustments to this will be made in situations where the mix within one lot is placed as part of both the intermediate and surface courses, thus grade and smoothness measurements for the entire lot cannot be made. In order to evaluate laboratory air voids and in-place (field) density, each lot will be divided into four equal sublots.
1.5.1 Sublot Sampling
One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids, theoretical maximum density, and for any additional testing the Government desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering mixture to each sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot. All samples will be selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods of assuring randomness conforming to ASTM D3665 and employing tables of random numbers or computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be determined from three laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample in accordance with ASTM D3203/D3203M. The specimens will be compacted within 2 hours of the time the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt plant. Samples will not be reheated prior to compaction and insulated containers will be used as necessary to maintain the temperature.
1.5.2 Additional Sampling and Testing
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the Government. Testing in these areas will be treated as a separate lot. Payment will be made for the quantity of asphalt pavement represented by these tests in accordance with the provisions of this section.
1.5.3 In-place Density
For determining in-place density, obtain one random core (100 mm or 150 mm in diameter) at locations from the mat (interior of the lane and at least 300 mm from longitudinal joint or pavement edge) of each sublot, and one random core taken from the joint (immediately over joint) of each sublot, in accordance with ASTM D979/D979M. Fill all core holes with asphalt pavement and compact using a standard Marshall hammer to a mat density as specified. Tack coat dry core holes before filling. Each random core will be full thickness of the layer being placed. When the random core is less than 25 mm thick, it will not be included in the analysis. In this case, another random core will be taken. After air drying to meet the requirements for laboratory-prepared, thoroughly dry specimens, cores obtained from the mat and from the joints will be used for in-place density determination in accordance with ASTM D2726/D2726M.
1.5.4 Surface Smoothness
Use a straightedge for measuring surface smoothness of runway pavements. Use a straightedge for measuring surface smoothness of all other pavement surfaces. Perform all testing in the presence of the Government. Maintain detailed notes of the testing results and provide a copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (for instance crowns, drainage inlets), finish the surface to meet the approval of the Government.
1.5.4.1 Smoothness Requirements
1.5.4.1.1 Straightedge Testing
Provide finished surfaces of the pavements withe no abrupt change of 3 mm or more, and all pavements within the tolerances specified in Table 3 when checked with an approved 4 m straightedge.
Table 3. Straightedge Surface Smoothness--Pavements
Pavement Category Direction of Testing Tolerance, mm
Runways and taxiway Longitudinal 3
Transverse 6
Shoulders (outside edge Longitudinal 6 stripe) Transverse 6
Calibration hardstands and Longitudinal 3 compass swinging bases
Transverse 3
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Table 3. Straightedge Surface Smoothness--Pavements
Pavement Category Direction of Testing Tolerance, mm
All other airfields and Longitudinal 6 helicopter paved areas
Transverse 6
1.5.4.2 Testing Method
After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in a manner to reveal surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. If any pavement areas are diamond ground, retest these areas immediately after diamond grinding. The maximum area allowed to be corrected by diamond grinding is 10 percent of the total area of the lot. Check a number of random locations along with any observed suspicious locations primarily at transverse and longitudinal joints with the straightedge.
1.5.4.2.1 Straightedge Testing
Hold the straightedge in contact with the pavement surface and measure the maximum distance between the straightedge and the pavement surface. Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two high points. Use the straightedge to measure abrupt changes in surface grade.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not place asphalt pavement upon a wet surface or when the surface temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 4. The temperature requirements may be waived by the Government, if requested; provided all other requirements, including compaction, are met.
Table 4. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course
Mat Thickness, mm Degrees C
75 or greater 4
Less than 75 7
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course. Provide hot-mix asphalt (HMA) pavement designed and constructed in accordance with this section conforming to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
drawings. Construct each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and rolled, finished, and approved before the placement of the next course. Submit proposed Placement Plan, indicating lane widths, longitudinal joints, and transverse joints for each course or lift.
2.1.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant
Provide plants used for the preparation of asphalt mixture conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 156 with the following changes:
2.1.1.1 Truck Scales
Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved scales, or on certified public scales at no additional expense to the Government. Inspect and seal scales at least annually by an approved calibration laboratory.
2.1.1.2 Inspection of Plant
Provide access to the Contracting Officer at all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights, proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples. Provide assistance as requested, for the Government Engineer to procure any desired samples.
2.1.1.3 Storage Bins
The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours. The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 8 hours. Provide the mix drawn from bins that meets the same requirements as mix loaded directly into trucks.
2.1.2 Hauling Equipment
Provide trucks used for hauling asphalt mixture that have tight, clean, and smooth metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, Lightly coat the truck beds with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved material. Do not use petroleum based products as a release agent. Provide each truck with a suitable cover to protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that the mixture is delivered to the site at the specified temperature, provide insulated or heated truck beds with covers (tarps) that are securely fastened.
2.1.3 Material Transfer Vehicle (MTV)
Provide Material Transfer Vehicles for placement of the asphalt mixture. To transfer the material from the hauling equipment to the paver, use a self-propelled, material transfer vehicle with a swing conveyor that delivers material to the paver from outside the paving lane and without making contact with the paver. Provide MTV capable to move back and forth between the hauling equipment and the paver providing material transfer to the paver, while allowing the paver to operate at a constant speed. Provide Material Transfer Vehicle with remixing and storage capability to prevent physical and thermal segregation.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.4 Asphalt Pavers
Provide mechanical spreading and finishing equipment consisting of a self-powered paver, capable of spreading and finishing the mixture to the specified line, grade, and cross section. Provide paver screed capable of laying a uniform mixture to meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and grade without physical or temperature segregation, the full width of the material being placed. Provide a screed equipped with a compaction device to be used during all placement.
2.1.4.1 Receiving Hopper
Provide paver with a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a uniform spreading operation and a distribution system to place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation. Provide a screed that effectively produces a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.
2.1.4.2 Automatic Grade Controls
If an automatic grade control device is used, provide a paver equipped with a control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified screed elevation that is automatically actuated from either a reference line or through a system of mechanical sensors or sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which maintain the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain the required surface. Provide transverse slope controller capable of maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1 percent. Do not use the transverse slope controller to control grade. Provide controls capable of working in conjunction with any of the following attachments:
a. Ski-type device of not less than 9.14 m in length.
b. Taut stringline set to grade.
c. Short ski or shoe for joint matching.
d. Laser control.
2.1.5 Rollers
Provide rollers in good condition and operated at slow speeds to avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. Provide sufficient number, type, and weight of rollers to compact the mixture to the required density while it is still in a workable condition. Do not use equipment which causes excessive crushing of the aggregate.
2.1.6 Diamond Grinding
Those performing diamond grinding are required to have a minimum of three years experience in diamond grinding of airfield pavements. In areas not meeting the specified limits for surface smoothness and plan grade, reduce high areas to attain the required smoothness and grade, except as depth is limited below. Reduce high areas by diamond grinding the asphalt pavement with approved equipment after the asphalt pavement is at a minimum age of 14 days. Perform diamond grinding by sawing with saw blades impregnated with an industrial diamond abrasive. Assemble the saw blades in a cutting head mounted on a machine designed specifically for diamond grinding that produces the required texture and smoothness level without damage to the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
asphalt pavement or joint faces. Provide diamond grinding equipment with saw blades that are 3 mm wide, a minimum of 60 blades per 300 mm of cutting head width, and capable of cutting a path a minimum of 0.9 m wide. Diamond grinding equipment that causes raveling, fracturing of aggregate , or disturbance to the underlying material will not be allowed. The maximum area corrected by diamond grinding the surface of the asphalt pavement is 10 percent of the total area of any sublot. The maximum depth of diamond grinding is 12 mm. Provide diamond grinding machine equipped to flush and vacuum the pavement surface. Dispose of all debris from diamond grinding operations off Government property. Prior to diamond grinding, submit a Diamond Grinding Plan for review and approval. At a minimum, include the daily reports for the deficient areas, the location and extent of deficiencies, corrective actions, and equipment. Remove and replace all pavement areas requiring plan grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified.
Prior to production diamond grinding operations, perform a test section at the approved location, consisting of a minimum of two adjacent passes with a minimum length of 12 m to allow evaluation of the finish and transition between adjacent passes. Production diamond grinding operations cannot be performed prior to approval.
2.2 AGGREGATES
Sample aggregates in the presence of a Government Representative. Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M and be representative of the materials to be used for the project. Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. The portion of material retained on the 4.75 mm sieve is coarse aggregate. The portion of material passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on the 0.075 mm sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the 0.075 mm sieve is defined as mineral filler. Submit sufficient materials to produce 90 kg of blended mixture for mix design verification. Submit all aggregate test results and samples to the Government Engineer at least 14 days prior to start of construction. Perform job aggregate testing no earlier than 6 months before contract award.
2.2.1 Coarse Aggregate
Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles, free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other deleterious substances. Provide coarse aggregate particles meeting the following requirements:
a. The percentage of loss not be greater than 40 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C131/C131M.
b. The sodium sulfate soundness loss not exceeding 12 percent, or the magnesium sulfate soundness loss not exceeding 18 percent after five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C88.
c. At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate contain at least two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with ASTM D5821 with fractured faces produced by crushing.
d. The particle shape essentially cubical and the aggregate containing not more than 20 percent, by weight, of flat particles and elongated
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in accordance with ASTM D4791.
e. Slag consisting of air-cooled, blast furnace slag, with a compacted weight of not less than 1200 kg per cubic meter when tested in accordance with ASTM C29/C29M.
f. Clay lumps and friable particles not exceeding 0.3 percent, by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142/C142M.
2.2.2 Fine Aggregate
Provide fine aggregate consisting of clean, sound, tough, durable particles. Provide aggregate particles that are free from coatings of clay, silt, or any objectionable material, contain no clay balls, and meet the following requirements:
a. Quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the aggregate blend not exceeding 15 percent by weight of total aggregate.
b. Individual fine aggregate sources with a sand equivalent value greater than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2419.
c. Fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate with an uncompacted void content greater than 45.0 percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 304 Method A.
d. Clay lumps and friable particles not exceeding 0.3 percent, by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C142/C142M.
2.2.3 Mineral Filler
Provide mineral filler consisting of a nonplastic material meeting the requirements of ASTM D242/D242M.
2.2.4 Aggregate Gradation
Provide a combined aggregate gradation that conforms to gradations specified in Table 5, when tested in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M and ASTM C117, and does not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grades uniformly from coarse to fine. Provide a JMF within the specification limits; however, the gradation can exceed the limits when the allowable deviation from the JMF shown in Tables 8 and 9 are applied.
Table 5. Aggregate Gradations
Gradation 2
Sieve Size, mm Percent Passing by Mass 25.0 ---
19.0 100
12.5 90-100
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Table 5. Aggregate Gradations
Gradation 2
Sieve Size, mm Percent Passing by Mass 9.5 69-89
4.75 53-73
2.36 38-60
1.18 26-48
0.60 18-38
0.30 11-27
0.15 6-18
0.075 3-6
2.3 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
Provide asphalt cement binder that conforms to ASTM D946/D946M Penetration Grade 60-70. Provide test data indicating grade certification by the supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix plant. Submit copies of these certifications to the . The supplier is defined as the last source of any modification to the binder. The Government may sample and test the binder at the mix plant at any time before or during mix production.
2.4 MIX DESIGN
Develop the mix design. Perform Job Mix formula (JMF) and aggregates testing no earlier than 6 months before contract award. Provide asphalt mixture composed of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and asphalt material. Provide aggregate fractions sized, handled in separate size groups, and combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of Table 5. Do not produce asphalt pavement for payment until a JMF has been approved. Design the asphalt mixture using hand-held hammer procedures contained in AI MS-2 and the criteria shown in Table 6 or design the asphalt mixture using the Superpave gyratory compactor set at 50 gyrations. Prepare samples at various asphalt contents and compacted in accordance with ASTM D6925. Use laboratory compaction temperatures for Polymer Modified Asphalts as recommended by the asphalt cement manufacturer. If the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) of the composite mixture, as determined by ASTM D4867/D4867M is less than 75, reject the aggregates or the asphalt mixture treated with an anti-stripping agent. Add a sufficient amount of anti-stripping agent to produce a TSR of not less than 75. If an antistrip agent is required, provide it at no additional cost to the Government. Provide sufficient materials to produce 90 kg of blended mixture to the Government for verification of mix design at least 14 days prior to construction of test section.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.4.1 JMF Requirements
Submit the proposed JMF in writing, for approval, at least 14 days prior to the start of the test section, including as a minimum:
a. Percent passing each sieve size.
b. Percent of asphalt cement.
c. Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used.
d. Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance grade.
e. Number of blows of hammer per side of molded specimen or number of Superpave gyratory compactor gyrations.
f. Laboratory mixing temperature.
g. Lab compaction temperature.
h. Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement.
i. Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation chart, stating the nominal maximum size.
j. Graphical plots and summary tabulation of stability, flow, air voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS-2. Include summary tabulation that includes individual specimen data for each specimen tested.
k. Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate.
l. Percent natural sand.
m. Percent particles with two or more fractured faces (in coarse aggregate).
n. Fine aggregate angularity.
o. Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate).
p. Tensile Strength Ratio and wet/dry specimen test results.
q. Antistrip agent (if required).
r. List of all modifiers.
s. Percentage and properties (asphalt content aggregate gradation, and aggregate properties) of RAP in accordance with paragraph RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT, if RAP is used.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Table 6. Marshall Design Criteria
Test Property 50 Blow Mix
Stability, N minimum 6000(1)
Flow, 0.25 mm 8-18(2)
Air voids, percent 4(4)
Percent Voids in mineral See Table 7 aggregate (minimum)
Dust Proportion(3) 0.8-1.2
TSR, minimum percent 75
TSR Conditioned Strength 415 (minimum kPa)
(1) This is a minimum requirement. Provide significantly higher average during construction to ensure compliance with the specifications.
(2) The flow requirement is not applicable for Polymer Modified Asphalts
(3) Dust Proportion is calculated as the aggregate content, expressed as a percent of mass, passing the 0.075 mm sieve, divided by the effective asphalt content, in percent of total mass of the mixture. (4) Select the JMF asphalt content corresponding to an air void content of 4 percent. Verify the other properties of Table 6 meet the specification requirements at this asphalt content.
Table 6. Superpave Gyratory Compaction Criteria
Test Property Value
Air voids, percent 4(1)
Percent Voids in mineral aggregate See Table 7 (minimum)
Dust Proportion(2) 0.8-1.2
TSR, minimum percent 75
(1) Select the JMF asphalt content corresponding to an air void content of 4 percent. Verify the other properties of Table 6 meet the specification requirements at this asphalt content. (2) Dust Proportion is calculated as the aggregate content, expressed as a percent of mass, passing the 0.075 mm sieve, divided by the effective asphalt content, in percent of total mass of the mixture.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Table 7. Minimum Percent Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA)(1)
Minimum VMA, percent
14
(1) Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-2, based on ASTM D2726/D2726M bulk specific gravity for the aggregate.
2.4.2 Adjustments to JMF
The JMF for each mixture is in effect until a new formula is approved in writing by the Government. Should a change in sources of any materials be made, perform a new mix design and a new JMF approved before the new material is used. Make minor adjustments within the specification limits to the JMF to optimize mix volumetric properties. Adjustments to the original JMF are limited to plus or minus 4 percent on the 4.75 mm and coarser sieves; plus or minus 3 percent on the 2.36 mm to 0.30 mm sieves; and plus or minus 1 percent on the 0.15 mm sieve. Adjustments to the JMF are limited to plus or minus 1.0 percent on the 0.075 mm sieve. Asphalt content adjustments are limited to plus or minus 0.40 from the original JMF. If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
3.1.1 General Quality Control Requirements
Submit the Quality Control Plan. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt pavement for payment until the quality control plan has been approved. In the quality control plan, address all elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not limited to:
a. Mix Design and unique JMF identification code
b. Aggregate Grading
c. Quality of Materials
d. Stockpile Management and procedures to prevent contamination
e. Proportioning
f. Mixing and Transportation
g. Correlation of mechanical hammer to hand hammer. Determine the number of blows of the mechanical hammer required to provide the same density of the JMF as provided by the hand hammer. Use the average of three specimens per trial blow application.
h. Mixture Volumetrics
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
i. Moisture Content of Mixtures
j. Placing and Finishing
k. Joints
l. Compaction, including Asphalt Pavement-Portland Cement Concrete joints
m. Surface Smoothness
n. Truck bed release agent
3.1.2 Testing Laboratory
Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job site that is equipped with heating and air conditioning units to maintain a temperature of 24 plus or minus 2.3 degrees C. Provide laboratory facilities that are kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper working condition. Provide the Government with unrestricted access to inspect the laboratory facility, to witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The Government will advise in writing of any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough to adversely affect test results, immediately suspend the incorporation of the materials into the work. Incorporation of the materials into the work will not be permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected.
3.1.3 Quality Control Testing
Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as set forth in the Quality Control Program. Required elements of the testing program include, but are not limited to, tests for the control of asphalt content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability, flow, in-place density, grade and smoothness. Develop a Quality Control Testing Plan as part of the Quality Control Program.
3.1.3.1 Asphalt Content
A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per lot (a lot is defined in paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE) by one of the following methods: extraction method in accordance with ASTM D2172/D2172M, Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with the AASHTO T 308, ASTM D6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D4125/D4125M, provided each method is calibrated for the specific mix being used. For the extraction method, determine the weight of ash, as described in ASTM D2172/D2172M, as part of the first extraction test performed at the beginning of plant production; and as part of every tenth extraction test performed thereafter, for the duration of plant production. Use the last weight of ash value in the calculation of the asphalt content for the mixture.
3.1.3.2 Aggregate Properties
Determine aggregate gradations a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D5444 or ASTM D6307. For batch plants, test aggregatesin accordance with ASTM C136/C136M using
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
actual batch weights to determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture. Determine the specific gravity of each aggregate size grouping for each 18,000 metric tons in accordance with ASTM C127 or ASTM C128. Determine fractured faces for gravel sources for each 18,000 metric tons in accordance with ASTM D5821. Determine the uncompacted void content of manufactured sand for each 18,000 metric tons in accordance with AASHTO T 304 Method A.
3.1.3.3 Temperatures
Check temperatures at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job site.
3.1.3.4 Aggregate Moisture
Determine the moisture content of aggregate used for production a minimum of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C566.
3.1.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture
Determine the moisture content of the mixture at least once per lot in accordance with AASHTO T 329.
3.1.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, VMA, Marshall Stability and Flow
Obtain mixture samples at least four times per lot and compacted into specimens, using 50 blows per side with the Marshall hand-held hammer as described in ASTM D6926 or using 50 gyrations of the Superpave gyratory compactor as described in ASTM D6925. After compaction, dtermine the laboratory air voids and VMA of each specimen as well as the Marshall stability and flow, as described in ASTM D6927. Provide VMA within the limits of Table 7.
3.1.3.7 In-Place Density
Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved. A nuclear gauge or other non-destructive testing device may be used to monitor pavement density.
3.1.3.8 Grade and Smoothness
Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness requirements are met in accordance with paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE.
3.1.3.9 Additional Testing
Perform any additional testing, deemed necessary to control the process.
3.1.3.10 QC Monitoring
Submit all QC test results to the Government on a daily basis as the tests are performed. The Government reserves the right to monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.1.4 Sampling
When directed by the Government, sample and test any material which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected. Perform all sampling in accordance with standard procedures specified.
3.1.5 Control Charts
For process control, establish and maintain linear control charts on both individual samples and the running average of last four samples for the parameters listed in Table 8, as a minimum. Post the control charts as directed by the Government and maintain current at all times. Identify the following on the control charts, the project number, the test parameter being plotted, the individual sample numbers, the Action and Suspension Limits listed in Table 8 applicable to the test parameter being plotted, and the test results. Also show target values (JMF) on the control charts as indicators of central tendency for the cumulative percent passing, asphalt content, and laboratory air voids parameters. When the test results exceed either applicable Action Limit, take immediate steps to bring the process back in control. When the test results exceed either applicable Suspension Limit, halt production until the problem is solved. When the Suspension Limit is exceeded for individual values or running average values, the Government has the option to require removal and replacement of the material represented by the samples or to leave in place and base acceptance on mixture volumetric properties and in place density. Use the control charts as part of the process control system for identifying trends so that potential problems can be corrected before they occur. Make decisions concerning mix modifications based on analysis of the results provided in the control charts. In the Quality Control Plan, indicate the appropriate action to be taken to bring the process into control when certain parameters exceed their Action Limits.
Table 8. Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on Individual and Running Average Control Charts Individual Samples Running Average of Last Four Samples Parameter to be Plotted Action Suspension Action Limit Suspension Limit Limit Limit 4.75 mm sieve, Cumulative 6 8 4 5 Percent Passing, deviation from JMF target; plus or minus values
0.6 mm sieve, Cumulative 4 6 3 4 Percent Passing, deviation from JMF target; plus or minus values
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Table 8. Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on Individual and Running Average Control Charts Individual Samples Running Average of Last Four Samples Parameter to be Plotted Action Suspension Action Limit Suspension Limit Limit Limit 0.075 mm sieve, Cumulative 1.4 2.0 1.1 1.5 Percent Passing, deviation from JMF target; plus or minus values
Asphalt content, percent 0.4 0.5 0.2 0.3 deviation from JMF target; plus or minus value
Laboratory Air Voids, percent No specific action and suspension limits set since deviation from JMF target value this parameter is used to determine percent payment
In-place Mat Density, percent No specific action and suspension limits set since of TMD this parameter is used to determine percent payment
In-place Joint Density, No specific action and suspension limits set since percent of TMD this parameter is used to determine percent payment
VMA
Gradation 2 14.3 14.0 14.5 14.0
Table 8 cont'd. Marshall Compaction
Stability, N (minimum)
50 blow JMF 4230 3690 6000 5470
Flow, 0.25 mm
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
50 blow JMF 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
18 max. 19 max. 17 max. 18 max.
3.2 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
Heat the asphalt cement material while avoiding local overheating and providing a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform temperature. Maintain the temperature of unmodified asphalts to no more than 160 degrees C when added to the aggregates. The temperature of modified asphalts is not to exceed 175 degrees C.
3.3 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of heating used is allowed. Maintain the temperature no lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory workability.
3.4 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
Weigh or meter the aggregates and the asphalt cement and introduce into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. Limit the temperature of the asphalt mixture to 175 degrees C when the asphalt cement is added. Mix the combined materials until the aggregate obtains a thorough and uniform coating of asphalt binder (testing in accordance with ASTM D2489/D2489M may be required by the Contracting Officer) and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. The moisture content of all asphalt mixture upon discharge from the plant is not to exceed 0.5 percent by total weight of mixture as measured by ASTM D1461.
3.5 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
Immediately before placing asphalt pavement, clean the underlying course of dust and debris. Apply a prime coat or tack coat in accordance with the contract specifications.
3.6 TEST SECTION
Prior to full production, place a test section for each JMF used. Construct a test section consisting of a maximum of 250 tons and two paver passes wide placed in two lanes, with a longitudinal cold joint. Do not place the second lane of test section until the temperature of pavement edge is less than 80 degrees C. Construct the test section with the same depth as the course which it represents. Ensure the underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be constructed is the same or very similar to the underlying layer for the project. Use the same equipment in construction of the test section as on the remainder of the course represented by the test section. Construct the test section as part of the project pavement as approved by the Government.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 23 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6.1 Sampling and Testing for Test Section
Obtain one random sample at the plant, triplicate specimens compacted, and tested for stability, flow, and laboratory air voids. Test a portion of the same sample for theoretical maximum density (TMD), aggregate gradation and asphalt content. Test an additional portion of the sample to determine the TSR. Adjust the compactive effort as required to provide TSR specimens with an air void content of 7 plus or minus 1 percent. Obtain four randomly selected cores from the finished pavement mat, and four from the longitudinal joint, and tested for density. Perform random sampling in accordance with procedures contained in ASTM D3665. Construction may continue provided the test results are within the tolerances or exceed the minimum values shown in Table 9. If all test results meet the specified requirements, the test section may remain as part of the project pavement. If test results exceed the tolerances shown, remove and replace the test section and construct another test sectionat no additional cost to the Government.
Table 9. Test Section Requirements for Material and Mixture Properties
Property Specification Limit
Aggregate Gradation-Percent Passing (Individual Test Result)
4.75 mm and larger JMF plus or minus 8
2.36, 1.18, 0.60, and 0.30 mm JMF plus or minus 6
0.15 and 0.075 mm JMF plus or minus 2.0
Asphalt Content, Percent (Individual Test JMF plus or minus 0.5 Result)
Laboratory Air Voids, Percent (Average of JMF plus or minus 1.0 3 specimens) VMA, Percent (Average of 3 specimens) See Table 7
Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) (At 7 percent 75 percent minimum plus/minus 1 percent air void content)
Conditioned Strength 415 kPa minimum
Mat Density, Percent of TMD (Average of 4 92.0 - 96.0 Random Cores) Joint Density, Percent of TMD (Average of 90.5 minimum 4 Random Cores)
Table 9. cont'd - Marshall Compaction
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 24 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Stability, (Average of 3 specimens) 6000 N minimum for 50-blow
Flow, 0.25 mm (Average of 3 specimens) 8 - 18 for 50-blow
3.6.2 Additional Test Sections
If the initial test section proves to be unacceptable, make the necessary adjustments to the JMF, plant operation, placing procedures, and rolling procedures before beginning construction of a second test section. Construct and evaluate additional test sections, as required, for conformance to the specifications. Full production paving is not allowed until an acceptable test section has been constructed and accepted.
3.7 TESTING LABORATORY
Laboratories used to develop the JMF, perform Contractor Quality Control testing, and Government quality assurance and acceptance testing are required to meet the requirements of ASTM D3666. Perform all required test methods by an accredited laboratory. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot-mix operations for conformance with ASTM D3666. Maintain the laboratory validation for the duration of the project. Submit a certification of compliance signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements to the Government prior to the start of construction. At a minimum, include the following certifications:
a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising technician, and testing technicians.
b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.
c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.
d. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) program.
3.8 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING
3.8.1 Transporting
Transport asphalt mixture from the mixing plant to the site in clean, tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver. Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over freshly placed material is not permitted until the material has been compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 60 degrees C.
3.8.2 Placing
Place the mix in lifts of adequate thickness and compacted at a temperature suitable for obtaining density, surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place the mixture to the full width
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 25 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
by an asphalt paver; strike off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour indicated. Do not broadcast waste mixture onto the mat or recycled into the paver hopper. Collect waste mixture and dispose off site. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and tearing of the asphalt mat. Begin placement of the mixture along the centerline of a crowned section or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 3 m. Offset the longitudinal joint in one course from the longitudinal joint in the course immediately below by at least 300 mm; however, locate the joint in the surface course at the centerline of the pavement. Offset transverse joints in one course by at least 3 m from transverse joints in the previous course. Offset transverse joints in adjacent lanes a minimum of 3 m. On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.
3.9 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
3.9.1 General
a. After placing, thoroughly and uniformly compact the mixture by rolling. Compact the surface as soon as possible without causing displacement, cracking or shoving. Determine the sequence of rolling operations and the type of rollers used, except as specified in paragraph ASPHALT PAVEMENT-PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE JOINTS and with the exception that application of more than three passes with a vibratory roller in the vibrating mode is prohibited. Maintan the speed of the roller, at all times, sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture and be effective in compaction. Correct at once any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause.
b. Furnish sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant. Continue rolling until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened, but excessive water is not permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, thoroughly compact the mixture with hand tampers. Remove the full depth of any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is in any way defective, replace with fresh asphalt mixture and immediately compact to conform to the surrounding area. Perform this work at no expense to the Government. Skin patching is not allowed.
3.9.2 Segregation
The Government can sample and test any material that looks deficient. When the in-place material appears to be segregated, the Government has the option to sample the material and have it tested and compared to the aggregate gradation, asphalt content, and in-place density requirements in Table 9. If the material fails to meet these specification requirements, remove and replace the extent of the segregated material the full depth of the layer of asphalt mixture at no additional cost to the Government. When segregation occurs in the mat, take appropriate action to correct the process so that additional segregation does not occur.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 26 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.10 JOINTS
Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between the courses and to obtain the required density. Provide all joints with the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the requirements for smoothness and grade.
3.10.1 Transverse Joints
Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary to form a transverse joint, construct by means of placing a bulkhead or by tapering the course. Utilize a dry saw cut on the transverse joint full depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to placing the adjacent lane. Cutting equipment that uses water as a cooling or cutting agent nor milling equipment is permitted. Remove the cutback material from the project. In both methods, provide a light tack coat of asphalt material to all contact surfaces before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
3.10.2 Longitudinal Joints
Cut back longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less than 80 degrees C at the time of placing the adjacent lane), or otherwise defective, a maximum of 75 mm from the top edge of the lift with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound, near vertical surface for the full depth of the course. Remove all cutback material from the project. Cutting equipment that uses water as a cooling or cutting agent nor milling equipment is permitted. Provide a light tack coat of asphalt material to all contact surfaces prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
3.10.3 Asphalt Pavement-Portland Cement Concrete Joints
Joints between asphalt pavement and Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) require specific construction procedures for the asphalt pavement. The following criteria are applicable to the first 3 m or paver width of asphalt pavement adjacent to the PCC.
a. Place the asphalt pavement side of the joint in a direction parallel to the joint.
b. Place the asphalt pavement side sufficiently high so that when fully compacted the asphalt pavement is greater than 3 mm but less than 6 mm higher than the PCC side of the joint.
c. Compact with steel wheel rollers and at least one rubber tire roller. Compact with a rubber tire roller that weights at least 18 metric tons with tires inflated to at least 620 kPa. Avoid spalling the PCC during placement and compaction of the asphalt pavement. Operate steel wheel rollers in a way that prevents spalling the PCC. Repair any damage to PCC edges or joints as directed by the Government. If damage to the PCC joint or panel edge exceeds a total of 1 m, remove and replace the PCC panel at no additional expense to the Government.
d. After compaction is finished, diamond grind a minimum width of 1 m of the asphalt pavement so that the asphalt pavement side is less than 3 mm higher than the PCC side. Perform diamond grinding in accordance with subparagraph DIAMOND GRINDING above. The asphalt pavement
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 27 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
immediately adjacent to the joint is not allowed to be lower than the PCC after the grinding operation. Transition the grinding into the asphalt pavement in a way that ensures good smoothness and provides drainage of water. The joint and adjacent materials when completed is required to meet all of the requirements for grade and smoothness. Measure smoothness across the asphalt pavement-PCC joint using a 4 m straightedge. The acceptable tolerance is 3 mm.
e. Consider the asphalt pavement next to the PCC as a separate lot for evaluation. Lots are based on individual lifts. Do not comingle cores from different lifts for density evaluation purposes. Take four cores for each lot of material placed adjacent to the joint. The size of lot is 3 m wide by the length of the joint being paved. Locate the center of each of the four cores 150 mm from the edge of the concrete. Take each core at a random location along the length of the joint. The requirements for joint density for this lot, adjacent to the PCC joint, are the same as that for the mat density specified in Table 1. For asphalt pavement-PCC joints at taxiways abutting runways, aprons, or other taxiways, take two additional randomly located cores along each taxiway intersection.
f. All procedures, including repair of damaged PCC, are required to be in accordance with the approved Quality Control Plan.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 12 15.13 Page 28 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 13 13.43
HIGH TEMPERATURE CONCRETE PAVING FOR AIRFIELDS USING TRAPROCK AGGREGATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 UNIT PRICES
1.1.1 Measurements
The quantity of concrete to be paid for will be the volume of concrete in cubic meters including thickened edges, where required, placed in the completed and accepted pavement. Concrete will be measured in place in the completed and accepted pavement only within the neat line dimensions shown in the plan and cross section. No deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges or the space occupied by pavement reinforcement, dowel bars, or electrical conduits, nor for any void, or other structure extending into or through the pavement slab, measuring 0.1 cubic meter or less in volume. No other allowance for concrete will be made unless placed in specified locations in accordance with the approved contract modification. The quantity of other materials specified herein, and used in the construction of the work covered by this section, will not be measured for payment, but will be considered a subsidiary obligation, covered under the price per cubic meter for concrete. Joint sealing materials are covered in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
1.1.2 Payments
1.1.2.1 Lump Sum
The quantity of concrete will be paid for and included in the lump-sum contract price. If less than 100 percent payment is due based on the pay factors stipulated below, a unit price of 1000 US dollars per cubic meter will be used for purposes of calculating the payment reduction.
1.1.3 Payment of Lots
When a lot of material fails to meet the specification requirements, that lot will be accepted at a reduced price or be removed and replaced. The lowest computed percent payment determined for any pavement characteristic discussed below (for example, thickness, grade, and surface smoothness) becomes the actual percent payment for that lot. The actual percent payment will be applied to the unit price and the measured quantity of concrete in the lot to determine actual payment. Use results of strength tests to control concreting operations. Strength will be evaluated, but will not be considered for payment adjustment. Remove and replace any pavement not meeting the required 'Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance' at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.4 Payment Adjustment for Smoothness
1.1.4.1 Straightedge Testing
Record location and deviation from straightedge for all measurements. When more than 5.0 and less than or equal to 10.0 percent of all measurements made within a lot exceed the tolerance specified in paragraph
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SURFACE SMOOTHNESS, after any reduction of high spots or removal and replacement, the computed percent payment based on surface smoothness will be 95 percent. When more than 10.0 percent and less than or equal to 15.0 percent of all measurements exceed the tolerance, the computed percent payment will be 90 percent. When more than 15.0 and less than or equal to 20.0 percent of all measurements exceed the tolerance, the computed percent payment will be 75 percent. Remove and replace the lot when more than 20.0 percent of the measurements exceed the tolerance, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.4.2 Profilograph Testing
Record location and data from all profilograph measurements. When the Profile Index of a 0.1 km segment of a lot exceeds the tolerance specified in paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS by 16 mm per km but less than 32 mm per km, after any reduction of high spots or removal and replacement, the computed percent payment based on surface smoothness will be 95 percent. When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 32 mm per km but less than 47 mm per km, the computed percent payment will be 90 percent. When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 47 mm per km but less than 63 mm per km, the computed percent payment will be 75 percent. Remove and replace the lot when the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 63 mm per km or more, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.5 Payment Adjustment for Plan Grade
When more than 5.0 and less than or equal to 10.0 percent of all measurements made within a lot are outside the specified tolerance, the computed percent payment for that lot will be 95 percent. When more than 10.0 percent but less than 50 percent are outside the specified tolerances, the computed percent payment for the lot will be 75 percent. Remove and replace the deficient area where the deviation from grade exceeds the specified tolerances by 50 percent or more, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.6 Payment Adjustment for Thickness
Using the Average Thickness of the lot, determine the computed percent payment for thickness by entering the following table:
Computed Percent Payment for Thickness
Deficiency in Thickness Pavements Equal To or Pavements Less Than 200 mm Determined by cores Greater Than 200 mm Thick Thick millimeters
0.00 to 6.2 100 100
6.3 to 12.5 75 65
12.6 to 18.9 50 0
19.0 or greater 0 0
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Where 0 percent payment is indicated, remove the entire lot and replace at no additional cost to the Government. Where either of the two cores from a sublot show a thickness deficiency of 19 mm or greater, drill two more cores in the sublot and compute the average thickness of the four cores. If this average shows a thickness deficiency of 19 mm or more remove the entire sublot.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182 (2005; R 2017) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 325.14R (2017) Guide for Design and Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures for Pavements
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A185/A185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
ASTM A615/A615M (2016) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A722/A722M (2015) Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bar for Prestressing Concrete
ASTM A775/A775M (2017) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A996/A996M (2016) Standard Specification for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A1064/A1064M (2017) Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
ASTM C31/C31M (2019) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33/C33M (2018) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39/C39M (2018) Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C78/C78M (2018) Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C88 (2018) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C94/C94M (2018) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C117 (2017) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C123 (2014) Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate
ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C138/C138M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C142/C142M (2017) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTM C143/C143M (2015) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150/C150M (2018) Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C171 (2016) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM C172/C172M (2017) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C173/C173M (2016) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
ASTM C231/C231M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C294 (2012; R 2017) Standard Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C295/C295M (2018a) Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C494/C494M (2017) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C618 (2019) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C881/C881M (2015) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
ASTM C1017/C1017M (2013; E 2015) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete
ASTM C1064/C1064M (2017) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C1077 (2017) Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation
ASTM C1116/C1116M (2010a; R 2015) Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete
ASTM C1231/C1231M (2015) Standard Practice for Use of Unbonded Caps in Determination of Compressive Strength of Hardened Concrete Cylinders
ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C1602/C1602M (2018) Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM D1752 (2018) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM D3665 (2012; R 2017) Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials
ASTM D4791 (2010) Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D5893/D5893M (2016) Standard Specification for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
ASTM E1274 (2018) Standard Test Method for Measuring Pavement Roughness Using a Profilograph
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)
NRMCA QC 3 (2015) Quality Control Manual: Section 3, Plant Certifications Checklist: Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities
NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION MATERIALS BUREAU (NYSDOT)
NY 703-19 E (2008) Moisture Content of Lightweight Fine Aggregate
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
COE CRD-C 55 (1992) Test Method for Within-Batch Uniformity of Freshly Mixed Concrete
COE CRD-C 130 (2001) Standard Recommended Practice for Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate Particles
COE CRD-C 143 (1962) Specifications for Meters for Automatic Indication of Moisture in Fine Aggregate
COE CRD-C 300 (1990) Specifications for Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
COE CRD-C 521 (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Diamond Grinding Plan; G
Dowels; G
Dowel Bar Assemblies; G
Equipment; G
Proposed Techniques; G
Forms; G
Reinforcement
Supports; G
Curing Materials
Surface Sealer Solution; G
SD-05 Design Data
Preliminary Proposed Proportioning; G
Proportioning Studies; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Batch Plant Manufacturer's Inspection Report; G
Slipform Paver Manufacturer's Inspection Report; G
Sampling and Testing; G
Diamond Grinding of HTC Surfaces; G
Mixer Performance (Uniformity) Testing; G
Repair Recommendations Plan; G
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor Quality Control Staff; G
Laboratory Accreditation and Validation; G
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Commercial Laboratory; G
NRMCA Certificate of Conformance; G
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Contractor Quality Control Staff
Reference Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL for Contractor personnel qualification requirements. Submit American Concrete Institute certification for Contractor Quality Control Staff. Qualifications and resumes for petrographer, surveyor, concrete batch plant operator, and profilograph operator. All Contractor Quality Control personnel assigned to concrete construction are required to be American Concrete Institute (ACI) certified in the following grade:
a. The minimum requirements for the CQC System Manager consist of being a graduate engineer or a graduate of construction management, with a minimum of 5 years airfield construction experience and a minimum of 1 year experience as a CQC System Manager on an airfield construction project.
b. CQC personnel responsible for inspection of concrete paving operations: ACI Concrete Transportation Inspector. The ACI Concrete Transportation Inspector is required to be present at the paving site during all paving operations, with the exception of the initial saw cutting operation. The QC manager is required to be present during initial saw cutting operations.
c. CQC staff is required to oversee all aspects of sawing operations (sawing, flushing, vacuuming, checking for random cracking, lighting).
d. Lead Foreman or Journeyman of the Concrete Placing, Finishing, and Curing Crews: ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician/Finisher.
e. Batch Plant Manufacturer's Representative: A representative from the batch plant manufacturer is required to be on-site to inspect and make necessary adjustments to all components of the batch plant including but not limited to aggregate bin weighing operations, water metering, cement and fly ash weighing devices. All necessary inspections and adjustments by the manufacturer representative is required to be performed prior to uniformity testing. Submit a written Batch Plant Manufacturer's Inspection Report signed by the representative noting all inspection items and corrections and stating the batch plant is capable of producing the volume of concrete as required herein.
f. Field Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I.
g. Slipform Paving Equipment Manufacturer's Representative: A representative of the slipform paving equipment manufacturer is required to be on-site to inspect and make corrections to the paving equipment to ensure proper operations. Perform a complete and full hydraulic flow test of the vibrator system prior to the test section being placed. Submit a written Slipform Paver Manufacturer's Inspection Report signed by the manufacturer's representative noting all inspections, corrections, and flow tests have been performed and the paver is in a condition to perform the required work.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
h. Laboratory Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I or II.
1.4.2 Other Staff
Submit for approval, the qualifications and resumes for the following staff:
a. Petrographer: Bachelor of Science degree in geology or petrography, trained in petrographic examination of concrete aggregate according to ASTM C294 and ASTM C295/C295M and trained in identification of the specific deleterious materials and tests identified in this specification. Detail the education, training and experience related to the project-specific test methods and deleterious materials in the Resume and submit at least 20 days before petrographic and deleterious materials examination is to commence.
b. Licensed Surveyor: Perform all survey work under the supervision of a Licensed Surveyor.
c. Concrete Batch Plant Operator: National Ready Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA) Plant Manager certification.
d. Profilograph Operator: Certification by equipment manufacturer or a state Department of Transportation.
1.4.3 Laboratory Accreditation and Validation
Provide laboratory and testing facilities. Submit accreditation of the commercial laboratory by an independent evaluation authority, indicating conformance to ASTM C1077, including all applicable test procedures. The laboratories performing the tests are required to be accredited in accordance with ASTM C1077, including ASTM C78/C78M and ASTM C1260. Provide current accreditation and include the required and optional test methods, as specified. Provide on-site temperature-controlled concrete curing facilities.
1.4.3.1 Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning
Aggregate testing and mixture proportioning studies are required to be performed by a commercial laboratory.
1.4.3.2 Acceptance Testing
Provide all materials, labor, and facilities required for molding, curing, testing, and protecting test specimens at the paving site and in the laboratory. Provide steel molds for molding the beam specimens. Provide and maintain boxes or other facilities suitable for storing and curing the specimens at the paving site while in the mold within the temperature range stipulated by ASTM C31/C31M. Provide flexural loading equipment in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
1.4.3.3 Contractor Quality Control
All sampling and testing is required to be performed by an approved, on-site, independent, commercial laboratory, or for cementitious materials and admixtures, the manufacturer's laboratory.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4.3.4 Laboratory Inspection
The Government will inspect all laboratories requiring validation for equipment and test procedures prior to the start of any concreting operations for conformance to ASTM C1077. Schedule and provide payment for laboratory inspections. Additional payment or a time extension due to failure to acquire the required laboratory validation is not allowed. The laboratory is to maintain this certification for the duration of the project.
1.4.4 Preconstruction Testing of Materials
All sampling and testing is required to be performed. Use an approved commercial laboratory or, for cementitious materials and chemical admixtures, a laboratory maintained by the manufacturer of the material. Materials are not allowed to be used until notice of acceptance has been given. Additional payment or extension of time due to failure of any material to meet project requirements, or for any additional sampling or testing required is not allowed. Additional tests may be performed by the Government; such Government testing does not relieve any required testing responsibilities.
1.4.4.1 Aggregates
Sample aggregates in the presence of a Government Representative. Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M and be representative of the materials to be used for the project. Perform all aggregate tests no earlier than 120 days prior to contract award. Submit test results a minimum of 7 days before commencing mixture proportioning studies.
1.4.4.2 Chemical Admixtures, Curing Compounds and Epoxies
At least 30 days before the material is used, submit certified copies of test results for the specific lots or batches to be used on the project. Provide test results less than 6 months old prior to use in the work. Retest chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing, and rejected if test results do not meet manufacturer requirements.
1.4.4.3 Cementitious Materials
Cement, slag cement, will be accepted on the basis of manufacturer's certification of compliance, accompanied by mill test reports showing that the material in each shipment meets the requirements of the specification under which it is provided. Provide mill test reports no more than 1 month old, prior to use in the work. Do not use cementitious materials until notice of acceptance has been given. Cementitious materials may be subjected to testing by the Government from samples obtained at the mill, at transfer points, or at the project site. If tests prove that a cementitious material that has been delivered is unsatisfactory, promptly remove it from the project site. Retest cementitious material that has not been used within 6 months after testing, and reject if test results do not meet manufacturer requirements.
1.4.4.4 Multifilament Polypropylene Fibers
Multifilament polypropylene fibers will be accepted on the basis of the manufacturer's certification of compliance, accompanied by test reports showing that the material in each shipment meets the requirements of the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
specification under which it is furnished. Test reports must be no older than 6 months, prior to use in the work. Fibers may be subjected to check testing by the Government from samples obtained at the manufacturer site, at transfer points, or at the project site. Promptly remove all unsatisfactory fiber material that has been delivered to the site. Retest fibers that have not been used within 6 months after initial testing at the Contractor's expense. The Government can reject fiber material if results are not satisfactory.
1.4.5 Testing During Construction
During construction, the Contractor is responsible for sampling and testing aggregates, cementitious materials, and concrete as specified herein. The Government will sample and test concrete and ingredient materials as considered appropriate. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Testing by the Government will in no way relieve the Contractor of the specified testing requirements.
1.4.6 Test Batches and Sections
a. At least 10 days but not more than 90 days prior to construction of the concrete pavement, conduct trial batches and build two test sections as described herein. Provide a dedicated concrete batch plant for the Test Batch, Test Section and Production Paving production while batching is being conducted for that day. To avoid cross contamination, it is not permissible to produce other loads of other concrete between loads of High Temperature Concrete.
b. Prepare up to five, 3.8 cubic meter traprock batches of High Temperature Concrete to optimize mix proportions to field conditions. Start test Batches no sooner than 60 days and completed no later than 30 days prior to production paving. Prepare batches in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Government. Batches may be placed at or near batch plant to improve coordination of mix proportion adjustment. Conduct test batches at or near the batch plant to simulate travel time to site. Place batches in forms, nominally 3 m x 3 m and 300 mm thick. Provide hand-held vibrators, strike-off and hand floats similar to what will be used for production and paving. It is not required to cure test batch pads; this enables observation of time to any potential cracking.
c. Fabricate and cure six beams and six cylinders per test batch in accordance with ASTM C1231/C1231M, using 150 mm x 150 mm steel forms and 150 mm x 300 mm single-use or steel cylinder forms. Cure and test 2 beams and 2 cylinders at 3, 7 and 28 days. Test beams in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M, cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M. Extract two 150 mm diameter cores from selected pads. Contracting Officer may reduce the amount of testing.
d. Concrete loads that are rejected due to noncompliance of this specification, including temperature, slump and water/cement ratio, do not count as part of the ten test batches.
1.4.6.1 Test Sections - Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Construct two test sections near the job site at a location agreed upon with Contracting Officer, but not as part of the production pavement area. Commence test section paving after Government and Contractor have
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
agreed upon target proportions from Test Batches. Use the test sections to develop and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer the proposed techniques of SSD stockpile moisture content determination during production paving, mixing, hauling, placing, consolidating, finishing, brooming, curing, initial saw cutting, start-up procedures, testing methods, plant operations, and the preparation of the construction joints. Include use of proposed conveyor at maximum extension necessary for production paving. Variations in mixture proportions can only be made in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Calibrate and operate the mixing plant prior to start of placing the test section. Use the same equipment, materials, and construction techniques on the test section as will be used in all subsequent work, including reinforcing steel. Provide base course preparation of 150 mm thick layer of the same granular base, concrete production, placing, consolidating, curing, construction of joints, and all testing in accordance with applicable provisions of this specification. Within three days after completion of each test section, provide up to six cores 150 mm diameter by full depth cut from points selected in the test section by the Government. The cores will be evaluated by the Government. Construct the test section meeting all specification requirements and being acceptable to the Contracting Officer in all aspects, including surface texture. Failure to follow specification requirements will necessitate construction of additional test sections at no additional cost to the Government. Do not commence production paving until the results on aggregates and concrete, concrete has reached the specified 28 day strength, and evaluation of the cores, and all pavement measurements for actual plan grade, surface smoothness and thickness have been submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer.
a. First Test Section
Construct the first test section to consist of one paving lane at least 30 m long and constructed 300 mm thick on a 150 mm thick layer of the same granular base prepared and compacted as required for the production paving. Provide a lane width of. Wet cure pilot lane for 14 days.
b. Second Test Section
Construct a second test section lane adjacent to the first lane with the same dimensions as the first test lane after the minimum wet cure time of first lane per paragraph WET CURING. Purpose is to further evaluate joint construction methods, differential shrinkage and Contractor's work sequencing. Provide a header at the end of the lane. To demonstrate an unplanned transverse construction joint, provide a split header with reinforcement protruding. All requirements for the test section are applicable, as appropriate. Wet cure fill-in lane.
c. Cracks in Test Sections
Cracks are expected to, but do not always, develop in test sections. If cracks do occur in test section lanes, inform Contracting Officer to notify cognizant Corps of Engineers Transportation Systems Center (TSMCX), the Air Force Civil Engineer Center (AFCEC) pavement Subject Matter Expert (SME), or Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC, Echelon III) Pavement Engineer.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4.6.2 Test Section - Plain Jointed Concrete
Up to 10 days, but not more than 60 days, prior to construction of the concrete pavement, construct a test section as part of the production paving area at an outer edge as indicated on the drawings. Construct test section of the same depth as the course which it represents. The underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be constructed is required to be the same as the remainder of the course represented by the test section. The equipment used in construction of the test section is required to be the same equipment to be used on the remainder of the course represented by the test section. Use the test section to develop and demonstrate the proposed techniques of mixing, hauling, placing, consolidating, finishing, curing, initial saw cutting, start-up procedures, testing methods, plant operations, and the preparation of the construction joints. Perform variations in mixture proportions, other than water, if directed. Operate and calibrate the mixing plant prior to start of placing the test section. Use the same equipment, materials, and construction techniques on the test section proposed for use in all subsequent work. Perform base course preparation, concrete production, placing, consolidating, curing, construction of joints, and all testing in accordance with applicable provisions of this specification. Three days after completion of the test section, provide eight cores at least 150 mm in diameter by full depth cut from points selected in the test section by the Government. Construct the test section meeting all specification requirements and being acceptable in all aspects, including surface texture, thickness, grade, and longitudinal and transverse joint alignment. Failure to construct an acceptable test section necessitates construction of additional test sections at no additional cost to the Government. Remove test sections allowed to be constructed as part of the production pavement which do not meet specification requirements at no expense to the Government. If slipform paving is performed and is unable to construct an acceptable test section, repair or replace the slipform paving equipment, or paving completed using fixed-forms and equipment compatible with them and allowed by the specification. Do not commence production paving until the results on aggregates and concrete, including evaluation of cores, and all pavement measurements for edge slump, joint face deformation, actual plan grade, surface smoothness and thickness have been submitted and approved. Pavement accepted as a production lot will be evaluated and paid as specified in PART 1 GENERAL.
1.4.6.2.1 Pilot Lane
Construct the test section consisting of one paving lane at least 50 m long and to the same thickness as the thickest portion of pavement shown on the Drawings. Construct at the same lane width as that required for use in the project. Provide at least one transverse construction joint in the test section. If doweled longitudinal construction joints are required in any of the production pavements, install them full length along one side of the test lane throughout the test section. Construct the test section on two separate days.
1.4.6.2.2 Fill-In Lane
Consider the first 50 m of the initial production fill-in lane as a fill-in lane test section for purposes of testing and evaluation. All requirements for the test section are applicable. Obtain cores from the fill-in lane side of the longitudinal construction joint with the pilot lane.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4.7 Acceptability of Work
The materials and the pavement itself will be accepted on the basis of production testing. The Government may make check tests to validate the results of the production testing. If the results of the production testing vary by less than 2.0 percent of the Government's test results, the results of the production testing will be used. If the results of the Government and production tests vary by 2.0 percent, but less than 4.0 percent, the average of the two will be considered the value to be used. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, carefully evaluate each sampling and testing procedure and obtain another series of Government and production tests on duplicate samples of material. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, use the results of the tests made by the Government and the Government will continue check testing of this item on a continuous basis until the two sets of tests agree within less than 4.0 percent on a regular basis. Testing performed by the Government does not relieve the specified testing requirements.
1.4.8 Acceptance Requirements
1.4.8.1 Pavement Lots - Continually Reinforced Concrete
A lot will be that quantity of construction that will be evaluated for acceptance with specification requirements. A lot will be equal to one shift of production, not to exceed 76 cubic meters for continuously reinforced areas. For non-continuously reinforced areas, a lot is equal to one shift of production, not to exceed 230 cubic meters. Each lot will be divided into two equal sublots. Grade and surface smoothness determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. All samples locations are to be selected on a random basis in accordance with ASTM D3665.
1.4.8.2 Pavement Lots - Plain Jointed Concrete
A lot is that quantity of construction to be evaluated for acceptance with specification requirements. A lot is equal to one shift of production not to exceed 750 cubic meters. In order to evaluate thickness, divide each lot into four equal sublots. A sublot is equal to one shift of production not to exceed 190 cubic meters. Grade determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Surface smoothness determinations will be made on every 0.1 km segment in each lot. Select sample locations on a random basis in accordance with ASTM D3665. When operational conditions cause a lot to be terminated before the specified four sublots have been completed, use the following procedure to adjust the lot size and number of tests for the lot. Where three sublots have been completed, they constitute a lot. Where one or two sublots have been completed, incorporate them into the next lot (except for the last lot), and the total number of sublots used and acceptance criteria adjusted accordingly.
1.4.8.3 Evaluation
Provide all sampling and testing required for acceptance and payment adjustment, including batch tickets with all required acceptance testing. Individuals performing sampling, testing and inspection duties are required to meet the Qualifications. The Government reserves the right to direct additional samples and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification requirements. Testing in these areas are in addition to the sublot or lot testing, and the requirements for these
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
areas are the same as those for a sublot or lot. Provide facilities for and, where directed, personnel to assist in obtaining samples for any Government testing.
1.4.8.4 Additional Sampling and Testing
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification requirements. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the sublot or lot testing, and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those for a sublot or lot. Provide facilities for and, where directed, personnel to assist in obtaining samples for any Government testing.
1.4.9 Levelness Survey
Provide post-construction survey with a 3.048 meter grid of the 304.8 x 304.8 VL Pad as indicated on the drawings. Provide in CSV file format (Point, Northing Easting, Elevation) and a scaled, English language, PDF drawing. Grind areas varying by more than 3 mm from elevations indicated on according to paragraph DIAMOND GRINDING OF PCC SURFACES at the discretion of the Contracting Officer resulting from the review of this document.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Bulk Cementitious Materials
Provide all cementitious materials in bulk at a temperature, as delivered to storage at the site, not exceeding 65 degrees C. Provide sufficient cementitious materials in storage to sustain continuous operation of the concrete mixing plant while the pavement is being placed. Provide separate facilities to prevent any intermixing during unloading, transporting, storing, and handling of each type of cementitious material.
1.5.2 Aggregate Materials
Store aggregate at the site of the batching and mixing plant avoiding breakage, segregation, intermixing or contamination by foreign materials. Store each size of aggregate from each source separately in free-draining stockpiles. Provide a minimum 0.6 m thick sacrificial layer left undisturbed for each aggregate stored on ground. Provide free-draining storage for fine aggregate and the smallest size coarse aggregate for at least 24 hours immediately prior to use. Maintain sufficient aggregate at the site at all times to permit continuous uninterrupted operation of the mixing plant at the time concrete pavement is being placed. Do not allow tracked equipment on coarse aggregate stockpiles.
Any aggregate, coarse or fine, that is not approved for High Temperature Concrete, that is observed or detected in a stockpile must constitute rejection of the complete stockpile. Any debris, mud, dirt, organic matter, trash, garbage or any other material that Contracting Officer deems detrimental to the High Temperature Concrete, regardless of the quantity, must constitute rejection of the stockpile. Ensure that batch plant loaders, hoppers, conveyors, weigh hoppers, drums, mixers, conveyors, haul truck beds, delivery truck beds, rail cars, delivery containers, and other equipment are cleaned, washed and be free of any non-High Temperature Concrete aggregate. Any unapproved material in the High Temperature Concrete is considered noncompliant and rejection, removal and replacement of the entire affected lot is required at
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Contractor's expense. Instruct loader operators not to disturb the bottom 300 mm layer of aggregate. Post a sign at the working face of each stockpile. If all the aggregate for the project will not be stockpiled at one time then access from all sides of the stockpile for charging the batch plant is required. Stockpile and continuously water manufactured traprock sands for a planned day's placement by sprinklers for 7 days prior to paving. Spraying by water trucks or hand-held hoses is supplemental but does not replace continuous sprinkler operation. Maintain sufficient watered aggregate at the site at all times to permit continuous uninterrupted operation of the mixing plant at the time concrete pavement is being placed. Tracked equipment is not permitted on aggregate stockpiles. Protect all aggregate from contamination of other stockpiles, materials or deleterious material considered objectionable to Government. Reject all unsatisfactory stockpiles.
1.5.3 Multifilament Polypropylene Fibers
Furnish all fibers in bulk or water soluble bags added at the plant. Store fibers in a dry and protected location and protected from damage.
1.5.4 Other Materials
Store reinforcing bars and accessories above the ground on supports. Store all materials to avoiding contamination and deterioration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section is intended to stand alone for construction of High Temperature Concrete airfield pavement for applied pavement temperatures of 482 degrees Celsius or above. However, where the construction covered herein interfaces with other sections, construct each interface to conform to the requirements of both this section and the other section, including tolerances for both. Aggregates for High Temperature Concrete are defined as traprock. This specification is for traprock aggregate only. Aggregates for High Temperature Concrete require additional modified testing and time for materials testing compared to normal weight concrete. High temperature concrete aggregates are very specific. Contractor to enact additional precautions to avoid cross-contamination with other materials during transportation (rail cars, trucks, containers clean of other materials), during stockpiling, and not laying tools directly on ground during placing and finishing. Contractor must note there are substantial scheduling requirements for test lanes, placing sequence, wet curing, joint sealing, sodium silicate application, and pavement markings. It requires approximately 100 days for materials sampling through test section paving and another 100 days for placement through sodium silicate application. Where the construction covered herein interfaces with other sections, the construction at each interface must conform to the requirements of either this section or the other section, whichever has the more stringent tolerances.
2.1.1 Surface Smoothness
Use the profilograph method for all longitudinal testing, except for paving lanes less than 60 m in length. Use the straightedge method for transverse testing, for longitudinal testing where the length of each pavement lane is less than 60 m, and at the ends of the paving limits for the project. Smoothness requirements do not apply over crowns, drainage
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
structures, or similar penetration. Maintain detailed notes of the testing results and provide a copy to the Government after each day's testing.
2.1.1.1 Straightedge Testing
2.1.1.1.1 For Certified Vertical Landing Spots
Provide the finished surfaces of the pavements with no abrupt change of 3 mm or more, and all pavements within the limits specified when checked with an approved 4 m straightedge. Provide vertical landing spots with a variation from the specified straight edge not greater than 3 mm in the longitudinal direction and not greater than 3 mm in the transverse direction.
2.1.1.1.2 For All Other Areas
Provide the finished surfaces of the pavements with no abrupt change of 6 mm or more, and all pavements within the limits specified when checked with an approved 4 m straightedge. Provide all other airfield areas with a variation from a straight edge not greater than 6 mm in either the longitudinal or transverse direction.
2.1.1.2 Profilograph Testing
Provide the finished surfaces of the pavements with no abrupt change of 6 mm or more, and each 0.1 km segment of each pavement lot with a Profile Index not greater than specified when tested with an approved California-type profilograph.
2.1.1.3 Bumps ("Must Grind" Areas)
Reduce any bumps ("must grind" areas) shown on the profilograph trace which exceed 10 mm in height by diamond grinding in accordance with subparagraph DIAMOND GRINDING OF PCC SURFACES below until they do not exceed 7.5 mm when retested. Taper such diamond grinding in all directions to provide smooth transitions to areas not requiring diamond grinding.
2.1.1.4 Testing Method
After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking thereon, but not later than 48 hours after placement, test the entire surface of the pavement in each lot in such a manner as to reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. If any pavement areas are diamond ground, retest these areas immediately after diamond grinding. Test the entire area of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. Perform the transverse lines 4.5 m or less apart, as directed. Perform the longitudinal lines at the centerline of each paving lane shown on the drawings, regardless of whether multiple lanes are allowed to be paved at the same time, and at the 1/8th point in from each side of the lane. Also test other areas having obvious deviations. Perform longitudinal testing lines continuous across all joints. Perform transverse testing lines for pilot lanes carried to construction joint lines and for fill-in lanes carried 600 mm across construction joints, and the readings in this area applied to the fill-in lane. Perform straightedge testing of the longitudinal edges of slipformed pilot lanes before paving fill-in lanes as specified below.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.1.4.1 Straightedge Testing
Hold the straightedge in contact with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface. Determine measurements along the entire length of the straight edge.
2.1.1.4.2 Profilograph Testing
Perform profilograph testing using approved California profilograph and procedures described in ASTM E1274. Utilize electronic recording and automatic computerized reduction of data equipment to indicate "must-grind" bumps and the Profile Index for each 0.1 km segment of the pavement lot. Accommodate grade breaks on aprons by breaking the profile segment into short sections and repositioning the blanking band on each section. Provide the "blanking band" of 5 mm wide and the "bump template" span 25 mm with an offset of 10 mm. Count the profilograph testing of the last 9.1 m of a paving lane in the longitudinal direction from each day's paving operation on the following day's continuation lane. Compute the profile index for each pass of the profilograph (3 per lane) in each 0.1 km segment. The profile index for each segment is the average of the profile indices for each pass in each segment. Scale and proportion profilograph's of unequal lengths to an equivalent 0.1 km as outlined in the ASTM E1274. Provide a copy of the reduced tapes to the Government at the end of each day's testing.
2.1.2 Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
2.1.2.1 Edge Slump
When slip-form paving is used, provide a maximum of 15.0 percent of the total free edge of each pavement panel with a maximum edge slump of 6 mm and none of the free edge of the pavement lot with an edge slump exceeding 9 mm. (A pavement panel is defined as a lane width by the length between two adjacent transverse contraction joints. The total free edge of the pavement is the cumulative total linear measurement of pavement panel edge originally constructed as non-adjacent to any existing pavement; for example, 30 m of pilot lane originally constructed as a separate lane, would have 60 m of free edge; 30 m of fill-in lane would have no free edge). The area affected by the downward movement of the concrete along the pavement edge is a maximum of 450 mm back from the edge.
2.1.2.2 Joint Face Deformation
In addition to the edge slump limits specified above, provide a vertical joint face with a surface within the maximum limits shown below:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Offset from Offset from Offset from Abrupt Offset Offset of Joint Straightedge Straightedge Straightedge in Any Face from True Applied Applied Applied Top to Direction (d) Vertical (e) Longitudinally Longitudinally Bottom Against to Pavement to Vertical the Joint Face Surface (a) Face (b) (c)
Airfield Pavement
3 mm 6 mm 9 mm 3 mm 8 mm per 100 mm
All Other Pavement
6 mm All other items same as airfield pavement
(a) Measurement is taken by placing the straightedge longitudinally on the pavement surface 25 mm from the free edge. (b) Measurement is taken by applying the straightedge longitudinally along the vertical joint face. (c) Measurement places a 9.5 mm spacer attached to a straightedge and spaced approximately equal to the thickness of the concrete being measured. The offset from straightedge with spacers is measured by placing the spacers against the top and bottom of the vertical concrete face.
(d) An abrupt offset in the joint face occurring along a short distance. Check for abrupt offsets at any location that an abrupt offset appears to be a possible issue.
(e) Measurement of the offset from the joint face to a level in the true vertical position against the joint face.
2.1.2.3 Slump Determination
Test the pavement surface to determine edge slump immediately after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking thereon. Perform testing with a minimum 4 m straightedge to reveal irregularities exceeding the edge slump tolerance specified above. Determine the vertical edge slump at each free edge of each slipformed paving lane constructed. Place the straightedge transverse to the direction of paving and the end of the straightedge located at the edge of the paving lane. Record measurements at 1.5 to 3.0 m a spacing, as directed, commencing at the header where paving was started. Initially record measurements at 1.5 m intervals in each lane. When no deficiencies are present after 5 measurements, the interval may be increased. The maximum interval is 3.0 m. When any deficiencies exist, return the interval to 1.5 m. In addition to the transverse edge slump determination above, at the same time, record the longitudinal surface smoothness of the joint on a continuous line 25 mm back from the joint line using the minimum 4 m straightedge advanced one-half its length for each reading. Perform other tests of the exposed joint face to ensure that a uniform, true vertical joint face is attained. Properly reference all recorded measurements in accordance with paving lane identification and stationing, and a report submitted within 24 hours after measurement is made. Identify areas requiring replacement within the report.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.2.4 Excessive Edge Slump
When edge slump exceeding the limits specified above is encountered on either side of the paving lane, record additional straightedge measurements to define the linear limits of the excessive slump. Remove and replace concrete slabs having excessive edge slump or joint deformation to the next transverse joint in conformance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Discontinue use of slip-form paving equipment and procedures that fail to consistently provide edges within the specified tolerances on edge slump and joint face deformation construct by means of standard paving procedures using fixed forms.
2.1.3 Plan Grade
Within 5 days after paving of each lot, test the finished surface of the pavement area by running lines of levels at intervals corresponding with every longitudinal and transverse joint to determine the elevation at each joint intersection. Record the results of this survey and provide a copy to the Government at the completion of the survey of each lot. Provide finished surfaces of all airfield pavements that vary less than 13 mm above or below the plan grade line or elevation indicated. The above deviations from the approved grade line and elevation are not permitted in areas where closer conformance with the planned grade and elevation is required for the proper functioning of appurtenant structures. Provide finished surfaces of new abutting pavements that coincide at their juncture. Provide horizontal control of the finished surfaces of all airfield pavements that vary not more than 13 mm from the plan alignment indicated.
2.1.4 Flexural Strength
Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports and sources for cement, supplementary cementitious materials (SCM), aggregates, admixtures, curing compound, epoxy, and proprietary patching materials proposed for use on this project. Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance in accordance with the following procedures.
2.1.4.1 Sampling and Testing
For acceptance, obtain one composite sample of concrete from each sublot in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M from one batch or truckload. Fabricate and cure test beams 152 x 152 mm in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M; and tested in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
2.1.4.2 Computations
Average the eight 14-day strength tests for the lot. Use the average strength in accordance with paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE.
2.1.5 Thickness
Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance and payment adjustment in accordance with the following procedure:
a. Contractor must maintain positive control of grades, and Contractor must also use surveyed elevations at the top of concrete and the top of the layer directly beneath the concrete elevation. Measure
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
elevations on a grid measuring a maximum of 6 m by 6 m. Contracting Officer may require additional surveyed elevations.
b. Prior to placing concrete, stringline across forms and measure proposed thickness of concrete. Correct any deficiencies prior to placement. Stringline measurements must be on a maximum 6 m spacing with at least 4 measurements between forms at each stringline position.
c. Do not extract cores from High Temperature Concrete production paving lanes unless explicitly directed in writing from Contracting Officer.
2.1.6 Evaluation of Cores
Record and submit testing, inspection, and evaluation of each core for surface paste, uniformity of aggregate distribution, segregation, voids, cracks, and depth of reinforcement or dowel (if present). Moisten the core with water to visibly expose the aggregate and take a minimum of three photographs of the sides of the core, rotating the core approximately 120 degrees between photographs. Include a ruler for scale in the photographs. Provide plan view of location for each core.
2.1.7 Diamond Grinding of HTC Surfaces
Those performing diamond grinding are required to have a minimum of three years experience in diamond grinding of airfield pavements. In areas not meeting the specified limits for surface smoothness and plan grade, reduce high areas to attain the required smoothness and grade, except as depth is limited below. Reduce high areas by diamond grinding the hardened concrete with an approved equipment after the concrete is at a minimum age of 14 days. Perform diamond grinding by sawing with an industrial diamond abrasive which is impregnated in the saw blades. Assemble the saw blades in a cutting head mounted on a machine designed specifically for diamond grinding that produces the required texture and smoothness level without damage to the concrete pavement or joint faces. Provide diamond grinding equipment with saw blades that are 3 mm wide, a minimum of 60 blades per 300 mm of cutting head width, and capable of cutting a path a minimum of 0.9 m wide. Diamond grinding equipment that causes ravels, aggregate fractures, spalls or disturbance to the joints is not permitted. The maximum area corrected by diamond grinding the surface of the hardened concrete is 10 percent of the total area of any sublot. The maximum depth of diamond grinding is 6 mm. Provide diamond grinding machine equipped to flush and vacuum the pavement surface. Dispose of all debris from diamond grinding operations off Government property. Prior to diamond grinding, submit a Diamond Grinding Plan for review and approval. At a minimum, include the daily reports for the deficient areas, the location and extent of deficiencies, corrective actions, and equipment. Remove and replace all pavement areas requiring plan grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above in conformance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. All areas in which diamond grinding has been performed are subject to the thickness tolerances specified in paragraph THICKNESS, above.
Prior to production diamond grinding operations, perform a test section at the approved location. Perform a test section that consists of a minimum of two adjacent passes with a minimum length of 12 m to allow evaluation of the finish, transition between adjacent passes, and the results of crossing a transverse joint. Production diamond grinding operations are not to be performed prior to approval.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.2 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Provide cementitious materials of portland cement in combination with supplementary cementitious materials (SCM), and must conform to appropriate specifications listed below. New submittals are required when the cementitious materials sources or types change.
2.2.1 Portland Cement
Portland cement must conform to ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, low alkali including false set requirements.
2.2.2 Pozzolan
2.2.2.1 Fly Ash
Provide fly ash that conforms to ASTM C618, Class F, including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica reaction with a loss on ignition not exceeding 3 percent. Provide Class F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity with a total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent.
2.2.3 Supplemental Cementitious Materials (SCM) Content
Provide a concrete mix that contain one of the SCMs listed in Table 2 within the range specified therein, whether or not the aggregates are found to be reactive in accordance with paragraph ALKALI SILICA REACTIVITY.
TABLE 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS CONTENT
Minimum Maximum Supplementary Cementitious Material Content Content
Class F Fly Ash SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 > 70 percent 25 percent 35 percent Si02 + A1203 + Fe203 > 80 percent 20 percent 35 percent Si02 + A1203 + Fe203 > 90 percent 15 percent 35 percent
2.3 AGGREGATES
Provide aggregates meeting the requirements of this specification. If aggregate sources in the project area do not meet the requirements of this specification, provide aggregates from sources outside the project area that do meet the requirements of this specification.
2.3.1 Aggregate Sources
Conduct aggregate sampling for testing no more than 120 days prior to test batching unless otherwise stated.
2.3.1.1 Combined Aggregate Gradation
In addition to the grading requirements specified for coarse aggregate and for fine aggregate, the combined aggregate grading must meet the following requirements for Workability and Coarseness factors, Percent Retained Chart, and 0.45 Power Curve. Coarse, intermediate and fine aggregate gradations are commonly required. Deliver coarse and fine aggregate as individual materials to batch plant.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
a. The materials selected and the proportions used must be such that when the Coarseness Factor (CF) and the Workability Factor (WF) are plotted on a diagram as described in. below, the point thus determined must fall within the parallelogram described therein.
(1) Determine the Coarseness Factor (CF) from the following equation: CF = (cumulative percent retained on the 9.5 mm sieve)(100)/(cumulative percent retained on the 2.36 mm sieve)
(2) The Workability Factor WF is defined as the percent passing the 2.36 mm sieve based on the combined gradation. Adjust the WF upwards only, by 2.5 percentage points for each 42 kg of cementitious material per cubic meter greater than 335 kg per cubic meter.
(3) For traprock aggregate only, a diagram must be plotted using a rectangular scale with WF on the Y-axis with units from 20 (bottom) to 45 (top), and with CF on the X-axis with units from 80 (left side) to 30 (right side). On this diagram a parallelogram must be plotted with corners at the following coordinates (CF-75, WF-28), (CF-75, WF-40), (CF-45, WF-32.5), and (CF-45, WF-44.5). If the point determined by the intersection of the computed CF and WF does not fall within the above parallelogram, the grading of each size of aggregate used and the proportions selected must be changed as necessary.)
b. Percent Retained Chart. Design the percent retained chart to meet the following criteria:
(1) The highest peak (the maximum percent retained) must be on the 9.5 mm sieve or larger. The proportions must also have at least 60 percent of the total aggregate mass be retained on the 4.75 mm sieve.
(2) There can only be at least 4 points difference between the two highest peaks.
(3) There can be no more than one low point between any two peaks. If there are two low points, the mixture is gap graded; if there are three or more low points, the mixture is severely gap graded and will not function as an airfield concrete mixture.
c. 0.45 Power Curve. The 0.45 power curve upper limit is defined as a line from the origin (0,0) to 100 percent at the 19 mm sieve. The 0.45 power curve lower limit is defined as a line starting at 21 percent at the 1.18 mm sieve to 100 percent at the 37.5 mm sieve. The combined gradation must plot within the upper and lower limits of the 0.45 Power Curve.
d. Some aggregate combinations may not be able to achieve all criteria. In this case, if the Workability and Coarseness factors plot correctly, the 0.45 Power Curve criteria is achieved, Criteria b.1 and b.2 of the Percent Retained Chart are achieved, and the mixture is demonstrated it can be placed, consolidated and finished to meet specification requirements, then the third Percent Retained Chart criteria, b.3, can be relaxed from specification requirements provided there are no more than two low points between any two peaks.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 23 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
e. Combined gradation of all the aggregates, coarse and fine, must have no more than 10 percent passing the 0.150 mm sieve.
2.3.1.2 Alkali-Silica Reactivity for Traprock
Evaluate and test fine and coarse traprock aggregates to be used in all concrete for alkali-aggregate reactivity. Test both coarse aggregate size groups.
a. Separately evaluate the fine and coarse aggregates using ASTM C1260. Test results of the individual aggregates must have a measured expansion equal to or less than 0.08 percent after 28 days of immersion in a 1N NaOH solution. Should the test data indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08 percent, reject the aggregate(s) or additional testing must be performed as follows: utilize the Contractor's proposed low alkali portland cement, blended cement, and/or SCM in combination with each individual aggregate. If only SCMs are being evaluated, the test in accordance with ASTM C1567. Determine the quantity that will meet all the requirements of these specifications and that will lower the expansion equal to or less than 0.08 percent after 28 days of immersion in a 1N NaOH solution. Base mixture proportioning on the highest percentage of SCM required to mitigate ASR-reactivity.
b. If any of the above options does not lower the expansion to less than 0.08 percent after 28 days of immersion in a 1N NaOH solution, reject the aggregate(s) and submit new aggregate sources for retesting. Submit the results of testing to the Contracting Officer for evaluation and acceptance.
2.3.1.3 Durability Testing for Traprock
Evaluate and test all fine and coarse aggregates to be used in all concrete for durability in accordance with ASTM C88. Provide fine and coarse aggregates with a maximum of 18 percent loss when subjected to 5 cycles using Magnesium Sulfate or a maximum of 12 percent loss when subjected to 5 cycles if Sodium Sulfate is used.
2.3.2 Coarse Aggregate
Aggregates, as delivered to the mixers, must consist of clean, uncoated particles. Contractor is required to conduct all testing identified in this specification.
2.3.2.1 Material Composition
Coarse aggregate used for High Temperature Concrete consist of a fine-grained aggregate composed of unweathered diabase or basalt as classified per ASTM C294 and meeting the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M except as specified herein. Identify and confirm coarse aggregate material meets the material specifications via ASTM C295/C295M and be coarse aggregate must not show more than 40 percent loss when subjected to the Los Angeles abrasion test in accordance with ASTM C131/C131M. The sodium sulfate soundness loss must not exceed 12 percent, or the magnesium sulfate soundness loss must not exceed 18 percent after five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C88.
The following list of aggregate suppliers that have provided coarse aggregate for past projects is provided for information only. No other
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 24 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
quarries are known that can meet the requirements of this specification for coarse aggregates used in High Temperature Concrete. No preference for these suppliers is provided.
Carolina Sunrock LLC 200 Horizon Dr Ste 100 Raleigh NC 27615 919-747-6324
Vulcan Materials Chula Vista Quarry 2041 Heritage Road Chula Vista, CA 91913
Pioneer Aggregates 4301 Pioneer Ave DuPont, WA 98327 253-380-3720
2.3.2.2 Particle Shape Characteristics
Provide particles of the coarse aggregate that are generally spherical or cubical in shape. The quantity of flat particles and elongated particles in any size group coarser than the 9.5 mm sieve are not allowed to exceed 20 percent by weight as determined by the Flat Particle Test and the Elongated Particle Test of ASTM D4791. A flat particle is defined as one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width greater than 3.
2.3.2.3 Size and Grading
For traprock aggregate, the Contractor must select either a 19 mm or 25 mm nominal maximum size aggregate. Grade and provide the individual aggregates in two size groups meeting the individual grading requirements of ASTM C33/C33M. Nominal maximum size is defined as the largest standard sieve size with 3 to 10 percent retained by weight. The individual aggregates are required to be graded and furnished in size groups to meet the coarseness and workability factor criteria for the Contractor-proposed combined gradation.
2.3.2.4 Deleterious Materials - Traprock
Do not exceed the amount of deleterious material in each size group of coarse aggregate shown in Table 3 below, determined in accordance with the test methods shown.
TABLE 3 LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE AGGREGATE FOR AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS Percentage by Mass
Severe Materials (h) Weather ______
Clay lumps and friable 0.2 particles (ASTM C142/C142M)
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 25 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 3 LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE AGGREGATE FOR AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS Percentage by Mass
Severe Materials (h) Weather ______
Shale (a) (ASTM C295/C295M) 0.1
Material finer than 0.5 0.075 mm sieve (b) (ASTM C117)
Lightweight particles (c) 0.2 (ASTM C123)
Clay ironstone (d) 0.1 (ASTM C295/C295M)
Chert and cherty stone (less than 0.1 2.40 Mg/cubic meter density SSD) (e) (ASTM C123 and ASTM C295/C295M)
Claystone, mudstone, and 0.1 siltstone (f) (ASTM C295/C295M)
Shaly and argillaceous 0.2 limestone (g) (ASTM C295/C295M)
Other soft particles 1.0 (COE CRD-C 130)
Total of all deleterious 1.0 substances exclusive of material finer than 0.075 mm sieve
a. Shale is defined as a fine-grained, thinly laminated or fissile sedimentary rock. It is commonly composed of clay or silt or both. It has been indurated by compaction or by cementation, but not so much as to have become slate.
b. Limit for material finer than 0.075 mm is allowed to be increased to 1.5 percent for crushed aggregates if the fine material consists of crusher dust that is essentially free from clay or shale. Use XRD or other appropriate techniques as determined by petrographer to quantify amount and justify increase.
c. The separation medium must have a density of 2.0 Mg/cubic meter.
d. Clay ironstone is defined as an impure variety of iron carbonate, iron oxide, hydrous iron oxide, or combinations thereof, commonly mixed with clay, silt, or sand. It commonly occurs as dull, earthy particles, homogeneous concretionary masses, or hard-shell particles with soft interiors. Other names commonly used for clay ironstone are "chocolate bars" and limonite concretions.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 26 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
e. Chert is defined as a rock composed of quartz, chalcedony or opal, or any mixture of these forms of silica. It is variable in color. The texture is so fine that the individual mineral grains are too small to be distinguished by the unaided eye. Its hardness is such that it scratches glass but is not scratched by a knife blade. It may contain impurities such as clay, carbonates, iron oxides, and other minerals. Cherty stone is defined as any type of rock (generally limestone) that contains chert as lenses and nodules, or irregular masses partially or completely replacing the original stone.
f. Claystone, mudstone, or siltstone, is defined as a massive fine-grained sedimentary rock that consists predominantly of indurated clay or silt without laminations or fissility. It may be indurated either by compaction or by cementation.
g. Shaly limestone is defined as limestone in which shale occurs as one or more thin beds or laminae. These laminae may be regular or very irregular and may be spaced from a few inches down to minute fractions of an inch. Argillaceous limestone is defined as a limestone in which clay minerals occur disseminated in the stone in the amount of 10 to 50 percent by weight of the rock; when these make up from 50 to 90 percent, the rock is known as calcareous (or dolomitic) shale (or claystone, mudstone, or siltstone).
h. Perform testing in accordance with the referenced test methods, except that the minimum sample size is specified below.
2.3.2.5 Testing Sequence/Deleterious Materials - Traprock Only
No extension of time or additional payment due to any delays caused by the testing, evaluation, or personnel requirements is allowed. The minimum test sample size of the coarse aggregate is 90 kg for the 19 mm and larger maximum size and 12 kg for the 4.75 to 19 mm coarse aggregate. Provide facilities for the ready procurement of representative test samples. The testing procedure on each sample of coarse aggregate for compliance with limits on deleterious materials is as follows:
Step 1: Wash each full sample of coarse aggregate for material finer than the 0.075 mm sieve. Discard material finer than the 0.075 mm sieve.
Step 2: Test remaining full sample for clay lumps and friable particles and remove.
Step 3. Test remaining full sample for chert and cherty stone with SSD density of less than 2.40 specific gravity. Remove lightweight chert and cherty stone. Retain other materials less than 2.40 specific gravity for Step 4.
Step 4: Test the materials less than 2.40 specific gravity from Step 3 for lightweight particles (Sp. GR. 2.0) and remove. Restore other materials less than 2.40 specific gravity to the sample.
Step 5: Test remaining sample for clay-ironstone, shale, claystone, mudstone, siltstone, shaly and argillaceous limestone, and remove.
Step 6: Test a minimum of one-fifth of remaining full sample for other soft particles.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 27 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.3.3 Fine Aggregate
2.3.3.1 Composition
Traprock fine aggregate must meet requirements of paragraph DELETERIOUS MATERIALS FOR TRAPROCK FINE AGGREGATE to include the parent material consisting of a fine-grained trap rock aggregate composed of unweathered diabase or basalt as classified per ASTM C294 and composed of clean, hard, durable particles meeting the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M. Stockpile and batch each type of fine aggregate separately. Provide fine aggregate with particles that are generally spherical or cubical in shape.
2.3.3.2 Grading
Grading of the fine aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, must conform to the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M for traprock. Select a gradation not to exceed the combined gradation limits for the amount passing the 0.150 mm sieve.
2.3.3.3 Deleterious Materials for Traprock Fine Aggregate
The amount of deleterious material in the fine aggregate must not exceed the following limits by mass:
Material Percentage by Mass ______
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C142/C142M 1.0
Material finer than 0.075 mm ASTM C117 3.0
Lightweight particles ASTM C123 using a medium 0.5 with a density of 2.0 Mg/cubic meter
Total of all above 3.0
2.4 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
2.4.1 General Requirements
Chemical admixtures may only be used when the specific admixture type and manufacturer is the same material used in the mixture proportioning studies. Provide air-entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C260/C260M. An accelerating admixture conforming to ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, may be used only when specified in paragraph MIXTURE PROPORTIONS below provided it is not used to reduce the amount of cementitious material. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing calcium chloride are not allowed. Provide retarding or water-reducing admixture that meet the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type A, B, or D, except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests are waived. ASTM C494/C494M, Type F and G high range water reducing admixtures and Type S specific performance admixtures are not allowed. ASTM C1017/C1017M flowable admixtures are not allowed.
2.5 MULTIFILAMENT POLYPROPYLENE FIBERS
Multifilament polypropylene fibers must have a length between 9.5 and 19 mm and either a maximum diameter of 0.4 mm or maximum average 10 denier weight. The concrete mix must contain 1.78 kg per cubic meter to prevent
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 28 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
spalling. Add the fibers to the concrete mixture at the batch plant. Fibers must be multifilament polypropylene meeting ASTM C1116/C1116M, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. Submit certified copies of the laboratory test results showing length, and diameter or denier.
2.6 CURING MATERIALS
2.6.1 Impervious Sheet
Impervious sheet materials must conform to ASTM C171.
2.6.2 Burlap and Cotton Mat
Burlap and cotton mat used for curing must conform to AASHTO M 182.
2.6.3 Membrane Forming Curing Compound
Membrane forming curing compound is prohibited from use where ever sodium silicate surface sealer is to be applied. Therefore membrane forming curing compound is limited only to vertical faces of pilot lane paving. Provide membrane forming curing compound that conforms to COE CRD-C 300 and is white pigmented.
2.7 WATER
Water for mixing and curing is required to be fresh, clean, potable, and free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali, except that non-potable water, or water from concrete production operations, may be used if it meets the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M.
2.8 REINFORCING
All reinforcement is required to be free from loose, flaky rust, loose scale, oil, grease, mud, or other coatings that might reduce the bond with concrete. Removal of thin powdery rust and tight rust is not required. However, reinforcing steel which is rusted to the extent that it does not conform to the required dimensions or mechanical properties must not be used.
2.8.1 Reinforcing Bars for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
a. Reinforcing bars must conform to ASTM A722/A722M Type 2, 25 mm nominal diameter threaded bars with a minimum yield strength of 827 MPa (Dywidag, Williams and Skylinesteel are possible sources, Grade 150) and conform to requirements shown on plans.
b. Reinforcement support is required to be continuous mesh supports or numerous chairs, and is required to be steel and support to height as shown on plans. Any sag or displacement of steel reinforcement during concrete placement is cause for rejection of paving lane with removal and replacement at Contractor's expense.
2.8.2 Welded Wire Reinforcement for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Provide welded wire reinforcement that is deformed or smooth, conforming to ASTM A1064/A1064M or ASTM A185/A185M, and is provided in flat sheets.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 29 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.9 JOINT MATERIALS
Joint filler and sealant materials is required as shown on plans and Specification 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS. Use only self-leveling silicone sealant meeting ASTM D5893/D5893M. Submit proposed methods and/or sacrificial materials for forming joint seal reservoir above expansion board.
2.9.1 Dowels
Provide dowels in single piece bars fabricated or cut to length at the shop or mill before delivery to the site. Dowels are to be free of loose, flaky rust and loose scale and be clean and straight. Dowels may be sheared to length provided that the deformation from true shape caused by shearing does not exceed 1 mm on the diameter of the dowel and does not extend more than 1 mm from the end of the dowel. Dowels are required to be plain (non-deformed) steel bars conforming to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 or 60; ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 50 or 60. Dowel bars are required to be epoxy coated in conformance with ASTM A775/A775M, to include the ends. Provide grout retention rings that are fully circular metal or plastic devices capable of supporting the dowel until the epoxy hardens. Dowel sleeves or inserts are not permitted.
2.9.2 Dowel Bar Assemblies
Provide dowel bar assemblies that consist of a framework of metal bars or wires arranged to provide rigid support for the dowels throughout the paving operation, with a minimum of four continuous bars or wires extending along the joint line. Provide dowels that are welded to the assembly or held firmly by mechanical locking arrangements that prevent them from rising, sliding out, or becoming distorted during paving operations.
2.9.3 Expansion Joint Materials
Expansion joint filler is required to be a preformed material conforming to ASTM D1752 Type II or Type III. Expansion joint filler is required to be 19 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. Expansion joint filler is required to be furnished in a single full depth piece.
2.10 EPOXY RESIN
Provide epoxy-resin materials that consist of two-component materials conforming to the requirements of ASTM C881/C881M, Class as appropriate for each application temperature to be encountered, except that in addition, the materials meet the following requirements:
a. Material for use for embedding dowels and anchor bolts be Type IV, Grade 3.
b. Material for use as patching materials for complete filling of spalls and other voids and for use in preparing epoxy resin mortar be Type III, Grade as approved.
c. Material for use for injecting cracks be Type IV, Grade 1.
d. Material for bonding freshly mixed portland cement concrete or mortar or freshly mixed epoxy resin concrete or mortar to hardened concrete be Type V, Grade as approved.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 30 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.11 EQUIPMENT
All plant, equipment, tools, and machines used in the work are required to be maintained in satisfactory working conditions at all times. Submit the following:
a. Details and data on the batching and mixing plant prior to plant assembly including manufacturer's literature showing that the equipment meets all requirements specified herein.
b. Obtain National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) certification of the concrete plant, at no expense to the Government. Provide inspection report of the concrete plant by an engineer approved by the NRMCA. A list of NRMCA approved engineers is available on the NRMCA website at http://www.nrmca.org. Submit a copy of the NRMCA QC Manual Section 3 Concrete Plant Certification Checklist, NRMCA Certificate of Conformance, and Calibration documentation on all measuring and weighing devices prior to uniformity testing.
c. A description of the equipment proposed for transporting concrete mixture from the central mixing plant to the paving equipment.
d. A description of the equipment proposed for the machine and hand placing, consolidating and curing of the concrete mixture. Manufacturer's literature on the paver and finisher, together with the manufacturer's written instructions on adjustments and operating procedures necessary to assure a tight, smooth surface on the concrete pavement. The literature is required to show that the equipment meets all details of these specifications. Include detailed information on automatic laser controlled systems if proposed for use.
2.11.1 Batching and Mixing Plant
2.11.1.1 Location
Locate the batching and mixing plant off Government premises no more than 15 minutes haul time from the placing site. Provide operable telephonic or radio communication between the plant and the placing site at all times concreting is taking place.
2.11.1.2 Type and Capacity
Provide a batching and mixing plant consisting of a stationary-type central mix plant, including permanent installations and portable or relocatable plants installed on stable foundations. Provide a plant designed and operated to produce concrete within the specified tolerances, with a minimum capacity of 200 cubic meters per hour, that conforms to the requirements of NRMCA QC 3 including provisions addressing:
1. Material Storage and Handling 2. Batching Equipment 3. Central Mixer 4. Ticketing System 5. Delivery System
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 31 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.11.1.3 Tolerances
Materials Percentage of Required Mass
Cementitious Materials plus or minus 1 Aggregate plus or minus 2 Water plus or minus 1 Admixture plus or minus 3
For volumetric batching equipment for water and admixtures, the above numeric tolerances apply to the required volume of material being batched. Dilute concentrated admixtures uniformly, if necessary, to provide sufficient volume per batch to ensure that the batchers consistently operate within the above tolerance.
2.11.1.4 Moisture Control
Provide a plant capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture contents of the aggregates and to change the quantities of the materials being batched. Provide an electric moisture meter complying with the provisions of COE CRD-C 143 for measuring of moisture in the fine aggregate. Provide a sensing element arranged so that measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of the fine aggregate bin or in the fine aggregate batcher.
2.11.2 Concrete Mixers
Stationary or truck mixers or approved horizontal shaft concrete mixers are permitted. Pugmills are not allowed. Mixers are required to be capable of combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation. The mixers are not be charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer. Operate the drum or or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer. Maintain the mixers in satisfactory operation condition. Keep mixer drums free of hardened concrete. Replace mixer blades or paddles when worn down more than 10 percent of their depth when compared with the manufacturer's dimension for new blades or paddles.
2.11.2.1 Stationary
Stationary mixers are required to be drum mixers. Mixers with a device to lock the discharge mechanism until the prescribed mixing time has elapsed in required.
2.11.2.2 Mixing Time and Uniformity for Stationary Mixers
For stationary mixers, the mixing time for each batch after all solid materials are in the mixer, including fibers, is determined in accordance with CRD-C-55 for stationary mixers and ASTM C 94 for truck mixers. For all mixtures, the minimum mixing time is 65 seconds; extend as necessary to achieve uniformity, and dispersal of multifilament polypropylene fiber. Immediately prior to any change in mixing time a mixer performance tests at the new mixing times is required. Conduct the Regular Test sequence with approved mix. For initial determination of the mixing time conduct the Regular Test sequence first. When regular testing is performed, the concrete must meet the limits of any five of the six uniformity
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 32 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
requirements listed in Table 1 below. Before batching of High Temperature Concrete per paragraph TEST BATCHES uniformity testing for normal weight concrete is required to conducted, submitted and approved.
2.11.2.3 Abbreviated Test
Conduct the Abbreviated Test sequence for production concrete verification at the frequency specified in Table 6. When abbreviated testing is performed, the concrete is required to meet only those requirements listed for abbreviated testing. Use the projects approved mix design proportions for uniformity testing. For regular testing perform all six tests on three batches of concrete. The range for regular testing is the average of the ranges of the three batches. Abbreviated testing consists of performing the three required tests on a single batch of concrete. The range for abbreviated testing is the range for one batch. If more than one mixer is used and all are identical in terms of make, type, capacity, condition, speed of rotation, the results of tests on one of the mixers apply to the others, subject to the approval. Perform all mixer performance (uniformity) testing in accordance with COE CRD-C 55 and with paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL in PART 3.
TABLE 1 UNIFORMITY REQUIREMENTS--STATIONARY MIXERS NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE
Regular Tests Abbreviated Tests Allowable Allowable Maximum Range for Maximum Range Parameter Average of 3 Batches for 1 Batch ______
Unit weight of air-free mortar 32 kg/cubic m 32 kg/cubic m
Air content 1.0 percent --
Slump 25 mm 25 mm
Coarse aggregate 6.0 percent 6.0 percent
Compressive strength at 7 days, 10.0 percent 10.0 percent
Water content 1.5 percent
2.11.2.4 Truck
Truck mixers are not allowed for mixing or transporting slipformed paving concrete. Provide only truck mixers designed for mixing or transporting paving concrete with extra large blading and rear opening specifically for low-slump paving concrete. Provide truck mixers, the mixing of concrete therein, and concrete uniformity and testing thereof that conform to the requirements of ASTM C94/C94M. Determine the number of revolutions between 70 to 100 for truck-mixed concrete and the number of revolutions for shrink-mixed concrete by uniformity tests as specified in ASTM C94/C94M and in requirements for mixer performance stated in paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL in PART 3. If requirements for the uniformity of concrete are not met with 100 revolutions of mixing after all ingredients including water are in the truck mixer drum,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 33 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
discontinue use of the mixer until the condition is corrected. Water is not allowed to be added after the initial introduction of mixing water except, when on arrival at the job site, the slump is less than specified and the water-cement ratio is less than that given as a maximum in the approved mixture. Additional water may be added to bring the slump within the specified range provided the approved water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Inject water into the head of the mixer (end opposite the discharge opening) drum under pressure, and turn the drum or blades a minimum of 30 additional revolutions at mixing speed. The addition of water to the batch at any later time is not allowed. Perform mixer performance (uniformity) tests for truck mixers in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
2.11.3 Transporting Equipment
Transport slipform concrete to the paving site in non-agitating equipment conforming to ASTM C94/C94M or in approved agitators. Transport fixed form concrete in approved truck mixers designed with extra large blading and rear opening specifically for low slump concrete. Provide transporting equipment designed and operated to deliver and discharge the required concrete mixture completely without segregation.
2.11.4 Transfer and Spreading Equipment
A telescoping conveyor for conveying concrete (transfer spreader belt placers not allowed)is required equipment for transferring concrete from the transporting equipment to the paving lane in front of the vibrating truss. The telescoping conveyor will accept the concrete outside the paving lane and will transfer and deposit it evenly across the paving lane in front of the vibrating truss to a depth which permits the vibrating truss to operate efficiently. High Temperature Concrete may also be discharged directly from ready mix trucks provided the concrete is deposited in its final location within 1 m radially from the end of the chute. Direct discharge from mixer trucks with specified low slump requires coordination of formwork and placement phasing. Do not allow haul trucks or equipment onto High Temperature Concrete unless joints have temporary backer rod inserted, surface is clean from any debris, concrete has reached 28 day strength, and protective matting is placed between truck wheels and concrete surface (curing materials are insufficient protective matting).
2.11.5 Vibrating Truss - For Continuously Reinforced Concrete
a. General: It is required that the vibrating truss screed has a triangular cross-section using a rotating eccentric weight type vibrator. Use three, 37.5 mm diameter or larger spud vibrators, with a fourth vibrator at the site on standby to achieved or supplement consolidation of High Temperature Concrete. Ensure a vibrator is inserted between every grid of reinforcement and where workers have stepped in fresh concrete. Roller screeds or other types of paving and finishing equipment are not permitted.
2.11.6 Paver-Finisher - For Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Provide paver-finisher consisting of a heavy-duty, self-propelled machine designed specifically for paving and finishing high quality pavement, with a minimum weight of 3280 kg per m of lane width, and powered by an engine having a minimum 15,000 W per m of lane width. The paver-finisher is required to spread, consolidate, and shape the plastic concrete to the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 34 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
desired cross section in one pass. The mechanisms for forming the pavement are required to be easily adjustable in width and thickness and for required crown. In addition to other spreaders required by paragraph above, the paver-finisher equipped with a full width knock-down auger or paddle mechanism, capable of operating in both directions, which evenly spreads the fresh concrete in front of the screed or extrusion plate.
2.11.6.1 Vibrators
Provide gang mounted immersion vibrators at the front of the paver on a frame equipped with suitable controls so that all vibrators can be operated at any desired depth within the slab or completely withdrawn from the concrete, as required. Provide vibrators that are automatically controlled to immediately stop as forward motion of the paver ceases. Equipped the paver-finisher with an electronic vibrator monitoring device displaying the operating frequency of each individual internal vibrator with a readout display visible to the paver operator that operates continuously while paving, and displays all vibrator frequencies with manual or automatic sequencing among all individual vibrators. Discontinue paving if the vibrator monitoring system fails to operate properly during the paving operation. Provide the spacing of the immersion vibrators across the paving lane as necessary to properly consolidate the concrete, with a maximum clear distance between vibrators of 750 mm and outside vibrators a maximum of 300 mm from the lane edge. Operate spud vibrators at a minimum frequency of 135 Hz and a minimum amplitude of 0.75 mm, as determined by COE CRD-C 521.
2.11.6.2 Screed or Extrusion Plate
Equipped the paver-finisher with a transversely oscillating screed or an extrusion plate to shape, compact, and smooth the surface and finish the surface that no significant amount of hand finishing, except use of cutting straightedges, is required. Provide a screed or extrusion plate constructed to adjust for crown in the pavement. Provide adjustment for variation in lane width or thickness and to prevent more than 200 mm of the screed or extrusion plate extending over previously placed concrete on either end when paving fill-in lanes. Repair or replace machines that cause displacement of properly installed forms or cause ruts or indentations in the prepared underlying materials and machines that cause frequent delays due to mechanical failures as directed.
2.11.6.3 Longitudinal Mechanical Float
A longitudinal mechanical float may be used. If used, provide a float that is specially designed and manufactured to smooth and finish the pavement surface without working excess paste to the surface that is rigidly attached to the rear of the paver-finisher or to a separate self-propelled frame spanning the paving lane. Provide float plate at least 1.5 m long by 200 mm wide and automatically be oscillated in the longitudinal direction while slowly moving from edge to edge of the paving lane, with the float plate in contact with the surface at all times.
2.11.6.4 Other Types of Finishing Equipment
Clary screeds, other rotating tube floats, or bridge deck finishers are not allowed on mainline paving, but may be allowed on irregular or odd-shaped slabs, and near buildings or trench drains, subject to approval. Provide bridge deck finishers with a minimum operating weight of 3400 kg that have a transversely operating carriage containing a
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 35 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
knock-down auger and a minimum of two immersion vibrators. Only use vibrating screeds or pans for isolated slabs where hand finishing is permitted as specified, and only where specifically approved.
2.11.6.5 Fixed Forms
Provide paver-finisher equipped with wheels designed to ride the forms, keep it aligned with the forms, and spread the load so as to prevent deformation of the forms. Provide paver-finishers traveling on guide rails located outside the paving lane that are equipped with wheels when traveling on new or existing concrete to remain. Alternatively, a modified slipform paver that straddles the forms may be used. Provide a modified slipform paver which has the side conforming plates removed or rendered ineffective and travels over or along pre-placed fixed forms.
2.11.6.6 Slipform
The slipform paver-finisher is required to be automatically controlled and crawler mounted with padded tracks so as to be completely stable under all operating conditions and provide a finish to the surface and edges so that no edge slump beyond allowable tolerance occurs. Provide suitable moving side forms that are adjustable and produce smooth, even edges, perpendicular to the top surface and meeting specification requirements for alignment and freedom from edge slump.
2.11.7 Texturing Equipment
Provide texturing equipment as specified below. Before use, demonstrate the texturing equipment on a test section, and modify the equipment as necessary to produce the texture directed.
2.11.7.1 Burlap Drag
Securely attach a burlap drag to a separate wheel mounted frame spanning the paving lane or to one of the other similar pieces of equipment. Provide length of the material between 600 to 900 mm dragging flat on the pavement surface. Provide burlap drag with a width at least equal to the width of the slab. Provide clean, reasonably new burlap material, completely saturated with water before attachment to the frame, always re-saturate before start of use, and kept clean and saturated during use. Provide burlap conforming to AASHTO M 182, Class 3 or 4.
2.11.7.2 Broom
Apply surface texture using an approved mechanical stiff bristle broom drag of a type that provides a uniformly scored surface transverse to the pavement center line. Provide broom capable of traversing the full width of the pavement in a single pass at a uniform speed and with a uniform pressure that results in scores uniform in appearance and approximately 1.5 mm in depth but not more than 3 mm in depth.
2.11.8 Sawing Equipment
Provide equipment for sawing joints and for other similar sawing of concrete consisting of standard diamond-type concrete saws mounted on a wheeled chassis which can be easily guided to follow the required alignment. Provide diamond tipped blades. If demonstrated to operate properly, abrasive blades may be used. Provide spares as required to maintain the required sawing rate. Provide saws capable of sawing to the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 36 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
full depth required. Early-entry saws may be used, subject to demonstration and approval. No change to the initial sawcut depth is permitted.
2.11.9 Straightedge
Provide and maintain at the job site, in good condition, a minimum 4 m straightedge for each paving train for testing the hardened portland cement concrete surfaces. Provide straightedges constructed of aluminum or magnesium alloy and blades of box or box-girder cross section with flat bottom, adequately reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy. Provide straightedges with handles for operation on the pavement.
2.11.10 Work Bridge
Provide a self-propelled working bridge capable of spanning the required paving lane width where workmen can efficiently and adequately reach the pavement surface.
2.12 SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES
2.12.1 Specified Flexural Strength - For Traprock Aggregate
Specified flexural strength, R, for High Temperature Concrete is 4.5 MPa at 28 days. Maximum allowable water-cementitious material ratio is 0.45. The water-cementitious material ratio will be the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus SCM by the mass equivalency method described in ACI 211.1 and ACI 325.14R. The concrete must have air-entrained with a total air content of 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percentage points, at the point of placement. Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M. The required slump of the concrete at the point of placement is 50 to 100 mm,
2.12.2 Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio
Maximum allowable water-cementitious material ratio is 0.45. The water-cementitious material ratio is the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus SCM by the mass equivalency method described in ACI 211.1.
2.12.3 Air Content
Provide concrete that is air-entrained with a total air content of 6.0 plus or minus 1.5 percentage points, at the point of placement. Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M.
2.12.4 Slump
The maximum allowable slump of the concrete at the point of placement is 50 mm for pavement constructed with fixed forms. For slipformed pavement, at the start of the project, select a slump which produces in-place pavement meeting the specified tolerances for control of edge slump. The selected slump is applicable to both pilot and fill-in lanes.
2.12.5 Concrete Temperature
The temperature of the concrete as delivered is required to conform to the requirements of paragraphs PAVING IN HOT WEATHER and PAVING IN COLD WEATHER, in PART 3. Determine the temperature of concrete in accordance
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 37 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
with ASTM C1064/C1064M.
2.12.6 Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance
and no individual beam in the lot is 170 kPa or more below the equivalent 'Specified Flexural Strength'. Removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government any lot or sublot, respectively, that fails to meet the above criteria.
2.13 MIXTURE PROPORTIONS
2.13.1 Composition
Allowable constituents of concrete are cementitious material, water, fine and coarse aggregates, fibrillated polypropylene fibers, and admixtures. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) choice and usage must conform with paragraph SUPPLEMENTAL CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS (SCM) CONTENT. The total cementitious material content is required to be at least 310 kg per cubic meter for traprock. Admixtures consist of air entraining admixture and may also include, as approved, accelerator, retarder, and water-reducing admixture.
2.13.2 Proportioning Studies
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing requirements are the responsibility of the Contractor. Submit for approval the Preliminary Proposed Proportioning to include items a., b., and i. below a minimum of 7 days prior to beginning the mixture proportioning study. Trial mixtures having proportions, slumps, and air content suitable for the work based on methodology described in ACI 211.1 and ACI 325.14R for trap rock, modified as necessary by manufacturer's recommendations to accommodate flexural strength and workability.
2.13.2.1 Determination of Moisture Properties Fine Traprock Aggregate
Use the following procedures to determine the moisture properties of manufactured traprock fines:
Saturated Surface Dry (SSD) Specific Gravity:
a. Obtain sample and oven dry (not microwave) at 110 degrees C until constant weight, which may take several days.
b. Submerge sample in water container for 7 days
c. Determine soaked sample Bulk Specific Gravity
d. Towel dry, no water sheen, determine SSD Specific Gravity
Free Water on Aggregates (NY 703-19 E):
Conduct the following procedures a minimum of three times for the project: prior to developing the laboratory mixtures, when build stockpiles, and when replenish stockpiles.
a. Obtain minimum of two stockpile samples after continuous watering has ensured aggregates have reached 100 percent absorption.
b. Determine moisture content of one sample by drying to constant
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 38 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
weight.
c. Determine moisture content of second sample after first towel drying to surface dry condition.
d. Difference of two moisture contents is free water on aggregates.
e. General targets for production are 1-3 percent free moisture on coarse aggregate and 6-10 percent free moisture on fine aggregate.
Prior to conducting any High Temperature Concrete batching, determine the stockpile free moisture content prior to first batch of day and at frequency indicated in paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS.
2.13.2.2 Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio
Perform at least three different water-cementitious materials ratios, which produce a range of strength encompassing that required on the project. The maximum allowable water-cementitious material ratio required in paragraph SPECIFIED FLEXURAL STRENGTH, above is the equivalent water-cementitious materials ratio. The maximum water-cementitious materials ratio of the approved mix design becomes the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio for the project, and in no case exceeds 0.45.
2.13.2.3 Trial Mixture Studies
Perform separate sets of trial mixture studies made for each combination of cementitious materials and each combination of admixtures proposed for use. No combination of either are to be used until proven by such studies, except that, if approved in writing and otherwise permitted by these specifications, an accelerating or retarding admixture may be used without separate trial mixture study. Perform separate trial mixture studies for each placing method (slip form, fixed form, or hand placement) proposed. Report the temperature of concrete in each trial batch. Design each mixture to promote easy and suitable concrete placement, consolidation and finishing, and to prevent segregation and excessive bleeding. Proportion laboratory trial mixtures for maximum permitted slump and air content.
2.13.3 Example High Temperature Concrete Mix Designs
The Contractor is responsible to develop the High Temperature Concrete mixture proportions for the project. The Contractor must select the aggregates for use, develop and adapt the mixture based upon mixing and paving methods, site temperature and humidity for time of placement. Government personnel resources are available at no charge to Contractor for consultation after contract award, and will be present during test batches, test sections and production paving.
2.13.3.1 Example Traprock Aggregate Mix Design
The following mix design was used for laboratory studies by NAVFAC EXWC. It uses the Carolina Sunrock aggregates. This mixture design is only provided for information and is not a project requirement nor assurance that it will meet project specifications for any particular material, method, site or climate.
TABLE 4
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 39 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Material Quantity per Cubic Yard
Type I/II Portland Cement 307 kg
Class F Fly Ash 77 kg
Water 148 kg
Course Aggregate (25 mm to 4.75 mm) 905 kg
Medium Course Aggregate (9.5 mm to 4.75 mm) 317 kg
Fine Aggregate (minus 4.75 mm) 739 kg
Air admix 0.18 kg
Super plasticizer 0.77 kg
Fibers 1.8 kg
2.14 SURFACE SEALER SOLUTION
Surface sealer is required to be a colorless, water-based solution containing at least 9 percent sodium silicate at time of application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PAVING
Before commencing paving, perform the following. If used, place cleaned, coated, and adequately supported forms. Have any reinforcing steel needed at the paving site; all transporting and transfer equipment ready for use, clean, and free of hardened concrete and foreign material; equipment for spreading, consolidating, screeding, finishing, and texturing concrete at the paving site, clean and in proper working order; and all equipment and material for curing and for protecting concrete from weather or mechanical damage at the paving site, in proper working condition, and in sufficient amount for the entire placement.
3.1.1 Weather Prevention
When windy conditions during paving appear probable, have equipment and material at the paving site to provide windbreaks, shading, fogging, or other action to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking or other damaging drying of the concrete.
3.1.2 Proposed Techniques
Submit for approval the following items:
a. A description of the placing and protection methods proposed when concrete is to be placed in or exposed to hot, cold, or rainy weather conditions.
b. A detailed paving sequence plan and proposed paving pattern showing
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 40 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
all planned construction joints; transverse and longitudinal reinforcing bar size and spacing; and identifying pilot lanes and hand placement areas. Place the five continuously reinforced High Temperature Concrete lanes in a minimum of three pours and in the following sequence: place the center lane first; then the two adjacent lanes, then the two outside lanes. This paving sequence allows installation of threaded reinforcing steel and couplers. Without written approval of the Contracting Officer, no deviation from the jointing pattern shown on the drawings are allowed.
c. Plan and equipment proposed to control alignment of sawn joints within the specified tolerances.
d. Data on the curing equipment, media and methods to be used.
e. Pavement demolition work plan, presenting the proposed methods and equipment to remove existing pavement and protect pavement to remain in place.
f. Data on profilograph and methods to measure pavement smoothness.
3.2 CONDITIONING OF UNDERLYING MATERIAL
3.2.1 General Procedures
Verify the underlying material, upon which concrete is to be placed is clean, damp, and free from debris, waste concrete or cement, frost, ice, and standing or running water. Prior to setting forms or placement of concrete, verify the underlying material is well drained and have been satisfactorily graded by string-line controlled, automated, trimming machine and uniformly compacted in accordance with the applicable Section of these specifications. Test the surface of the underlying material to crown, elevation, and density in advance of setting forms or of concrete placement using slip-form techniques. Trim high areas to proper elevation. Fill and compact low areas to a condition similar to that of surrounding grade, or filled with concrete monolithically with the pavement. Low areas filled with concrete are not to be cored for thickness to avoid biasing the average thickness used for evaluation and payment adjustment. Rework and compact any underlying material disturbed by construction operations to specified density immediately in front of the paver. If a slipform paver is used, continue the same underlying material under the paving lane beyond the edge of the lane a sufficient distance that is thoroughly compacted and true to grade to provide a suitable trackline for the slipform paver and firm support for the edge of the paving lane.
3.2.2 Traffic on Underlying Material
After the underlying material has been prepared for concrete placement, equipment is not permitted thereon with exception of the paver. Subject to specific approval, crossing of the prepared underlying material at specified intervals for construction purposes may be permitted, provided rutting or indentations do not occur. Rework and repair the surface before concrete is placed. Transporting equipment is not to be allowed to operate on the prepared and compacted underlying material in front of the paver-finisher.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 41 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
3.3.1 Placement and Protection During Inclement Weather
Do not commence placing operations when heavy rain or other damaging weather conditions appear imminent. At all times when placing concrete, maintain on-site sufficient waterproof cover and means to rapidly place it over all unhardened concrete or concrete that might be damaged by rain. Suspend placement of concrete whenever rain, high winds, or other damaging weather commences to damage the surface or texture of the placed unhardened concrete, washes cement out of the concrete, or changes the water content of the surface concrete. Immediately cover and protect all unhardened concrete from the rain or other damaging weather. Completely remove any slab damaged by rain or other weather full depth, by full slab width, to the nearest original joint, and replaced as specified in paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS below, at no expense to the Government.
3.3.2 Paving in Hot Weather
When the ambient temperature during paving is expected to exceed 32 degrees C, properly place and finish the concrete in accordance with procedures previously submitted, approved, and as specified herein. Provide concrete that does not exceed the temperature shown in the table below when measured in accordance with ASTM C1064/C1064M at the time of delivery. Cooling of the mixing water or aggregates or placing in the cooler part of the day may be required to obtain an adequate placing temperature. Cool steel forms and reinforcing as needed to maintain steel temperatures below 49 degrees C. Cool or protect transporting and placing equipment if necessary to maintain proper concrete placing temperature. Keep the finished surfaces of the newly laid pavement damp by applying a fog spray (mist) with approved spraying equipment until the pavement is covered by the curing medium.
Maximum Allowable Concrete Placing Temperature
Relative Humidity, Percent, Maximum Allowable Concrete During Time of Concrete Placement Temperature in Degrees C ______
Greater than 60 33 40-60 30 Less than 40 27
3.3.3 Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
During weather with low humidity, and particularly with high temperature and appreciable wind, develop and institute measures to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks from developing. If plastic shrinkage cracking occurs, halt further placement of concrete until protective measures are in place to prevent further cracking. Periods of high potential for plastic shrinkage cracking can be anticipated by use of ACI 305R. In addition to the protective measures specified in the previous paragraph, the concrete placement may be further protected by erecting shades and windbreaks and by applying fog sprays of water, the addition of mono-molecular films, or wet covering. Apply mono-molecular films after finishing is complete, do not use in the finishing process. Immediately commence curing procedures when such water treatment is stopped. Repair plastic shrinkage cracks in accordance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 42 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Never trowel over or fill plastic shrinkage cracks with slurry.
3.3.4 Paving in Cold Weather
Cold weather paving is required to conform to ACI 306R. Use special protection measures, as specified herein, if freezing temperatures are anticipated or occur before the expiration of the specified curing period. Do not begin placement of concrete unless the ambient temperature is at least 2 degrees C and rising. Thereafter, halt placement of concrete whenever the ambient temperature drops below 5 degrees C. When the ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C, the temperature of the concrete when placed is required to be not less than 10 degrees C nor more than 25 degrees C. Provide heating of the mixing water or aggregates as required to regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer are required to be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Do not incorporate salt, chemicals or other materials in the concrete to prevent freezing. Provide covering and other means for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 10 degrees C for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period. Remove pavement slabs, full depth by full width, damaged by freezing or falling below freezing temperature to the nearest planned joint, and replace as specified in paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS, at no expense to the Government.
3.4 CONCRETE PRODUCTION
Provide batching, mixing, and transporting equipment with a capacity sufficient to maintain a continuous, uniform forward movement of the paver of not less than 0.8 m per minute. Deposit concrete transported in non-agitating equipment in front of the paver within 45 minutes from the time cement has been charged into the mixing drum, except that if the ambient temperature is above 32 degrees C, the time is reduced to 30 minutes. Deposit concrete transported in truck mixers in front of the paver within 90 minutes from the time cement has been charged into the mixer drum of the plant or truck mixer. If the ambient temperature is above 32 degrees C, the time is reduced to 60 minutes. Accompany every load of concrete delivered to the paving site with a batch ticket from the operator of the batching plant. Provide batch ticket information required by ASTM C94/C94M on approved forms. In addition provide design quantities in mass or volume for all materials, batching tolerances of all materials, and design and actual water cementitious materials ratio on each batch delivered, and the time of day. Provide batch tickets for each truck delivered as part of the lot acceptance package to the placing foreman to maintain on file and deliver them to the Government weekly.
3.4.1 Batching and Mixing Concrete
Maintain scale pivots and bearings clean and free of rust. Remove any equipment which fails to perform as specified immediately from use until properly repaired and adjusted, or replaced.
3.4.2 Transporting and Transfer - Spreading Operations
Operate non-agitating equipment only on smooth roads and for haul time less than 15 minutes. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final position in the paving lane. Operate all equipment to discharge and transfer concrete without segregation. Dumping of concrete in discrete piles is not permitted. No transfer or spreading operation which requires
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 43 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the use of front-end loaders, dozers, or similar equipment to distribute the concrete are permitted.
3.5 PAVING - FOR CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE
3.5.1 General Requirements - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Construct pavement with paving and finishing equipment utilizing rigid fixed forms. Utilize paving and finishing equipment and procedures capable of constructing paving lanes of the required width. Control and coordinate paving equipment and its operation with all other operations, such that the vibrating truss has a continuous forward movement, at a reasonably uniform speed, from beginning to end of each paving lane, except for inadvertent equipment breakdown. Failure to achieve this must require the Contractor to halt operations, regroup, and modify operations to achieve this requirement. Workmen with foreign material on their footwear or construction equipment that might deposit foreign material are not permitted to walk or operate in the plastic concrete. Provide clean matting to lay tools not in use and workers to stand to prevent contamination of the High Temperature Concrete.
3.5.2 Consolidation - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Consolidate concrete with three hand-held spud vibrators across the paving lane. Insert the vibrators into the concrete to a depth that will provide the best full-depth consolidation. Insert a vibrator into every reinforcement grid and in worker's footsteps. Vibrators may be used and operated from a bridge spanning the area. Vibrators are not to be used to transport or spread the concrete. Hand-operated vibrators are not to be operated in the concrete at one location for more than 20 seconds. Any evidence of inadequate consolidation (honeycomb along the edges, large air pockets, or any other evidence) must require the immediate stopping of the paving operation and approved adjustment of the equipment or procedures.
3.5.3 Operation - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
When the vibrating truss approaches a header at the end of a paving lane, maintain a sufficient amount of concrete ahead of the vibrating truss to provide a roll of concrete which will spill over the header. Ensure the required amount of extra concrete sufficient to prevent any slurry that is formed and carried along ahead of the vibrating truss from being deposited adjacent to the header is present. Provide additional consolidation adjacent to the headers by hand-held vibrators. When the vibrating truss is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed pavement (fill-in lanes), make provisions to prevent damage to the previously constructed pavement. At all times, keep the overlapping area of existing pavement surface completely free of any loose or bonded foreign material as the vibrating truss operates across it.
3.5.4 Required Results - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Adjust, operate, and coordinate the vibrating truss, and its hand placed equipment together with its operating procedures with the concrete mixture being used to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab throughout, true to line and grade within specified tolerances. The vibrating truss operation must produce a surface finish free of irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities. The vibrating truss must make only one pass across the pavement; multiple passes will not be permitted. The equipment and its operation must produce a finished surface as specified
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 44 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and requiring no excessive hand finishing other than the use of cutting straightedges. If any equipment or operation fails to produce the above results, stop the paving, replace or properly adjust the equipment. Appropriately modify the operation or mixture proportions in order to produce the required results before recommencing paving. Apply no water, other than approved fog sprays, to the concrete or the concrete surface during paving and finishing.
3.5.5 Forms for Fixed-Form Paving - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
a. Furnish straight forms made of steel in sections not less than 3 m in length. Use flexible or curved forms of proper radius for curves of 31 m radius or less. Make wood forms for curves and fillets of well-seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend. Furnish wood forms adequate in strength and rigidly braced. Forms must have a depth equal to the pavement thickness at the edge. Where the project requires several different slab thicknesses, forms may be built up by bolting or welding a tubular metal section or by bolting wood planks to the bottom of the form to completely cover the underside of the base of the form and provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. The base width of the one-piece or built-up form cannot be less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except than forms 200 mm or less in vertical height must have a base width not less than the vertical height of the form. Maximum vertical deviation of top of any side form, including joints, must not vary from a true plane more than 3 mm in 3 m, and the upstanding leg must not vary more than 6 mm.
b. Tightly lock form sections. Restrict form sections from play or movement in any direction. Provide forms with adequate devices for secure settings so that when in place they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the consolidating and finishing equipment.
c. Set forms for full bearing on foundation for entire length and width and in alignment with edge of finished pavement. Support forms during entire operation of placing, compaction, and finishing so that forms will not deviate vertically more than 3 mm from required grade and elevations indicated. Check conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings. Immediately make necessary corrections prior to placing the concrete. Clean and oil the forms each time before concrete is placed. Do not place concrete until setting of forms has been checked and approved by the CQC team.
3.5.5.1 Form Removal - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Remove forms for preparation to place adjacent lanes at a time in accordance with paragraph WET CURING, but no sooner than 24 hours after the end of the placement. Cover in burlap and polyethylene and keep wet concrete edges exposed after form removal until the adjacent concrete is placed or the 14 day wet curing period is achieved, as appropriate for the edge location. When conditions are such that the early strength gain of the concrete is delayed, leave the forms in place for a longer time, as directed. Remove forms by procedures that do not injure the concrete. Do not use bars or heavy metal tools directly against the concrete in removing the forms. Promptly repair any concrete found to be defective after form removal using procedures specified hereinafter or as directed.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 45 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.6 Placing Reinforcing Steel - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Use the type and amount of steel reinforcement shown on the drawings.
3.5.6.1 Reinforcement Support - for Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Position the reinforcement on approved continuous mesh support devices or numerous chairs securely fastened to the subgrade prior to concrete placement. Support and anchor reinforcement to maintain proper position in final concrete pavement on a maximum 1.2 m by 1.2 m grid, including at edges if steel does not penetrate forms. Vibrate concrete after the steel has been placed. Regardless of placement procedure, use reinforcing steel free from coatings which could impair bond between the steel and concrete, and laps in the reinforcement must be as indicated. Regardless of the equipment or procedures used for installing reinforcement, ensure that the entire depth of concrete is adequately consolidated.
3.6 PAVING - FOR NON-CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE
3.6.1 General Requirements - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Construct pavement with paving and finishing equipment utilizing rigid fixed forms or by use of slipform paving equipment. Provide paving and finishing equipment and procedures capable of constructing paving lanes of the required width at a rate of at least 0.8 m of paving lane per minute on a routine basis. Control paving equipment and its operation, and coordinated with all other operations, such that the paver-finisher has a continuous forward movement at a reasonably uniform speed from beginning to end of each paving lane, except for inadvertent equipment breakdown. Backing the paver and refinishing a lane is not permitted. Remove and replace concrete refinished in this manner. Failure to achieve a continuous forward motion requires halting operations, regrouping, and modifying operations to achieve this requirement. Personnel are not permitted to walk or operate in the plastic concrete at any time. Where an open-graded granular base is required under the concrete, select paving equipment and procedures which operate properly on the base course without causing displacement or other damage.
3.6.2 Consolidation - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Consolidate concrete with the specified type of lane-spanning, gang-mounted, mechanical, immersion type vibrating equipment mounted in front of the paver, supplemented, in rare instances as specified, by hand-operated vibrators. Insert vibrators into the concrete to a depth that provides the best full-depth consolidation but not closer to the underlying material than 50 mm. Excessive vibration is not permitted. Discontinue paving operations if vibrators cause visible tracking in the paving lane, until equipment and operations have been modified to prevent it. Vibrate concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in isolated locations inaccessible to the gang-mounted vibration equipment with an approved hand-operated immersion vibrator operated from a bridge spanning the area. Do not use vibrators to transport or spread the concrete. Do not operate hand-operated vibrators in the concrete at one location for more than 20 seconds. Insert hand-operated vibrators between 150 to 400 mm on centers. For each paving train, provide at least one additional vibrator spud, or sufficient parts for rapid replacement and repair of vibrators at the paving site at all times. Any evidence of inadequate consolidation (honeycomb along the edges, large air pockets, or any other evidence) requires the immediate stopping of the paving operation and approved
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 46 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
adjustment of the equipment or procedures.
3.6.3 Operation - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
When the paver approaches a header at the end of a paving lane, maintain a sufficient amount of concrete ahead of the paver to provide a roll of concrete which spills over the header. Provide a sufficient amount of extra concrete to prevent any slurry that is formed and carried along ahead of the paver from being deposited adjacent to the header. Maintain the spud vibrators in front of the paver at the desired depth as close to the header as possible before they are lifted. Provide additional consolidation adjacent to the headers by hand-manipulated vibrators. When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed pavement (fill-in lanes), provide provisions to prevent damage to the previously constructed pavement. Electronically control screeds or extrusion plates from the previously placed pavement so as to prevent them from applying pressure to the existing pavement and to prevent abrasion of the pavement surface. Maintain the overlapping area of existing pavement surface completely free of any loose or bonded foreign material as the paver-finisher operates across it. When the paver travels on existing pavement, maintain approved provisions to prevent damage to the existing pavement. Pavers using transversely oscillating screeds are not allowed to form fill-in lanes that have widths less than a full width for which the paver was designed or adjusted.
3.6.4 Required Results - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Adjust and operate the paver-finisher, its gang-mounted vibrators and operating procedures coordinated with the concrete mixture being used, to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab throughout that is true to line and grade within specified tolerances. Provide a paver-finishing operation that produces a surface finish free of irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities in a single pass across the pavement; multiple passes are not permitted. Provide equipment and its operation that produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing other than the use of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent instances. Stop paving if any equipment or operation fails to produce the above results. Prior to recommencing paving, properly adjust or replace the equipment, modify the operation, or modify the mixture proportions, in order to produce the required results. No water, other than fog sprays (mist) as specified in paragraph PREVENTION OF PLASTIC SHRINKAGE CRACKING above, is allowed to be applied to the concrete or the concrete surface during paving and finishing.
3.6.5 Fixed Form Paving - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Provide paving equipment for fixed-form paving and the operation that conforms to the requirements of paragraph EQUIPMENT, and all requirements specified herein.
3.6.5.1 Forms for Fixed-Form Paving - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
a. Provide straight forms made of steel and in sections not less than 3 m in length that are clean and free of rust or other contaminants. Seal any holes or perforations in forms prior to paving unless otherwise permitted. Maintain forms in place and passable by all equipment necessary to complete the entire paving operation without need to remove horizontal form supports. Provide flexible or curved forms of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 47 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
proper radius for curves of 31 m radius or less. Provide wood forms for curves and fillets made of well-seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend that have adequate strength and are rigidly braced. Provide forms with a depth equal to the pavement thickness at the edge. Where the project requires several different slab thicknesses, forms may be built up by bolting or welding a tubular metal section or by bolting wood planks to the bottom of the form to completely cover the underside of the base of the form and provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. Provide forms with the base width of the one-piece or built-up form not less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except provide forms 200 mm or less in vertical height with a base width not less than the vertical height of the form. Provide forms with maximum vertical deviation of top of any side form, including joints, not varying from a true plane more than 3 mm in 3 m, and the upstanding leg not varying more than 6 mm.
b. Provide form sections that are tightly locked and free from play or movement in any direction. Provide forms with adequate devices for secure settings so that when in place they withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the consolidating and finishing equipment.
c. Set forms for full bearing on foundation for entire length and width and in alignment with edge of finished pavement. Support forms during entire operation of placing, compaction, and finishing so that forms do not deviate vertically more than 3 mm from required grade and elevations indicated. Check conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings and make necessary corrections immediately prior to placing the concrete. Clean and oil the forms each time before concrete is placed. Concrete placement is not allowed until setting of forms has been checked and approved by the CQC team.
d. Do not anchor guide rails for fixed form pavers into new concrete or existing concrete to remain.
3.6.5.2 Form Removal - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Keep forms in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. When conditions are such that the early strength gain of the concrete is delayed, leave the forms in place for a longer time, as directed. Remove forms by procedures that do not damage the concrete. Do not use bars or heavy metal tools directly against the concrete in removing the forms. Promptly repair any concrete found to be defective after form removal, using procedures specified or as directed.
3.6.6 Slipform Paving - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
3.6.6.1 General - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Provide paving equipment for slipform paving and the operation thereof that conforms to the requirement of paragraph EQUIPMENT, and all requirements specified herein. Provide a slipform paver capable of shaping the concrete to the specified and indicated cross section, meeting all tolerances, with a surface finish and edges that require only a very minimum isolated amount of hand finishing, in one pass. If the paving operation does not meet the above requirements and the specified tolerances, immediately stop the operation, and regroup and replace or
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 48 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
modify any equipment as necessary, modify paving procedures or modify the concrete mix, in order to resolve the problem. Provide a slipform paver that is automatically electronically controlled from a taut wire guideline for horizontal alignment and on both sides from a taut wire guideline for vertical alignment, except that electronic control from a ski operating on a previously constructed adjoining lane is required where applicable for either or both sides. Automatic, electronic controls are required for vertical alignment on both sides of the lane. Control from a slope-adjustment control or control operating from the underlying material is not allowed. Properly adjust side forms on slipform pavers so that the finished edge of the paving lane meets all specified tolerances. Install dowels in longitudinal construction joints as specified below. The installation of these dowels by dowel inserters attached to the paver or by any other means of inserting the dowels into the plastic concrete is not permitted.
3.6.6.2 Guideline for Slipform Paving - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Accurately and securely install guidelines well in advance of concrete placement. Provide supports at necessary intervals to eliminate all sag in the guideline when properly tightened. Provide guideline consisting of high strength wire set with sufficient tension to remove all sag between supports. Provide supports that are securely staked to the underlying material or other provisions made to ensure that the supports are not displaced when the guideline is tightened or when the guideline or supports are accidentally touched by workmen or equipment during construction. Provide appliances for attaching the guideline to the supports that are capable of easy adjustment in both the horizontal and vertical directions. When it is necessary to leave gaps in the guideline to permit equipment to use or cross underlying material, provide provisions for quickly and accurately replacing the guideline without any delay to the forward progress of the paver. Provide supports on either side of the gap that are secured in such a manner as to avoid disturbing the remainder of the guideline when the portion across the gap is positioned and tightened. Check the guideline across the gap and adjacent to the gap for a distance of 60 m for horizontal and vertical alignment after the guideline across the gap is tightened. Provide vertical and horizontal positioning of the guideline such that the finished pavement conforms to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings within the specified tolerances for grade and smoothness. The specified tolerances are intended to cover only the normal deviations in the finished pavement that may occur under good supervision and do not apply to setting of the guideline. Set the guideline true to line and grade.
3.6.6.3 Stringless Technology - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
If the use of any type of stringless technology is proposed, submit a detailed description of the system and perform a trial field demonstration at least one week prior to start of paving. Approval of the control system will be based on the results of the demonstration and on continuing satisfactory operation during paving.
3.6.7 Placing Reinforcing Steel - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Provide the type and amount of steel reinforcement indicated.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 49 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6.7.1 Pavement Thickness Greater Than 300 mm - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
For pavement thickness of 300 mm or more, install the reinforcement steel by the strike-off method wherein a layer of concrete is deposited on the underlying material, consolidated, and struck to the indicated elevation of the steel reinforcement. Place the reinforcement upon the pre-struck surface, followed by placement of the remaining concrete and finishing in the required manner. When placement of the second lift causes the steel to be displaced horizontally from its original position, provide provisions for increasing the thickness of the first lift and depressing the reinforcement into the unhardened concrete to the required elevation. Limit the increase in thickness only as necessary to permit correct horizontal alignment to be maintained. Remove and replace any portions of the bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 30 minutes without being covered with the top layer with newly mixed concrete without additional cost to the Government.
3.6.7.2 Pavement Thickness Less Than 300 mm - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
For pavements less than 300 mm thick, position the reinforcement on suitable chairs or continuous mesh support devices securely fastened to the subgrade prior to concrete placement. Consolidate concrete after the steel has been placed. Regardless of placement procedure, provide reinforcing steel free from coatings which could impair bond between the steel and concrete, with reinforcement laps as indicated. Regardless of the equipment or procedures used for installing reinforcement, ensure that the entire depth of concrete is adequately consolidated. If reinforcing for Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavement (CRCP) is required, submit the entire operating procedure and equipment proposed for approval at least 30 days prior to proposed start of paving.
3.6.8 Placing Dowels - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Ensure the method used to install and hold dowels in position result in dowel alignment within the maximum allowed horizontal and vertical tolerance of 3 mm per 300 mm after the pavement has been completed. Except as otherwise specified below, maintain the horizontal spacing of dowels within a tolerance of plus or minus 15 mm. Locate the dowel vertically on the face of the slab within a tolerance of plus or minus 13 mm. Measure the vertical alignment of the dowels parallel to the designated top surface of the pavement, except for those across the crown or other grade change joints. Measure dowels across crowns and other joints at grade changes to a level surface. Check horizontal alignment perpendicular to the joint edge with a framing square. Do not place longitudinal dowels closer than 0.6 times the dowel bar length to the planned joint line. If the last regularly spaced longitudinal dowel is closer than that dimension, move it away from the joint to a location 0.6 times the dowel bar length, but not closer than 150 mm to its nearest neighbor. Resolve dowel interference at a transverse joint-longitudinal joint intersection by deleting the closest transverse dowel. Do not position the end of a transverse dowel closer than 300 mm from the end of the nearest longitudinal dowel. Install dowels as specified in the following subparagraphs.
3.6.8.1 Contraction Joints - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Securely hold dowels in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 50 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
within the paving lane in place, as indicated, by means of rigid metal frames or basket assemblies of an approved type. Securely hold the basket assemblies in the proper location by means of suitable pins or anchors. Do not cut or crimp the dowel basket tie wires.
3.6.8.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Install dowels by the bonded-in-place method or the drill-and-dowel method. Installation by removing and replacing in preformed holes is not permitted. Prepare and place dowels across joints where indicated, correctly aligned, and securely held in the proper horizontal and vertical position during placing and finishing operations, by means of devices fastened to the forms. Provide the spacing of dowels in construction joints as indicated, except that, where the planned spacing cannot be maintained because of form length or interference with form braces, provide closer spacing with additional dowels.
3.6.8.3 Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Install dowels in hardened concrete by bonding the dowels into holes drilled into the hardened concrete. Before drilling commences, cure the concrete for 7 days or until it has reached a minimum flexural strength of 3.1 MPa. Drill holes 3 mm greater in diameter than the dowels into the hardened concrete using rotary-core drills. Rotary-percussion drills are permitted, provided that excessive spalling does not occur to the concrete joint face. Excessive spalling is defined as spalling deeper than 6 mm from the joint face or 12 mm radially from the outside of the drilled hole. Continuing damage requires modification of the equipment and operation. Drill depth of dowel hole within a tolerance of plus or minus 13 mm of the dimension shown on the drawings. Upon completion of the drilling operation, blow out the dowel hole with oil-free, compressed air. Bond dowels in the drilled holes using epoxy resin. Inject epoxy resin at the back of the hole before installing the dowel and extruded to the collar during insertion of the dowel so as to completely fill the void around the dowel. Application by buttering the dowel is not permitted. Hold the dowels in alignment at the collar of the hole, after insertion and before the grout hardens, by means of a suitable metal or plastic grout retention ring fitted around the dowel. Provide dowels required between new and existing concrete in holes drilled in the existing concrete, all as specified above.
3.6.8.4 Lubricating Dowel Bars - for Non-Continuously Reinforced Concrete
Wipe the portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete clean and coat with a thin, even film of lubricating oil or light grease before the concrete is placed.
3.7 FINISHING
Provide finishing operations as a continuing part of placing operations starting immediately behind the strike-off of the paver. Provide initial finishing by the transverse screed or extrusion plate. Provide the sequence of operations consisting of transverse finishing, longitudinal machine floating if used, straightedge finishing, texturing, and then edging of joints. Provide finishing by the machine method. Provide a work bridge as necessary for consolidation and hand finishing operations. Use the hand method only on isolated areas of odd slab widths or shapes
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 51 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and in the event of a breakdown of the mechanical finishing equipment. Keep supplemental hand finishing for machine finished pavement to an absolute minimum. Immediately stop any machine finishing operation which requires appreciable hand finishing, other than a moderate amount of straightedge finishing. Prior to recommencing machine finishing, properly adjust or replace the equipment. Immediately halt any operations which produce more than 3 mm of mortar-rich surface (defined as deficient in plus 4.75 mm size aggregate) and the equipment, mixture, or procedures modified as necessary. Compensate for surging behind the screeds or extrusion plate and settlement during hardening and take care to ensure that paving and finishing machines are properly adjusted so that the finished surface of the concrete (not just the cutting edges of the screeds) is at the required line and grade. Maintain finishing equipment and tools clean and in an approved condition. Water is not allowed to be added to the surface of the slab with the finishing equipment or tools, or in any other way, except for fog (mist) sprays specified to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking.
3.7.1 Machine Finishing With Fixed Forms
Replace machines that cause displacement of the forms. Only one pass of the finishing machine is allowed over each area of pavement. If the equipment and procedures do not produce a surface of uniform texture, true to grade, in one pass, immediately stop the operation and the equipment, mixture, and procedures adjusted as necessary.
3.7.2 Machine Finishing with Slipform Pavers
Operate the slipform paver so that only a very minimum of additional finishing work is required to produce pavement surfaces and edges meeting the specified tolerances. Immediately modify or replace any equipment or procedure that fails to meet these specified requirements as necessary. A self-propelled non-rotating pipe float may be used while the concrete is still plastic, to remove minor irregularities and score marks. Only one pass of the pipe float is allowed. If there is concrete slurry or fluid paste on the surface that runs over the edge of the pavement, immediately stop the paving operation and the equipment, mixture, or operation modified to prevent formation of such slurry. Immediately remove any slurry which does run down the vertical edges by hand, using stiff brushes or scrapers. Slurry, concrete or concrete mortar is not allowed to build up along the edges of the pavement to compensate for excessive edge slump, either while the concrete is plastic or after it hardens.
3.7.3 Surface Correction and Testing
After all other finishing is completed but while the concrete is still plastic, eliminate minor irregularities and score marks in the pavement surface by means of cutting straightedges. Provide cutting straightedges with a minimum length of 4 m that are operated from the sides of the pavement or from bridges. Provide cutting straightedges operated from the side of the pavement equipped with a handle 1 m longer than one-half the width of the pavement. Test the surface for trueness with a straightedge held in successive positions parallel and at right angles to the center line of the pavement, and the whole area covered as necessary to detect variations. Advance the straightedge along the pavement in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straightedge. Immediately fill depressions with freshly mixed concrete, strike off, consolidate with an internal vibrator, and refinish. Strike off projections above the required elevation and refinish. Continue the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 52 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
straightedge testing and finishing until the entire surface of the concrete is free from observable departure from the straightedge and conforms to the surface requirements specified in paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS. This straight edging is not allowed to be used as a replacement for the straightedge testing of paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS. Use long-handled, flat bull floats very sparingly and only as necessary to correct minor, scattered surface defects. If frequent use of bull floats is necessary, stop the paving operation and the equipment, mixture or procedures adjusted to eliminate the surface defects. Keep finishing with hand floats and trowels to the absolute minimum necessary. Take extreme care to prevent over finishing joints and edges. Produce the surface finish of the pavement essentially by the finishing machine and not by subsequent hand finishing operations. All hand finishing operations are subject to approval.
3.7.4 Hand Finishing
Use hand finishing operations only as specified below. Provide a work bridge to be used as necessary for consolidation and placement operations to avoid standing in concrete.
3.7.4.1 Equipment and Template
In addition to approved mechanical internal vibrators for consolidating the concrete, provide a strike-off and tamping template and a longitudinal float for hand finishing. Provide a template at least 300 mm longer than the width of pavement being finished, of an approved design, and sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, that is constructed of metal or other suitable material shod with metal. Provide a longitudinal float at least 3 m long, of approved design, is rigid and substantially braced, and maintain a plane surface on the bottom. Grate tampers (jitterbugs) are not allowed.
3.7.4.2 Finishing and Floating
As soon as placed and vibrated, strike off the concrete and screeded to the crown and cross section and to such elevation above grade that when consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement is at the required elevation. In addition to previously specified complete coverage with handheld immersion vibrators, tamp the entire surface with the strike-off and tamping template, and the tamping operation continued until the required compaction and reduction of internal and surface voids are accomplished. Immediately following the final tamping of the surface, float the pavement longitudinally from bridges resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete. If necessary, place additional concrete, consolidated and screeded, and the float operated until a satisfactory surface has been produced. Do not advance the floating operation more than half the length of the float and then continued over the new and previously floated surfaces.
3.7.5 Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens or curing compound is applied, texture the surface of the pavement as described herein. After curing is complete, thoroughly power broom all textured surfaces to remove all debris.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 53 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.7.5.1 Burlap Drag Surface
Apply surface texture by dragging the surface of the pavement, in the direction of the concrete placement, with an approved burlap drag. Operate the drag with the fabric moist, and the fabric maintained clean or changed as required to keep clean. Perform the dragging so as to produce a uniform finished surface having a fine sandy texture without disfiguring marks.
3.7.6 Edging
Before texturing has been completed, carefully finish the edge of the slabs along the forms, along the edges of slipformed lanes, and at the joints with an edging tool to form a smooth rounded surface of 3 mm radius. Eliminate tool marks, and provide edges that are smooth and true to line. Water is not allowed to be added to the surface during edging. Take extreme care to prevent overworking the concrete.
3.7.7 Outlets in Pavement
Construct recesses for the tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in the pavement to conform to the details and dimensions shown. Carefully finish the concrete in these areas to provide a surface of the same texture as the surrounding area that is within the requirements for plan grade and surface smoothness.
3.8 CURING
3.8.1 Protection of Concrete
Continuously protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the completion of finishing operations. Have all equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. If any selected method of curing does not afford the proper curing and protection against concrete cracking, remove or replace the damaged pavement, and provide another method of curing as directed.
3.8.2 Wet Curing
Wet-cure concrete and continuously maintain wet for the entire curing period, commencing immediately after finishing. If forms are removed before the end of the curing period, carry out curing as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Apply burlap to concrete surface and cover with polyethylene; lap sheets to ensure full coverage. When forms are removed, cover pavement sides with burlap and polyethylene and keep wet. Anchor burlap and polyethylene to prevent blowing or dislodging by wind or jet blast. Provide an approved work system to ensure that concrete surface is continuously wet 24 hours per day. Wet cure for 14 days. Adjacent lanes of High Temperature Concrete may be placed after 72 hours of wet curing and minimizing the disturbance of the burlap and polyethylene. Curing may be interrupted for no more than 12 hours (includes time for preparation, paving and initial hardening before wet curing). Reinstate wet curing until 14 days of wet curing are completed (add time for lack of curing while paving adjacent lanes).
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 54 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.9 JOINTS FOR NON-CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE
3.9.1 General Requirements for Joints
Construct joints that conform to the locations and details indicated and are perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement. Provide joints that are straight and continuous from edge to edge or end to end of the pavement with no abrupt offset and no gradual deviation greater than 13 mm. Where any joint fails to meet these tolerances, remove and replace the slabs adjacent to the joint at no additional cost to the Government. Change from the jointing pattern shown on the drawings is not allowed without written approval. Seal joints immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.9.2 Longitudinal Construction Joints
Install dowels in the longitudinal construction joints, or thicken the edges as indicated. Install dowels as specified above. After the end of the curing period, saw longitudinal construction joints to provide a groove at the top for sealant conforming to the details and dimensions indicated.
3.9.3 Transverse Construction Joints
Install transverse construction joints at the end of each day's placing operations and at any other points within a paving lane when concrete placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer. Install the transverse construction joint at a planned transverse joint. Provide transverse construction joints by utilizing headers or by paving through the joint, then full-depth saw cutting the excess concrete. Construct pavement with the paver as close to the header as possible, with the paver run out completely past the header. Provide transverse construction joints at a planned transverse joint constructed as shown or, if not shown otherwise, dowelled in accordance with paragraph DOWELS INSTALLED IN HARDENED CONCRETE, or paragraph FIXED FORM PAVING above.
3.9.4 Expansion Joints
Provide expansion joints where indicated, and about any structures and features that project through or into the pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and installed to form a complete, uniform separation between the structure and the pavement or between two pavements. Attach the filler to the original concrete placement with adhesive and mechanical fasteners and extend the full slab depth. After placement and curing of the adjacent slab, sawcut the sealant reservoir depth from the filler. Tightly fit adjacent sections of filler together, with the filler extending across the full width of the paving lane or other complete distance in order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Finish edges of the concrete at the joint face with an edger with a radius of 3 mm.
3.9.5 Slip Joints
Install slip joints where indicated using the specified materials. Attach preformed joint filler material to the face of the original concrete placement with adhesive and mechanical fasteners. Construct a 19 mm deep reservoir for joint sealant at the top of the joint. Finish edges of the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 55 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
joint face with an edger with a radius of 3 mm.
3.9.6 Contraction Joints
Construct transverse and longitudinal contraction joints by sawing an initial groove in the concrete with a 3 mm blade to the indicated depth. During sawing of joints, and again 24 hours later, the CQC team is required to inspect all exposed lane edges for development of cracks below the saw cut, and immediately report results. If there are more than six consecutive uncracked joints after 48 hours, saw succeeding joints 25 percent deeper than originally indicated at no additional cost to the Government. The time of initial sawing varies depending on existing and anticipated weather conditions and be such as to prevent uncontrolled cracking of the pavement. Commence sawing of the joints as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting the concrete without chipping, spalling, or tearing. The sawed faces of joints will be inspected for undercutting or washing of the concrete due to the early sawing, and sawing delayed if undercutting is sufficiently deep to cause structural weakness or excessive roughness in the joint. Continue the sawing operation as required during both day and night regardless of weather conditions. Saw the joints at the required spacing consecutively in the sequence of the concrete placement. Provide adequate lighting for night work. Illumination using vehicle headlights is not permitted. Provide a chalk line or other suitable guide to mark the alignment of the joint. Before sawing a joint, examine the concrete closely for cracks, and do not saw the joint if a crack has occurred near the planned joint location. Discontinue sawing when a crack develops ahead of the saw cut. Immediately after the joint is sawed, thoroughly flush the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface with water and vacuumed until all waste from sawing is removed from the joint and adjacent concrete surface. Respray the surface with curing compound as soon as free water disappears. Take necessary precautions to insure that the concrete is properly protected from damage and cured at sawed joints. Tightly seal the top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges with cord backer rod before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound, and be maintained until removed immediately before sawing the joint sealant reservoir. Seal the exposed saw cuts on the faces of pilot lanes with bituminous mastic or masking tape. After expiration of the curing period, widen the upper portion of the groove by sawing with ganged diamond saw blades to the width and depth indicated for the joint sealer. Center the reservoir over the initial sawcut.
3.9.7 Thickened Edge Joints
Construct thickened edge joints as indicated on the drawings. Grade the underlying material in the transition area as shown and meet the requirements for smoothness and compaction specified for all other areas of the underlying material.
3.10 SODIUM SILICATE SEALING
Seal the High Temperature Concrete surfaces with a sodium silicate solution, after paint marking application, using the following procedures:
a. After last continuously reinforced High Temperature Concrete pour is 90 days of age, and non-continuously reinforced High Temperature Concrete is 70 days of age (if used), dry broom and air blow concrete surfaces and apply sodium silicate sealant. Concrete surface must be dry for 24 hours prior to applying sealer. Air temperature must be 5
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 56 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
degrees C or more and relative humidity must be 80 percent or less, both during application and the 48 hours after application.
b. Apply three coats of sodium silicate solution, using low pressure airless spraying equipment that ensures uniform application. Start applying the solution at the highest point in the pavement and continue downgrade. Each coat must cover not more than 5 square meters per liter. Excessive application is to be avoided to prevent efflorescence. Allow sodium silicate to penetrate for 2 hours then wash off any visible excess (ponded) solution. Allow the area to dry for 24 hours between each coat.
c. After allowing the last coat to dry for 24 hours, evaluate the surface for any excess silica or dusting. Wash off any excess silica or dusting as needed. Protect application from any pedestrian or vehicular traffic until the last coat has dried.
3.10.1 Pavement Marking Installation
Apply pavement markings and glass beads before sodium silicate application. Apply sodium silicate over markings and glass beads.
3.11 REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED CONCRETE FOR CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE
3.11.1 High Temperature Concrete
Remove and replace new High Temperature Concrete determined to not meet acceptance requirements using materials, methods and equipment, and to the limits as directed by Contracting Officer at no additional cost to Government. Removal of partial slabs, or partial lanes of continuously reinforced lanes, is not permitted; remove and replace the entire continuously reinforced lane.
3.11.1.1 Removal and Replacement Of Continuously Reinforced High Temperature Concrete
Removal of partial slabs, or partial lanes of continuously reinforced lanes, is not permitted; remove and replace the entire continuously reinforced lane. Removal of a lane of continuously reinforced High Temperature Concrete pavement requires saw cutting the concrete full depth on all sides 380 mm inside from each edge of the lane to be removed using a diamond saw. Remove the concrete within this initial sawcut . Remove the remaining 380 mm concrete buffer only with hand held 14 kg or less pneumatic hammers to remove the concrete above and below the remaining continuous reinforcement. Remove any loose longitudinal rebar exposed. Regrade and recompact surface of base course. Use manufacturer approved mechanical connector clamp, weld or use threaded connector to attach new transverse reinforcement to existing; lap splicing is not adequate. Replace continuous reinforcement in both directions per plans. Replace concrete following this specification. Submit complete removal and repair plan to Contracting Officer for review prior to work.
3.11.2 Removal and Replacement of Plane Jointed Concrete Pavement
Where it is necessary to remove concrete pavement, remove in accordance with paragraph EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR. Remove and replace full depth, by full width of the lane, and the limit of removal must be normal to the paving lane and extend to each original joint.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 57 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Remove and replace any damaged reinforcing bars. Place concrete as specified for original construction. Prior to placement of new concrete, recompact and shape the underlying material as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications, and clean the surfaces of all four joint faces of all loose material and contaminants. Prepare the resulting joints around the new slab as specified for original construction.
3.12 REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS FOR NON-CONTINUOUSLY REINFORCED CONCRETE
3.12.1 General Criteria
Repair or remove and replace new pavement slabs as specified at no cost to the Government. Removal of partial slabs is not permitted. Prior to any repairs, submit a Repair Recommendations Plan detailing areas exceeding the specified limits as well as repair recommendations required to bring these areas within specified tolerances.
3.12.2 Slabs with Cracks
No cores can be taken within continuously reinforced concrete. Before repairing cracks that have developed within continuously reinforced concrete consultation with Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC, Echelon III) pavement Subject Matter Expert (SME).
The Government may require cores to be taken over cracks to determine depth of cracking. Such cores are to be drilled with a minimum diameter of 150 mm, and be backfilled with an approved non-shrink concrete. Perform drilling of cores and filling of holes at no expense to the Government. Clean cracks that do not exceed 50 mm in depth; then pressure injected full depth with epoxy resin, Type IV, Grade 1. Remove and replace slabs containing cracks deeper than 50 mm.
3.12.3 Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs
Remove and replace slabs containing more than 15.0 percent of any longitudinal or transverse joint edge spalled. Where it is necessary to remove full slabs, remove in accordance with paragraph REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT SLAB below. Remove and replace full depth, by full width of the slab, and the limit of removal normal to the paving lane and extend to each original joint. Compact and shape the underlying material as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications, and clean the surfaces of all four joint faces of all loose material and contaminants and coated with a double application of membrane forming curing compound as bond breaker. Install dowels of the size and spacing as specified for other joints in similar pavement by epoxy grouting them into holes drilled into the existing concrete using procedures as specified in paragraph PLACING DOWELS, above. Provide dowels for all four edges of the new slab. Cut off original damaged dowels flush with the joint face. Lightly oil or grease protruding portions of new dowels. Place concrete as specified for original construction. Take care to prevent any curing compound from contacting dowels. Prepare and seal the resulting joints around the new slab as specified for original construction.
3.12.4 Repairing Spalls Along Joints
Conventional spall repairs are prohibited of all Vertical Landing Zones,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 58 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Short Take-Off Lanes, and associated safety zones, blast zones, and rotation areas. In these areas, only full depth repairs are acceptable. In areas which have continuously reinforced steel, repair must not damage reinforcing steel in any way.
Repair spalls along joints to be sealed to a depth to restore the full joint-face support prior to placing adjacent pavement. Where directed, repair spalls along joints of new slabs, along edges of adjacent existing concrete, and along parallel cracks by first making a vertical saw cut at least 75 mm outside the spalled area and to a depth of at least 50 mm. Provide saw cuts consisting of straight lines forming rectangular areas without sawing beyond the intersecting saw cut. Chip out the concrete between the saw cut and the joint, or crack, to remove all unsound concrete and into at least 13 mm of visually sound concrete. Thoroughly clean the cavity thus formed with high pressure water jets supplemented with oil-free compressed air to remove all loose material. Immediately before filling the cavity, apply a prime coat to the dry cleaned surface of all sides and bottom of the cavity, except any joint face. Apply the prime coat in a thin coating and scrubbed into the surface with a stiff-bristle brush. Provide prime coat for portland cement repairs consisting of a neat cement grout and for epoxy resin repairs consisting of epoxy resin, Type III, Grade 1. Fill the prepared cavity with material identified in the following table based on the cavity volume.
Spall Repairs
Volume of Prepared Cavity After Removal Material Operations less than 0.00085 cubic meter epoxy resin mortar or epoxy resin or latex modified mortar 0.00085 cubic meter and 0.009 cubic meter Portland cement mortar more than 0.009 cubic meter Portland cement concrete or latex modified mortar
Provide portland cement concretes and mortars that consist of very low slump mixtures, 13 mm slump or less, proportioned, mixed, placed, consolidated by tamping, and cured, all as directed. Provide epoxy resin mortars made with Type III, Grade 1, epoxy resin, using proportions and mixing and placing procedures as recommended by the manufacturer and approved. Proprietary patching materials may be used, subject to Government approval. Place the epoxy resin materials in the cavity in layers with a maximum thickness of 50 mm. Provide adequate time between placement of additional layers such that the temperature of the epoxy resin material does not exceed 60 degrees C at any time during hardening. Provide mechanical vibrators and hand tampers to consolidate the concrete or mortar. Remove any repair material on the surrounding surfaces of the existing concrete before it hardens. Where the spalled area abuts a joint, provide an insert or other bond-breaking medium to prevent bond at the joint face. Saw a reservoir for the joint sealant to the dimensions required for other joints. Thoroughly clean the reservoir and then sealed with the sealer specified for the joints. In lieu of sawing, spalls not adjacent to joints and popouts, both less than 150 mm in maximum dimension, may be prepared by drilling a core 50 mm in diameter greater than the size of the defect, centered over the defect, and 50 mm deep or13 mm into sound concrete, whichever is greater. Repair the core hole as specified above for other spalls.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 59 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.12.5 Repair of Weak Surfaces
Weak surfaces are defined as mortar-rich, rain-damaged, uncured, or containing exposed voids or deleterious materials. Diamond grind slabs containing weak surfaces less than 6 mm thick to remove the weak surface. Diamond grind in accordance with paragraph DIAMOND GRINDING OF PCC SURFACES. All diamond ground areas are required to meet the thickness, smoothness and grade criteria specified in PART 1 GENERAL. Remove and replace slabs containing weak surfaces greater than 6 mm thick.
3.12.6 Repair of Pilot Lane Vertical Faces
Repair excessive edge slump and joint face deformation in accordance with paragraph EDGE SLUMP AND JOINT FACE DEFORMATION in PART 1. Repair inadequate consolidation (honeycombing or air voids) by saw cutting the face full depth along the entire lane length with a diamond blade. Obtain cores, as directed, to determine the depth of removal.
3.13 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR
Remove existing concrete pavement at locations indicated on the drawings. Prior to commencing pavement removal operations, inventory the pavement distresses (cracks, spalls, and corner breaks) along the pavement edge to remain. After pavement removal, survey the remaining edge again to quantify any damage caused by removal operations. Perform both surveys in the presence of the Government. Perform repairs as indicated and as specified herein. Carefully control all operations to prevent damage to the concrete pavement and to the underlying material to remain in place. Perform all saw cuts perpendicular to the slab surface, forming rectangular areas. Perform all existing concrete pavement repairs prior to paving adjacent lanes.
3.13.1 Removal of Existing Pavement Slab
When existing concrete pavement is to be removed and adjacent concrete is to be left in place, perform the first full depth saw cut on the joint between the removal area and adjoining pavement to stay in place with a standard diamond-type concrete saw. Next, perform a full depth saw cut parallel to the joint that is at least 600 mm from the joint and at least 150 mm from the end of any dowels with a wheel saw as specified in paragraph SAWING EQUIPMENT. Remove all pavement beyond this last saw cut in accordance with the approved demolition work plan. Remove all pavement between this last saw cut and the joint line by carefully pulling pieces and blocks away from the joint face with suitable equipment and then picking them up for removal. In lieu of this method, this strip of concrete may be carefully broken up and removed using hand-held jackhammers, 14 kg or less, or other approved light-duty equipment which does not cause stress to propagate across the joint saw cut and cause distress in the pavement which is to remain in place. In lieu of the above specified removal method, the slab may be sawcut full depth to divide it into several pieces and each piece lifted out and removed. Use suitable equipment to provide a truly vertical lift, and safe lifting devices used for attachment to the slab.
3.13.2 Edge Repair
Protect the edge of existing concrete pavement against which new pavement abuts from damage at all times. Remove and replace slabs which are
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 60 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
damaged during construction as directed at no cost to the Government. Repair of previously existing damage areas is considered a subsidiary part of concrete pavement construction. Saw off all exposed keys and keyways full depth.
3.13.2.1 Spall Repair
Conventional spall repairs are prohibited of all Vertical Landing Zones, Short Take-Off Lanes, and associated safety zones, blast zones, and rotation areas. In these areas, only full depth repairs are acceptable. In areas which have continuously reinforced steel, repair must not damage reinforcing steel in any way.
Not more than 15.0 percent of each slab's edge is allowed to be spalled. Provide a full depth saw cut on the exposed face to remove the spalled face of damaged slabs with spalls exceeding this quantity, regardless of spall size. Provide repair materials and procedures as previously specified in paragraph REPAIRING SPALLS ALONG JOINTS.
3.13.2.2 Underbreak and Underlying Material
Repair all underbreak by removal and replacement of the damaged slabs in accordance with paragraph REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF FULL SLABS above. Protect the underlying material adjacent to the edge of and under the existing pavement which is to remain in place from damage or disturbance during removal operations and until placement of new concrete, and be shaped as shown on the drawings or as directed. Maintain sufficient underlying material in place outside the joint line to completely prevent disturbance of material under the pavement which is to remain in place. Remove and replace any slab with underlying material that is disturbed or loses its compaction.
3.14 PAVEMENT PROTECTION
Protect the pavement against all damage prior to final acceptance of the work by the Government. Placement of aggregates, rubble, or other similar construction materials on airfield pavements is not allowed. Exclude traffic from the new pavement by erecting and maintaining barricades and signs until the concrete is at least 14 days old, or for a longer period if so directed. As a construction expedient in paving intermediate lanes between newly paved pilot lanes, operation of the hauling and paving equipment is permitted on the new pavement after the pavement has been cured for 7 days and the joints have been sealed or otherwise protected, the concrete has attained a minimum field cured flexural strength of 3.8 MPa and approved means are provided to prevent damage to the slab edge. Continuously maintain all new and existing pavement carrying construction traffic or equipment completely clean, and spillage of concrete or other materials cleaned up immediately upon occurrence. Take special care in areas where traffic uses or crosses active airfield pavement. Power broom other existing pavements at least daily when traffic operates. For fill-in lanes, provide equipment that does not damage or spall the edges or joints of the previously constructed pavement.
3.15 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
3.15.1 Testing and Inspection by Contractor
During construction, perform sampling and testing of aggregates, cementitious materials (cement, slag cement, and pozzolan), and concrete
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 61 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Furnish sampling platforms and belt templates to obtain representative samples of aggregates from charging belts at the concrete plant. Obtain samples of concrete at the point of delivery to the paver. Testing by the Government in no way relieves the specified testing requirements. Perform the inspection and tests described below, and based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action required and submit reports as required. Perform this testing regardless of any other testing performed by the Government, either for pay adjustment purposes or for any other reason.
3.15.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements
Perform CQC sampling, testing, inspection and reporting in accordance with the following Table.
TABLE 5 CONTRACTOR TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Fine Aggregate Gradation and Fineness Modulus
2 per lot ASTM C136/C136M 9 of 10 tests must vary Retest, resolve, retest sample at belt less than 0.15 from average
Outside limits on any Retest sieve
2nd gradation failure Stop, resolve, retest
1 per 10 ASTM C117 Outside limits on any Retest gradations sieve
2nd gradation failure Stop, repair, retest
Coarse Aggregate Gradation (each aggregate size)
2 per lot ASTM C136/C136M Outside limits on any Retest sample at belt sieve
2nd gradation failure report to COR, correct
2 consecutive averages of report to COR, stop ops, 5 tests outside limits repair, retest
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 62 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
1 per 10 ASTM C117 Outside limits on any Retest gradations sieve 2nd gradation failure report to COR, correct
2 consecutive averages of report to COR, stop ops, 5 tests outside limits repair, verify all operations
Workability Factor and Coarseness Factor Computation
Same as see paragraph Use individual C.A. and Check batching tolerances, C.A. and AGGREGATES F.A. gradations. re-calibrate scales F.A. Combine using batch ticket percentages. Tolerances: plus or minus 3 points on WF; plus or minus 5 points on CF from approved adjusted mix design values; only the portion of the tolerance box within the parallelogram is available for use
2 consecutive averages of Stop production paving, 5 tests outside limits report to COR, and revise materials and operations to be in compliance prior to restarting production paving
Aggregate Deleterious, Quality, and ASR Tests
First test see paragraph Stop production, retest, no later AGGREGATES replace aggregate. than time Increase testing interval of to 90 days if previous 2 uniformity tests pass testing and then every 60 days of concrete production
Plant - Scales, Weighing Accuracy
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 63 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Monthly NRMCA QC 3 Stop plant ops, repair, re-calibrate
Plant - Batching and Recording Accuracy
Weekly Record/Report Record Stop plant ops, repair, required/recorded/actual re-calibrate batch mass
Plant - Batch Plant Control
Every lot Record/Report Record type and amount of each material per lot
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Stationary Mixers
Every 4 COE CRD-C 55 After initial approval, Increase mixing time, months use abbreviated method change batching sequence, during reduce batch size to bring paving into compliance. Retest
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Truck Mixers
Every 4 ASTM C94/C94M Random selection of truck. Increase mixing time, months change batching sequence, during reduce batch size to bring paving into compliance. Retest
Concrete Mixture - Air Content
When test ASTM C231/C231M Individual test control Adjust AEA, retest specimens sample at point chart: Warning plus or prepared of discharge minus 1.0 plus 2 within the paving random lane Individual test control Halt operations, repair, chart: Action plus or retest minus 1.5
Range between 2 Re-calibrate AEA dispenser consecutive tests: Warning plus 2.0
Range between 2 Halt operations, repair, consecutive tests: Action retest plus 3.0
Concrete Mixture - Unit Weight and Yield
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 64 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Same as Air ASTM C138/C138M Individual test basis: Check batching tolerances Content sample at point Warning Yield minus 0 or of discharge plus 1 percent within the paving lane Individual test basis: Halt operations Action Yield minus 0 or plus 5 percent
Concrete Mixture - Slump
When test ASTM C143/C143M Individual test control Adjust batch masses within specimens sample at point chart: Upper Warning minus max W/C ratio prepared of discharge 13 mm below max plus 4 within the paving random lane Individual test control Stop operations, adjust, chart: Upper Action at retest maximum allowable slump
Range between each Stop operations, repair, consecutive test: 38 mm retest
Concrete Mixture - Temperature
When test ASTM C1064/C1064M See paragraph WEATHER LIMITATIONS specimens prepared sample at point of discharge within the paving lane
Concrete Mixture - Strength
8 per lot ASTM C31/C31M See paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH TESTING for CQC sample at point of discharge Perform fabrication of strength specimens and within the paving initial cure outside the paving lane and within 300 m lane of the sampling point.
Paving - Inspection Before Paving
Prior to Report Inspect underlying each paving materials, construction operation joint faces, forms, reinforcing, dowels, and embedded items
Paving - Inspection During Paving
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 65 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
During Monitor and control paving paving operation, operation including placement, consolidation, finishing, texturing, curing, and joint sawing.
Paving - Vibrators
Weekly COE CRD-C 521 Test frequency (in Repair or replace during concrete), and amplitude defective vibrators. paving (in air), average measurement at tip and head.
Moist Curing
2 per lot, Visual Repair defects, extend min 4 per curing by 1 day day
Membrane Compound Curing
Daily Visual Calculate coverage based Respray areas where on quantity/area coverage defective. Re-calibrate equipment
Cold Weather Protection
Once per day Visual Repair defects, report conditions to COR
3.15.3 Concrete Strength Testing for CQC
Perform Contractor Quality Control operations for concrete strength consisting of the following steps:
a. Take samples for strength tests at the paving site. Fabricate and cure test beams in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M; test them in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
b. Fabricate and cure 2 test beams per sublot from the same batch or truckload and at the same time acceptance beams are fabricated and test them for flexural strength at 7-day age.
c. Average all 8 flexural tests per lot. Convert this average 7-day flexural strength per lot to equivalent 90-day flexural strength using
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 66 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the Correlation Ratio determined during mixture proportioning studies.
d. Compare the equivalent 90-day flexural strength from the conversion to the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures from paragraph of same title.
e. If the equivalent average 90-day strength for the lot is below the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures by 490 kPa flexural strength or more, at any time, adjust the mixture to increase the strength, as approved.
f. Maintain up-to-date control charts for strength, showing the 7-day CQC flexural strength and the 90-day flexural strength (from acceptance tests) of each of these for each lot.
3.15.4 Reports
Report all results of tests or inspections conducted informally as they are completed and in writing daily. Prepare a weekly report for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the construction season through the current week. During periods of cold-weather protection, make daily reports of pertinent temperatures. These requirements do not relieve the obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs. Confirm such reports of failures and the action taken in writing in the routine reports. The Government has the right to examine all Contractor quality control records.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 13.43 Page 67 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 13 14.13
CONCRETE PAVING FOR AIRFIELDS AND OTHER HEAVY DUTY PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 UNIT PRICES
1.1.1 Measurements
The quantity of concrete to be paid for will be the volume of concrete in cubic meters including thickened edges, where required, placed in the completed and accepted pavement. Concrete will be measured in place in the completed and accepted pavement only within the neat line dimensions shown in the plan and cross section. No deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges or the space occupied by pavement reinforcement, dowel bars, or electrical conduits, nor for any void, or other structure extending into or through the pavement slab, measuring 0.1 cubic meter or less in volume. No other allowance for concrete will be made unless placed in specified locations in accordance with the approved contract modification. The quantity of other materials specified herein, and used in the construction of the work covered by this section, will not be measured for payment, but will be considered a subsidiary obligation, covered under the price per cubic meter for concrete. Joint sealing materials are covered in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
1.1.2 Payments
1.1.2.1 Lump Sum
The quantity of concrete will be paid for and included in the lump-sum contract price. If less than 100 percent payment is due based on the pay factors stipulated below, a unit price of 400 US dollars per cubic meter will be used for purposes of calculating the payment reduction. Payment will constitute full compensation for all materials, equipment, plant and tools, and for all labor and other incidentals necessary to complete the concrete pavement, except for other items specified herein for separate payment.
1.1.3 Payment of Lots
When a lot of material fails to meet the specification requirements, that lot will be accepted at a reduced price or be removed and replaced. The lowest computed percent payment determined for any pavement characteristic discussed below (for example, thickness, grade, and surface smoothness) becomes the actual percent payment for that lot. The actual percent payment will be applied to the unit price and the measured quantity of concrete in the lot to determine actual payment. Use results of strength tests to control concreting operations. Strength will be evaluated, but will not be considered for payment adjustment. Remove and replace any pavement not meeting the required 'Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance' at no additional cost to the Government.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.1.4 Payment Adjustment for Smoothness
1.1.4.1 Straightedge Testing
Record location and deviation from straightedge for all measurements. When more than 5.0 and less than or equal to 10.0 percent of all measurements made within a lot exceed the tolerance specified in paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS, after any reduction of high spots or removal and replacement, the computed percent payment based on surface smoothness will be 95 percent. When more than 10.0 percent and less than or equal to 15.0 percent of all measurements exceed the tolerance, the computed percent payment will be 90 percent. When more than 15.0 and less than or equal to 20.0 percent of all measurements exceed the tolerance, the computed percent payment will be 75 percent. Remove and replace the lot when more than 20.0 percent of the measurements exceed the tolerance, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.4.2 Profilograph Testing
Record location and data from all profilograph measurements. When the Profile Index of a 0.1 km segment of a lot exceeds the tolerance specified in paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS by 16 mm per km but less than 32 mm per km, after any reduction of high spots or removal and replacement, the computed percent payment based on surface smoothness will be 95 percent. When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 32 mm per km but less than 47 mm per km, the computed percent payment will be 90 percent. When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 47 mm per km but less than 63 mm per km, the computed percent payment will be 75 percent. Remove and replace the lot when the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 63 mm per km or more, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.5 Payment Adjustment for Plan Grade
When more than 5.0 and less than or equal to 10.0 percent of all measurements made within a lot are outside the specified tolerance, the computed percent payment for that lot will be 95 percent. When more than 10.0 percent but less than 50 percent are outside the specified tolerances, the computed percent payment for the lot will be 75 percent. Remove and replace the deficient area where the deviation from grade exceeds the specified tolerances by 50 percent or more, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.1.6 Payment Adjustment for Thickness
Using the Average Thickness of the lot, determine the computed percent payment for thickness by entering the following table:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Computed Percent Payment for Thickness
Deficiency in Thickness Pavements Equal To or Pavements Less Than 200 mm Determined by cores Greater Than 200 mm Thick Thick millimeters
0.00 to 6.2 100 100
6.3 to 12.5 75 65
12.6 to 18.9 50 0
19.0 or greater 0 0
Where 0 percent payment is indicated, remove the entire lot and replace at no additional cost to the Government. Where either of the two cores from a sublot show a thickness deficiency of 19 mm or greater, drill two more cores in the sublot and compute the average thickness of the four cores. If this average shows a thickness deficiency of 19 mm or more remove the entire sublot.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182 (2005; R 2017) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
ACI 214R (2011) Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete
ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ACI 325.14R (2017) Guide for Design and Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures for Pavements
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A1064/A1064M (2017) Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
ASTM A1078/A1078M (2019) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Dowels in Concrete Pavement
ASTM A185/A185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete
ASTM A615/A615M (2016) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A996/A996M (2016) Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C1017/C1017M (2013; E 2015) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete
ASTM C1064/C1064M (2017) Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C1077 (2017) Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation
ASTM C117 (2017) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C123/C123M (2014) Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate
ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C138/C138M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C142/C142M (2017) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and Friable Particles in Aggregates
ASTM C143/C143M (2015) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150/C150M (2018) Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C1602/C1602M (2018) Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C172/C172M (2017) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C174/C174M (2017) Standard Test Method for Measuring Thickness of Concrete Elements Using Drilled Concrete Cores
ASTM C192/C192M (2018) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
ASTM C231/C231M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C294 (2012; R 2017) Standard Descriptive Nomenclature for Constituents of Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C295/C295M (2018a) Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C31/C31M (2019) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33/C33M (2018) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C494/C494M (2017) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C618 (2019) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C78/C78M (2018) Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ASTM C88 (2018) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C881/C881M (2015) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete
ASTM C94/C94M (2018) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C989/C989M (2018a) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D1752 (2018) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM D2995 (1999; R 2009) Determining Application Rate of Bituminous Distributors
ASTM D3665 (2012; R 2017) Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials
ASTM D4791 (2010) Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)
NRMCA QC 3 (2015) Quality Control Manual: Section 3, Plant Certifications Checklist: Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities
U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)
AF ETL 97-5 (1997) Proportioning Concrete Mixtures with Graded Aggregates for Rigid Airfield Pavements
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
COE CRD-C 130 (2001) Standard Recommended Practice for Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse Aggregate Particles
COE CRD-C 143 (1962) Specifications for Meters for Automatic Indication of Moisture in Fine Aggregate
COE CRD-C 300 (1990) Specifications for Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
COE CRD-C 521 (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete
COE CRD-C 55 (1992) Test Method for Within-Batch Uniformity of Freshly Mixed Concrete
COE CRD-C 662 (2009) Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials, Lithium Nitrate Admixture and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Diamond Grinding Plan; G
Dowels; G
Dowel Bar Assemblies; G
Equipment
Proposed Techniques; G
SD-05 Design Data
Preliminary Proposed Proportioning; G
Proportioning Studies; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Batch Plant Manufacturer's Inspection Report; G
Slipform Paver Manufacturer's Inspection Report; G
Sampling and Testing; G
Diamond Grinding of PCC Surfaces; G
Mixer Performance (Uniformity) Testing; G
Repair Recommendations Plan; G
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor Quality Control Staff; G
Laboratory Accreditation and Validation
Commercial Laboratory; G
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
NRMCA Certificate of Conformance
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Contractor Quality Control Staff
Reference Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL for Contractor personnel qualification requirements. Submit American Concrete Institute certification for Contractor Quality Control staff. Qualifications and resumes for petrographer, surveyor, concrete batch plant operator, and profilograph operator. All Contractor Quality Control personnel assigned to concrete construction are required to be American Concrete Institute (ACI) certified in the following grade:
a. The minimum requirements for the CQC System Manager consist of being a graduate engineer or a graduate of construction management, with a minimum of 5 years airfield construction experience and a minimum of 1 year experience as a CQC System Manager on an airfield construction project.
b. CQC personnel responsible for inspection of concrete paving operations: ACI Concrete Transportation Inspector. The ACI Concrete Transportation Inspector is required to be present at the paving site during all paving operations, with the exception of the initial saw cutting operation. The QC manager is required to be present during initial saw cutting operations.
c. CQC staff is required to oversee all aspects of sawing operations (sawing, flushing, vacuuming, checking for random cracking, lighting).
d. Lead Foreman or Journeyman of the Concrete Placing, Finishing, and Curing Crews: ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician/Finisher.
e. Batch Plant Manufacturer's Representative: A representative from the batch plant manufacturer is required to be on-site to inspect and make necessary adjustments to all components of the batch plant including but not limited to aggregate bin weighing operations, water metering, cement and fly ash weighing devices. All necessary inspections and adjustments by the manufacturer representative is required to be performed prior to uniformity testing. Submit a written Batch Plant Manufacturer's Inspection Report signed by the representative noting all inspection items and corrections and stating the batch plant is capable of producing the volume of concrete as required herein.
f. Field Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I.
g. Slipform Paving Equipment Manufacturer's Representative: A representative of the slipform paving equipment manufacturer is required to be on-site to inspect and make corrections to the paving equipment to ensure proper operations. Perform a complete and full hydraulic flow test of the vibrator system prior to the test section being placed. Submit a written Slipform Paver Manufacturer's Inspection Report signed by the manufacturer's representative noting all inspections, corrections, and flow tests have been performed and the paver is in a condition to perform the required work.
h. Laboratory Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I or II.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4.2 Other Staff
Submit for approval, the qualifications and resumes for the following staff:
a. Petrographer: Bachelor of Science degree in geology or petrography, trained in petrographic examination of concrete aggregate according to ASTM C294 and ASTM C295/C295M and trained in identification of the specific deleterious materials and tests identified in this specification. Detail the education, training and experience related to the project-specific test methods and deleterious materials in the Resume and submit at least 20 days before petrographic and deleterious materials examination is to commence.
b. Licensed Surveyor: Perform all survey work under the supervision of a Licensed Surveyor.
c. Concrete Batch Plant Operator: National Ready Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA) Plant Manager certification.
d. Profilograph Operator: Certification by equipment manufacturer or a state Department of Transportation.
1.4.3 Laboratory Accreditation and Validation
Provide laboratory and testing facilities. Submit accreditation of the commercial laboratory by an independent evaluation authority, indicating conformance to ASTM C1077, including all applicable test procedures. The laboratories performing the tests are required to be accredited in accordance with ASTM C1077, including ASTM C78/C78M and ASTM C1260. Provide current accreditation and include the required and optional test methods, as specified. Provide on-site temperature-controlled concrete curing facilities.
1.4.3.1 Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning
Aggregate testing and mixture proportioning studies are required to be performed by a commercial laboratory.
1.4.3.2 Acceptance Testing
Provide all materials, labor, and facilities required for molding, curing, testing, and protecting test specimens at the paving site and in the laboratory. Provide steel molds for molding the beam specimens. Provide and maintain boxes or other facilities suitable for storing and curing the specimens at the paving site while in the mold within the temperature range stipulated by ASTM C31/C31M. Provide flexural loading equipment in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
1.4.3.3 Contractor Quality Control
All sampling and testing is required to be performed by an approved, on-site, independent, commercial laboratory, or for cementitious materials and admixtures, the manufacturer's laboratory.
1.4.3.4 Laboratory Inspection
The Government will inspect all laboratories requiring validation for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
equipment and test procedures prior to the start of any concreting operations for conformance to ASTM C1077. Schedule and provide payment for laboratory inspections. Additional payment or a time extension due to failure to acquire the required laboratory validation is not allowed. The laboratory is to maintain this certification for the duration of the project.
1.4.4 Preconstruction Testing of Materials
All sampling and testing is required to be performed. Use an approved commercial laboratory or, for cementitious materials and chemical admixtures, a laboratory maintained by the manufacturer of the material. Materials are not allowed to be used until notice of acceptance has been given. Additional payment or extension of time due to failure of any material to meet project requirements, or for any additional sampling or testing required is not allowed. Additional tests may be performed by the Government; such Government testing does not relieve any required testing responsibilities.
1.4.4.1 Aggregates
Sample aggregates in the presence of a Government Representative. Obtain samples in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M and be representative of the materials to be used for the project. Perform all aggregate tests no earlier than 120 days prior to contract award. Submit test results a minimum of 7 days before commencing mixture proportioning studies.
1.4.4.2 Chemical Admixtures, Curing Compounds and Epoxies
At least 30 days before the material is used, submit certified copies of test results for the specific lots or batches to be used on the project. Provide test results less than 6 months old prior to use in the work. Retest chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing, and rejected if test results do not meet manufacturer requirements.
1.4.4.3 Cementitious Materials
Cement, slag cement, and pozzolan will be accepted on the basis of manufacturer's certification of compliance, accompanied by mill test reports showing that the material in each shipment meets the requirements of the specification under which it is provided. Provide mill test reports no more than 1 month old, prior to use in the work. Do not use cementitious materials until notice of acceptance has been given. Cementitious materials may be subjected to testing by the Government from samples obtained at the mill, at transfer points, or at the project site. If tests prove that a cementitious material that has been delivered is unsatisfactory, promptly remove it from the project site. Retest cementitious material that has not been used within 6 months after testing, and reject if test results do not meet manufacturer requirements.
1.4.5 Testing During Construction
During construction, sample and test aggregates, cementitious materials, and concrete as specified herein. The Government will sample and test concrete and ingredient materials as considered appropriate. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Testing by the Government does not relieve the specified testing requirements.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4.6 Test Section
Operate and calibrate the mixing plant prior to start of placing the test sections. Do not construct the test sections prior to receiving approval for uniformity testing. Construct the pilot lane and fill-in lane test sections on two separate days using the projects approved mixture proportions. Construct test sections with the same pavement section and placement width proposed for production paving. The underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test sections are to be constructed is required to be the same as the remainder of the course represented by the test sections. Perform variations in mixture proportions, other than water, if directed. Use the same equipment, materials, and construction techniques on the test sections proposed for use in all subsequent work. Perform base course preparation, concrete production, placing, consolidating, texturing, curing, construction of joints, and all testing in accordance with applicable provisions of this specification. Three days after completion of the test sections, provide and evaluate eight cores with a minimum diameter of 150 mm by full depth cut from points selected in the test sections by the Government. Construct the test sections meeting all specification requirements and being acceptable in all aspects, including plastic and hardened concrete properties, surface texture, thickness, grade, and longitudinal and transverse joint alignment. Failure to construct an acceptable test section necessitates construction of additional test sections at no additional cost to the Government. Do not commence production paving until the results on aggregates and concrete, including evaluation of cores, and all pavement measurements for edge slump, joint face deformation, actual plan grade, surface smoothness and thickness have been submitted and approved. Remove test sections which do not meet specification requirements at no expense to the Government. If slipform paving is performed and is unable to construct an acceptable test section, repair or replace the slipform paving equipment, or paving completed using fixed-forms and equipment compatible with them and allowed by the specification. Pavement accepted as a production lot will be evaluated and paid as specified in PART 1 GENERAL. Use the test sections to develop and demonstrate the proposed techniques of mixing, hauling, placing, consolidating, finishing, texturing, curing, initial saw cutting, start-up procedures, sampling, testing methods, plant operations, and the preparation of the construction joints for production paving.
1.4.6.1 Pilot Lane
Up to 10 days, but not more than 60 days, prior to construction of the concrete pavement, construct a test section near the job site, but not as part of the production pavement area. Construct the test section consisting of one paving lane at least 50 m long and to the same thickness as the thickest portion of pavement shown on the Drawings. Construct at the same lane width as that required for use in the project. Provide at least one transverse construction joint in the test section. If doweled longitudinal construction joints are required in any of the production pavements, install them full length along one side of the test lane throughout the test section. Construct the test section on two separate days.
1.4.6.2 Fill-In Lane
A fill-in lane is defined as full width concrete placement using two adjacent existing lanes as forms.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Consider the first 50 m of the initial production fill-in lane as a fill-in lane test section for purposes of testing and evaluation. All requirements for the test section are applicable. Obtain cores from the fill-in lane side of the longitudinal construction joint with the pilot lane.
1.4.7 Acceptability of Work
The materials and the pavement itself will be accepted on the basis of production testing. The Government may make check tests to validate the results of the production testing. If the results of the production testing vary by less than 2.0 percent of the Government's test results, the results of the production testing will be used. If the results of the Government and production tests vary by 2.0 percent, but less than 4.0 percent, the average of the two will be considered the value to be used. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, carefully evaluate each sampling and testing procedure and obtain another series of Government and production tests on duplicate samples of material. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, use the results of the tests made by the Government and the Government will continue check testing of this item on a continuous basis until the two sets of tests agree within less than 4.0 percent on a regular basis. Testing performed by the Government does not relieve the specified testing requirements.
1.4.8 Acceptance Requirements
1.4.8.1 Pavement Lots
A lot is that quantity of construction to be evaluated for acceptance with specification requirements. A lot is equal to one shift of production not to exceed 750 cubic meters. In order to evaluate thickness, divide each lot into four equal sublots. A sublot is equal to one shift of production not to exceed 190 cubic meters. Grade determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Surface smoothness determinations will be made on every 0.1 km segment in each lot. Select sample locations on a random basis in accordance with ASTM D3665. When operational conditions cause a lot to be terminated before the specified four sublots have been completed, use the following procedure to adjust the lot size and number of tests for the lot. Where three sublots have been completed, they constitute a lot. Where one or two sublots have been completed, incorporate them into the next lot (except for the last lot), and the total number of sublots used and acceptance criteria adjusted accordingly.
1.4.8.2 Evaluation
Provide all sampling and testing required for acceptance and payment adjustment, including batch tickets with all required acceptance testing. Individuals performing sampling, testing and inspection duties are required to meet the Qualifications. The Government reserves the right to direct additional samples and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification requirements. Testing in these areas are in addition to the sublot or lot testing, and the requirements for these areas are the same as those for a sublot or lot. Provide facilities for and, where directed, personnel to assist in obtaining samples for any Government testing.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.5.1 Bulk Cementitious Materials
Provide all cementitious materials in bulk at a temperature, as delivered to storage at the site, not exceeding 65 degrees C. Provide sufficient cementitious materials in storage to sustain continuous operation of the concrete mixing plant while the pavement is being placed. Provide separate facilities to prevent any intermixing during unloading, transporting, storing, and handling of each type of cementitious material.
1.5.2 Aggregate Materials
Store aggregate at the site of the batching and mixing plant avoiding breakage, segregation, intermixing or contamination by foreign materials. Store each size of aggregate from each source separately in free-draining stockpiles. Provide a minimum 0.6 m thick sacrificial layer left undisturbed for each aggregate stored on ground. Provide free-draining storage for fine aggregate and the smallest size coarse aggregate for at least 24 hours immediately prior to use. Maintain sufficient aggregate at the site at all times to permit continuous uninterrupted operation of the mixing plant at the time concrete pavement is being placed. Do not allow tracked equipment on coarse aggregate stockpiles.
1.5.3 Other Materials
Store reinforcing bars and accessories above the ground on supports. Store all materials to avoid contamination and deterioration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section is intended to stand alone for construction of concrete pavement. However, where the construction covered herein interfaces with other sections, construct each interface to conform to the requirements of both this section and the other section, including tolerances for both.
2.1.1 Surface Smoothness
Use the straightedge method for longitudinal and transverse testing, and at the ends of the paving limits for the project. Smoothness requirements do not apply over crowns, drainage structures, or similar penetration. Maintain detailed notes of the testing results and provide a copy to the Government after each day's testing.
2.1.1.1 Straightedge Testing
Provide the finished surfaces of the pavements with no abrupt change of 6 mm or more, and all pavements within the limits specified when checked with an approved 4 m straightedge. Provide all other airfield areas with a variation from a straight edge not greater than 6 mm in either the longitudinal or transverse direction.
2.1.1.2 Testing Method
After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking thereon, but not later than 48 hours after placement, test the entire surface of the pavement in each lot in such a manner as to reveal all surface
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. If any pavement areas are diamond ground, retest these areas immediately after diamond grinding. Test the entire area of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. Perform the transverse lines 4.5 m or less apart, as directed. Perform the longitudinal lines at the centerline of each paving lane shown on the drawings, regardless of whether multiple lanes are allowed to be paved at the same time, and at the 1/8th point in from each side of the lane. Also test other areas having obvious deviations. Perform longitudinal testing lines continuous across all joints. Perform transverse testing lines for pilot lanes carried to construction joint lines and for fill-in lanes carried 600 mm across construction joints, and the readings in this area applied to the fill-in lane. Perform straightedge testing of the longitudinal edges of slipformed pilot lanes before paving fill-in lanes as specified below.
2.1.1.2.1 Straightedge Testing
Hold the straightedge in contact with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface. Determine measurements along the entire length of the straight edge.
2.1.2 Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
2.1.2.1 Edge Slump
When slip-form paving is used, provide a maximum of 15.0 percent of the total free edge of each pavement panel with a maximum edge slump of 6 mm and none of the free edge of the pavement lot with an edge slump exceeding 9 mm. (A pavement panel is defined as a lane width by the length between two adjacent transverse contraction joints. The total free edge of the pavement is the cumulative total linear measurement of pavement panel edge originally constructed as non-adjacent to any existing pavement; for example, 30 m of pilot lane originally constructed as a separate lane, would have 60 m of free edge; 30 m of fill-in lane would have no free edge.) The area affected by the downward movement of the concrete along the pavement edge is a maximum of 450 mm back from the edge.
2.1.2.2 Joint Face Deformation
In addition to the edge slump limits specified above, provide a vertical joint face with a surface within the maximum limits shown below:
Offset from Offset from Offset from Abrupt Offset Offset of Joint Straightedge Straightedge Straightedge in Any Face from True Applied Applied Applied Top to Direction (d) Vertical (e) Longitudinally Longitudinally Bottom Against to Pavement to Vertical the Joint Face Surface (a) Face (b) (c)
Airfield Pavement
3 mm 6 mm 9 mm 3 mm 8 mm per 100 mm
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Offset from Offset from Offset from Abrupt Offset Offset of Joint Straightedge Straightedge Straightedge in Any Face from True Applied Applied Applied Top to Direction (d) Vertical (e) Longitudinally Longitudinally Bottom Against to Pavement to Vertical the Joint Face Surface (a) Face (b) (c)
All Other Pavement
6 mm All other items same as airfield pavement
(a) Measurement is taken by placing the straightedge longitudinally on the pavement surface 25 mm from the free edge. (b) Measurement is taken by applying the straightedge longitudinally along the vertical joint face. (c) Measurement places a 9.5 mm spacer attached to a straightedge and spaced approximately equal to the thickness of the concrete being measured. The offset from straightedge with spacers is measured by placing the spacers against the top and bottom of the vertical concrete face.
(d) An abrupt offset in the joint face occurring along a short distance. Check for abrupt offsets at any location that an abrupt offset appears to be a possible issue.
(e) Measurement of the offset from the joint face to a level in the true vertical position against the joint face.
2.1.2.3 Slump Determination
Test the pavement surface to determine edge slump immediately after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit walking thereon. Perform testing with a minimum 4 m straightedge to reveal irregularities exceeding the edge slump tolerance specified above. Determine the vertical edge slump at each free edge of each slipformed paving lane constructed. Place the straightedge transverse to the direction of paving and the end of the straightedge located at the edge of the paving lane. Record measurements at 1.5 to 3.0 m spacings, as directed, commencing at the header where paving was started. Initially record measurements at 1.5 m intervals in each lane. When no deficiencies are present after 5 measurements, the interval may be increased. The maximum interval is 3.0 m. When any deficiencies exist, return the interval to 1.5 m. In addition to the transverse edge slump determination above, at the same time, record the longitudinal surface smoothness of the joint on a continuous line 25 mm back from the joint line using the minimum 4 m straightedge advanced one-half its length for each reading. Perform other tests of the exposed joint face to ensure that a uniform, true vertical joint face is attained. Properly reference all recorded measurements in accordance with paving lane identification and stationing, and a report submitted within 24 hours after measurement is made. Identify areas requiring replacement within the report.
2.1.2.4 Excessive Edge Slump
When edge slump exceeding the limits specified above is encountered on either side of the paving lane, record additional straightedge
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
measurements to define the linear limits of the excessive slump. Remove and replace concrete slabs having excessive edge slump or joint deformation to the next transverse joint in conformance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Discontinue use of slip-form paving equipment and procedures that fail to consistently provide edges within the specified tolerances on edge slump and joint face deformation construct by means of standard paving procedures using fixed forms.
2.1.3 Plan Grade
Within 5 days after paving of each lot, test the finished surface of the pavement area by running lines of levels at intervals corresponding with every longitudinal and transverse joint to determine the elevation at each joint intersection. Record the results of this survey and provide a copy to the Government at the completion of the survey of each lot. Provide finished surfaces of all airfield pavements that vary less than 13 mm above or below the plan grade line or elevation indicated. The above deviations from the approved grade line and elevation are not permitted in areas where closer conformance with the planned grade and elevation is required for the proper functioning of appurtenant structures. Provide finished surfaces of new abutting pavements that coincide at their juncture. Provide horizontal control of the finished surfaces of all airfield pavements that vary not more than 13 mm from the plan alignment indicated.
2.1.4 Flexural Strength
Submit certified copies of laboratory test reports and sources for cement, supplementary cementitious materials (SCM), aggregates, admixtures, curing compound, epoxy, and proprietary patching materials proposed for use on this project. Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance in accordance with the following procedures.
2.1.4.1 Sampling and Testing
For acceptance, obtain one composite sample of concrete from each sublot in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M from one batch or truckload. Fabricate and cure test beams 152 x 152 mm in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M; and tested at 14 days in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
2.1.4.2 Computations
Average the eight 14-day strength tests for the lot. Use the average strength in accordance with paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE in PART 2.
2.1.5 Thickness
Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance and payment adjustment in accordance with the following procedure. Drill two cores, between 100 and 150 mm in diameter, from the pavement, per sublot (8 per lot). Drill the cores within 3 days after lot placement, filling the core holes with an approved non-shrink concrete, respraying the cored areas with curing compound, and for measuring the cores. Provide the results with the thickness measurement data. Record eight measurements of thickness around the circumference of each core and one in the center, in accordance with ASTM C174/C174M. Average the pavement thickness from the 8 cores for the lot and evaluate as described in paragraph PAYMENT
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
ADJUSTMENT FOR THICKNESS above.
2.1.6 Evaluation of Cores
Record and submit testing, inspection, and evaluation of each core for mortar-rich surface, surface paste, uniformity of aggregate distribution, segregation, voids, cracks, and depth of reinforcement or dowel (if present). Moisten the core with water to visibly expose the aggregate and take a minimum of three photographs of the sides of the cores entire length, rotating the core approximately 120 degrees between photographs. Include a ruler for scale in the photographs that does not obscure the core. Provide plan view of location for each core.
2.1.7 Diamond Grinding of PCC Surfaces
Those performing diamond grinding are required to have a minimum of three years experience in diamond grinding of airfield pavements. In areas not meeting the specified limits for surface smoothness and plan grade, reduce high areas to attain the required smoothness and grade, except as depth is limited below. Reduce high areas by diamond grinding the hardened concrete with an approved equipment after the concrete is at a minimum age of 14 days. Perform diamond grinding by sawing with an industrial diamond abrasive which is impregnated in the saw blades. Assemble the saw blades in a cutting head mounted on a machine designed specifically for diamond grinding that produces the required texture and smoothness level without damage to the concrete pavement or joint faces. Provide diamond grinding equipment with saw blades that are 3 mm wide, a minimum of 55-6060 blades per 300 mm of cutting head width, and capable of cutting a path a minimum of 0.9 m wide. Diamond grinding equipment that causes ravels, aggregate fractures, spalls or disturbance to the joints is not permitted. The maximum area corrected by diamond grinding the surface of the hardened concrete is 10 percent of the total area of any sublot. The maximum depth of diamond grinding is 6 mm. Provide diamond grinding machine equipped to flush and vacuum the pavement surface. Dispose of all debris from diamond grinding operations off Government property. Prior to diamond grinding, submit a Diamond Grinding Plan for review and approval. At a minimum, include the daily reports for the deficient areas, the location and extent of deficiencies, corrective actions, and equipment. Remove and replace all pavement areas requiring plan grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above in conformance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. All areas in which diamond grinding has been performed are subject to the thickness tolerances specified in paragraph THICKNESS, above.
Prior to production diamond grinding operations, perform a test section at the approved location. Perform a test section that consists of a minimum of two adjacent passes with a minimum length of 12 m to allow evaluation of the finish, transition between adjacent passes, and the results of crossing a transverse joint. Production diamond grinding operations are not to be performed prior to approval.
2.2 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Provide cementitious materials consisting of portland cement or portland cement in combination with supplementary cementitious materials (SCM), that conform to appropriate specifications listed below. New submittals are required when the cementitious materials sources or types change.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.2.1 Portland Cement
Provide portland cement conforming to ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, low alkali including false set requirements.
2.2.2 Pozzolan
2.2.2.1 Fly Ash
Provide fly ash that conforms to ASTM C618, Class F, including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica reaction with a loss on ignition not exceeding 3 percent. Provide Class F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity with a total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent.
2.2.2.2 Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
Provide natural pozzolan that is raw or calcined and conforms to ASTM C618, Class N, including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica reaction with a loss on ignition not exceeding 3 percent. Provide Class N pozzolan for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity with a total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent.
2.2.2.3 Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan
Provide Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) that conforms to ASTM C618, Class F or N, and the following additional requirements:
a. The strength activity index at 28 days of age of at least 95 percent of the control specimens.
b. The average particle size not exceeding 6 microns.
2.2.3 Slag Cement
Provide slag cement (ground-granulated blast-furnace slag) that conforms to ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 120.
2.2.4 Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) Content
Provide a concrete mix that contain one of the SCMs listed in Table 2 within the range specified therein, whether or not the aggregates are found to be reactive in accordance with paragraph ALKALI SILICA REACTIVITY.
TABLE 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS CONTENT Supplementary Cementitious Material Minimum Content Maximum Content (percent) (percent) Class N Pozzolan and Class F Fly Ash
SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 > 70 percent 25 35
SiO2 + A12O3 + Fe2O3 > 80 percent 20 35
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS CONTENT Supplementary Cementitious Material Minimum Content Maximum Content (percent) (percent) SiO2 + A12O3 + Fe2O3 > 90 percent 15 35
UFFA and UFP 7 16
Slag Cement 40 50
2.3 AGGREGATES
Provide aggregates meeting the requirements of this specification. If aggregate sources in the project area do not meet the requirements of this specification, provide aggregates from sources outside the project area.
2.3.1 Aggregate Sources
2.3.1.1 Durability of Coarse Aggregate
Evaluate and test all fine and coarse aggregates to be used in all concrete for durability in accordance with ASTM C88. Provide fine and coarse aggregates with a maximum of 18 percent loss when subjected to 5 cycles using magnesium sulfate or a maximum of 12 percent loss when subjected to 5 cycles if Sodium Sulfate is used.
2.3.1.2 Alkali-Silica Reactivity
Evaluate and test fine and coarse aggregates to be used in all concrete for alkali-aggregate reactivity. Test all size groups and sources proposed for use.
a. Evaluate the fine and coarse aggregates separately, using ASTM C1260. Reject individual aggregates with test results that indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08 percent after 28 days of immersion in 1N NaOH solution, or perform additional testing as follows: utilize the proposed low alkali portland cement, blended cement, and SCM, or Lithium Nitrate in combination with each individual aggregate. If only SCMs are being evaluated, test in accordance with ASTM C1567. If Lithium Nitrate is being evaluated, with or without SCMs, test in accordance with COE CRD-C 662. Determine the quantity that meets all the requirements of these specifications and that lowers the expansion equal to or less than 0.08 percent after 28 days of immersion in a 1N NaOH solution. Base the mixture proportioning on the highest percentage of SCM required to mitigate ASR-reactivity.
b. If any of the above options does not lower the expansion to less than 0.08 percent after 28 days of immersion in a 1N NaOH solution, reject the aggregate(s) and submit new aggregate sources for retesting. Submit the results of testing for evaluation and acceptance.
2.3.1.3 Combined Aggregate Gradation
In addition to the grading requirements specified for coarse aggregate and for fine aggregate, provide the combined aggregate grading meeting the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
following requirements:
a. Provide materials selected and the proportions used such that when the Coarseness Factor (CF) and the Workability Factor (WF) are plotted on a diagram as described in d. below, the point and its associated production tolerance thus determined falls within the parallelogram described therein. Refer to AF ETL 97-5 for combined aggregate plot area recommendations for the intended placement technique(s).
b. Determine the Coarseness Factor (CF) from the following equation:
CF = (cumulative percent retained on the 9.5 mm sieve)(100) (cumulative percent retained on the 2.36 mm sieve)
c. The Workability Factor (WF) is defined as the percent passing the 2.36 mm sieve based on the combined aggregate gradation. Adjust the WF, prorated upwards only, by 2.5 percentage points for each 42 kg per cubic meter of cementitious material per cubic meter greater than 335 kg per cubic meter.
d. Plot a diagram using a rectangular scale with WF on the Y-axis with units from 20 (bottom) to 45 (top), and with CF on the X-axis with units from 80 (left side) to 30 (right side). On this diagram, plot a parallelogram with corners at the following coordinates (CF-75, WF-28), (CF-75, WF-40), (CF-45, WF-32.5), and (CF-45, WF-44.5). If the point determined by the intersection of the computed CF and WF does not fall within the above parallelogram, revise the grading of each size of aggregate used and the proportions selected as necessary.
e. Plot the associated production tolerance limits, identified in Table 6, around the CF and adjusted WF point.
2.3.2 Coarse Aggregate
2.3.2.1 Material Composition
Provide coarse aggregate consisting of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone or a combination thereof. Provide aggregates, as delivered to the mixers, consisting of clean, hard, uncoated particles meeting the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M except as specified herein. Provide coarse aggregate that has been washed sufficient to remove dust and other coatings. Provide coarse aggregates with a maximum sodium sulfate soundness loss of 12 percent, or with a magnesium sulfate soundness loss of 18 percent after five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C88.
2.3.2.2 Particle Shape Characteristics
Provide particles of the coarse aggregate that are generally spherical or cubical in shape. The quantity of flat particles and elongated particles in any size group coarser than the 9.5 mm sieve are not allowed to exceed 20 percent by weight as determined by the Flat Particle Test and the Elongated Particle Test of ASTM D4791, Method A. A flat particle is defined as one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width greater than 3.
2.3.2.3 Size and Grading
Provide coarse aggregate with a nominal maximum size of 37.5 mm with a minimum of 10 percent retained on the 25 mm sieve of the proposed combined
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
aggregate gradation. Grade and provide the individual aggregates in a minimum of two size groups meeting the individual grading requirements of ASTM C33/C33M, Size No. 4 (37 mm to 19 mm) and Size No. 67 (19 mm to No. 4 ) to meet the coarseness and workability factor criteria of paragraph COMBINED AGGREGATE GRADATION. A third coarse aggregate size group may be required to meet the above mentioned coarseness and workability criteria of paragraph COMBINED AGGREGATE GRADATION.
2.3.2.4 Deleterious Materials - Airfield Pavements
The amount of deleterious material in each size group of coarse aggregate is not allowed to exceed the limits shown in Table 5 below, determined in accordance with the test methods shown.
TABLE 5 LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE AGGREGATE FOR AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS
Percentage by Mass Materials (h) Severe Weather
Clay lumps and friable particles 0.2 (ASTM C142/C142M)
Shale (a) (ASTM C295/C295M) 0.1
Material finer than 0.075 mm (b) (ASTM C117) 0.5 Lightweight particles (c) 0.2 (ASTM C123/C123M)
Clay ironstone (d) (ASTM C295/C295M) 0.1
Chert, cherty stone, and other aggregates (less than 2.40 Sp. 0.1 Gr.) (e) (ASTM C123/C123M and ASTM C295/C295M)
Claystone, mudstone, and siltstone (f) (ASTM C295/C295M) 0.1
Shaly and argillaceous limestone (g) 0.2 (ASTM C295/C295M)
Other soft particles (COE CRD-C 130) 1.0
Total of all deleterious substances exclusive of material 1.0 finer than 0.075 mm
(a) Shale is defined as a fine-grained, thinly laminated or fissile sedimentary rock. It is commonly composed of clay or silt or both. It has been indurated by compaction or by cementation, but not so much as to have become slate.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 5 LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE AGGREGATE FOR AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS
Percentage by Mass Materials (h) Severe Weather
(b) Limit for material finer than 0.075 mm is allowed to be increased to 1.5 percent for crushed aggregates if the fine material consists of crusher dust that is essentially free from clay or shale. Use XRD or other appropriate techniques as determined by petrographer to quantify amount and justify increase.
(c) Test with a separation medium with a density of Sp. Gr. of 2.0. This limit does not apply to coarse aggregate manufactured from blast-furnace slag unless contamination is evident.
(d) Clay ironstone is defined as an impure variety of iron carbonate, iron oxide, hydrous iron oxide, or combinations thereof, commonly mixed with clay, silt, or sand. It commonly occurs as dull, earthy particles, homogeneous concretionary masses, or hard-shell particles with soft interiors. Other names commonly used for clay ironstone are "chocolate bars" and limonite concretions.
(e) Chert is defined as a rock composed of quartz, chalcedony or opal, or any mixture of these forms of silica. It is variable in color. The texture is so fine that the individual mineral grains are too small to be distinguished by the unaided eye. Its hardness is such that it scratches glass but is not scratched by a knife blade. It may contain impurities such as clay, carbonates, iron oxides, and other minerals. Cherty stone is defined as any type of rock (generally limestone) that contains chert as lenses and nodules, or irregular masses partially or completely replacing the original stone. Other aggregates consist of obsidian, ash tuff, and palygorskite.
(f) Claystone, mudstone, or siltstone, is defined as a massive fine-grained sedimentary rock that consists predominantly of indurated clay or silt without laminations or fissility. It may be indurated either by compaction or by cementation.
(g) Shaly limestone is defined as limestone in which shale occurs as one or more thin beds or laminae. These laminae may be regular or very irregular and may be spaced from tens of millimeters down to minute fractions of a millimeter. Argillaceous limestone is defined as a limestone in which clay minerals occur disseminated in the stone in the amount of 10 to 50 percent by weight of the rock; when these make up from 50 to 90 percent, the rock is known as calcareous (or dolomitic) shale (or claystone, mudstone, or siltstone).
(h) Perform testing in accordance with the referenced test methods, except use the minimum sample size specified below.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.3.2.5 Testing Sequence for Deleterious Materials in Coarse Aggregate - Airfields Only
No extension of time or additional payment due to any delays caused by the testing, evaluation, or personnel requirements is allowed. The minimum test sample size of the coarse aggregate is 90 kg for the 19 mm and larger maximum size and 12 kg for the 4.75 to 19 mm coarse aggregate. Provide facilities for the ready procurement of representative test samples. The testing procedure on each sample of coarse aggregate for compliance with limits on deleterious materials is as follows:
Step 1: Wash each full sample of coarse aggregate for material finer than the 0.075 mm sieve. Discard material finer than the 0.075 mm sieve.
Step 2: Test remaining full sample for clay lumps and friable particles and remove.
Step 3. Test remaining full sample for chert and cherty stone with SSD density of less than 2.40 specific gravity. Remove lightweight chert and cherty stone. Retain other materials less than 2.40 specific gravity for Step 4.
Step 4: Test the materials less than 2.40 specific gravity from Step 3 for lightweight particles (Sp. GR. 2.0) and remove. Restore other materials less than 2.40 specific gravity to the sample.
Step 5: Test remaining sample for clay-ironstone, shale, claystone, mudstone, siltstone, shaly and argillaceous limestone, and remove.
Step 6: Test a minimum of one-fifth of remaining full sample for other soft particles.
2.3.3 Fine Aggregate
2.3.3.1 Composition
Provide fine aggregate consisting of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of the two, and composed of clean, hard, durable particles meeting the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M. Stockpile and batch each type of fine aggregate separately. Provide fine aggregate with particles that are generally spherical or cubical in shape.
2.3.3.2 Grading
Provide fine aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, with a grading that conforms to the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M and having a fineness modulus of not less than 2.50 nor more than 3.40.
2.3.3.3 Deleterious Material
The minimum test sample size for fine aggregate proposed for use in airfield paving is 5 kg. The amount of deleterious material in the fine aggregate is not to exceed the following limits by mass when performed on the full sample:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 23 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Material Percentage by Mass Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C142/C142M 1.0 Material finer than 0.075 mm ASTM C117 3.0 Lightweight particles ASTM C123/C123M using a medium with a 0.5 density of Sp. Gr. of 2.0
Total of all above 3.0
2.4 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
2.4.1 General Requirements
Chemical admixtures may only be used when the specific admixture type and manufacturer is the same material used in the mixture proportioning studies. Provide air-entraining admixture conforming to ASTM C260/C260M. An accelerating admixture conforming to ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, may be used only when specified in paragraph MIXTURE PROPORTIONS below provided it is not used to reduce the amount of cementitious material. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing calcium chloride are not allowed. Provide retarding or water-reducing admixture that meet the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type A, B, or D, except that the 6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests are waived. ASTM C494/C494M, Type F and G high range water reducing admixtures and Type S specific performance admixtures are not allowed. ASTM C1017/C1017M flowable admixtures are not allowed.
2.4.2 Lithium Nitrate
Provide lithium admixture that consists of a nominal 30 percent aqueous solution of Lithium Nitrate, with a density of 1.2 kg per L, with the approximate chemical form as shown below:
Constituent Limit (Percent by Mass)
LiNo3 (Lithium Nitrate) 30 plus or minus 0.5
-2 0.1 (max) SO4 (Sulfate Ion)
Cl- (Chloride Ion) 0.2 (max)
Na+ (Sodium Ion) 0.1 (max)
K+ (Potassium Ion) 0.1 (max)
Provide the services of a manufacturer's technical representative experienced in dispensing, mixing, proportioning, placement procedures and curing of concrete containing lithium nitrate, at no expense to the Government. This representative is required to be present on the project prior to and during at least the first two days of placement using lithium nitrate.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 24 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.5 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND
Provide membrane forming curing compound that conforms to COE CRD-C 300 and is white pigmented.
2.6 WATER
Provide water for mixing and curing that is fresh, clean, potable, and free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali, except that non-potable water, or water from concrete production operations, may be used if it meets the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M.
2.7 JOINT MATERIALS
2.7.1 Expansion Joint Material
Provide preformed expansion joint filler material conforming to ASTM D1752 Type II or III. Provide expansion joint filler that is 19 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated, and provided in a single full depth piece.
2.7.2 Slip Joint Material
Provide slip joint material that is 6 mm thick expansion joint filler, unless otherwise indicated, conforming to paragraph EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL.
2.8 REINFORCING
Provide reinforcement that is free from loose, flaky rust, loose scale, oil, grease, mud, or other coatings that might reduce the bond with concrete. Removal of thin powdery rust and tight rust is not required. However, reinforcing steel which is rusted to the extent that it does not conform to the required dimensions or mechanical properties is not allowed to be used.
2.8.1 Welded Wire Reinforcement
Provide welded wire reinforcement that is deformed or smooth, conforming to ASTM A1064/A1064M or ASTM A185/A185M, and is provided in flat sheets.
2.9 DOWELS
2.9.1 Dowels
Provide dowels in single piece bars fabricated or cut to length at the shop or mill before delivery to the site. Dowels are to be free of loose, flaky rust and loose scale and be clean and straight. Dowels may be sheared to length provided that the deformation from true shape caused by shearing does not exceed 1 mm on the diameter of the dowel and does not extend more than 1 mm from the end of the dowel. Dowels are required to be plain (non-deformed) steel bars conforming to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 40 or 60; ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 50 or 60. Dowels are to be epoxy coated in conformance with Type 1 coating requirements of ASTM A1078/A1078M, to include the ends. Provide grout retention rings that are fully circular metal or plastic devices capable of supporting the dowel until the epoxy hardens. Dowel sleeves or inserts are not permitted.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 25 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.9.2 Dowel Bar Assemblies
Provide dowel bar assemblies that consist of a framework of metal bars or wires arranged to provide rigid support for the dowels throughout the paving operation, with a minimum of four continuous bars or wires extending along the joint line. Provide dowels that are welded to the assembly or held firmly by mechanical locking arrangements that prevent them from rising, sliding out, or becoming distorted during paving operations.
2.10 EPOXY RESIN
Provide epoxy-resin materials that consist of two-component materials conforming to the requirements of ASTM C881/C881M, Class as appropriate for each application temperature to be encountered, except that in addition, the materials meet the following requirements:
a. Material for use for embedding dowels and anchor bolts be Type IV, Grade 3.
b. Material for use as patching materials for complete filling of spalls and other voids and for use in preparing epoxy resin mortar be Type III, Grade as approved.
c. Material for use for injecting cracks be Type IV, Grade 1.
d. Material for bonding freshly mixed portland cement concrete or mortar or freshly mixed epoxy resin concrete or mortar to hardened concrete be Type V, Grade as approved.
2.11 EQUIPMENT
All plant, equipment, tools, and machines used in the work are required to be maintained in satisfactory working conditions at all times. Submit the following:
a. Details and data on the batching and mixing plant prior to plant assembly including manufacturer's literature showing that the equipment meets all requirements specified herein.
b. Obtain National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) certification of the concrete plant, at no expense to the Government. Provide inspection report of the concrete plant by an engineer approved by the NRMCA. A list of NRMCA approved engineers is available on the NRMCA website at http://www.nrmca.org. Submit a copy of the NRMCA QC Manual Section 3 Concrete Plant Certification Checklist, NRMCA Certificate of Conformance, and Calibration documentation on all measuring and weighing devices prior to uniformity testing.
c. A description of the equipment proposed for transporting concrete mixture from the central mixing plant to the paving equipment.
d. A description of the equipment proposed for the machine and hand placing, consolidating and curing of the concrete mixture. Manufacturer's literature on the paver and finisher, together with the manufacturer's written instructions on adjustments and operating procedures necessary to assure a tight, smooth surface on the concrete pavement. The literature is required to show that the equipment meets all details of these specifications. Include detailed information on
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 26 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
automatic laser controlled systems if proposed for use.
2.11.1 Batching and Mixing Plant
2.11.1.1 Location
Locate the batching and mixing plant off Government premises no more than 15 minutes haul time from the placing site. Provide operable telephonic or radio communication between the plant and the placing site at all times concreting is taking place.
2.11.1.2 Type and Capacity
Provide a batching and mixing plant consisting of a stationary-type central mix plant, including permanent installations and portable or relocatable plants installed on stable foundations. Provide a plant designed and operated to produce concrete within the specified tolerances, with a minimum capacity of 200 cubic meters per hour, that conforms to the requirements of NRMCA QC 3 including provisions addressing:
1. Material Storage and Handling 2. Batching Equipment 3. Central Mixer 4. Ticketing System 5. Delivery System
2.11.1.3 Tolerances
Materials Percentage of Required Mass
Cementitious Materials plus or minus 1
Aggregate plus or minus 2
Water plus or minus 1
Admixture plus or minus 3
For volumetric batching equipment for water and admixtures, the above numeric tolerances apply to the required volume of material being batched. Dilute concentrated admixtures uniformly, if necessary, to provide sufficient volume per batch to ensure that the batchers consistently operate within the above tolerance.
2.11.1.4 Moisture Control
Provide a plant capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying moisture contents of the aggregates and to change the quantities of the materials being batched. Provide an electric moisture meter complying with the provisions of COE CRD-C 143 for measuring of moisture in the fine aggregate. Provide a sensing element arranged so that measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of the fine aggregate bin or in the fine aggregate batcher.
2.11.2 Concrete Mixers
Provide stationary or truck mixers that are capable of combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation. Do not charge the mixers in excess of the capacity
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 27 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
recommended by the manufacturer. Operate the mixers at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer. Maintain the mixers in satisfactory operating condition, with the mixer drums kept free of hardened concrete. Replace mixer blades or paddles when worn down more than 10 percent of their depth when compared with the manufacturer's dimension for new blades or paddles.
2.11.2.1 Stationary
Stationary mixers are required to be drum or pan mixers. Provide mixers with an acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed.
2.11.2.2 Mixing Time and Uniformity for Stationary Mixers
Use the projects approved mixture proportions for uniformity testing. For stationary mixers, before uniformity data are available, the minimum mixing time for each batch after all solid materials are in the mixer, provided that all of the mixing water is introduced before one-fourth of the mixing time has elapsed, is 1 minute for mixers having a capacity of 0.75 cubic meter. For mixers of greater capacity, increase this minimum time by 20 seconds for each additional cubic meter or fraction thereof. After results of uniformity tests are available, the mixing time may be reduced to the minimum time required to meet uniformity requirements; but if uniformity requirements are not being met, increase the mixing time as directed. Perform mixer performance tests at new mixing times immediately after any change in mixing time or volume. Conduct the Regular Test sequence for initial determination of the mixing time or as directed. When regular testing is performed, the concrete is required to meet the limits of any five of the six uniformity requirements listed in Table 1 below.
2.11.2.3 Abbreviated Test
Use the projects approved mixture proportions for uniformity testing. Conduct the Abbreviated Test sequence for production concrete verification at the frequency specified in Table 6. When abbreviated testing is performed, the concrete is required to meet only those requirements listed for abbreviated testing. Use the projects approved mix design proportions for uniformity testing. For regular testing perform all six tests on three batches of concrete. The range for regular testing is the average of the ranges of the three batches. Abbreviated testing consists of performing the three required tests on a single batch of concrete. The range for abbreviated testing is the range for one batch. If more than one mixer is used and all are identical in terms of make, type, capacity, condition, speed of rotation, the results of tests on one of the mixers apply to the others, subject to the approval. Perform all mixer performance (uniformity) testing in accordance with COE CRD-C 55 and with paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION in PART 3.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 28 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 1 UNIFORMITY REQUIREMENTS--STATIONARY MIXERS
Parameter Regular Tests Allowable Abbreviated Tests Allowable Maximum Range for Average Maximum Range for 1 Batch of 3 Batches
Unit weight of air-free 32 kg per cubic m 32 kg per cubic m mortar Air content 1.0 percent --
Slump 25 mm 25 mm
Coarse aggregate 6.0 percent 6.0 percent
Compressive strength at 7 10.0 percent 10.0 percent days Water content 1.5 percent
2.11.2.4 Truck
Truck mixers are not allowed for mixing or transporting slipformed paving concrete. Provide only truck mixers designed for mixing or transporting paving concrete with extra large blading and rear opening specifically for low-slump paving concrete. Provide truck mixers, the mixing of concrete therein, and concrete uniformity and testing thereof that conform to the requirements of ASTM C94/C94M. Determine the number of revolutions between 70 to 100 for truck-mixed concrete and the number of revolutions for shrink-mixed concrete by uniformity tests as specified in ASTM C94/C94M and in requirements for mixer performance stated in paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION in PART 3. If requirements for the uniformity of concrete are not met with 100 revolutions of mixing after all ingredients including water are in the truck mixer drum, discontinue use of the mixer until the condition is corrected. Water is not allowed to be added after the initial introduction of mixing water except, when on arrival at the job site, the slump is less than specified and the water-cement ratio is less than that given as a maximum in the approved mixture. Additional water may be added to bring the slump within the specified range provided the approved water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Inject water into the head of the mixer (end opposite the discharge opening) drum under pressure, and turn the drum or blades a minimum of 30 additional revolutions at mixing speed. The addition of water to the batch at any later time is not allowed.
2.11.3 Transporting Equipment
Transport slipform concrete to the paving site in non-agitating equipment conforming to ASTM C94/C94M or in approved agitators. Transport fixed form concrete in approved truck mixers designed with extra large blading and rear opening specifically for low slump concrete. Provide transporting equipment designed and operated to deliver and discharge the required concrete mixture completely without segregation.
2.11.4 Transfer and Spreading Equipment
Provide equipment for transferring concrete from the transporting
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 29 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
equipment to the paving lane in front of the paver that is specially manufactured, self-propelled transfer equipment which accepts the concrete outside the paving lane, transfers, and spreads it evenly across the paving lane in front of the paver and strike off the surface evenly to a depth which permits the paver to operate efficiently.
2.11.5 Paver-Finisher
Provide paver-finisher consisting of a heavy-duty, self-propelled machine designed specifically for paving and finishing high quality pavement, with a minimum weight of 3280 kg per m of lane width, and powered by an engine having a minimum 15,000 W per m of lane width. The paver-finisher is required to spread, consolidate, and shape the plastic concrete to the desired cross section in one pass. The mechanisms for forming the pavement are required to be easily adjustable in width and thickness and for required crown. In addition to other spreaders required by paragraph above, the paver-finisher equipped with a full width knock-down auger or paddle mechanism, capable of operating in both directions, which evenly spreads the fresh concrete in front of the screed or extrusion plate.
2.11.5.1 Vibrators
Provide gang mounted immersion vibrators at the front of the paver on a frame equipped with suitable controls so that all vibrators can be operated at any desired depth within the slab or completely withdrawn from the concrete, as required. Provide vibrators that are automatically controlled to immediately stop as forward motion of the paver ceases. Equipped the paver-finisher with an electronic vibrator monitoring device displaying the operating frequency of each individual internal vibrator with a readout display visible to the paver operator that operates continuously while paving, and displays all vibrator frequencies with manual or automatic sequencing among all individual vibrators. Discontinue paving if the vibrator monitoring system fails to operate properly during the paving operation. Provide the spacing of the immersion vibrators across the paving lane as necessary to properly consolidate the concrete, with a maximum clear distance between vibrators of 750 mm and outside vibrators a maximum of 300 mm from the lane edge. Determine vibrator frequency and amplitude per COE CRD-C 55.
2.11.5.2 Screed or Extrusion Plate
Equipped the paver-finisher with a transversely oscillating screed or an extrusion plate to shape, compact, and smooth the surface and finish the surface that no significant amount of hand finishing, except use of cutting straightedges, is required. Provide adjustment for variation in lane width or thickness and to prevent more than 200 mm of the screed or extrusion plate extending over previously placed concrete on either end when paving fill-in lanes. Repair or replace machines that cause displacement of properly installed forms or cause ruts or indentations in the prepared underlying materials and machines that cause frequent delays due to mechanical failures as directed.
2.11.5.3 Longitudinal Mechanical Float
A longitudinal mechanical float may be used. If used, provide a float that is specially designed and manufactured to smooth and finish the pavement surface without working excess paste to the surface that is rigidly attached to the rear of the paver-finisher or to a separate self-propelled frame spanning the paving lane. Provide float plate at
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 30 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
least 1.5 m long by 200 mm wide and automatically be oscillated in the longitudinal direction while slowly moving from edge to edge of the paving lane, with the float plate in contact with the surface at all times.
2.11.5.4 Other Types of Finishing Equipment
Clary screeds, other rotating tube floats, or bridge deck finishers are not allowed on mainline paving, but may be allowed on irregular or odd-shaped slabs, and near buildings or trench drains, subject to approval. Provide bridge deck finishers with a minimum operating weight of 3400 kg that have a transversely operating carriage containing a knock-down auger and a minimum of two immersion vibrators. Only use vibrating screeds or pans for isolated slabs where hand finishing is permitted as specified, and only where specifically approved.
2.11.5.5 Fixed Forms
Provide paver-finisher equipped with wheels designed to ride the forms, keep it aligned with the forms, and spread the load so as to prevent deformation of the forms. Provide paver-finishers traveling on guide rails located outside the paving lane that are equipped with wheels when traveling on new or existing concrete to remain. Alternatively, a modified slipform paver that straddles the forms may be used. Provide a modified slipform paver which has the side conforming plates removed or rendered ineffective and travels over or along pre-placed fixed forms.
2.11.5.6 Slipform
The slipform paver-finisher is required to be automatically controlled and crawler mounted with padded tracks so as to be completely stable under all operating conditions and provide a finish to the surface and edges so that no edge slump beyond allowable tolerance occurs. Provide suitable moving side forms that are adjustable and produce smooth, even edges, perpendicular to the top surface and meeting specification requirements for alignment and freedom from edge slump.
2.11.6 Curing Equipment
Provide equipment for applying membrane-forming curing compound mounted on a self-propelled frame that spans the paving lane. Constantly agitate the curing compound reservoir mechanically (not air) during operation and provide a means for completely draining the reservoir. Provide a spraying system that consists of a mechanically powered pump which maintains constant pressure during operation, an operable pressure gauge, and either a series of spray nozzles evenly spaced across the lane to provide uniformly overlapping coverage or a single spray nozzle which is mounted on a carriage which automatically traverses the lane width at a speed correlated with the forward movement of the overall frame. Protect all spray nozzles with wind screens. Calibrate the spraying system in accordance with ASTM D2995, Method A, for the rate of application required in paragraph MEMBRANE CURING. Provide hand-operated sprayers allowed by that paragraph with compressed air supplied by a mechanical air compressor. Immediately replace curing equipment if it fails to apply an even coating of compound at the specified rate.
2.11.7 Texturing Equipment
Provide texturing equipment as specified below. Before use, demonstrate the texturing equipment on a test section, and modify the equipment as
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 31 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
necessary to produce the texture directed.
2.11.7.1 Burlap Drag
Securely attach a burlap drag to a separate wheel mounted frame spanning the paving lane or to one of the other similar pieces of equipment. Provide length of the material between 600 to 900 mm dragging flat on the pavement surface. Provide burlap drag with a width at least equal to the width of the slab. Provide clean, reasonably new burlap material, completely saturated with water before attachment to the frame, always resaturated before start of use, and kept clean and saturated during use. Provide burlap conforming to AASHTO M 182, Class 3 or 4.
2.11.7.2 Broom
Apply surface texture using an approved mechanical stiff bristle broom drag of a type that provides a uniformly scored surface transverse to the pavement center line. Provide broom capable of traversing the full width of the pavement in a single pass at a uniform speed and with a uniform pressure that results in scores uniform in appearance and approximately 1.5 mm in depth but not more than 3 mm in depth.
2.11.8 Sawing Equipment
Provide equipment for sawing joints and for other similar sawing of concrete consisting of standard diamond-type concrete saws mounted on a wheeled chassis which can be easily guided to follow the required alignment. Provide diamond tipped blades. If demonstrated to operate properly, abrasive blades may be used. Provide spares as required to maintain the required sawing rate. Provide saws capable of sawing to the full depth required. Early-entry saws may be used, subject to demonstration and approval. No change to the initial sawcut depth is permitted.
2.11.9 Straightedge
Provide and maintain at the job site, in good condition, a minimum 4 m straightedge for each paving train for testing the hardened portland cement concrete surfaces. Provide straightedges constructed of aluminum or magnesium alloy and blades of box or box-girder cross section with flat bottom, adequately reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy. Provide straightedges with handles for operation on the pavement.
2.11.10 Work Bridge
Provide a self-propelled working bridge capable of spanning the required paving lane width where workmen can efficiently and adequately reach the pavement surface.
2.12 SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES
2.12.1 Specified Flexural Strength
Specified flexural strength, R, for concrete is 4.14 MPa at 90 days, as determined by tests made in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M of beams fabricated and cured in accordance with ASTM C192/C192M.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 32 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.12.2 Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio
Maximum allowable water-cementitious material ratio is 0.45. The water-cementitious material ratio is the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus SCM by the mass equivalency method described in ACI 211.1.
2.12.3 Air Content
Provide concrete that is air-entrained with a total air content of 4.0 plus or minus 1.5 percentage points, at the point of placement. Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C231/C231M.
2.12.4 Slump
The maximum allowable slump of the concrete at the point of placement is 50 mm for pavement constructed with fixed forms. For slipformed pavement, at the start of the project, select a slump which produces in-place pavement meeting the specified tolerances for control of edge slump. The selected slump is applicable to both pilot and fill-in lanes.
2.12.5 Concrete Temperature
The temperature of the concrete as delivered is required to conform to the requirements of paragraphs PAVING IN HOT WEATHER and PAVING IN COLD WEATHER, in PART 3. Determine the temperature of concrete in accordance with ASTM C1064/C1064M.
2.12.6 Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance
The strength of the concrete will be considered acceptable when the equivalent 90-day flexural strengths for each lot are above the 'Specified Flexural Strength' as determined by correlation with 14-day flexural strength tests specified in paragraph MIXTURE PROPORTIONING FOR FLEXURAL STRENGTH below, and no individual set (2 specimens per sublot) in the lot are 170 kPa or more below the equivalent 'Specified Flexural Strength'. If any lot or sublot, respectively, fails to meet the above criteria, remove and replace the lot or sublot at no additional cost to the Government. This is in addition to and does not replace the average strength required for day-to-day CQC operations as specified in paragraph AVERAGE CQC FLEXURAL STRENGTH REQUIRED FOR MIXTURES, below.
2.13 MIXTURE PROPORTIONS
2.13.1 Composition
Provide concrete composed of cementitious material, water, fine and coarse aggregates, and admixtures. Include supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) choice and usage in accordance with paragraph SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS (SCM) CONTENT. Provide a minimum total cementitious materials content of 310 kg per cubic meter. Acceptable admixtures consist of air entraining admixture and may also include, as approved, water-reducing admixture.
2.13.2 Proportioning Studies
Perform trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing, at no expense to the Government. Submit for approval the Preliminary Proposed Proportioning to include items a., b., and i. below a minimum of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 33 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
7 days prior to beginning the mixture proportioning study. Submit the results of the mixture proportioning studies signed and stamped by the registered professional engineer having technical responsibility for the mix design study, and submitted at least 30 days prior to commencing concrete placing operations. Include a statement summarizing the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size and the weights and volumes of each ingredient proportioned on a one cubic meter basis. Base aggregate quantities on the mass in a saturated surface dry condition. Provide test results demonstrating that the proposed mixture proportions produce concrete of the qualities indicated. Base methodology for trial mixtures having proportions, slumps, and air content suitable for the work as described in ACI 211.1, modified as necessary to accommodate flexural strength. ACI 211.1 can be aupplemented with ACI 325.14R. Submit test results including:
a. Coarse and fine aggregate gradations and plots. b. Combined aggregate gradation and coarseness vs. workability plots. c. Coarse aggregate quality test results, include deleterious materials. d. Fine aggregate quality test results. e. Mill certificates for cement and supplemental cementitious materials. f. Certified test results for air entraining, water reducing, retarding, non-chloride accelerating, and Lithium Nitrate admixtures. g. Specified flexural strength, slump, and air content. h. Documentation of required average CQC flexural strength, Ra. i. Recommended proportions and volumes for proposed mixture and each of three trial water-cementitious materials ratios. j. Individual beam breaks. k. Flexural strength summaries and plots. l. Correlation ratios for acceptance testing and CQC testing. m. Historical record of test results, documenting production standard deviation (if available). n. Narrative discussing methodology on how the mix design was developed. o. Alternative aggregate blending to be used during the test section if necessary to meet the required surface and consolidation requirements.
2.13.2.1 Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio
Perform at least three different water-cementitious materials ratios, which produce a range of strength encompassing that required on the project. The maximum allowable water-cementitious material ratio required in paragraph SPECIFIED FLEXURAL STRENGTH, above is the equivalent water-cementitious materials ratio. The maximum water-cementitious materials ratio of the approved mix design becomes the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio for the project, and in no case exceeds 0.45.
2.13.2.2 Trial Mixture Studies
Perform separate sets of trial mixture studies made for each combination of cementitious materials and each combination of admixtures proposed for use. No combination of either are to be used until proven by such studies, except that, if approved in writing and otherwise permitted by these specifications, an accelerating or retarding admixture may be used without separate trial mixture study. Perform separate trial mixture studies for each placing method (slip form, fixed form, or hand placement) proposed. Report the temperature of concrete in each trial batch. Design each mixture to promote easy and suitable concrete placement, consolidation and finishing, and to prevent segregation and excessive bleeding. Proportion laboratory trial mixtures for maximum permitted
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 34 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
slump and air content.
2.13.2.3 Mixture Proportioning for Flexural Strength
Follow the step by step procedure below:
a. Fabricate all beams for each mixture from the same batch or blend of batches. Fabricate and cure all beams in accordance with ASTM C192/C192M, using 152 x 152 mm steel beam molds.
b. Cure test beams from each mixture for 3, 7, 14, and 90-day flexural tests; 6 beams to be tested per age.
c. Test beams in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
d. Using the average strength for each w/c at each age, plot all results from each of the three mixtures on separate graphs for w/c versus: 3-day flexural strength 7-day flexural strength 14-day flexural strength 90-day flexural strength
e. From these graphs select a w/c that produces a mixture giving a 90-day flexural strength equal to the required strength determined in accordance with the next paragraph.
f. Using the above selected w/c, select from the graphs the expected 3, 7 and 14-day flexural strengths.
g. From the above expected strengths for the selected mixture, determine the Ratio of the 7-day flexural strength of the selected mixture to the 90-day flexural strength of the mixture (for CQC control).
h. From the above expected strengths for the selected mixture, determine the Ratio of the 14-day flexural strength of the selected mixture to the 90-day flexural strength of the mixture (for acceptance).
i. If there is a change in materials, perform additional mixture design studies using the new materials and new Correlation Ratios determined.
j. No concrete pavement placement is allowed until the mixture proportions are approved. The approved water-cementitious materials ratio is restricted to the maximum value specified in paragraph SPECIFIED FLEXURAL STRENGTH, above and not be increased without written approval.
2.13.3 Average CQC Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures
In order to ensure meeting the strength requirements specified in paragraph SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES above, during production, the mixture proportions selected during mixture proportioning studies and used during construction requires an average CQC flexural strength exceeding the specified strength, R, by the amount indicated below. This required average CQC flexural strength, Ra, is used only for CQC operations as specified in paragraph TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION in PART 3 and as specified in the previous paragraph. During production, adjust the required Ra, as appropriate and as approved, based on the standard deviation of average 90 -day strengths being attained during paving.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 35 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.13.3.1 From Previous Test Records
Where a concrete production facility has previous test records current to within 18 months, establish a standard deviation in accordance with the applicable provisions of ACI 214R. Include test records from which a standard deviation is calculated that represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to those expected, that represent concrete produced to meet a specified flexural strength or strengths within 1 MPa of the 90-day flexural strength specified for the proposed work, and that consist of at least 30 consecutive tests. Perform verification testing to document the current strength. A strength test is the average of the strengths of two specimens made from the same sample of concrete and tested at 90 days. Required average CQC flexural strength, Ra, used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions is the value from the equation that follows, using the standard deviation as determined above:
Ra = R + 1.34S
Where: S = standard deviation R = specified flexural strength Ra = required average flexural strength
Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the requirements above but does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, establish a standard deviation as the product of the calculated standard deviation and a modification factor from the following table:
NUMBER OF TESTS MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR STANDARD DEVIATION
15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00
2.13.3.2 Without Previous Test Records
When a concrete production facility does not have sufficient field strength test records for calculation of the standard deviation, determine the required average strength, Ra, by adding 15 percent to the specified flexural strength, R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PAVING
Before commencing paving, perform the following. If used, place cleaned, coated, and adequately supported forms. Have any reinforcing steel needed at the paving site; all transporting and transfer equipment ready for use, clean, and free of hardened concrete and foreign material; equipment for spreading, consolidating, screeding, finishing, and texturing concrete at the paving site, clean and in proper working order; and all equipment and material for curing and for protecting concrete from weather or mechanical
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 36 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
damage at the paving site, in proper working condition, and in sufficient amount for the entire placement.
3.1.1 Weather Precaution
When windy conditions during paving appear probable, have equipment and material at the paving site to provide windbreaks, shading, fogging, or other action to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking or other damaging drying of the concrete.
3.1.2 Proposed Techniques
Submit placing and protection methods; paving sequence; jointing pattern; data on curing equipment and profilographs; demolition of existing pavements, as specified; pavement diamond grinding equipment and procedures. Submit for approval the following items:
a. A description of the placing and protection methods proposed when concrete is to be placed in or exposed to hot, cold, or rainy weather conditions.
b. A detailed paving sequence plan and proposed paving pattern showing all planned construction joints; transverse and longitudinal dowel bar spacing; and identifying pilot lanes and hand placement areas. Deviations from the jointing pattern shown on the drawings are not allowed without written approval of the contracting officer.
c. Plan and equipment proposed to control alignment of sawn joints within the specified tolerances.
d. Data on the curing equipment, media and methods to be used.
e. Data on profilograph and methods to measure pavement smoothness.
f. Pavement demolition work plan, presenting the proposed methods and equipment to remove existing pavement and protect pavement to remain in place.
3.2 CONDITIONING OF UNDERLYING MATERIAL
3.2.1 General Procedures
Verify the underlying material, upon which concrete is to be placed is clean, damp, and free from debris, waste concrete or cement, frost, ice, and standing or running water. Prior to setting forms or placement of concrete, verify the underlying material is well drained and have been satisfactorily graded by string-line controlled, automated, trimming machine and uniformly compacted in accordance with the applicable Section of these specifications. Test the surface of the underlying material to crown, elevation, and density in advance of setting forms or of concrete placement using slip-form techniques. Trim high areas to proper elevation. Fill and compact low areas to a condition similar to that of surrounding grade, or filled with concrete monolithically with the pavement. Low areas filled with concrete are not to be cored for thickness to avoid biasing the average thickness used for evaluation and payment adjustment. Rework and compact any underlying material disturbed by construction operations to specified density immediately in front of the paver. If a slipform paver is used, continue the same underlying material under the paving lane beyond the edge of the lane a sufficient
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 37 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
distance that is thoroughly compacted and true to grade to provide a suitable trackline for the slipform paver and firm support for the edge of the paving lane.
3.2.2 Traffic on Underlying Material
After the underlying material has been prepared for concrete placement, equipment is not permitted thereon with exception of the paver. Subject to specific approval, crossing of the prepared underlying material at specified intervals for construction purposes may be permitted, provided rutting or indentations do not occur. Rework and repair the surface before concrete is placed. Transporting equipment is not to be allowed to operate on the prepared and compacted underlying material in front of the paver-finisher.
3.3 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
3.3.1 Placement and Protection During Inclement Weather
Do not commence placing operations when heavy rain or other damaging weather conditions appear imminent. At all times when placing concrete, maintain on-site sufficient waterproof cover and means to rapidly place it over all unhardened concrete or concrete that might be damaged by rain. Suspend placement of concrete whenever rain, high winds, or other damaging weather commences to damage the surface or texture of the placed unhardened concrete, washes cement out of the concrete, or changes the water content of the surface concrete. Immediately cover and protect all unhardened concrete from the rain or other damaging weather. Completely remove and replace any slab damaged by rain or other weather full depth, by full slab width, to the nearest original joint, as specified in paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS below, at no expense to the Government. Rain damaged pavement is pavement with coarse aggregate exposed at the surface. Cores evaluated by a qualified petrographer to contain carbonation to a depth greater than 3.175 mm or Mohs hardness of less than 2 are also considered rain damaged.
3.3.2 Paving in Hot Weather
When the ambient temperature during paving is expected to exceed 32 degrees C, properly place and finish the concrete in accordance with procedures previously submitted, approved, and as specified herein. Provide concrete that does not exceed the temperature shown in the table below when measured in accordance with ASTM C1064/C1064M at the time of delivery. Cooling of the mixing water or aggregates or placing in the cooler part of the day may be required to obtain an adequate placing temperature. Cool steel forms and reinforcing as needed to maintain steel temperatures below 49 degrees C. Cool or protect transporting and placing equipment if necessary to maintain proper concrete placing temperature. Keep the finished surfaces of the newly laid pavement damp by applying a fog spray (mist) with approved spraying equipment until the pavement is covered by the curing medium.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 38 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Maximum Allowable Concrete Placing Temperature
Relative Humidity, Percent, During Maximum Allowable Concrete Time of Concrete Placement Temperature in Degrees C
Greater than 60 32
40-60 30
Less than 40 27
3.3.3 Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
During weather with low humidity, and particularly with high temperature and appreciable wind, develop and institute measures to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks from developing. If plastic shrinkage cracking occurs, halt further placement of concrete until protective measures are in place to prevent further cracking. Periods of high potential for plastic shrinkage cracking can be anticipated by use of ACI 305R. In addition to the protective measures specified in the previous paragraph, the concrete placement may be further protected by erecting shades and windbreaks and by applying fog sprays of water, the addition of monomolecular films, or wet covering. Apply monomolecular films after finishing is complete, do not use in the finishing process. Immediately commence curing procedures when such water treatment is stopped. Repair plastic shrinkage cracks in accordance with paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Never trowel over or fill plastic shrinkage cracks with slurry.
3.3.4 Paving in Cold Weather
Cold weather paving is required to conform to ACI 306R. Use special protection measures, as specified herein, if freezing temperatures are anticipated or occur before the expiration of the specified curing period. Do not begin placement of concrete unless the ambient temperature is at least 2 degrees C and rising. Thereafter, halt placement of concrete whenever the ambient temperature drops below 5 degrees C. When the ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C, the temperature of the concrete when placed is required to be not less than 10 degrees C nor more than 25 degrees C. Provide heating of the mixing water or aggregates as required to regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer are required to be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Do not incorporate salt, chemicals or other materials in the concrete to prevent freezing. Provide covering and other means for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 10 degrees C for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period. Remove pavement slabs, full depth by full width, damaged by freezing or falling below freezing temperature to the nearest planned joint, and replace as specified in paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS, at no expense to the Government.
3.4 CONCRETE PRODUCTION
Provide batching, mixing, and transporting equipment with a capacity sufficient to maintain a continuous, uniform forward movement of the paver of not less than 0.8 m per minute. Deposit concrete transported in
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 39 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
non-agitating equipment in front of the paver within 45 minutes from the time cement has been charged into the mixing drum, except that if the ambient temperature is above 32 degrees C, the time is reduced to 30 minutes. Deposit concrete transported in truck mixers in front of the paver within 90 minutes from the time cement has been charged into the mixer drum of the plant or truck mixer. If the ambient temperature is above 32 degrees C, the time is reduced to 60 minutes. Accompany every load of concrete delivered to the paving site with a batch ticket from the operator of the batching plant. Provide batch ticket information required by ASTM C94/C94M on approved forms. In addition provide design quantities in mass or volume for all materials, batching tolerances of all materials, and design and actual water cementitious materials ratio on each batch delivered, the water meter and revolution meter reading on truck mixers and the time of day. Provide batch tickets for each truck delivered as part of the lot acceptance package to the placing foreman to maintain on file and deliver them to the Government weekly.
3.4.1 Batching and Mixing Concrete
Maintain scale pivots and bearings clean and free of rust. Remove any equipment which fails to perform as specified immediately from use until properly repaired and adjusted, or replaced.
3.4.2 Transporting and Transfer - Spreading Operations
Operate non-agitating equipment only on smooth roads and for haul time less than 15 minutes. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final position in the paving lane. Operate all equipment to discharge and transfer concrete without segregation. Dumping of concrete in discrete piles is not permitted. No transfer or spreading operation which requires the use of front-end loaders, dozers, or similar equipment to distribute the concrete are permitted.
3.5 PAVING
3.5.1 General Requirements
Construct pavement with paving and finishing equipment utilizing rigid fixed forms or by use of slipform paving equipment. Provide paving and finishing equipment and procedures capable of constructing paving lanes of the required width at a rate of at least 0.8 m of paving lane per minute on a routine basis. Control paving equipment and its operation, and coordinated with all other operations, such that the paver-finisher has a continuous forward movement at a reasonably uniform speed from beginning to end of each paving lane, except for inadvertent equipment breakdown. Backing the paver and refinishing a lane is not permitted. Remove and replace concrete refinished in this manner. Failure to achieve a continuous forward motion requires halting operations, regrouping, and modifying operations to achieve this requirement. Personnel are not permitted to walk or operate in the plastic concrete at any time. Where an open-graded granular base is required under the concrete, select paving equipment and procedures which operate properly on the base course without causing displacement or other damage.
3.5.2 Consolidation
Consolidate concrete with the specified type of lane-spanning, gang-mounted, mechanical, immersion type vibrating equipment mounted in front of the paver, supplemented, in rare instances as specified, by
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 40 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
hand-operated vibrators. Insert vibrators into the concrete to a depth that provides the best full-depth consolidation but not closer to the underlying material than 50 mm. Excessive vibration is not permitted. Discontinue paving operations if vibrators cause visible tracking in the paving lane, until equipment and operations have been modified to prevent it. Vibrate concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in isolated locations inaccessible to the gang-mounted vibration equipment with an approved hand-operated immersion vibrator operated from a bridge spanning the area. Do not use vibrators to transport or spread the concrete. Do not operate hand-operated vibrators in the concrete at one location for more than 20 seconds. Insert hand-operated vibrators between 150 to 400 mm on centers. For each paving train, provide at least one additional vibrator spud, or sufficient parts for rapid replacement and repair of vibrators at the paving site at all times. Any evidence of inadequate consolidation (honeycomb along the edges, large air pockets, or any other evidence) requires the immediate stopping of the paving operation and approved adjustment of the equipment or procedures.
3.5.3 Operation
When the paver approaches a header at the end of a paving lane, maintain a sufficient amount of concrete ahead of the paver to provide a roll of concrete which spills over the header. Provide a sufficient amount of extra concrete to prevent any slurry that is formed and carried along ahead of the paver from being deposited adjacent to the header. Maintain the spud vibrators in front of the paver at the desired depth as close to the header as possible before they are lifted. Provide additional consolidation adjacent to the headers by hand-manipulated vibrators. When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed pavement (fill-in lanes), provide provisions to prevent damage to the previously constructed pavement. Electronically control screeds or extrusion plates from the previously placed pavement so as to prevent them from applying pressure to the existing pavement and to prevent abrasion of the pavement surface. Maintain the overlapping area of existing pavement surface completely free of any loose or bonded foreign material as the paver-finisher operates across it. When the paver travels on existing pavement, maintain approved provisions to prevent damage to the existing pavement. Pavers using transversely oscillating screeds are not allowed to form fill-in lanes that have widths less than a full width for which the paver was designed or adjusted.
3.5.4 Required Results
Adjust and operate the paver-finisher, its gang-mounted vibrators and operating procedures coordinated with the concrete mixture being used, to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab throughout that is true to line and grade within specified tolerances. Provide a paver-finishing operation that produces a surface finish free of irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities in a single pass across the pavement; multiple passes are not permitted. Provide equipment and its operation that produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing other than the use of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent instances. Stop paving if any equipment or operation fails to produce the above results. Prior to recommencing paving, properly adjust or replace the equipment, modify the operation, or modify the mixture proportions, in order to produce the required results. No water, other than fog sprays (mist) as specified in paragraph PREVENTION OF PLASTIC SHRINKAGE CRACKING above, is allowed to be applied to the concrete or the concrete surface during paving and finishing.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 41 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.5 Fixed Form Paving
Provide paving equipment for fixed-form paving and the operation that conforms to the requirements of paragraph EQUIPMENT, and all requirements specified herein.
3.5.5.1 Forms for Fixed-Form Paving
a. Provide straight forms made of steel and in sections not less than 3 m in length that are clean and free of rust or other contaminants. Seal any holes or perforations in forms prior to paving unless otherwise permitted. Maintain forms in place and passable by all equipment necessary to complete the entire paving operation without need to remove horizontal form supports. Provide flexible or curved forms of proper radius for curves of 31 m radius or less. Provide wood forms for curves and fillets made of well-seasoned, surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend that have adequate strength and are rigidly braced. Provide forms with a depth equal to the pavement thickness at the edge. Where the project requires several different slab thicknesses, forms may be built up by bolting or welding a tubular metal section or by bolting wood planks to the bottom of the form to completely cover the underside of the base of the form and provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. Provide forms with the base width of the one-piece or built-up form not less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except provide forms 200 mm or less in vertical height with a base width not less than the vertical height of the form. Provide forms with maximum vertical deviation of top of any side form, including joints, not varying from a true plane more than 3 mm in 3 m, and the upstanding leg not varying more than 6 mm.
b. Provide form sections that are tightly locked and free from play or movement in any direction. Provide forms with adequate devices for secure settings so that when in place they withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the consolidating and finishing equipment.
c. Set forms for full bearing on foundation for entire length and width and in alignment with edge of finished pavement. Support forms during entire operation of placing, compaction, and finishing so that forms do not deviate vertically more than 3 mm from required grade and elevations indicated. Check conformity to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings and make necessary corrections immediately prior to placing the concrete. Clean and oil the forms each time before concrete is placed. Concrete placement is not allowed until setting of forms has been checked and approved by the CQC team.
d. Do not anchor guide rails for fixed form pavers into new concrete or existing concrete to remain.
3.5.5.2 Form Removal
Keep forms in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. When conditions are such that the early strength gain of the concrete is delayed, leave the forms in place for a longer time, as directed. Remove forms by procedures that do not damage the concrete. Do not use bars or heavy metal tools directly against the concrete in removing the forms.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 42 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Promptly repair any concrete found to be defective after form removal, using procedures specified or as directed.
3.5.6 Slipform Paving
3.5.6.1 General
Provide paving equipment for slipform paving and the operation thereof that conforms to the requirement of paragraph EQUIPMENT, and all requirements specified herein. Provide a slipform paver capable of shaping the concrete to the specified and indicated cross section, meeting all tolerances, with a surface finish and edges that require only a very minimum isolated amount of hand finishing, in one pass. If the paving operation does not meet the above requirements and the specified tolerances, immediately stop the operation, and regroup and replace or modify any equipment as necessary, modify paving procedures or modify the concrete mix, in order to resolve the problem. Provide a slipform paver that is automatically electronically controlled from a taut wire guideline for horizontal alignment and on both sides from a taut wire guideline for vertical alignment, except that electronic control from a ski operating on a previously constructed adjoining lane is required where applicable for either or both sides. Automatic, electronic controls are required for vertical alignment on both sides of the lane. Control from a slope-adjustment control or control operating from the underlying material is not allowed. Properly adjust side forms on slipform pavers so that the finished edge of the paving lane meets all specified tolerances. Install dowels in longitudinal construction joints as specified below. The installation of these dowels by dowel inserters attached to the paver or by any other means of inserting the dowels into the plastic concrete is not permitted.
3.5.6.2 Guideline for Slipform Paving
Accurately and securely install guidelines well in advance of concrete placement. Provide supports at necessary intervals to eliminate all sag in the guideline when properly tightened. Provide guideline consisting of high strength wire set with sufficient tension to remove all sag between supports. Provide supports that are securely staked to the underlying material or other provisions made to ensure that the supports are not displaced when the guideline is tightened or when the guideline or supports are accidentally touched by workmen or equipment during construction. Provide appliances for attaching the guideline to the supports that are capable of easy adjustment in both the horizontal and vertical directions. When it is necessary to leave gaps in the guideline to permit equipment to use or cross underlying material, provide provisions for quickly and accurately replacing the guideline without any delay to the forward progress of the paver. Provide supports on either side of the gap that are secured in such a manner as to avoid disturbing the remainder of the guideline when the portion across the gap is positioned and tightened. Check the guideline across the gap and adjacent to the gap for a distance of 60 m for horizontal and vertical alignment after the guideline across the gap is tightened. Provide vertical and horizontal positioning of the guideline such that the finished pavement conforms to the alignment and grade elevations shown on the drawings within the specified tolerances for grade and smoothness. The specified tolerances are intended to cover only the normal deviations in the finished pavement that may occur under good supervision and do not apply to setting of the guideline. Set the guideline true to line and grade.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 43 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.6.3 Stringless Technology
If the use of any type of stringless technology is proposed, submit a detailed description of the system and perform a trial field demonstration at least one week prior to start of paving. Approval of the control system will be based on the results of the demonstration and on continuing satisfactory operation during paving.
3.5.7 Placing Reinforcing Steel
Provide the type and amount of steel reinforcement indicated.
3.5.7.1 Pavement Thickness Greater Than 300 mm
For pavement thickness of 300 mm or more, install the reinforcement steel by the strike-off method wherein a layer of concrete is deposited on the underlying material, consolidated, and struck to the indicated elevation of the steel reinforcement. Place the reinforcement upon the pre-struck surface, followed by placement of the remaining concrete and finishing in the required manner. When placement of the second lift causes the steel to be displaced horizontally from its original position, provide provisions for increasing the thickness of the first lift and depressing the reinforcement into the unhardened concrete to the required elevation. Limit the increase in thickness only as necessary to permit correct horizontal alignment to be maintained. Remove and replace any portions of the bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 30 minutes without being covered with the top layer with newly mixed concrete without additional cost to the Government.
3.5.8 Placing Dowels
Ensure the method used to install and hold dowels in position result in dowel alignment within the maximum allowed horizontal and vertical tolerance of 3 mm per 300 mm. Except as otherwise specified below, maintain the horizontal spacing of dowels within a tolerance of plus or minus 15 mm. Locate the dowel vertically on the face of the slab within a tolerance of plus or minus 13 mmthe vertical alignment of the dowels parallel to the designated top surface of the pavement, except for those across the crown or other grade change joints. Measure dowels across crowns and other joints at grade changes to a level surface. Check horizontal alignment perpendicular to the joint edge with a framing square. Do not place longitudinal dowels closer than 0.6 times the dowel bar length to the planned joint line. If the last regularly spaced longitudinal dowel is closer than that dimension, move it away from the joint to a location 0.6 times the dowel bar length, but not closer than 150 mm to its nearest neighbor. Resolve dowel interference at a transverse joint-longitudinal joint intersection by deleting the closest transverse dowel (tie bar). Do not position the end of a transverse dowel closer than 300 mm from the end of the nearest longitudinal dowel. Install dowels as specified in the following subparagraphs.
3.5.8.1 Contraction Joints
Securely hold dowels in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints within the paving lane in place, as indicated, by means of rigid metal frames or basket assemblies of an approved type. Securely hold the basket assemblies in the proper location by means of suitable pins or anchors. Do not cut or crimp the dowel basket tie wires.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 44 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.8.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving
Install dowels by the bonded-in-place method or the drill-and-dowel method. Installation by removing and replacing in preformed holes is not permitted. Prepare and place dowels across joints where indicated, correctly aligned, and securely held in the proper horizontal and vertical position during placing and finishing operations, by means of devices fastened to the forms. Provide the spacing of dowels in construction joints as indicated, except that, where the planned spacing cannot be maintained because of form length or interference with form braces, provide closer spacing with additional dowels.
3.5.8.3 Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete
Install dowels in hardened concrete by bonding the dowels into holes drilled into the hardened concrete. Before drilling commences, cure the concrete for 7 days or until it has reached a minimum flexural strength of 3.1 MPa. Drill holes 3 mm greater in diameter than the dowels into the hardened concrete using rotary-core drills. Rotary-percussion drills are permitted, provided that excessive spalling does not occur to the concrete joint face. Excessive spalling is defined as spalling deeper than 6 mm from the joint face or 12 mm radially from the outside of the drilled hole. Continuing damage requires modification of the equipment and operation. Drill depth of dowel hole within a tolerance of plus or minus 13 mm of the dimension shown on the drawings. Upon completion of the drilling operation, blow out the dowel hole with oil-free, compressed air. Bond dowels in the drilled holes using epoxy resin. Inject epoxy resin at the back of the hole before installing the dowel and extruded to the collar during insertion of the dowel so as to completely fill the void around the dowel. Application by buttering the dowel is not permitted. Hold the dowels in alignment at the collar of the hole, after insertion and before the grout hardens, by means of a suitable metal or plastic grout retention ring fitted around the dowel. Provide dowels required between new and existing concrete in holes drilled in the existing concrete, all as specified above.
3.5.8.4 Lubricating Dowel Bars
Wipe the portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete clean and coat with a thin, even film of lubricating oil or light grease before the concrete is placed.
3.6 FINISHING
Provide finishing operations as a continuing part of placing operations starting immediately behind the strike-off of the paver. Provide initial finishing by the transverse screed or extrusion plate. Provide the sequence of operations consisting of transverse finishing, longitudinal machine floating if used, straightedge finishing, texturing, and then edging of joints. Provide finishing by the machine method. Provide a work bridge as necessary for consolidation and hand finishing operations. Use the hand method only on isolated areas of odd slab widths or shapes and in the event of a breakdown of the mechanical finishing equipment. Keep supplemental hand finishing for machine finished pavement to an absolute minimum. Immediately stop any machine finishing operation which requires appreciable hand finishing, other than a moderate amount of straightedge finishing. Prior to recommencing machine finishing, properly adjust or replace the equipment. Immediately halt any operations which produce more than 3 mm of mortar-rich surface (defined as deficient in plus
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 45 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
4.75 mm size aggregate) and the equipment, mixture, or procedures modified as necessary. Compensate for surging behind the screeds or extrusion plate and settlement during hardening and take care to ensure that paving and finishing machines are properly adjusted so that the finished surface of the concrete (not just the cutting edges of the screeds) is at the required line and grade. Maintain finishing equipment and tools clean and in an approved condition. Water is not allowed to be added to the surface of the slab with the finishing equipment or tools, or in any other way, except for fog (mist) sprays specified to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking.
3.6.1 Machine Finishing With Fixed Forms
Replace machines that cause displacement of the forms. Only one pass of the finishing machine is allowed over each area of pavement. If the equipment and procedures do not produce a surface of uniform texture, true to grade, in one pass, immediately stop the operation and the equipment, mixture, and procedures adjusted as necessary.
3.6.2 Machine Finishing with Slipform Pavers
Operate the slipform paver so that only a very minimum of additional finishing work is required to produce pavement surfaces and edges meeting the specified tolerances. Immediately modify or replace any equipment or procedure that fails to meet these specified requirements as necessary. A self-propelled non-rotating pipe float may be used while the concrete is still plastic, to remove minor irregularities and score marks. Only one pass of the pipe float is allowed. If there is concrete slurry or fluid paste on the surface that runs over the edge of the pavement, immediately stop the paving operation and the equipment, mixture, or operation modified to prevent formation of such slurry. Immediately remove any slurry which does run down the vertical edges by hand, using stiff brushes or scrapers. Slurry, concrete or concrete mortar is not allowed to build up along the edges of the pavement to compensate for excessive edge slump, either while the concrete is plastic or after it hardens.
3.6.3 Surface Correction and Testing
After all other finishing is completed but while the concrete is still plastic, eliminate minor irregularities and score marks in the pavement surface by means of cutting straightedges. Provide cutting straightedges with a minimum length of 4 m that are operated from the sides of the pavement or from bridges. Provide cutting straightedges operated from the side of the pavement equipped with a handle 1 m longer than one-half the width of the pavement. Test the surface for trueness with a straightedge held in successive positions parallel and at right angles to the center line of the pavement, and the whole area covered as necessary to detect variations. Advance the straightedge along the pavement in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straightedge. Immediately fill depressions with freshly mixed concrete, strike off, consolidate with an internal vibrator, and refinish. Strike off projections above the required elevation and refinish. Continue the straightedge testing and finishing until the entire surface of the concrete is free from observable departure from the straightedge and conforms to the surface requirements specified in paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS. This straightedging is not allowed to be used as a replacement for the straightedge testing of paragraph SURFACE SMOOTHNESS in PART 1. Use long-handled, flat bull floats very sparingly and only as necessary to correct minor, scattered surface defects. If frequent use of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 46 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
bull floats is necessary, stop the paving operation and the equipment, mixture or procedures adjusted to eliminate the surface defects. Keep finishing with hand floats and trowels to the absolute minimum necessary. Take extreme care to prevent over finishing joints and edges. Produce the surface finish of the pavement essentially by the finishing machine and not by subsequent hand finishing operations. All hand finishing operations are subject to approval.
3.6.4 Hand Finishing
Use hand finishing operations only as specified below. Provide a work bridge to be used as necessary for consolidation and placement operations to avoid standing in concrete.
3.6.4.1 Equipment and Template
In addition to approved mechanical internal vibrators for consolidating the concrete, provide a strike-off and tamping template and a longitudinal float for hand finishing. Provide a template at least 300 mm longer than the width of pavement being finished, of an approved design, and sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, that is constructed of metal or other suitable material shod with metal. Provide a longitudinal float at least 3 m long, of approved design, is rigid and substantially braced, and maintain a plane surface on the bottom. Grate tampers (jitterbugs) are not allowed.
3.6.4.2 Finishing and Floating
As soon as placed and vibrated, strike off the concrete and screeded to the cross section and to such elevation above grade that when consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement is at the required elevation. In addition to previously specified complete coverage with handheld immersion vibrators, tamp the entire surface with the strike-off and tamping template, and the tamping operation continued until the required compaction and reduction of internal and surface voids are accomplished. Immediately following the final tamping of the surface, float the pavement longitudinally from bridges resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete. If necessary, place additional concrete, consolidated and screeded, and the float operated until a satisfactory surface has been produced. Do not advance the floating operation more than half the length of the float and then continued over the new and previously floated surfaces.
3.6.5 Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens or curing compound is applied, texture the surface of the pavement as described herein. After curing is complete, thoroughly power broom all textured surfaces to remove all debris.
3.6.5.1 Burlap Drag Surface
Apply surface texture by dragging the surface of the pavement, in the direction of the concrete placement, with an approved burlap drag. Operate the drag with the fabric moist, and the fabric maintained clean or changed as required to keep clean. Perform the dragging so as to produce a uniform finished surface having a fine sandy texture without disfiguring marks.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 47 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.6.6 Edging
Before texturing has been completed, carefully finish the edge of the slabs along the forms, along the edges of slipformed lanes, and at the joints with an edging tool to form a smooth rounded surface of 3 mm radius. Eliminate tool marks, and provide edges that are smooth and true to line. Water is not allowed to be added to the surface during edging. Take extreme care to prevent overworking the concrete.
3.6.7 Outlets in Pavement
Construct recesses for the tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in the pavement to conform to the details and dimensions shown. Carefully finish the concrete in these areas to provide a surface of the same texture as the surrounding area that is within the requirements for plan grade and surface smoothness.
3.7 CURING
3.7.1 Protection of Concrete
Continuously protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the completion of finishing operations. Have all equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. If any selected method of curing does not afford the proper curing and protection against concrete cracking, remove or replace the damaged pavement, and provide another method of curing as directed. Accomplish curing by one of the following methods.
3.7.2 Membrane Curing
Apply a uniform coating of white-pigmented, membrane-forming, curing compound to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon as the free water has disappeared from the surface after finishing. Apply immediately along the formed edge faces after the forms are removed. Do not allow the concrete to dry before the application of the membrane. If any drying has occurred, moisten the surface of the concrete with a fine spray of water, and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears. Apply the curing compound to the finished surfaces by means of an approved automatic spraying machine. Apply the curing compound with a single overlapping application that provides a uniform coverage of 3.7 square meters per L. Apply the curing compound to the finished surfaces by means of an approved automatic spraying machine. The application of curing compound by hand-operated, mechanical powered pressure sprayers is permitted only on odd widths or shapes of slabs and on concrete surfaces exposed by the removal of forms. When the application is made by hand-operated sprayers, apply a second coat in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of the first coat. If pinholes, abrasions, or other discontinuities exist, apply an additional coat to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Respray curing compound to concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied by the method and at the coverage specified above. Respray curing compound to areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period immediately. Adequately protect concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from any other possible
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 48 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
damage to the continuity of the membrane.
3.8 JOINTS
3.8.1 General Requirements for Joints
Construct joints that conform to the locations and details indicated and are perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement. Provide joints that are straight and continuous from edge to edge or end to end of the pavement with no abrupt offset and no gradual deviation greater than 13 mm. Where any joint fails to meet these tolerances, remove and replace the slabs adjacent to the joint at no additional cost to the Government. Change from the jointing pattern shown on the drawings is not allowed without written approval. Seal joints immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.8.2 Longitudinal Construction Joints
Install dowels in the longitudinal construction joints, or thicken the edges as indicated. Install dowels as specified above. After the end of the curing period, saw longitudinal construction joints to provide a groove at the top for sealant conforming to the details and dimensions indicated.
3.8.3 Transverse Construction Joints
Install transverse construction joints at the end of each day's placing operations and at any other points within a paving lane when concrete placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer. Install the transverse construction joint at a planned transverse joint. Provide transverse construction joints by utilizing headers or by paving through the joint, then full-depth sawcutting the excess concrete. Construct pavement with the paver as close to the header as possible, with the paver run out completely past the header. Provide transverse construction joints at a planned transverse joint constructed as shown or, if not shown otherwise, dowelled in accordance with paragraph DOWELS INSTALLED IN HARDENED CONCRETE, or paragraph FIXED FORM PAVING above.
3.8.4 Expansion Joints
Provide expansion joints where indicated, and about any structures and features that project through or into the pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and installed to form a complete, uniform separation between the structure and the pavement or between two pavements. Attach the filler to the original concrete placement with adhesive and mechanical fasteners and extend the full slab depth. After placement and curing of the adjacent slab, sawcut the sealant reservoir depth from the filler. Tightly fit adjacent sections of filler together, with the filler extending across the full width of the paving lane or other complete distance in order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Finish edges of the concrete at the joint face with an edger with a radius of 3 mm.
3.8.5 Slip Joints
Install slip joints where indicated using the specified materials. Attach preformed joint filler material to the face of the original concrete
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 49 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
placement with adhesive and mechanical fasteners. Construct a 19 mm deep reservoir for joint sealant at the top of the joint. Finish edges of the joint face with an edger with a radius of 3 mm.
3.8.6 Contraction Joints
Construct transverse and longitudinal contraction joints by sawing an initial groove in the concrete with a 3 mm blade to the indicated depth. During sawing of joints, and again 24 hours later, the CQC team is required to inspect all exposed lane edges for development of cracks below the saw cut, and immediately report results. If there are more than six consecutive uncracked joints after 48 hours, saw succeeding joints 25 percent deeper than originally indicated at no additional cost to the Government. The time of initial sawing varies depending on existing and anticipated weather conditions and be such as to prevent uncontrolled cracking of the pavement. Commence sawing of the joints as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting the concrete without chipping, spalling, or tearing. The sawed faces of joints will be inspected for undercutting or washing of the concrete due to the early sawing, and sawing delayed if undercutting is sufficiently deep to cause structural weakness or excessive roughness in the joint. Continue the sawing operation as required during both day and night regardless of weather conditions. Saw the joints at the required spacing consecutively in the sequence of the concrete placement. Provide adequate lighting for night work. Illumination using vehicle headlights is not permitted. Provide a chalk line or other suitable guide to mark the alignment of the joint. Before sawing a joint, examine the concrete closely for cracks, and do not saw the joint if a crack has occurred near the planned joint location. Discontinue sawing if a crack develops ahead of the saw cut. Immediately after the joint is sawed, thoroughly flush the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface with water and vacuumed until all waste from sawing is removed from the joint and adjacent concrete surface. Take necessary precautions to insure that the concrete is properly protected from damage and cured at sawed joints. Tightly seal the top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges with cord backer rod before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound, and be maintained until removed immediately before sawing the joint sealant reservoir. Respray the surface with curing compound as soon as free water disappears. Seal the exposed saw cuts on the faces of pilot lanes with bituminous mastic or masking tape. After expiration of the curing period, widen the upper portion of the groove by sawing with ganged diamond saw blades to the width and depth indicated for the joint sealer. Center the reservoir over the initial sawcut.
3.8.7 Thickened Edge Joints
Construct thickened edge joints as indicated on the drawings. Grade the underlying material in the transition area as shown and meet the requirements for smoothness and compaction specified for all other areas of the underlying material.
3.9 REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS
3.9.1 General Criteria
Repair or remove and replace new pavement slabs as specified at no cost to the Government. Removal of partial slabs is not permitted. Prior to any repairs, submit a Repair Recommendations Plan detailing areas exceeding the specified limits as well as repair recommendations required to bring
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 50 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
these areas within specified tolerances.
3.9.2 Slabs with Cracks
The Government may require cores to be taken over cracks to determine depth of cracking. Such cores are to be drilled with a minimum diameter of 150 mm, and be backfilled with an approved non-shrink concrete. Perform drilling of cores and filling of holes at no expense to the Government. Clean cracks that do not exceed 50 mm in depth; then pressure injected full depth with epoxy resin, Type IV, Grade 1. Remove and replace slabs containing cracks deeper than 50 mm.
3.9.3 Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs
Remove and replace slabs containing more than 15.0 percent of any longitudinal or transverse joint edge spalled. Where it is necessary to remove full slabs, remove in accordance with paragraph REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT SLAB below. Remove and replace full depth, by full width of the slab, and the limit of removal normal to the paving lane and extend to each original joint. Compact and shape the underlying material as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications, and clean the surfaces of all four joint faces of all loose material and contaminants and coated with a double application of membrane forming curing compound as bond breaker. Install dowels of the size and spacing as specified for other joints in similar pavement by epoxy grouting them into holes drilled into the existing concrete using procedures as specified in paragraph PLACING DOWELS, above. Provide dowels for all four edges of the new slab. Cut off original damaged dowels flush with the joint face. Lightly oil or grease protruding portions of new dowels. Place concrete as specified for original construction. Take care to prevent any curing compound from contacting dowels. Prepare and seal the resulting joints around the new slab as specified for original construction.
3.9.4 Repairing Spalls Along Joints
Repair spalls along joints to be sealed to a depth to restore the full joint-face support prior to placing adjacent pavement. Where directed, repair spalls along joints of new slabs, along edges of adjacent existing concrete, and along parallel cracks by first making a vertical saw cut at least 75 mm outside the spalled area and to a depth of at least 50 mm. Provide saw cuts consisting of straight lines forming rectangular areas without sawing beyond the intersecting saw cut. Chip out the concrete between the saw cut and the joint, or crack, to remove all unsound concrete and into at least 13 mm of visually sound concrete. Thoroughly clean the cavity thus formed with high pressure water jets supplemented with oil-free compressed air to remove all loose material. Immediately before filling the cavity, apply a prime coat to the dry cleaned surface of all sides and bottom of the cavity, except any joint face. Apply the prime coat in a thin coating and scrubbed into the surface with a stiff-bristle brush. Provide prime coat for portland cement repairs consisting of a neat cement grout and for epoxy resin repairs consisting of epoxy resin, Type III, Grade 1. Fill the prepared cavity with material identified in the following table based on the cavity volume.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 51 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Spall Repairs
Volume of Prepared Cavity After Removal Material Operations less than 0.00085 cubic meter epoxy resin mortar or epoxy resin or latex modified mortar 0.00085 cubic meter and 0.009 cubic meter Portland cement mortar
more than 0.009 cubic meter Portland cement concrete or latex modified mortar
Provide portland cement concretes and mortars that consist of very low slump mixtures, 13 mm slump or less, proportioned, mixed, placed, consolidated by tamping, and cured, all as directed. Provide epoxy resin mortars made with Type III, Grade 1, epoxy resin, using proportions and mixing and placing procedures as recommended by the manufacturer and approved. Proprietary patching materials may be used, subject to Government approval. Place the epoxy resin materials in the cavity in layers with a maximum thickness of 50 mm. Provide adequate time between placement of additional layers such that the temperature of the epoxy resin material does not exceed 60 degrees C at any time during hardening. Provide mechanical vibrators and hand tampers to consolidate the concrete or mortar. Remove any repair material on the surrounding surfaces of the existing concrete before it hardens. Where the spalled area abuts a joint, provide an insert or other bond-breaking medium to prevent bond at the joint face. Saw a reservoir for the joint sealant to the dimensions required for other joints. Thoroughly clean the reservoir and then sealed with the sealer specified for the joints. In lieu of sawing, spalls not adjacent to joints and popouts, both less than 150 mm in maximum dimension, may be prepared by drilling a core 50 mm in diameter greater than the size of the defect, centered over the defect, and 50 mm deep or13 mm into sound concrete, whichever is greater. Repair the core hole as specified above for other spalls.
3.9.5 Repair of Weak Surfaces
Weak surfaces are defined as mortar-rich, rain-damaged, uncured, or containing exposed voids or deleterious materials. Diamond grind slabs containing weak surfaces less than 6 mm thick to remove the weak surface. Diamond grind in accordance with paragraph DIAMOND GRINDING OF PCC SURFACES in PART 1. All diamond ground areas are required to meet the thickness, smoothness and grade criteria specified in PART 1 GENERAL. Remove and replace slabs containing weak surfaces greater than 6 mm thick.
3.9.6 Repair of Pilot Lane Vertical Faces
Repair excessive edge slump and joint face deformation while concrete is in a plastic state by approved methods.
3.10 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR
Removal of existing pavement is not allowed prior to approval of the Proportioning Studies. Remove existing concrete pavement at locations indicated on the drawings. Prior to commencing pavement removal operations, inventory the pavement distresses (cracks, spalls, and corner breaks) along the pavement edge to remain. After pavement removal, survey
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 52 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the remaining edge again to quantify any damage caused by removal operations. Perform both surveys in the presence of the Government. Perform repairs as indicated and as specified herein. Carefully control all operations to prevent damage to the concrete pavement and to the underlying material to remain in place. Perform all saw cuts perpendicular to the slab surface, forming rectangular areas. Perform all existing concrete pavement repairs prior to paving adjacent lanes.
3.10.1 Removal of Existing Pavement Slab
When existing concrete pavement is to be removed and adjacent concrete is to be left in place, perform the first full depth saw cut on the joint between the removal area and adjoining pavement to stay in place with a standard diamond-type concrete saw. Next, perform a full depth saw cut parallel to the joint that is at least 600 mm from the joint and at least 150 mm from the end of any dowels with a diamond saw as specified in paragraph SAWING EQUIPMENT. Remove all pavement beyond this last saw cut in accordance with the approved demolition work plan. Remove all pavement between this last saw cut and the joint line by carefully pulling pieces and blocks away from the joint face with suitable equipment and then picking them up for removal. In lieu of this method, this strip of concrete may be carefully broken up and removed using hand-held jackhammers, 14 kg or less, or other approved light-duty equipment which does not cause stress to propagate across the joint saw cut and cause distress in the pavement which is to remain in place. In lieu of the above specified removal method, the slab may be sawcut full depth to divide it into several pieces and each piece lifted out and removed. Use suitable equipment to provide a truly vertical lift, and safe lifting devices used for attachment to the slab.
3.10.2 Edge Repair
Repair spalls caused by construction activities if less than 15.0 percent of any slab's edge. Provide repair materials and procedures as previously specified in paragraph, REPAIRING SPALLS ALONG JOINTS. Remove and replace full slabs if spalls exceed 15.0 percent of any slab's edge as specified in paragraph, Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs.
3.10.2.1 Spall Repair
Not more than 15.0 percent of each slab's edge is allowed to be spalled. Provide a full depth saw cut on the exposed face to remove the spalled face of damaged slabs with spalls exceeding this quantity, regardless of spall size. Provide repair materials and procedures as previously specified in paragraph REPAIRING SPALLS ALONG JOINTS.
3.10.2.2 Underbreak and Underlying Material
Repair all underbreak by removal and replacement of the damaged slabs in accordance with paragraph REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF FULL SLABS above. Protect the underlying material adjacent to the edge of and under the existing pavement which is to remain in place from damage or disturbance during removal operations and until placement of new concrete, and be shaped as shown on the drawings or as directed. Maintain sufficient underlying material in place outside the joint line to completely prevent disturbance of material under the pavement which is to remain in place. Remove and replace any slab with underlying material that is disturbed or loses its compaction.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 53 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.11 PAVEMENT PROTECTION
Protect the pavement against all damage prior to final acceptance of the work by the Government. Placement of aggregates, rubble, or other similar construction materials on airfield pavements is not allowed. Exclude traffic from the new pavement by erecting and maintaining barricades and signs until the concrete is at least 14 days old, or for a longer period if so directed. As a construction expedient in paving intermediate lanes between newly paved pilot lanes, operation of the hauling and paving equipment is permitted on the new pavement after the pavement has been cured for 7 days and the joints have been sealed or otherwise protected, the concrete has attained a minimum field cured flexural strength of 3.8 MPa and approved means are provided to prevent damage to the slab edge. Continuously maintain all new and existing pavement carrying construction traffic or equipment completely clean, and spillage of concrete or other materials cleaned up immediately upon occurrence. Take special care in areas where traffic uses or crosses active airfield pavement. Power broom other existing pavements at least daily when traffic operates. For fill-in lanes, provide equipment that does not damage or spall the edges or joints of the previously constructed pavement.
3.12 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION
3.12.1 Testing and Inspection by Contractor
During construction, perform sampling and testing of aggregates, cementitious materials (cement, slag cement, and pozzolan), and concrete to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Furnish sampling platforms and belt templates to obtain representative samples of aggregates from charging belts at the concrete plant. Obtain samples of concrete at the point of delivery to the paver. Testing by the Government in no way relieves the specified testing requirements. Perform the inspection and tests described below, and based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action required and submit reports as required. Perform this testing regardless of any other testing performed by the Government, either for pay adjustment purposes or for any other reason.
3.12.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements
Perform CQC sampling, testing, inspection and reporting in accordance with the following Table.
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Fine Aggregate Gradation and Fineness Modulus
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 54 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
2 per lot ASTM C136/C136M 9 of 10 tests must vary Retest, resolve, retest sample at belt less than 0.15 from average
Outside limits on any Retest sieve
2nd gradation failure Stop, resolve, retest
1 per 10 ASTM C117 Outside limits on any Retest gradations sieve
2nd gradation failure Stop, repair, retest
Coarse Aggregate Gradation (each aggregate size)
2 per lot ASTM C136/C136M Outside limits on any Retest sample at belt sieve
2nd gradation failure report to COR, correct
2 consecutive averages of report to COR, stop ops, 5 tests outside limits repair, retest
Workability Factor and Coarseness Factor Computation
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 55 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Same as see paragraph Use individual C.A. and Check batching tolerances, C.A. and AGGREGATES F.A. gradations. recalibrate scales F.A. Combine using batch ticket percentages. Tolerances: plus or minus 3 points on WF; plus or minus 5 points on CF from approved adjusted mix design values; only the portion of the tolerance box within the parallelogram is available for use
2 consecutive averages of Stop production paving, 5 tests outside limits report to COR, and revise materials and operations to be in compliance prior to restarting production paving
Aggregate Deleterious, Quality, and ASR Tests
First test see paragraph Stop production, retest, no later AGGREGATES replace aggregate. than time Increase testing interval of to 90 days if previous 2 uniformity tests pass testing and then every 60 days of concrete production
Plant - Scales, Weighing Accuracy
Monthly NRMCA QC 3 Stop plant ops, repair, recalibrate
Plant - Batching and Recording Accuracy
Weekly Record/Report Record Stop plant ops, repair, required/recorded/actual recalibrate batch mass
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 56 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Plant - Batch Plant Control
Every lot Record/Report Record type and amount of each material per lot
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Stationary Mixers
Every 4 COE CRD-C 55 After initial approval, Increase mixing time, months use abbreviated method change batching sequence, during reduce batch size to bring paving into compliance. Retest
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Truck Mixers
Every 4 ASTM C94/C94M Random selection of truck. Increase mixing time, months change batching sequence, during reduce batch size to bring paving into compliance. Retest
Concrete Mixture - Air Content
When test ASTM C231/C231M Individual test control Adjust AEA, retest specimens sample at point chart: Warning plus or prepared of discharge minus 1.0 plus 2 within the paving random lane Individual test control Halt operations, repair, chart: Action plus or retest minus 1.5
Range between 2 Recalibrate AEA dispenser consecutive tests: Warning plus 2.0
Range between 2 Halt operations, repair, consecutive tests: Action retest plus 3.0
Concrete Mixture - Unit Weight and Yield
Same as Air ASTM C138/C138M Individual test basis: Check batching tolerances Content sample at point Warning Yield minus 0 or of discharge plus 1 percent within the paving lane Individual test basis: Halt operations Action Yield minus 0 or plus 5 percent
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 57 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
Concrete Mixture - Slump
When test ASTM C143/C143M Individual test control Adjust batch masses within specimens sample at point chart: Upper Warning minus max W/C ratio prepared of discharge 13 mm below max plus 4 within the paving random lane
Individual test control Stop operations, adjust, chart: Upper Action at retest maximum allowable slump
Range between each Stop operations, repair, consecutive test: 38 mm retest
Concrete Mixture - Temperature
When test ASTM C1064/C1064M See paragraph WEATHER LIMITATIONS specimens sample at point prepared of discharge within the paving lane
Concrete Mixture - Strength
8 per lot ASTM C31/C31M See paragraph CONCRETE STRENGTH TESTING for CQC sample at point of discharge Perform fabrication of strength specimens and initial within the paving cure outside the paving lane and within 300 m of the lane sampling point.
Paving - Inspection Before Paving
Prior to Report Inspect underlying each paving materials, construction operation joint faces, forms, reinforcing, dowels, and embedded items
Paving - Inspection During Paving
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 58 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TABLE 6 TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit Corrective Action
During Monitor and control paving paving operation, operation including placement, consolidation, finishing, texturing, curing, and joint sawing.
Paving - Vibrators
Weekly COE CRD-C 521 Test frequency (in Repair or replace during concrete), and amplitude defective vibrators. paving (in air), average measurement at tip and head.
Moist Curing
2 per lot, Visual Repair defects, extend min 4 per curing by 1 day day
Membrane Compound Curing
Daily Visual Calculate coverage based Respray areas where on quantity/area coverage defective. Recalibrate equipment
Cold Weather Protection
Once per day Visual Repair defects, report conditions to COR
3.12.3 Concrete Strength Testing for CQC
Perform Contractor Quality Control operations for concrete strength consisting of the following steps:
a. Take samples for strength tests at the paving site. Fabricate and cure test beams in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M; test them in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M.
b. Fabricate and cure 2 test beams per sublot from the same batch or truckload and at the same time acceptance beams are fabricated and test them for flexural strength at 7-day age.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 59 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
c. Average all 8 flexural tests per lot. Convert this average 7-day flexural strength per lot to equivalent 90-day flexural strength using the Correlation Ratio determined during mixture proportioning studies.
d. Compare the equivalent 90-day flexural strength from the conversion to the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures from paragraph of same title.
e. If the equivalent average 90-day strength for the lot is below the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures by 490 kPa flexural strength or more, at any time, adjust the mixture to increase the strength, as approved.
f. Maintain up-to-date control charts for strength, showing the 7-day CQC flexural strength and the 90-day flexural strength (from acceptance tests) of each of these for each lot.
3.12.4 Reports
Report all results of tests or inspections conducted informally as they are completed and in writing daily. Prepare a weekly report for the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the construction season through the current week. During periods of cold-weather protection, make daily reports of pertinent temperatures. These requirements do not relieve the obligation to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs. Confirm such reports of failures and the action taken in writing in the routine reports. The Government has the right to examine all Contractor quality control records.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 13 14.13 Page 60 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 17 23
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D4061 (2013) Standard Test Method for Retroreflectance of Horizontal Coatings
ASTM D4383 (2012) Standard Specification for Plowable, Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers
ASTM D6628 (2003; R 2015) Standard Specification for Color of Pavement Marking Materials
ASTM E1710 (2011) Standard Test Method for Measurement of Retroreflective Pavement Marking Materials with CEN-Prescribed Geometry Using a Portable Retroreflectometer
ASTM E2177 (2011) Standard Test Method for Measuring the Coefficient of Retroreflected Luminance (RL) of Pavement Markings in a Standard Condition of Wetness
ASTM E2302 (2003; R 2016) Standard Test Method for Measurement of the Luminance Coefficient Under Diffuse Illumination of Pavement Marking Materials Using a Portable Reflectometer
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
SAE AMS-STD-595A (2017) Colors used in Government Procurement
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)
MUTCD (2015) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
FS TT-B-1325 (Rev D; Notice 1; Notice 2 2017) Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective (Metric)
FS TT-P-1952 (2015; Rev F) Paint, Traffic and Airfield Markings, Waterborne
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Surface Preparation Equipment List; G
Application Equipment List; G
Exterior Surface Preparation; G
Safety Data Sheets; G
Reflective media for airfields
Reflective media for roads
Waterborne Paint; G
Raised Pavement Markers Primers and Adhesives; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Reflective Media for Airfields; G
Waterborne Paint; G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications; G
Reflective Media for Airfields
Waterborne Paint
Volatile Organic Compound, (VOC); G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Waterborne Paint; G
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Regulatory Requirements
Submit certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint meets the Volatile Organic Compound, (VOC) regulations of the local Air Pollution Control District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. Submit Safety Data Sheets for each product.
1.3.2 Qualifications
Submit documentation certifying that pertinent personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of applicable chemicals. The documentation should include experience on five projects of similar size and scope with references for all personnel.
1.3.3 Qualifications For Airfield Marking Personnel
Submit documentation of qualifications in resume format a minimum of 14 days before pavement marking work is to be performed showing personnel who will be performing the work have experience working on airfields, operating mobile self-powered marking, cleaning, and paint removal equipment and performing these tasks. Include with resume a list of references complete with points of contact and telephone numbers. Provide certification for pavement marking machine operator and Foreman demonstrating experience successfully completing a minimum of two airfield pavement marking projects of similar size and scope. Provide documentation demonstrating personnel have a minimum of four years of experience operating similar equipment and performing the same or similar work in similar environments, similar in size and scope of the planned project. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require additional proof of competency or to reject proposed personnel.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver paint materials and reflective media in original sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer.
Provide storage facilities at the job site, only in areas approved by the Contracting Officer, for maintaining materials at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. Make available paint stored at the project site or segregated at the source for sampling not less than 30 days prior to date of required approval for use to allow sufficient time for testing. Notify the Contracting Officer when paint is available for sampling.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.5.1 Environmental Requirements
1.5.1.1 Weather Limitations for Application
Apply pavement markings to clean, dry surfaces, and unless otherwise approved, only when the air and pavement surface temperature is at least 3 degrees C above the dew point and the air and pavement temperatures are within the limits recommended by the pavement marking manufacturer. Allow pavement surfaces to dry after water has been used for cleaning or
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
rainfall has occurred prior to striping or marking. Test the pavement surface for moisture before beginning work each day and after cleaning. Do not commence marking until the pavement is sufficiently dry and the pavement condition has been approved by the Contracting Officer. Employ the "plastic wrap method" to test the pavement for moisture as specified in paragraph TESTING FOR MOISTURE.
1.5.1.2 Weather Limitations for Removal of Pavement Markings on Roads and Automotive Parking Areas
Pavement surface must be free of snow, ice, or slush; with a surface temperature of at least 4 degrees C and rising at the beginning of operations, except those involving shot or sand blasting or grinding. Cease operation during thunderstorms, or during rainfall, except for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Cease waterblasting where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of material removal.
1.5.2 Traffic Controls
Place warning signs conforming to MUTCD near the beginning of the worksite and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place small markers along newly painted lines or freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers. Mark painting equipment with large warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in operation.
When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, provide necessary warning signs, flag persons, and related equipment for the safe passage of vehicles.
1.5.3 Airfield Traffic Control
Coordinate performance of all work in the controlled zones of the airfield with the Contracting Officer and with the Flight Operations Officer or Airfield Manager. Neither equipment nor personnel can use any portion of the airfield without permission of these officers unless the runway is closed.
1.5.4 Airfield Radio Communication
No personnel or equipment will be allowed in the controlled zones of the airfield until radio contact has been made with the control tower and permission is granted by the control tower. A radio for this purpose is to be provided by the Contractor as approved by the Contracting Officer. Maintain contact with the control tower at all times during work in vicinity of the airfield. Notify the control tower when work is completed and all personnel, equipment and materials have been removed from all aircraft operating surfaces.
1.5.5 Airfield Emergency Landing and Takeoff
Emergencies take precedence over all operations. Upon notification from the control tower of an emergency landing or imminent takeoff, stop all operations immediately and evacuate all personnel and equipment to an area not utilized for aircraft traffic which is at least 75 m measured perpendicular to and away from the near edge of the runway unless otherwise authorized by the Contracting Officer. Equipment and chemicals
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
or detergents as well as excess water must be able to be removed from the work area within 3 minutes.
1.5.6 Lighting
When night operations are necessary, provide all necessary lighting and equipment. Direct or shade lighting to prevent interference with aircraft, the air traffic control tower, and other base operations. Provide lighting and related equipment capable of being removed from the runway within 15 minutes of notification of an emergency. Night work must be coordinated with the Flight Operations Manager or Airfield Manager and approved in advance by the Contracting Officer. The Government reserves the right to accept or reject night work on the day following night activities by the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 Surface Preparation and Paint Removal
2.1.1.1 Surface Preparation and Paint Removal Equipment for Airfield Pavements
Prepare all airfield surfaces and remove paint from airfield surfaces in accordance with UFGS 32 01 11.51 Rubber and Paint Removal From Airfield Pavements. Provide submittals in accordance with UFGS 32 01 11.51 Rubber and Paint Removal From Airfield Pavements.
2.1.1.2 Surface Preparation Equipment for Roads and Automotive Parking Areas
Submit a surface preparation equipment list by serial number, type, model, and manufacturer. Include descriptive data indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range, tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the equipment operation. Mobile equipment must allow for removal of markings without damaging the pavement surface or joint sealant. Maintain machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work in satisfactory operating condition.
2.1.1.2.1 Waterblasting Equipment
Use mobile waterblasting equipment capable of producing a pressurized stream of water that effectively removes paint from the pavement surface without significantly damaging the pavement. Provide equipment, tools, and machinery which are safe and in good working order at all times.
2.1.2 Application Equipment
Submit application equipment list appropriate for the material(s) to be used. Include manufacturer's descriptive data and certification for the planned use that indicates area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range, tank and flow capacities, and all safety precautions required for operating and maintaining the equipment. Provide and maintain machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work in satisfactory operating condition, or remove them from the work site. Provide mobile and maneuverable application equipment to the extent that straight lines
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true arc.
2.1.2.1 Paint Application Equipment
2.1.2.1.1 Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Spraying Machines
Provide self-propelled or mobile-drawn spraying machine with suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. Provide machine having a speed during application capable of applying the stripe widths indicated at the paint coverage rate specified herein and of even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges.
2.1.2.1.1.1 Road Marking
Provide equipment used for marking roads capable of placing the prescribed number of lines at a single pass as solid lines, intermittent lines, or a combination of solid and intermittent lines using a maximum of three different colors of paint as specified.
2.1.2.1.1.2 Airfield Marking
Provide self-propelled or mobile-drawn spraying machine for applying the paint for airfield pavements with an arrangement of atomizing nozzles capable of applying the specified line width in a single pass. Provide paint applicator with paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable gages to apply paint in accordance with requirements specified. Equip tanks with suitable mechanical agitators. Equip spray mechanism with quick-action valves conveniently located, and include necessary pressure regulators and gages in full view and reach of the operator. Install paint strainers in paint supply lines to ensure freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the spray guns. The paint applicator must be readily adaptable for attachment of a dispenser for the reflective media approved for use.
2.1.2.1.1.3 Hand Application
Provide spray guns for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used.
2.1.2.2 Reflective Media Dispenser
Attach the dispenser for applying the reflective media to the paint dispenser and designed to operate automatically and simultaneously with the applicator through the same control mechanism. The bead applicator must be capable of adjustment and designed to provide uniform flow of reflective media over the full length and width of the stripe at the rate of coverage specified in paragraph APPLICATION.
2.2 MATERIALS
Use reflectorized waterborne paint for airfield markings. Use reflectorized waterborne paint and raised pavement markers for roads. Use non-reflectorized waterborne paint for automotive parking areas. The maximum allowable VOC content of pavement markings is 150 grams per liter. Color of markings are indicated on the drawings and must conform to ASTM D6628 for roads and automotive parking areas and SAE AMS-STD-595A for airfields. Provide materials conforming to the requirements specified herein.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.2.1 Waterborne Paint
FS TT-P-1952, Type I or II.
2.2.2 Raised Pavement Markers Primers and Adhesives
Use either metallic or nonmetallic markers of the button or prismatic reflector type. Provide permanent color markers as specified for pavement marking, which retain the color and brightness under the action of traffic. Provide button markers with a diameter of not less than 100 mm, spaced not more than 12 m apart on solid longitudinal lines. Make broken centerline marker spacing in segments indicated with gaps indicated between segments. Provide button markers with rounded surfaces presenting a smooth contour to traffic and not projecting more than 19 mm above level of pavement. Provide plowable pavement markers and adhesive epoxy conforming to ASTM D4383.
2.2.3 Reflective Media
2.2.3.1 Reflective Media for Airfields
FS TT-B-1325, Type III.
2.2.3.2 Reflective Media for Roads
FS TT-B-1325, Type I, Gradation A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Testing for Moisture
Test the pavement surface for moisture before beginning pavement marking after each period of rainfall, fog, high humidity, or cleaning, or when the ambient temperature has fallen below the dew point. Do not commence marking until the pavement is sufficiently dry and the pavement condition has been approved by the Contracting Officer or authorized representative.
Employ the "plastic wrap method" to test the pavement for moisture as follows: Cover the pavement with a 300 mm by 300 mm section of clear plastic wrap and seal the edges with tape. After 15 minutes, examine the plastic wrap for any visible moisture accumulation inside the plastic. Do not begin marking operations until the test can be performed with no visible moisture accumulation inside the plastic wrap. Re-test surfaces when work has been stopped due to rain.
3.1.2 Surface Preparation Demonstration
Prior to surface preparation, demonstrate the proposed procedures and equipment. Prepare areas large enough to determine cleanliness, adhesion of remaining coating and rate of cleaning. Approved demonstration area establishes the standard for the remainder of the work.
3.1.3 Test Stripe Demonstration
Prior to paint application, demonstrate test stripe application within the work area using the proposed materials and equipment. Apply separate test stripes in each of the line widths and configurations required herein
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
using the proposed equipment. Make the test stripes long enough to determine the proper speed and operating pressures for the vehicle(s) and machinery, but not less than 15 m long.
3.1.4 Application Rate Demonstration
During the Test Stripe Demonstration, demonstrate compliance with the application rates specified herein. Document the equipment speed and operating pressures required to meet the specified rates in each configuration of the equipment and provide a copy of the documentation to the Contracting Officer prior to proceeding with the work.
3.1.5 Retroreflective Value Demonstration
After the test stripes have cured to a "no-track" condition, demonstrate compliance with the average retroreflective values specified herein. Take a minimum of ten readings on each test stripe with a Retroreflectometer with a direct readout in millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx). Perform testing in accordance with ASTM D4061, ASTM E1710, ASTM E2177, and ASTM E2302.
3.1.6 Level of Performance Demonstration
The Contracting Officer will be present at the application demonstrations to observe the results obtained and to validate the operating parameters of the vehicle(s) and equipment. If accepted by the Contracting Officer, the test stripe is the measure of performance required for this project. Do not proceed with the work until the demonstration results are satisfactory to the Contracting Officer.
3.2 EXTERIOR SURFACE PREPARATION
Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 30 days before application of marking materials. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be marked before application of the paint. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods as required. Remove existing paint markings, residual curing compounds, and other coatings adhering to the pavement by according to the removal requirements and procedures outlined in Section 32 01 11.51.
3.2.1 Early Painting of Rigid Pavements
Pretreat rigid pavements that require early painting with an aqueous solution containing 3 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent zinc chloride. Apply the solution to the areas to be marked.
3.2.2 Early Painting of Asphalt Pavements
For asphalt pavement systems requiring painting application at less than 30 days, apply the paint and beads at half the normal application rate, followed by a second application at the normal rate after 30 days.
3.3 APPLICATION
Apply pavement markings to dry pavements only.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3.1 Paint
Apply paint with approved equipment at rate of coverage specified herein. Provide guidelines and templates as necessary to control paint application. Take special precautions in marking numbers, letters, and symbols. Manually paint numbers, letters, and symbols. Sharply outline all edges of markings. The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced, to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic. If there is a deficiency in drying of the markings, painting operations must cease until the cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.
3.3.1.1 Waterborne Paint
3.3.1.1.1 Airfields
For non-reflectorized markings, apply paint conforming to FS TT-P-1952 Type I or II at a rate of 3.0 plus or minus 0.15 square meter per liter.
For reflectorized markings, apply paint and glass spheres at the following rates:
TABLE III
Bead Type Paint Type Paint Application Bead Application Rate Rate
Type I (Gradation Type I, II, III 3 plus or minus 0.15 960 plus or minus A) Sq M/Liter 120 g/Liter Type III Type I, II, III 3 plus or minus 0.15 1,200 plus or Sq M/Liter minus 120 g/Liter
Type IV (Gradation Type III 1.9 plus or minus 960 plus or minus A) 0.30 Sq M/Liter 120 g/Liter
Type IV (Gradation Type III 2.4 plus or minus 960 plus or minus B) 0.23 Sq M/Liter 120 g/Liter
3.3.1.1.2 Roads
Apply paint at a rate of 2.6 plus or minus 0.1 square meter per liter. Apply FS TT-B-1325 Type I (Gradation A) beads at a rate of 834 plus or minus 60 grams of glass spheres per liter.
3.3.2 Raised Pavement Markers
Align prefabricated markers carefully at the spacing indicated on the drawings and permanently fix in place by means of epoxy adhesives. To ensure good bond prior to applying adhesive, thoroughly clean all areas where markers are to be set by water blasting and use of compressed air.
3.3.3 Cleanup and Waste Disposal
Keep the worksite clean and free of debris and waste from the removal and application operations. Dispose of debris at approved sites.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Sampling and Testing
As soon as the paint materials and reflective media are available for sampling, obtain by random selection from the sealed containers, two-four quart samples of each batch in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Accomplish adequate mixing prior to sampling to ensure a uniform, representative sample. A batch is defined as that quantity of material processed by the manufacturer at one time and identified by number on the label. Clearly identify samples by designated name, specification number, batch number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved.
At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, samples provided may be tested by the Government for verification.
3.4.2 Material Inspection
Examine material at the job site to determine that it is the material referenced in the report of test results or certificate of compliance. Provide test results substantiating conformance to the specified requirements with each certificate of compliance.
3.4.3 Dimensional Tolerances
Apply all markings in the standard dimensions provide in the drawings. New markings may deviate a maximum of 10 percent larger than the standard dimension. The maximum deviation allowed when painting over an old marking is up to 20 percent larger than the standard dimensions.
3.4.4 Bond Failure Verification
Inspect newly applied markings for signs of bond failure based on visual inspection and comparison to results from Test Stripe Demonstration paragraph.
3.4.5 Reflective Media and Coating Application Verification
Use a wet film thickness gauge to measure the application of wet paint. Use a microscope or magnifying glass to evaluate the embedment of glass beads in the paint. Verify the glass bead embedment with approximately 50 percent of the individual bead spheres embedded and 50 percent of the individual bead spheres exposed.
3.4.6 Retroreflective Markings
Collect and record readings for white and yellow retroreflective markings at the rate of one reading per 305 linear m. The minimum acceptable average for white markings is 200 millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx) (measured with Retroreflectometer). The minimum acceptable average for yellow markings is 175 millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx). Compute readings by averaging a minimum of 10 readings taken within the area at random locations. Re-mark areas not meeting the retroreflective requirements stated above.
3.4.7 Material Bond Verification and Operations Area Cleanup for Airfields
Vacuum sweep the aircraft operating area before it is opened for aircraft
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
operations to preclude potential foreign object damaged to aircraft engines. Visually inspect the pavement markings and the material captured by the vacuum. Verify that no significant loss of reflective media has occurred to the pavement marking due to the vacuum cleaning.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 17 23 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 32 92 23
SODDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Apply sod to all disturbed areas not identified for paving. Secure all sod with staked netting.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D4972 (2018) Standard Test Methods for pH of Soils
ASTM D6400 (2019) Standard Specification for Labeling of Plastics Designed to be Aerobically Composted in Municipal or Industrial Facilities
TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI)
TPI GSS (1995) Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.1 Stand of Turf
100 percent ground cover of the established species.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 92 23 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery
1.4.1.1 Sod Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site storage, and handling.
1.4.1.2 Fertilizer Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information.
1.4.2 Storage
1.4.2.1 Sod Storage
Lightly sprinkle with water, cover with moist burlap, straw, or other approved covering; and protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to circulate so that internal heat will not develop. Do not store sod longer than 24 hours. Do not store directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces.
1.4.2.2 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil.
1.4.2.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
1.5 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS
1.5.1 Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 32 degrees Celsius.
1.6 TIME LIMITATIONS
1.6.1 Sod
Place sod a maximum of thirty six hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SODS
2.1.1 Classification
Nursery grown, certified as classified in the TPI GSS. Machine cut sod at a uniform thickness of 19 mm within a tolerance of 6 mm, excluding top
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 92 23 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
growth and thatch. Each individual sod piece shall be strong enough to support its own weight when lifted by the ends. Broken pads, irregularly shaped pieces, and torn or uneven ends will be rejected. Wood pegs and wire staples for anchorage shall be as recommended by sod supplier.
2.1.2 Purity
Sod species shall be genetically pure, free of weeds, pests, and disease.
2.1.3 Planting Dates
Lay sod from March to May for warm season spring planting and from July to September for cool season fall planting.
2.1.4 Composition
Provide Base-approved sod of the latest season's crop, bearing producer's guaranteed analysis for proportions of grass species. Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged material will be rejected.
2.2 STAKED NETTING
2.2.1 Polypropylene Netting
Provide polypropylene netting sufficient to secure the sod during the establishment period from aircraft jet blast (wind speeds up to 400 km/hr).
2.2.2 Stakes
Provide stakes fully degradable by biological activity manufactured from recycled plastic or wood and designed to safely and effectively secure landscaping materials for permanent applications. If plastic stakes are provided, provide product meeting ASTM D6400. The stakes must exhibit ample rigidity to enable being driven into hard ground, with sufficient flexibility to resist shattering.
2.3 TOPSOIL
2.3.1 On-Site Topsoil
Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled "Composition." When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
2.3.2 Off-Site Topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor.
2.3.3 Composition
Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 19 mm, with maximum 3 percent retained on 6 mm screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones,
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 92 23 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
roots, and other debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the following limits:
Silt 25-50 percent
Clay 10-30 percent
Sand 20-35 percent pH 5.5 to 7.0
Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum
2.4 FERTILIZER
2.4.1 Granular Fertilizer
Organic or synthetic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients:
14 percent available nitrogen 14 percent available phosphorus 14 percent available potassium
2.5 WATER
Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no element toxic to plant life.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Extent Of Work
Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners), fertilizing, and sodding of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.2 Soil Preparation
Provide 102 mm of off-site topsoil or on-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer into soil a minimum depth of 100 mm by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer. Remove debris and stones larger than 19 mm in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
3.1.2.1 Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 92 23 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.2 SODDING
3.2.1 Finished Grade and Topsoil
Prior to the commencement of the sodding operation, the Contractor shall verify that finished grades are as indicated on drawings; the placing of topsoil, smooth grading, and compaction requirements have been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
The prepared surface shall be a maximum 25 mm below the adjoining grade of any surfaced area. New surfaces shall be blended to existing areas. The prepared surface shall be completed with a light raking to remove from the surface debris and stones over a minimum 16 mm in any dimension.
3.2.2 Placing
Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein.
3.2.3 Sodding Slopes and Ditches
For slopes 2:1 and greater, lay sod with long edge perpendicular to the contour. For V-ditches and flat bottomed ditches, lay sod with long edge perpendicular to flow of water. Anchor each piece of sod with wood pegs or wire staples maximum 600 mm on center. On slope areas, start sodding at bottom of the slope.
3.2.4 Finishing
After completing sodding, blend edges of sodded area smoothly into surrounding area. Air pockets shall be eliminated and a true and even surface shall be provided. Frayed edges shall be trimmed and holes and missing corners shall be patched with sod.
3.2.5 Rolling
Immediately after sodding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 134 kg per m for each 0.305 m of roller width.
3.2.6 Staked Netting
Lay netting over sodding, pull taut and install a sufficient number of stakes to secure the netting. Provide stakes at least every 1 meter in both directions. Provide a lap of 150 mm in the short direction of the roll and 450 mm between rolls. Extend netting 3 m on to adjacent existing turf.
3.2.7 Watering
Start watering areas sodded as required by daily temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to minimum depth of 150 mm. Run-off, puddling, and wilting shall be prevented. Unless otherwise directed, watering trucks shall not be driven over turf areas. Watering of other adjacent areas or plant material shall be prevented.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 92 23 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use.
3.4 RESTORATION
Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation operations. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 32 92 23 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C76M (2019) Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe (Metric)
ASTM C443M (2012; R 2017) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets (Metric)
ASTM C990 (2009; R 2014) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants
ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D2167 (2015) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D6938 (2017a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 40 00 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SD-07 Certificates
Hydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints
Determination of Density
Post-Installation Inspection Report
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.3.1 Delivery and Storage
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.
1.3.2 Handling
Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not dragged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and shall conform to the requirements specified.
2.1.1 Concrete Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C76M, Class IV.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BEDDING
The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe.
3.1.1 Concrete Pipe Requirements
When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete pipe shall be bedded in granular material minimum 100 mm in depth in trenches with soil foundation. Depth of granular bedding in trenches with rock foundation shall be 13 mm in depth per 300 mm of depth of fill, minimum depth of bedding shall be 200 mm up to maximum depth of 600 mm. The middle third of the granular bedding shall be loosely placed. Bell
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 40 00 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
holes and depressions for joints shall be removed and formed so entire barrel of pipe is uniformly supported. The bell hole and depressions for the joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for properly making the particular type of joint.
3.2 PLACING PIPE
Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or damaged pipe shall not be used. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lifting lugs in vertically elongated pipe shall be placed in the same vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary.
3.2.1 Concrete Pipe
Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.
3.3 JOINTING
3.3.1 Concrete Pipe
3.3.1.1 Flexible Watertight Joints
Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other special installation requirements. Surfaces to receive lubricants, cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe, and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade.
3.4 BACKFILLING
3.4.1 Backfilling Pipe in Trenches
After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 150 mm in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation equal to the midpoint (spring line) of concrete pipe or has reached an elevation of at least 300 mm above the top of the pipe for flexible pipe. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 40 00 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
the compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly. Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or pavements.
3.4.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections
For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 150 mm in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a height of 300 mm above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or 4 m, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 300 mm above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Use select granular material for this entire region of backfill for flexible pipe installations.
3.4.3 Movement of Construction Machinery
When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be repaired or replaced.
3.4.4 Compaction
3.4.4.1 General Requirements
Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels, gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays, silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive soils will show normal moisture-density curves.
3.4.4.2 Minimum Density
Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as specified below.
a. Under airfield and heliport pavements, paved roads, streets, parking areas, and similar-use pavements including adjacent shoulder areas, the density shall be not less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material, up to the elevation where requirements for pavement subgrade materials and compaction shall control.
b. Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 40 00 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
c. Under nontraffic areas, density shall be not less than that of the surrounding material.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.5.1 Tests
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform all testing and retesting at no additional cost to the Government.
3.5.1.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS
Watertight joints shall be tested and shall meet test requirements of paragraph HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS. Rubber gaskets shall comply with the oil resistant gasket requirements of ASTM C443M. Certified copies of test results shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer before gaskets or jointing materials are installed.
3.5.1.1.1 Concrete Pipe
A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as proposed. Only one sample joint of each type needs testing; however, if the sample joint fails because of faulty design or workmanship, an additional sample joint may be tested. During the test period, gaskets or other jointing material shall be protected from extreme temperatures which might adversely affect the performance of such materials. Performance requirements for joints in reinforced and nonreinforced concrete pipe shall conform to ASTM C990 or ASTM C443M.
3.5.1.2 Determination of Density
Testing shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D1557 except that mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2167 or ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted, if necessary, using the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration of the referenced publications. ASTM D6938 results in a wet unit weight of soil and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D6938. Test results shall be furnished the Contracting Officer. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed.
3.5.2 Inspection
3.5.2.1 Post-Installation Inspection
Visually inspect each segment of concrete pipe for alignment, settlement, joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks, buckling, bulging and deflection. An engineer must evaluate all defects to determine if any remediation or repair is required.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 40 00 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.5.2.1.1 Concrete
Cracks with a width greater than 0.25 mm. An engineer must evaluate all pipes with cracks with a width greater than 0.25 mm but less than 2.5 mm to determine if any remediation or repair is required.
3.5.2.1.2 Post-Installation Inspection Report
The deflection results and final post installation inspection report must include: pipe location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector name, deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection and deformation of flexible pipe, inspector notes, condition of joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall damage dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).
3.5.3 Repair Of Defects
3.5.3.1 Inspection
Replace pipe or repair defects indicated in the Post-Installation Inspection Report.
3.5.3.1.1 Concrete
Replace pipes having cracks with a width greater than 2.5 mm.
3.6 PROTECTION
Protect storm drainage piping and adjacent areas from superimposed and external loads during construction.
3.7 WARRANTY PERIOD
Pipe segments found to have defects during the warranty period must be replaced with new pipe and retested.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 40 00 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 33 51 39
MONITORING WELLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C150/C150M (2018) Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM D1785 (2015; E 2018) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D5092 (2016) Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Ground Water Monitoring Wells in Aquifers
ASTM D6725/D6725M (2016) Standard Practice for Direct Push Installation of Prepacked Screen Monitoring Wells in Unconsolidated Aquifers
ASTM F480 (2014) Thermoplastic Well Casing Pipe and Couplings Made in Standard Dimension Ratios (SDR), SCH 40 and SCH 80
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 600-4-89-034 (1990) Handbook of Suggested Practices for the Design and Installation of Groundwater Monitoring Wells
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Ensure each system, including equipment, materials, installation, and performance, is in accordance with local, State, and Federal regulations, ASTM D5092, EPA 600-4-89-034 and DoD policies and standards except as modified herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory. Reference to the "Project Representative" and the "Owner" is interpreted to mean the Contracting Officer. Additional requirements are included under Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
CONTROLS.
1.2.1 Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer 7 days prior to drilling.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Installation Plan; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Well Construction Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Well Casing; G
Well Screen; G
Neat Cement Grout; G
Bentonite; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Installation Diagram; G
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Required Drawings
Submit well construction drawings showing components and details of well casing, well screen, filter pack, annular seal, and associated items.
1.4.2 Installation Plan
Submit a plan, describing the drilling methods, sampling, and monitoring well construction and well development 7 calendar days prior to beginning drilling operations. Mobilization activities may start prior to submittal of the plan.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials in an undamaged condition. Unload and store with minimal handling. Store materials in on-site enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials, and rubber gaskets under cover, out of direct sunlight. Store materials off the ground. Keep insides of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. Replace defective or damaged materials with new materials.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
1.6 PROJECTS/SITE CONDITIONS
Access to each monitoring well site, including any utility clearance, permits, licenses, or other requirements and the payment thereof necessary for execution of the work is the responsibility of the Government.
Obtaining rights-of-entry is the responsibility of the Government. Visit each proposed well location to observe any condition that may hamper transporting equipment or personnel to the site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Construct each monitoring well to allow for the accurate measurement of ground water depths relative to the top of the well riser, by use of electrical, wetted tape, or acoustical methods. The screened interval is that portion of a monitoring well which is directly open to the host aquifer by way of openings in the well screen and indirectly open to the aquifer by way of the filter pack (or other permeable material) extending continuously below and/or above the screen.
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Well Casing
2.2.1.1 PVC Pipe
Use ASTM F480, Type 1, Grade 1, PVC 12454, NSF wc or NSF pw, Schedule 40 pipe, with flush threaded joint fittings. Wrap threaded joints with fluoropolymer tape, and provide with nitrile O-ring gaskets.
2.2.2 Well Screen
2.2.2.1 PVC Screens
Provide a well screen consisting of new commercially fabricated flush-joint threaded 100 mm nominal internal diameter polyvinyl chloride (PVC) schedule 40 slotted, non-clogging design. Use screens conforming to ASTM D1785, PVC 1120, NSF wc or NSF pw, Schedule 40, screen, machine-slotted construction, flush threaded joint ends. Ensure slots are even in width, length, and separation. Provide schedule 40 end fittings on the screen. Provide required fittings conforming to ASTM F480, flush thread male by female. Provide a screen slot size 0.25 mm, and screen length of 1.5 meters. Seal the bottom section of the screen watertight by means of a flush threaded end cap of the same material as the well screen, within 150 mm of the open portion of the screen.
2.2.2.2 Prepacked Screen Monitoring Wells
Ensure materials and installation of prepacked screen monitoring wells conform to the requirements of ASTM D6725/D6725M.
2.2.3 Annular Sealants
2.2.3.1 Bentonite Seal
Provide powdered, granular, pelletized, or chipped sodium montmorillonite in sealed containers from a commercial source, free of impurities. Ensure
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
pellet size is less than one fifth the diameter of the borehole annular space to prevent bridging. Ensure bentonite base grout is in accordance with ASTM D5092.
If the bentonite seal is located above any borehole fluid levels, place a layer of fine sand at the top of the bentonite seal, to provide an additional barrier to any downward migration of grout.
2.2.3.2 Neat Cement Grout
Provide neat cement grout in accordance with ASTM D5092. Ensure cement is in accordance with ASTM C150/C150M. Quick setting admixtures are not allowed. Do not use drilling mud or cuttings as a sealing material.
2.2.3.3 Cement And Bentonite Grout
Provide cement grout with a mixture of a maximum of 26 liters of approved water per 42.6 kg bag of portland cement, conforming to ASTM C150/C150M, Type I. Add no more than 5 percent by weight of bentonite powder to reduce shrinkage and hold the cement in suspension prior to the grout set. Use sodium bentonite powder and/or granules for high-solids bentonite grout.
2.2.4 Bottom Plugs
Provide a flush threaded solid plug at the bottom of the well. Ensure plug material is the same as the well casing to which it is attached. Wrap joints with fluoropolymer tape and provide nitrile O-ring gaskets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to commencement of work. Well locations are as indicated.
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install the well in accordance with ASTM D5092 and EPA 600-4-89-034, and as indicated on the well construction drawings submitted by the CPC and approved by the Contracting Officer.
Ensure the borehole is stable and verified straight before beginning installation.
3.1.1 Drilling Method
a. Use a drilling method which prevents the collapse of formation material against the well screen and casing during installation of the well. Size the inside diameter of any temporary casing used sufficient to allow accurate placement of the screen, riser, centralizer, filter pack, seal and grout.
b. The use of drilling aids such as bentonite, other clay-based agents, or any other foreign matter capable of affecting the characteristics of the ground water is prohibited. Ensure any drilling fluid additive used is inorganic in nature. Grease or oil on drill rods, casing, or auger joints are not permitted; however, PTFE tape or vegetable oil (in solid phase form) are acceptable. Submit manufacturer's data, if available, including analytical test results of the additive, if not a part of the manufacturer's data.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
c. Provide a drill rig free from leaks of fuel, hydraulic fluid, and oil which may contaminate the borehole, ground surface or drill tools. During construction of the wells, use precautions to prevent tampering with the well or entrance of foreign material. Prevent runoff from entering the well during construction. If there is an interruption in work, such as overnight shutdown or inclement weather, close the well opening with a watertight uncontaminated cover. Secure the cover in place or weighted down so that it cannot be removed except with the aid of the drilling equipment or through the use of drill tools.
Advance borehole using conventional 250 mm hollow-stem auger drilling methods. If an alternate drilling method is required, submit justification for a boring method change to the Contracting Officer, and receive approval for the change granted prior to drilling.
3.1.2 Borehole Diameter and Depth
Provide sufficient diameter in borings for monitoring well installation to allow at least 50 mm of annular space between the borehole wall and all sides of the centered riser pipe and screen. Determine depths of individual borings as indicated on the drawings.
3.1.3 Screen, Well Casing And Riser Pipe Placement
Locate well screens as indicated. Ensure the length of the screen is as indicated. Distribute slotted openings uniformly around the circumference of the screen. Ensure the open areas approach the formation's natural porosity.
a. Provide the monitoring well screen in length as shown on the drawings, with specified bottom cap securely attached, set to the appropriate depth.
b. Join the screen and well casing and riser pipe sections by flush threaded watertight joints and fastenings. Solvent glue or set screws are not permitted.
When the assembly has been installed at the appropriate elevation, adequately secure the assembly to preclude movement during placement of filter packs and annular seals. Cap the top of the well casing during filter pack placement.
3.1.4 Bentonite Seal
3.1.4.1 Bentonite Pellets
Pouring of pellets is acceptable in shallow boreholes less than 12 meters. In order to provide accurate measurement of bentonite pellet thickness in the well boring, tamp the pellet seal during measurement. If not placed in lifts, allow the seal a minimum hydration time of three hours, unless the manufacturer recommends a longer hydration time.
3.1.4.2 Bentonite Chips
Adequate annular space is required in the use of bentonite chips to reduce the risk of bridging. Chips are preferable to use over pellets when installing a seal in a deep water column. In order to provide accurate measurement of bentonite chip seal thickness in the well boring, tamp the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
seal during measurement. If not placed in lifts, allow the seal a minimum hydration time double the hydration time for pellets.
3.1.4.3 Bentonite Seal Thickness And Replacement
Place a minimum 1 m thick hydrated bentonite seal on top of the filter pack. Control speed of bentonite placement to prevent bridging of pellets or chips, or segregation of slurry. Place Bentonite chips and pellets in lifts of 0.15 to 0.30 m with each lift allowed to hydrate for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to placing the next lift. If not placed in lifts, the minimum hydration time for pellets is 3 hours, unless manufacturer recommendations for hydration are longer. The hydration time for chips can require twice the time required for pellets. Directly measure the depth to the top of the bentonite seal and record immediately after placement, without allowance for swelling. Add water to the annular space as directed by the geologist in charge to ensure complete hydration of the bentonite. If the bentonite seal is located above any borehole fluid levels, place a 300 mm layer of fine sand at the top of the bentonite seal.
3.1.5 Protective Cover Placement
3.1.5.1 At-Grade Completions
Provide a locking well cap on top of the well casing, which terminates inside the vault as indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
3.2.1 Site Cleanup
After completion of the work, remove tools, appliances, surplus materials, temporary drainage, rubbish, and debris incidental to work. Backfill excavation and vehicular ruts and dress to conform with the existing landscape or terrain. Repair or replace utilities, structures, roads, fences, or any other pre-existing item damaged due to negligence. Accomplish repair or replacement prior to completion of this contract.
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
3.3.1 Well Acceptance
Properly construct, install, develop, and test all wells according to the requirements of this specification so that they are suitable for the intended purpose. If installed wells are not functional or not in accordance with these specifications, the Contracting Officer will disapprove the well and direct repair or replacement, and instruct abandonment of the disapproved well in accordance with this specification.
3.3.2 Documentation Reports
Submit reports for well construction and development. Establish and maintain documentation reports for well construction and development to record the desired information and to assure compliance with contract requirements, including, but not limited to: well construction diagrams.
3.3.2.1 Installation Diagrams
Submit as-built installation diagram for each monitoring well installed within 30 working days of the completion of the installation. The well
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
will not be accepted by the Contracting Officer before the installation diagrams are received. Clearly illustrate in the diagram the as-built condition of the well and include, but do not limit to the following items:
a. Name of the project and site.
b. Well identification number.
c. Name of driller and name and signature of the geologist preparing diagram.
d. Date of well installation.
e. Description of material from which the well is constructed, including well casing and riser pipe and screen material, centralizer composition, if used, diameter and schedule of casing and screen, gradation of filter pack, lithologic description, brand name (if any), source, and processing method, and method of placement of the filter pack, bentonite seal type (pellets, granules, chips, or slurry), grout type (cement or high-solids bentonite) and type of protective cover (protective casing or flush-to-ground).
f. Total depth of well.
g. Nominal hole diameter.
h. Depth to top and bottom of screen, and filter pack.
i. Depth to top and bottom of any seals installed in the well boring (grout or bentonite).
j. Type of cement and/or bentonite used, mix ratios of grout, method of placement and quantities used.
k. Elevations/depths/heights of key features of the well, such as top of well casing and riser pipe, top and bottom of protective casing, ground surface, the depth of maximum frost penetration (frost line), bottom of well screen, top and bottom of filter pack, and top and bottom of seal.
l. Other pertinent construction details, such as slot size and percent open area of screen, type of screen, and manufacturer of screen.
m. Well location by coordinates. Include a plan sheet showing the coordinate system used and the location of each well. A plan sheet is not required for each well installation diagram; multiple wells may be shown on the same sheet.
n. Static water level upon completion of the well.
o. Special problems and their resolutions; e.g., grout in wells, lost casing, or screens, bridging, etc.
p. Description of surface completion.
-- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 51 39 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
SECTION 33 71 02
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
In addition to the U.S. standards and criteria referenced in this specification section, certain Japanese standards have been determined by the Contracting Officer to be acceptable substitutes to the listed U.S. Standards. See Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS for a list of acceptable Japanese standards and information on the use of Japanese standards not explicitly listed in Section 01 11 00.00 10 GENERAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO HB-17 (2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2005, 17th Edition) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B3 (2013) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B8 (2011; R 2017) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
ASTM B496 (2016) Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors
ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C478M (2018) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric)
ASTM C857 (2016) Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
ASTM C990M (2009; R 2014) Standard Specification for
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 1 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants (Metric)
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 48 (2009) Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV
IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System
IEEE 400.2 (2013) Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems Using Very Low Frequency (VLF)
IEEE 404 (2012) Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500,000 V
IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS (2017; Errata 2017) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C119.1 (2016) Electric Connectors - Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts
NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 9 (2004) Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 (2012) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2; TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6; TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 2 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA 17-14; TIA 17-15; TIA 17-16; TIA 17-17 ) National Electrical Code
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)
TIA-758 (2012b) Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
RUS Bull 1751F-644 (2002) Underground Plant Construction
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
CID A-A-60005 (Basic; Notice 2) Frames, Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump And Catch Basin, Manhole
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 83 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 94 (2013; Reprint Sep 2017) UL Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances
UL 467 (2013; Reprint Jun 2017) UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B (2018) UL Standard for Safety Wire Connectors
UL 510 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape
UL 514B (2012; Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings
UL 651 (2011; Reprint Nov 2018) UL Standard for Safety Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
UL 854 (2004; Reprint Nov 2014) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables
UL 1072 (2006; Reprint Jun 2013) Medium-Voltage Power Cables
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 3 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
b. In the text of this section, the words conduit and duct are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.
c. In the text of this section, "medium voltage cable splices," and "medium voltage cable joints" are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Precast underground structures; G
SD-03 Product Data
Medium voltage cable; G
Medium voltage cable joints; G
Medium voltage cable terminations; G
Precast concrete structures; G
Sealing Material
Pulling-In Irons
Manhole frames and covers; G
Handhole frames and covers; G
Cable supports (racks, arms and insulators); G
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Acceptance Checks and Tests
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Precast Underground Structures
Submittal required for each type used. Provide calculations and drawings for precast manholes and handholes bearing the seal of a registered professional engineer including:
a. Material description (i.e., f'c and Fy)
b. Manufacturer's printed assembly and installation instructions
c. Design calculations
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 4 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
d. Reinforcing shop drawings
e. Plans and elevations showing opening and pulling-in iron locations and details
1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
1.4.3 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.4.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.
1.4.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable, unless specified otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS
2.1.1 Rigid Metal Conduit
UL 6.
2.1.2 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial and Riser Applications
UL 651 and NEMA TC 2, EPC-40.
2.1.3 Plastic Duct for Concrete Encasement
Provide Type EPC-40 per UL 651 and NEMA TC 2.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 5 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.1.4 Duct Sealant
UL 94, Class HBF. Provide high-expansion urethane foam duct sealant that expands and hardens to form a closed, chemically and water resistant, rigid structure. Sealant must be compatible with common cable and wire jackets and capable of adhering to metals, plastics and concrete. Sealant must be capable of curing in temperature ranges of 2 degrees C to 35 degrees C. Cured sealant must withstand temperature ranges of -29 degrees C to 93 degrees C without loss of function.
2.1.5 Fittings
2.1.5.1 Metal Fittings
UL 514B.
2.1.5.2 PVC Conduit Fittings
UL 514B, UL 651.
2.1.5.3 PVC Duct Fittings
NEMA TC 9.
2.2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, including listing requirements. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable. Service entrance conductors must conform to UL 854, type USE.
2.2.1 Conductor Types
Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHN/THWN unless otherwise noted. Conductors 16 square mm and smaller must be solid. Conductors 10 square mm and larger must be stranded. All conductors must be copper.
2.2.2 Conductor Material
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, wires in conduit, other than service entrance, must be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83. Copper conductors must be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8.
2.2.3 Jackets
Multiconductor cables must have an overall PVC outer jacket.
2.2.4 Cable Marking
Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length.
Identify each cable by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and each terminal. Each tag must contain the following information; cable
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 6 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification.
Conductors must be color coded. Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors, plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, heat shrink type sleeves,or colored electrical tape. Control circuit terminations must be properly identified. Color must be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals must be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows:
a. 208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
b. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS
Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface. Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
a. For use with copper conductors: UL 486A-486B.
2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES
Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply with ANSI C119.1.
2.4.1 Heat Shrinkable Splice
Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
2.4.2 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice
Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation. The installation must not require heat or flame, or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive. It must be designed for use with inline compression type connectors, or indoor, outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.
2.5 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE
Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted. Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length. Wires and cables manufactured
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 7 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable. Provide single conductor type cables unless otherwise indicated.
2.5.1 Cable Configuration
Provide Type MV cable, conforming to NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 and UL 1072. Provide cables manufactured for use in duct applications. Cable must be rated 6 kV.
2.5.2 Conductor Material
Provide soft drawn copper cables complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 for regular concentric and compressed stranding or ASTM B496 for compact stranding.
2.5.3 Insulation
Provide tree-retardant cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene (XLP) insulation conforming to the requirements of NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639.
2.5.4 Shielding
Cables rated for 2 kV and above must have a semiconducting conductor shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper tape shield for each phase.
2.5.5 Neutrals
Neutral conductors must be copper, employing the same insulation and jacket materials as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation rating is acceptable.
2.5.6 Jackets
Provide cables with a PVC jacket.
2.6 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS
IEEE 48 Class 1; of the molded elastomer, prestretched elastomer, or heat-shrinkable elastomer. Acceptable elastomers are track-resistant silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene compounds, such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer. Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations, when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings. Terminations, where required, must be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding, metallic sheath, or armor. Terminations must be provided in a kit, including: skirts, stress control terminator, ground clamp, connectors, lugs, and complete instructions for assembly and installation. Terminations must be the product of one manufacturer, suitable for the type, diameter, insulation class and level, and materials of the cable terminated. Do not use separate parts of copper or copper alloy in contact with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or installation of the terminator.
2.6.1 Cold-Shrink Type
Terminator must be a one-piece design, utilizing the manufacturer's latest
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 8 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
technology, where high-dielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber. Termination must not require heat or flame for installation. Termination kit must contain all necessary materials (except for the lugs). Termination must be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor and outdoor locations and must resist ultraviolet rays and oxidative decomposition.
2.6.2 Heat Shrinkable Type
Terminator must consist of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable polymeric construction stress relief tubing and environmentally sealed outer covering that is nontracking, resists heavy atmospheric contaminants, ultra violet rays and oxidative decomposition. Provide heat shrinkable sheds or skirts of the same material. Termination must be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor or outdoor locations.
2.7 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS
Provide joints (splices) in accordance with IEEE 404 suitable for the rated voltage, insulation level, insulation type, and construction of the cable. Joints must be certified by the manufacturer for waterproof, submersible applications. Upon request, supply manufacturer's design qualification test report in accordance with IEEE 404. Connectors for joint must be tin-plated electrolytic copper, having ends tapered and having center stops to equalize cable insertion.
2.7.1 Heat-Shrinkable Joint
Consists of a uniform cross-section heat-shrinkable polymeric construction with a linear stress relief system, a high dielectric strength insulating material, and an integrally bonded outer conductor layer for shielding. Replace original cable jacket with a heavy-wall heat-shrinkable sleeve with hot-melt adhesive coating.
2.7.2 Cold-Shrink Rubber-Type Joint
Joint must be of a cold shrink design that does not require any heat source for its installation. Splice insulation and jacket must be of a one-piece factory formed cold shrink sleeve made of black EPDM rubber. Splice must be packaged three splices per kit, including complete installation instructions.
2.8 TAPE
2.8.1 Insulating Tape
UL 510, plastic insulating tape, capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C.
2.8.2 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
2.8.3 Fireproofing Tape
Provide tape composed of a flexible, conformable, unsupported intumescent elastomer. Tape must be not less than 0.762 mm thick, noncorrosive to
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 9 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
cable sheath, self-extinguishing, noncombustible, adhesive-free, and must not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage, and fungus.
2.9 PULL ROPE
Plastic or flat pull line (bull line) having a minimum tensile strength of 890 N.
2.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING
2.10.1 Driven Ground Rods
Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than 19 mm in diameter by 3.1 m in length. Sectional type rods may be used for rods 6 m or longer.
2.10.2 Grounding Conductors
Stranded-bare copper conductors must conform to ASTM B8, Class B, soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Solid-bare copper conductors must conform to ASTM B1 for sizes 10 square mm and smaller. Insulated conductors must be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors must be rated no more than 600 volts. Aluminum is not acceptable.
2.11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. In addition, provide concrete for encasement of underground ducts with 20 MPa minimum 28-day compressive strength. Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts must be 30 MPa minimum 28-day compressive strength unless specified otherwise.
2.12 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Provide precast concrete underground structures or standard type cast-in-place manhole types as indicated, conforming to ASTM C857 and ASTM C478M. Top, walls, and bottom must consist of reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom must be of monolithic concrete construction. Locate duct entrances and windows near the corners of structures to facilitate cable racking. Covers must fit the frames without undue play. Form steel and iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Install a pulling-in iron in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. Cable racks, including rack arms and insulators, must be adequate to accommodate the cable.
2.12.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures
Concrete must conform to Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.12.2 Precast Concrete Structures, Risers and Tops
Precast concrete underground structures may be provided in lieu of
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 10 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
cast-in-place subject to the requirements specified below. Precast units must be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete products, including precast manholes.
2.12.2.1 General
Precast concrete structures must have the same accessories and facilities as required for cast-in-place structures. Likewise, precast structures must have plan area and clear heights not less than those of cast-in-place structures. Concrete materials and methods of construction must be the same as for cast-in-place concrete construction, as modified herein. Slope in floor may be omitted provided precast sections are poured in reinforced steel forms. Concrete for precast work must have a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 30 MPa. Structures may be precast to the design and details indicated for cast-in-place construction, precast monolithically and placed as a unit, or structures may be assembled sections, designed and produced by the manufacturer in accordance with the requirements specified. Structures must be identified with the manufacturer's name embedded in or otherwise permanently attached to an interior wall face.
2.12.2.2 Design for Precast Structures
In the absence of detailed on-site soil information, design for the following soil parameters/site conditions:
a. Angle of Internal Friction (phi) = 0.523 rad
b. Unit Weight of Soil (Dry) = 1760 kg/m3, (Saturated) = 2080 kg/m3
c. Coefficient of Lateral Earth Pressure (Ka) = 0.33
d. Ground Water Level = 915 mm below ground elevation
e. Vertical design loads must include full dead, superimposed dead, and live loads including a 30 percent magnification factor for impact. Live loads must consider all types and magnitudes of vehicular (automotive, industrial, or aircraft) traffic to be encountered. The minimum design vertical load must be for H20 highway loading per AASHTO HB-17.
f. Horizontal design loads must include full geostatic and hydrostatic pressures for the soil parameters, water table, and depth of installation to be encountered. Also, horizontal loads imposed by adjacent structure foundations, and horizontal load components of vertical design loads, including impact, must be considered, along with a pulling-in iron design load of 26,700 N.
g. Each structural component must be designed for the load combination and positioning resulting in the maximum shear and moment for thatparticular component.
h. Design must also consider the live loads induced in the handling, installation, and backfilling of the manholes. Provide lifting devices to ensure structural integrity during handling and installation.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 11 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.12.2.3 Construction
Structure top, bottom, and wall must be of a uniform thickness of not less than 150 mm. Thin-walled knock-out panels for designed or future duct bank entrances are not permitted. Provide quantity, size, and location of duct bank entrance windows as directed, and cast completely open by the precaster. Size of windows must exceed the nominal duct bank envelope dimensions by at least 305 mm vertically and horizontally to preclude in-field window modifications made necessary by duct bank misalignment. However, the sides of precast windows must be a minimum of 150 mm from the inside surface of adjacent walls, floors, or ceilings. Form the perimeter of precast window openings to have a keyed or inward flared surface to provide a positive interlock with the mating duct bank envelope. Provide welded wire fabric reinforcing through window openings for in-field cutting and flaring into duct bank envelopes. Provide additional reinforcing steel comprised of at least two No. 4 bars around window openings.
2.12.2.4 Joints
Provide tongue-and-groove joints on mating edges of precast components. Shiplap joints are not allowed. Design joints to firmly interlock adjoining components and to provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic strip conforming to ASTM C990M. Install sealing material in strict accordance with the sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide waterproofing at conduit/duct entrances into structures, and where access frame meets the top slab, provide continuous grout seal.
2.12.3 Manhole Frames and Covers
Provide cast iron frames and covers for manholes conforming to CID A-A-60005. Cast the words "ELECTRIC" or "TELECOMMUNICATIONS" in the top face of power and telecommunications manhole covers, respectively.
2.12.4 Handhole Frames and Covers
Frames and covers of steel must be welded by qualified welders in accordance with standard commercial practice. Steel covers must be rolled-steel floor plate having an approved antislip surface.
2.13 CABLE SUPPORTS (RACKS, ARMS, AND INSULATORS)
The metal portion of racks and arms must be zinc-coated after fabrication.
2.13.1 Cable Rack Stanchions
The wall bracket or stanchion must be 100 mm by approximately 38 mm by 4.76 mm channel steel, or 100 mm by approximately 25 mm glass-reinforced nylon with recessed bolt mounting holes, 1220 mm long (minimum) in manholes. Slots for mounting cable rack arms must be spaced at 200 mm intervals.
2.13.2 Rack Arms
Cable rack arms must be steel or malleable iron or glass reinforced nylon and must be of the removable type. Rack arm length must be a minimum of 200 mm and a maximum of 305 mm.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 12 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
2.13.3 Insulators
Insulators for metal rack arms must be dry-process glazed porcelain. Insulators are not required for nylon arms.
2.14 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULLBOXES
Provide tags for each power cable located in manholes. The tags must be polyethylene. Do not provide handwritten letters. The first position on the power cable tag must denote the voltage. The second through sixth positions on the tag must identify the circuit. The next to last position must denote the phase of the circuit and include the Greek "phi" symbol. The last position must denote the cable size. As an example, a tag could have the following designation: "11.5 NAS 1-8(Phase A)500," denoting that the tagged cable is on the 11.5kV system circuit number NAS 1-8, underground, Phase A, sized at 500 kcmil.
2.14.1 Polyethylene Cable Tags
Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 22.4 MPa; and that are 2 millimeter thick (minimum), non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 77 degrees C. Provide 1.3 mm (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties must have a minimum loop tensile strength of 778.75 N. The cable tags must have black block letters, numbers, and symbols 25 mm high on a yellow background. Letters, numbers, and symbols must not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable. In addition to these requirements, install telecommunications in accordance with TIA-758 and RUS Bull 1751F-644.
3.2 CABLE INSPECTION
Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals prior to installation. If end seal is broken, remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
Provide standard type cast-in-place construction as specified herein and as indicated, or precast construction as specified herein. Horizontal concrete surfaces of floors must have a smooth trowel finish. Cure concrete by applying two coats of white pigmented membrane forming-curing compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, except that precast concrete may be steam cured. Curing compound must conform to ASTM C309. Locate duct entrances and windows in the center of end walls (shorter) and near the corners of sidewalls (longer) to facilitate cable racking and splicing. Covers for underground structures must fit the frames without undue play. Steel and iron must be
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 13 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings must be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance. Exposed metal must have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide necessary lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Manhole locations, as indicated, are approximate. Coordinate exact manhole locations with other utilities and finished grading and paving.
3.3.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures
Construct walls on a footing of cast-in-place concrete except that precast concrete base sections may be used for precast concrete manhole risers.
3.3.2 Precast Concrete Construction
Set commercial precast structures on 150 mm of level, 90 percent compacted granular fill, 19 mm to 25 mm size, extending 305 mm beyond the structure on each side. Compact granular fill by a minimum of four passes with a plate type vibrator. Installation must additionally conform to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.3 Pulling-In Irons
Provide steel bars bent as indicated, and cast in the walls and floors. Alternatively, pipe sleeves may be precast into the walls and floors where required to accept U-bolts or other types of pulling-in devices possessing the strengths and clearances stated herein. The final installation of pulling-in devices must be made permanent. Cover and seal exterior projections of thru-wall type pulling-in devices with an appropriate protective coating. In the floor the irons must be a minimum of 150 mm from the edge of the sump, and in the walls the irons must be located within 150 mm of the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window in the opposite wall. However, the pulling-in iron must not be located within 150 mm of an adjacent interior surface, or duct or precast window located within the same wall as the iron. If a pulling-in iron cannot be located directly opposite the corresponding duct bank or precast window due to this clearance limitation, locate the iron directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window the minimum distance required to preserve the 150 mm clearance previously stated. In the case of directly opposing precast windows, pulling-in irons consisting of a 915 mm length of No. 5 reinforcing bar, formed into a hairpin, may be cast-in-place within the precast windows simultaneously with the end of the corresponding duct bank envelope. Irons installed in this manner must be positioned directly in line with, or when not possible, directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern entering the opposite wall, while maintaining a minimum clear distance of 75 mm from any edge of the cast-in-place duct bank envelope or any individual duct. Pulling-in irons must have a clear projection into the structure of approximately 100 mm and must be designed to withstand a minimum pulling-in load of 26,700 N. Irons must be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.
3.3.4 Cable Racks, Arms and Insulators
Cable racks, arms and insulators must be sufficient to accommodate the cables. Space racks in power manholes not more than 915 mm apart, and provide each manhole wall with a minimum of two racks. Space racks in signal manholes not more than 420 mm apart with the end rack being no further than 305 mm from the adjacent wall. Methods of anchoring cable
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 14 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
racks must be as follows:
a. Provide a 15 mm diameter by 125 mm long anchor bolt with 75 mm foot cast in structure wall with 50 mm protrusion of threaded portion of bolt into structure. Provide 15 mm steel square head nut on each anchor bolt. Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating immediately prior to installing nuts.
b. Provide concrete channel insert with a minimum load rating of 1192 kg per meter. Insert channel must be steel of the same length as "vertical rack channel;" channel insert must be cast flush in structure wall. Provide 15 mm steel nuts in channel insert to receive 15 mm diameter by 75 mm long steel, square head anchor bolts.
c. Provide concrete "spot insert" at each anchor bolt location, cast flush in structure wall. Each insert must have minimum 365 kg load rating. Provide 15 mm diameter by 75 mm long steel, square head anchor bolt at each anchor point. Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating immediately prior to installing bolts.
3.3.5 Field Painting
Cast-iron frames and covers not buried in concrete or masonry must be cleaned of mortar, rust, grease, dirt and other deleterious materials, and given a coat of bituminous paint.
3.4 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS
3.4.1 Requirements
Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary. Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated. Provide a 100 square mm bare copper grounding conductor above medium-voltage distribution duct banks. Bond bare copper grounding conductor to ground rings (loops) in all manholes and to ground rings (loops) at all equipment slabs (pads). Route grouding conductor into manholes with the duct bank (sleeving is not required). Ducts must have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings, laid with a minimum slope of 75 mm per 30 m. Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes. Provide ducts with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in structures.
Perform changes in ductbank direction as follows:
a. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable.
b. The minimum manufactured bend radius must be 450 mm for ducts of less than 80 mm diameter, and 900 mm for ducts 80 mm or greater in diameter.
c. As an exception to the bend radius required above, provide field manufactured longsweep bends having a minimum radius of 7.6 m for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically, using a combination of curved and straight sections. Maximum manufactured curved sections: 30 degrees.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 15 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.4.2 Treatment
Ducts must be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. Field cuts requiring tapers must be made with proper tools and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer must be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape. Ducts must be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances. Ducts must be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic ducts must be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun.
3.4.3 Conduit Cleaning
As each conduit run is completed, for conduit sizes 75 mm and larger, draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 305 mm long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit. After which, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs. For conduit sizes less than 75 mm, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs.
3.4.4 Multiple Conduits
Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 75 mm. Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly must consist of base spacers, intermediate spacers, ties, and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly. Install spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 3050 mm of conduit assembly.
3.4.5 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope
New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs on each end. Plugs must contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having 915 mm of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits.
3.4.6 Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement
Depths to top of the conduit must be not less than 610 mm below finished grade. Provide not less than 75 mm clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench. Grade bottom of trench smooth; where rock, soft spots, or sharp-edged materials are encountered, excavate the bottom for an additional 75 mm, fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles, that would be retained on a 6.25 mm sieve. The first 150 mm layer of backfill cover must be sand compacted as previously specified. The rest of the excavation must be backfilled and compacted in 75 to 150 mm layers. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.4.6.1 Encasement Under Roads and Structures
Under roads, paved areas, install conduits in concrete encasement of rectangular cross-section providing a minimum of 75 mm concrete cover around ducts. Concrete encasement must extend at least 1525 mm beyond the
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 16 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
edges of paved areas and roads. Depths to top of the concrete envelope must be not less than 610 mm below finished grade.
3.4.7 Duct Encased in Concrete
Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in concrete. Depths to top of the concrete envelope must be not less than 450 mm below finished grade, except under roads and pavement, concrete envelope must be not less than 610 mm below finished grade. Do not mix different kinds of conduit in any one duct bank. Concrete encasement surrounding the bank must be rectangular in cross-section and must provide at least 75 mm of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 75 mm. Before pouring concrete, anchor duct bank assemblies to prevent the assemblies from floating during concrete pouring. Anchoring must be done by driving reinforcing rods adjacent to duct spacer assemblies and attaching the rods to the spacer warning tape as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.4.7.1 Connections to Manholes
Duct bank envelopes connecting to underground structures must be flared to have enlarged cross-section at the manhole entrance to provide additional shear strength. Dimensions of the flared cross-section must be larger than the corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 300 mm in each direction. Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the underground structure must be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a positive interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the structure. Use vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to assure a seal between the envelope and the wall of the structure.
3.4.7.2 Connections to Existing Underground Structures
For duct bank connections to existing structures, break the structure wall out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in the structure wall. Cut steel and extend into the duct bank envelope. Chip the perimeter surface of the duct bank opening to form a key or flared surface, providing a positive connection with the duct bank envelope.
3.4.7.3 Connections to Existing Concrete Pads
For duct bank connections to concrete pads, break an opening in the pad out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad. Cut the steel and extend into the duct bank envelope. Chip out the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct bank envelope.
3.4.7.4 Connections to Existing Ducts
Where connections to existing duct banks are indicated, excavate the banks to the maximum depth necessary. Cut off the banks and remove loose concrete from the conduits before new concrete-encased ducts are installed. Provide a reinforced concrete collar, poured monolithically with the new duct bank, to take the shear at the joint of the duct banks.
3.4.7.5 Partially Completed Duct Banks
During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank, prevent debris such as mud, and, and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 610 mm
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 17 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
back into the envelope and a minimum of 610 mm beyond the end of the envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in each corner, 75 mm from the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately 305 mm apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring.
3.4.8 Duct Sealing
Seal all electrical penetrations for radon mitigation, maintaining integrity of the vapor barrier, and to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.5 CABLE PULLING
Test existing duct lines with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove foreign material before pulling cables. Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Use flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct runs. Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions, including turnups into switches, transformers, switchgear, switchboards, and other enclosures. Cable with tape shield must have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable. If basket-grip type cable-pulling devices are used to pull cable in place, cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating.
3.5.1 Cable Lubricants
Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables.
3.6 CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations, but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. Form cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and support on brackets and cable insulators. Support cable splices in underground structures by racks on each side of the splice. Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the spliced sheath. Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks, leaving top space open for future cables, except as otherwise indicated for existing installations. Provide one spare three-insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure.
3.6.1 Cable Tag Installation
Install cable tags in each manhole as specified, including each splice. Tag wire and cable provided by this contract. Install cable tags over the fireproofing, if any, and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes.
3.7 CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN PARALLEL
Conductors must be grouped such that each conduit of a parallel run contains 1 Phase A conductor, 1 Phase B conductor, 1 Phase C conductor, and 1 neutral conductor.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 18 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.8 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING
Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer. Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set. Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, or aboveground termination pedestals.
3.9 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS
Make terminations in accordance with the written instruction of the termination kit manufacturer.
3.10 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS
Provide power cable joints (splices) suitable for continuous immersion in water. Make joints only in accessible locations in manholes or handholes by using materials and methods in accordance with the written instructions of the joint kit manufacturer.
3.10.1 Joints in Shielded Cables
Cover the joined area with metallic tape, or material like the original cable shield and connect it to the cable shield on each side of the splice. Provide a bare copper ground connection brought out in a watertight manner and grounded to the manhole grounding loop as part of the splice installation. Ground conductors, connections, and rods must be as specified elsewhere in this section. Wire must be trained to the sides of the enclosure to prevent interference with the working area.
3.11 CABLE END CAPS
Cable ends must be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end caps. Cables ends must be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The caps must remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated. Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at all times will be rejected.
3.12 FIREPROOFING OF CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
Fireproof wire and cables which will carry current at 2200 volts or more in underground structures.
3.12.1 Fireproofing Tape
Tightly wrap strips of fireproofing tape around each cable spirally in half-lapped wrapping. Install tape in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.13 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 19 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.13.1 Grounding Electrodes
Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 150 mm, installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded. If the specified ground resistance is not met, an additional ground rod must be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed not less than 20 m from the first rod). Should the resultant (combined) resistance exceed the specified resistance, measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
3.13.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies must be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.13.3 Grounding Conductors
Provide bare grounding conductors, except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors. Ground cable sheaths, cable shields, conduit, and equipment with 14 square mm. Ground other noncurrent-carrying metal parts and equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment. Ground metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided, copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of 14 square mm. Provide direct connections to the grounding conductor with 600 v insulated, full-size conductor for each grounded neutral of each feeder circuit, which is spliced within the manhole.
3.13.4 Manhole Grounding
Loop a 100 square mm grounding conductor around the interior perimeter, approximately 305 mm above finished floor. Secure the conductor to the manhole walls at intervals not exceeding 914 mm. Connect the conductor to the manhole grounding electrode with 100 square mm conductor. Connect all incoming 100 square mm grounding conductors to the ground loop adjacent to the point of entry into the manhole. Bond the ground loop to all cable shields, metal cable racks, and other metal equipment with a minimum 14 square mm conductor.
3.14 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 20 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
3.14.1 Reconditioning of Surfaces
3.14.1.1 Unpaved Surfaces
Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct. Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed. Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed. When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area, re-seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding, and provide topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching.
3.14.1.2 Paving Repairs
Where trenches, pits, or other excavations are made in existing roadways and other areas of pavement where surface treatment of any kind exists, restore such surface treatment or pavement the same thickness and in the same kind as previously existed, except as otherwise specified, and to match and tie into the adjacent and surrounding existing surfaces.
3.15 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.16.1 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.16.1.1 Medium Voltage Cables
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices, and terminators and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with contract plans and specifications.
(3) Inspect for proper shield grounding, cable support, and cable termination.
(4) Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius.
(5) Inspect for proper fireproofing.
(6) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(7) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b. Electrical Tests
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 21 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
(1) Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method. Record ohmic value, resistance values in excess of 10 ohms per 304.8 m of cable must be investigated and justified.
(2) Perform acceptance test on new cables before the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service, including terminations and joints. Perform maintenance test on complete cable system after the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service, including existing cable, terminations, and joints. Tests must be very low frequency (VLF) alternating voltage withstand tests in accordance with IEEE 400.2. VLF test frequency must be 0.05 Hz minimum for a duration of 60 minutes using a sinusoidal waveform. Test voltages must be as follows:
CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE for ACCEPTANCE TESTING
5 kV 10kV rms(peak)
8 kV 13kV rms(peak)
15 kV 20kV rms(peak)
25 kV 31kV rms(peak)
35 kV 44kV rms(peak)
CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE for MAINTENANCE TESTING
5 kV 7kV rms(peak)
8 kV 10kV rms(peak)
15 kV 16kV rms(peak)
25 kV 23kV rms(peak)
35 kV 33kV rms(peak)
3.16.1.2 Low Voltage Cables, 600-Volt
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices and terminations and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with contract plans and specifications.
(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.
(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 22 FY20 P1005 VTOL Pad South 19MC0008
indentation.
(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b. Electrical Tests
(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 1000 volts dc for one minute.
(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection.
3.16.1.3 Grounding System
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.
b. Electrical tests
Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument must be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test. Provide site diagram indicating location of test probes with associated distances, and provide a plot of resistance vs. distance.
3.16.2 Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer must be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.
.... -- End of Section --
W912HV-20-B-0004 SECTION 33 71 02 Page 23